GE Multilin L90

Title Page
GE
Digital Energy
L90 Line Current Differential System

UR Series Instruction Manual
L90 Revision: 5.7x
Manual P/N: 1601-0081-U4 (GEK-113527C)
831776A2.CDR
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
Tel: +1 905 927 7070 Fax: +1 905 927 5098
Internet: http://www.GEDigitalEnergy.com
*1601-0081-U4*
LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
650 Markland Street
ISO 9001
IN
GE Digital Energy
S T ER
GI
ED
RE
E83849
M U LT I L
GE Multilin's Quality Management

System is registered to
ISO9001:2008
QMI # 005094
UL # A3775
Copyright 2015 GE Multilin Inc. All rights reserved.

L90 Line Current Differential System UR Series Instruction Manual revision 5.7x.
FlexLogic, FlexElement, FlexCurve, FlexAnalog, FlexInteger, FlexState, EnerVista,
CyberSentry, HardFiber, Digital Energy, Multilin, and GE Multilin are trademarks
or registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc. This
documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or
in part without the permission of GE Multilin. The content of this manual is for
informational use only and is subject to change without notice.
Part number: 1601-0081-U4 (August 2015)
Addendum
ADDENDUM
This addendum contains information that relates to the L90 Line Current Differential System, version 5.7x. It outlines
items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-113527C (revision U4) that are not included in the current L90 operations.
The following functions and items are not yet available with the current version of the L90 relay:
Signal sources SRC 5 and SRC 6.
Version 4.0x and higher releases of the L90 relay includes new hardware (CPU and CT/VT modules).
The new CPU modules are specified with the following order codes: 9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R, and 9S.
The new CT/VT modules are specified with the following order codes: 8F, 8H 8L, 8N.
The following table maps the relationship between the old CPU and CT/VT modules to the newer versions:
MODULE
OLD
NEW
DESCRIPTION
CPU
9A
9E
RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP)
9C
9G
RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
9D
9H
RS485 and redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
---
9J
RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX
---
9K
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
---
9L
RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX
---
9M
RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX
---
9N
RS485 and 10/100Base-T
---
9P
RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX
---
9R
RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
---
9S
RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch
8A
8F
Standard 4CT/4VT
8C
8H
Standard 8CT
--
8L
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
--
8N
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
CT/VT
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with the new CPUs (9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R, and 9S), and
the old CT/VT modules can only be used with the old CPU modules (9A, 9C, 9D). To prevent any hardware mismatches, the new CPU and CT/VT modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating Attn.: Ensure CPU and
DSP module label colors are the same!. In the event of mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module, the relay
does not function and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error displays.
All other input/output modules are compatible with the new hardware.
With respect to the firmware, firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only compatible with the new CPU and CT/VT modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older CPU and CT/VT modules.
It was discovered that f/w 5.70 to 5.72 Autoreclosure implementation deviates from the logic diagram. Latch shown in
red box below, had some deficiency and is not operating correctly. As a result, it is not blocking AND gate connected to
the AR 3-P/1 RIP path, resulting in the breaker close operation with a AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 timer, when there are two
simultaneous initiation via AR 3-P INIT and via AR 3-P TD INIT paths.
In case of a single initiation via either AR 3-P INIT or via AR 3-P TD INIT, Autoreclosure will execute sequence correctly,
using either AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 or AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 timers correspondingly.
If, however, there are two initiations simultaneously or consequently, Autoreclosure in 5.70-5.72 f/w will issue a close
command via AR 3-P Dead Time 1 timer always, ignoring second initiation.
This is not matching behavior of the operands because in the f/w there is condition to assert one AR RIP operand only.
This is shown in red in the logic diagram below with AND gates, blocking next stage RIP, if previous stage RIP is active.
All Latches in the Autoreclosure function are reset dominant.
SETTING
Function
TIMER
Enabled = 1
Latch
Block
1.25 cycles
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LINE PICKUP OP
EVOLVING FAULT
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR ENABLED
AR DISABLED
OR
AND
SETTING
Breaker Manual Close
AR INITIATE
AND
SETTING
Off = 0
from autoreclose logic sheet 3
Blk Time Upon Man Cls
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR RIP
Latch
0
AND
OR
BKR MANUAL CLOSE

Lockout
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR 1-P RIP
OR
SETTING
1-P Init
Off = 0
AND
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP 1 POLE
SETTINGS
Extend Dead T1
1-P Dead Time 1
SETTING
3-P Init
Off = 0
AND
Dead T1 Extension
OR
OR
SETTING
Latch
OR
3-P Dead Time 1
OR
OR
SETTING
3-P TD Init
AND
Off = 0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP AR INIT 3 POLE
AR 3-P/1 RIP
SETTING
OR
AND
0
AND
Off = 0
SETTING
Bkr 1 Pole Open
SETTING
AND
OR
Off = 0
3-P Dead Time 2
BKR ONE POLE OPEN
OR
OR
SETTING
Bkr 3 Pole Open
OR
Latch
AND
OR
Off = 0
AND
CLOSE
AND
AND
OR
SHOT COUNT = 1
OR
SETTING
3-P Dead Time 3
OR
from sheet 2
OR
AND
SHOT COUNT = 2
BKR 3 POLE OPEN
SETTING
SETTING
AR Initiate Mode
= Protection and CB
OR
3-P Dead Time 4

OR
S
AND
Latch
AND
OR
RESET
CLOSE BKR1 OR BKR2
AND
OR
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR SHOT COUNT > 0
from sheet 2
SHOT COUNT = 3
SETTING
Pause
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR 3P/2 RIP
AR 3P/3 RIP
AR 3P/4 RIP
BKR FAIL TO RECLS
Off = 0
AND
SHOT COUNT = MAX

AND
SETTING
Mode
AND
1 Pole
3 Pole-A
3 Pole-B
OR
Inc Seq Time

OR
AND
AND
OR
TIMER
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE SELECT MULTI-P
SETTING
AND
OR
AND
5 ms
SETTING
Multi P Fault
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR LO
OR
AND
Off = 0
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
RESET
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
AND
OR
AND
TIMER
10 s
0
OR
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR ZONE 1 EXTENT
BKR CLOSED
SETTING
Reset
Off = 0
PROTECTION & CB
EVOLVING FAULT
AR DISABLED
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GETTING STARTED
1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1
1.1.2
CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1

INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-2

HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-3
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-4
IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................................................. 1-4
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5

INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 1-5
CONFIGURING THE L90 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS..................................... 1-6
USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE....................................................... 1-9
CONNECTING TO THE L90 RELAY ............................................................... 1-15
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
MOUNTING AND WIRING............................................................................... 1-16

COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 1-16
FACEPLATE DISPLAY .................................................................................... 1-16
1.5 USING THE RELAY

1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.6
1.5.7
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-17

MENU NAVIGATION ....................................................................................... 1-17
MENU HIERARCHY ........................................................................................ 1-17
RELAY ACTIVATION....................................................................................... 1-17
RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-18
FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-18
COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-19
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-1
FEATURES ........................................................................................................ 2-3
ORDERING........................................................................................................ 2-4
REPLACEMENT MODULES ............................................................................. 2-8
2.2 PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING

2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-11

CHANNEL MONITOR ...................................................................................... 2-12
LOOPBACK TEST ........................................................................................... 2-13
DIRECT TRANSFER TRIPPING ..................................................................... 2-13
2.3 FUNCTIONALITY
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS ................................................ 2-14

METERING AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS ............................................... 2-14
OTHER FUNCTIONS....................................................................................... 2-15
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.9
2.4.10
2.4.11
2.4.12
2.4.13
2.4.14
GE Multilin
PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................. 2-17

USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ........................................................... 2-21
MONITORING .................................................................................................. 2-22
METERING ...................................................................................................... 2-22
INPUTS ............................................................................................................ 2-23
POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................ 2-24
OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................ 2-24
COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 2-26
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-27
ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-27
TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-28
PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-28
APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-29
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 2-29
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3. HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
PANEL CUTOUT ................................................................................................3-1

MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION......................................................3-6
REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT ...............................................................................3-8
3.2 WIRING
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
TYPICAL WIRING ............................................................................................3-10

DIELECTRIC STRENGTH................................................................................3-11
CONTROL POWER..........................................................................................3-11
CT/VT MODULES.............................................................................................3-12
PROCESS BUS MODULES .............................................................................3-14
CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS................................................................3-14
TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................3-22
RS232 FACEPLATE PORT ..............................................................................3-23
CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS.....................................................................3-23
IRIG-B ...............................................................................................................3-26
3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS

3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
3.3.10
DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-28
FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-29
FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-29
G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-30
RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-33
TWO-CHANNEL TWO-CLOCK RS422 INTERFACE.......................................3-35
RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-35
G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-36
IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE................................................................................3-36
C37.94SM INTERFACE ...................................................................................3-39
3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES

3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
4. HUMAN INTERFACES
OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................3-42
MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE..............................3-42
MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS .........................................................3-43
CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE .................3-43
UPLOADING L90 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE..........................................3-46
ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS...................................................3-48
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................4-1
CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1
ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW ................................................................4-1
ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW..........................................................4-3
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
SETTINGS TEMPLATES ...................................................................................4-4

SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS ................................4-8
SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY.....................................................................4-10
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
4.3.8
5. SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
vi
FACEPLATE .....................................................................................................4-13
LED INDICATORS............................................................................................4-14
CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS .......................................................................4-17
DISPLAY...........................................................................................................4-23
KEYPAD ...........................................................................................................4-23
BREAKER CONTROL ......................................................................................4-23
MENUS .............................................................................................................4-24
CHANGING SETTINGS ...................................................................................4-26
SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1

INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-4
INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-5
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
5.2.12
5.2.13
5.2.14
5.2.15
5.2.16
5.2.17
SECURITY ......................................................................................................... 5-8

DISPLAY PROPERTIES.................................................................................. 5-12
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS ............................................................................. 5-14
COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 5-15
MODBUS USER MAP...................................................................................... 5-34
REAL TIME CLOCK......................................................................................... 5-35
FAULT REPORTS ........................................................................................... 5-36
OSCILLOGRAPHY .......................................................................................... 5-38
DATA LOGGER ............................................................................................... 5-40
DEMAND.......................................................................................................... 5-42
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS..................................................................... 5-43
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS ........................................................ 5-46
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ........................................................................... 5-47
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ................................................... 5-49
FLEX STATE PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 5-54
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ....................................................................... 5-55
INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 5-57
5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES

5.3.1
REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION ................................................... 5-58
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP

5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
AC INPUTS ...................................................................................................... 5-59

POWER SYSTEM............................................................................................ 5-60
SIGNAL SOURCES ......................................................................................... 5-61
L90 POWER SYSTEM..................................................................................... 5-64
BREAKERS...................................................................................................... 5-69
DISCONNECT SWITCHES ............................................................................. 5-73
FLEXCURVES.............................................................................................. 5-76
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT.................................................................... 5-83
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
5.5.8
INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC ............................................................... 5-99

FLEXLOGIC RULES .................................................................................. 5-110
FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION........................................................................ 5-110
FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE ............................................................................. 5-111
FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR ............................................................. 5-115
FLEXLOGIC TIMERS................................................................................. 5-115
FLEXELEMENTS ....................................................................................... 5-116
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ........................................................................... 5-120
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
5.6.5
5.6.6
5.6.7
5.6.8
5.6.9
5.6.10
5.6.11
5.6.12
5.6.13
5.6.14
5.6.15
OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-121
SETTING GROUP ......................................................................................... 5-121
LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS ................................................................ 5-122
LINE PICKUP................................................................................................. 5-127
DISTANCE ..................................................................................................... 5-129
POWER SWING DETECT ............................................................................. 5-147
LOAD ENCROACHMENT.............................................................................. 5-156
PHASE CURRENT ........................................................................................ 5-158
NEUTRAL CURRENT.................................................................................... 5-169
WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT .................................................................. 5-177
GROUND CURRENT..................................................................................... 5-180
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT ............................................................. 5-182
BREAKER FAILURE ...................................................................................... 5-187
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................. 5-196
SUPERVISING ELEMENTS .......................................................................... 5-203
5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6
5.7.7
5.7.8
5.7.9
5.7.10
GE Multilin
OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-207
TRIP BUS....................................................................................................... 5-207
SETTING GROUPS ....................................................................................... 5-209
SELECTOR SWITCH..................................................................................... 5-210
TRIP OUTPUT ............................................................................................... 5-216
SYNCHROCHECK......................................................................................... 5-222
DIGITAL ELEMENTS..................................................................................... 5-226
DIGITAL COUNTERS .................................................................................... 5-229
MONITORING ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 5-232
PILOT SCHEMES .......................................................................................... 5-247
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.7.11
AUTORECLOSE.............................................................................................5-250
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.8.4
5.8.5
5.8.6
5.8.7
5.8.8
5.8.9
5.8.10
5.8.11
5.8.12
CONTACT INPUTS ........................................................................................5-262

VIRTUAL INPUTS ..........................................................................................5-264
CONTACT OUTPUTS ....................................................................................5-265
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ......................................................................................5-267
REMOTE DEVICES........................................................................................5-268
REMOTE INPUTS ..........................................................................................5-269
REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS ...............................................5-270
REMOTE OUTPUTS ......................................................................................5-271
DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ..........................................................................5-271
RESETTING ...................................................................................................5-274
IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS ......................................................................5-274
IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS .....................................................................5-275
5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
DCMA INPUTS ...............................................................................................5-276

RTD INPUTS ..................................................................................................5-277
DCMA OUTPUTS ...........................................................................................5-279
5.10 TESTING
5.10.1
5.10.2
5.10.3
5.10.4
5.10.5
6. ACTUAL VALUES
TEST MODE ...................................................................................................5-282

FORCE CONTACT INPUTS...........................................................................5-283
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS.......................................................................5-284
CHANNEL TESTS ..........................................................................................5-285
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT TEST VALUES .........................................5-285
6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1
ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU .........................................................................6-1
6.2 STATUS
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
6.2.8
6.2.9
6.2.10
6.2.11
6.2.12
6.2.13
6.2.14
6.2.15
6.2.16
CONTACT INPUTS ............................................................................................6-3

VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-3
REMOTE INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-3
REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS ...................................................6-4
DIRECT INPUTS ................................................................................................6-4
CONTACT OUTPUTS ........................................................................................6-4
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ..........................................................................................6-5
AUTORECLOSE.................................................................................................6-5
REMOTE DEVICES............................................................................................6-5
CHANNEL TESTS ..............................................................................................6-6
DIGITAL COUNTERS.........................................................................................6-7
SELECTOR SWITCHES ....................................................................................6-7
FLEX STATES ....................................................................................................6-8
ETHERNET ........................................................................................................6-8
IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS .........................................................................6-8
ETHERNET SWITCH .........................................................................................6-9
6.3 METERING
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.3.6
6.3.7
6.3.8
6.3.9
6.3.10
METERING CONVENTIONS ...........................................................................6-10

DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT..............................................................................6-13
SOURCES ........................................................................................................6-14
SYNCHROCHECK ...........................................................................................6-19
TRACKING FREQUENCY................................................................................6-19
FLEXELEMENTS ..........................................................................................6-19
IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES ...........................................................6-20
WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT.....................................................................6-20
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ....................................................................6-20
TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................6-21
6.4 RECORDS
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
viii
FAULT REPORTS ............................................................................................6-22

EVENT RECORDS ...........................................................................................6-22
OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................6-23
DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................6-23
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS .................................................6-23
BREAKER MAINTENANCE .............................................................................6-24
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5.1
6.5.2
7. COMMANDS AND
TARGETS
MODEL INFORMATION .................................................................................. 6-25

FIRMWARE REVISIONS ................................................................................. 6-25
7.1 COMMANDS
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.1.6
COMMANDS MENU .......................................................................................... 7-1

VIRTUAL INPUTS.............................................................................................. 7-1
CLEAR RECORDS ............................................................................................ 7-2
SET DATE AND TIME ....................................................................................... 7-2
RELAY MAINTENANCE .................................................................................... 7-3
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ONE-SHOT.................................................. 7-3
7.2 TARGETS
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
8. SECURITY
TARGETS MENU............................................................................................... 7-6

TARGET MESSAGES ....................................................................................... 7-6
RELAY SELF-TESTS......................................................................................... 7-6
8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY

8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 8-1
PASSWORD SECURITY MENU ....................................................................... 8-2
LOCAL PASSWORDS ....................................................................................... 8-2
REMOTE PASSWORDS ................................................................................... 8-3
ACCESS SUPERVISION ................................................................................... 8-3
DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS ....................................................... 8-4
8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY

8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
SETTINGS TEMPLATES ................................................................................... 8-6

SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS ............................. 8-10
SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY .................................................................... 8-12
8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
9. THEORY OF OPERATION
OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 8-15
ENABLING THE SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ................................. 8-15
ADDING A NEW USER ................................................................................... 8-15
MODIFYING USER PRIVILEGES ................................................................... 8-16
9.1 OVERVIEW
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.1.5
9.1.6
9.1.7
9.1.8
9.1.9
9.1.10
9.1.11
9.1.12
9.1.13
9.1.14
9.1.15
9.1.16
9.1.17
9.1.18
9.1.19
9.1.20
L90 DESIGN ...................................................................................................... 9-1

L90 ARCHITECTURE ........................................................................................ 9-1
REMOVAL OF DECAYING OFFSET................................................................. 9-2
PHASELET COMPUTATION............................................................................. 9-2
DISTURBANCE DETECTION............................................................................ 9-3
FAULT DETECTION .......................................................................................... 9-3
GROUND DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT............................................................... 9-4
CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION ........................................................................... 9-5
FREQUENCY TRACKING AND PHASE LOCKING .......................................... 9-6
FREQUENCY DETECTION ............................................................................... 9-7
PHASE DETECTION ......................................................................................... 9-7
PHASE LOCKING FILTER .............................................................................. 9-10
MATCHING PHASELETS................................................................................ 9-11
START-UP ....................................................................................................... 9-11
HARDWARE AND COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS ............................. 9-11
ONLINE ESTIMATE OF MEASUREMENT ERRORS ..................................... 9-12
CT SATURATION DETECTION ...................................................................... 9-13
CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION ..................................................... 9-13
DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT CHARACTERISTICS........................................... 9-14
RELAY SYNCHRONIZATION.......................................................................... 9-15
9.2 OPERATING CONDITION CHARACTERISTICS

9.2.1
9.2.2
GE Multilin
DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 9-16
TRIP DECISION EXAMPLE............................................................................. 9-18
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9.2.3
TRIP DECISION TEST .....................................................................................9-18
9.3 SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING

9.3.1
9.3.2
OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................9-20
PHASE SELECTION ........................................................................................9-23
9.4 FAULT LOCATOR

9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
10. APPLICATION OF
SETTINGS
OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................9-25
MULTI-ENDED FAULT LOCATOR...................................................................9-25
SINGLE-ENDED FAULT LOCATOR ................................................................9-31
10.1 CT REQUIREMENTS
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
INTRODUCTION ..............................................................................................10-1
CALCULATION EXAMPLE 1............................................................................10-1
CALCULATION EXAMPLE 2............................................................................10-2
10.2 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL (87L) SETTINGS

10.2.1
10.2.2
10.2.3
10.2.4
10.2.5
10.2.6
10.2.7
10.2.8
INTRODUCTION ..............................................................................................10-3
CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP ...............................................................10-3
CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1 .......................................................................10-3
CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 2 .......................................................................10-3
CURRENT DIFF BREAK POINT ......................................................................10-3
CT TAP .............................................................................................................10-4
BREAKER-AND-A-HALF ..................................................................................10-6
DISTRIBUTED BUS PROTECTION .................................................................10-9
10.3 CHANNEL ASYMMETRY COMPENSATION USING GPS

10.3.1
10.3.2
10.3.3
10.3.4
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................................................10-10
COMPENSATION METHOD 1 .......................................................................10-10
10.4 DISTANCE BACKUP/SUPERVISION

10.4.1
10.4.2
10.4.3
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................................................10-13
PHASE DISTANCE ........................................................................................10-14
GROUND DISTANCE.....................................................................................10-15
10.5 POTT SIGNALING SCHEME

10.5.1
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................................................10-16
10.6 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES

10.6.1
10.6.2
DISTANCE SETTINGS ON SERIES COMPENSATED LINES ......................10-17

GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT ..................................................10-18
10.7 LINES WITH TAPPED TRANSFORMERS

10.7.1
10.7.2
10.7.3
10.7.4
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................................................10-19
TRANSFORMER LOAD CURRENTS ............................................................10-19
LV-SIDE FAULTS ...........................................................................................10-20
EXTERNAL GROUND FAULTS .....................................................................10-20
10.8 INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENTS

10.8.1
INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENT ERROR DURING L90 SYNCHRONIZATION ...10-
21
11. COMMISSIONING
11.1 TESTING
11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.3
11.1.4
A. FLEXANALOG AND
FLEXINTEGER
PARAMETERS
CHANNEL TESTING ........................................................................................11-1

CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION TESTS .............................................................11-2
CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL..............................................................................11-3
LOCAL-REMOTE RELAY TESTS ....................................................................11-4
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

A.1.1
A.1.2
FLEXANALOG ITEMS ....................................................................................... A-1

FLEXINTEGER ITEMS .................................................................................... A-11
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B. MODBUS
COMMUNICATIONS
B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

B.1.1
B.1.2
B.1.3
B.1.4
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................B-1
PHYSICAL LAYER.............................................................................................B-1
DATA LINK LAYER............................................................................................B-1
CRC-16 ALGORITHM........................................................................................B-2
B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES

B.2.1
B.2.2
B.2.3
B.2.4
B.2.5
B.2.6
SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ...................................................................B-3

READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ...........B-3
EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H) ...........................................B-4
STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H) .......................................B-4
STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................B-5
EXCEPTION RESPONSES ...............................................................................B-5
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS

B.3.1
B.3.2
OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS ........................................................B-6

MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION ...............................................................B-7
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

B.4.1
B.4.2
C. IEC 61850
COMMUNICATIONS
MODBUS MEMORY MAP .................................................................................B-9

DATA FORMATS .............................................................................................B-66
C.1 OVERVIEW
C.1.1
C.1.2
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................C-1
COMMUNICATION PROFILES .........................................................................C-1
C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION

C.2.1
C.2.2
C.2.3
C.2.4
C.2.5
C.2.6
C.2.7
OVERVIEW........................................................................................................C-2
GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES .................................................................C-2
GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES ..............................................................C-2
GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM RECEIVED GOOSE
DATAC-2
GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES .........................................C-2
MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES...........................................................C-3
PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES ...............................................C-3
C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION

C.3.1
C.3.2
C.3.3
C.3.4
C.3.5
C.3.6
C.3.7
C.3.8
C.3.9
BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING ........................................................C-5

FILE TRANSFER ...............................................................................................C-5
TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING .......................................................................C-5
LOGICAL DEVICE NAME..................................................................................C-5
LOCATION.........................................................................................................C-5
LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES ..................................................................C-6
CONNECTION TIMING .....................................................................................C-6
NON-IEC 61850 DATA ......................................................................................C-6
COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES .....................................................C-6
C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE

C.4.1
C.4.2
C.4.3
C.4.4
C.4.5
C.4.6
OVERVIEW........................................................................................................C-7
GSSE CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................C-7
FIXED GOOSE ..................................................................................................C-7
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE.................................................................................C-7
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE...........................................C-9
GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS ............................................................C-10
C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP

C.5.1
C.5.2
C.5.3
C.5.4
C.5.5
C.5.6
OVERVIEW......................................................................................................C-11
CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS...........................................................C-12
ABOUT ICD FILES...........................................................................................C-13
CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP ..............................C-17
ABOUT SCD FILES .........................................................................................C-17
IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP ...........................C-20
C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE

C.6.1
C.6.2
C.6.3
GE Multilin
ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT.................................................C-22

ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ............................................C-22
ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT .........................................C-23
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
C.7 LOGICAL NODES
C.7.1
LOGICAL NODES TABLE ............................................................................... C-26
D. IEC 60870-5-104
COMMUNICATIONS
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
D.1.1
D.1.2
E.1.1
E.1.2
INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT................................................................... D-1

POINT LIST ....................................................................................................... D-9
DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE .......................................................................... E-1

IMPLEMENTATION TABLE .............................................................................. E-4
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS

E.2.1
E.2.2
E.2.3
E.2.4
F. MISCELLANEOUS
BINARY INPUT POINTS ................................................................................... E-8

BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT...................................................... E-9
COUNTERS..................................................................................................... E-10
ANALOG INPUTS............................................................................................ E-11
F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.1.1
F.1.2
REVISION HISTORY......................................................................................... F-1

CHANGES TO THE L90 MANUAL .................................................................... F-2
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
F.2.1
STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... F-7
F.3 WARRANTY
F.3.1
GE MULTILIN WARRANTY............................................................................... F-9
INDEX
xii
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new relay.
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
Before attempting to install or use the device, review all safety indicators in this document to help prevent injury, equipment
damage, or downtime.
The following safety and equipment symbols are used in this document.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.
NOTICE
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST

1.
Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage.
2.
View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.
L90
Line Differential Relay

GE Multilin
Technical Support:
Tel: (905) 294-6222
Fax: (905) 201-2098
http://www.GEmultilin.com
RATINGS:
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA
Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A
360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break
4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W
L90G00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A
000
831782A3
GEK-113276
MAZB98000029
D
2005/01/05
Model:
Mods:
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number:
Firmware:
Mfg. Date:
Made in
Canada
-
831795A1.CDR
Figure 11: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)

3.
Ensure that the following items are included:

Instruction manual (if ordered)
GE EnerVista CD (includes the EnerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format)
Mounting screws
For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Digital Energy
website.
If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE
Multilin immediately.
NOTE
GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:

GE Digital Energy
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
TELEPHONE:
FAX:
E-MAIL:
HOME PAGE:
GE Multilin
Worldwide +1 905 927 7070

Europe/Middle East/Africa +34 94 485 88 54
North America toll-free 1 800 547 8629
+1 905 927 5098
Worldwide [email protected]
Europe [email protected]
http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin
1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1 GETTING STARTED
1.2UR OVERVIEW
1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR
Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This
first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the singlefunction approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxiliary equipment to produce functioning systems.
Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equipment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and
auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and auxiliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using electronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the
term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device).
It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further
reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more
functions within the IEDs.
Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and
as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to
perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly.
High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and monitoring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a
performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 3
milliseconds. This has been established by the IEC 61850 standard.
IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available,
enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control systems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and
enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.
1-2
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
a) UR BASIC DESIGN
The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output
signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or
another UR device.
Input Elements
CPU Module
Contact Inputs
Contact Outputs
Protective Elements
Pickup
Dropout
Output
Operate
Virtual Inputs
Analog Inputs
Output Elements
Input
CT Inputs
Status
VT Inputs
Table
Status
Logic Gates
Table
Virtual Outputs
Analog Outputs
Remote Outputs
-DNA
-USER
Remote Inputs
Direct Inputs
Direct Outputs
LAN
Programming
Device
Operator
Interface
827822A2.CDR
Figure 12: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM

The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as programmable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.
Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into
logic signals used by the relay.
Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used
to control field devices.
b) UR SIGNAL TYPES
The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both wet and dry
contacts are supported.
The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include
signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize
the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations.
The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs).
The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines.
The UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs.
The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR-series
devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR-series devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic
operands inserted into IEC 61850 GSSE and GOOSE messages.
The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR-series IEDs over a
dedicated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are connected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilotaided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single relay chassis.
GE Multilin
1-3
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1 GETTING STARTED
c) UR SCAN OPERATION
The UR-series devices operate in a cyclic scan fashion. The device reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the
logic program (FlexLogic equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any
resulting task execution is priority interrupt-driven.
Read Inputs
Protection elements
serviced by sub-scan
Protective Elements
Solve Logic
PKP
DPO
OP
Set Outputs
827823A1.CDR
Figure 13: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION

1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE
The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as
required. This is achieved with object-oriented design and programming (OOD/OOP) techniques.
Object-oriented techniques involve the use of objects and classes. An object is defined as a logical entity that contains
both data and code that manipulates that data. A class is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept,
one can create a protection class with the protection elements as objects of the class, such as time overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent, current differential, undervoltage, overvoltage, underfrequency, and distance. These objects represent
completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for metering, input/output control,
hmi, communications, or any functional entity in the system.
Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the L90 achieves the same features as the hardware architecture:
modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any UR-series device (for example, feeder protection,
transformer protection, distance protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes. This
results in a common look and feel across the entire family of UR-series platform-based applications.
1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS
As described above, the architecture of the UR-series relays differ from previous devices. To achieve a general understanding of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are contained in
elements. A description of the UR-series elements can be found in the Introduction to elements section in chapter 5.
Examples of simple elements, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the Control elements section of
chapter 5. An explanation of the use of inputs from CTs and VTs is in the Introduction to AC sources section in chapter 5. A
description of how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the Introduction to FlexLogic section
in chapter 5.
1-4
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS
The faceplate keypad and display or the EnerVista UR Setup software interface can be used to communicate with the relay.
The EnerVista UR Setup software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC
monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format.
The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista UR Setup software to properly operate on a PC.
Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or higher recommended)
Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher), 2000, XP
Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher
128 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended)
200 MB of available space on system drive and 200 MB of available space on installation drive
Video capable of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in high-color mode (16-bit color)
RS232 and/or Ethernet port for communications to the relay
The following qualified modems have been tested to be compliant with the L90 and the EnerVista UR Setup software.
US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686
US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2
PCTEL 2304WT V.92 MDC internal modem

1.3.2 INSTALLATION
After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup are met (see previous section), use the following
procedure to install the EnerVista UR Setup from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD.
1.
Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2.
Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge EnerVista software.
3.
When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4.
Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
5.
In the EnerVista Launch Pad window, click the Add Product button and select the L90 Line Current Differential System from the Install Software window as shown below. Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software
GE Multilin
1-5
1 GETTING STARTED
release, or select CD if you do not have a web connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for
the L90.
6.
EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the software from the Web or CD and automatically start the installation program.
7.
Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista UR Setup will be installed.
8.
Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program
will automatically create icons and add EnerVista UR Setup to the Windows start menu.
9.
Click Finish to end the installation. The UR-series device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista
Launchpad window, as shown below.
1.3.3 CONFIGURING THE L90 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS

a) OVERVIEW
The user can connect remotely to the L90 through the rear RS485 port or the rear Ethernet port with a PC running the
EnerVista UR Setup software. The L90 can also be accessed locally with a laptop computer through the front panel RS232
port or the rear Ethernet port using the Quick Connect feature.
1-6
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
To configure the L90 for remote access via the rear RS485 port(s), refer to the Configuring Serial Communications
section.
To configure the L90 for remote access via the rear Ethernet port, refer to the Configuring Ethernet Communications
section. An Ethernet module must be specified at the time of ordering.
To configure the L90 for local access with a laptop through either the front RS232 port or rear Ethernet port, refer to the
Using the Quick Connect Feature section. An Ethernet module must be specified at the time of ordering for Ethernet
communications.
b) CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected to the RS485 terminals on the back of the device. The
faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and is not described in this section; see the Using the Quick Connect Feature
section for details on configuring the RS232 port.
A GE Multilin F485 converter (or compatible RS232-to-RS485 converter) is will be required. Refer to the F485 instruction
manual for additional details.
1.
Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista CD or
online from http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin). See the Software Installation section for installation details.
2.
Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
3.
Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site.
4.
Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use Location 1 as the site name. Click
the OK button when complete.
5.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then
select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.
6.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7.
Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
8.
Select Serial from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper serial communications.
Figure 14: CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
GE Multilin
1-7
9.
1 GETTING STARTED
Enter the relay slave address, COM port, baud rate, and parity settings from the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMmenu in their respective fields.
MUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS
10. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the L90 device and upload the order code. If an communications error
occurs, ensure that the EnerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to
the relay setting values.
11. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the L90 section to
begin communications.
c) CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS
Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To
setup the relay for Ethernet communications, it will be necessary to define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site.
1.
2.
3.
Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site.
4.
Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use Location 2 as the site name. Click
the OK button when complete.
5.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then
select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.
6.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7.
Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
8.
Select Ethernet from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
Figure 15: CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS
1-8
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
9.
Enter the relay IP address specified in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP
in the IP Address field.
ADDRESS)
10. Enter the relay slave address and Modbus port address values from the respective settings in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL menu.
11. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the L90 device and upload the order code. If an communications error
occurs, ensure that the three EnerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous steps correspond to the relay setting
values.
12. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the L90 section to
begin communications.
1.3.4 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE
a) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE FRONT PANEL RS232 PORT
Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected from the laptop computer to the front panel RS232 port
with a straight-through 9-pin to 9-pin RS232 cable.
1.
2.
3.
Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.
4.
Select the Serial interface and the correct COM Port, then click Connect.
5.
The EnerVista UR Setup software will create a site named Quick Connect with a corresponding device also named
Quick Connect and display them on the upper-left corner of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly
from the L90 device.
Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communications to the L90. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the L90 model number.
b) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE REAR ETHERNET PORTS
To use the Quick Connect feature to access the L90 from a laptop through Ethernet, first assign an IP address to the relay
from the front panel keyboard.
1.
Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS menu is displayed.
2.
Navigate to the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS setting.
3.
Enter an IP address of 1.1.1.1 and select the ENTER key to save the value.
4.
In the same menu, select the SUBNET IP MASK setting.
5.
Enter a subnet IP address of 255.0.0.0 and press the ENTER key to save the value.
GE Multilin
1-9
1 GETTING STARTED
Next, use an Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the laptop to the rear Ethernet port. The pinout for an Ethernet crossover cable is shown below.
2
1
4 5 6
7
8
END 1
Pin
Wire color
1
White/orange
2
Orange
3
White/green
4
Blue
5
White/blue
6
Green
7
White/brown
8
Brown
Diagram
END 2
Pin
Wire color
1
White/green
2
Green
3
White/orange
4
Blue
5
White/blue
6
Orange
7
White/brown
8
Brown
Diagram
842799A1.CDR
Figure 16: ETHERNET CROSS-OVER CABLE PIN LAYOUT

Now, assign the laptop computer an IP address compatible with the relays IP address.
1.
From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network connections window.
2.
Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.
1-10
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
3.
Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.
4.
Click on the Use the following IP address box.
5.
Enter an IP address with the first three numbers the same as the IP address of the L90 relay and the last number different (in this example, 1.1.1.2).
6.
Enter a subnet mask equal to the one set in the L90 (in this example, 255.0.0.0).
7.
Click OK to save the values.
Before continuing, it will be necessary to test the Ethernet connection.

1.
Open a Windows console window by selecting Start > Run from the Windows Start menu and typing cmd.
2.
Type the following command:

C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1
3.
If the connection is successful, the system will return four replies as follows:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply
Reply
Reply
Reply
from
from
from
from
1.1.1.1:
1.1.1.1:
1.1.1.1:
1.1.1.1:
bytes=32
bytes=32
bytes=32
bytes=32
time<10ms
time<10ms
time<10ms
time<10ms
TTL=255
TTL=255
TTL=255
TTL=255
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
4.
Note that the values for time and TTL will vary depending on local network configuration.
If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
GE Multilin
1-11
1 GETTING STARTED
Request
Request
Request
Request
timed
timed
timed
timed
out.
out.
out.
out.

Verify the physical connection between the L90 and the laptop computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2 in the above procedure.
Hardware
Hardware
Hardware
Hardware
error.
error.
error.
error.

Verify the physical connection between the L90 and the laptop computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2 in the above procedure.
Destination
Destination
Destination
Destination
host
host
host
host
unreachable.
unreachable.
unreachable.
unreachable.

Verify the IP address is programmed in the local PC by entering the ipconfig command in the command window.
C:\WINNT>ipconfig
Windows 2000 IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter <F4FE223E-5EB6-4BFB-9E34-1BD7BE7F59FF>:
Connection-specific
IP Address. . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . .
Default Gateway . .
DNS
. .
. .
. .
suffix.
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
:
: 0.0.0.0
: 0.0.0.0
:
.
.
.
.
:
: 1.1.1.2
: 255.0.0.0
:
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific
IP Address. . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . .
Default Gateway . .
DNS
. .
. .
. .
suffix
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
C:\WINNT>
It may be necessary to restart the laptop for the change in IP address to take effect (Windows 98 or NT).
1-12
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port, it is necessary to disable any configured proxy settings
in Internet Explorer.
1.
Start the Internet Explorer software.
2.
Select the Tools > Internet Options menu item and click on Connections tab.
3.
Click on the LAN Settings button to open the following window.
4.
Ensure that the Use a proxy server for your LAN box is not checked.
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the laptop has been disconnected from the L90 relay.
1.
Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE enerVista CD or
2.
Start the Internet Explorer software.
3.
4.
Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.
5.
Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the L90, then click Connect.
6.
The EnerVista UR Setup software will create a site named Quick Connect with a corresponding device also named
Quick Connect and display them on the upper-left corner of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly
from the L90 device.
Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communications to the L90. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the L90 model number.
When direct communications with the L90 via Ethernet is complete, make the following changes:
1.
From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network connections window.
2.
Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item.
3.
Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.
GE Multilin
1-13
4.
1 GETTING STARTED
Set the computer to Obtain a relay address automatically as shown below.
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the laptop has been disconnected from the L90 relay.
AUTOMATIC DISCOVERY OF ETHERNET DEVICES
The EnerVista UR Setup software can automatically discover and communicate to all UR-series IEDs located on an Ethernet network.
Using the Quick Connect feature, a single click of the mouse will trigger the software to automatically detect any UR-series
relays located on the network. The EnerVista UR Setup software will then proceed to configure all settings and order code
options in the Device Setup menu, for the purpose of communicating to multiple relays. This feature allows the user to
identify and interrogate, in seconds, all UR-series devices in a particular location.
1-14
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED

1.3.5 CONNECTING TO THE L90 RELAY
1.
Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:
Quick action hot links
Expand the site list by double-clicking

or selecting the +/ box.
Communications status indicators:

Green = OK
Red = No communications
UR icon = report is open
842743A3.CDR
2.
The Display Properties window will open with a status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup window.
3.
If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the
back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier).
If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, than a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open.
Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.
4.
The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications.
Refer to chapter 4 in this manual and the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for more information about the
using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface.
NOTE
QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS

The EnerVista UR Setup software has several new quick action buttons that provide users with instant access to several
functions that are often performed when using L90 relays. From the online window, users can select which relay to interrogate from a pull-down window, then click on the button for the action they wish to perform. The following quick action functions are available:
View the L90 event record.
View the last recorded oscillography record.
View the status of all L90 inputs and outputs.
View all of the L90 metering values.
View the L90 protection summary.
GE Multilin
1-15
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1 GETTING STARTED
1.4UR HARDWARE
1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING
Please refer to Chapter 3: Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
carefully.
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS
The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ethernet ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard straight-through serial cable is used. The DB-9 male
end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described
in the CPU communications ports section of chapter 3.
Figure 17: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS

To communicate through the L90 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is
required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a straight-through serial cable. A shielded
twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the L90 rear communications port. The converter terminals
(+, , GND) are connected to the L90 communication module (+, , COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU communications
ports section in chapter 3 for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (that is, 120 , 1 nF) as
described in the chapter 3.
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad
and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven
message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.
1-16
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5USING THE RELAY
1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting
values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The HELP key may
be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The ENTER key stores altered setting values.
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION
Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading
pages:
Actual values.
Settings.
Commands.
Targets.
User displays (when enabled).

1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing
the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL
LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION
The relay is defaulted to the Not Programmed state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of
a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the Trouble LED will be on and the In Service LED off. The relay in the Not Programmed state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain
until the relay is explicitly put in the Programmed state.
Select the menu message SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
GE Multilin
1-17
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1 GETTING STARTED
To put the relay in the Programmed state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press ENTER. The faceplate
Trouble LED will turn off and the In Service LED will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually (refer
to Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the EnerVista UR Setup help file) via the EnerVista UR Setup
software interface.
1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS
It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user
password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING:
1. COMMAND
The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following operations:
operate breakers via faceplate keypad
change state of virtual inputs
clear event records
clear oscillography records
operate user-programmable pushbuttons
2. SETTING
The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values.
Refer to the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting up security level
passwords.
NOTE
1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION

FlexLogic equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the FlexLogic section in Chapter 5 for additional details.
1-18
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.5 USING THE RELAY

1.5.7 COMMISSIONING
Commissioning tests are included in the Commissioning chapter of this manual.

The L90 requires a minimum amount of maintenance when it is commissioned into service. Since the L90 is a microprocessor-based relay, its characteristics do not change over time. As such, no further functional tests are required.
Furthermore, the L90 performs a number of continual self-tests and takes the necessary action in case of any major errors
(see the Relay Self-tests section in chapter 7 for details). However, it is recommended that L90 maintenance be scheduled
with other system maintenance. This maintenance may involve the in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.
In-service maintenance:
1.
Visual verification of the analog values integrity such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices on the corresponding system).
2.
Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
3.
LED test.
4.
Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
5.
Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
Out-of-service maintenance:
1.
Check wiring connections for firmness.
2.
Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated
test equipment is required.
3.
Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against relay
settings schedule).
4.
Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the
system functional testing.
5.
Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
6.
Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
7.
LED Test and pushbutton continuity check.
Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance causing system interruption:

1.
View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.
If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin for prompt service.
GE Multilin
1-19
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1 GETTING STARTED
1-20
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 OVERVIEW
The L90 Line Current Differential System is a digital current differential relay system with an integral communications channel interface.
The L90 is intended to provide complete protection for transmission lines of any voltage level. Both three phase and single
phase tripping schemes are available. Models of the L90 are available for application on both two and three terminal lines.
The L90 uses per phase differential at 64 kbps transmitting two phaselets per cycle. The current differential scheme is
based on innovative patented techniques developed by GE. The L90 algorithms are based on the Fourier transform
phaselet approach and an adaptive statistical restraint. The restraint is similar to a traditional percentage differential
scheme, but is adaptive based on relay measurements. When used with a 64 kbps channel, the innovative phaselets
approach yields an operating time of 1.0 to 1.5 cycles (typical). The adaptive statistical restraint approach provides both
more sensitive and more accurate fault sensing. This allows the L90 to detect relatively higher impedance single line to
ground faults that existing systems may not. The basic current differential element operates on current input only. Long
lines with significant capacitance can benefit from charging current compensation if terminal voltage measurements are
applied to the relay. The voltage input is also used for some protection and monitoring features such as directional elements, fault locator, metering, and distance backup.
The L90 is designed to operate over different communications links with various degrees of noise encountered in power
systems and communications environments. Since correct operation of the relay is completely dependent on data received
from the remote end, special attention must be paid to information validation. The L90 incorporates a high degree of security by using a 32-bit CRC (cyclic redundancy code) inter-relay communications packet.
In addition to current differential protection, the relay provides multiple backup protection for phase and ground faults. For
overcurrent protection, the time overcurrent curves may be selected from a selection of standard curve shapes or a custom
FlexCurve for optimum co-ordination. Additionally, three zones of phase and ground distance protection with power
swing blocking, out-of-step tripping, line pickup, load encroachment, and permissive overreaching transfer trip (POTT) features are included.
The L90 incorporates charging current compensation for applications on very long transmission lines without loss of sensitivity. The line capacitive current is removed from the terminal phasors.
For breaker-and-a-half or ring applications, the L90 design provides secure operation during external faults with possible
CT saturation.
Voltage, current, and power metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total
waveform RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).
Table 21: DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS
DEVICE
NUMBER
FUNCTION
DEVICE
NUMBER
FUNCTION
21G
Ground distance
51P
Phase time overcurrent
21P
Phase distance
51_2
Negative-sequence time overcurrent
25
Synchrocheck
52
AC circuit breaker
27P
Phase undervoltage
59N
Neutral overvoltage
27X
Auxiliary undervoltage
59P
Phase overvoltage
32N
Wattmetric zero-sequence directional
59X
Auxiliary overvoltage
50BF
Breaker failure
67N
Neutral directional overcurrent
50DD
Adaptive fault detector

(sensitive current disturbance detector)
67P
Phase directional overcurrent
67_2
Negative-sequence directional overcurrent
50G
Ground instantaneous overcurrent
68
Power swing blocking
50N
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent
78
Out-of-step tripping
50P
Phase instantaneous overcurrent
79
Automatic recloser
50_2
Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent
87L
Segregated line current differential
51G
Ground time overcurrent
87LG
Ground differential
51N
Neutral time overcurrent
GE Multilin
2-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION

0RQLWRULQJ
''
3

&ORVH
B

3

*
7ULS
B

%)

/
/*
3

3

1

1

14
1

'DWDIURPWRUHPRWHHQG
YLDGHGLFDWHGFRPPXQLFDWLRQV
3
7UDQVGXFHULQSXWV
0HWHULQJ
)OH[(OHPHQW70
*

3

*

1
;
;

//LQH'LIIHUHQWLDO3URWHFWLRQ6\VWHP
$8&'5
Figure 21: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

Table 22: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
Breaker Arcing Current (I2t)
FlexElements (8)
Oscillography
Breaker Control
FlexLogic Equations
Pilot Scheme (POTT)
Contact Inputs (up to 96)
IEC 61850 Communications (optional)
Setting Groups (6)
Contact Outputs (up to 64)
L90 Channel Tests
Stub Bus
Control Pushbuttons
Line Pickup
Synchrophasors
CT Failure Detector
Load Encroachment
Time Synchronization over SNTP
Data Logger
Transducer Inputs/Outputs
Digital Elements (48)
Metering: Current, Voltage, Power,

Energy, Frequency, Demand,
Power Factor, 87L current,
local and remote phasors
Direct Inputs (8 per L90 comms channel)
Modbus Communications
User Programmable Pushbuttons
Disconnect Switches
Modbus User Map
User Programmable Self-Tests
DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
Non-Volatile Latches
Virtual Inputs (64)
Digital Counters (8)
User Definable Displays

User Programmable LEDs
Event Recorder
Non-Volatile Selector Switch
Virtual Outputs (96)
Fault Locator and Fault Reporting
Open Pole Detector
VT Fuse Failure
2-2
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.2 FEATURES
LINE CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL
Phase segregated, high-speed digital current differential system.
Overhead and underground AC transmission lines, series compensated lines.
Two-terminal and three-terminal line applications.
Zero-sequence removal for application on lines with tapped transformers connected in a grounded wye on the line
side.
GE phaselets approach based on the Discrete Fourier Transform with 64 samples per cycle and transmitting two timestamped phaselets per cycle.
Adaptive restraint approach improving sensitivity and accuracy of fault sensing.
Increased security for trip decision using disturbance detector and trip output logic.
Continuous clock synchronization via the distributed synchronization technique.
Increased transient stability through DC decaying offset removal.
Accommodates up to five times CT ratio differences.
Peer-to-peer (master-master) architecture changing to master-slave via DTT (if channel fails) at 64 kbps.
Charging current compensation.
Interfaces direct fiber, multiplexed RS422 and G.703 connections with relay ID check.
Per-phase line differential protection direct transfer trip plus eight user-assigned pilot signals via the communications
channel.
Secure 32-bit CRC protection against communications errors.
Channel asymmetry (up to 10 ms) compensation using GPS satellite-controlled clock.
BACKUP PROTECTION:
DTT provision for pilot schemes.
Three zones of distance protection with POTT scheme, power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping, line pickup, and
load encroachment.
Two-element time overcurrent and two-element instantaneous overcurrent directional phase overcurrent protection.
Two-element time overcurrent and two-element instantaneous overcurrent directional zero-sequence protection.
Two-element time overcurrent and two-element instantaneous overcurrent negative-sequence overcurrent protection.
Undervoltage and overvoltage protection.
ADDITIONAL PROTECTION:
Breaker failure protection.
Stub bus protection.
VT and CT supervision.
GE Multilin sources approach allowing grouping of different CTs and VTs from multiple input channels.
Open pole detection.
Breaker trip coil supervision and seal-in of trip command.
FlexLogic allowing creation of user-defined distributed protection and control logic.
CONTROL:
One and two breaker configuration for breaker-and-a-half and ring bus schemes, pushbutton control from the relay.
Auto-reclosing and synchrochecking.
Breaker arcing current.
GE Multilin
2-3
2.1 INTRODUCTION
MONITORING:
Oscillography of current, voltage, FlexLogic operands, and digital signals (1 128 cycles to 31 8 cycles configurable).
Events recorder: 1024 events.
Fault locator.
METERING:
Actual 87L remote phasors, differential current, channel delay, and channel asymmetry at all line terminals of line current differential protection.
Line current, voltage, real power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor, and frequency.
COMMUNICATIONS:
Front panel RS232 port: 19.2 kbps.
One or two rear RS485 ports: up to 115 kbps.
10Base-F Ethernet port supporting the IEC 61850 protocol.

2.1.3 ORDERING
a) OVERVIEW
The L90 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount or reduced-size () vertical unit and consists of the following modules: power supply, CPU, CT/VT, digital input and output, transducer input and output, and inter-relay communications.
Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations specified at the time of ordering. The information
required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following tables (see chapter 3 for full details of relay modules).
Order codes are subject to change without notice. Refer to the GE Multilin ordering page at
http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/order.htm for the latest details concerning L90 ordering options.
NOTE
The order code structure is dependent on the mounting option (horizontal or vertical) and the type of CT/VT modules (regular CT/VT modules or the HardFiber modules). The order code options are described in the following sub-sections.
2-4
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
b) ORDER CODES WITH TRADITIONAL CTS AND VTS

The order codes for the horizontal mount units with traditional CTs and VTs are shown below.
Table 23: L90 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS)
BASE UNIT
CPU
L90
L90
SOFTWARE
(IEC 61850 options
not available with
type E CPUs)
*
|
E
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
S
MOUNT/COATING
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant supply must
be same type as main supply)
CT/VT MODULES
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
(select a maximum of 3 per unit)
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
GE Multilin
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
A
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
C
D
R
A
P
G
S
B
K
M
Q
U
L
N
T
V
* - F
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
H
L
L
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8F
8H
8L
8N
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- L
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8F
8H
8L
8N
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- N
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- S
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- U
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
|
|
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
W/X
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RH
|
RL
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
2S
2T
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
Full Size Horizontal Mount

Base Unit
RS485 and RS485
RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F
No software options
Breaker-and-a-Half software
IEC 61850
Breaker-and-a-Half software and IEC 61850
One phasor measurement unit (PMU)
IEC 61850 and one phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Breaker-and-a-Half and phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Breaker-and-a-Half, IEC 61850, and phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Horizontal (19 rack)
Horizontal (19 rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
Standard 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics (required for PMU option)
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics (required for PMU option)
No Module
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs
4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs
8 dcmA inputs
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
Bi-phase, single channel
Bi-phase, dual channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC)
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage supply (48 V DC)
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels, 2 Clock Inputs
RS422, 2 Channels
2-5
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units with traditional CTs and VTs are shown below.
Table 24: L90 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS)
BASE UNIT
CPU
L90
L90
SOFTWARE
(IEC 61850 options
not available with
type E CPUs)
*
|
E
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
MOUNT/COATING
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY
CT/VT MODULES
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
2-6
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
V
B
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
C
D
R
A
K
M
Q
U
L
N
T
V
* - F
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
L
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8F
8H
8L
8N
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- L
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8F
8H
8L
8N
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- N
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- R
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
Reduced Size Vertical Mount

Base Unit
RS485 and RS485
No software options
Breaker-and-a-half software
IEC 61850
Breaker-and-a-half software and IEC 61850
Phasor measurement unit (PMU)
IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Breaker-and-a-half and phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Breaker-and-a-half, IEC 61850, and phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Vertical (3/4 rack)
Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
Standard 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics (required for PMU option)
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics (required for PMU option)
No Module
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs
8 dcmA inputs
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
c) ORDER CODES WITH PROCESS BUS MODULES

The order codes for the horizontal mount units with the process bus module are shown below.
Table 25: L90 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
BASE UNIT
CPU
L90
L90
SOFTWARE
(IEC 61850 options
not available with
type E CPUs)
MOUNT/COATING
*
|
E
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant supply must
be same type as main supply)
PROCESS BUS MODULE
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
GE Multilin
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00
03
06
07
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
A
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
C
D
R
A
P
G
S
B
K
M
Q
U
L
N
T
V
* - F
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
H
L
L
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
81
- L
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
- N
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
- S
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
- U
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
W/X
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RH
|
RL
|
XX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
Full Size Horizontal Mount

Base Unit
RS485 and RS485
No software options
IEC 61850
One phasor measurement unit (PMU)
IEC 61850 and one phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Horizontal (19 rack)
Horizontal (19 rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
Eight-port digital process bus module
No Module
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
2-7
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units with the process bus module are shown below.
Table 26: L90 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
L90
L90
BASE UNIT
CPU
SOFTWARE
(IEC 61850 options
not available with
type E CPUs)
MOUNT/COATING
*
|
E
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY
PROCESS BUS MODULE
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00
03
06
07
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
V
B
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
C
D
R
A
K
M
Q
U
L
N
T
V
* - F
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
L
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
81
- L
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
- N
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
- R
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
Reduced Size Vertical Mount

Base Unit
RS485 and RS485
No software options
IEC 61850
Phasor measurement unit (PMU)
IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit (PMU)
Vertical (3/4 rack)
Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
Eight-port digital process bus module
No Module
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
2.1.4 REPLACEMENT MODULES

Replacement modules can be ordered separately as shown below. When ordering a replacement CPU module or faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit.
Not all replacement modules may be applicable to the L90 relay. Only the modules specified in the order codes are
available as replacement modules.
NOTE
Replacement module codes are subject to change without notice. Refer to the GE Multilin ordering page at http://
http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/order.htm for the latest details concerning L90 ordering options.
NOTE
2-8
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The replacement module order codes for the horizontal mount units are shown below.
Table 27: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, HORIZONTAL UNITS
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant supply only available in horizontal units;
must be same type as main supply)
CPU
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY
DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
CT/VT
MODULES
(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
GE Multilin
UR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
1H
1L
RH
RH
9E
9G
9H
9J
9K
9L
9M
9N
9P
9R
9S
3C
3D
3R
3A
3P
3G
3S
3B
3K
3M
3Q
3U
3L
3N
3T
3V
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
8F
8G
8H
8J
8L
8M
8N
8R
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
2S
2T
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
125 / 250 V AC/DC

24 to 48 V (DC only)
redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC
redundant 24 to 48 V (DC only)
RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and 10/100Base-T (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and English display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and French display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Russian display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Chinese display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and English display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and French display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Russian display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Chinese display
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
Standard 4CT/4VT
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Sensitive Ground 8CT
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC)
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply (48 V DC)
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
8 RTD inputs
4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
8 dcmA inputs
2-9
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The replacement module order codes for the reduced-size vertical mount units are shown below.
Table 28: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, VERTICAL UNITS
POWER SUPPLY
CPU
2
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY
DIGITAL
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CT/VT
MODULES
(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
2-10
UR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
1H
1L
9E
9G
9H
9J
9K
9L
9M
9N
9P
9R
3F
3D
3R
3K
3K
3M
3Q
3U
3L
3N
3T
3V
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
8F
8G
8H
8J
8L
8M
8N
8R
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7V
7W
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
125 / 250 V AC/DC

24 to 48 V (DC only)
RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and 10/100Base-T (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
Vertical faceplate with keypad and English display
Vertical faceplate with keypad and French display
Vertical faceplate with keypad and Russian display
Vertical faceplate with keypad and Chinese display
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
Standard 4CT/4VT
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Sensitive Ground 8CT
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
8 RTD inputs
4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
8 dcmA inputs
GE Multilin
2.2PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING
2.2.1 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
Dedicated inter-relay communications may operate over 64 kbps digital channels or dedicated fiber optic channels. Available interfaces include:
RS422 at 64 kbps
G.703 at 64 kbps
Dedicated fiber optics at 64 kbps. The fiber optic options include:
820 nm multi-mode fiber with an LED transmitter.
1300 nm multi-mode fiber with an LED transmitter.
1300 nm single-mode fiber with an ELED transmitter.
1300 nm single-mode fiber with a laser transmitter.
1550 nm single-mode fiber with a laser transmitter.
IEEE C37.94 820 nm multi-mode fiber with an LED transmitter.
All fiber optic options use an ST connector. L90 models are available for use on two or three terminal lines. A two terminal
line application requires one bidirectional channel. However, in two terminal line applications, it is also possible to use an
L90 relay with two bidirectional channels. The second bidirectional channel will provide a redundant backup channel with
automatic switchover if the first channel fails.
The L90 current differential relay is designed to function in a peer-to-peer or master-to-master architecture. In the peer-topeer architecture, all relays in the system are identical and perform identical functions in the current differential scheme. In
order for every relay on the line to be a peer, each relay must be able to communicate with all of the other relays. If there is
a failure in communications among the relays, the relays will revert to a master-to-peer architecture on a three-terminal system, with the master as the relay that has current phasors from all terminals. Using two different operational modes
increases the dependability of the current differential scheme on a three-terminal system by reducing reliance on communications.
The main difference between a master and a slave L90 is that only a master relay performs the actual current differential
calculation, and only a master relay communicates with the relays at all other terminals of the protected line.
At least one master L90 relay must have live communications to all other terminals in the current differential scheme; the
other L90 relays on that line may operate as slave relays. All master relays in the scheme will be equal, and each will perform all functions. Each L90 relay in the scheme will determine if it is a master by comparing the number of terminals on the
line to the number of active communication channels.
The slave terminals only communicate with the master; there is no slave-to-slave communications path. As a result, a slave
L90 relay cannot calculate the differential current. When a master L90 relay issues a local trip signal, it also sends a direct
transfer trip (DTT) signal to all of the other L90 relays on the protected line.
If a slave L90 relay issues a trip from one of its backup functions, it can send a transfer trip signal to its master and other
slave relays if such option is designated. Because a slave cannot communicate with all the relays in the differential
scheme, the master will then broadcast the direct transfer trip (DTT) signal to all other terminals.
The slave L90 Relay performs the following functions:
Samples currents and voltages.
Removes DC offset from the current via the mimic algorithm.
Creates phaselets.
Calculates sum of squares data.
Transmits current data to all master L90 relays.
Performs all local relaying functions.
Receives current differential DTT and Direct Input signals from all other L90 relays.
Transmits direct output signals to all communicating relays.
Sends synchronization information of local clock to all other L90 clocks.
GE Multilin
2-11
The master L90 relay performs the following functions:

Performs all functions of a slave L90.
Receives current phasor information from all relays.
Performs the current differential algorithm.
Sends a current differential DTT signal to all L90 relays on the protected line.
CHn
IED-1
Rx
Rx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Optional redundant channel
Rx
Tx
CHn
Tx
IED-2
CHn
CHn
In the peer-to-peer mode, all L90 relays act as masters.
IED-1
Rx
Rx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Rx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Tx
CHn
CHn
Tx
IED-2
CHn
CHn
Typical two-terminal application
CHn
Rx
CHn
IED-3
Typical three-terminal application
831009A5.CDR
Figure 22: COMMUNICATIONS PATHS

2.2.2 CHANNEL MONITOR
The L90 has logic to detect that the communications channel is deteriorating or has failed completely. This can provide an
alarm indication and disable the current differential protection. Note that a failure of the communications from the master to
a slave does not prevent the master from performing the current differential algorithm; failure of the communications from a
slave to the master will prevent the master from performing the correct current differential logic. Channel propagation delay
is being continuously measured and adjusted according to changes in the communications path. Every relay on the protection system can assigned an unique ID to prevent advertent loopbacks at multiplexed channels.
2-12
GE Multilin

2.2.3 LOOPBACK TEST
This option allows the user to test the relay at one terminal of the line by looping the transmitter output to the receiver input;
at the same time, the signal sent to the remote will not change. A local loopback feature is included in the relay to simplify
single ended testing.
2.2.4 DIRECT TRANSFER TRIPPING
The L90 includes provision for sending and receiving a single-pole direct transfer trip (DTT) signal from current differential
protection between the L90 relays at the line terminals using the pilot communications channel. The user may also initiate
an additional eight pilot signals with an L90 communications channel to create trip, block, or signaling logic. A FlexLogic
operand, an external contact closure, or a signal over the LAN communication channels can be assigned for that logic.
GE Multilin
2-13
2.3 FUNCTIONALITY
2.3FUNCTIONALITY
2.3.1 PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS
Current differential protection: The current differential algorithms used in the L90 Line Current Differential System
are based on the Fourier transform phaselet approach and an adaptive statistical restraint. The L90 uses per-phase
differential at 64 kbps with two phaselets per cycle. A detailed description of the current differential algorithms is found
in chapter 8. The current differential protection can be set in a percentage differential scheme with a single or dual
slope.
Backup protection: In addition to the primary current differential protection, the L90 Line Current Differential System
incorporates backup functions that operate on the local relay current only, such as directional phase overcurrent, directional neutral overcurrent, negative-sequence overcurrent, undervoltage, overvoltage, and distance protection.
Multiple setting groups: The relay can store six groups of settings. They may be selected by user command, a configurable contact input or a FlexLogic equation to allow the relay to respond to changing conditions.
User-programmable logic: In addition to the built-in protection logic, the relay may be programmed by the user via
FlexLogic equations.
Configurable inputs and outputs: All of the contact converter inputs (digital inputs) to the relay may be assigned by
the user to directly block a protection element, operate an output relay or serve as an input to FlexLogic equations.
All of the outputs, except for the self test critical alarm contacts, may also be assigned by the user.
2.3.2 METERING AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS
Metering: The relay measures all input currents and calculates both phasors and symmetrical components. When AC
potential is applied to the relay via the optional voltage inputs, metering data includes phase and neutral current, phase
voltage, three phase and per phase W, VA, and var, and power factor. Frequency is measured on either current or voltage inputs. They may be called onto the local display or accessed via a computer. All terminal current phasors and differential currents are also displayed at all relays, allowing the user opportunity to analyze correct polarization of
currents at all terminals.
Event records: The relay has a sequence of events recorder which combines the recording of snapshot data and
oscillography data. Events consist of a broad range of change of state occurrences, including input contact changes,
measuring-element pickup and operation, FlexLogic equation changes, and self-test status. The relay stores up to
1024 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest microsecond. This provides the information needed to
determine a sequence of events, which can reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation after system
events.
Oscillography: The relay stores oscillography data at a sampling rate of 64 times per cycle. The relay can store a
maximum of 64 records. Each oscillography file includes a sampled data report consisting of:
Instantaneous sample of the selected currents and voltages (if AC potential is used),
The status of each selected contact input.
The status of each selected contact output.
The status of each selected measuring function.
The status of various selected logic signals, including virtual inputs and outputs.
The captured oscillography data files can be accessed via the remote communications ports on the relay.
CT failure and current unbalance alarm: The relay has current unbalance alarm logic. The unbalance alarm may be
supervised by a zero-sequence voltage detector. The user may block the relay from tripping when the current unbalance alarm operates.
Trip circuit monitor: On those outputs designed for trip duty, a trip voltage monitor will continuously measure the DC
voltage across output contacts to determine if the associated trip circuit is intact. If the voltage dips below the minimum
voltage or the breaker fails to open or close after a trip command, an alarm can be activated.
Self-test: The most comprehensive self testing of the relay is performed during a power-up. Because the system is not
performing any protection activities at power-up, tests that would be disruptive to protection processing may be performed. The processors in the CPU and all CT/VT modules participate in startup self-testing. Self-testing checks
approximately 85 to 90% of the hardware, and CRC/check-sum verification of all PROMs is performed. The proces-
2-14
GE Multilin
2.3 FUNCTIONALITY
sors communicate their results to each other so that if any failures are detected, they can be reported to the user. Each
processor must successfully complete its self tests before the relay begins protection activities.
During both startup and normal operation, the CPU polls all plug-in modules and checks that every one answers the
poll. The CPU compares the module types that identify themselves to the relay order code stored in memory and
declares an alarm if a module is either non-responding or the wrong type for the specific slot. When running under normal power system conditions, the relay processors will have idle time. During this time, each processor performs background self-tests that are not disruptive to the foreground processing.
2.3.3 OTHER FUNCTIONS
a) ALARMS
The relay contains a dedicated alarm relay, the critical failure alarm, housed in the power supply module. This output relay
is not user programmable. This relay has form-C contacts and is energized under normal operating conditions. The critical
failure alarm will become de-energized if the relay self test algorithms detect a failure that would prevent the relay from
properly protecting the transmission line.
b) LOCAL USER INTERFACE
The local user interface (on the faceplate) consists of a 2 20 liquid crystal display (LCD) and keypad. The keypad and display may be used to view data from the relay, to change settings in the relay, or to perform control actions. Also, the faceplate provides LED indications of status and events.
c) TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
The relay includes a clock which can run freely from the internal oscillator or be synchronized from an external IRIG-B signal. With the external signal, all relays wired to the same synchronizing signal will be synchronized to within 0.1 millisecond.
d) FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
Disturbance
Detector
I
Sample Raw
Value
Charging Current
Comp.
Offset
Removal
Compute
Phaselets
Offset
Removal
Compute
Phaselets
67P&N
50P,N&G
UR Platform
Phasors
Computations
dV
dt
51P,N&G
Trip Output
Configurable
Logic
27P
V
Sample Raw
Value
Compute
Phaselets
Filter
59P
21P&G
Sample
Hold
87L
Algorithm
PFLL Status
Frequency
Deviation
Master
Clock
Phase and Frequency

Locked Loop (PFLL)
Phase
Deviation
PHASELETS TO REMOTE
Remote Relay
Communications
Interface
PHASELETS FROM REMOTE

Direct Transfer Trip
831732A3.CDR
Figure 23: L90 BLOCK DIAGRAM
GE Multilin
2-15
2.3 FUNCTIONALITY
Peer
Peer
Channel
Control
Communication
Time
Stamps
Time Stamp
Clock
Ping-pong
Algorithm
Phase
Deviation
Clock
Control
Sampling
Control
Sample
Currents and
Voltages
Phase Deviation
Estimate
Phase Angle
Uncertainties
Estimate Phase
Angle Correction
from GPS signal
Frequency
Deviation
Compute
Frequency
Deviation
Raw
Sample
Remove Decaying
Offset and
Charging Current
Phaselets
Compute
Phaselets
Compute Positive
Sequence
Currents
Phasors
Phaselets
Align Phaselets
Compute Phasors and
Variance Parameters
Fault
Detector
Disturbance
Detector
Phaselets
Trip Output
Logic
831749A1.CDR
Figure 24: MAIN SOFTWARE MODULES
2-16
GE Multilin
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE
2.4.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated. FlexLogic operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using
FlexLogic to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic equations, or
interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts.
GROUND DISTANCE
PHASE DISTANCE
Characteristic:
mho (memory polarized or offset) or

quad (memory polarized or non-directional), selectable individually per zone
Characteristic:
Number of zones:
Directionality:
forward, reverse, or non-directional
Reactance polarization: negative-sequence or zero-sequence

current
Reach (secondary ):
0.02 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01
Non-homogeneity angle: 40 to 40 in steps of 1
Reach accuracy:
5% including the effect of CVT transients up to an SIR of 30
Number of zones:
Directionality:
forward, reverse, or non-directional
Reach (secondary ):
0.02 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01
30 to 90 in steps of 1
Reach accuracy:
5% including the effect of CVT transients up to an SIR of 30
Distance:
Characteristic angle:
Comparator limit angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1
Mho (memory polarized or offset) or

Quad (memory polarized or non-directional)
Distance characteristic angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1
Directional supervision:
Distance comparator limit angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1
Limit angle:
Directional supervision:
Right blinder (Quad only):

Reach:
0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01

Left Blinder (Quad only):

Reach:
Time delay:
Timing accuracy:
0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01

Limit angle:
Zero-sequence compensation
Z0/Z1 magnitude:
0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01
Z0/Z1 angle:
Zero-sequence mutual compensation
0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Z0M/Z1 magnitude:
0.00 to 7.00 in steps of 0.01
3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater
Z0M/Z1 angle:
Right blinder (Quad only):
Current supervision:
line-to-line current
Reach:
0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01
Pickup:
0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout:
97 to 98%
Level:
Left blinder (Quad only):
5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1
Reach:
0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01
VT location:
all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers
CT location:
all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers
Memory duration:
Voltage supervision pickup (series compensation applications):

0 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Time delay:
0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy:
Operation time:
1 to 1.5 cycles (typical)
Level:
neutral current (3I_0)
Reset time:
1 power cycle (typical)
Pickup:
0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout:
Memory duration:
97 to 98%
5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1
Voltage supervision pickup (series compensation applications):

Operation time:
1 to 1.5 cycles (typical)
Reset time:
1 power cycle (typical)
LINE PICKUP
Phase instantaneous overcurrent: 0.000 to 30.000 pu
GE Multilin
Undervoltage pickup:
0.000 to 3.000 pu
Overvoltage delay:
0.000 to 65.535 s
2-17
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
LINE CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL (87L)
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
Application:
Pickup level:
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level:
97 to 98% of pickup
Pickup current level:
2 or 3 terminal line, series compensated

line, tapped line, with charging current
compensation
0.20 to 4.00 pu in steps of 0.01
CT Tap (CT mismatch factor): 0.20 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01
Slope # 1:
1 to 50%
Slope # 2:
1 to 70%
Level accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0 CT rating:
> 2.0 CT rating
Overreach:
0.5% of reading or 0.4% of rated

(whichever is greater)
1.5% of reading
<2%
Breakpoint between slopes: 0.0 to 20.0 pu in steps of 0.1
Pickup delay:
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DTT:
Direct Transfer Trip (1 and 3 pole) to

remote L90
Reset delay:
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Operating Time:
1.0 to 1.5 power cycles duration
Operate time:
<16 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz
(Phase/Ground IOC)
<20 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz
(Neutral IOC)
Timing accuracy:
Operate at 1.5 pickup

3% or 4 ms (whichever is greater)
Asymmetrical channel delay compensation using GPS:

asymmetry up to 10 ms
Zero-sequence current differential (87LG):
87LG pickup level:
0.05 to 1.00 pu in steps of 0.01
87LG slope:
1 to 50%
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC
87LG pickup delay:
0.00 to 5.00 s in steps of 0.01
Current:
Phasor
87LG operate time:
1.5 to 2.5 cycles
Pickup level:
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
LINE CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL TRIP LOGIC

87L trip:
Adds security for trip decision; creates 1

and 3 pole trip logic
DTT:
Engaged Direct Transfer Trip (1 and 3

pole) from remote L90
DD:
Sensitive Disturbance Detector to detect

fault occurrence
Stub bus protection:
Security for ring bus and 1 breaker

configurations
Open pole detector:
Security for sequential and evolving

faults
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC
Current:
Phasor or RMS
Pickup level:
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level:
97% to 98% of pickup
Dropout level:
97% to 98% of pickup
Level accuracy:

from 0.1 to 2.0 x CT rating
1.5% of reading > 2.0 x CT rating
Curve shapes:
IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely
Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short
Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/
Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves
(programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s
base curve)
Curve multiplier (Time dial): 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01

Reset type:
Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE) and Linear
Timing accuracy:
Operate at > 1.03 actual pickup

3.5% of operate time or cycle
Level accuracy:
for 0.1 to 2.0 CT:

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC

Current:
Phasor
for > 2.0 CT:
1.5% of reading > 2.0 CT rating
Pickup level:
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely
Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short
Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/
Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves
(programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s
base curve)
Dropout level:
97 to 98% of pickup
Level accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: 0.5% of reading

or 0.4% of rated (whichever is greater);
> 2.0 CT rating: 1.5% of reading
Curve shapes:
Curve multiplier:
Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of

0.01
Reset type:
Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)
Timing accuracy:
Operate at > 1.03 actual pickup

3.5% of operate time or cycle
2-18
Overreach:
< 2%
Pickup delay:
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Reset delay:
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Operate time:
< 20 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz
Timing accuracy:
Operate at 1.5 pickup

GE Multilin
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

90 (quadrature)
WATTMETRIC ZERO-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL
Relay connection:
Measured power:
zero-sequence
Quadrature voltage:
ABC phase seq.: phase A (VBC), phase

B (VCA), phase C (VAB); ACB phase
seq.: phase A (VCB), phase B (VAC),
phase C (VBA)
Number of elements:
Polarizing voltage threshold: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

Current sensitivity threshold: 0.05 pu
Angle accuracy:
Operation time (FlexLogic operands):

Tripping (reverse load, forward fault):<
12 ms, typically
Blocking (forward load, reverse fault):<
8 ms, typically
Minimum power:
0.001 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001
Pickup level accuracy:
1% or 0.0025 pu, whichever is greater
Hysteresis:
3% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater
Pickup delay:
definite time (0 to 600.00 s in steps of

0.01), inverse time, or FlexCurve
Inverse time multiplier:
0.01 to 2.00 s in steps of 0.01
Time accuracy:
Operate time:
<30 ms at 60 Hz
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
Voltage:
Phasor only
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
Pickup level:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Directionality:
Co-existing forward and reverse
Dropout level:
102 to 103% of pickup
Polarizing:
Voltage, Current, Dual
Level accuracy:
0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Polarizing voltage:
V_0 or VX
Curve shapes:
Polarizing current:
IG
GE IAV Inverse;
Definite Time (0.1s base curve)
Operating current:
I_0
Curve multiplier:
Level sensing:
3 (|I_0| K |I_1|), IG
Time dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of

0.01
Restraint, K:
0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy:
Operate at < 0.90 pickup

3.5% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater)
Limit angle:
40 to 90 in steps of 1, independent for

forward and reverse
Angle accuracy:
Offset impedance:
0.00 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01
Pickup level:
0.002 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.01
Dropout level:
97 to 98%
Operation time:
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC

Directionality:
Co-existing forward and reverse
Polarizing:
Voltage
Polarizing voltage:
V_2
Operating current:
I_2
Level sensing:
Zero-sequence:|I_0| K |I_1|
Negative-sequence:|I_2| K |I_1|
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup level:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level:
102 to 103% of pickup
Level accuracy:
Curve shapes:
GE IAV Inverse, Definite Time
Curve multiplier:
Time Dial = 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Timing accuracy:
3% of operate time or 4 ms
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
Voltage:
Phasor only
Pickup level:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level:
97 to 98% of pickup
Level accuracy:
Pickup delay:
0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s

< 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz
Restraint, K:
0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001
Operate time:
Timing accuracy:
Limit angle:
40 to 90 in steps of 1, independent for

forward and reverse
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
Angle accuracy:
Dropout level:
97 to 98% of pickup
Offset impedance:
0.00 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01
Level accuracy:
Pickup level:
0.015 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.01
Pickup delay:
Dropout level:
97 to 98%
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 (definite

time) or user-defined curve
Operation time:
Reset delay:
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Timing accuracy:
Operate time:
GE Multilin
Pickup level:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
2-19
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES
Pickup level:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (POTT)
Dropout level:
97 to 98% of pickup
Level accuracy:
TRIP OUTPUT
Pickup delay:
0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Collects trip and reclose input requests and issues outputs to control tripping and reclosing.
Reset delay:
0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Communications timer delay: 0 to 65535 s in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy:
3% of operate time or 4 ms
Evolving fault timer:
0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy:
Operate time:
BREAKER FAILURE
POWER SWING DETECT

Functions:
Power swing block, Out-of-step trip
Mode:
1-pole, 3-pole
Characteristic:
Mho or Quad
phase, neutral current
Measured impedance:
Positive-sequence
Current supv. pickup:
0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Blocking / tripping modes: 2-step or 3-step
Current supv. dropout:
97 to 98% of pickup
Tripping mode:
Current supv. accuracy:

0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: 0.75% of reading or 2% of rated
above 2 CT rating:
2.5% of reading
Initiation:
Left and right blinders (sec. ): 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01
programmable per phase from any FlexLogic operand
Angle accuracy:
0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1

1 per CT bank with a minimum of 2
BREAKER FLASHOVER
Operating quantity:
97 to 98% of pickup
Impedance accuracy:
Fault duration accuracy: 0.25 of a power cycle

Availability:
0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level:
accumulates breaker duty (I2t) and measures fault duration
Compensation for auxiliary relays: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

Alarm threshold:
Pickup level:
Fwd / reverse reach (sec. ): 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01
BREAKER ARCING CURRENT

Principle:
Early or Delayed
phase current, voltage and voltage difference
5%
Fwd / reverse angle impedances: 40 to 90 in steps of 1

2
Characteristic limit angles: 40 to 140 in steps of 1

Timers:
0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy:
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
Responds to:
Positive-sequence quantities
Minimum voltage:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Reach (sec. ):
0.02 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01
Impedance accuracy:
5%
Angle:
Angle accuracy:
Pickup level voltage:
Dropout level voltage:
97 to 98% of pickup
Pickup level current:
Dropout level current:
97 to 98% of pickup
Level accuracy:
0.5% or 0.1% of rated, whichever is

greater
Pickup delay:
0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Time accuracy:
OPEN POLE DETECTOR
Operate time:
<42 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz
Functionality:
Detects an open pole condition, monitoring breaker auxiliary contacts, the current in each phase and optional voltages
on the line
Current pickup level:
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Pickup delay:
0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Reset delay:
0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Time accuracy:
Operate time:
< 30 ms at 60 Hz
SYNCHROCHECK
Max voltage difference: 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1
Max angle difference:
Max freq. difference:
0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Hysteresis for max. freq. diff.: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01
Line capacitive reactances (XC1, XC0): 300.0 to 9999.9 sec. in

steps of 0.1
Dead source function:
Remote current pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
None, LV1 & DV2, DV1 & LV2, DV1 or

DV2, DV1 xor DV2, DV1 & DV2
(L = Live, D = Dead)
AUTORECLOSURE
Two breakers applications
Single- and three-pole tripping schemes
Up to 4 reclose attempts before lockout
Selectable reclosing mode and breaker sequence
2-20
Current dropout level:
pickup + 3%, not less than 0.05 pu
TRIP BUS (TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC)

Number of elements:
Number of inputs:
16
Operate time:
<2 ms at 60 Hz
Time accuracy:
GE Multilin
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS
FLEXLOGIC
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical

visualization (keypad programmable)
Number:
48 plus trip and alarm
Programmability:
from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input

self-reset or latched
Lines of code:
512
Internal variables:
64
Reset mode:
Supported operations:
NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2

to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs),
NAND (2 to 16 inputs), latch (reset-dominant), edge detectors, timers
LED TEST
Inputs:
any logical variable, contact, or virtual

input
Number of timers:
32
Pickup delay:
0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
Dropout delay:
0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
Initiation:
from any digital input or user-programmable condition
Number of tests:
3, interruptible at any time
Duration of full test:
approximately 3 minutes
Test sequence 1:
all LEDs on
Test sequence 2:
all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s
Test sequence 3:
all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
FLEXCURVES
Number:
4 (A through D)
Reset points:
40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Operate points:
80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
Time delay:
0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
FLEX STATES
Number:
up to 256 logical variables grouped

under 16 Modbus addresses
Programmability:
any logical variable, contact, or virtual

input
Number of displays:
16
Lines of display:
2 20 alphanumeric characters
Parameters:
up to 5, any Modbus register addresses
Invoking and scrolling:
keypad, or any user-programmable condition, including pushbuttons
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons: 7
Operation:
drive FlexLogic operands
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)
Number of elements:
Number of pushbuttons: 12 (standard faceplate);

16 (enhanced faceplate)
Operating signal:
any analog actual value, or two values in

differential mode
Mode:
self-reset, latched
Display message:
2 lines of 20 characters each
FLEXELEMENTS
Operating signal mode: signed or absolute value
Drop-out timer:
0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
Operating mode:
level, delta
Autoreset timer:
0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Comparator direction:
over, under
Hold timer:
Pickup Level:
90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
SELECTOR SWITCH
Hysteresis:
0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
Number of elements:
Delta dt:
20 ms to 60 days
Upper position limit:
Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Selecting mode:
time-out or acknowledge
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Time-out timer:
Type:
set-dominant or reset-dominant
Control inputs:
step-up and 3-bit
Number:
16 (individually programmed)
Power-up mode:
Output:
stored in non-volatile memory
Execution sequence:
as input prior to protection, control, and

FlexLogic
restore from non-volatile memory or synchronize to a 3-bit control input or synch/

restore mode
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
Number of elements:
GE Multilin
48
Operating signal:
any FlexLogic operand
Pickup delay:
0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
Dropout delay:
0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy:
2-21
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.3 MONITORING
FAULT LOCATOR
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Maximum records:
64
Sampling rate:
64 samples per power cycle
Method:
multi-ended or single-ended during

channel failure
Triggers:
any element pickup, dropout, or operate;

digital input change of state; digital output change of state; FlexLogic equation
Voltage source:
wye-connected VTs, delta-connected

VTs and neutral voltage, delta-connected
VTs and zero-sequence current (approximation)
Data:
AC input channels; element state; digital

input state; digital output state
Maximum accuracy if:
fault resistance is zero or fault currents

from all line terminals are in phase
Data storage:
in non-volatile memory
Relay accuracy:
1.5% (V > 10 V, I > 0.1 pu)
Worst-case accuracy:
EVENT RECORDER
Capacity:
1024 events
Time-tag:
VT%error +
user data
to 1 microsecond
CT%error +
user data
Triggers:
any element pickup, dropout, or operate;

digital input change of state; digital output change of state; self-test events
ZLine%error +
user data
METHOD%error +
0.5% (multi-ended method), see chapter

8 (single-ended method)
Data storage:
in non-volatile memory
RELAY ACCURACY%error + (1.5%)
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
DATA LOGGER
Number of channels:
1 to 16
Output format:
per IEEE C37.118 standard
Parameters:
any available analog actual value
Number of channels:
Sampling rate:
15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1
14 synchrophasors, 8 analogs, 16 digitals
Trigger:
any FlexLogic operand
TVE (total vector error)
<1%
Mode:
continuous or triggered
Triggering:
Storage capacity:
(NN is dependent on memory)
frequency, voltage, current, power, rate

of change of frequency, user-defined
Reporting rate:
1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60

times per second
Number of clients:
One over TCP/IP port, two over UDP/IP

ports
AC ranges:
As indicated in appropriate specifications

sections
1-second rate:
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
60-minute rate:
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
Network reporting format: 16-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE floating

point numbers
Network reporting style: rectangular (real and imaginary) or polar
(magnitude and angle) coordinates
Post-filtering:
none, 3-point, 5-point, 7-point
Calibration:
2.4.4 METERING
RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND
APPARENT POWER (VA)
Accuracy at
0.1 to 2.0 CT rating:
Accuracy:
> 2.0 CT rating:

1.0% of reading
RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy:
REAL POWER (WATTS)

Accuracy:
1.0% of reading at
0.8 < PF 1.0 and 0.8 < PF 1.0
REACTIVE POWER (VARS)

Accuracy:
2-22
1.0% of reading at 0.2 PF 0.2
1.0% of reading
WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Accuracy:
2.0% of reading
Range:
0 to 1 106 MWh
Parameters:
three-phase only
Update rate:
50 ms
VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Accuracy:
2.0% of reading
Range:
0 to 1 106 Mvarh
Parameters:
three-phase only
Update rate:
50 ms
GE Multilin
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
FREQUENCY
Accuracy at
V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu:
I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu:
I > 0.25 pu:
DEMAND
0.001 Hz (when voltage signal is used
for frequency measurement)
0.05 Hz
0.001 Hz (when current signal is used
for frequency measurement)
Measurements:
Phases A, B, and C present and maximum measured currents

3-Phase Power (P, Q, and S) present
and maximum measured currents
Accuracy:
2.0%
2.4.5 INPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING
AC CURRENT
1000 maximum
CT rated primary:
1 to 50000 A
Dry contacts:
CT rated secondary:
1 A or 5 A by connection
Wet contacts:
300 V DC maximum
Nominal frequency:
20 to 65 Hz
Selectable thresholds:
17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Relay burden:
< 0.2 VA at rated secondary
Tolerance:
10%
Conversion range:
Standard CT:
0.02 to 46 CT rating RMS symmetrical
Sensitive Ground CT module:
0.002 to 4.6 CT rating RMS symmetrical
Current withstand:
20 ms at 250 times rated

1 sec. at 100 times rated
continuous at 3 times rated
Short circuit rating:
150000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250

V maximum (primary current to external
CT)
AC VOLTAGE
Contacts per common return: 2

Recognition time:
< 1 ms
Debounce time:
0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized)

Auto-burnish impulse current: 50 to 70 mA
Duration of auto-burnish impulse: 25 to 50 ms
DCMA INPUTS
Current input (mA DC):
0 to 1, 0 to +1, 1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10,

0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)
Input impedance:
379 10%
VT rated secondary:
50.0 to 240.0 V
Conversion range:
1 to + 20 mA DC
VT ratio:
1.00 to 24000.00
Accuracy:
0.2% of full scale
Nominal frequency:
20 to 65 Hz; the nominal system frequency should be chosen as 50 Hz or

60 Hz only.
Type:
Passive
Relay burden:
< 0.25 VA at 120 V
Conversion range:
1 to 275 V
Voltage withstand:
continuous at 260 V to neutral

1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral
CONTACT INPUTS
Dry contacts:
1000 maximum
Wet contacts:
300 V DC maximum
Selectable thresholds:
17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Tolerance:
10%
RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire):
100 Platinum, 100 & 120 Nickel, 10

Copper
Sensing current:
5 mA
Range:
50 to +250C
Accuracy:
2C
Isolation:
36 V pk-pk
IRIG-B INPUT
Contacts per common return: 4

Recognition time:
< 1 ms
Debounce time:
0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized)
Amplitude modulation:
1 to 10 V pk-pk
DC shift:
TTL
Input impedance:
22 k
Isolation:
2 kV
REMOTE INPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Number of input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs
Number of remote devices: 16
Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Number of remote DPS inputs: 5
GE Multilin
2-23
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.6 POWER SUPPLY
ALL RANGES
LOW RANGE
Nominal DC voltage:
24 to 48 V
Volt withstand:
2 Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms
Minimum DC voltage:
20 V
Power consumption:
Maximum DC voltage:
60 V
Voltage loss hold-up:
20 ms duration at nominal
typical = 15 to 20 W/VA
maximum = 50 W/VA
contact factory for exact order code consumption
NOTE: Low range is DC only.
INTERNAL FUSE
RATINGS
HIGH RANGE
Nominal DC voltage:
125 to 250 V
Minimum DC voltage:
88 V
Maximum DC voltage:
300 V
Nominal AC voltage:
100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz
Minimum AC voltage:
88 V at 25 to 100 Hz
Maximum AC voltage:
265 V at 25 to 100 Hz
Voltage loss hold-up:
200 ms duration at nominal
Low range power supply: 8 A / 250 V

High range power supply: 4 A / 250 V
INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AC:
DC:
100 000 A RMS symmetrical

10 000 A
2.4.7 OUTPUTS
FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY
FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous:
6A
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
24 V
1A
48 V
0.5 A
125 V
0.3 A
250 V
0.2 A
Operate time:
< 4 ms
Contact material:
silver alloy
Carry continuous:
8A
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):

VOLTAGE
CURRENT
24 V
1A
48 V
0.5 A
125 V
0.3 A
250 V
0.2 A
Operate time:
< 8 ms
Contact material:
silver alloy
FAST FORM-C RELAY
LATCHING RELAY
Carry continuous:
6A
Break at L/R of 40 ms:
0.25 A DC max.
Make and carry:
0.1 A max. (resistive load)
Minimum load impedance:

INPUT
VOLTAGE
IMPEDANCE
Operate time:
< 4 ms
2 W RESISTOR
1 W RESISTOR
Contact material:
silver alloy
250 V DC
20 K
50 K
Control:
separate operate and reset inputs
120 V DC
5 K
2 K
Control mode:
operate-dominant or reset-dominant
48 V DC
2 K
2 K
24 V DC
2 K
2 K
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR

Applicable voltage:
approx. 15 to 250 V DC
Trickle current:
approx. 1 to 2.5 mA
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR

Threshold current:
2-24
approx. 80 to 100 mA
Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a

required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.
Operate time:
< 0.6 ms
Internal Limiting Resistor: 100 , 2 W
GE Multilin
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY
DCMA OUTPUTS
Operate and release time: <100 s
Range:
1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Maximum voltage:
Max. load resistance:
12 k for 1 to 1 mA range
12 k for 0 to 1 mA range
600 for 4 to 20 mA range
Accuracy:
0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range

265 V DC
Maximum continuous current: 5 A at 45C; 4 A at 65C

Make and carry:
for 0.2 s:
for 0.03 s
30 A as per ANSI C37.90

300 A
Breaking capacity:
UL508
Operations/
interval
5000 ops /
1 s-On, 9 s-Off
1000 ops /
0.5 s-On, 0.5 s-Off
Break
capability
(0 to 250 V
DC)
Utility
application
(autoreclose
scheme)
5 ops /
0.2 s-On,
0.2 s-Off
within 1
minute
Industrial
application
10000 ops /
0.2 s-On,
30 s-Off
10 A
L/R = 40 ms
10 A
L/R = 40 ms
0.8 A
L/R = 40 ms
IRIG-B OUTPUT
Amplitude:
10 V peak-peak RS485 level
Maximum load:
100 ohms
Time delay:
1 ms for AM input
40 s for DC-shift input
Isolation:
2 kV
CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT

(FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)
Capacity:
100 mA DC at 48 V DC
Isolation:
300 Vpk
Isolation:
1.5 kV
Driving signal:
any FlexAnalog quantity
Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: 90 to 90 pu in steps of

0.001
ETHERNET SWITCH (HIGH VOLTAGE, TYPE 2S)

Nominal DC voltage:
3.2 A
L/R = 10 ms
1.6 A
L/R = 20 ms
99% Settling time to a step change: 100 ms
88 V DC
Maximum DC voltage:
300 V DC
Input Current:
0.9 A DC maximum
Nominal AC voltage:
100 to 240 V AC, 0.26 to 0.16 A/26 to 39

VA at 50/60 Hz
Minimum AC voltage:
85 V AC, 0.31 A/22 VA at 50/60 Hz
Maximum AC voltage:
265 V AC, 0.16 A/42 VA at 50/60 Hz
Internal fuse:
3 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO

BLO;
Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number:
SCD-A 003
ETHERNET SWITCH (LOW VOLTAGE, TYPE 2T)

Nominal voltage:
48 V DC, 0.31 A/15 W
Minimum voltage:
30 V DC, 0.43 A/16 W
Maximum voltage:
60 V DC
Internal fuse:
5 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO

BLO;
Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number:
SCD-A 005
REMOTE OUTPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Standard output points: 32
User output points:
GE Multilin
110 to 240 V DC
Minimum DC voltage:
32
2-25
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
RS232
RS485
Maximum fiber segment length calculation:
1 or 2 rear ports:
ETHERNET SWITCH FIBER OPTIC PORTS
19.2 kbps, Modbus RTU
Front port:
Up to 115 kbps, Modbus RTU, isolated

together at 36 Vpk
Typical distance:
1200 m
Isolation:
2 kV
OPB = P T ( MIN ) P R ( MIN )

where OPB = optical power budget, PT = transmitter output power,
and PR = receiver sensitivity.
ETHERNET (FIBER)
PARAMETER
FIBER TYPE
10MB MULTIMODE
Wavelength
100MB MULTI- 100MB SINGLEMODE

MODE
820 nm
1310 nm
ST
ST
SC
Transmit power
20 dBm
20 dBm
15 dBm
Receiver sensitivity
30 dBm
30 dBm
30 dBm
10 dB
10 dB
15 dB
Maximum input
power
7.6 dBm
14 dBm
7 dBm
Typical distance
1.65 km
2 km
15 km
Duplex
full/half
full/half
full/half
yes
yes
yes
Connector
Power budget
Redundancy
The maximum fiber segment length between two adjacent

switches or between a switch and a device is calculated as follows. First, calculate the optical power budget (OPB) of each
device using the manufacturers data sheets.
1310 nm
The UR-2S and UR-2T only support 100 Mb multimode
ETHERNET (10/100 MB TWISTED PAIR)

Modes:
10 MB, 10/100 MB (auto-detect)
Connector:
RJ45
SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)
The worst case optical power budget (OPBWORST) is then calculated by taking the lower of the two calculated power budgets, subtracting 1 dB for LED aging, and then subtracting the total insertion
loss. The total insertion loss is calculated by multiplying the number of connectors in each single fiber path by 0.5 dB. For example,
with a single fiber cable between the two devices, there will be a
minimum of two connections in either transmit or receive fiber
paths for a total insertion loss of 1db for either direction:
Total insertion loss = number of connectors 0.5 dB
= 2 0.5 dB = 1.0 dB
The worst-case optical power budget between two type 2T or 2S
modules using a single fiber cable is:
OPB WORST = OPB 1 dB (LED aging) total insertion loss
10dB 1dB 1dB = 8dB
To calculate the maximum fiber length, divide the worst-case optical power budget by the cable attenuation per unit distance specified in the manufacturer data sheets. For example, typical
attenuation for 62.5/125 m glass fiber optic cable is approximately 2.8 dB per km. In our example, this would result in the following maximum fiber length:
OPB WORST (in dB)
Maximum fiber length = ------------------------------------------------------cable loss (in dB/km)
8 dB
= --------------------------- = 2.8km
2.8 dB/km
The customer must use the attenuation specified within the manufacturer data sheets for accurate calculation of the maximum fiber
length.
ETHERNET SWITCH 10/100BASE-T PORTS

Connector type:
RJ45
MAXIMUM 10 MBPS ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS

Unshielded twisted pair: 100 m (328 ft.)
Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.)
MAXIMUM STANDARD FAST ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS
10Base-T (CAT 3, 4, 5 UTP): 100 m (328 ft.)
100Base-TX (CAT 5 UTP):100 m (328 ft.)
Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.)
2-26
GE Multilin
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS

INTERFACE TYPE
TYPICAL DISTANCE
RS422
1200 m
G.703
100 m
NOTE
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power

and does not take into consideration the clock
source provided by the user.
LINK POWER BUDGET

EMITTER,
FIBER TYPE
TRANSMIT
POWER
RECEIVED
SENSITIVITY
POWER
BUDGET
820 nm LED,
Multimode
20 dBm
30 dBm
10 dB
1300 nm LED,
Multimode
21 dBm
30 dBm
9 dB
1300 nm ELED,
Singlemode
23 dBm
32 dBm
9 dB
1300 nm Laser,
Singlemode
1 dBm
30 dBm
29 dB
1550 nm Laser,
Singlemode
+5 dBm
30 dBm
35 dB
NOTE
NOTE
These power budgets are calculated from the

manufacturers worst-case transmitter power
and worst case receiver sensitivity.
The power budgets for the 1300nm ELED are calculated from the manufacturer's transmitter
power and receiver sensitivity at ambient temperature. At extreme temperatures these values will
deviate based on component tolerance. On average, the output power will decrease as the temperature is increased by a factor 1dB / 5C.
MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER

EMITTER, FIBER TYPE
MAX. OPTICAL
INPUT POWER
820 nm LED, Multimode
7.6 dBm
1300 nm LED, Multimode
11 dBm
1300 nm ELED, Singlemode
14 dBm
1300 nm Laser, Singlemode
14 dBm
1550 nm Laser, Singlemode
14 dBm
TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE

EMITTER TYPE
CABLE
TYPE
CONNECTOR
TYPE
TYPICAL
DISTANCE
820 nm LED,
multimode
62.5/125 m
ST
1.65 km
1300 nm LED,
multimode
62.5/125 m
ST
3.8 km
1300 nm ELED,
single mode
9/125 m
ST
11.4 km
1300 nm Laser,
single mode
9/125 m
ST
64 km
1550 nm Laser,
single-mode
9/125 m
ST
105 km
NOTE
Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As
actual losses will vary from one installation to
another, the distance covered by your system
may vary.
CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)

ST connector
2 dB
FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode
3 dB/km
1300 nm multimode
1 dB/km
1300 nm singlemode
0.35 dB/km
1550 nm singlemode
0.25 dB/km
Splice losses:
One splice every 2 km,

at 0.05 dB loss per splice.
SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for
all other losses.
Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel
asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
2.4.10 ENVIRONMENTAL
AMBIENT TEMPERATURES
OTHER
Storage temperature:
Altitude:
2000 m (maximum)
Pollution degree:
II
Overvoltage category:
II
Ingress protection:
IP20 front, IP10 back
40 to 85C
Operating temperature: 40 to 60C; the LCD contrast may be

impaired at temperatures less than
20C
HUMIDITY
Humidity:
GE Multilin
operating up to 95% (non-condensing) at

55C (as per IEC60068-2-30 variant 1,
6days).
2-27
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.11 TYPE TESTS
TYPE TESTS
TEST
REFERENCE STANDARD
TEST LEVEL
Dielectric voltage withstand
EN60255-5
2.3 kV
Impulse voltage withstand
EN60255-5
5 kV
Damped oscillatory
IEC61000-4-18 / IEC60255-22-1
2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Electrostatic discharge
EN61000-4-2 / IEC60255-22-2
Level 3
RF immunity
EN61000-4-3 / IEC60255-22-3
Level 3
Fast transient disturbance
EN61000-4-4 / IEC60255-22-4
Class A and B
Surge immunity
EN61000-4-5 / IEC60255-22-5
Level 3 and 4
Conducted RF immunity
EN61000-4-6 / IEC60255-22-6
Level 3
Power frequency immunity
EN61000-4-7 / IEC60255-22-7
Class A and B
Voltage interruption and ripple DC
IEC60255-11
12% ripple, 200 ms interrupts
Radiated and conducted emissions
CISPR11 / CISPR22 / IEC60255-25
Class A
Sinusoidal vibration
IEC60255-21-1
Class 1
Shock and bump
IEC60255-21-2
Class 1
Seismic
IEC60255-21-3
Class 1
Power magnetic immunity
IEC61000-4-8
Level 5
Pulse magnetic immunity
IEC61000-4-9
Level 4
Damped magnetic immunity
IEC61000-4-10
Level 4
Voltage dip and interruption
IEC61000-4-11
0, 40, 70, 80% dips; 250 / 300 cycle interrupts
Damped oscillatory
IEC61000-4-12
2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Conducted RF immunity, 0 to 150 kHz
IEC61000-4-16
Level 4
Voltage ripple
IEC61000-4-17
15% ripple
Ingress protection
IEC60529
IP40 front, IP10 back
Cold
IEC60068-2-1
40C for 16 hours
Hot
IEC60068-2-2
85C for 16 hours
Humidity
IEC60068-2-30
6 day, variant 1
Damped oscillatory
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
2.5 kV, 1 MHz
RF immunity
IEEE/ANSIC37.90.2
20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz
Safety
UL508
e83849 NKCR
Safety
UL C22.2-14
e83849 NKCR7
Safety
UL1053
e83849 NKCR
2.4.12 PRODUCTION TESTS

THERMAL
Products go through an environmental test based upon an
Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.
2-28
GE Multilin
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.13 APPROVALS
APPROVALS
COMPLIANCE
APPLICABLE
COUNCIL DIRECTIVE
ACCORDING TO
CE compliance
Low voltage directive
EN60255-5
EMC directive
EN60255-26 / EN50263
EN61000-6-5
North America
---
UL508
---
UL1053
---
C22.2 No. 14
2.4.14 MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING
CLEANING
Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (2 inch-pounds)

of torque.
Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust

has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used.
NOTE
GE Multilin
Units that are stored in a de-energized state should be

powered up once per year, for one hour continuously, to
avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors.
2-29
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2-30
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION
3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT
a) HORIZONTAL UNITS
The L90 Line Current Differential System is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable faceplate.
The faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains
additional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators.
The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is
hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear
depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access
the keypad or RS232 communications port.
The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of
your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent
equipment.
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.
11.016
[279,81 mm]
9.687
[246,05 mm]
17.56
[446,02 mm]
7.460
[189,48 mm]
6.995
[177,67 mm]
6.960
[176,78 mm]
19.040
[483,62 mm]
842807A1.CDR
Figure 31: L90 HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)
GE Multilin
3-1
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
18.370
[466,60 mm]
0.280
[7,11 mm]
Typ. x 4
CUT-OUT
4.000
[101,60 mm]
17.750
[450,85 mm]
842808A1.CDR
Figure 32: L90 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING (ENHANCED PANEL)
Figure 33: L90 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)

b) VERTICAL UNITS
The L90 Line Current Differential System is available as a reduced size () vertical mount unit, with a removable faceplate.
The faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains
additional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators.
The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is
hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear
depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access
the keypad or RS232 communications port.
The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of
your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent
equipment.
3-2
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.
11.015
7.482
15.000
1.329
14.025
13.560
4.000
9.780
843809A1.CDR
Figure 34: L90 VERTICAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)
GE Multilin
3-3
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
UR SERIES
Figure 35: L90 VERTICAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)

For details on side mounting L90 devices with the enhanced front panel, refer to the following documents available online
from the GE Multilin website.
GEK-113180: UR-series UR-V side-mounting front panel assembly instructions
GEK-113181: Connecting a Remote UR-V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertical UR Device Instruction Sheet
GEK-113182: Connecting a Remote UR-V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertically-Mounted Horizontal UR Device
Instruction Sheet
For side mounting UR devices with the standard front panel, use the following figures.
3-4
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
Figure 36: L90 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION (STANDARD PANEL)
GE Multilin
3-5
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
Figure 37: L90 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING REAR DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION
WARNING
Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been
removed from the unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal
injury, damage to the unit or connected equipment, or undesired operation!
Proper electrostatic discharge protection (for example, a static strap) must be used when
coming in contact with modules while the relay is energized!
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with
like modules in their original factory configured slots.
The enhanced faceplate can be opened to the left, once the thumb screw has been removed, as shown below. This allows
for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal. The new wide-angle hinge assembly in the enhanced front panel opens
completely and allows easy access to all modules in the L90.
3-6
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
842812A1.CDR
Figure 38: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)

The standard faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shown
below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.
Figure 39: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (STANDARD FACEPLATE)

To properly remove a module, the ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled
simultaneously. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. Record the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. Modules with current
input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits.
To properly insert a module, ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/
inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is
smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously.
When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
All CPU modules except the 9E are equipped with 10/100Base-T or 100Base-F Ethernet connectors. These connectors must be individually disconnected from the module before it can be removed from the chassis.
NOTE
GE Multilin
3-7
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
The 4.0x release of the L90 relay includes new hardware modules.The new CPU modules are specified with codes
9E and higher. The new CT/VT modules are specified with the codes 8F and higher.
NOTE
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with new CPUs; similarly, old CT/VT modules can only be used with old
CPUs. To prevent hardware mismatches, the new modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating Attn.:
Ensure CPU and DSP module label colors are the same!. In the event that there is a mismatch between the
CPU and CT/VT module, the relay will not function and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be displayed.
All other input and output modules are compatible with the new hardware. Firmware versions 4.0x and higher are
only compatible with the new hardware modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older hardware modules.
3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT
3
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA
Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A
360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break
4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W
GE Multilin
Technical Support:
Tel: (905) 294-6222
Fax: (905) 201-2098
T
c
S
b
http://www.GEIndustrial.com/Multilin
Made in
Canada
P
c
N
b
M
c
L
b
L90D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A
000
ZZZZZZ
D
MAZB98000029
D
1998/01/05
Model:
Mods:
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number:
Firmware:
Mfg. Date:
RATINGS:
Line Differential Relay
J
c
H
b
G
c
F
b
Tx2
IN
Rx1
Optional
contact
input/
output
module
Optional
Optional
contact
CT/VT or
input/output
contact
module
input/output
module
Optional
contact
input/output
module
CT/VT
module
CPU module
(Ethernet not
available when
ordered with
Ethernet switch)
2
3
4
5
6
Tx2
CH2
OUT
Optional
direct
input/output
module
CH1
Tx
Rx
CH2
Tx2
Optional
Ethernet
switch
Tx1
a
1
Rx2
Rx1
Tx1
Tx1
CH1
L90
Rx2
Power
supply
module
831781A4.CDR
Figure 310: REAR TERMINAL VIEW
WARNING
Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in
order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the
first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following
figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.
3-8
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3
Figure 311: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS
GE Multilin
3-9
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
3.2WIRING
3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE
A
TRIPPING DIRECTION
(5 Amp)
52
F8a
F8c
VX
F7a
F7c
VC
VC
VB
F6a
VA
F6c
F5a
VA
VB
F4c
F5c
IG1
F4a
F4b
F3c
IG5
IG
F3b
IC
IC1
F2c
F2b
F3a
IB1
IC5
F1c
F2a
IB
IA1
IB5
F1a
F1b
IA
VX
VOLTAGE AND
CURRENT SUPERVISION
IA5
OPTIONAL
VOLTAGE INPUTS
CURRENT INPUTS
8F
H5a
H5c
H6a
H6c
H5b
CONTACT INPUT H5a

CONTACT INPUT H5c
CONTACT INPUT H6a
CONTACT INPUT H6c
COMMON H5b
H7a
H7c
H8a
H8c
H7b
CONTACT INPUT H7a

CONTACT INPUT H7c
CONTACT INPUT H8a
CONTACT INPUT H8c
COMMON H7b
H8b
SURGE
U7a
U7c
U8a
U8c
U7b
CONTACT INPUT U7a

CONTACT INPUT U7c
CONTACT INPUT U8a
CONTACT INPUT U8c
COMMON U7b
U8b
SURGE
H1a
H1b
H1c
H2a
H2b
H2c
H3a
H3b
H3c
H4a
H4b
H4c
6G
H1
V
I
H2
V
I
H3
V
I
H4
U1
V
I
U2
V
I
U3
V
I
U4
GE Consumer & Industrial

Multilin
U5
LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
CONTACT INPUT L5a

CONTACT INPUT L5c
CONTACT INPUT L6a
CONTACT INPUT L6c
COMMON L5b
L7a
L7c
L8a
L8c
L7b
L8b
CONTACT INPUT L7a

CONTACT INPUT L7c
CONTACT INPUT L8a
CONTACT INPUT L8c
COMMON L7b
SURGE
DC
6C
FIBER
CHANNEL 1
FIBER
CHANNEL 2
RS-232
CRITICAL
FAILURE
48 V DC
OUTPUT
(front)
Ground at
Remote
Device
SURGE
FILTER
Co-axial *
com
com
N7
N8
S1a
S1b
S1c
S2a
S2b
S2c
S3a
S3b
S3c
S4a
S4b
S4c
S5a
S5b
S5c
S6a
S6b
S6c
S7a
S7b
S7c
S8a
S8b
S8c
S1
S2
S3
CONTROL
POWER
S4
S5
Shielded
twisted pairs
CONTACTS SHOWN
WITH NO
CONTROL POWER
9E
D1b
D2b
D3b
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
N6
DB-9
RS485
COM 1
Rx1
Rx2
N5
Tx1
Tx2
N3
N4
L5a
L5c
L6a
L6c
L5b
N1a
N1b
N1c
N2a
N2b
N2c
N3a
N3b
N3c
N4a
N4b
N4c
N5a
N5b
N5c
N6a
N6b
N6c
N7a
N7b
N7c
N8a
N8b
N8c
N1
N2
CONTACT INPUT L3a

CONTACT INPUT L3c
CONTACT INPUT L4a
CONTACT INPUT L4c
COMMON L3b
6D
L3a
L3c
L4a
L4c
L3b
INTER-RELAY
COMMS.
W7A
CONTACT INPUT L1a

CONTACT INPUT L1c
CONTACT INPUT L2a
CONTACT INPUT L2c
COMMON L1b
B1b
B1a
B2b
B3a
B3b
B5b HI
B6b LO
B6a
B8a
B8b
AC or DC
S6
S7
S8
UR
TXD
RXD
SGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
COMPUTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8
3 RXD
2 TXD
20
7 SGND
6
4
5
22
25 PIN
CONNECTOR
9 PIN
CONNECTOR
PERSONAL
COMPUTER
RS485
COM 2
IRIG-B
Input
BNC
Co-axial
BNC
IRIG-B
Output
CPU
Co-axial
Co-axial * - For IRIG-B Input

only use one
terminal as input
POWER SUPPLY
TO
REMOTE
L90
L1a
L1c
L2a
L2c
L1b
U6
6K
( DC ONLY )
L90
TC 2
U1a
U1b
U1c
U2a
U2b
U2c
U3a
U3b
U3c
U4a
U4b
U4c
U5a
U5b
U5c
U6a
U6b
U6c
6H
TC 1
VOLTAGE SUPERVISION
This diagram is based on the following order code:

L90-E00-HCL-F8F-H6G-L6D-N6K-S6C-U6H-W7A
This diagram provides an example of how the device
is wired, not specifically how to wire the device. Please
refer to the Instruction Manual for additional details on
wiring based on various configurations.
831782A5.CDR
No. 10AWG
minimum
GROUND BUS
MODULES MUST BE
GROUNDED IF
TERMINAL IS
PROVIDED
X W
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
7
6
6
Inputs/ Inputs/
COM outputs outputs
*
*
6
6
Inputs/ Inputs/
outputs outputs
*
*
H G
Inputs/
outputs
CT/VT
CPU
Power
supply
(Rear view)
* Optional
Figure 312: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
3-10
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
The dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware is shown in the following table:
Table 31: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR-SERIES MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE
TYPE
MODULE FUNCTION
TERMINALS
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
(AC)
FROM
TO
Power supply
High (+); Low (+); ()
Chassis
Power supply
48 V DC (+) and ()
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
Power supply
Relay terminals
Chassis
Reserved
N/A
N/A
N/A
Reserved
N/A
N/A
N/A
Reserved
N/A
N/A
N/A
Analog inputs/outputs
All except 8b
Chassis
< 50 V DC
Digital inputs/outputs
All
Chassis
G.703
All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a
Chassis
RS422
All except 6a, 7b, 8a
Chassis
< 50 V DC
CT/VT
All
Chassis
CPU
All
Chassis
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in the hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak voltage
transients, radio frequency interference (RFI), and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components can
be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one minute.
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER
NOTICE
CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING

POWER SUPPLY RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY OCCUR!
The L90 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are
well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration
can be avoided by powering the relays up once a year.
The power supply module can be ordered for two possible voltage ranges, with or without a redundant power option. Each
range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical specifications section of chapter 2 for additional details):
Low (LO) range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal.
High (HI) range: 125 to 250 V nominal.
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.
The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the
Typical wiring diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a form-C device that will be energized once control power is
applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks
detect a critical failure (see the Self-test errors section in chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize.
For high reliability systems, the L90 has a redundant option in which two L90 power supplies are placed in parallel on the
bus. If one of the power supplies become faulted, the second power supply will assume the full load of the relay without any
interruptions. Each power supply has a green LED on the front of the module to indicate it is functional. The critical fail relay
of the module will also indicate a faulted power supply.
GE Multilin
3-11
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
An LED on the front of the control power module shows the status of the power supply:
LED INDICATION
POWER SUPPLY
CONTINUOUS ON
OK
ON / OFF CYCLING
Failure
OFF
Failure
NOTE:
14 gauge stranded
wire with suitable
disconnect devices
is recommended.
AC or DC
AC or DC
B8b B8a B6a B6b B5b

FILTER SURGE
Switchgear
ground bus
LOW
HIGH
CONTROL
POWER
GND
Heavy copper conductor

or braided wire
OPTIONAL
ETHERNET SWITCH
UR-series
protection system
827759AA.CDR
Figure 313: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION

3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES
A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels 1
and 5 are intended for connection to phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Likewise, channels 2 and 6 are intended
for connection to phase B, and channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to phase C.
Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single-phase source. For voltage inputs, these channel are labelled as
auxiliary voltage (VX). For current inputs, these channels are intended for connection to a CT between system neutral and
ground, and are labelled as ground current (IG).
NOTICE
Verify that the connection made to the relay nominal current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection.
CT/VT modules may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current input. Each AC
current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is
withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to
50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used.
The above modules are available with enhanced diagnostics. These modules can automatically detect CT/VT hardware
failure and take the relay out of service.
CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical wiring diagram.
The exact placement of a zero-sequence core balance CT to detect ground fault current is shown below. Twisted-pair
cabling on the zero-sequence CT is recommended.
3-12
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
UNSHIELDED CABLE
Ground connection to neutral
must be on the source side
Source
B
C
SHIELDED CABLE
Stress cone
shields
Source
Ground
outside CT
3
LOAD
LOAD
To ground;
must be on
load side
996630A5
Figure 314: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION

The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as
input for the synchrocheck and volts-per-hertz features.
Substitute the tilde ~ symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figure.
~ 8c
VX
~ 8a
~ 7c
VC
VX
~ 7b
~ 7c
IC
IC1
~ 7a
~ 6c
VB
VC
~ 6a
~ 5c
VA
VB
~ 4c
~ 5a
VA
IG1
~ 4b
IG
~ 4a
~ 3c
IC1
IG5
~ 3a
~ 3b
IC
IC5
IB
~ 2c
~ 2a
~ 2b
IB5
IB1
~ 1b
~ 1c
IA1
~ 1a
IA
IA5
NOTE
~ 8a
~ 8b
~ 8c
IG5
IG
IG1
~ 6c
~ 7a
IB1
IB
IC5
~ 6a
~ 6b
IB5
~ 5b
~ 5c
IA
~ 5a
IA5
IA1
~ 4b
~ 4c
IG
IG1
~ 3c
IC1
~ 4a
~ 3b
IC
IG5
~ 2c
~ 3a
IB1
~ 2b
IB
IC5
~ 1c
~ 2a
IA1
~ 1b
IA
IB5
~ 1a
IA5
Current inputs
Voltage inputs
8F, 8G, 8L, and 8M modules (4 CTs and 4 VTs)
Current inputs
8H, 8J, 8N, and 8R modules (8 CTs)
842766A3.CDR
Figure 315: CT/VT MODULE WIRING
GE Multilin
3-13
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
3.2.5 PROCESS BUS MODULES
The L90 can be ordered with a process bus interface module. This module is designed to interface with the GE Multilin
HardFiber system, allowing bi-directional IEC 61850 fiber optic communications with up to eight HardFiber merging units,
known as Bricks. The HardFiber system has been designed to integrate seamlessly with the existing UR-series applications, including protection functions, FlexLogic, metering, and communications.
The IEC 61850 process bus system offers the following benefits.
Drastically reduces labor associated with design, installation, and testing of protection and control applications using
the L90 by reducing the number of individual copper terminations.
Integrates seamlessly with existing L90 applications, since the IEC 61850 process bus interface module replaces the
traditional CT/VT modules.
Communicates using open standard IEC 61850 messaging.
For additional details on the HardFiber system, refer to GE publication GEK-113500: HardFiber System Instruction Manual.
3.2.6 CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Every contact input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as three terminals per row, with eight
rows in total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for form-C relay outputs,
the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a form-A
output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered.
The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications.
The contact inputs are grouped with a common return. The L90 has two versions of grouping: four inputs per common
return and two inputs per common return. When a contact input/output module is ordered, four inputs per common is used.
The four inputs per common allows for high-density inputs in combination with outputs, with a compromise of four inputs
sharing one common. If the inputs must be isolated per row, then two inputs per common return should be selected (4D
module).
The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may
be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot
position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot
position, row number, and column position.
Some form-A / solid-state relay outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open,
and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to logic On = 1 when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to On =
1 when the current is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to On = 1 when the current exceeds about
80 to 100 mA. The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be
used to seal-in the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow.
Block diagrams are shown below for form-A and solid-state relay outputs with optional voltage monitor, optional current
monitor, and with no monitoring. The actual values shown for contact output 1 are the same for all contact outputs.
3-14
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
aD
aD
,
,I,GFP$&RQW2S 92Q
RWKHUZLVH&RQW2S 92II
aE
aF
9ROWDJHPRQLWRULQJRQO\
aD
9
,I,GFP$&RQW2S ,2Q
RWKHUZLVH&RQW2S ,2II
,I,GFP$&RQW2S ,2Q
,I,GFP$&RQW2S 92Q
9
aE
%RWKYROWDJHDQGFXUUHQWPRQLWRULQJ
aD
/RDG
/RDG
aF
D9ROWDJHZLWKRSWLRQDO
FXUUHQWPRQLWRULQJ
,I,GFP$&RQW2S 92Q
,
aE
,I,GFP$&RQW2S ,2Q
aE
/RDG
aF
/RDG
aF
E&XUUHQWZLWKRSWLRQDO
YROWDJHPRQLWRULQJ
&XUUHQWPRQLWRULQJRQO\
%RWKYROWDJHDQGFXUUHQWPRQLWRULQJ
H[WHUQDOMXPSHUDELVUHTXLUHG
aD
aE
/RDG
aF
F1RPRQLWRULQJ

$&'5
Figure 316: FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE CONTACT OUTPUTS WITH VOLTAGE AND CURRENT MONITORING
The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic operands (CONT OP # VON,
CONT OP # VOFF, and CONT OP # ION) which can be used in protection, control, and alarm logic. The typical application of
the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the
control command.
Refer to the Digital elements section of chapter 5 for an example of how form-A and solid-state relay contacts can be
applied for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring.
WARNING
Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized! If the relay
contacts need to be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customers
responsibility to ensure proper insulation levels!
USE OF FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE RELAY OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS

NOTE
For form-A and solid-state relay output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the
contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input
impedance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as
an impedance.
The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the formA contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is
used as a source, a 500 , 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the form-A
contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.
Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module; wherever a number
sign # appears, substitute the contact number
NOTE
NOTE
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the form-A and solid-state relay contact outputs, the FlexLogic operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of
the output contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the
region of the pickup value).
GE Multilin
3-15
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
Table 32: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS
~6A MODULE
~6B MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~6C MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~6D MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-C
~1a, ~1c
2 Inputs
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2a, ~2c
2 Inputs
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3a, ~3c
2 Inputs
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4a, ~4c
2 Inputs
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~6E MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~6F MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~6G MODULE
~6H MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~1
Form-C
~1
Fast Form-C
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2
Fast Form-C
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Fast Form-C
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Fast Form-C
~4
Form-A
~4
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Fast Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Fast Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-A
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Fast Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Fast Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~6K MODULE
~6L MODULE
~6M MODULE
~6N MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
Form-C
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-A
~5
Fast Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6
Fast Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7
Fast Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8
Fast Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~6P MODULE
~6R MODULE
~6S MODULE
~6T MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-A
~5
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
3-16
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
~6U MODULE
~6V MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~67 MODULE
~4A MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Not Used
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Solid-State
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-A
~3
Not Used
~4
Form-A
~4
2 Outputs
~4
Form-A
~4
Solid-State
~5
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-A
~5
Not Used
Solid-State
~6
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-A
~6
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Form-A
~7
Not Used
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Form-A
~8
Solid-State
3
~4B MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
~4C MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~4L MODULE
OUTPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
~1
Not Used
~1
Not Used
~1a, ~1c
2 Inputs
~1
2 Outputs
~2
Solid-State
~2
Solid-State
~2a, ~2c
2 Inputs
~2
2 Outputs
~3
Not Used
~3
Not Used
~3a, ~3c
2 Inputs
~3
2 Outputs
~4
Solid-State
~4
Solid-State
~4a, ~4c
2 Inputs
~4
2 Outputs
~5
Not Used
~5
Not Used
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
2 Outputs
~6
Solid-State
~6
Solid-State
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
2 Outputs
~7
Not Used
~7
Not Used
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
2 Outputs
~8
Solid-State
~8
Solid-State
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Not Used
GE Multilin
OUTPUT
~4D MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
3-17
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
Figure 317: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)
3-18
GE Multilin
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
~ 7a
~ 7b
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8b
~ 8c
~1
3.2 WIRING
6K
3 HARDWARE
~2
~3
~4
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 5a DIGITAL I/O
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
6L
~1
~2
~3
~4
V
I
V
I
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8b
SURGE
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
6M
~1
~2
~4
~6
~6
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
DIGITAL I/O
~5
~8
V
I
~3
~5
~7
V
I
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 5a DIGITAL I/O
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
6N
~1
~2
~3
~4
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8b
SURGE
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
6P
~1
~2
~3
~4
~5
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 5a DIGITAL I/O
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
6R
~1
~2
~3
~4
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~6
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8b
SURGE
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
6S
~1
~2
~3
~4
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 5a DIGITAL I/O
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
6T
~1
~2
~3
~4
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~5
~6
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8b
SURGE
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
6U
~1
~2
~3
~4
~5
~6
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
842763A2.CDR
Figure 318: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (2 of 2)
NOTICE
GE Multilin
For proper functionality, observe the polarity shown in the figures for all contact input and output
connections.
3-19
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
CONTACT INPUTS:
A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power supply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group
has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply
module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact
is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the external source
must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum external source voltage
for this arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as
17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
DIGITAL I/O
~ 7a + CONTACT IN
~ 7c + CONTACT IN
~ 8a + CONTACT IN
~ 8c + CONTACT IN
~ 7b COMMON
~ 8b
6B
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
SURGE
B 1b
CRITICAL
B 1a
FAILURE
B 2b
B 3a 48 VDC
OUTPUT
B 3b +
B 5b HI+
CONTROL
B 6b LO+
POWER
B 6a B 8a
SURGE
B 8b
FILTER
(Wet)
24-250V
DIGITAL I/O
6B
~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7a
~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8a
~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
(Dry)
POWER SUPPLY
827741A4.CDR
Figure 319: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS

Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE
Contact outputs may be ordered as form-a or form-C. The form-A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervision. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the
circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the form-A contact closes. If enabled, the current
monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts.
There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We recommend
using an external DC supply.
3-20
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
USE OF CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING:

The contact inputs sense a change of the state of the external device contact based on the measured current. When external devices are located in a harsh industrial environment (either outdoor or indoor), their contacts can be exposed to various types of contamination. Normally, there is a thin film of insulating sulfidation, oxidation, or contaminates on the surface
of the contacts, sometimes making it difficult or impossible to detect a change of the state. This film must be removed to
establish circuit continuity an impulse of higher than normal current can accomplish this.
The contact inputs with auto-burnish create a high current impulse when the threshold is reached to burn off this oxidation
layer as a maintenance to the contacts. Afterwards the contact input current is reduced to a steady-state current. The
impulse will have a 5 second delay after a contact input changes state.
current
50 to 70 mA
3
3 mA
time
25 to 50 ms
842749A1.CDR
Figure 320: CURRENT THROUGH CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING

Regular contact inputs limit current to less than 3 mA to reduce station battery burden. In contrast, contact inputs with autoburnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed. Then, within 25 to
50 ms, this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above. The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the contacts, allowing for proper sensing of state changes. If the external device contact is bouncing, the auto-burnishing starts
when external device contact bouncing is over.
Another important difference between the auto-burnishing input module and the regular input modules is that only two contact inputs have common ground, as opposed to four contact inputs sharing one common ground (refer to the Contact Input
and Output Module Wiring diagrams). This is beneficial when connecting contact inputs to separate voltage sources. Consequently, the threshold voltage setting is also defined per group of two contact inputs.
The auto-burnish feature can be disabled or enabled using the DIP switches found on each daughter card. There is a DIP
switch for each contact, for a total of 16 inputs.
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON



842751A1.CDR
Figure 321: AUTO-BURNISH DIP SWITCHES

The auto-burnish circuitry has an internal fuse for safety purposes. During regular maintenance, the auto-burnish
functionality can be checked using an oscilloscope.
NOTE
GE Multilin
3-21
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
3.2.7 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Transducer input modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance temperature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required.
Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard dcmA ranges. Software is provided to configure
virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs.
Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three terminals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a"
having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/
output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to terminal 8b. The current outputs
require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The figure below illustrates the transducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay.
Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE
Figure 322: TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING
3-22
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
3.2.8 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT
A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the L90 faceplate for programming with a personal computer. All that is required to
use this interface is a personal computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling for the
RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9-pin and 25-pin connectors.
The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
NOTE
Figure 323: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION

3.2.9 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS
a) OPTIONS
In addition to the faceplate RS232 port, the L90 provides two additional communication ports or a managed six-port Ethernet switch, depending on the installed CPU module.
The CPU modules do not require a surge ground connection.
NOTE
Table 33: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS

CPU TYPE
COM1
COM2
9E
RS485
RS485
9G
10Base-F and 10Base-T
RS485
9H
Redundant 10Base-F
RS485
9J
100Base-FX
RS485
9K
Redundant 100Base-FX
RS485
9L
100Base-FX
RS485
9M
RS485
9N
10/100Base-T
RS485
9P
100Base-FX
RS485
9R
RS485
9S
Ethernet switch module with two 10/100Base-T and four 100Base-FX ports
RS485
GE Multilin
3-23
%1&
&RD[LDOFDEOH
%1&
*URXQGDW
UHPRWH
GHYLFH
56
&20
%1&
,5,*%RXWSXW
%DVH7
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
&20021
%1&
&RD[LDOFDEOH
%1&
&20
*
1250$/
*URXQGDW
UHPRWH
GHYLFH
56
&20
,5,*%
LQSXW
7[
%DVH)/
1250$/
5[
%DVH)
$/7(51$7(
%DVH7
*URXQGDW
UHPRWH
GHYLFH
&20021
%1&
&20021
56
&20
,5,*%
LQSXW
,5,*%RXWSXW
&RD[LDOFDEOH
6KLHOGHG
WZLVWHGSDLUV
%DVH7
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
*URXQGDW
UHPRWH
GHYLFH
56
&20
&20021
%1&
1250$/ &20
56
&20
,5,*%
LQSXW
&RD[LDOFDEOH
%1&
,5,*%
LQSXW
,5,*%RXWSXW
&RD[LDOFDEOH
&RD[LDOFDEOH
%1&
$/7(51$7(
,5,*%RXWSXW
&38
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
1250$/
%DVH)
%1&
,5,*%RXWSXW
5[
6KLHOGHG
WZLVWHGSDLUV
,5,*%RXWSXW
%DVH)/
%1&
&20
+
7[
,5,*%
LQSXW
&RD[LDOFDEOH
&RD[LDOFDEOH
00ILEHU
RSWLFFDEOH
6KLHOGHGWZLVWHGSDLUV
&38
*URXQGDW
UHPRWH
GHYLFH
%DVH)/
56
&20
&RD[LDOFDEOH
7[
7[
5[
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
*URXQGDW
UHPRWH
GHYLFH
%DVH)/
&20021
%1&
1250$/ &20
*URXQGDW
UHPRWH
GHYLFH
56
&20
,5,*%
LQSXW
%DVH)/
,5,*%RXWSXW
1250$/
%DVH7
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
&20021
%1&
%1&
&RD[LDOFDEOH
%1&
5[
&RD[LDOFDEOH
56
&20
,5,*%
LQSXW
,5,*%RXWSXW
&RD[LDOFDEOH
&38
00ILEHU
RSWLFFDEOH
-
&38
60ILEHU
RSWLFFDEOH
&20
3
&RD[LDOFDEOH
1250$/
5[
%DVH)
$/7(51$7(
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
&20021
%1&
56
&20
7[
6KLHOGHG
WZLVWHGSDLUV
,5,*%
LQSXW
,5,*%RXWSXW
$/7(51$7(
%DVH7
&20021
56
&20
,5,*%
LQSXW
7[
00ILEHURSWLFFDEOH
7[
00ILEHURSWLFFDEOH
7[
00ILEHURSWLFFDEOH
7[
5[
%DVH);
5[
%DVH);
5[
%DVH);
5[
%DVH);
%DVH7
%DVH7

:D
:E
:D *5281'
%1&
)LEHU
SRUWV
*URXQGDW
UHPRWH
GHYLFH
&RSSHU
SRUWV
3RZHUVXSSO\
,5,*%RXWSXW
&RD[LDOFDEOH
6
00ILEHURSWLFFDEOH
1250$/
%DVH)
%1&
&38
%1&
%DVH7FDEOH
%DVH)/
5[
&RD[LDOFDEOH
&RD[LDOFDEOH
WR9'&
WR9$&
5[
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
*URXQGDW
UHPRWH
GHYLFH
&RD[LDOFDEOH
%DVH7FDEOH
7[
&RD[LDOFDEOH
'E
'E
'E
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
&20021
&20021
%1&
%1&
&RD[LDOFDEOH
56
&20
6
*URXQGDW
UHPRWH
GHYLFH
%DVH)/
56
&20
,5,*%
LQSXW
,5,*%RXWSXW
&38
7[
5[
&20
.
7[
&38
60ILEHURSWLFFDEOH
00ILEHURSWLFFDEOH
&20
5
&RD[LDOFDEOH
&38
5[
1250$/ &20
&RD[LDOFDEOH
,5,*%
LQSXW
60ILEHURSWLFFDEOH
7[
&20021
%1&
&RD[LDOFDEOH
00ILEHU
RSWLFFDEOH
&20
0
&20021
%DVH)/
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
&38
56
&20
1
&20021
60ILEHU
RSWLFFDEOH
(
&38
*URXQGDW
UHPRWH
GHYLFH
'E
'E
'E
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
&38
/
3 HARDWARE
&38
3.2 WIRING
$&'5
Figure 324: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING
3-24
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
b) RS485 PORTS
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of these ports, continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer,
SCADA system or PLC is possible.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be
observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 + terminals connected together, and all RS485
terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to
the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For
larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to
increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely.
Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all
equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.
Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.
Figure 325: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION
GE Multilin
3-25
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
c) 10BASE-FL AND 100BASE-FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS
NOTICE
ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR
SCRATCHED CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.
The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.
Optical fiber may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nm in multi-mode or 1310 nm in multi-mode
and single-mode. The 10 Mbps rate is available for CPU modules 9G and 9H; 100Mbps is available for modules 9H, 9J, 9K,
9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, and 9R. The 9H, 9K, 9M, and 9R modules have a second pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and
receiver for redundancy.
The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 m, 62.5/125 m and 100/140 m for 10 Mbps. The fiber optic port is
designed such that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 m or less in diameter, 62.5 m for 100 Mbps.
For optical power budgeting, splices are required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair. When splicing optical fibers,
the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or disengage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required.
3.2.10 IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within
1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS
satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

GPS CONNECTION
OPTIONAL
RELAY
IRIG-B
TIME CODE
GENERATOR
(DC SHIFT OR
AMPLITUDE MODULATED
SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
4B
IRIG-B(+)
4A
IRIG-B(-)
RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE

+
RECEIVER
BNC (IN)
BNC (OUT)
TO OTHER DEVICES
(DC-SHIFT ONLY)
REPEATER
827756A5.CDR
Figure 326: IRIG-B CONNECTION
3-26
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
The IRIG-B repeater provides an amplified DC-shift IRIG-B signal to other equipment. By using one IRIG-B serial connection, several UR-series relays can be synchronized. The IRIG-B repeater has a bypass function to maintain the time signal
even when a relay in the series is powered down.
Figure 327: IRIG-B REPEATER

Using an amplitude modulated receiver will cause errors up to 1 ms in event time-stamping.
NOTE
NOTE
Using an amplitude modulated receiver will also cause errors of up to 1 ms in metered synchrophasor values.
Using the IRIG-B repeater function in conjunction with synchrophasors is not recommended, as the repeater adds
a 40 s delay to the IRIG-B signal. This results in a 1 error for each consecutive device in the string as reported in
synchrophasors.
GE Multilin
3-27

3.3PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS
3 HARDWARE
3.3.1 DESCRIPTION
A special inter-relay communications module is available for the L90. This module is plugged into slot W in horizontally
mounted units and slot R in vertically mounted units. Inter-relay channel communications is not the same as 10/100BaseF interface communications (available as an option with the CPU module). Channel communication is used for sharing data
among relays.
The inter-relay communications modules are available with several interfaces as shown in the table below.
Table 34: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
MODULE
SPECIFICATION
2A
C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
2B
C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
2E
Bi-phase, 1 channel
2F
Bi-phase, 2 channel
2G
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
2H
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
2S
Managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply
2T
Managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply
72
1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel
73
1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 2 channels
74
Channel 1 - RS422; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser
75
Channel 1 - G.703; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser
76
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
77
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
7A
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
7B
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
7C
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel
7D
1300 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel
7E
Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode
7F
Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode
7G
Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
7I
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
7J
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channels
7K
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 channels
7L
Channel 1: RS422, channel: 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M
Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
7N
Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P
Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser
7Q
Channel 1: G.703, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser
7R
G.703, 1 channel
7S
G.703, 2 channels
7T
RS422, 1 channel
7V
RS422, 2 channels, 2 clock inputs
7W
RS422, 2 channels
All of the fiber modules use ST type connectors. For two-terminal applications, each L90 relay requires at least one communications channel.
3-28
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
The current differential function must be Enabled for the communications module to properly operate.
Refer to SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS LINE DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL menu.
NOTE
The fiber optic modules (7A to 7W) are designed for back-to-back connections of UR-series relays only. For
connections to higher-order systems, use the 72 to 77 modules or the 2A and 2B modules.
NOTE
CAUTION
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Module:
Connection Location:
7A / 7B / 7C
7H / 7I / 7J
Slot X
Slot X
RX1
RX1
TX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
1 Channel
2 Channels
831719A2.CDR
Figure 328: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES

3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.
Module:
72/ 7D
73/ 7K
Connection Location:
Slot X
Slot X
TX1
TX1
RX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
1 Channel
2 Channels
831720A3.CDR
Figure 329: LASER FIBER MODULES
NOTICE
GE Multilin
When using a laser Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the
maximum optical input power to the receiver.
3-29
3 HARDWARE
3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration.
The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps. The SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O DIRECT I/O DATA RATE
setting is not applicable to this module.
NOTE
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Connecting the shield to pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if pin X1a
or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
Shield
Inter-relay communications
7S
G.703
channel 1
Tx
Rx
Tx +
Rx +
Surge
Shield
G.703
channel 2
Tx
Rx
Tx +
Rx +
Surge
X 1a
X 1b
X 2a
X 2b
X 3a
X 3b
X 6a
X 6b
X 7a
X 7b
X 8a
X 8b
842773A2.CDR
Figure 330: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrangement of these pins, see the Rear terminal assignments section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
G.703
CHANNEL 1
Rx Tx +
Rx +
SURGE
Shld.
COMM.
Tx -
G.703
CHANNEL 2
Rx Tx +
Rx +
SURGE
X 1a
X 1b
X 2a
X 2b
X 3a
X 3b
X 6a
X 6b
X 7a
X 7b
X 8a
X 8b
X 1a
X 1b
X 2a
X 2b
X 3a
X 3b
X 6a
X 6b
X 7a
X 7b
X 8a
X 8b
Shld.
Tx Rx Tx +
7S
Tx -
G.703
CHANNEL 1
Rx +
SURGE
Shld.
Tx Rx Tx +
G.703
CHANNEL 2
Rx +
COMM.
7S
Shld.
SURGE
831727A3.CDR
Figure 331: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES
NOTE
Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that A is equivalent to + and
B is equivalent to .
b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES

1.
Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S). The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module,
must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control
power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that
the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2.
Remove the module cover screw.
3.
Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4.
Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes.
5.
Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
3-30
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
6.
Re-insert the G.703 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position.
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as
the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the
clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 332: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING

Table 35: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS
SWITCHES
FUNCTION
S1
OFF octet timing disabled

ON octet timing 8 kHz
S5 and S6
S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF loop timing mode

S5 = ON and S6 = OFF internal timing mode
S5 = OFF and S6 = ON minimum remote loopback mode
S5 = ON and S6 = ON dual loopback mode
c) G.703 OCTET TIMING

If octet timing is enabled (on), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting
to higher order systems. When L90s are connected back to back, octet timing should be disabled (off).
d) G.703 TIMING MODES
There are two timing modes for the G.703 module: internal timing mode and loop timing mode (default).
Internal Timing Mode: The system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in
the internal timing mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For back-to-back connections, set for octet timing
(S1 = OFF) and timing mode to internal timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).
Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection
should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (URto-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to octet timing (S1 = ON) and set timing mode to loop timing (S5 = OFF and S6 =
OFF).
GE Multilin
3-31
3 HARDWARE
The switch settings for the internal and loop timing modes are shown below:
842752A1.CDR
e) G.703 TEST MODES
In minimum remote loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any
processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 line-side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs,
passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer
and then returns to the transmitter. The differential received data is processed and passed to the G.703 transmitter module
after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and
passes it to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is
expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
DMR
G7X
DMX
G7R
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
842774A1.CDR
Figure 333: G.703 MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE

In dual loopback mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver/
transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data
enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester transmitter module.
Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 transmitter module to be
returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks
are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One
source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the differential Manchester side of the interface.
DMR
G7X
DMX
G7R
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
842775A1.CDR
Figure 334: G.703 DUAL LOOPBACK MODE
3-32
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE

3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
There are three RS422 inter-relay communications modules available: single-channel RS422 (module 7T), dual-channel
RS422 (module 7W), and dual-channel dual-clock RS422 (module 7V). The modules can be configured to run at 64 or
128 kbps. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair cable is recommended for external connections. These modules are protected by
optically-isolated surge suppression devices.
The two-channel two-clock RS422 interface (module 7V) is intended for use with two independent channel banks
with two independent clocks. It is intended for situations where a single clock for both channels is not acceptable.
NOTE
The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:
Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a or 7b or both.
Site 2: Terminate shield to COM pin 2b.
The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.
Single-channel RS422 module
Dual-channel RS422 module
RS422
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
Clock
COM
Surge
~ indicates the slot position
Tx
7W
Rx
Rx
RS422
channel 1
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
Inter-relay communications
~ 3b
~ 3a
~ 2a
~ 4b
~ 6a
~ 5b
~ 5a
~ 4a
~ 6b
~ 7b
~ 7a
~ 8b
~ 2b
~ 8a
7T
Tx
Inter-relay comms.
~ 3b
~ 3a
~ 2a
~ 4b
~ 6a
~ 7a
~ 8b
~ 2b
~ 8a
Tx
Rx
RS422
channel 2
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
Clock
COM
Surge
842776A3.CDR
Figure 335: RS422 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two single-channel RS422 interfaces installed in slot W.
All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
RS422
CHANNEL 1
Tx
Rx+
Shld.
CLOCK
COM
SURGE
W 3b
W 3a
W 2a
W 4b
W 6a
W 7a
W 8b
W 2b
W 8a
Tx
Rx
Tx+
Rx+
7T
W 3b
W 3a
W 2a
W 4b
W 6a
W 7a
W 8b
W 2b
W 8a
RS422
CHANNEL 1
Shld.
+
CLOCK
COM
64 kHz
SURGE
COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
7T
Tx
Rx
831809A1.CDR
Figure 336: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES

b) TWO-CHANNEL APPLICATION VIA MULTIPLEXERS
The RS422 interface may be used for single channel or two channel applications over SONET/SDH or multiplexed systems. When used in single-channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion
observing transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), and send timing (ST) connections. However, when used in two-channel applications,
certain criteria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function correctly if the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature. Terminal timing is a
common feature to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the
terminal timing feature, two channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The send timing outputs from the multiplexer (data module 1), will connect to the clock inputs of the URRS422 interface in the usual fashion.
In addition, the send timing outputs of data module 1 will also be paralleled to the terminal timing inputs of data module 2.
GE Multilin
3-33
3 HARDWARE
By using this configuration, the timing for both data modules and both URRS422 channels will be derived from a single
clock source. As a result, data sampling for both of the URRS422 channels will be synchronized via the send timing leads
on data module 1 as shown below. If the terminal timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the
G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.
Data module 1
Signal name
7W
Tx1(+)
Tx1(-)
RS422
CHANNEL 1
Rx1(+)
Rx1(-)
Shld.
CLOCK
Tx2(+)
Tx2(-)
RS422
CHANNEL 2
Rx2(+)
Rx2(-)
Shld.
com
SURGE
W 2a
W 3b
W 4b
W 3a
W 6a
W 7a
W 8b
W 4a
W 5b
W 6b
W 5a
W 7b
W 2b
W 8a
SD(A) - Send data

SD(B) - Send data
RD(A) - Received data
RD(B) - Received data
RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)
RT(A) - Receive timing
RT(B) - Receive timing
CS(A) - Clear To send
CS(B) - Clear To send
Local loopback
Remote loopback
Signal ground
ST(A) - Send timing
ST(B) - Send timing
Data module 2
Signal name
TT(A) - Terminal timing
TT(B) - Terminal timing
SD(A) - Send data
SD(B) - Send data
RD(A) - Received data
RD(B) - Received data
RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)
CS(A) - Clear To send
CS(B) - Clear To send
Local loopback
Remote loopback
Signal ground
ST(A) - Send timing
ST(B) - Send timing
831022A3.CDR
Figure 337: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION

Data module 1 provides timing to the L90 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data module 1 also provides
timing to data module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The data module pin numbers have been
omitted in the figure above since they may vary depending on the manufacturer.
c) TRANSMIT TIMING
The RS422 interface accepts one clock input for transmit timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz transmit
timing clock of the multiplexer interface is sampling the data in the center of the transmit data window. Therefore, it is important to confirm clock and data transitions to ensure proper system operation. For example, the following figure shows the
positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit.
Tx Clock
Tx Data
Figure 338: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS
3-34
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
d) RECEIVE TIMING
The RS422 interface utilizes NRZI-MARK modulation code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx clock to recapture data.
NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.
To recover the Rx clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (digital phase lock loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is
driven by an internal clock, which is 16-times over-sampled, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a
data clock that can be used as the SCC (serial communication controller) receive clock.
3.3.6 TWO-CHANNEL TWO-CLOCK RS422 INTERFACE
9
The two-channel two-clock RS422 interface (module 7V) is intended for use with the synchrophasor feature. The module
connections are illustrated below.
56
FKDQQHO
56FRPPXQLFDWLRQV
56
FKDQQHO
&KDQQHO
FORFN
&KDQQHO
FORFN
&RPPRQ
6XUJH
aE
aD
aD
aE
aD
aE
aD
aD
aE
aE
aD
aE
aE
aD
aE
aD
7[
5[
7[
5[
6KLHOG
7[
5[
7[
5[
6KLHOG
7[
5[
7[
5[
&20
$&'5
Figure 339: TWO-CHANNEL TWO-CLOCK RS422 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS

3.3.7 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74
modules are used in two-terminal with a redundant channel or three-terminal configurations where channel 1 is employed
via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber.
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at
one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly.
Tx2
~ 8a
Clock
(channel 1)
COM
Tx1 +
Rx1
Tx1
Rx1 +
RS422
channel 1
Shield
Rx2
Fiber
channel 2
Surge
7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 74
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 2b
~ 2a
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 4b
~ 6a
Inter-relay comms.
NOTICE
When using a laser interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed maximum optical input power to the receiver.
842777A1.CDR
Figure 340: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (data communications equipment) units.
GE Multilin
3-35
3 HARDWARE
3.3.8 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus fiber interface configuration at 64 kbps. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75 modules are used in configurations where channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the shield to
pin 1a at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See previous sections for additional details on the G.703 and fiber interfaces.
When using a laser interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the
maximum optical input power to the receiver.
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 3a
~ 3b
Shield
Tx
Rx
Tx +
G.703
channel 1
Rx +
Surge
Tx2
Rx2
Fiber
channel 2
7E, 7F, 7G,

Inter-relay
communications
7Q,75
NOTICE
842778A1.CDR
Figure 341: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

3.3.9 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (modules types 2G, 2H, 76, and 77) are designed to interface with
IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input and
output applications for firmware revisions 3.30 and higher. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link
for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard
provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication modules are either
64 kbps (with n fixed at 1) for 128 kbps (with n fixed at 2). The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union
(ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at
a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:.
IEEE standard: C37.94 for 1 128 kbps optical fiber interface (for 2G and 2H modules) or C37.94 for 2 64 kbps optical fiber interface (for 76 and 77 modules).
Fiber optic cable type: 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber.
Fiber optic mode: multi-mode.
Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km.
Fiber optic connector: type ST.
Wavelength: 830 40 nm.
Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports
the IEEE C37.94 standard as shown below.
3-36
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a
non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard, as
shown below.
In 2008, GE Digital Energy released revised modules 76 and 77 for C37.94 communication to enable multi-ended fault
location functionality with firmware 5.60 release and higher. All modules 76 and 77 shipped since the change support this
feature and are fully backward compatible with firmware releases below 5.60. For customers using firmware release 5.60
and higher, the module can be identified with "Rev D" printed on the module and is to be used on all ends of L90 communication for two and three terminal applications. Failure to use it at all ends results in intermittent communication alarms. For
customers using firmware revisions below 5.60, it is not required to match the revision of the modules installed.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions
of these control switches is shown below.
842753A1.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. therefore, the timing switch selection should be internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection
should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
The IEEE C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1.
Remove the IEEE C37.94 module (type 2G, 2H, 76, or 77 module):
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
2.
3.
4.
Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
5.
6.
Re-insert the IEEE C37.94 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
GE Multilin
3-37
3 HARDWARE
Figure 342: IEEE C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
3-38
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE

3.3.10 C37.94SM INTERFACE
The UR-series C37.94SM communication modules (2A and 2B) are designed to interface with modified IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converters that have been converted from 820 nm multi-mode
fiber optics to 1300 nm ELED single-mode fiber optics. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for
synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,, 12. The UR-series C37.94SM communication module is 64 kbps only
with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from
the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit
rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
Emulated IEEE standard: emulates C37.94 for 1 64 kbps optical fiber interface (modules set to n = 1 or 64 kbps).
Fiber optic cable type: 9/125 m core diameter optical fiber.
Fiber optic mode: single-mode, ELED compatible with HP HFBR-1315T transmitter and HP HFBR-2316T receiver.
Fiber optic cable length: up to 10 km.
Fiber optic connector: type ST.
Wavelength: 1300 40 nm.
Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports C37.94SM as shown below.
It can also can be connected directly to any other UR-series relay with a C37.94SM module as shown below.
In 2008, GE Digital Energy released revised modules 2A and 2B for C37.94SM communication to enable multi-ended fault
location functionality with firmware 5.60 release and higher. All modules 2A and 2B shipped since the change support this
feature and are fully backward compatible with firmware releases below 5.60. For customers using firmware release 5.60
and higher, the module can be identified with "Rev D" printed on the module and is to be used on all ends of L90 communication for two and three terminal applications. Failure to use it at all ends results in intermittent communication alarms. For
customers using firmware revisions below 5.60, it is not required to match the revision of the modules installed.
GE Multilin
3-39
3 HARDWARE
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module has six switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.
842753A1.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be
internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection
should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
The C37.94SM communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1.
Remove the C37.94SM module (modules 2A or 2B):

The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
2.
3.
4.
Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
5.
6.
Re-insert the C37.94SM module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
3-40
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
Figure 343: C37.94SM TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
GE Multilin
3-41
3 HARDWARE
3.4MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES
3.4.1 OVERVIEW
The type 2S and 2T embedded managed switch modules are supported by UR-series relays containing type 9S CPU modules with revisions 5.5x and higher. The modules communicate to the L90 through an internal Ethernet port (referred to as
the UR port or port 7) and provide an additional six external Ethernet ports: two 10/100Base-T ports and four multimode ST
100Base-FX ports.
NOTE
The Ethernet switch module should be powered up before or at the same time as the L90. Otherwise, the switch
module will not be detected on power up and the EQUIPMENT MISMATCH: ORDERCODE XXX self-test warning will be
issued.
3.4.2 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE
The type 2S and 2T managed Ethernet switch modules provide two 10/100Base-T and four multimode ST 100Base-FX
external Ethernet ports accessible through the rear of the module. In addition, a serial console port is accessible from the
front of the module (requires the front panel faceplate to be open).
The pin assignment for the console port signals is shown in the following table.
Table 36: CONSOLE PORT PIN ASSIGNMENT
PIN
SIGNAL
CD
DESCRIPTION
Carrier detect (not used)
RXD
Receive data (input)
TXD
Transmit data (output)
N/A
Not used
GND
Signal ground
6 to 9
N/A
Not used
Two 10/100Base-T
ports
Four 100Base-FX
multimode ports
with ST connectors
RS232
console port
Independent power
supply. Options:
2S: high-voltage
2T: low-voltage
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
842867A2.CDR
Figure 344: MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCHES HARDWARE
3-42
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
7[
00ILEHURSWLFFDEOH
7[
00ILEHURSWLFFDEOH
7[
00ILEHURSWLFFDEOH
7[
5[
%DVH);
5[
%DVH);
5[
%DVH);
5[
%DVH);
%DVH7FDEOH
%DVH7
%DVH7FDEOH
%DVH7
WR9'&
WR9$&

:D
:E
:D *5281'
)LEHU
SRUWV
&RSSHU
SRUWV
3RZHUVXSSO\
&38
00ILEHURSWLFFDEOH
67
The wiring for the managed Ethernet switch module is shown below.
$&'5
Figure 345: MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE WIRING

3.4.3 MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS
The 10/100Base-T and 100Base-FX ports have LED indicators to indicate the port status.
The 10/100Base-T ports have three LEDs to indicate connection speed, duplex mode, and link activity. The 100Base-FX
ports have one LED to indicate linkup and activity.
Connection speed indicator (OFF = 10 Mbps; ON = 100 Mbps)

Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity)
Duplex mode indicator (OFF = half-duplex; ON = full-duplex)
Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity)
842868A2.CDR
Figure 346: ETHERNET SWITCH LED INDICATORS

3.4.4 CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE
A suitable IP/gateway and subnet mask must be assigned to both the switch and the UR relay for correct operation. The
Switch has been shipped with a default IP address of 192.168.1.2 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. Consult your network administrator to determine if the default IP address, subnet mask or default gateway needs to be modified.
CAUTION
GE Multilin
Do not connect to network while configuring the switch module.
3-43
3 HARDWARE
a) CONFIGURING THE SWITCH MODULE IP SETTINGS

In our example configuration of both the Switchs IP address and subnet mask must be changed to 3.94.247.229 and
255.255.252.0 respectively. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway can be configured using either EnerVista
UR Setup software, the Switchs Secure Web Management (SWM), or through the console port using CLI.
1.
Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Configure IP menu item to open the
Ethernet switch configuration window.
2.
Enter 3.94.247.229 in the IP Address field and 255.255.252.0 in the Subnet Mask field, then click OK.
The software will send the new settings to the L90 and prompt as follows when complete.
3.
Cycle power to the L90 and switch module to activate the new settings.
b) SAVING THE ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS TO A SETTINGS FILE

The L90 allows the settings information for the Ethernet switch module to be saved locally as a settings file. This file contains the advanced configuration details for the switch not contained within the standard L90 settings file.
This feature allows the switch module settings to be saved locally before performing firmware upgrades. Saving settings
files is also highly recommended before making any change to the module configuration or creating new setting files.
The following procedure describes how to save local settings files for the Ethernet switch module.
1.
Select the desired device from site tree in the online window.
2.
Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File >
Retreive Settings File item from the device settings tree.
3-44
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.
3.
Enter an appropriate folder and file name and click Save.
All settings files will be saved as text files and the corresponding file extension automatically assigned.
c) UPLOADING ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS FILES TO THE MODULE
The following procedure describes how to upload local settings files to the Ethernet switch module. It is highly recommended that the current settings are saved to a settings file before uploading a new settings file.
It is highly recommended to place the switch offline while transferring setting files to the switch. When transferring
settings files from one switch to another, the user must reconfigure the IP address.
NOTE
1.
Select the desired device from site tree in the online window.
2.
Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File >
Transfer Settings File item from the device settings tree.
The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.
3.
Navigate to the folder containing the Ethernet switch settings file, select the file, then click Open.
The settings file will be transferred to the Ethernet switch and the settings uploaded to the device.
GE Multilin
3-45
3 HARDWARE
3.4.5 UPLOADING L90 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE
a) DESCRIPTION
This section describes the process for upgrading firmware on a UR-2S or UR-2T switch module.
There are several ways of updating firmware on a switch module:
Using the EnerVista UR Setup software.
Serially using the L90 switch module console port.
Using FTP or TFTP through the L90 switch module console port.
It is highly recommended to use the EnerVista UR Setup software to upgrade firmware on a L90 switch module.
Firmware upgrades using the serial port, TFTP, and FTP are described in detail in the switch module manual.
NOTE
b) SELECTING THE PROPER SWITCH FIRMWARE VERSION

The latest switch module firmware is available as a download from the GE Multilin web site. Use the following procedure to
determine the version of firmware currently installed on your switch
1.
Log into the switch using the EnerVista web interface.

The default switch login ID is manager and the default password is manager.
NOTE
The firmware version installed on the switch will appear on the lower left corner of the screen.
Version: 2.1 beta
2.
842869A1.CDR
Using the EnerVista UR Setup program, select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch
> Firmware Upload menu item.
3-46
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
The following popup screen will appear warning that the settings will be lost when the firmware is upgraded.
It is highly recommended that you save the switch settings before upgrading the firmware.
NOTE
3.
After saving the settings file, proceed with the firmware upload by selecting Yes to the above warning.
Another window will open, asking you to point to the location of the firmware file to be uploaded.
4.
Select the firmware file to be loaded on to the Switch, and select the Open option.
The following window will pop up, indicating that the firmware file transfer is in progress.
If the firmware load was successful, the following window will appear:
Note
GE Multilin
3-47
3 HARDWARE
The switch will automatically reboot after a successful firmware file transfer.
NOTE
5.
Once the firmware has been successfully uploaded to the switch module, load the settings file using the procedure
described earlier.
3.4.6 ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS
The following table provides details about Ethernet module self-test errors.
Be sure to enable the ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL setting in the PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS menu
and the relevant PORT 1 EVENTS through PORT 6 EVENTS settings under the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS
ETHERNET SWITCH menu.
Table 37: ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS
ACTIVATION SETTING (SET
AS ENABLED)
EVENT NAME
EVENT CAUSE
POSSIBLE CAUSES
ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL
ETHERNET MODULE
OFFLINE
No response has been

received from the Ethernet
module after five successive
polling attempts.
Loss of switch power.

IP/gateway/subnet.
Incompatibility between the CPU and
the switch module.
UR port (port 7) configured incorrectly
or blocked
Switch IP address assigned to another
device in the same network.
PORT 1 EVENTS to PORT 6

EVENTS
ETHERNET PORT 1
OFFLINE to ETHERNET
PORT 6 OFFLINE
An active Ethernet port has

returned a FAILED status.
Ethernet connection broken.

An inactive ports events have been
enabled.
No setting required; the L90

will read the state of a general
purpose input/output port on
the main CPU upon power-up
and create the error if there is a
conflict between the input/
output state and the order
code.
EQUIPMENT
MISMATCH: Card XXX
Missing
The L90 has not detected the

presence of the Ethernet
switch via the bus board.
The L90 failed to see the switch module

on power-up, because switch wont
power up or is still powering up. To clear
the fault, cycle power to the L90.
3-48
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device.
The alternate human interface is implemented via the devices faceplate keypad and display (refer to the Faceplate interface section in this chapter).
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation
of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (off-line)
or connected (on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device.
In on-line mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time.
The EnerVista UR Setup software, provided with every L90 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, and XP. This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista UR Setup software interface
features. The EnerVista UR Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista UR Setup software
interface.
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST
To start using the EnerVista UR Setup software, a site definition and device definition must first be created. See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting EnerVista UR Setup with the L90 section in Chapter 1 for details.
4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW
a) ENGAGING A DEVICE
The EnerVista UR Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with the L90
relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any
number of relays selected from the UR-series of relays.
b) USING SETTINGS FILES
The EnerVista UR Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.
While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then
save the settings to the relay.
You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
Device definition
Product setup
System setup
FlexLogic
Grouped elements
Control elements
Inputs/outputs
Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The following communications settings are not transferred to the L90 with settings files.
Modbus Slave Address
Modbus IP Port Number
RS485 COM1 Baud Rate
RS485 COM1 Parity
COM1 Minimum Response Time
GE Multilin
4-1
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
RS485 COM2 Baud Rate

RS485 COM2 Parity
COM2 Minimum Response Time
COM2 Selection
RRTD Slave Address
RRTD Baud Rate
IP Address
IP Subnet Mask
Gateway IP Address
Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number
Network Address NSAP
IEC61850 Config GOOSE ConfRev
c) CREATING AND EDITING FLEXLOGIC
You can create or edit a FlexLogic equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically
generated logic diagram.
d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES

You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters.
e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS
While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified
parameters, via one of the following:
Event Recorder facility: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in
chronological order from most recent to oldest.
Oscillography facility: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of
power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.
f) FILE SUPPORT
Execution: Any EnerVista UR Setup file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus
to the already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) which had been removed from
the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu.
Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target
for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any
Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target.
New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabetically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu
in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device.
g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES
The firmware of a L90 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The corresponding instructions are provided by the EnerVista UR Setup Help file under the topic Upgrading Firmware.
NOTE
4-2
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default
values, minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.
The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test
message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This
message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW
The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components:
1.
Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view.
2.
Main window menu bar.
3.
Main window tool bar.
4.
Site list control bar window.
5.
Settings list control bar window.
6.
Device data view windows, with common tool bar.
7.
Settings file data view windows, with common tool bar.
8.
Workspace area with data view tabs.
9.
Status bar.
10. Quick action hot links.
3
10
4
842786A2.CDR
Figure 41: ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW
GE Multilin
4-3

4.2EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES
Setting file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An example of this is a substation that has ten similar feeders protected by ten UR-series F60 relays.
In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical between all devices. The templates feature allows
engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so they are not available to users. For example,
these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate
on the specific settings.
The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers installing the devices. These will be settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.
The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings will be visible in EnerVista UR Setup. Settings templates can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The functionality is identical for both purposes.
The settings template feature requires that both the EnerVista UR Setup software and the L90 firmware are at versions 5.40 or higher.
NOTE
a) ENABLING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings template for UR-series settings files.
1.
Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Right-click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue. The settings file is now in template editing
mode.
Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings. The following procedure describes this process.
1.
Select an installed device from the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Right-click on the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The software will prompt for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be
at least four characters in length.
3.
Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.
b) EDITING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in
EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic equation editor settings are locked.
1.
Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template editing mode.
3.
Enter the template password then click OK.
4.
Open the relevant settings windows that contain settings to be specified as viewable.
4-4
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of
the settings window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the
phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.
Figure 42: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, ALL SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS LOCKED

5.
Specify which settings to make viewable by clicking on them.

The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below.
Figure 43: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE

6.
Click on Save to save changes to the settings template.
7.
Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings.
c) ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE

It is highly recommended that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security.
The following procedure describes how to add password protection to a settings file template.
1.
Select a settings file from the offline window on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Selecting the Template Mode > Password Protect Template option.
GE Multilin
4-5
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The software will prompt for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.
3.
The settings file template is now secured with password protection.

When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It
does not need to be added after the template is created.
NOTE
d) VIEWING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or
settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:
Display only those settings available for editing.
Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out.
Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing.
1.
2.
Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option.
3.
Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The
effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via

the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve
settings be available.
842858A1.CDR
Figure 44: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE COMMAND
4-6
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings tree, showing only the settings categories that contain
editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings tree view is shown below.
Typical settings tree view without template applied.
Typical settings tree view with template applied via

the Template Mode > View In Template Mode
command.
842860A1.CDR
Figure 45: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE SETTINGS COMMAND
Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template.
1.
2.
Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View All Settings option.
3.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings
will be shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.

the Template Mode > View All Settings command.
842859A1.CDR
Figure 46: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND
e) REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
It may be necessary at some point to remove a settings template. Once a template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and
it will be necessary to define a new settings template.
1.
Select an installed device or settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Select the Template Mode > Remove Settings Template option.
3.
Enter the template password and click OK to continue.
GE Multilin
4-7

4.
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Verify one more time that you wish to remove the template by clicking Yes.
The EnerVista software will remove all template information and all settings will be available.
4.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS
The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of
critical FlexLogic applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within
Secured FlexLogic equations will remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.
a) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATION ENTRIES

The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation.
1.
Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the settings template feature.
2.
Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item.
By default, all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on
the upper right of the window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.
3.
Specify which entries to lock by clicking on them.

The locked entries will be displayed against a grey background as shown in the example below.
Figure 47: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES IN EDIT MODE

4.
Click on Save to save and apply changes to the settings template.
5.
Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.
6.
Apply a password to the template then click OK to secure the FlexLogic equation.
4-8
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the FlexLogic entries not locked by the template. The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic entries in the above procedure is shown below.
Typical FlexLogic entries without template applied.
Typical FlexLogic entries locked with template via

842861A1.CDR
Figure 48: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES THROUGH SETTING TEMPLATES

The FlexLogic entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view (as shown below) and on the front panel display.
Figure 49: SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW

b) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER
A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number. Once the desired
FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific
serial number.
1.
Select the settings file in the offline window.
2.
Right-click on the file and select the Edit Settings File Properties item.
GE Multilin
4-9
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The following window is displayed.
Figure 410: TYPICAL SETTINGS FILE PROPERTIES WINDOW
3.
Enter the serial number of the L90 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic equations are now locked to the L90 device specified by the serial
number.
4.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY
A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a L90 device have been
changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transfered to a L90 device, the date, time,
and serial number of the L90 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC. This information can be compared with the L90 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised.
The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the L90
device or obtained from the L90 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability
information to the settings file.
SETTINGS FILE TRANSFERRED

TO UR-SERIES DEVICE
The serial number and last setting change date

are stored in the UR-series device.
The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer
date are added to the settings file when settings files
are transferred to the device.
Compare transfer dates in the settings file and the
UR-series device to determine if security
has been compromised.
SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE

SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND
ADDED TO SETTINGS FILE.
842864A1.CDR
Figure 411: SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY MECHANISM

With respect to the above diagram, the traceability feature is used as follows.
4-10
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
1.
The transfer date of a setting file written to a L90 is logged in the relay and can be viewed via EnerVista UR Setup or
the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a setting file saved to a local PC is logged in EnerVista UR Setup.
2.
Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future will indicate if any changes
have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.
a) SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to an L90 device.
The L90 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup
offline window as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in settings

file device definition
4
842863A1.CDR
Figure 412: DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example below.
Traceability data
in settings report
842862A1.CDR
Figure 413: SETTINGS FILE REPORT SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA
GE Multilin
4-11
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
b) ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The L90 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual
Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista UR Setup online window as shown in the
example below.
Traceability data in online

device actual values page
842865A1.CDR
Figure 414: TRACEABILITY DATA IN ACTUAL VALUES WINDOW

This infomormation if also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER
ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE
c) ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES

The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature
If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is
removed from the settings file.
If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file.
If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed
from the settings file.
If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings
file.
4-12
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.3FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.3.1 FACEPLATE
a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE
The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The
front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules.
Five column LED indicator panel
Display
Keypad
4
Front panel
RS232 port
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 16
842810A1.CDR
Figure 415: UR-SERIES ENHANCED FACEPLATE

b) STANDARD FACEPLATE
The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The
front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over
the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following figure shows the horizontal
arrangement of the faceplate panels.
LED panel 1
LED panel 2
LED panel 3
Display
Front panel
RS232 port
Small user-programmable
(control) pushbuttons 1 to 7
User-programmable
pushbuttons 1 to 12
Keypad
827801A7.CDR
Figure 416: UR-SERIES STANDARD HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS
GE Multilin
4-13
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The following figure shows the vertical arrangement of the faceplate panels for relays ordered with the vertical option.
DISPLAY
MENU
HELP
MESSAGE
ESCAPE
ENTER
VALUE
+/-
KEYPAD
LED PANEL 3
LED PANEL 2
827830A1.CDR
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
LED PANEL 1
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
Figure 417: UR-SERIES STANDARD VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS

4.3.2 LED INDICATORS
The enhanced front panel display provides five columns of LED indicators. The first column contains 14 status and event
cause LEDs, and the next four columns contain the 48 user-programmable LEDs.
The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these
latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS INPUT/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is
intended for connection to a portable PC.
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.
842811A1.CDR
Figure 418: TYPICAL LED INDICATOR PANEL FOR ENHANCED FACEPLATE

The status indicators in the first column are described below.
IN SERVICE: This LED indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs, outputs, and internal systems are
OK, and that the device has been programmed.
4-14
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
TROUBLE: This LED indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
TEST MODE: This LED indicates that the relay is in test mode.
TRIP: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; as such, a reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
ALARM: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
PICKUP: This LED indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
The event cause indicators in the first column are described below.
Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
Enabled or Latched. If a protection element target setting is Enabled, then the corresponding event cause LEDs
remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting
is Latched, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is
asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B or C LEDs. This
includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B or C LEDs.
VOLTAGE: This LED indicates voltage was involved.
CURRENT: This LED indicates current was involved.
FREQUENCY: This LED indicates frequency was involved.
OTHER: This LED indicates a composite function was involved.
PHASE A: This LED indicates phase A was involved.
PHASE B: This LED indicates phase B was involved.
PHASE C: This LED indicates phase C was involved.
NEUTRAL/GROUND: This LED indicates that neutral or ground was involved.
The user-programmable LEDs consist of 48 amber LED indicators in four columns. The operation of these LEDs is userdefined. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. Default labels are shipped in the label package of every L90, together with custom templates. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to
communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
The standard faceplate consists of three panels with LED indicators, keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is
used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions
can also be reset via the SETTINGS INPUT/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is intended for connection
to a portable PC.
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
842781A1.CDR
Figure 419: LED PANEL 1
GE Multilin
4-15
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
STATUS INDICATORS:
IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the
relay has been programmed.
TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode.
TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; the reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS:
Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
Enabled or Latched. If a protection element target setting is Enabled, then the corresponding event cause LEDs
remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting
is Latched, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is
asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B or C LEDs. This
includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B or C LEDs.
VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved.
CURRENT: Indicates current was involved.
FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved.
OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved.
PHASE A: Indicates phase A was involved.
PHASE B: Indicates phase B was involved.
PHASE C: Indicates phase C was involved.
NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates that neutral or ground was involved.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE INDICATORS:
The second and third provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a
customized label beside every LED is provided.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to
communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
842782A1.CDR
Figure 420: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE)

DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2:
The default labels are intended to represent:
4-16
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
GROUP 1...6: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group.
BREAKER 1(2) OPEN: The breaker is open.
BREAKER 1(2) CLOSED: The breaker is closed.
BREAKER 1(2) TROUBLE: A problem related to the breaker has been detected.
SYNCHROCHECK NO1(2) IN-SYNCH: Voltages have satisfied the synchrocheck element.
RECLOSE ENABLED: The recloser is operational.
RECLOSE DISABLED: The recloser is not operational.
RECLOSE IN PROGRESS: A reclose operation is in progress.
RECLOSE LOCKED OUT: The recloser is not operational and requires a reset.
NOTE
Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support
six setting groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight
setting groups. Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the
pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-programmable LEDs section of chapter 5. The
LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as explained
in the following section.
842784A1.CDR
Figure 421: LED PANEL 2 (DEFAULT LABELS)

4.3.3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS
The following procedure requires the pre-requisites listed below.
EnerVista UR Setup software is installed and operational.
The L90 settings have been saved to a settings file.
The L90 front panel label cutout sheet (GE Multilin part number 1006-0047) has been downloaded from http://
www.gedigitalenergy.com/products/support/ur/URLEDenhanced.doc and printed.
Small-bladed knife.
This procedure describes how to create custom LED labels for the enhanced front panel display.
1.
Start the EnerVista UR Setup software.
GE Multilin
4-17

2.
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Select the Front Panel Report item at the bottom of the menu tree for the settings file. The front panel report window
will be displayed.
4
Figure 422: FRONT PANEL REPORT WINDOW
3.
Enter the text to appear next to each LED and above each user-programmable pushbuttons in the fields provided.
4.
Feed the L90 front panel label cutout sheet into a printer and press the Print button in the front panel report window.
5.
When printing is complete, fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels.
6.
Remove the L90 label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures. These
tabs will be used for removal of the default and custom LED labels.
It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below, with the printed side containing the GE part
number facing the user.
NOTE
The label package shipped with every L90 contains the three default labels shown below, the custom label template sheet,
and the label removal tool.
If the default labels are suitable for your application, insert them in the appropriate slots and program the LEDs to match
them. If you require custom labels, follow the procedures below to remove the original labels and insert the new ones.
The following procedure describes how to setup and use the label removal tool.
1.
Bend the tabs at the left end of the tool upwards as shown below.
4-18
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
2.
Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown below.
The following procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the L90 enhanced front panel and insert the custom
labels.
1.
2.
Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath. Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from
the relay.
Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will attach the label tool to the LED
label.
GE Multilin
4-19
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
3.
Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown below.
4.
Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs, as shown below.
The following procedure describes how to remove the user-programmable pushbutton labels from the L90 enhanced front
panel and insert the custom labels.
1.
Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath, as shown below. Make sure the
bent tab is pointing away from the relay.
4-20
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
2.
Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will
attach the label tool to the user-programmable pushbutton label.
3.
Remove the tool and attached user-programmable pushbutton label as shown below.
GE Multilin
4-21

4.
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Slide the new user-programmable pushbutton label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the buttons,
as shown below.
4
Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL:
http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/app/ViewFiles.aspx?prod=urfamily&type=9
This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures
are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x)
edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling.
1.
Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE Multilin part number: 1501-0014).
F60
FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY
Push in
and gently lift
up the cover.
842771A1.CDR
2.
Pop out the LED module and/or the blank module with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the
plastic covers.
( LED MODULE )
F60
FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY
( BLANK MODULE )
842722A1.CDR
3.
Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side.
4.
Put the clear Lexan front cover back into place.
4-22
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The following items are required to customize the L90 display module:
Black and white or color printer (color preferred).
Microsoft Word 97 or later software for editing the template.
1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1516-0069),
and a custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015).
The following procedure describes how to customize the L90 display module:
1.
Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on
the template(s). Delete unused place holders as required.
2.
When complete, save the Word file to your local PC for future use.
3.
Print the template(s) to a local printer.
4.
From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide.
5.
Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1513-0069) and snap the
clear custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.
4.3.4 DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad
and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven
message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.
4.3.5 KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting
values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The HELP key may
be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The ENTER key stores altered setting values.
4.3.6 BREAKER CONTROL
a) INTRODUCTION
The L90 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker,
which can be presented on faceplate LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually
initiated from faceplate keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic operand. A setting is provided to assign names
to each breaker; this user-assigned name is used for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided for
two breakers; the user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 1(2) BREAKER
FUNCTION setting is "Enabled" for each breaker.
b) CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND MONITORING
Installations may require that a breaker is operated in the three-pole only mode (3-pole), or in the one and three-pole (1pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as three-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as one-pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be in
agreement to indicate the position of the breaker.
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 1(2) BREAKER
1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL setting is Enabled for each breaker.
GE Multilin
4-23
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
c) FACEPLATE (USER KEY) CONTROL

After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user
cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state.
d) CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS
For the following example setup, the (Name) field represents the user-programmed variable name.
For this application (setup shown below), the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker 1 and breaker 2. The
USER 1 key performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2 key
is used to manually close the breaker and the USER 3 key is used to manually open the breaker.
ENTER COMMAND
PASSWORD
This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a
is required; i.e. if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no commands have been issued within the last 30 minutes.
COMMAND PASSWORD
Press USER 1
To Select Breaker
This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This message will be maintained for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.
BKR1-(Name) SELECTED
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three
possible actions can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per items (1), (2)
and (3) below:
(1)
USER 2 OFF/ON
To Close BKR1-(Name)
If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is
pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to close breaker 1.
(2)
USER 3 OFF/ON
To Open BKR1-(Name)
If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is
pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to open breaker 1.
(3)
BKR2-(Name) SELECTED
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different
breaker is selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1),
(2) and (3). Repeatedly pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers.
Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2 or 3 at any time aborts the breaker control function.
e) CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER

For this application the relay is connected and programmed for breaker 1 only. Operation for this application is identical to
that described above for two breakers.
4.3.7 MENUS
a) NAVIGATION
Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading
pages:
Actual values.
Settings.
Commands.
Targets.
User displays (when enabled).
4-24
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
b) HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing
the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL
LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION
ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
Press the MENU key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This
page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE
keys to display the other actual value headers.
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Press the MENU key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page
contains settings to configure the relay.
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Press the MESSAGE DOWN key to move to the next Settings page. This page contains settings for System Setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE UP and DOWN
keys to display the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page
header.
From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE RIGHT
key once to display the first sub-header (Password Security).
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for
Password Security. Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key repeatedly will display the
remaining setting messages for this sub-header.
Press the MESSAGE LEFT key once to move back to the first sub-header message.
PASSWORD
SECURITY
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key will display the second setting sub-header associated with the Product Setup header.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for
Display Properties.
DEFAULT MESSAGE
INTENSITY: 25%
GE Multilin
To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader,
repeatedly press the MESSAGE DOWN key. The last message appears as shown.
4-25
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.3.8 CHANGING SETTINGS
a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA

Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define
what values are acceptable for a setting.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
For example, select the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH
setting.
MESSAGE TIME
MINIMUM:
MAXIMUM:
0.5
10.0
Press the HELP key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the HELP key
again to view the next context sensitive help message.
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
0 to 9 and decimal point: The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A number is
entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
VALUE keys: The VALUE UP key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value allowed.
While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE UP key again will allow the setting selection to continue upward
from the minimum value. The VALUE DOWN key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE DOWN key again will allow the setting selection to continue downward from the maximum value.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 2.5 s
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate
numeric keys in the sequence 2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are
being entered.
Until ENTER is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press
ENTER to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear
as confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places
will be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step
value.
b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA

Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is
comprised of two or more members.
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command",
"Setting", and "Factory Service".
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE UP key displays the next selection while the
VALUE DOWN key displays the previous selection.
ACCESS LEVEL:
Setting
If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selection is displayed. Press HELP at any time for the context sensitive help messages.
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
Changes are not registered by the relay until the ENTER key is pressed. Pressing
ENTER stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as
confirmation of the storing process.
c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT

Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper
case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
4-26
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
There are several places where text messages may be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages.
For example: to enter the text, Breaker #1.
1.
Press the decimal to enter text edit mode.
2.
Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
3.
Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4.
Press ENTER to store the text.
5.
If you have any problem, press HELP to view context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing HELP displays how to edit and store new values.
d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY

When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED will be on, the In Service LED off, and
this message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have
not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows:
1.
Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the
display.
2.
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display.
3.
Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display.
4.
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed.
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
PASSWORD
SECURITY
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
INSTALLATION
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
5.
After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the
selection to "Programmed".
6.
Press the ENTER key.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
7.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Programmed
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the
In Service LED will turn on.
e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS

The L90 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.
GE Multilin
4-27
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry
and the faceplate RS232 connection. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
enables this functionality.
To enter the initial setting (or command) password, proceed as follows:
1.
Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the
display.
2.
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display.
3.
Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS message appears on the display.
4.
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD or CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD message
appears on the display.
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
CHANGE LOCAL
PASSWORDS
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: --------ENCRYPTED SETTING
PASSWORD: ---------
5.
After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE UP or DOWN key to change the
selection to Yes.
6.
Press the ENTER key and the display will prompt you to ENTER NEW PASSWORD.
7.
Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the ENTER key.
8.
When the VERIFY NEW PASSWORD is displayed, re-type in the same password and press ENTER.
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: Yes
ENTER NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
VERIFY NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
HAS BEEN STORED
9.
When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will be
active.
f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD

To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will
prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered.
In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding encrypted password from the PASSWORD
SECURITY menu to the Factory for decoding.
g) INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY
In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the faceplate interface three times within
a three-minute time span, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and the L90 will not allow
Settings or Command access via the faceplate interface for the next ten minutes. The TOO MANY ATTEMPTS BLOCKED
4-28
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
FOR 10 MIN! flash message will appear upon activation of the ten minute timeout or any other time a user attempts any
change to the defined tier during the ten minute timeout. The LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to
Off after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout.

In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the any external communications interface three times within a three-minute time span, the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and
the L90 will not allow Settings or Command access via the any external communications interface for the next ten minutes.
The REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to Off after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout.
GE Multilin
4-29
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4-30
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
GE Multilin
5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU
SECURITY
See page 5-8.
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
See page 5-12.
CLEAR RELAY
RECORDS
See page 5-14.
COMMUNICATIONS
See page 5-15.
MODBUS USER MAP
See page 5-34.
REAL TIME
CLOCK
See page 5-35.
FAULT REPORTS
See page 5-36.
OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 5-38.
DATA LOGGER
See page 5-40.
DEMAND
See page 5-42.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LEDS
See page 5-43.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
SELF TESTS
See page 5-46.
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
See page 5-47.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS
See page 5-49.
FLEX STATE
PARAMETERS
See page 5-54.
USER-DEFINABLE
DISPLAYS
See page 5-55.
INSTALLATION
See page 5-57.
AC INPUTS
See page 5-59.
POWER SYSTEM
See page 5-60.
SIGNAL SOURCES
See page 5-61.
L90 POWER SYSTEM
See page 5-64.
5-1
5.1 OVERVIEW
SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
BREAKERS
See page 5-69.
SWITCHES
See page 5-73.
FLEXCURVES
See page 5-76.
PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT
See page 5-83.
FLEXLOGIC
EQUATION EDITOR
See page 5-115.
FLEXLOGIC
TIMERS
See page 5-115.
FLEXELEMENTS
See page 5-116.
NON-VOLATILE
LATCHES
See page 5-120.
SETTING GROUP 1
See page 5-121.
SETTING GROUP 2
SETTING GROUP 6
SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
5-2
TRIP BUS
See page 5-207.
SETTING GROUPS
See page 5-209.
SELECTOR SWITCH
See page 5-210.
TRIP OUTPUT
See page 5-216.
SYNCHROCHECK
See page 5-222.
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
See page 5-226.
DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 5-229.
MONITORING
ELEMENTS
See page 5-232.
PILOT SCHEMES
See page 5-247.
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTINGS
INPUTS / OUTPUTS
SETTINGS
TRANSDUCER I/O
SETTINGS
TESTING
GE Multilin
5.1 OVERVIEW
AUTORECLOSE
See page 5-250.
CONTACT INPUTS
See page 5-262.
VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 5-264.
CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 5-265.
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 5-267.
REMOTE DEVICES
See page 5-268.
REMOTE INPUTS
See page 5-269.
REMOTE DPS INPUTS
See page 5-270.
REMOTE OUTPUTS
DNA BIT PAIRS
See page 5-271.
REMOTE OUTPUTS
UserSt BIT PAIRS
See page 5-271.
DIRECT
See page 5-271.
RESETTING
See page 5-274.
IEC 61850
GOOSE ANALOGS
See page 5-274.
IEC 61850
GOOSE UINTEGERS
See page 5-275.
DCMA INPUTS
See page 5-276.
RTD INPUTS
See page 5-277.
DCMA OUTPUTS
See page 5-279.
TEST MODE
FUNCTION: Disabled
See page 5-282.
TEST MODE FORCING:

On
See page 5-282.
FORCE CONTACT
INPUTS
See page 5-283.
FORCE CONTACT
OUTPUTS
See page 5-284.
5-3
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS
CHANNEL TESTS
See page 5-285.
PMU
TEST VALUES
See page 5-285.

5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS
In the design of UR relays, the term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The comparator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to determine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as setting the flag. A single
comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a
pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an operate flag when the input current has been at a level
above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators use analog parameter
actual values as the input.
An exception to this rule is digital elements, which use logic states as inputs.
NOTE
Elements are arranged into two classes, grouped and control. Each element classed as a grouped element is provided with
six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a grouped element is defined by
the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a control element is independent of the selected active
setting group.
The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the inputs, settings, fixed
logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F).
Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:
pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)
For current elements, the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT.
Where the current source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the base quantity will be the common secondary or
primary current to which the sum is scaled (that is, normalized to the larger of the two rated CT inputs). For example, if CT1
= 300 / 5 A and CT2 = 100 / 5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the base quantity
will be 5 A secondary or 300 A primary.
For voltage elements the base quantity is the nominal primary voltage of the protected system which corresponds (based
on VT ratio and connection) to secondary VT voltage applied to the relay.
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with 14400:120 V delta-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be:
13800
---------------- 120 = 115 V
14400
(EQ 5.1)
For Wye-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be:
13800
---------------- 120
---------- = 66.4 V
14400
3
(EQ 5.2)
Many settings are common to most elements and are discussed below:
FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as Enabled. The factory
default is Disabled. Once programmed to Enabled, any element associated with the function becomes active and all
options become available.
NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
SOURCE setting: This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored.
PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or
below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the
range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup.
5-4
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the pickup
and operate output states.
RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the
Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.
BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or flag not set. The comparator
remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN
input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise
the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.
TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to Disabled, no
target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to SelfReset, the target message and LED indication follow the Operate state of the element, and self-resets once the operate element condition clears. When set to Latched, the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the
element output returns to logic 0 - until a RESET command is received by the relay.
EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the Pickup, Dropout or Operate states are recorded by the
event recorder. When set to Disabled, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to
Enabled, events are created for:
(Element) PKP (pickup)
(Element) DPO (dropout)
(Element) OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to
the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not 0.
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES
a) BACKGROUND
The L90 may be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations.
In these applications, each of the two three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) can
be used as an input to a breaker failure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residual currents may
be required for the circuit relaying and metering functions. Two separate synchrocheck elements can be programmed to
check synchronization between two different buses VT and the line VT. These requirements can be satisfied with a single
L90, equipped with sufficient CT and VT input channels, by selecting proper parameter to measure. A mechanism is provided to specify the AC parameter (or group of parameters) used as the input to protection/control comparators and some
metering elements. Selection of the measured parameter(s) is partially performed by the design of a measuring element or
protection/control comparator by identifying the measured parameter type (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonic phasor, symmetrical component, total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage, etc.). The user completes the process by selecting the instrument transformer input channels to use and some parameters calculated from
these channels. The input parameters available include the summation of currents from multiple input channels. For the
summed currents of phase, 3I_0, and ground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to a single ratio
before summation. A mechanism called a Source configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement
sub-systems.
Sources, in the context of L90 series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one
source contains all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source may
contain all or some of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and
an auxiliary voltages from a single-phase VT for checking for synchronism.
To illustrate the concept of Sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme below. Some
protection elements, like breaker failure, require individual CT current as an input. Other elements, like distance, require the
sum of both current as an input. The line differential function requires the CT currents to be processed individually to cope
with a possible CT saturation of one CT during an external fault on the upper bus. The current into protected line is the phasor sum (or difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2, depending on the current distribution on the upper bus.
GE Multilin
5-5
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS
Figure 51: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME
In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of
all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to
perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the L90 relay, provisions have
been included for all the current signals to be brought to the device where grouping, CT ratio correction, and summation are
applied internally via configuration settings. Up to 4 currents can be brought into L90 relay; current summation and CT ratio
matching is performed internally. A major advantage of internal summation is that individual currents are available to the
protection device (for example, as additional information to apply a restraint current properly, or to allow the provision of
additional features that operate on the individual currents, such as breaker failure). Given the flexibility of this approach, it
becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to select which sets of CT inputs will be
added to form the net current into the protected device. The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal source. This source can be assigned a specific name and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the
relay. Individual names can be given to each source to identify them for later use. For example, in the scheme shown
above, three different sources are be configured as inputs for separate elements:
Source 1: CT1 current, for the breaker failure 1 element and first current source for the line differential element
Source 2: CT2 current, for breaker failure 2 element and second current source for the line differential element
Source 3: the sum of the CT1 and CT2 currents for the distance function
In addition, two separate synchrocheck elements can be programmed to check synchronization between line voltage and
two different bus voltages (SRC3SRC1 and SRC3SRC2).
b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION
CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage,
phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental
frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each
channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module.
A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the
module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group,
hereafter called a bank, and all four are either current or voltage, as are channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6,
7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage.
5-6
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and
from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1
CT/VT MODULE 2
CT/VT MODULE 3
< bank 1 >
< bank 3 >
< bank 5 >
< bank 2 >
< bank 4 >
< bank 6 >
The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The
result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of
sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
ITEM
MAXIMUM NUMBER
CT/VT Module
CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel)
VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel)
c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically
generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of
channels in a given product. The bank naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by
the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot
in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5.
For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents
the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels.
Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them
in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1,
F5, L1, L5, S1, and S5.
The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument
transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element
and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific source. The source is a group of current and
voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make
multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a
watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes.
The basic idea of arranging a source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An application example of the grouping of parameters in a source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is measured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.
GE Multilin
5-7
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.1 SECURITY
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,

Factory Service (for factory use only)
MESSAGE
CHANGE LOCAL
PASSWORDS
See page 59.
MESSAGE
ACCESS
SUPERVISION
See page 510.
MESSAGE
DUAL PERMISSION
SECURITY ACCESS
See page 511.
MESSAGE
PASSWORD ACCESS
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Two levels of password security are provided via the ACCESS LEVEL setting: command and setting. The factory service level
is not available and intended for factory use only.
The following operations are under command password supervision:
Operating the breakers via faceplate keypad.
Changing the state of virtual inputs.
Clearing the event records.
Clearing the oscillography records.
Clearing fault reports.
Changing the date and time.
Clearing the breaker arcing current.
Clearing energy records.
Clearing the data logger.
Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states.
The following operations are under setting password supervision:
Changing any setting.
Test mode operation.
The command and setting passwords are defaulted to 0 when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is
set to 0, the password security feature is disabled.
and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear
communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the L90, the remote password must be used. If the connection
is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password must be used.
The PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS settings allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.
The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either by
the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout.
5-8
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands.
ACCESS LOC SETG OFF: Asserted when local setting access is disabled.
ACCESS LOC SETG ON: Asserted when local setting access is enabled.
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF: Asserted when local command access is disabled.
ACCESS LOC CMND ON: Asserted when local command access is enabled.
ACCESS REM SETG OFF: Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.
ACCESS REM SETG ON: Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.
ACCESS REM CMND OFF: Asserted when remote command access is disabled.
ACCESS REM CMND ON: Asserted when remote command access is enabled.
The appropriate events are also logged in the Event Recorder as well. The FlexLogic operands and events are updated
every five seconds.
A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of all the remote and local security operands
shown above.
NOTE
b) LOCAL PASSWORDS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: ----------
Range: 0 to 9999999999
Note: ---------- indicates no password
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED SETTING
Range: 0 to 9999999999
CHANGE LOCAL
PASSWORDS
Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters.
When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD setting is programmed to Yes via the front panel
interface, the following message sequence is invoked:
1.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
2.
VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
3.
NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a Restricted setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to Setting and
then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the
password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. Accessibility automatically reverts to the Restricted level according
to the access level timeout setting values.
If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD.
If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and settings.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-9
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
c) REMOTE PASSWORDS
The remote password settings are only visible from a remote connection via the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the
Settings > Product Setup > Password Security menu item to open the remote password settings window.
Figure 52: REMOTE PASSWORD SETTINGS WINDOW

Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access. A command or setting password consists
of 1 to 10 numerical characters and are initially programmed to 0. The following procedure describes how the set the command or setting password.
1.
Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field.
2.
Re-enter the password in the Confirm New Password field.
3.
Click the Change button. This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password.
4.
If the original password is not 0, then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send
Password to Device button.
5.
The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the ENCRYPTED PASSWORD item.
If a command or setting password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding Encrypted Password
value.
d) ACCESS SUPERVISION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION
ACCESS
SUPERVISION
ACCESS LEVEL
TIMEOUTS
MESSAGE
INVALID ATTEMPTS
BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3
Range: 2 to 5 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PASSWORD LOCKOUT
DURATION: 5 min
Range: 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1
The following access supervision settings are available.
5-10
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be
entered within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED and
REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operands are set to On. These operands are returned to the Off state upon
expiration of the lockout.
PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: This setting specifies the time that the L90 will lockout password access after
the number of invalid password entries specified by the INVALID ATTEMPS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting has occurred.
The L90 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing
a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is
asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be
used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS RESET UNAUTHORIZED
ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The
operand does not generate events or targets.
If events or targets are required, the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed
with event logs or targets enabled.
The access level timeout settings are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
ACCESS LEVEL
TIMEOUTS
MESSAGE
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS

TIMEOUT: 5 min
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS

TIMEOUT: 30 min
These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the restricted access level. Note
that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled.
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
required to return to restricted access from the command password level.
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
e) DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
LOCAL SETTING AUTH:

On
Range: selected FlexLogic operands (see below)
MESSAGE
REMOTE SETTING AUTH:

On
Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
ACCESS AUTH
TIMEOUT: 30 min.
DUAL PERMISSION
SECURITY ACCESS
The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended
upload of settings to a relay through the local or remote interfaces interface.
The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.
LOCAL SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision.
Valid values for the FlexLogic operands are either On (default) or any physical Contact Input ~~ On value.
If this setting is On, then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this
setting is any contact input on FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing
the local setting password to gain setting access.
If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain
setting access, then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message is displayed on the front panel.
REMOTE SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
GE Multilin
5-11
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
If this setting is On (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is
required). If this setting is Off, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is
provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the remote setting password to gain setting access.
ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable
when the LOCAL SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except On. The state of the FlexLogic operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer programmed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is
immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product
Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.
The Remote Settings Authorization setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
required). If this setting is Off, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the
remote setting password to gain setting access.
The Access Authorization Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. This setting is applicable
when the Remote Settings Authorization setting is programmed to any operand except On or Off. The state of the
FlexLogic operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorization Timeout setting value is started. When this timer
expires, remote setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic
operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
5-12
LANGUAGE:
English
Range: English; English, French; English, Russian;

English, Chinese
(range dependent on order code)
Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
MESSAGE
DEFAULT MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 300 s
Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEFAULT MESSAGE
INTENSITY: 25 %
Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%

Visible only if a VFD is installed
MESSAGE
SCREEN SAVER
FEATURE: Disabled

Visible only if an LCD is installed
MESSAGE
SCREEN SAVER WAIT

TIME: 30 min
Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1

Visible only if an LCD is installed
MESSAGE
CURRENT CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 0.020 pu
Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 1.0 V
Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
LANGUAGE: This setting selects the language used to display settings, actual values, and targets. The range is
dependent on the order code of the relay.
FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several
seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a
default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough
during programming or reading of actual values.
DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be
attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness.
SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the L90 has a liquid
crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is Enabled, the LCD backlighting
is turned off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, providing that no keys
have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD
backlighting is turned on.
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the
rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others
prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The L90 applies a cutoff value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by
communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
This setting does not affect the 87L metering cutoff, which is constantly at 0.02 pu.
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed
as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The L90 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below
the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical
components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those
used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off.
The CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are used to determine the metered power cut-off levels. The
power cut-off level is calculated as shown below. For Delta connections:
3 CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary
3-phase power cut-off = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
(EQ 5.3)
For Wye connections:

3 CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary
3-phase power cut-off = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
(EQ 5.4)
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary

per-phase power cut-off = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
(EQ 5.5)
where VT primary = VT secondary VT ratio and CT primary = CT secondary CT ratio.

For example, given the following settings:
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: 0.02 pu
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: 1.0 V
PHASE CT PRIMARY: 100 A
PHASE VT SECONDARY: 66.4 V
PHASE VT RATIO: 208.00 : 1"
PHASE VT CONNECTION: Delta.
GE Multilin
5-13
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
We have:
CT primary = 100 A, and
VT primary = PHASE VT SECONDARY x PHASE VT RATIO = 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V
The power cut-off is therefore:
power cut-off = (CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL CT primary VT primary)/VT secondary
= ( 3 0.02 pu 1.0 V 100 A 13811.2 V) / 66.4 V
= 720.5 watts
Any calculated power value below this cut-off will not be displayed. As well, the three-phase energy data will not accumulate if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut-off.
NOTE
Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals
as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of 0.02
pu for CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and 1.0 V for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.
5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS:

Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS:

Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY?
No
MESSAGE
CLEAR DATA LOGGER:

Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR ARC AMPS 1:

Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR ARC AMPS 2:

Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR DEMAND:
Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR CHNL STATUS:

Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR ENERGY:
Off
MESSAGE
RESET UNAUTH ACCESS:

Off
CLEAR RELAY
RECORDS
Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic operands. Assigning user-programmable pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. Since the L90 responds to rising
edges of the configured FlexLogic operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect.
Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-programmable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programmable pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.
For example, to assign User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, the following settings should be
applied.
1.
Assign the clear demand function to Pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
5-14
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
2.
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Set the properties for User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS PRODUCT
menu:
SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1

PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.20 s
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL PORTS
See below.
MESSAGE
NETWORK
See page 516.
MESSAGE
MODBUS PROTOCOL
See page 516.
MESSAGE
DNP PROTOCOL
See page 517.
MESSAGE
DNP / IEC104
POINT LISTS
See page 520.
MESSAGE
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
See page 521.
MESSAGE
WEB SERVER
HTTP PROTOCOL
See page 532.
MESSAGE
TFTP PROTOCOL
See page 532.
MESSAGE
IEC 60870-5-104
PROTOCOL
See page 532.
MESSAGE
SNTP PROTOCOL
See page 533.
MESSAGE
ETHERNET SWITCH
See page 534.
b) SERIAL PORTS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS
MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 PARITY:

None
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,

28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only
active if CPU Type E is ordered.
Range: None, Odd, Even
Only active if CPU Type E is ordered
MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 RESPONSE

MIN TIME:
0 ms
Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10

Only active if CPU Type E is ordered
MESSAGE
RS485 COM2 BAUD

RATE: 19200
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,

28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200
MESSAGE
RS485 COM2 PARITY:

None
Range: None, Odd, Even
MESSAGE
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE

MIN TIME:
0 ms
SERIAL PORTS
GE Multilin
RS485 COM1 BAUD

RATE: 19200
5-15
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The L90 is equipped with up to three independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for
local use and is fixed at 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type is selected when ordering: either an Ethernet
or RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485. The RS485 ports have settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that
these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of
these ports may be connected to a computer running EnerVista UR Setup. This software can download and upload setting
files, view measured parameters, and upgrade the relay firmware. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports.
NOTE
For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be
set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after
each transmission.
c) NETWORK
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
IP ADDRESS:
0.0.0.0
Range: Standard IP address format

Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered.
MESSAGE
SUBNET IP MASK:
0.0.0.0

MESSAGE
GATEWAY IP ADDRESS:
0.0.0.0

MESSAGE
OSI NETWORK
ADDRESS (NSAP)
Range: Select to enter the OSI NETWORK ADDRESS.

MESSAGE
ETHERNET OPERATION
MODE: Full-Duplex
Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex

Not shown if CPU Type E or N is ordered.
NETWORK
These messages appear only if the L90 is ordered with an Ethernet card.
The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP protocols. The
NSAP address is used with the IEC 61850 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has a setting for the TCP/UDP port number. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations and should normally
be left at their default values, but may be changed if required (for example, to allow access to multiple UR-series relays
behind a router). By setting a different TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER for a given protocol on each UR-series relay, the router can
map the relays to the same external IP address. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) must be configured
to use the correct port number if these settings are used.
When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP port number, or any user map setting (when used with DNP) is changed, it
will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-on).
NOTE
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP Port Number, as this will result in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
d) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MESSAGE
MODBUS SLAVE
ADDRESS: 254
MODBUS TCP PORT

NUMBER:
502
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 operation (see
descriptions below). This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device
only. When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the L90 will respond regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS programmed. For the RS485 ports each L90 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address
which all Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same
address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher
address starting at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol.
5-16
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Changes to the MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting will not take effect until the L90 is restarted.
NOTE
e) DNP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL
DNP CHANNELS
Range: see sub-menu below
MESSAGE
DNP ADDRESS:
65519
MESSAGE
DNP NETWORK
CLIENT ADDRESSES
MESSAGE
DNP TCP/UDP PORT

NUMBER: 20000
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE

FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE

TIMEOUT: 5 s
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE

MAX RETRIES: 10
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE

DEST ADDRESS: 1
MESSAGE
DNP CURRENT SCALE

FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000
MESSAGE
DNP VOLTAGE SCALE

FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000
MESSAGE
DNP POWER SCALE

FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000
MESSAGE
DNP ENERGY SCALE

FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000
MESSAGE
DNP PF SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000
MESSAGE
DNP OTHER SCALE

FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000
MESSAGE
DNP CURRENT DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP POWER DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP ENERGY DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP PF DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP OTHER DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000
DNP PROTOCOL
GE Multilin
5-17
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
DNP TIME SYNC IIN

PERIOD: 1440 min
Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT

SIZE: 240
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 1
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 2
Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 20
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 21
Range: 1, 2, 9, 10
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 22
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 23
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 30
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 32
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7
MESSAGE
DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED

CONTROL POINTS: 0
MESSAGE
DNP TCP CONNECTION

TIMEOUT: 120 s
The L90 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The L90 can be used as a DNP slave device connected to multiple DNP masters (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the L90 maintains two sets of DNP
data change buffers and connection information, two DNP masters can actively communicate with the L90 at one time.
NOTE
The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be simultaneously. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION setting is set to Enabled, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not
become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).
The DNP Channels sub-menu is shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL DNP CHANNELS
DNP CHANNELS
DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT:

NETWORK
MESSAGE
DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT:

COM2 - RS485
Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485,

FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP,
NETWORK - UDP
Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485,
FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP,
NETWORK - UDP
The DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol
for each channel. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can
be used only in non-Ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to Network - TCP, the DNP protocol can be used over
TCP/IP on channels 1 or 2. When this value is set to Network - UDP, the DNP protocol can be used over UDP/IP on channel 1 only. Refer to Appendix E for additional information on the DNP protocol.
Changes to the DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings will take effect only after power has
been cycled to the relay.
NOTE
The DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS settings can force the L90 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters. The
settings in this sub-menu are shown below.
5-18
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
CLIENT ADDRESS 1:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
CLIENT ADDRESS 2:
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
CLIENT ADDRESS 3:
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
CLIENT ADDRESS 4:
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
CLIENT ADDRESS 5:
0.0.0.0
DNP NETWORK
CLIENT ADDRESSES
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION should be Disabled for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance
mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the L90 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited
response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the L90 retransmits an unsolicited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of 255 allows infinite re-tries. The DNP UNSOL
RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolicited responses are sent is determined by the L90 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message.
The DNP scale factor settings are numbers used to scale analog input point values. These settings group the L90 analog
input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other. Each setting represents the
scale factor for all analog input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to 1000,
all DNP analog input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (for example, a value of 72000
V on the L90 will be returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (that is, the value will be 10
times larger).
The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input data. These
settings group the L90 analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other.
Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolicited responses from the L90 when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting should
be set to 15. Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP analog input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to
the L90, the default deadbands will be in effect.
The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the L90.
Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.
The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be
necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
NOTE
When the DNP data points (analog inputs and/or binary inputs) are configured for Ethernet-enabled relays,
check the DNP Points Lists L90 web page to view the points lists. This page can be viewed with a web
browser by entering the L90 IP address to access the L90 Main Menu, then by selecting the Device Information Menu > DNP Points Lists menu item.
The DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION to DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION settings allow the user to select the DNP
default variation number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default variation refers to the variation
response when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Refer to the DNP implementation section in
appendix E for additional details.
The DNP binary outputs typically map one-to-one to IED data points. That is, each DNP binary output controls a single
physical or virtual control point in an IED. In the L90 relay, DNP binary outputs are mapped to virtual inputs. However, some
legacy DNP implementations use a mapping of one DNP binary output to two physical or virtual control points to support
the concept of trip/close (for circuit breakers) or raise/lower (for tap changers) using a single control point. That is, the DNP
master can operate a single point for both trip and close, or raise and lower, operations. The L90 can be configured to sup-
GE Multilin
5-19
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
port paired control points, with each paired control point operating two virtual inputs. The DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED CONTROL
POINTS setting allows configuration of from 0 to 32 binary output paired controls. Points not configured as paired operate on
a one-to-one basis.
The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the L90 on a DNP communications link. Each
DNP slave should be assigned a unique address.
The DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If
there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection will be
aborted by the L90. This frees up the connection to be re-used by a client.
Relay power must be re-cycled after changing the DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting for the changes to take
effect.
NOTE
f) DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LISTS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS
DNP / IEC104
POINT LISTS
MESSAGE
BINARY INPUT / MSP

POINTS
ANALOG INPUT / MME

POINTS
The binary and analog inputs points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol, can
configured to a maximum of 256 points. The value for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by assigning
FlexLogic operands for binary inputs / MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs / MME points.
The menu for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS
BINARY INPUT / MSP

POINTS
MESSAGE
Point:
Off
Point:
Off
MESSAGE
Point:
Off
255
Up to 256 binary input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The points are configured by
assigning an appropriate FlexLogic operand. Refer to the Introduction to FlexLogic section in this chapter for the full
range of assignable operands.
The menu for the analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS
ANALOG INPUT / MME

POINTS
MESSAGE
Point:
Off
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
Point:
Off
MESSAGE
Point:
Off
255
Up to 256 analog input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The analog point list is configured by assigning an appropriate FlexAnalog parameter to each point. Refer to Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for the
full range of assignable parameters.
5-20
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
NOTE
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first Off value. Since DNP /
IEC 60870-5-104 point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first Off point
are ignored.
Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists will not take effect until the L90 is restarted.
NOTE
g) IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
GSSE / GOOSE
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
SERVER
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
IEC 61850 LOGICAL

NODE NAME PREFIXES
MESSAGE
MMXU DEADBANDS
MESSAGE
GGIO1 STATUS
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
GGIO2 CONTROL
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
GGIO4 ANALOG
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
GGIO5 UINTEGER
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
REPORT CONTROL
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
XCBR
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
XSWI
CONFIGURATION
The L90 Line Current Differential System is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications capability.
This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details. The IEC 61850 protocol features are not available if CPU type E is ordered.
The L90 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by IEC 61850. MMS is supported
over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over ethernet. The L90 operates as an IEC 61850
server. The Remote inputs and outputs section in this chapter describe the peer-to-peer GSSE/GOOSE message scheme.
The GSSE/GOOSE configuration main menu is divided into two areas: transmission and reception.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION
GSSE / GOOSE
CONFIGURATION
TRANSMISSION
MESSAGE
RECEPTION
The main transmission menu is shown below:
GE Multilin
5-21
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE... TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
GENERAL
MESSAGE
GSSE
MESSAGE
FIXED GOOSE
MESSAGE
CONFIGURABLE
GOOSE
The general transmission settings are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GSSE/GOOSE... TRANSMISSION GENERAL
GENERAL
DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE
UPDATE TIME: 60 s
The DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME sets the time between GSSE or GOOSE messages when there are no remote output state changes to be sent. When remote output data changes, GSSE or GOOSE messages are sent immediately. This
setting controls the steady-state heartbeat time interval.
The DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME setting is applicable to GSSE, fixed L90 GOOSE, and configurable GOOSE.
The GSSE settings are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GSSE/GOOSE... TRANSMISSION GSEE
GSSE FUNCTION:
Enabled
MESSAGE
GSSE ID:
GSSEOut
Range: 65-character ASCII string
MESSAGE
DESTINATION MAC:
000000000000
Range: standard MAC address
GSSE
These settings are applicable to GSSE only. If the fixed GOOSE function is enabled, GSSE messages are not transmitted.
The GSSE ID setting represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE message. This
string identifies the GSSE message to the receiving device. In L90 releases previous to 5.0x, this name string was represented by the RELAY NAME setting.
The fixed GOOSE settings are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT... COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GSSE/GOOSE... TRANSMISSION FIXED GOOSE
GOOSE FUNCTION:
Disabled
MESSAGE
GOOSE ID:
GOOSEOut
MESSAGE
DESTINATION MAC:
000000000000
MESSAGE
GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY:

4
MESSAGE
GOOSE VLAN ID:

0
MESSAGE
GOOSE ETYPE APPID:

0
FIXED GOOSE
5-22
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
These settings are applicable to fixed (DNA/UserSt) GOOSE only.

The GOOSE ID setting represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of each GOOSE
message. This string identifies the GOOSE message to the receiving device. In revisions previous to 5.0x, this name string
was represented by the RELAY NAME setting.
The DESTINATION MAC setting allows the destination Ethernet MAC address to be set. This address must be a multicast
address; the least significant bit of the first byte must be set. In L90 releases previous to 5.0x, the destination Ethernet MAC
address was determined automatically by taking the sending MAC address (that is, the unique, local MAC address of the
L90) and setting the multicast bit.
The GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE messages. This allows GOOSE messages to
have higher priority than other Ethernet data. The GOOSE ETYPE APPID setting allows the selection of a specific application
ID for each GOOSE sending device. This value can be left at its default if the feature is not required. Both the GOOSE VLAN
PRIORITY and GOOSE ETYPE APPID settings are required by IEC 61850.
The configurable GOOSE settings are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS... COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GSSE... TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8)
CONFIG GSE 1
FUNCTION: Enabled
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1 ID:

GOOSEOut_1
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC:

010CDC010000
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
VLAN PRIORITY: 4
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
VLAN ID:
0
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
ETYPE APPID:
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
CONFREV:
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1 RESTRANS

CURVE: Relaxed
Range: Aggressive, Medium, Relaxed, Heartbeat
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
DATASET ITEMS
Range: 64 data items; each can be set to all valid MMS

data item references for transmitted data
CONFIGURABLE
GOOSE 1
The configurable GOOSE settings allow the L90 to be configured to transmit a number of different datasets within IEC
61850 GOOSE messages. Up to eight different configurable datasets can be configured and transmitted. This is useful for
intercommunication between L90 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850.
The configurable GOOSE feature allows for the configuration of the datasets to be transmitted or received from the L90.
The L90 supports the configuration of eight (8) transmission and reception datasets, allowing for the optimization of data
transfer between devices.
Items programmed for dataset 1 and 2 will have changes in their status transmitted as soon as the change is detected.
Datasets 1 and 2 should be used for high-speed transmission of data that is required for applications such as transfer tripping, blocking, and breaker fail initiate. At least one digital status value needs to be configured in the required dataset to
enable transmission of configured data. Configuring analog data only to dataset 1 or 2 will not activate transmission.
Items programmed for datasets 3 through 8 will have changes in their status transmitted at a maximum rate of every
100 ms. Datasets 3 through 8 will regularly analyze each data item configured within them every 100 ms to identify if any
changes have been made. If any changes in the data items are detected, these changes will be transmitted through a
GOOSE message. If there are no changes detected during this 100 ms period, no GOOSE message will be sent.
For all datasets 1 through 8, the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre-configured rate even if no
changes in the data items are detected.
GE Multilin
5-23
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE messages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message.
The L90 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be
caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station
components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the L90 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a minimum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the L90 will continue to
block transmission of the dataset. The L90 will assert the MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill self-test error message on the front panel display, where XXX denotes the data item detected as oscillating.
For versions 5.70 and higher, the L90 supports four retransmission schemes: aggressive, medium, relaxed, and heartbeat.
The aggressive scheme is only supported in fast type 1A GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 1 and GOOSEOut 2). For slow
GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 3 to GOOSEOut 8) the aggressive scheme is the same as the medium scheme.
The details about each scheme are shown in the following table.
Table 51: GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEMES
SCHEME
SQ NUM
TIME FROM THE

EVENT
TIME BETWEEN
MESSAGES
COMMENT
TIME ALLOWED TO LIVE

IN MESSAGE
Aggressive
0 ms
0 ms
Event
2000 ms
4 ms
4 ms
T1
2000 ms
8 ms
4 ms
T1
2000 ms
16 ms
8 ms
T2
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
0 ms
0 ms
Event
2000 ms
16 ms
16 ms
T1
2000 ms
32 ms
16 ms
T1
2000 ms
64 ms
32 ms
T2
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
0 ms
0 ms
Event
2000 ms
100 ms
100 ms
T1
2000 ms
200 ms
100 ms
T1
2000 ms
700 ms
500 ms
T2
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
0 ms
0 ms
Event
2000 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T1
2000 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T1
2000 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T2
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Medium
Relaxed
Heartbeat
The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series
IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data
transfer between UR-series IEDs.
IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the
successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact
match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is
possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Setup
software can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (refer to
the IEC 61850 IED configuration section later in this appendix).
The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The
general steps required for transmission configuration are:
5-24
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
1.
Configure the transmission dataset.
2.
Configure the GOOSE service settings.
3.
Configure the data.
The general steps required for reception configuration are:

1.
Configure the reception dataset.
2.
3.
Configure the data.
This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status
value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value.
The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration.
1.
Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION

GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
Set ITEM 1 to GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q to indicate quality flags for GGIO1 status indication 1.
Set ITEM 2 to GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal to indicate the status value for GGIO1 status indication 1.
The transmission dataset now contains a set of quality flags and a single point status Boolean value. The reception
dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure.
2.
3.
Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 settings menu:
Set CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to Enabled.
Set CONFIG GSE 1 ID to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is GOOSEOut_1).
Set CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56).
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY; the default value of 4 is OK for this example.
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID value; the default value is 0, but some switches may require this value to be 1.
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID value. This setting represents the ETHERTYPE application ID and must match
the configuration on the receiver (the default value is 0).
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For
this example it can be left at its default value.
Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOsettings menu:
COL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to a FlexLogic operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example,
a contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).
The L90 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration.
1.
Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC
61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above.
2.
Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES
REMOTE DEVICE 1 settings menu:
Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter GOOSEOut_1.
GE Multilin
5-25
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
3.
5 SETTINGS
Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID to match the ETHERTYPE application ID from the transmitting device. This is
0 in the example above.
Set the REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using
configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as GOOSEIn 1.
Configure the data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1
settings menu:
Set REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE to GOOSEOut_1.
Set REMOTE IN 1 ITEM to Dataset Item 2. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status
item to remote input 1.
Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic equations or other settings. The L90 must be rebooted (control power
removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value
in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a complete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software.
For intercommunication between L90 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains
the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages. All GOOSE messages transmitted by the L90
(DNA/UserSt dataset and configurable datasets) use the IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging services (for example, VLAN support).
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION function to Disabled when configuration changes are required. Once changes are
entered, return the CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to Enabled and restart the unit for changes to take effect.
NOTE
PATH:...TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8) CONIFIG GSE 1(64) DATA TIMES ITEM 1(64)
CONFIG GSE 1
DATASET ITEMS
ITEM 1:
GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal
Range: all valid MMS data item references for

transmitted data
To create a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains an IEC 61850 Single Point Status indication and its associated quality flags, the following dataset items can be selected: GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal and GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q. The L90 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The status value for GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal is determined by the FlexLogic
operand assigned to GGIO1 indication 1. Changes to this operand will result in the transmission of GOOSE messages containing the defined dataset.
The main reception menu is applicable to configurable GOOSE only and contains the configurable GOOSE dataset items
for reception:
PATH:...RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8) CONIFIG GSE 1(64) DATA ITEMS
CONFIG GSE 1
DATASET ITEMS
ITEM 1:
GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal
Range: all valid MMS data item references for

transmitted data
The configurable GOOSE settings allow the L90 to be configured to receive a number of different datasets within IEC
61850 GOOSE messages. Up to eight different configurable datasets can be configured for reception. This is useful for
intercommunication between L90 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850.
For intercommunication between L90 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains
the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages.
To set up a L90 to receive a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains two IEC 61850 single point status indications, the
following dataset items can be selected (for example, for configurable GOOSE dataset 1): GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal and
GGIO3.ST.Ind2.stVal. The L90 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The Boolean status values from
these data items can be utilized as remote input FlexLogic operands. First, the REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) DATASET setting
must be set to contain dataset GOOSEIn 1 (that is, the first configurable dataset). Then REMOTE IN 1(16) ITEM settings
must be set to Dataset Item 1 and Dataset Item 2. These remote input FlexLogic operands will then change state in
accordance with the status values of the data items in the configured dataset.
Floating point analog values originating from MMXU logical nodes may be included in GOOSE datasets. Deadband (noninstantaneous) values can be transmitted. Received values are used to populate the GGIO3.XM.AnIn1 and higher items.
Received values are also available as FlexAnalog parameters (GOOSE analog In1 and up).
5-26
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The main menu for the IEC 61850 server configuration is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL SERVER CONFIGURATION
IED NAME: IECDevice
Range: up to 32 alphanumeric characters
LD INST: LDInst
LOCATION: Location
MESSAGE
IEC/MMS TCP PORT

NUMBER:
102
MESSAGE
INCLUDE NON-IEC
DATA: Enabled
MESSAGE
SERVER SCANNING:
Disabled
SERVER
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The IED NAME and LD INST settings represent the MMS domain name (IEC 61850 logical device) where all IEC/MMS logical
nodes are located. Valid characters for these values are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the underscore (_)
character, and the first character in the string must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard. The LOCATION is a
variable string and can be composed of ASCII characters. This string appears within the PhyName of the LPHD node.
The IEC/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER setting allows the user to change the TCP port number for MMS connections. The INCLUDE
NON-IEC DATA setting determines whether or not the UR MMS domain will be available. This domain contains a large number of UR-series specific data items that are not available in the IEC 61850 logical nodes. This data does not follow the IEC
61850 naming conventions. For communications schemes that strictly follow the IEC 61850 standard, this setting should be
Disabled.
The SERVER SCANNING feature should be set to Disabled when IEC 61850 client/server functionality is not required. IEC
61850 has two modes of functionality: GOOSE/GSSE inter-device communication and client/server communication. If the
GOOSE/GSSE functionality is required without the IEC 61850 client server feature, then server scanning can be disabled
to increase CPU resources. When server scanning is disabled, there will be not updated to the IEC 61850 logical node status values in the L90. Clients will still be able to connect to the server (L90 relay), but most data values will not be updated.
This setting does not affect GOOSE/GSSE operation.
Changes to the IED NAME setting, LD INST setting, and GOOSE dataset will not take effect until the L90 is restarted.
NOTE
The main menu for the IEC 61850 logical node name prefixes is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES
IEC 61850 LOGICAL

NODE NAME PREFIXES
MESSAGE
PIOC LOGICAL NODE

NAME PREFIXES
PTOC LOGICAL NODE
NAME PREFIXES
MESSAGE
PTRC LOGICAL NODE

NAME PREFIXES
The IEC 61850 logical node name prefix settings are used to create name prefixes to uniquely identify each logical node.
For example, the logical node PTOC1 may have the name prefix abc. The full logical node name will then be
abcMMXU1. Valid characters for the logical node name prefixes are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the
underscore (_) character, and the first character in the prefix must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard.
Changes to the logical node prefixes will not take effect until the L90 is restarted.
GE Multilin
5-27
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The main menu for the IEC 61850 MMXU deadbands is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL MMXU DEADBANDS
MMXU DEADBANDS
MMXU1 DEADBANDS
MESSAGE
MMXU2 DEADBANDS
MESSAGE
MMXU3 DEADBANDS
MESSAGE
MMXU4 DEADBANDS
The MMXU deadband settings represent the deadband values used to determine when the update the MMXU mag and
cVal values from the associated instmag and instcVal values. The mag and cVal values are used for the IEC 61850
buffered and unbuffered reports. These settings correspond to the associated db data items in the CF functional constraint of the MMXU logical node, as per the IEC 61850 standard. According to IEC 61850-7-3, the db value shall represent the percentage of difference between the maximum and minimum in units of 0.001%. Thus, it is important to know the
maximum value for each MMXU measured quantity, since this represents the 100.00% value for the deadband.
The minimum value for all quantities is 0; the maximum values are as follows:
phase current: 46 phase CT primary setting
neutral current: 46 ground CT primary setting
voltage: 275 VT ratio setting
power (real, reactive, and apparent): 46 phase CT primary setting 275 VT ratio setting
frequency: 90 Hz
power factor: 2
The GGIO1 status configuration points are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
GGIO1 STATUS
CONFIGURATION
NUMBER OF STATUS
POINTS IN GGIO1: 8
MESSAGE
GGIO1 INDICATION
Off
MESSAGE
GGIO1 INDICATION
Off
GGIO1 INDICATION 128

Off
MESSAGE
The NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1 setting specifies the number of Ind (single point status indications) that are
instantiated in the GGIO1 logical node. Changes to the NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1 setting will not take effect until
the L90 is restarted.
The GGIO2 control configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GGIO2 CONTROL... GGIO2 CF SPSCO 1(64)
GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1
GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1
CTLMODEL: 1
Range: 0, 1, or 2
The GGIO2 control configuration settings are used to set the control model for each input. The available choices are 0
(status only), 1 (direct control), and 2 (SBO with normal security). The GGIO2 control points are used to control the L90
virtual inputs.
5-28
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The GGIO4 analog configuration points are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
GGIO4 ANALOG
CONFIGURATION
NUMBER OF ANALOG
POINTS IN GGIO4:
MESSAGE
GGIO4 ANALOG 1
MEASURED VALUE
MESSAGE
GGIO4 ANALOG 2
MEASURED VALUE
MESSAGE
GGIO4 ANALOG 32
MEASURED VALUE
The NUMBER OF ANALOG POINTS setting determines how many analog data points will exist in GGIO4. When this value is
changed, the L90 must be rebooted in order to allow the GGIO4 logical node to be re-instantiated and contain the newly
configured number of analog points.
The measured value settings for each of the 32 analog values are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT... COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GGIO4... GGIO4 ANALOG 1(32) MEASURED VALUE
ANALOG IN
Off
1 VALUE:
Range: any FlexAnalog value
MESSAGE
ANALOG IN
0.000
1 DB:
Range: 0.000 to 100.000 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
ANALOG IN
0.000
1 MIN:
Range: 1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps

of 0.001
MESSAGE
ANALOG IN
0.000
1 MAX:
Range: 1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps

of 0.001
GGIO4 ANALOG 1
MEASURED VALUE
These settings are configured as follows.
ANALOG IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexAnalog value to drive the instantaneous value of each GGIO4 analog status value (GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.instMag.f).
ANALOG IN 1 DB: This setting specifies the deadband for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and 61850-7-3
for details. The deadband is used to determine when to update the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous
magnitude. The deadband is a percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum values.
ANALOG IN 1 MIN: This setting specifies the minimum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and
61850-7-3 for details. This minimum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determination of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude.
ANALOG IN 1 MAX: This setting defines the maximum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and
61850-7-3 for details. This maximum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determination of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude.
NOTE
Note that the ANALOG IN 1 MIN and ANALOG IN 1 MAX settings are stored as IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point
numbers. Because of the large range of these settings, not all values can be stored. Some values may be rounded
to the closest possible floating point number.
GE Multilin
5-29
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The GGIO5 integer configuration points are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GGIO5 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
GGIO5 UINTEGER
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
GGIO5 UINT In
Off
1:
Range: Off, any FlexInteger parameter
GGIO5 UINT In
Off
2:
GGIO5 UINT 1n 16:

Off
MESSAGE
The GGIO5 logical node allows IEC 61850 client access to integer data values. This allows access to as many as 16
unsigned integer value points, associated timestamps, and quality flags. The method of configuration is similar to that of
GGIO1 (binary status values). The settings allow the selection of FlexInteger values for each GGIO5 integer value point.
It is intended that clients use GGIO5 to access generic integer values from the L90. Additional settings are provided to
allow the selection of the number of integer values available in GGIO5 (1 to 16), and to assign FlexInteger values to the
GGIO5 integer inputs. The following setting is available for all GGIO5 configuration points.
GGIO5 UINT IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexInteger value to drive each GGIO5 integer status value
(GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1). This setting is stored as an 32-bit unsigned integer value.
The report control configuration settings are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... REPORT... REPORT 1(6) CONFIGURATION
REPORT 1
RptID:
MESSAGE
REPORT 1
OptFlds:
MESSAGE
REPORT 1
BufTm:
MESSAGE
REPORT 1
TrgOps:
MESSAGE
REPORT 1
IntgPd:
REPORT 1
CONFIGURATION
0
0
0
Changes to the report configuration will not take effect until the L90 is restarted.
Disconnect any IEC 61850 client connection to the L90 prior to making setting changes to the report configuration.
Disconnecting the rear Ethernet connection from the L90 disconnects the IEC 61850 client connection.
NOTE
5-30
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The breaker configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL XCBR CONFIGURATION
XCBR
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND

Off

Off
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XCBR2 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XCBR6 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
The CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt setting represents the breaker operating counter. As breakers operate by opening and closing, the
XCBR operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent breaker operation may result
in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to 0 for XCBR1.
The disconnect switch configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is
restarted:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL XSWI CONFIGURATION
XSWI
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND

Off

Off
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR XSWI1 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XSWI2 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XSWI24 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
The CLEAR XSWI1 OpCnt setting represents the disconnect switch operating counter. As disconnect switches operate by
opening and closing, the XSWI operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent switch
operation may result in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to 0 for XSWI1.
NOTE
Since GSSE/GOOSE messages are multicast Ethernet by specification, they will not usually be forwarded by network routers. However, GOOSE messages may be fowarded by routers if the router has been configured for VLAN
functionality.
GE Multilin
5-31
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
h) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
WEB SERVER
HTTP PROTOCOL
HTTP TCP PORT

NUMBER:
80
The L90 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox. This feature is available only if the L90 has the ethernet option installed. The web
pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the L90 Main Menu. Web pages are available
showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, event records, fault reports, etc. The web pages can be
accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The main menu will be displayed in the web
browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the L90 into the Address box on the web browser.
i) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS TFTP PROTOCOL
TFTP MAIN UDP PORT

NUMBER:
69
MESSAGE
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1

NUMBER:
0
MESSAGE
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2

NUMBER:
0
TFTP PROTOCOL
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the L90 over a network. The L90 operates as a
TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file
obtained from the L90 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.).
j) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
IEC 60870-5-104
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
IEC TCP PORT

NUMBER: 2404
MESSAGE
IEC NETWORK
CLIENT ADDRESSES
MESSAGE
IEC COMMON ADDRESS

OF ASDU:
0
MESSAGE
IEC CYCLIC DATA

PERIOD:
60 s
MESSAGE
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT

THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT

THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
IEC POWER DEFAULT

THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
IEC ENERGY DEFAULT

THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
IEC OTHER DEFAULT

THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC 60870-5-104
PROTOCOL
5-32
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The L90 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The L90 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to a
maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the L90 maintains two sets of IEC
60870-5-104 data change buffers, no more than two masters should actively communicate with the L90 at one time.
The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing
M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the L90 analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other.
Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, to trigger
spontaneous responses from the L90 when any current values change by 15 A, the IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual
M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the L90, the default thresholds will be in effect.
NOTE
The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be used simultaneously. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION
setting is set to Enabled, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not
become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).
k) SNTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS SNTP PROTOCOL
SNTP FUNCTION:
Disabled
MESSAGE
SNTP SERVER IP ADDR:

0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
SNTP UDP PORT

NUMBER: 123
SNTP PROTOCOL
The L90 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the L90 can obtain clock time over
an Ethernet network. The L90 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a dedicated
product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported.
If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the L90 clock for
as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If
either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the L90 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad.
To use SNTP in unicast mode, SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is
set and SNTP FUNCTION is Enabled, the L90 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time
values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the L90 clock is closely synchronized with
the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to two minutes for the L90 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline.
To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting to 0.0.0.0 and SNTP FUNCTION to Enabled. The
L90 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the all ones broadcast address for the subnet. The L90 waits up to eighteen
minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error.
The UR-series relays do not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality.
GE Multilin
5-33
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
l) ETHERNET SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS ETHERNET SWITCH
SWITCH IP ADDRESS:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IP address format
MESSAGE
SWITCH MODBUS TCP

PORT NUMBER: 502
MESSAGE
PORT 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
MESSAGE
PORT 2 EVENTS:
Disabled
ETHERNET SWITCH
MESSAGE
PORT 6 EVENTS:
Disabled
These settings appear only if the L90 is ordered with an Ethernet switch module (type 2S or 2T).
The IP address and Modbus TCP port number for the Ethernet switch module are specified in this menu. These settings
are used in advanced network configurations. Please consult the network administrator before making changes to these
settings. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) is the preferred interface to configure these settings.
The PORT 1 EVENTS through PORT 6 EVENTS settings allow Ethernet switch module events to be logged in the event
recorder.
5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP MODBUS USER MAP
MODBUS USER MAP
MESSAGE
ADDRESS
VALUE:
1:
0
ADDRESS
VALUE:
2:
0
MESSAGE
ADDRESS 256:
VALUE:
0
The Modbus user map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired
address in the ADDRESS line (this value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value is displayed in the VALUE line. A value of 0 in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically returns values for the previous
ADDRESS lines incremented by 1. An address value of 0 in the initial register means none and values of 0 will be displayed for all registers. Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
5-34
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP REAL TIME CLOCK
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:

None
Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
MESSAGE
REAL TIME CLOCK

EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
LOCAL TIME OFFSET

FROM UTC:
0.0 hrs
Range: 24.0 to 24.0 hrs in steps of 0.5
MESSAGE
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
TIME: Disabled
MESSAGE
DST START MONTH:

April
Range: January to December (all months)
MESSAGE
DST START DAY:

Sunday
Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
MESSAGE
DST START DAY

INSTANCE: First
Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
MESSAGE
DST START HOUR:

2:00
Range: 0:00 to 23:00
MESSAGE
DST STOP MONTH:

April
Range: January to December (all months)
MESSAGE
DST STOP DAY:

Sunday
Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
MESSAGE
DST STOP DAY

INSTANCE: First
Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
MESSAGE
DST STOP HOUR:

2:00
Range: 0:00 to 23:00
REAL TIME
CLOCK
If the L90 channel asymmetry function is enabled, the IRIG-B input must be connected to the GPS receiver
and the proper receiver signal type assigned.
NOTE
The date and time can be synchronized a known time base and to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same
accuracy as an electronic watch, approximately 1 minute per month. If an IRIG-B signal is connected to the relay, only the
current year needs to be entered. See the COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME menu to manually set the relay clock.
The REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record.
The LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC setting is used to specify the local time zone offset from Universal Coordinated Time
(Greenwich Mean Time) in hours. This setting has two uses. When the L90 is time synchronized with IRIG-B, or has no permanent time synchronization, the offset is used to calculate UTC time for IEC 61850 features. When the L90 is time synchronized with SNTP, the offset is used to determine the local time for the L90 clock, since SNTP provides UTC time.
The daylight savings time (DST) settings can be used to allow the L90 clock can follow the DST rules of the local time zone.
Note that when IRIG-B time synchronization is active, the DST settings are ignored. The DST settings are used when the
L90 is synchronized with SNTP, or when neither SNTP nor IRIG-B is used.
Only timestamps in the event recorder and communications protocols are affected by the daylight savings time settings. The reported real-time clock value does not change.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-35
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2.7 FAULT REPORTS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP FAULT REPORTS FAULT REPORT 1
FAULT REPORT 1
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 TRIG:

Off
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 Z1
MAG: 3.00
Range: 0.01 to 250.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 Z1
ANGLE: 75
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 Z0
MAG: 9.00
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 Z0
ANGLE: 75
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 LINE

LENGTH UNITS: km
Range: km, miles
MESSAGE
FAULT REP 1 LENGTH

(km
): 100.0
MESSAGE
FAULT REP 1 REM1-TAP

Z1 MAG: 3.00
MESSAGE

Z1 ANG: 75
MESSAGE

LENGTH (km ): 100.0
MESSAGE

Z1 MAG: 3.00
MESSAGE

Z1 ANG: 75
MESSAGE

LENGTH (km ): 100.0
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 VT
SUBSTITUTION: None
Range: None, I0, V0
MESSAGE
FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM

Z0 MAG: 2.00
MESSAGE
FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM

Z0 ANGLE: 75
FAULT REPORT 1
The L90 incorporates a multi-ended fault locator method based on the synchronized voltage and current measurements at
all ends of the transmission line. This makes it possible to compute the fault location without assumptions or approximations. This fault locator method is applicable on both two-terminal and three-terminal applications, with results computed
independently at each terminal. For three-terminal line applications, the fault locator is reports the exact line segment at
which the fault occurred and the distance to the fault from the terminal adjacent to the fault.
if charging current compensation is configured and enabled, the line charging current is removed at each terminal for
improved accuracy.
5-36
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
During communication channel failures, the L90 uses the single-ended algorithm to calculate and report fault location.
When the single-ended algorithm is used for three-terminal line applications, the faulted segment of the line is not determined and reported.
The L90 relay supports one fault report and an associated fault locator. The signal source and trigger condition, as well as
the characteristics of the line or feeder, are entered in this menu.
The fault report stores data, in non-volatile memory, pertinent to an event when triggered. The captured data contained in
the FaultReport.txt file includes:
Fault report number.
Name of the relay, programmed by the user.
Firmware revision of the relay.
Date and time of trigger.
Name of trigger (specific operand).
Line or feeder ID via the name of a configured signal source.
Active setting group at the time of trigger.
Pre-fault current and voltage phasors (two cycles before either a 50DD disturbance associated with fault report source
or the trigger operate). Once a disturbance is detected, pre-fault phasors hold for 3 seconds waiting for the fault report
trigger. If trigger does not occur within this time, the values are cleared to prepare for the next disturbance.
Fault current and voltage phasors (one cycle after the trigger).
Elements operated at the time of triggering.
Events: 9 before trigger and 7 after trigger (only available via the relay webpage).
Fault duration times for each breaker (created by the breaker arcing current feature).
The captured data also includes the fault type and the distance to the fault location, as well as the reclose shot number
(when applicable) To include fault duration times in the fault report, the user must enable and configure breaker arcing current feature for each of the breakers. Fault duration is reported on a per-phase basis.
The relay allows locating faults, including ground faults, from delta-connected VTs. In this case, the missing zero-sequence
voltage is substituted either by the externally provided neutral voltage (broken delta VT) connected to the auxiliary voltage
channel of a VT bank, or by the zero-sequence voltage approximated as a voltage drop developed by the zero-sequence
current, and user-provided zero-sequence equivalent impedance of the system behind the relay.
The trigger can be any FlexLogic operand, but in most applications it is expected to be the same operand, usually a virtual output, that is used to drive an output relay to trip a breaker. To prevent the overwriting of fault events, the disturbance
detector should not be used to trigger a fault report. A FAULT RPT TRIG event is automatically created when the report is
triggered.
If a number of protection elements are ORed to create a fault report trigger, the first operation of any element causing the
OR gate output to become high triggers a fault report. However, If other elements operate during the fault and the first operated element has not been reset (the OR gate output is still high), the fault report is not triggered again. Considering the
reset time of protection elements, there is very little chance that fault report can be triggered twice in this manner. As the
fault report must capture a usable amount of pre and post-fault data, it can not be triggered faster than every 20 ms.
Each fault report is stored as a file; the relay capacity is fifteen (15) files. An sixteenth (16th) trigger overwrites the oldest
file.
The EnerVista UR Setup software is required to view all captured data. The relay faceplate display can be used to view the
date and time of trigger, the fault type, the distance location of the fault, and the reclose shot number.
The FAULT REPORT 1 SOURCE setting selects the source for input currents and voltages and disturbance detection. For dualbreaker applications where the line current is supplied individually from two breaker CTs, the fault locator source should
include the sum of currents from both CTs as well as the line voltage.
The FAULT 1 REPORT TRIG setting assigns the FlexLogic operand representing the protection element/elements requiring
operational fault location calculations. The distance to fault calculations are initiated by this signal. The FAULT REPORT 1 Z1
MAG and FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG impedances are entered in secondary ohms.
GE Multilin
5-37
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
For a two-terminal line application, the FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 MAG, FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 ANG, FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG, FAULT
and FAULT REPORT 1 LENGTH settings for the entire line must to be entered for fault location calculations.
For a three-terminal application, these settings are used to enter the line segment impedance and length from the local terminal to the tap point only.
REPORT 1 Z0 ANG
The FAULT REP 1 REM1-TAP Z1 MAG and FAULT REP 1 REM1-TAP Z1 ANG settings are used for three-terminal applications to
enter positive sequence section impedances (in secondary ohms) for the line segment from remote terminal 1 to the tap
point. The length of the line section from remote terminal 1 to the tap point is entered in the FAULT REP 1 REM1-TAP LENGTH
setting.
The FAULT REP 1 REM2-TAP Z1 MAG, FAULT REP 1 REM2-TAP Z1 ANG, and FAULT REP 1 REM2-TAP LENGTH settings are used as
above, but for the line segment from remote terminal 2 to the tap point.
The FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION setting shall be set to None if the relay is fed from wye-connected VTs. If delta-connected VTs are used, and the relay is supplied with the neutral (3V0) voltage, this setting shall be set to V0. The method is
still exact, as the fault locator would combine the line-to-line voltage measurements with the neutral voltage measurement
to re-create the line-to-ground voltages. See the ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS FAULT REPORTS menu for additional
details. It required to configure the delta and neutral voltages under the source indicated as input for the fault report. Also,
the relay will check if the auxiliary signal configured is marked as Vn by the user (under VT setup), and inhibit the fault
location if the auxiliary signal is labeled differently.
If the broken-delta neutral voltage is not available to the relay, an approximation is possible by assuming the missing zerosequence voltage to be an inverted voltage drop produced by the zero-sequence current and the user-specified equivalent
zero-sequence system impedance behind the relay: V0 = Z0 I0. In order to enable this mode of operation, the FAULT
REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION setting shall be set to I0.
The FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM Z0 MAG and FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM Z0 ANGLE settings are used only when the VT SUBSTITUTION setting value is I0. The magnitude is to be entered in secondary ohms. This impedance is an average system equivalent
behind the relay. It can be calculated as zero-sequence Thevenin impedance at the local bus with the protected line/feeder
disconnected. The method is accurate only if this setting matches perfectly the actual system impedance during the fault. If
the system exhibits too much variability, this approach is questionable and the fault location results for single-line-to-ground
faults shall be trusted with accordingly. It should be kept in mind that grounding points in vicinity of the installation impact
the system zero-sequence impedance (grounded loads, reactors, zig-zag transformers, shunt capacitor banks, etc.).
NOTE
For proper operation of the multi-ended fault locator, the nominal primary voltage is expected to appear identical at
all line terminals as seen from the nominal secondary voltage, VT ratio, and VT connection settings of the first 87L
source.
5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY
NUMBER OF RECORDS:
5
MESSAGE
TRIGGER MODE:
Automatic Overwrite
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
MESSAGE
TRIGGER POSITION:
50%
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TRIGGER SOURCE:
Off
MESSAGE
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS:
16 samples/cycle
Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle
MESSAGE
DIGITAL CHANNELS
MESSAGE
ANALOG CHANNELS
OSCILLOGRAPHY
5-38
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic operand. Multiple oscillography records may be captured simultaneously.
The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on
other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sample configurations with corresponding cycles/record.
Table 52: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE
RECORDS
CT/VTS
SAMPLE
RATE
DIGITALS
ANALOGS
CYCLES/
RECORD
1872.0
16
16
1685.0
16
16
276.0
16
16
219.5
16
16
93.5
16
64
16
93.5
32
64
16
57.6
64
64
16
32.3
32
64
64
16
9.5
A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if TRIGGER MODE is set to Automatic Overwrite.
Set the TRIGGER POSITION to a percentage of the total buffer size (for example, 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position of
25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data. The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be
any FlexLogic parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per
cycle.
The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (that is, current and voltage) are
stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling
rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle; that is, it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records will be CLEARED.
NOTE
b) DIGITAL CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY DIGITAL CHANNELS
DIGITAL CHANNELS
MESSAGE
DIGITAL CHANNEL
Off
1:
DIGITAL CHANNEL
Off
2:
DIGITAL CHANNEL 63:

Off
MESSAGE
A DIGITAL 1(63) CHANNEL setting selects the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of
each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored.
Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list.
GE Multilin
5-39
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
c) ANALOG CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY ANALOG CHANNELS
ANALOG CHANNELS
MESSAGE
ANALOG CHANNEL
Off
1:
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter

See Appendix A for complete list.
ANALOG CHANNEL
Off
2:

ANALOG CHANNEL 16:

Off

MESSAGE
These settings select the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace
depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. The parameters available
in a given relay are dependent on:
The type of relay,
The type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and
The type and number of analog input hardware modules installed.
Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value
parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is
used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list
of parameters via the relay keypad and display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding
parameter to be displayed.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number><I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB designates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F.
If there are no CT/VT modules and analog input modules, no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will
appear.
5.2.9 DATA LOGGER
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER MODE:

Continuous
Range: Continuous, Trigger
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER TRIGGER:

Off
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER RATE:

60000 ms
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CHNL

Off
1:
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A:

FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CHNL

Off
2:

MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CHNL 16:

Off

MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CONFIG:

0 CHNL x
0.0 DAYS
Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only
DATA LOGGER
5-40
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data may
be downloaded to EnerVista UR Setup and displayed with parameters on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis.
All data is stored in non-volatile memory, meaning that the information is retained when power to the relay is lost.
For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of
channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use. Example storage capacities for a system frequency of 60 Hz are shown in the following table.
Table 53: DATA LOGGER STORAGE CAPACITY EXAMPLE
SAMPLING RATE
CHANNELS
DAYS
STORAGE CAPACITY
15 ms
0.1
954 s
1000 ms
60000 ms
3600000 ms
0.1
120 s
0.1
107 s
16
0.1
60 s
0.7
65457 s
0.1
8182 s
0.1
7273 s
16
0.1
4091 s
45.4
3927420 s
5.6
490920 s
436380 s
16
2.8
254460 s
2727.5
235645200 s
340.9
29455200 s
303
26182800 s
Changing any setting affecting data logger operation will clear any data that is currently in the log.
NOTE
DATA LOGGER MODE: This setting configures the mode in which the data logger will operate. When set to Continuous, the data logger will actively record any configured channels at the rate as defined by the DATA LOGGER RATE. The
data logger will be idle in this mode if no channels are configured. When set to Trigger, the data logger will begin to
record any configured channels at the instance of the rising edge of the DATA LOGGER TRIGGER source FlexLogic
operand. The data logger will ignore all subsequent triggers and will continue to record data until the active record is
full. Once the data logger is full a CLEAR DATA LOGGER command is required to clear the data logger record before a
new record can be started. Performing the CLEAR DATA LOGGER command will also stop the current record and reset
the data logger to be ready for the next trigger.
DATA LOGGER TRIGGER: This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any
FlexLogic operand can be used as the trigger source. The DATA LOGGER TRIGGER setting only applies when the
mode is set to Trigger.
DATA LOGGER RATE: This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data will be recorded.
DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16): This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of
the data log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/
VT hardware modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup,
the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is
shown in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to
expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of
parameters via the relay keypad/display entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding
parameter to be displayed.
DATA LOGGER CONFIG: This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not
selected to Off without over-writing old data.
GE Multilin
5-41
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2.10 DEMAND
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DEMAND
CRNT DEMAND METHOD:

Thermal Exponential
Range: Thermal Exponential, Block Interval,

Rolling Demand
MESSAGE
POWER DEMAND METHOD:

Thermal Exponential
Range: Thermal Exponential, Block Interval,

Rolling Demand
MESSAGE
DEMAND INTERVAL:
15 MIN
Range: 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes
MESSAGE
DEMAND TRIGGER:
Off

Note: for calculation using Method 2a
DEMAND
The relay measures current demand on each phase, and three-phase demand for real, reactive, and apparent power. Current and Power methods can be chosen separately for the convenience of the user. Settings are provided to allow the user
to emulate some common electrical utility demand measuring techniques, for statistical or control purposes. If the CRNT
DEMAND METHOD is set to "Block Interval" and the DEMAND TRIGGER is set to Off, Method 2 is used (see below). If
DEMAND TRIGGER is assigned to any other FlexLogic operand, Method 2a is used (see below).
The relay can be set to calculate demand by any of three methods as described below:
CALCULATION METHOD 1: THERMAL EXPONENTIAL
d(t) = D( 1 e
where:
kt
(EQ 5.6)
d = demand value after applying input quantity for time t (in minutes)
D = input quantity (constant), and k = 2.3 / thermal 90% response time.
The 90% thermal response time characteristic of 15 minutes is illustrated below. A setpoint establishes the time to reach
90% of a steady-state value, just as the response time of an analog instrument. A steady state value applied for twice the
response time will indicate 99% of the value.
Demand (%)
This method emulates the action of an analog peak recording thermal demand meter. The relay measures the quantity
(RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) on each phase every second, and assumes the circuit quantity remains at this value until updated by the next measurement. It calculates the 'thermal demand equivalent' based on the
following equation:
Time (minutes)
842787A1.CDR
Figure 53: THERMAL DEMAND CHARACTERISTIC

CALCULATION METHOD 2: BLOCK INTERVAL
This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) over
the programmed demand time interval, starting daily at 00:00:00 (i.e. 12:00 am). The 1440 minutes per day is divided into
the number of blocks as set by the programmed time interval. Each new value of demand becomes available at the end of
each time interval.
CALCULATION METHOD 2a: BLOCK INTERVAL (with Start Demand Interval Logic Trigger)
the interval between successive Start Demand Interval logic input pulses. Each new value of demand becomes available at
the end of each pulse. Assign a FlexLogic operand to the DEMAND TRIGGER setting to program the input for the new
demand interval pulses.
5-42
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
NOTE
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
If no trigger is assigned in the DEMAND TRIGGER setting and the CRNT DEMAND METHOD is "Block Interval", use calculating method #2. If a trigger is assigned, the maximum allowed time between 2 trigger signals is 60 minutes. If
no trigger signal appears within 60 minutes, demand calculations are performed and available and the algorithm
resets and starts the new cycle of calculations. The minimum required time for trigger contact closure is 20 s.
CALCULATION METHOD 3: ROLLING DEMAND

the programmed demand time interval, in the same way as Block Interval. The value is updated every minute and indicates
the demand over the time interval just preceding the time of update.
5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LEDS
LED TEST
See below
MESSAGE
TRIP & ALARM LEDS
See page 545.
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED1
See page 545.
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED2
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED48
b) LED TEST
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS LED TEST
LED TEST
MESSAGE
LED TEST FUNCTION:

Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
LED TEST CONTROL:

Off
When enabled, the LED test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-programmable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all LEDs,
including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons.
The test consists of three stages.
1.
All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is burned. This stage lasts as
long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end.
2.
All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine starts at
the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures that lead
to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
3.
All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at the top left
panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more
than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitoring features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and
stores the actual LED states (on or off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting from
relay response during testing. The reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress.
GE Multilin
5-43
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
A dedicated FlexLogic operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is initiated, the LED TEST INITIATED event is stored in the event recorder.
The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and stages 2 and 3 can be
interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.
READY TO TEST
rising edge of the

control input
Start the software image of

the LEDs
Reset the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
Restore the LED states

from the software image
Set the
operand
control input is on
STAGE 1
(all LEDs on)
time-out
(1 minute)
dropping edge of the

control input
Wait 1 second
STAGE 2
(one LED on at a time)
Wait 1 second
STAGE 3
(one LED off at a time)
rising edge of the

control input
rising edge of the

control input
rising edge of the

control input
rising edge
of the control
input
842011A1.CDR
Figure 54: LED TEST SEQUENCE

APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1:
Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is burned through user-programmable pushbutton 1. The following settings should be applied. Configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
Configure the LED test to recognize user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: Enabled
LED TEST CONTROL: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
The test will be initiated when the user-programmable pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for
as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then
automatically start stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2:
Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are burned as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This
is to be performed via user-programmable pushbutton 1.
5-44
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
After applying the settings in application example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next,
release the pushbutton to automatically start stage 2. Once stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When
stage 2 is completed, stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton.
c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS TRIP & ALARM LEDS
TRIP & ALARM LEDS
MESSAGE
TRIP LED INPUT:

Off
ALARM LED INPUT:

Off
The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED column (enhanced faceplate) and on LED panel 1 (standard faceplate). Each
indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.
d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED 1
MESSAGE
LED 1 OPERAND:
Off
LED 1 TYPE:
Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.
For the standard faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.
LED Panel 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 24
LED Panel 3: user programmable LEDs 25 through 48
For the enhanced faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.
LED column 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 12
Refer to the LED indicators section in chapter 4 for additional information on the location of these indexed LEDs.
The user-programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is
Self-Reset (the default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is Latched, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.
GE Multilin
5-45
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Table 54: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

SETTING
PARAMETER
SETTING
PARAMETER
LED 1 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 1
LED 13 operand
Off
LED 2 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 2
LED 14 operand
BREAKER 2 OPEN
LED 3 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 3
LED 15 operand
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
LED 4 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 4
LED 16 operand
BREAKER 2 TROUBLE
LED 5 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 5
LED 17 operand
SYNC 1 SYNC OP
LED 6 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 6
LED 18 operand
SYNC 2 SYNC OP
LED 7 operand
Off
LED 19 operand
Off
LED 8 operand
Off
LED 20 operand
Off
LED 9 operand
BREAKER 1 OPEN
LED 21 operand
AR ENABLED
LED 10 operand
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
LED 22 operand
AR DISABLED
LED 11 operand
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
LED 23 operand
AR RIP
LED 12 operand
Off
LED 24 operand
AR LO
Refer to the Control of setting groups example in the Control elements section of this chapter for group activation.
5.2.12 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
REMOTE DEVICE OFF

FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a

CPU with Ethernet capability.
MESSAGE
PRI. ETHERNET FAIL

FUNCTION: Disabled

CPU with a primary fiber port.
MESSAGE
SEC. ETHERNET FAIL

FUNCTION: Disabled

CPU with a redundant fiber port.
MESSAGE
BATTERY FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
MESSAGE
SNTP FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled

CPU with Ethernet capability.
MESSAGE
IRIG-B FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
MESSAGE

FUNCTION: Disabled
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
SELF TESTS
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic operands, events, and targets.
Most of the minor alarms can be disabled if desired.
When in the Disabled mode, minor alarms will not assert a FlexLogic operand, write to the event recorder, or display
target messages. Moreover, they will not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in the Enabled
mode, minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. Refer to the Relay self-tests section in
chapter 7 for additional information on major and minor self-test alarms.
To enable the Ethernet switch failure function, ensure that the ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL FUNCTION is Enabled in this
menu.
NOTE
5-46
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.13 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTON 1
MESSAGE
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
There are three standard control pushbuttons, labeled USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3, on the standard and enhanced front
panels. These are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test, switching
setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays.
Firmware revisions 3.2x and older use these three pushbuttons for manual breaker control. This functionality has been
retained if the breaker control feature is configured to use the three pushbuttons, they cannot be used as user-programmable control pushbuttons.
The location of the control pushbuttons are shown in the following figures.
Control pushbuttons
842813A1.CDR
Figure 55: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)

An additional four control pushbuttons are included on the standard faceplate when the L90 is ordered with the twelve userprogrammable pushbutton option.
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
THREE
STANDARD
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
USER 4
USER 5
USER 6
USER 7
FOUR EXTRA
OPTIONAL
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
842733A2.CDR
Figure 56: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE)

Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password. However,
by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable control pushbuttons for security reasons.
Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic operand. These operands should be configured appropriately to perform the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation will be recognized by
various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the event record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed. No event is logged when
the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously a given key
must be released before the next one can be pressed.
GE Multilin
5-47
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The control pushbuttons become user-programmable only if the breaker control feature is not configured for manual control
via the USER 1 through 3 pushbuttons as shown below. If configured for manual control, breaker control typically uses the
larger, optional user-programmable pushbuttons, making the control pushbuttons available for other user applications.
When applicable
SETTING
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON
1 FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL:
Enabled=1
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/
BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL:
AND
RUN
OFF
ON
TIMER
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
100 msec
CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON
842010A2.CDR
Enabled=1
Figure 57: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC
5-48
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.14 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1(16)
PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT:
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT:
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT:
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 HOLD:
0.0 s
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 SET:
Off
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 RESET:
Off
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST:
Disabled
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST
DELAY: 1.0 s
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE:
Off
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL:
Off
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT
TIME: 0.00 s
Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL:

Off
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Normal, High Priority
MESSAGE
PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
USER PUSHBUTTON 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The optional user-programmable pushbuttons (specified in the order code) provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off) information. The number of available pushbuttons is dependent on the faceplate module ordered
with the relay.
Type P faceplate: standard horizontal faceplate with 12 user-programmable pushbuttons.
Type Q faceplate: enhanced horizontal faceplate with 16 user-programmable pushbuttons.
The digital state can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton) or remotely (via FlexLogic operands) into FlexLogic equations, protection elements, and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control,
autorecloser blocking, and setting groups changes. The user-programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of
password protection.
The user-configurable pushbuttons for the enhanced faceplate are shown below.
GE Multilin
5-49
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
USER
LABEL 1
USER
LABEL 2
USER
LABEL 3
USER
LABEL 4
5 SETTINGS
USER
LABEL 5
USER
LABEL 6
USER
LABEL 7
USER
LABEL 8
USER
LABEL 9
USER
LABEL 10
USER
LABEL 11
USER
LABEL 12
USER
LABEL 13
USER
LABEL 14
USER
LABEL 15
USER
LABEL 16
842814A1.CDR
Figure 58: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)

The user-configurable pushbuttons for the standard faceplate are shown below.
11
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
10
12
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
842779A1.CDR
Figure 59: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE)

Both the standard and enhanced faceplate pushbuttons can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, available
online at http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin. The EnerVista UR Setup software can also be used to create labels for
the enhanced faceplate.
Each pushbutton asserts its own On and Off FlexLogic operands (for example, PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON
1 OFF). These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific actions. If any pushbutton is
active, the ANY PB ON operand will be asserted.
Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of the corresponding pushbutton (on or off). However, each LED indicator can be assigned to any FlexLogic operand through the PUSHBTN
1 LED CTL setting.
The pushbuttons can be automatically controlled by activating the operands assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET (for latched and
self-reset mode) and PUSHBTN 1 RESET (for latched mode only) settings. The pushbutton reset status is declared when the
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand is asserted. The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons is dependent
on whether latched or self-reset mode is programmed.
Latched mode: In latched mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting or by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton. The pushbutton maintains the set state
until deactivated by the reset command or after a user-specified time delay. The state of each pushbutton is stored in
non-volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power.
The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET setting or by directly pressing the associated active front panel pushbutton.
It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST and PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY settings. These settings enable the autoreset timer and specify the associated time delay. The autoreset timer can be
used in select-before-operate (SBO) breaker control applications, where the command type (close/open) or breaker
location (feeder number) must be selected prior to command execution. The selection must reset automatically if control is not executed within a specified time period.
Self-reset mode: In self-reset mode, a pushbutton will remain active for the time it is pressed (the pulse duration) plus
the dropout time specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting. If the pushbutton is activated via FlexLogic, the
pulse duration is specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME only. The time the operand remains assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting has no effect on the pulse duration.
The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in self-reset mode when the dropout delay specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT
setting expires.
TIME
NOTE
5-50
The pulse duration of the remote set, remote reset, or local pushbutton must be at least 50 ms to operate the pushbutton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to properly operate during power cycling events and various system disturbances that may cause transient assertion of the operating signals.
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The local and remote operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL and
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE settings, respectively. If local locking is applied, the pushbutton will ignore set and reset commands
executed through the front panel pushbuttons. If remote locking is applied, the pushbutton will ignore set and reset commands executed through FlexLogic operands.
The locking functions are not applied to the autorestart feature. In this case, the inhibit function can be used in SBO control
operations to prevent the pushbutton function from being activated and ensuring one-at-a-time select operation.
The locking functions can also be used to prevent the accidental pressing of the front panel pushbuttons. The separate
inhibit of the local and remote operation simplifies the implementation of local/remote control supervision.
Pushbutton states can be logged by the event recorder and displayed as target messages. In latched mode, user-defined
messages can also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is on or changing to off.
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to Disabled, the pushbutton is not active and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both On and Off) are de-asserted. If set to SelfReset, the control logic is activated by the pulse (longer than 100 ms) issued when the pushbutton is being physically
pressed or virtually pressed via a FlexLogic operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting.
When in Self-Reset mode and activated locally, the pushbutton control logic asserts the On corresponding FlexLogic operand as long as the pushbutton is being physically pressed, and after being released the deactivation of
the operand is delayed by the drop out timer. The Off operand is asserted when the pushbutton element is deactivated. If the pushbutton is activated remotely, the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the corresponding On FlexLogic operand only for the time period specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting.
If set to Latched, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic operand between On and
Off on each button press or by virtually activating the pushbutton (assigning set and reset operands). When in the
Latched mode, the states of the FlexLogic operands are stored in a non-volatile memory. Should the power supply
be lost, the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay.
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. Refer to the User-definable displays section for instructions on
how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is in the on position. Refer to the User-definable displays section for instructions on
entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is activated from the on to the off position and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is
Latched. This message is not displayed when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Self-reset as the pushbutton operand
status is implied to be Off upon its release. The length of the Off message is configured with the PRODUCT SETUP
DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
PUSHBTN 1 HOLD: This setting specifies the time required for a pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed active.
This timer is reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that any pushbutton operation will require the pushbutton to be
pressed a minimum of 50 ms. This minimum time is required prior to activating the pushbutton hold timer.
PUSHBTN 1 SET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to operate the pushbutton element and to
assert PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand. The duration of the incoming set signal must be at least 100 ms.
PUSHBTN 1 RESET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to reset pushbutton element and to assert
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand. This setting is applicable only if pushbutton is in latched mode. The duration of the
incoming reset signal must be at least 50 ms.
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST: This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton autoreset feature. This setting is
applicable only if the pushbutton is in the Latched mode.
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY: This setting specifies the time delay for automatic reset of the pushbutton when in
the latched mode.
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the
operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET or PUSHBTN 1 RESET settings.
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the
front panel pushbuttons. This locking functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.
GE Multilin
5-51
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting applies only to Self-Reset mode and specifies the duration of the pushbutton active status after the pushbutton has been released. When activated remotely, this setting specifies the entire
activation time of the pushbutton status; the length of time the operand remains on has no effect on the pulse duration.
This setting is required to set the duration of the pushbutton operating pulse.
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to drive pushbutton LED. If this setting is
Off, then LED operation is directly linked to PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand.
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE: If pushbutton message is set to High Priority, the message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1
and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings will be displayed undisturbed as long as PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is asserted.
The high priority option is not applicable to the PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting.
ID
This message can be temporary removed if any front panel keypad button is pressed. However, ten seconds of keypad
inactivity will restore the message if the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is still active.
If the PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE is set to Normal, the message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT
settings will be displayed as long as PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is asserted, but not longer than time period specified
by FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. After the flash time is expired, the default message or other active target message is
displayed. The instantaneous reset of the flash message will be executed if any relay front panel button is pressed or
any new target or message becomes active.
The PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting is linked to PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand and will be displayed in
PUSHBTN 1 ID only if pushbutton element is in the Latched mode. The PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT message
as Normal if the PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE setting is High Priority or Normal.
conjunction with
will be displayed
PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: If this setting is enabled, each pushbutton state change will be logged as an event into
event recorder.
5-52
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The user-programmable pushbutton logic is shown below.

TIMER
200 ms
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
0
SETTING
Function
LATCHED
= Enabled
= Latched
OR
= Self-Reset
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
To user-programmable
pushbuttons logic
sheet 2, 842024A2
SETTING
Local Lock
Off = 0
Non-volatile latch
AND
TIMER
50 ms
SETTING
Remote Lock
Latch
R
AND
Off = 0
SETTING
OR
TIMER
50 ms
Hold
TPKP
0
0
OR
SETTING
Set
AND
Off = 0
OR
OR
SETTING
Reset
PUSHBUTTON ON
To user-programmable
pushbuttons logic
sheet 2, 842024A2
AND
Off = 0
AND
SETTING
Autoreset Function
= Enabled
= Disabled
SETTING
Autoreset Delay
TPKP
AND
0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
SETTING
Drop-Out Timer
0
TIMER
200 ms
OR
TRST
842021A3.CDR
AND
Figure 510: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)
GE Multilin
5-53
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
LCD MESSAGE
ENGAGE MESSAGE
SETTING
Flash Message Time
LATCHED
SETTINGS
Top Text
0
AND
OR
= XXXXXXXXXX
TRST
On Text
= XXXXXXXXXX
Instantaneous
reset *
From user-programmable
pushbuttons logic
sheet 1, 842021A3
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON ON
The message is temporarily removed if

any keypad button is pressed. Ten (10)
seconds of keypad inactivity restores
the message.
SETTING
Message Priority
LCD MESSAGE
ENGAGE MESSAGE
AND
= Disabled
= High Priority
SETTINGS
Top Text
= Normal
OR
SETTING
Flash Message Time
= XXXXXXXXXX
On Text
= XXXXXXXXXX
0
AND
Instantaneous reset will be executed if any

front panel button is pressed or any new
target or message becomes active.
TRST
Instantaneous
reset *
PUSHBUTTON 1 LED LOGIC
1. If pushbutton 1 LED control is set to off.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON 2 ON
PUSHBUTTON 3 ON
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
OR
Pushbutton 1
LED
2. If pushbutton 1 LED control is not set to off.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
ANY PB ON
SETTING
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL
= any FlexLogic operand
Pushbutton 1
LED
PUSHBUTTON 16 ON
The enhanced front panel has 16 operands;
the standard front panel has 12
842024A2.CDR
Figure 511: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)
NOTE
User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP or HQ faceplate. If an HP or HQ type faceplate was ordered

separately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the correct faceplate option. This can be done via
EnerVista UR Setup with the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command.
5.2.15 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
FLEX STATE
PARAMETERS
MESSAGE
PARAMETER
Off
1:
PARAMETER
Off
2:
PARAMETER 256:
Off
MESSAGE
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states can be used for efficient monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed
so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states
which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
5-54
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The state bits may be read out in the Flex States register array beginning at Modbus address 0900h. Sixteen states are
packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are sixteen registers to accommodate the 256 state bits.
5.2.16 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
INVOKE AND SCROLL:

Off
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAY
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAY
USER DISPLAY 16
USER-DEFINABLE
DISPLAYS
MESSAGE
This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing
sequence in the USER DISPLAYS menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus facilitate text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways.
KEYPAD: Use the MENU key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user-definable display (note
that only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the UP and DOWN keys. The
display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT: The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL
setting. Any FlexLogic operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navigate the programmed displays.
On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by
showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand
acts exactly as the down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the first
one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the DOWN key operate concurrently.
When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay will start to cycle through the
user displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user display, not at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.
GE Multilin
5-55
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
b) USER DISPLAY 1(16)

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS USER DISPLAY 1(16)
DISP 1 TOP LINE:
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 1
0
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 2
0
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 3
0
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 4
0
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0
USER DISPLAY 1
MESSAGE
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing display and
pressing the ENTER key. The display will then prompt ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?. After selecting Yes, a message indicates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are
automatically configured with the proper content this content may subsequently be edited.
This menu is used to enter user-defined text and user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular user display. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used to mark the start
of a data field - the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to five separate data fields can be entered in a
user display - the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item.
A User Display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista UR Setup interface (preferred for convenience).
The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad:
1.
Select the line to be edited.
2.
Press the decimal key to enter text edit mode.
3.
Use either VALUE key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4.
Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
5.
Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6.
The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information.
7.
Press the ENTER key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the five items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate
keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of 0 for any items not being used. Use the HELP key at any selected system display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus
address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista UR Setup usage conveniently facilitates this
conversion).
Use the MENU key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show in
sequence, changing every 4 seconds. While viewing a user display, press the ENTER key and then select the Yes option
to remove the display from the user display list. Use the MENU key again to exit the user displays menu.
5-56
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
An example user display setup and result is shown below:

USER DISPLAY 1
DISP 1 TOP LINE:

Current X ~
A
Shows user-defined text with first Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:

Current Y ~
A
Shows user-defined text with second Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 1:
6016
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register

Address, corresponding to first Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 2:
6357
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus

Register Address, corresponding to 2nd Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 3:
0
This item is not being used - there is no corresponding

Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 4:
0

MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0

USER DISPLAYS
Current X
Current Y
0.850 A
0.327 A
Shows the resultant display content.
5.2.17 INSTALLATION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
MESSAGE
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
Range: Not Programmed, Programmed
RELAY NAME:
Relay-1
To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output
relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state.
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name
is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet communications channel using the IEC 61850 protocol.
GE Multilin
5-57
5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES

5.3REMOTE RESOURCES
5 SETTINGS
5.3.1 REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION
When L90 is ordered with a process card module as a part of HardFiber system, then an additional Remote Resources
menu tree is available in EnerVista UR Setup software to allow configuring HardFiber system.
Figure 512: REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION MENU
The remote resources settings configure a L90 with a process bus module to work with devices called Bricks. Remote
resources configuration is only available through the EnerVista UR Setup software, and is not available through the L90
front panel. A Brick provides eight AC measurements, along with contact inputs, DC analog inputs, and contact outputs, to
be the remote interface to field equipment such as circuit breakers and transformers. The L90 with a process bus module
has access to all of the capabilities of up to eight Bricks. Remote resources settings configure the point-to-point connection
between specific fiber optic ports on the L90 process card and specific Brick. The relay is then configured to measure specific currents, voltages and contact inputs from those Bricks, and to control specific outputs.
The configuration process for remote resources is straightforward and consists of the following steps.
Configure the field units. This establishes the point-to-point connection between a specific port on the relay process
bus module, and a specific digital core on a specific Brick. This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus
relay.
Configure the AC banks. This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages.
AC bank configuration also provides a provision for redundant measurements for currents and voltages, a powerful
reliability improvement possible with process bus.
Configure signal sources. This functionality of the L90 has not changed other than the requirement to use currents and
voltages established by AC bank configuration under the remote resources menu.
Configure field contact inputs, field contact outputs, RTDs, and transducers as required for the application's functionality. These inputs and outputs are the physical interface to circuit breakers, transformers, and other equipment. They
replace the traditional contact inputs and outputs located at the relay to virtually eliminate copper wiring.
Configure shared inputs and outputs as required for the application's functionality. Shared inputs and outputs are distinct binary channels that provide high-speed protection quality signaling between relays through a Brick.
For additional information on how to configure a relay with a process bus module, please refer to GE publication number
GEK-113500: HardFiber System Instruction Manual.
5-58
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5.4SYSTEM SETUP
5.4.1 AC INPUTS
a) CURRENT BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK F1(L5)
CURRENT BANK F1
PHASE CT F1
PRIMARY:
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
1 A
MESSAGE
PHASE CT F1
SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
GROUND CT F1
PRIMARY:
1 A
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GROUND CT F1
SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately
prior to changing CT characteristics.
NOTE
Four banks of phase and ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents
the module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, L} and a = {1, 5}.
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is
ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected
in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = neutral current = 3Io) is used as the
input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the
circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground
CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this
case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections.
Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct operation, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).
The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given If the
following current banks:
F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio.
F5: CT bank with 1000: ratio.
L1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio.
The following rule applies:

SRC 1 = F1 + F5 + L1
(EQ 5.7)
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT will be
adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then
a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary.
The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).
GE Multilin
5-59
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
b) VOLTAGE BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK F5(L5)
PHASE VT F5
CONNECTION: Wye
Range: Wye, Delta
MESSAGE
PHASE VT F5
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
PHASE VT F5
RATIO: 1.00 :1
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
CONNECTION: Vag
Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
RATIO: 1.00 :1
VOLTAGE BANK F5
CAUTION
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then
reset immediately prior to changing VT characteristics.
Two banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, L} and a = {5}.

See the Introduction to AC sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5 CONNECTION made to the system as Wye or Delta. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as Delta.
NOTE
The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal
voltage is applied to the VT primary.
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a delta connection, the secondary voltage would be 115; that is, (13800 / 14400) 120. For a wye connection, the voltage value
entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 / 3 = 66.4.
On a 14.4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage
value entered would be 120; that is, 14400 / 120.
5.4.2 POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM
NOMINAL FREQUENCY:
60 Hz
Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PHASE ROTATION:
ABC
Range: ABC, ACB
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY AND PHASE

REFERENCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY TRACKING:
Enabled
POWER SYSTEM
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency
cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before
reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe
period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.
5-60
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters.
The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the
actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be connected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.
The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for
phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source:
phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current.
For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( V ANGLE REF = V A ), while Clarke transformation of the
phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( V FREQUENCY = ( 2V A V B V C ) 3 ) for better performance during fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of
whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay.
Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this signal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.
The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they
have the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between
different UR-series relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.
should only be set to Disabled in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for special variable-frequency applications.
FREQUENCY TRACKING
NOTE
The frequency tracking feature will function only when the L90 is in the Programmed mode. If the L90 is Not Programmed, then metering values will be available but may exhibit significant errors.
NOTE
NOTE
The nominal system frequency should be selected as 50 Hz or 60 Hz only. The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE
setting, used as a reference for calculating all angles, must be identical for all terminals. Whenever the 87L function
is Enabled, the frequency tracking function is disabled, and frequency tracking is driven by the L90 algorithm (see
the Theory of operation chapter). Whenever the 87L function is Disabled, the frequency tracking mechanism
reverts to the UR-series mechanism which uses the FREQUENCY TRACKING setting to provide frequency tracking for
all other elements and functions.
5.4.3 SIGNAL SOURCES
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE 1(4)
SOURCE 1 NAME:
SRC 1
Range: up to six alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT:

None
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of

any 6 CTs. Only Phase CT inputs are displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT:

None
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of

any 6 CTs. Only Ground CT inputs are displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT:

None
Range: None, F5, L5

Only phase voltage inputs will be displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 AUX VT:

None
Range: None, F5, L5

Only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.
SOURCE 1
Identical menus are available for each source. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate
for the associated source.
The first letter in the source identifier represents the module slot position. The number directly following this letter represents either the first bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called 1 or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called 5 in
a particular CT/VT module. Refer to the Introduction to AC sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional
details on this concept.
GE Multilin
5-61
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
It is possible to select the sum of all CT combinations. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be
referred. For example, the selection F1+F5 indicates the sum of each phase from channels F1 and F5, scaled to
whichever CT has the higher ratio. Selecting None hides the associated actual values.
The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each
CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type,
ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each source is entered,
including specifying which CTs will be summed together.
User selection of AC parameters for comparator elements:
CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the
specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the element specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection. In elements where the parameter
may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting
specifies the source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.
AC input actual values:
The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and voltage sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be displayed here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values.
DISTURBANCE DETECTORS (INTERNAL):
The disturbance detector (ANSI 50DD) element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any disturbance on
the protected system. The 50DD function is intended for use in conjunction with measuring elements, blocking of current
based elements (to prevent maloperation as a result of the wrong settings), and starting oscillography data capture. A disturbance detector is provided for each source.
The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents. The disturbance detector scheme
logic is as follows:
SETTING
ACTUAL
SOURCE 1
CURRENT PHASOR
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1
I_1 - I_1 >2*CUT-OFF
I_2
I_0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SRC 1 50DD OP
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SRC 2 50DD OP
Where I is 2 cycles old

SETTING
ACTUAL
SOURCE 2
CURRENT PHASOR
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1
I_2
I_0

SETTING
ACTUAL
SOURCE 6
CURRENT PHASOR
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1
I_2
I_0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SRC 6 50DD OP
827092A3.CDR
Figure 513: DISTURBANCE DETECTOR LOGIC DIAGRAM

The disturbance detector responds to the change in currents of twice the current cut-off level. The default cut-off threshold
is 0.02 pu; thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0.04 pu. The metering sensitivity setting (PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL) controls the sensitivity of the disturbance detector
accordingly.
5-62
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES:

An example of the use of sources is shown in the diagram below. A relay could have the following hardware configuration:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1
CT/VT MODULE 2
CT/VT MODULE 3
CTs
VTs
not applicable
This configuration could be used on a two-winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half system. The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application, and
the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.
F1
DSP Bank
F5
Source 1
Source 2
Amps
Amps
51BF-1
51BF-2
Source 3
U1
Volts Amps
A
Var
87T
Var
51P
Volts Amps
M1
Source 4
M1
UR Relay
M5
Figure 514: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES
GE Multilin
5-63
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.4.4 L90 POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP 87L POWER SYSTEM
NUMBER OF TERMINALS:
2
Range: 2, 3
MESSAGE
NUMBER OF CHANNELS:
1
Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
CHARGING CURRENT
COMPENSATN: Disabled
MESSAGE
POS SEQ CAPACITIVE

REACTANCE: 0.100 k
MESSAGE
ZERO SEQ CAPACITIVE

REACTANCE: 0.100 k
MESSAGE
ZERO SEQ CURRENT

REMOVAL: Disabled
MESSAGE
LOCAL RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
MESSAGE
TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
MESSAGE
TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
MESSAGE
CHNL ASYM COMP:

Off
MESSAGE
BLOCK GPS TIME REF:

Off
MESSAGE
MAX CHNL ASYMMETRY:

1.5 ms
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 ms in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
ROUND TRIP TIME

CHANGE: 1.5 ms
87L POWER SYSTEM
Range: 0.100 to 65.535 k in steps of 0.001

Range: 0.100 to 65.535 k in steps of 0.001
NOTE
Any changes to the L90 power system settings will change the protection system configuration. As such,
the 87L protection at all L90 protection system terminals must be temporarily disabled to allow the relays
to acknowledge the new settings.
NUMBER OF TERMINALS: This setting is the number of the terminals of the associated protected line.
NUMBER OF CHANNELS: This setting should correspond to the type of communications module installed. If the relay
is applied on two terminal lines with a single communications channel, this setting should be selected as "1". For a two
terminal line with a second redundant channel for increased dependability, or for three terminal line applications, this
setting should be selected as "2".
CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION: This setting enables and disables the charging current calculations and
corrections of current phasors. The voltage signals used for charging current compensation are taken from the source
assigned with the CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 1 setting. As such, it's critical to ensure that three-phase line voltage is
assigned to this source. The following diagram shows possible configurations.
5-64
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
A B C
Possible 3-Reactor
arrangement
Line Capacitive Reactance
Possible 4-Reactor
arrangement
Xreact
A B C
Xreact
Xreact_n
X1line_capac
X0line_capac
831731A3.CDR
Figure 515: CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION CONFIGURATIONS
POSITIVE and ZERO SEQUENCE CAPACITIVE REACTANCE: The values of positive and zero-sequence capacitive
reactance of the protected line are required for charging current compensation calculations. The line capacitive reactance values should be entered in primary kohms for the total line length. Details of the charging current compensation algorithm can be found in Chapter 8: Theory of operation.
If shunt reactors are also installed on the line, the resulting value entered in the POS SEQ CAPACITIVE REACTANCE and
settings should be calculated as follows:
ZERO SEQ CAPACITIVE REACTANCE
1.
Three-reactor arrangement: three identical line reactors (Xreact) solidly connected phase to ground:
X 1line_capac X react
X C1 = -----------------------------------------------X react X 1line_capac
2.
, X C0 = -----------------------------------------------X react X 0line_capac
(EQ 5.8)
Four-reactor arrangement: three identical line reactors (Xreact) wye-connected with the fourth reactor (Xreact_n)
connected between reactor-bank neutral and the ground.
X C1 = -----------------------------------------------X react X 1line_capac
X 0line_capac ( X react + 3 X react_n )

, X C0 = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------X react + 3 X react_n X 0line_capac
(EQ 5.9)
X1line_capac = the total line positive-sequence capacitive reactance

X0line_capac = the total line zero-sequence capacitive reactance
Xreact = the total reactor inductive reactance per phase. If identical reactors are installed at both line ends, the
value of the inductive reactance is divided by 2 (or 3 for a three-terminal line) before using in the above
equations. If the reactors installed at both ends of the line are different, the following equations apply:
1
1
1. For 2 terminal line: X react = 1 ----------------------------------- + -----------------------------------
X react_terminal1 X react_terminal2
2.
1
1
1
For 3 terminal line: X react = 1 ----------------------------------- + ----------------------------------- + -----------------------------------
X react_terminal1 X react_terminal2 X react_terminal3
Xreact_n = the total neutral reactor inductive reactance. If identical reactors are installed at both line ends, the
value of the inductive reactance is divided by 2 (or 3 for a three-terminal line) before using in the above
equations. If the reactors installed at both ends of the line are different, the following equations apply:
1
1
1. For 2 terminal line: X react_n = 1 ---------------------------------------- + ----------------------------------------
X react_n_terminal1 X react_n_terminal2
2.
NOTE
NOTE
GE Multilin
1
1
1
For 3 terminal line: X react_n = 1 ---------------------------------------- + ------------------------------------------ + ----------------------------------------
X react_n_terminal1 X react__n_terminal2 X react_n_terminal3
Charging current compensation calculations should be performed for an arrangement where the VTs are connected to the line side of the circuit; otherwise, opening the breaker at one end of the line will cause a calculation error.
Differential current is significantly decreased when CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION is Enabled and the
proper reactance values are entered. The effect of charging current compensation is viewed in the METERING
87L DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT actual values menu. This effect is very dependent on CT and VT accuracy.
5-65
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
ZERO-SEQUENCE CURRENT REMOVAL: This setting facilitates application of the L90 to transmission lines with one
or more tapped transformers without current measurement at the taps. If the tapped transformer is connected in a
grounded wye on the line side, it becomes a source of the zero-sequence current for external ground faults. As the
transformer current is not measured by the L90 protection system, the zero-sequence current would create a spurious
differential signal and may cause a false trip.
If enabled, this setting forces the L90 to remove zero-sequence current from the phase currents prior to forming their
differential signals, ensuring protection stability on external ground faults. However, zero-sequence current removal
may cause all three phases to trip for internal ground faults. Consequently, a phase selective operation of the L90 is
not retained if the setting is enabled. This does not impose any limitation, as single-pole tripping is not recommended
for lines with tapped transformers. Refer to chapter 9 for guidelines.
LOCAL (TERMINAL 1 and TERMINAL 2) ID NUMBER: In installations using multiplexers or modems for communication, it is desirable to ensure the data used by the relays protecting a given line comes from the correct relays. The L90
performs this check by reading the ID number contained in the messages sent by transmitting relays and comparing
this ID to the programmed correct ID numbers by the receiving relays. This check is used to block the differential element of a relay, if the channel is inadvertently set to loopback mode, by recognizing its own ID on a received channel.
If an incorrect ID is found on a either channel during normal operation, the FlexLogic operand 87 CH1(2) ID FAIL is
set, driving the event with the same name. The result of channel identification is also available in ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS CHANNEL TESTS VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION for commissioning purposes. The default value
0 at local relay ID setting indicates that the channel ID number is not to be checked. Refer to the Current differential
section in this chapter for additional information.
For two-terminal applications, only the LOCAL ID NUMBER and TERMINAL 1 ID NUMBER should be used. The TERMINAL 2
ID NUMBER is used for three-terminal applications.
CHNL ASYM COMP: This setting enables/disables channel asymmetry compensation. The compensation is based on
absolute time referencing provided by GPS-based clocks via the L90 IRIG-B inputs. This feature should be used on
multiplexed channels where channel asymmetry can be expected and would otherwise cause errors in current differential calculations. The feature takes effect if all terminals are provided with reliable IRIG-B signals. If the IRIG-B signal
is lost at any terminal of the L90 protection system, or the real time clock not configured, then the compensation is not
calculated. If the compensation is in place prior to losing the GPS time reference, the last (memorized) correction is
applied as long as the value of CHNL ASYM COMP is On. See chapter 9 for additional information.
The GPS-based compensation for channel asymmetry can take three different effects:
If CHNL ASYM COMP (GPS) is Off, compensation is not applied and the L90 uses only the ping-pong technique.
If CHNL ASYM COMP (GPS) is On and all L90 terminals have a valid time reference (BLOCK GPS TIME REF not set),
then compensation is applied and the L90 effectively uses GPS time referencing tracking channel asymmetry if
the latter fluctuates.
If CHNL ASYM COMP (GPS) is On and not all L90 terminals have a valid time reference (BLOCK GPS TIME REF not
set or IRIG-B FAILURE operand is not asserted), then compensation is not applied (if the system was not compensated prior to the problem), or the memorized (last valid) compensation is used if compensation was in effect prior
to the problem.
The CHNL ASYM COMP setting dynamically turns the GPS compensation on and off. A FlexLogic operand that combines several factors is typically used. The L90 protection system does not incorporate any pre-defined way of treating
certain conditions, such as failure of the GPS receiver, loss of satellite signal, channel asymmetry prior to the loss of
reference time, or change of the round trip time prior to loss of the time reference. Virtually any philosophy can be programmed by selecting the CHNL ASYM COMP setting. Factors to consider are:
Fail-safe output of the GPS receiver. Some receivers may be equipped with the fail-safe output relay. The L90 system requires a maximum error of 250 s. The fail-safe output of the GPS receiver may be connected to the local
L90 via an input contact. In the case of GPS receiver fail, the channel compensation function can be effectively
disabled by using the input contact in conjunction with the BLOCK GPS TIME REF (GPS) setting.
Channel asymmetry prior to losing the GPS time reference. This value is measured by the L90 and a user-programmable threshold is applied to it. The corresponding FlexLogic operands are produced if the asymmetry is
above the threshold (87L DIFF MAX 1 ASYM and 87L DIFF 2 MAX ASYM). These operands can be latched in FlexLogic and combined with other factors to decide, upon GPS loss, if the relays continue to compensate using the
memorized correction. Typically, one may decide to keep compensating if the pre-existing asymmetry was low.
5-66
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
Change in the round trip travel time. This value is measured by the L90 and a user-programmable threshold
applied to it. The corresponding FlexLogic operands are produced if the delta change is above the threshold
(87L DIFF 1 TIME CHNG and 87L DIFF 2 TIME CHNG). These operands can be latched in FlexLogic and combined
with other factors to decide, upon GPS loss, if the relays continue to compensate using the memorized correction.
Typically, one may decide to disable compensation if the round trip time changes.
BLOCK GPS TIME REF: This setting signals to the L90 that the time reference is not valid. The time reference may be
not accurate due to problems with the GPS receiver. The user must to be aware of the case when a GPS satellite
receiver loses its satellite signal and reverts to its own calibrated crystal oscillator. In this case, accuracy degrades in
time and may eventually cause relay misoperation. Verification from the manufacturer of receiver accuracy not worse
than 250 s and the presence of an alarm contact indicating loss of the satellite signal is strongly recommended. If the
time reference accuracy cannot be guaranteed, it should be relayed to the L90 via contact inputs and GPS compensation effectively blocked using the contact position in conjunction with the BLOCK GPS TIME REF setting. This setting is
typically a signal from the GPS receiver signaling problems or time inaccuracy.
Some GPS receivers can supply erroneous IRIG-B signals during power-up and before locking to satellites. If the
receivers failsafe contact opens during power-up (allowing for an erroneous IRIG-B signal), then set a dropout delay
up to 15 minutes (depending on GPS receiver specifications) to the failsafe contact via FlexLogic to prevent incorrect relay response.
MAX CHNL ASYMMETRY: This setting detects excessive channel asymmetry. The same threshold is applied to both
the channels, while the following per-channel FlexLogic operands are generated: 87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM and 87L DIFF
2 MAX ASYM. These operands can be used to alarm on problems with communication equipment and/or to decide
whether channel asymmetry compensation remains in operation should the GPS-based time reference be lost. Channel asymmetry is measured if both terminals of a given channel have valid time reference.
If the memorized asymmetry value is much greater than expected (indicating a significant problem with IRIG-B timing),
then this operand can be also used to block GPS compensation, forcing the relay to use the memorized asymmetry
value.
ROUND TRIP TIME CHANGE: This setting detects changes in round trip time. This threshold is applied to both channels, while the 87L DIFF 1 TIME CHNG and 87L DIFF 2 TIME CHNG ASYM per-channel FlexLogic operands are generated. These operands can be used to alarm on problems with communication equipment and/or to decide whether
channel asymmetry compensation remains in operation should the GPS-based time reference be lost.
GE Multilin
5-67
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
IRIG-B FAILURE
DETECTED
To Remote Relays
Channel 1 and 2
SETTINGS
BLOCK GPS TIME REF:
OR
87L GPS Status Fail
Off = 0
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
None = 0
87L DIFF GPS FAIL
CHNL ASYM COMP:
GPS COMPENSATION
Off = 0
RUN
DATA FROM REMOTE

TERMINAL 1
87L Ch 1 Status (OK=1)
87L GPS 1 Status (OK=1)
OR
AND
DATA FROM REMOTE

TERMINAL 2
87L Ch 2 Status (OK=1)
87L GPS 2 Status (OK=1)
Use Calculated GPS

Correction
OR
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
5 sec
87L DIFF PFLL FAIL
SETTINGS
MAX CHNL ASYMMETRY:
Update GPS Correction

Memory
Use Memorized GPS
Correction
AND
AND
Use GPS Correction

of Zero
ROUND TRIP TIME

CHANGE:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L DIFF GPS 1 FAIL
AND
AND
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Ch1 Asymmetry > MAX
ACTUAL VALUE
87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM
Ch1 Asymmetry
RUN
ACTUAL VALUE
Ch1 T-Time New -
Ch1 Round Trip Time
Ch1 T-Time Old >
87L DIFF 1 TIME CHNG
CHANGE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L DIFF GPS 2 FAIL
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
ACTUAL VALUE
Ch2 Asymmetry > MAX
87L DIFF 2 MAX ASYM
Ch2 Asymmetry
RUN
ACTUAL VALUE
Ch2 Round Trip Time
Ch2 T-Time New Ch2 T-Time Old >
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
CHANGE
831025A4.CDR
Figure 516: CHANNEL ASYMMETRY COMPENSATION LOGIC
5-68
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP

5.4.5 BREAKERS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 1(4)
BREAKER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON

CONTROL: Disabled
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 NAME:
Bkr 1
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 MODE:
3-Pole
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 OPEN:
Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN:

Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 CLOSE:
Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE:

Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 A/3P CLSD:

Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 A/3P OPND:

Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 B CLOSED:
Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 B OPENED:
Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 C CLOSED:
Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 C OPENED:
Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 Toperate:
0.070 s
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM:

Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 ALARM
DELAY:
0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1

TIME:
0.000 s
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV:

Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
BREAKER 1
GE Multilin
5-69
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features is provided in chapter 4. Only information concerning programming of the associated settings is covered here. These features are provided for two or more
breakers; a user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
The number of breaker control elements is dependent on the number of CT/VT modules specified with the L90. The following settings are available for each breaker control element.
BREAKER 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the breaker control feature.
BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Set to Enable to allow faceplate push button operations.
BREAKER 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the breaker. This name will be used in flash
messages related to breaker 1.
BREAKER 1 MODE: This setting selects 3-pole mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or 1pole mode where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
BREAKER 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to
open breaker 1.
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the breaker. This setting can be
used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
BREAKER 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay
to close breaker 1.
BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the breaker. This setting can be
used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
BREAKER 1 A/3P CLOSED: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when the
breaker is closed. If the BREAKER 1 MODE setting is selected as 3-Pole, this setting selects a single input as the operand used to track the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as 1-Pole, the input mentioned above
is used to track phase A and the BREAKER 1 B and BREAKER 1 C settings select operands to track phases B and C,
respectively.
BREAKER 1 A/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed
52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the
inverted BREAKER 1 CLOSED status signal can be used.
BREAKER 1 B CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B closed position as above for phase A.
BREAKER 1 B OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B opened position as above for phase A.
BREAKER 1 C CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C closed position as above for phase A.
BREAKER 1 C OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C opened position as above for phase A.
BREAKER 1 Toperate: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the
52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts during breaker operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has
expired, the BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes.
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: This setting selects an operand, usually an external contact input, connected to a breaker
alarm reporting contact.
BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among
the three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the poles.
If single-pole tripping and reclosing is used, the breaker may trip unsymmetrically for faults. In this case, the minimum
alarm delay setting must exceed the maximum time required for fault clearing and reclosing by a suitable margin.
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: This setting specifies the interval required to maintain setting changes in effect after
an operator has initiated a manual close command to operate a circuit breaker.
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Selects an operand indicating that breaker 1 is out-of-service.
5-70
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
6(77,1*
%5($.(5)81&7,21
(QDEOHG
'LVDEOHG
6(77,1*
%5($.(5%/2&.23(1
2II
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
%5($.(52))&0'
%5($.(575,3$
$1'
%5($.(575,3%
%5($.(575,3&
$1'
'/DQG/GHYLFHVRQO\IURPWULSRXWSXW
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
75,33+$6($
75,33+$6(%
75,33+$6(&
75,332/(
6(77,1*
%5($.(523(1
2II
25
6HOHFW 2SHQ
%.5(1$%/('
86(52))21
7RRSHQ%5.1DPH
7REUHDNHUFRQWURO
ORJLFVKHHW
$
$1'
6(77,1*
%5($.(5386+%87721
&21752/
(QDEOHG
$1'
86(52))21
7RRSHQ%5.1DPH
25
$1'
6(77,1*
%5($.(5&/26(
2II
25
6HOHFW &ORVH
6(77,1*
0$18$/&/26(5(&$/7,0(
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
$1'
%5($.(501/&/6
$1'
%5($.(521&0'
$1'
&'/DQG/UHOD\VIURPUHFORVHU
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
$5&/26(%.5
6(77,1*
%5($.(5%/2&.&/26(
2II
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
25
$6&'5
Figure 517: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)

IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the L90 is in Programmed mode and not in the local control mode.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-71
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
from breaker
control logic
sheet 1,
827061AR
5 SETTINGS
BKR ENABLED
SETTING
BREAKER 1 MODE
= 3-Pole
= 1-Pole
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
AND
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
AND
BREAKER 1 OPEN
AND
BREAKER 1 DISCREP
AND
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
BREAKER 1
CLOSED
(DEFAULT)
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1
OPEN
(DEFAULT)
OR
SETTING
BREAKER 1 A/3P CLSD
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY
SETTING
BREAKER 1 B CLSD
AND
= Off
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SETTING
BREAKER 1 C CLSD
Note: the BREAKER 1 TROUBLE LED

can be latched using FlexLogic
AND
BREAKER 1
TROUBLE
(DEFAULT)
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM
SETTING
BREAKER 1 Toperate
= Off
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
XOR
SETTING
BREAKER 1 A/3P OPND
= Off
0
AND
AND
BREAKER 1 A BAD ST
BREAKER 1 A CLSD
BREAKER 1 A OPEN
BREAKER 1 A INTERM
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 Toperate
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
XOR
SETTING
BREAKER 1 B OPENED
= Off
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS
0
AND
AND
BREAKER 1 B BAD ST
BREAKER 1 B CLSD
BREAKER 1 B OPEN
BREAKER 1 B INTERM
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 Toperate
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
XOR
SETTING
BREAKER 1 C OPENED
= Off
0
AND
AND
BREAKER 1 C BAD ST
BREAKER 1 C CLSD
BREAKER 1 C OPEN
BREAKER 1 C INTERM
AND
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN

BREAKER 1 1P OPEN
BREAKER 1 OOS
XOR
= Off
AND
842025A1.CDR
Figure 518: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-72
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP

5.4.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SWITCHES SWITCH 1(16)
SWITCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 NAME:
SW 1
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 MODE:
3-Pole
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 OPEN:
Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN:

Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 CLOSE:
Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE:

Off
MESSAGE
SWTCH 1 A/3P CLSD:

Off
MESSAGE
SWTCH 1 A/3P OPND:

Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 B CLOSED:
Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 B OPENED:
Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 C CLOSED:
Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 C OPENED:
Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 Toperate:
0.070 s
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 ALARM
DELAY:
0.000 s
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
SWITCH 1
The disconnect switch element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and closing of
disconnect switches from SCADA or through the front panel interface. The disconnect switch element can be used to create an interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the switch pole position, both the 52/a and 52/b
auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them. The number of available disconnect switches
depends on the number of the CT/VT modules ordered with the L90.
SWITCH 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the disconnect switch element.
SWITCH 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the disconnect switch. This name will be used
in flash messages related to disconnect switch 1.
SWITCH 1 MODE: This setting selects 3-pole mode, where all disconnect switch poles are operated simultaneously,
or 1-pole mode where all disconnect switch poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
GE Multilin
5-73
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
SWITCH 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to
open disconnect switch 1.
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the disconnect switch. This setting
can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
SWITCH 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to
close disconnect switch 1.
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the disconnect switch. This setting
can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
SWTCH 1 A/3P CLSD: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a disconnect switch
auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when
the disconnect switch is closed. If the SWITCH 1 MODE setting is selected as 3-Pole, this setting selects a single input
as the operand used to track the disconnect switch open or closed position. If the mode is selected as 1-Pole, the
input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the SWITCH 1 B and SWITCH 1 C settings select operands to
track phases B and C, respectively.
SWITCH 1 A/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed
52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the inverted SWITCH 1 CLOSED status signal can be used.
SWITCH 1 B CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as above for phase A.
SWITCH 1 B OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B opened position as above for phase A.
SWITCH 1 C CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C closed position as above for phase A.
SWITCH 1 C OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C opened position as above for phase A.
SWITCH 1 Toperate: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 52/a
and 52/b auxiliary contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has
expired, the SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes.
SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the
three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation
of the poles.
IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the L90 is in Programmed mode and not in the local control mode.
NOTE
5-74
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
6(77,1*
6:,7&+)81&7,21
'LVDEOHG
(QDEOHG
6(77,1*
6:,7&+23(1
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
2II
$1'
6:,7&+2))&0'
$1'
6:,7&+21&0'
$1'
6:,7&+&/26('
$1'
6:,7&+23(1
$1'
6:,7&+',6&5(3
25
6HOHFW 2SHQ
6(77,1*
6:,7&+%/.23(1
2II
6(77,1*
6:,7&+&/26(
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
2II
25
6HOHFW &ORVH
6(77,1*
6:,7&+%/.&/26(
2II
6(77,1*
6:,7&+02'(
3ROH
3ROH
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
$1'
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
$1'
25
6(77,1*
6:7&+$3&/6'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
2II
$1'
6(77,1*
6:,7&+$/$50'(/$<
6(77,1*
6:,7&+%&/26('
$1'
2II

)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
25
6(77,1*
6:,7&+&&/26('
6:,7&+7528%/(
$1'
$1'
2II
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
25
6(77,1*
6:,7&+7RSHUDWH
6:,7&+%$'67$786
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
$1'
;25
6(77,1*
6:7&+$3231'

$1'
2II
$1'
6:,7&+$%$'67
6:,7&+$&/6'
6:,7&+$23(1
6:,7&+$,17(50
$1'
$1'
$1'
6(77,1*
6:,7&+7RSHUDWH
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
$1'
;25
6(77,1*
6:,7&+%23(1('

$1'
2II
$1'
6:,7&+%%$'67
6:,7&+%&/6'
6:,7&+%23(1
6:,7&+%,17(50
$1'
$1'
$1'
6(77,1*
6:,7&+7RSHUDWH
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
$1'
;25
6(77,1*
6:,7&+&23(1('

$1'
2II
$1'
$1'
6:,7&+&%$'67
6:,7&+&&/6'
6:,7&+&23(1
6:,7&+&,17(50
$1'
$1'
$&'5
Figure 519: DISCONNECT SWITCH SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-75
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.4.7 FLEXCURVES
a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP FLEXCURVES FLEXCURVE A(D)
FLEXCURVE A
FLEXCURVE A TIME AT
0.00 xPKP:
0 ms
FlexCurves A through D have settings for entering times to reset and operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98
and 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a
custom FlexCurve, enter the reset and operate times (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the
MESSAGE UP/DOWN keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D).
Table 55: FLEXCURVE TABLE
RESET
TIME
MS
RESET
TIME
MS
OPERATE
TIME
MS
OPERATE
TIME
MS
OPERATE
TIME
MS
OPERATE
0.00
0.68
1.03
2.9
4.9
10.5
0.05
0.70
1.05
3.0
5.0
11.0
0.10
0.72
1.1
3.1
5.1
11.5
0.15
0.74
1.2
3.2
5.2
12.0
0.20
0.76
1.3
3.3
5.3
12.5
0.25
0.78
1.4
3.4
5.4
13.0
0.30
0.80
1.5
3.5
5.5
13.5
0.35
0.82
1.6
3.6
5.6
14.0
0.40
0.84
1.7
3.7
5.7
14.5
0.45
0.86
1.8
3.8
5.8
15.0
0.48
0.88
1.9
3.9
5.9
15.5
0.50
0.90
2.0
4.0
6.0
16.0
0.52
0.91
2.1
4.1
6.5
16.5
0.54
0.92
2.2
4.2
7.0
17.0
0.56
0.93
2.3
4.3
7.5
17.5
0.58
0.94
2.4
4.4
8.0
18.0
0.60
0.95
2.5
4.5
8.5
18.5
0.62
0.96
2.6
4.6
9.0
19.0
0.64
0.97
2.7
4.7
9.5
19.5
0.66
0.98
2.8
4.8
10.0
20.0
NOTE
5-76
TIME
MS
The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered
points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of
1; that is, 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
b) FLEXCURVE CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP

The EnerVista UR Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated
data points. Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file
(.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From EnerVista UR Setup setting.
Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves are customized
by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at
zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup.
c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING
Recloser curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response
time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite operating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream protective devices have different operating characteristics. The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears
when the Initialize From EnerVista UR Setup setting is set to Recloser Curve and the Initialize FlexCurve button is
clicked.
Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times
Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each
curve operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting
defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests
a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating
characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower
than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time;
otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears
when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum
curve time.
High Current Time: Allows the user to set a pickup multiple
from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is
normally only required at higher current levels. The HCT Ratio
defines the high current pickup multiple; the HCT defines the
operating time.
842721A1.CDR
Figure 520: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION

The multiplier and adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings. The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT ratio.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-77
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
d) EXAMPLE
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then
enabled at eight (8) times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately four (4) times pickup, the curve operating time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).
842719A1.CDR
Figure 521: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED

With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.
842720A1.CDR
Figure 522: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED

Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this
is attempted, the EnerVista UR Setup software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
NOTE
e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES

The standard recloser curves available for the L90 are displayed in the following graphs.
5-78
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
2
1
GE106
TIME (sec)
0.5
0.2
GE103
0.1
GE104
GE105
0.05
GE102
GE101
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842723A1.CDR
Figure 523: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106

50
GE142
20
10
TIME (sec)
5
GE138
2
GE120
1
GE113
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842725A1.CDR
Figure 524: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142
GE Multilin
5-79
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
50
20
10
TIME (sec)
GE201
5
GE151
GE140
GE134
GE137
0.5
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842730A1.CDR
Figure 525: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201
50
GE152
TIME (sec)
20
GE141
10
GE131
GE200
2
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842728A1.CDR
Figure 526: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200
5-80
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
50
20
GE164
10
TIME (sec)
5
2
GE162
1
0.5
GE133
0.2
GE165
0.1
0.05
GE161
0.02
0.01
1
GE163
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842729A1.CDR
Figure 527: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165
20
GE132
10
5
TIME (sec)
2
1
0.5
GE139
0.2
GE136
0.1
GE116
0.05
GE117
GE118
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842726A1.CDR
Figure 528: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139
GE Multilin
5-81
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
20
10
5
GE122
TIME (sec)
2
1
0.5
GE114
0.2
0.1
GE111
GE121
0.05
GE107
GE115
GE112
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842724A1.CDR
Figure 529: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122
50
20
GE202
TIME (sec)
10
5
GE135
GE119
1
0.5
0.2
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842727A1.CDR
Figure 530: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202
5-82
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP

5.4.8 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT
MESSAGE
PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1
See below.
REPORTING OVER
NETWORK
See page 5-98.
The L90 Line Current Differential System is provided with an optional phasor measurement unit feature.
This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. The number of phasor measurement
units available is also dependent on this option. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional
details.
The PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT menu allows specifying basic parameters of the measurements process such as signal
source, ID and station name, calibration data, triggering, recording, and content for transmission on each of the supported
ports. The reporting ports menus allow specifying the content and rate of reporting on each of the supported ports.
Precise IRIG-B input is vital for correct synchrophasor measurement and reporting. A DC level shift IRIG-B receiver
must be used for the phasor measurement unit to output proper synchrophasor values.
NOTE
The PMU settings are organized in five logical groups as follows.
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1
PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1
GE Multilin
PMU 1 BASIC
CONFIGURATION
See page 5-84.
MESSAGE
PMU 1
CALIBRATION
See page 5-85.
MESSAGE
PMU 1
COMMUNICATION
See page 5-86.
MESSAGE
PMU 1
TRIGGERING
See page 5-88.
MESSAGE
PMU 1
RECORDING
See page 5-95.
5-83
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
b) BASIC CONFIGURATION
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1 PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION
PMU 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
PMU 1 IDCODE: 1
MESSAGE
PMU 1 STN:
GE-UR-PMU
Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE:

SRC 1
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POST-FILTER:
Symm-3-point
Range: available post-filters as per table below
PMU 1 BASIC
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
This section contains basic phasor measurement unit (PMU) data, such as functions, source settings, and names.
PMU 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables the PMU 1 functionality. Any associated functions (such as the recorder or
triggering comparators) will not function if this setting is Disabled. Use the command frame to force the communication portion of the feature to start/stop transmission of data. When the transmission is turned off, the PMU is fully operational in terms of calculating and recording the phasors.
PMU 1 IDCODE: This setting assigns a numerical ID to the PMU. It corresponds to the IDCODE field of the data, configuration, header, and command frames of the C37.118 protocol. The PMU uses this value when sending data, configuration, and header frames and responds to this value when receiving the command frame.
PMU 1 STN: This setting assigns an alphanumeric ID to the PMU station. It corresponds to the STN field of the configuration frame of the C37.118 protocol. This value is a 16-character ASCII string as per the C37.118 standard.
PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: This setting specifies one of the available L90 signal sources for processing in the PMU.
Note that any combination of voltages and currents can be configured as a source. The current channels could be configured as sums of physically connected currents. This facilitates PMU applications in breaker-and-a-half, ring-bus, and
similar arrangements. The PMU feature calculates voltage phasors for actual voltage (A, B, C, and auxiliary) and current (A, B, C, and ground) channels of the source, as well as symmetrical components (0, 1, and 2) of both voltages
and currents. When configuring communication and recording features of the PMU, the user could select from the
above superset the content to be sent out or recorded.
PMU 1 POST-FILTER: This setting specifies amount of post-filtering applied to raw synchrophasor measurements.
The raw measurements are produced at the rate of nominal system frequency using one-cycle data windows. This setting is provided to deal with interfering frequencies and to balance speed and accuracy of synchrophasor measurements for different applications. The following filtering choices are available:
Table 56: POST-FILTER CHOICES
SELECTION
CHARACTERISTIC OF THE FILTER
None
No post-filtering
Symm-3-point
Symmetrical 3-point filter (1 historical point, 1 present point, 1 future point)
Symm-5-point
Symmetrical 5-point filter (2 historical points, 1 present point, 2 future points)
Symm-7-point
Symmetrical 7-point filter (3 historical points, 1 present point, 3 future points)
This setting applies to all channels of the PMU. It is effectively for recording and transmission on all ports configured to
use data of this PMU.
5-84
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
c) CALIBRATION
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(4) PMU 1 CALIBRATION
PMU 1 VA CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VX CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IA CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IB CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IC CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IG CALIBRATION
ANGLE: 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT

ANGLE: 0
MESSAGE
PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT

ANGLE: 0
PMU 1
CALIBRATION
This menu contains user angle calibration data for the phasor measurement unit (PMU). This data is combined with the factory adjustments to shift the phasors for better accuracy.
PMU 1 VA... IG CALIBRATION ANGLE: These settings recognize applications with protection class voltage and current sources, and allow the user to calibrate each channel (four voltages and four currents) individually to offset errors
introduced by VTs, CTs, and cabling. The setting values are effectively added to the measured angles. Therefore, enter
a positive correction of the secondary signal lags the true signal; and negative value if the secondary signal leads the
true signal.
PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE: This setting allows correcting positive- and negative-sequence voltages for vector
groups of power transformers located between the PMU voltage point, and the reference node. This angle is effectively
added to the positive-sequence voltage angle, and subtracted from the negative-sequence voltage angle. Note that:
1.
When this setting is not 0, the phase and sequence voltages will not agree. Unlike sequence voltages, the
phase voltages cannot be corrected in a general case, and therefore are reported as measured.
2.
When receiving synchrophasor date at multiple locations, with possibly different reference nodes, it may be more
beneficial to allow the central locations to perform the compensation of sequence voltages.
3.
This setting applies to PMU data only. The L90 calculates symmetrical voltages independently for protection and
control purposes without applying this correction.
4.
When connected to line-to-line voltages, the PMU calculates symmetrical voltages with the reference to the AG
voltage, and not to the physically connected AB voltage (see the Metering Conventions section in Chapter 6).
PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT ANGLE: This setting allows correcting positive and negative-sequence currents for vector
groups of power transformers located between the PMU current point and the reference node. The setting has the
same meaning for currents as the PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE setting has for voltages. Normally, the two correcting
angles are set identically, except rare applications when the voltage and current measuring points are located at different windings of a power transformer.
GE Multilin
5-85
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
d) PMU COMMUNICATION
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 COMMUNICATION PMU 1 COMM PORT
PMU1 COMM PORT:

None
Range: None, Network, GOOSE
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT PHS-1

PMU 1 V1
Range: available synchrophasor values
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT PHS-1

NM: GE-UR-PMU1-V1
PMU 1
COMM PORT 1
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT PHS-14

PMU 1 V1
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT PHS-14

NM: GE-UR-PMU1-V1
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT A-CH-1:

Off
Range: available FlexAnalog values
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT A-CH-1

NM: AnalogChannel1
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT A-CH-8:

Off
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT A-CH-8

NM: AnalogChannel8
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT D-CH-1:

Off
Range: FlexLogic operands
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT D-CH-1

NM: DigitalChannel1
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT D-CH-1

NORMAL STATE: Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT D-CH-16:

Off
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT D-CH-16

NM: DigitalChannel16
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT D-CH-16

NORMAL STATE: Off
Range: On, Off
This section configures the phasor measurement unit (PMU) communication functions.
PMU1 COMM PORT: This setting specifies the communication port for transmission of the PMU data.
5-86
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
PMU1 PORT PHS-1 to PMU1 PORT PHS-14: These settings specify synchrophasors to be transmitted from the
superset of all synchronized measurements. The available synchrophasor values are tabulated below.
SELECTION
MEANING
Va
First voltage channel, either Va or Vab
Vb
Second voltage channel, either Vb or Vbc
Vc
Third voltage channel, either Vc or Vca
Vx
Fourth voltage channel
Ia
Phase A current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Ib
Phase B current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Ic
Phase C current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Ig
Fourth current channel, physical or summation as per the source settings
V1
Positive-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
V2
Negative-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
V0
Zero-sequence voltage
I1
Positive-sequence current, referenced to Ia
I2
Negative-sequence current, referenced to Ia
I0
Zero-sequence current
These settings allow for optimizing the frame size and maximizing transmission channel usage, depending on a given
application. Select Off to suppress transmission of a given value.
PMU1 PORT PHS-1 NM to PMU1 PORT PHS-14 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the synchrophasor
channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. These names
are typically based on station, bus, or breaker names.
PMU1 PORT A-CH-1 to PMU1 PORT A-CH-8: These settings specify any analog data measured by the relay to be
included as a user-selectable analog channel of the data frame. Up to eight analog channels can be configured to send
any FlexAnalog value from the relay. Examples include active and reactive power, per phase or three-phase power,
power factor, temperature via RTD inputs, and THD. The configured analog values are sampled concurrently with the
synchrophasor instant and sent as 32-bit floating point values.
PMU1 PORT A-CH-1 NM to PMU1 PORT A-CH-8 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.
PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16: These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be
included as a user-selectable digital channel of the data frame. Up to sixteen digital channels can be configured to
send any FlexLogic operand from the relay. The configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant. The values are mapped into a two-byte integer number, with byte 1 LSB corresponding to the digital
channel 1 and byte 2 MSB corresponding to digital channel 16.
PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 NM to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the digital channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.
PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 NORMAL STATE to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16 NORMAL STATE: These settings allow for specifying a normal state for each digital channel. These states are transmitted in configuration frames to the data concentrator.
GE Multilin
5-87
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
e) PMU TRIGGERING OVERVIEW

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1 PMU 1 TRIGGERING
PMU 1
TRIGGERING
PMU 1 USER
TRIGGER
See page 5-88.
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQUENCY
TRIGGER
See page 5-89.
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLTAGE
TRIGGER
See page 5-90.
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURRENT
TRIGGER
See page 5-91.
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER
TRIGGER
See page 5-92.
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt
TRIGGER
See page 5-94.
Each logical phasor measurement unit (PMU) contains five triggering mechanisms to facilitate triggering of the associated
PMU recorder, or cross-triggering of other PMUs of the system. They are:
Overfrequency and underfrequency.
Overvoltage and undervoltage.
Overcurrent.
Overpower.
High rate of change of frequency.
The pre-configured triggers could be augmented with a user-specified condition built freely using programmable logic of the
relay. The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles.
All five triggering functions and the user-definable condition are consolidated (ORed) and connected to the PMU recorder.
Each trigger can be programmed to log its operation into the event recorder, and to signal its operation via targets. The five
triggers drive the STAT bits of the data frame to inform the destination of the synchrophasor data regarding the cause of
trigger. The following convention is adopted to drive bits 11, 3, 2, 1, and 0 of the STAT word.
SETTING
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
bit 0
bit 1
OR
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
OR
bit 3, bit 11
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 1 recorder
bit 2
847004A1.CDR
Figure 531: STAT BITS LOGIC

f) USER TRIGGERING
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER
PMU 1 USER
TRIGGER
PMU1 USER TRIGGER:

Off
The user trigger allows customized triggering logic to be constructed from FlexLogic. The entire triggering logic is
refreshed once every two power system cycles.
5-88
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
g) FREQUENCY TRIGGERING
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 FREQUENCY TRIGGER
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

LOW-FREQ: 49.00 Hz
Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

HIGH-FREQ: 61.00 Hz
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

PKP TIME: 0.10 s
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

DPO TIME: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK:

Off
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

TARGET: Self-Reset
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

EVENTS: Disabled
PMU 1 FREQUENCY
TRIGGER
The trigger responds to the frequency signal of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. The frequency is calculated
from either phase voltages, auxiliary voltage, phase currents and ground current, in this hierarchy, depending on the source
configuration as per L90 standards. This element requires the frequency is above the minimum measurable value. If the
frequency is below this value, such as when the circuit is de-energized, the trigger will drop out.
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ: This setting specifies the low threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The
comparator applies a 0.03 Hz hysteresis.
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ: This setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The
comparator applies a 0.03 Hz hysteresis.
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary
triggering of the recorder.
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

FUNCTION:
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SETTINGS
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:

Enabled = 1
Off = 0
SETTING
PMU 1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
FREQUENCY, f
Off = 0
AND
PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK:
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ:
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME:
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ:
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME:
RUN
0< f < LOW-FREQ

OR
f > HIGH-FREQ
to STAT bits of
the data frame
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
tPKP
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

tDPO
847002A2.CDR
Figure 532: FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-89
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
h) VOLTAGE TRIGGERING
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

LOW-VOLT: 0.800 pu
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

HIGH-VOLT: 1.200 pu
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

PKP TIME: 0.10 s
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

DPO TIME: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIG BLK:

Off
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

TARGET: Self-Reset
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

EVENTS: Disabled
PMU 1 VOLTAGE
TRIGGER
This element responds to abnormal voltage. Separate thresholds are provided for low and high voltage. In terms of signaling its operation, the element does not differentiate between the undervoltage and overvoltage events. The trigger
responds to the phase voltage signal of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. All voltage channels (A, B, and C or
AB, BC, and CA) are processed independently and could trigger the recorder. A minimum voltage supervision of 0.1 pu is
implemented to prevent pickup on a de-energized circuit, similarly to the undervoltage protection element.
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT: This setting specifies the low threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in perunit of the PMU source. 1 pu is a nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The
comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT: This setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in perunit of the PMU source. 1 pu is a nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The
comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
5-90
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTINGS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

FUNCTION:
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
Enabled = 1
PMU 1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
SETTINGS
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT:
Off = 0
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT:

SETTINGS
RUN
VT CONNECTION:
DELTA
VA
VAB
VB
VBC
VC
VCA
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME:
(0.1pu < V < LOW-VOLT) OR

(V > HIGH-VOLT)
(V > HIGH-VOLT)
to STAT bits of
the data frame
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME:

OR
WYE
OR
SETTING
Off = 0
SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
AND
PMU 1 VOLT TRIG BLK:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
tPKP
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

(V > HIGH-VOLT)
tDPO
847005A1.CDR
Figure 533: VOLTAGE TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC

i) CURRENT TRIGGERING
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

PICKUP: 1.800 pu
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

PKP TIME: 0.10 s
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

DPO TIME: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURR TRIG BLK:

Off
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

TARGET: Self-Reset
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

EVENTS: Disabled
PMU 1 CURRENT
TRIGGER
This element responds to elevated current. The trigger responds to the phase current signal of the phasor measurement
unit (PMU) source. All current channel (A, B, and C) are processed independently and could trigger the recorder.
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the overcurrent trigger, in per unit of
the PMU source. A value of 1 pu is a nominal primary current. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
GE Multilin
5-91
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
SETTINGS
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
Enabled = 1
SETTING
PMU 1 CURR TRIG BLK:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
AND
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

FUNCTION:
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:

Off = 0
Off = 0
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP:
PMU 1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME:
RUN
to STAT bits of
the data frame
IA
I > PICKUP
IB
I > PICKUP
IC
I > PICKUP
OR
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME:

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
tPKP
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

tDPO
847000A1.CDR
Figure 534: CURRENT TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC

j) POWER TRIGGERING
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

ACTIVE: 1.250 pu
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

REACTIVE: 1.250 pu
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

APPARENT: 1.250 pu
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

PKP TIME: 0.10 s
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

DPO TIME: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK:

Off
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

TARGET: Self-Reset
MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

EVENTS: Disabled
PMU 1 POWER
TRIGGER
This element responds to abnormal power. Separate thresholds are provided for active, reactive, and apparent powers. In
terms of signaling its operation the element does not differentiate between the three types of power. The trigger responds to
the single-phase and three-phase power signals of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source.
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the active power of the source. For
single-phase power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage,
the VT ratio and the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase
power. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the reactive power of the
source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
5-92
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the apparent power of the
source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to
normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the
triggering condition is asserted).
SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Enabled = 1
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
Off = 0
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
SETTINGS
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE:
PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE:
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT:
SETTING
RUN
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:
ACTIVE POWER, PA
abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP
ACTIVE POWER, PB
ACTIVE POWER, PC
3P ACTIVE POWER, P
abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP
REACTIVE POWER, QB
REACTIVE POWER, QC
3P REACTIVE POWER, Q
abs(Q) > 3*(REACTIVE PICKUP)
APPARENT POWER, SA
S > APPARENT PICKUP
APPARENT POWER, SB
S > APPARENT PICKUP
APPARENT POWER, SC
3P APPARENT POWER, S
SETTINGS
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME:
abs(P) > 3*(ACTIVE PICKUP)
REACTIVE POWER, QA
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
Off = 0
to STAT bits of
the data frame
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME:

OR
SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE:
OR
PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK:
AND
PMU 1 POWER
TRIGGER FUNCTION:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
tPKP
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

tDPO
S > APPARENT PICKUP

S > 3*(APPARENT PICKUP)
847003A1.CDR
Figure 535: POWER TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-93
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
k) DF/DT TRIGGERING
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

RAISE: 0.25 Hz/s
Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

FALL: 0.25 Hz/s
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

PKP TIME: 0.10 s
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

DPO TIME: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK:

Off
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

TARGET: Self-Reset
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

EVENTS: Disabled
PMU 1 df/dt
TRIGGER
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the
raising direction (positive df/dt). The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the falling direction (negative df/dt). The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

FUNCTION:
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SETTINGS
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:

Enabled = 1
PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK:
Off = 0
SETTING
PMU 1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
ROCOF, df/dt
Off = 0
AND
This element responds to frequency rate of change. Separate thresholds are provided for rising and dropping frequency.
The trigger responds to the rate of change of frequency (df/dt) of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source.
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE:
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME:
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL:
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME:
RUN
df/dt > RAISE

OR
df/dt > FALL
to STAT bits of
the data frame
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
tPKP
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER

tDPO
847000A1.CDR
Figure 536: RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC
5-94
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
l) PMU RECORDING
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1 PMU 1 RECORDING
PMU 1 RECORDING
RATE: 10/sec
Range: 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times

per second
MESSAGE
PMU 1 NO OF TIMED
RECORDS: 10
MESSAGE
PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE:

Automatic Overwrite
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
MESSAGE
PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER

POSITION: 10%
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC PHS-1:

PMU 1 V1
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC PHS-1

NM: GE-UR-PMU-V1
Range: 16 character ASCII string
PMU 1
RECORDING
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC PHS-14:

Off
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC PHS-14

NM: GE-UR-PMU-PHS-14
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC A-CH-1:

Off
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC A-CH-1

NM: AnalogChannel1
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC A-CH-8:

Off
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC A-CH-8

NM: AnalogChannel8
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC D-CH-1:

Off
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC D-CH-1

NM: DigitalChannel1
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC D-CH-16:

Off
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC D-CH-16

NM: DigitalChannel16
Each logical phasor measurement unit (PMU) is associated with a recorder. The triggering condition is programmed via the
PMU 1 TRIGGERING menu. The recorder works with polar values using resolution as in the PMU actual values.
GE Multilin
5-95
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
TRIGGER
REC
847709A2.CDR
Figure 537: PMU RECORDING
PMU 1 RECORDING RATE: This setting specifies the recording rate for the record content. Not all recording rates are
applicable to either 50 or 60 Hz systems (for example, recording at 25 phasors a second in a 60 Hz system). The relay
supports decimation by integer number of phasors from the nominal system frequency. If the rate of 25 is selected for
the 60 Hz system, the relay would decimate the rate of 60 phasors a second by round (60 / 25) = 2; that is, it would
record at 60 / 2 = 30 phasors a second.
PMU 1 NO OF TIMED RECORDS: This setting specifies how many timed records are available for a given logical
PMU. The length of each record equals available memory divided by the content size and number of records. The
higher the number of records, the shorter each record. The relay supports a maximum of 128 records.
PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE: This setting specifies what happens when the recorder uses its entire available memory
storage. If set to Automatic Overwrite, the last record is erased to facilitate new recording, when triggered.
If set to Protected, the recorder stops creating new records when the entire memory is used up by the old un-cleared
records. Refer to chapter 7 for more information on clearing PMU records.
The following set of figures illustrate the concept of memory management via the PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE setting.
Total memory for all logical PMUs

Memory available for the logical PMU
Record
1
Record
2
Record
3
Free
Free
memory memory
Other logical PMUs
Record
1
Record
2
Record
3
Record
4
Free
memory
Other logical PMUs
Record
1
Record
2
Record
3
Record
4
Record
5
Other logical PMUs
Record
6
Record
2
Record
3
Record
4
Record
5
Other logical PMUs

847705A1.CDR
Figure 538: AUTOMATIC OVERWRITE MODE

Total memory for all logical PMUs
Memory available for the logical PMU
Record
1
Record
2
Record
3
Free
Free
memory memory
Other logical PMUs
Record
1
Record
2
Record
3
Record
4
Free
memory
Other logical PMUs
Record
1
Record
2
Record
3
Record
4
Record
5
Other logical PMUs
No further recording after all allocated memory is used
847706A1.CDR
Figure 539: PROTECTED MODE
5-96
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER POSITION: This setting specifies the amount of pre-trigger data in percent of the entire
record.
PMU1 PORT 1 PHS-1 to PMU1 PORT 1 PHS-14: These settings specify synchrophasors to be recorded from the
superset of all synchronized measurements as indicated in the following table. These settings allow for optimizing the
record size and content depending on a given application. Select Off to suppress recording of a given value.
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Va
First voltage channel, either Va or Vab
Vb
Second voltage channel, either Vb or Vbc
Vc
Third voltage channel, either Vc or Vca
Vx
Fourth voltage channel
Ia
Phase A current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Ib
Phase B current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Ic
Phase C current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Ig
Fourth current channel, physical or summation as per the source settings
V1
Positive-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
V2
Negative-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
V0
Zero-sequence voltage
I1
Positive-sequence current, referenced to Ia
I2
Negative-sequence current, referenced to Ia
I0
Zero-sequence current
PMU 1 REC PHS-1 NM to PMU 1 REC PHS-14 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the synchrophasor
channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. Typically
these names would be based on station, bus, or breaker names.
PMU 1 REC A-CH-1 to PMU 1 REC A-CH-8: These settings specify analog data measured by the relay to be included
as a user-selectable analog channel of the record. Up to eight analog channels can be configured to record any FlexAnalog value from the relay. Examples include active and reactive power, per phase or three-phase power, power factor, temperature via RTD inputs, and THD. The configured analogs are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor
instant.
PMU 1 REC A-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 REC A-CH-8 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels.
Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.
PMU 1 REC D-CH-1 to PMU 1 REC D-CH-16: These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be
included as a user-selectable digital channel in the record. Up to digital analog channels can be configured to record
any FlexLogic operand from the relay. The configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor
instant.
PMU 1 REC D-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 REC D-CH-16 NM: This setting allows custom naming of the digital channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.
GE Multilin
5-97
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
m) NETWORK CONNECTION
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(4) REPORTING OVER NETWORK
NETWORK REPORTING
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
NETWORK REPORTING
IDCODE: 1
MESSAGE
NETWORK REPORTING
RATE: 10 per sec
Range: 1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per
second
MESSAGE
NETWORK REPORTING
STYLE: Polar
Range: Polar, Rectangular
MESSAGE
NETWORK REPORTING
FORMAT: Integer
Range: Integer, Floating
MESSAGE
NETWORK PDC CONTROL:

Disabled
MESSAGE
NETWORK TCP PORT:

4712
MESSAGE
NETWORK UDP PORT 1:

4713
MESSAGE
NETWORK UDP PORT 2:

4714
REPORTING OVER
NETWORK
The Ethernet connection works simultaneously with other communication means working over the Ethernet and is configured as follows. Up to three clients can be simultaneously supported.
NETWORK REPORTING IDCODE: This setting specifies an IDCODE for the entire port. Individual PMU streams
transmitted over this port are identified via their own IDCODES as per the device settings. This IDCODE is to be used
by the command frame to start or stop transmission, and request configuration or header frames.
NETWORK REPORTING RATE: This setting specifies the reporting rate for the network (Ethernet) port. This value
applies to all PMU streams of the device that are assigned to transmit over this port.
NETWORK REPORTING STYLE: This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors in rectangular (real and
imaginary) or in polar (magnitude and angle) coordinates. This setting complies with bit-0 of the format field of the
C37.118 configuration frame.
NETWORK REPORTING FORMAT: This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors as 16-bit integer or 32-bit
IEEE floating point numbers. This setting complies with bit 1 of the format field of the C37.118 configuration frame.
Note that this setting applies to synchrophasors only the user-selectable FlexAnalog channels are always transmitted as 32-bit floating point numbers.
NETWORK PDC CONTROL: The synchrophasor standard allows for user-defined controls originating at the PDC, to
be executed on the PMU. The control is accomplished via an extended command frame. The relay decodes the first
word of the extended field, EXTFRAME, to drive 16 dedicated FlexLogic operands: PDC NETWORK CNTRL 1 (from the
least significant bit) to PDC NETWORK CNTRL 16 (from the most significant bit). Other words, if any, in the EXTFRAME
are ignored. The operands are asserted for 5 seconds following reception of the command frame. If the new command
frame arrives within the 5 second period, the FlexLogic operands are updated, and the 5 second timer is re-started.
This setting enables or disables the control. When enabled, all 16 operands are active; when disabled all 16 operands
remain reset.
NETWORK TCP PORT: This setting selects the TCP port number that will be used for network reporting.
NETWORK UDP PORT 1: This setting selects the first UDP port that will be used for network reporting.
NETWORK UDP PORT 2: This setting selects the second UDP port that will be used for network reporting.
5-98
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5FLEXLOGIC
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5.5.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC
To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed
parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through
elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic
through FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital
outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process are shown below.
Figure 540: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW

The states of all digital signals used in the L90 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic operands, which are described
later in this section). A digital 1 is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an
element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate a contact output. The state
of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple
scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the element. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and
human operators.
If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic. For example, if it is desired to
have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of
the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic equation. This equation
ANDs the two control inputs to produce a virtual output which is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or
supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the requirement for
auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
GE Multilin
5-99
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use
of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available
internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic).
FlexLogic allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The
operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with
set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as
inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a
seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.
Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e.
flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different
types of operands are listed in the table below.
Table 57: L90 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TYPES
OPERAND TYPE
STATE
EXAMPLE FORMAT
CHARACTERISTICS
[INPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF...]
Contact Input
On
Cont Ip On
Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact

closed).
Off
Cont Ip Off
Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external

contact open).
Contact Output
(type Form-A contact
only)
Current On
Cont Op 1 Ion
Current is flowing through the contact.
Voltage On
Cont Op 1 VOn
Voltage exists across the contact.
Voltage Off
Cont Op 1 VOff
Voltage does not exists across the contact.
Direct Input
On
DIRECT INPUT 1 On
The direct input is presently in the ON state.
Element
(Analog)
Pickup
PHASE TOC1 PKP
The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting

of an element which responds to rising values or below the
pickup setting of an element which responds to falling
values.
Dropout
PHASE TOC1 DPO
This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP

operand.
Operate
PHASE TOC1 OP
The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup

setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or
has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer
has not finished timing.
Block
PHASE TOC1 BLK
The output of the comparator is set to the block function.
Pickup
Dig Element 1 PKP
The input operand is at logic 1.
Dropout
Dig Element 1 DPO
This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP

operand.
Operate
Dig Element 1 OP
The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed

pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and
is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing.
Higher than
Counter 1 HI
The number of pulses counted is above the set number.
Equal to
Counter 1 EQL
The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number.
Lower than
Counter 1 LO
The number of pulses counted is below the set number.
Fixed
On
On
Logic 1
Off
Off
Logic 0
Remote Input
On
REMOTE INPUT 1 On
The remote input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Input
On
Virt Ip 1 On
The virtual input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Output
On
Virt Op 1 On
The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e.

evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual
output results in a "1").
Element
(Digital)
Element
(Digital Counter)
5-100
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table.
Table 58: L90 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 9)
OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
Control pushbutton 1 is being pressed

ELEMENT:
50DD supervision
50DD SV
Disturbance detector has operated
ELEMENT:
87L current
differential
87L DIFF OP
87L DIFF OP A
87L DIFF OP B
87L DIFF OP C
87L DIFF RECVD DTT
87L DIFF RECVD DTT A
87L DIFF RECVD DTT B
87L DIFF RECVD DTT C
87L DIFF KEY DTT
87L DIFF PFLL FAIL
87L DIFF CH ASYM DET
87L DIFF CH1 FAIL
87L DIFF CH2 FAIL
87L DIFF CH1 LOSTPKT
87L DIFF CH2 LOSTPKT
87L DIFF CH1 CRCFAIL
87L DIFF CH2 CRCFAIL
87L DIFF CH1 ID FAIL
87L DIFF CH2 ID FAIL
87L DIFF GPS FAIL
87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM
87L DIFF 2 MAX ASYM
87L DIFF GPS 1 FAIL
87L DIFF GPS 2 FAIL
87L DIFF BLOCKED
87L DIFF PKP G
87L DIFF OP G
At least one phase of current differential is operated

Phase A of current differential has operated
Phase B of current differential has operated
Phase C of current differential has operated
Direct transfer trip has been received
Direct transfer trip phase A has been received
Direct transfer trip phase B has been received
Direct transfer trip phase C has been received
Direct transfer trip is keyed
Phase and frequency lock loop (PFLL) has failed
Channel asymmetry greater than 1.5 ms detected
Channel 1 has failed
Channel 2 has failed
Exceeded maximum lost packet threshold on channel 1
Exceeded maximum lost packet threshold on channel 2
Exceeded maximum CRC error threshold on channel 1
Exceeded maximum CRC error threshold on channel 2
The ID check for a peer L90 on channel 1 has failed
The ID check for a peer L90 on channel 2 has failed
The GPS signal failed or is not configured properly at any terminal
Asymmetry on channel 1 exceeded preset value
Asymmetry on channel 2 exceeded preset value
Change in round trip delay on channel 1 exceeded preset value
Change in round trip delay on channel 2 exceeded preset value
GPS failed at remote terminal 1 (channel 1)
GPS failed at remote terminal 1 (channel 2)
The 87L function is blocked due to communication problems
The ground differential element has picked up
The ground differential element has operated
ELEMENT:
87L differential trip
87L TRIP OP
87L TRIP OP A
87L TRIP OP B
87L TRIP OP C
87L TRIP 1P OP
87L TRIP 3P OP
At least one phase of the trip output element has operated

Phase A of the trip output element has operated
Phase B of the trip output element has operated
Phase C of the trip output element has operated
Single-pole trip is initiated
Three-pole trip is initiated
ELEMENT:
Autoreclose
(1P/3P)
AR ENABLED
AR DISABLED
AR RIP
AR 1-P RIP
AR 3-P/1 RIP
AR 3-P/2 RIP
AR 3-P/3 RIP
AR 3-P/4 RIP
AR LO
AR BKR1 BLK
AR BKR2 BLK
AR CLOSE BKR1
AR CLOSE BKR2
AR FORCE 3-P TRIP
AR SHOT CNT > 0
AR SHOT CNT = 1
AR SHOT CNT = 2
AR SHOT CNT = 3
AR SHOT CNT = 4
AR ZONE 1 EXTENT
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ
AR RESET
Autoreclosure is enabled and ready to perform

Autoreclosure is disabled
Autoreclosure is in reclose-in-progress state
A single-pole reclosure is in progress
A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via dead time 1
Autoreclosure is in lockout state
Reclosure of breaker 1 is blocked
Reclosure of breaker 2 is blocked
Reclose breaker 1 signal
Reclose breaker 2 signal
Force any trip to a three-phase trip
The first CLOSE BKR X signal has been issued
Shot count is equal to 1
The zone 1 distance function must be set to the extended overreach value
The incomplete sequence timer timed out
Autoreclose has been reset either manually or by the reset timer
ELEMENT:
Auxiliary
overvoltage
AUX OV1 PKP

AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 OP
Auxiliary overvoltage element has picked up

Auxiliary overvoltage element has dropped out
Auxiliary overvoltage element has operated
AUX OV2 to AUX OV3
Same set of operands as shown for AUX OV1
GE Multilin
5-101
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
ELEMENT:
Auxiliary
undervoltage
AUX UV1 PKP

AUX UV1 DPO
AUX UV1 OP
Auxiliary undervoltage element has picked up

Auxiliary undervoltage element has dropped out
Auxiliary undervoltage element has operated
AUX UV2 to AUX UV3
Same set of operands as shown for AUX UV1
ELEMENT
Breaker flashover
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP A

BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP B
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP C
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP A
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP B
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP C
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO A
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO B
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO C
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO
Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has picked up

Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has picked up
Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has picked up
Breaker 1 flashover element has picked up
Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has operated
Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has operated
Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has operated
Breaker 1 flashover element has operated
Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has dropped out
Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has dropped out
Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has dropped out
Breaker 1 flashover element has dropped out
BKR 2 FLSHOVR...
Same set of operands as shown for BKR 1 FLSHOVR
ELEMENT:
Breaker arcing
BKR ARC 1 OP
BKR ARC 2 OP
Breaker arcing current 1 has operated

Breaker arcing current 2 has operated
ELEMENT
Breaker failure
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA

BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP
BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP
BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP
BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP
BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP
Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase A (only for 1-pole schemes)

Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase B (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase C (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker failure 1 re-trip 3-phase
Breaker failure 1 timer 1 is operated
Breaker failure 1 trip is operated
BKR FAIL 2...
Same set of operands as shown for BKR FAIL 1
ELEMENT:
Breaker control
BREAKER 1 OFF CMD

BREAKER 1 ON CMD
BREAKER 1 A BAD ST
BREAKER 1 C CLSD
BREAKER 1 C OPEN
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
BREAKER 1 OPEN
BREAKER 1 DISCREP
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
BREAKER 1 TRIP A
BREAKER 1 TRIP B
BREAKER 1 TRIP C
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN
BREAKER 1 OOS
Breaker 1 open command initiated

Breaker 1 close command initiated
Breaker 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one
position to another)
Breaker 1 phase A is closed
Breaker 1 phase A is open
Breaker 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase B is closed
Breaker 1 phase B is open
Breaker 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase C is closed
Breaker 1 phase C is open
Breaker 1 bad status is detected on any pole
Breaker 1 is closed
Breaker 1 is open
Breaker 1 has discrepancy
Breaker 1 trouble alarm
Breaker 1 manual close
Breaker 1 trip phase A command
Breaker 1 trip phase B command
Breaker 1 trip phase C command
At least one pole of breaker 1 is open
Only one pole of breaker 1 is open
Breaker 1 is out of service
BREAKER 1 A INTERM
BREAKER 1 A CLSD
BREAKER 1 A OPEN
BREAKER 1 B BAD ST
BREAKER 1 A INTERM
BREAKER 1 B CLSD
BREAKER 1 B OPEN
BREAKER 1 C BAD ST
BREAKER 1 A INTERM
BREAKER 2...
Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1
ELEMENT:
Continuous monitor
CONT MONITOR PKP

CONT MONITOR OP
Continuous monitor has picked up

Continuous monitor has operated
ELEMENT:
CT fail
CT FAIL PKP
CT FAIL OP
CT fail has picked up

CT fail has dropped out
ELEMENT:
Digital counters
Counter 1 HI
Counter 1 EQL
Counter 1 LO
Digital counter 1 output is more than comparison value

Digital counter 1 output is equal to comparison value
Digital counter 1 output is less than comparison value
Counter 2 to Counter 8
Same set of operands as shown for Counter 1
5-102
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC

OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
ELEMENT:
Digital elements
Dig Element 1 PKP

Dig Element 1 OP
Dig Element 1 DPO
Digital Element 1 is picked up

Digital Element 1 is operated
Digital Element 1 is dropped out
Dig Element 2 to Dig Element 48
Same set of operands as shown for Dig Element 1
ELEMENT:
FlexElements
FxE 1 PKP
FxE 1 OP
FxE 1 DPO
FlexElement 1 has picked up

FlexElement 1 has operated
FlexElement 1 has dropped out
FxE 2 to FxE 8
Same set of operands as shown for FxE 1
ELEMENT:
Ground distance
GND DIST Z1 PKP

GND DIST Z1 OP
GND DIST Z1 OP A
GND DIST Z1 OP B
GND DIST Z1 OP C
GND DIST Z1 PKP A
GND DIST Z1 PKP B
GND DIST Z1 PKP C
GND DIST Z1 SUPN IN
GND DIST Z1 DPO A
GND DIST Z1 DPO B
GND DIST Z1 DPO C
GND DIST Z2 DIR SUPN
Ground distance zone 1 has picked up

Ground distance zone 1 has operated
Ground distance zone 1 phase A has operated
Ground distance zone 1 phase B has operated
Ground distance zone 1 phase C has operated
Ground distance zone 1 phase A has picked up
Ground distance zone 1 phase B has picked up
Ground distance zone 1 phase C has picked up
Ground distance zone 1 neutral is supervising
Ground distance zone 1 phase A has dropped out
Ground distance zone 1 phase B has dropped out
Ground distance zone 1 phase C has dropped out
Ground distance zone 2 directional is supervising
GND DIST Z2 to Z3
Same set of operands as shown for GND DIST Z1
ELEMENT:
Ground
instantaneous
overcurrent
GROUND IOC1 PKP

GROUND IOC1 OP
GROUND IOC1 DPO
Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up

Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
GROUND IOC2
Same set of operands as shown for GROUND IOC 1
ELEMENT:
Ground time
overcurrent
GROUND TOC1 PKP

GROUND TOC1 OP
GROUND TOC1 DPO
Ground time overcurrent 1 has picked up

Ground time overcurrent 1 has operated
Ground time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
GROUND TOC2
Same set of operands as shown for GROUND TOC1
LATCH 1 ON
LATCH 1 OFF
Non-volatile latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1)

Non-volatile latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0)
ELEMENT
Non-volatile latches
LATCH 2 to LATCH 16
Same set of operands as shown for LATCH 1
ELEMENT:
Line pickup
LINE PICKUP OP
LINE PICKUP PKP
LINE PICKUP DPO
LINE PICKUP I<A
LINE PICKUP I<B
LINE PICKUP I<C
LINE PICKUP UV PKP
LINE PICKUP LEO PKP
LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP
Line pickup has operated

Line pickup has picked up
Line pickup has dropped out
Line pickup detected phase A current below 5% of nominal
Line pickup detected phase B current below 5% of nominal
Line pickup detected phase C current below 5% of nominal
Line pickup undervoltage has picked up
Line pickup line end open has picked up
Line pickup operated from overreaching zone 2 when reclosing the line
(zone 1 extension functionality)
ELEMENT:
Load encroachment
LOAD ENCHR PKP

LOAD ENCHR OP
LOAD ENCHR DPO
Load encroachment has picked up

Load encroachment has operated
Load encroachment has dropped out
ELEMENT:
Negative-sequence
directional
overcurrent
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD

NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV
NEG SEQ DIR OC2 FWD
NEG SEQ DIR OC2 REV
Negative-sequence directional overcurrent 1 forward has operated

Negative-sequence directional overcurrent 1 reverse has operated
Negative-sequence directional overcurrent 2 forward has operated
Negative-sequence directional overcurrent 2 reverse has operated
ELEMENT:
Negative-sequence
instantaneous
overcurrent
NEG SEQ IOC1 PKP

NEG SEQ IOC1 OP
NEG SEQ IOC1 DPO
Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up

Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
NEG SEQ IOC2
Same set of operands as shown for NEG SEQ IOC1
ELEMENT:
Negative-sequence
time overcurrent
NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP

NEG SEQ TOC1 OP
NEG SEQ TOC1 DPO
Negative-sequence time overcurrent 1 has picked up

Negative-sequence time overcurrent 1 has operated
Negative-sequence time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
NEG SEQ TOC2
Same set of operands as shown for NEG SEQ TOC1
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP

NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up

Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
NEUTRAL IOC2
Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL IOC1
ELEMENT:
Neutral
instantaneous
overcurrent
GE Multilin
5-103
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS

OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
ELEMENT:
Neutral overvoltage
NEUTRAL OV1 PKP

NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 OP
Neutral overvoltage element 1 has picked up

Neutral overvoltage element 1 has dropped out
Neutral overvoltage element 1 has operated
ELEMENT:
Neutral time
overcurrent
NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP

NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO
Neutral time overcurrent 1 has picked up

Neutral time overcurrent 1 has operated
Neutral time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
NEUTRAL TOC2
Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1
ELEMENT:
Neutral directional
overcurrent
NTRL DIR OC1 FWD

NTRL DIR OC1 REV
Neutral directional overcurrent 1 forward has operated

Neutral directional overcurrent 1 reverse has operated
NTRL DIR OC2
Same set of operands as shown for NTRL DIR OC1
ELEMENT:
Open pole detector
OPEN POLE OP A
OPEN POLE OP B
OPEN POLE OP C
OPEN POLE BKR A OP
OPEN POLE BLK AB

OPEN POLE BLK BC
OPEN POLE BLK CA
OPEN POLE REM OP A
OPEN POLE REM OP B
OPEN POLE REM OP C
OPEN POLE OP
OPEN POLE I< A
OPEN POLE I< B
OPEN POLE I< C
Open pole condition is detected in phase A

Open pole condition is detected in phase B
Open pole condition is detected in phase C
Based on the breaker(s) auxiliary contacts, an open pole condition is
detected on phase A
detected on phase B
detected on phase C
Blocking signal for neutral, ground, and negative-sequence overcurrent
element is established
Blocking signal for the AB phase distance elements is established
Blocking signal for the BC phase distance elements is established
Blocking signal for the CA phase distance elements is established
Remote open pole condition detected in phase A
Remote open pole condition detected in phase B
Remote open pole condition detected in phase C
Open pole detector is operated
Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase A
Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase B
Open pole undercurrent condition is detected in phase C
ELEMENT:
Synchrophasor
phasor data
concentrator
PDC NETWORK CNTRL 1

PDC NETWORK CNTRL 2
PDC NETWORK CNTRL 16
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 1 as received via the network
ELEMENT:
Phase directional
overcurrent
PH DIR1 BLK A
PH DIR1 BLK B
PH DIR1 BLK C
PH DIR1 BLK
Phase A directional 1 block

Phase B directional 1 block
Phase C directional 1 block
Phase directional 1 block
OPEN POLE BKR B OP

OPEN POLE BKR C OP
OPEN POLE BLK N
ELEMENT:
Phase distance
ELEMENT:
Phase
instantaneous
overcurrent
5-104
PH DIR2
Same set of operands as shown for PH DIR1
PH DIST Z1 PKP
PH DIST Z1 OP
PH DIST Z1 OP AB
PH DIST Z1 OP BC
PH DIST Z1 OP CA
PH DIST Z1 PKP AB
PH DIST Z1 PKP BC
PH DIST Z1 PKP CA
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC
PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA
PH DIST Z1 DPO AB
PH DIST Z1 DPO BC
PH DIST Z1 DPO CA
Phase distance zone 1 has picked up

Phase distance zone 1 has operated
Phase distance zone 1 phase AB has operated
Phase distance zone 1 phase BC has operated
Phase distance zone 1 phase CA has operated
Phase distance zone 1 phase AB has picked up
Phase distance zone 1 phase BC has picked up
Phase distance zone 1 phase CA has picked up
Phase distance zone 1 phase AB IOC is supervising
Phase distance zone 1 phase BC IOC is supervising
Phase distance zone 1 phase CA IOC is supervising
Phase distance zone 1 phase AB has dropped out
Phase distance zone 1 phase BC has dropped out
Phase distance zone 1 phase CA has dropped out
PH DIST Z2 to Z3
Same set of operands as shown for PH DIST Z1
PHASE IOC1 PKP

PHASE IOC1 OP
PHASE IOC1 DPO
PHASE IOC1 PKP A
PHASE IOC1 PKP B
PHASE IOC1 PKP C
PHASE IOC1 OP A
PHASE IOC1 OP B
PHASE IOC1 OP C
PHASE IOC1 DPO A
PHASE IOC1 DPO B
PHASE IOC1 DPO C
At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up

At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
All phases of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 have dropped out
Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC2
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC

OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
ELEMENT:
Phase overvoltage
PHASE OV1 PKP

PHASE OV1 OP
PHASE OV1 DPO
PHASE OV1 PKP A
PHASE OV1 PKP B
PHASE OV1 PKP C
PHASE OV1 OP A
PHASE OV1 OP B
PHASE OV1 OP C
PHASE OV1 DPO A
PHASE OV1 DPO B
PHASE OV1 DPO C
At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has picked up

At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has operated
All phases of overvoltage 1 have dropped out
Phase A of overvoltage 1 has picked up
Phase B of overvoltage 1 has picked up
Phase C of overvoltage 1 has picked up
Phase A of overvoltage 1 has operated
Phase B of overvoltage 1 has operated
Phase C of overvoltage 1 has operated
Phase A of overvoltage 1 has dropped out
Phase B of overvoltage 1 has dropped out
Phase C of overvoltage 1 has dropped out
ELEMENT
Phase select
PHASE SELECT AG
PHASE SELECT BG
PHASE SELECT CG
PHASE SELECT SLG
PHASE SELECT AB
PHASE SELECT BC
PHASE SELECT CA
PHASE SELECT ABG
PHASE SELECT BCG
PHASE SELECT CAG
PHASE SELECT 3P
PHASE SELECT VOID
Phase A to ground fault is detected.

Phase B to ground fault is detected.
Phase C to ground fault is detected.
Single line to ground fault is detected.
Phase A to B fault is detected.
Phase B to C fault is detected.
Phase C to A fault is detected.
Phase A to B to ground fault is detected.
Phase B to C to ground fault is detected.
Phase C to A to ground fault is detected.
Three-phase symmetrical fault is detected.
Multi-phase fault is detected
Fault type cannot be detected
ELEMENT:
Phase time
overcurrent
PHASE TOC1 PKP

PHASE TOC1 OP
PHASE TOC1 DPO
PHASE TOC1 PKP A
PHASE TOC1 PKP B
PHASE TOC1 PKP C
PHASE TOC1 OP A
PHASE TOC1 OP B
PHASE TOC1 OP C
PHASE TOC1 DPO A
PHASE TOC1 DPO B
PHASE TOC1 DPO C
At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up

At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
All phases of phase time overcurrent 1 have dropped out
Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC2
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1
PHASE UV1 PKP

PHASE UV1 OP
PHASE UV1 DPO
PHASE UV1 PKP A
PHASE UV1 PKP B
PHASE UV1 PKP C
PHASE UV1 OP A
PHASE UV1 OP B
PHASE UV1 OP C
PHASE UV1 DPO A
PHASE UV1 DPO B
PHASE UV1 DPO C
At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up

At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
All phases of phase undervoltage 1 have dropped out
Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE UV2
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1
ELEMENT:
Synchrophasor
phasor
measurement unit
(PMU)
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
Overcurrent trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated

Abnormal frequency trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated
Overpower trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated
Rate of change of frequency trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has
operated
Abnormal voltage trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated
Phasor measurement unit 1 triggered; no events or targets are generated by
this operand
ELEMENT:
Synchrophasor oneshot
PMU ONE-SHOT EXPIRED
ELEMENT:
Phase undervoltage
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU ONE-SHOT OP
PMU ONE-SHOT PENDING
ELEMENT:
POTT
(Permissive
overreach transfer
trip)
GE Multilin
POTT OP
POTT TX
Indicates the one-shot operation has been executed, and the present time is
at least 30 seconds past the scheduled one-shot time
Indicates the one-shot operation and remains asserted for 30 seconds
afterwards
Indicates the one-shot operation is pending; that is, the present time is before
the scheduled one-shot time
Permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated
Permissive signal sent
5-105
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS

OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
ELEMENT:
Power swing detect
POWER SWING OUTER

POWER SWING MIDDLE
POWER SWING INNER
POWER SWING BLOCK
POWER SWING TMR1 PKP
POWER SWING TRIP
POWER SWING 50DD
POWER SWING INCOMING
POWER SWING OUTGOING
POWER SWING UN/BLOCK
Positive-sequence impedance in outer characteristic

Positive-sequence impedance in middle characteristic
Positive-sequence impedance in inner characteristic
Power swing blocking element operated
Power swing timer 1 picked up
Out-of-step tripping operated
The power swing element detected a disturbance other than power swing
An unstable power swing has been detected (incoming locus)
An unstable power swing has been detected (outgoing locus)
Asserted when a fault occurs after the power swing blocking condition has
been established
ELEMENT:
Selector switch
SELECTOR 1 POS Y
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
Selector switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands)

First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control
input but not acknowledged
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but
not acknowledged
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged
Position of selector switch 1 is undetermined or restored from memory when
the relay powers up and synchronizes to the three-bit input
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM

SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
SELECTOR 2
Same set of operands as shown above for SELECTOR 1
ELEMENT:
Setting group
SETTING GROUP ACT 1

SETTING GROUP ACT 2
SETTING GROUP ACT 3
SETTING GROUP ACT 4
SETTING GROUP ACT 5
SETTING GROUP ACT 6
Setting group 1 is active

ELEMENT:
Disturbance
detector
SRC1 50DD OP
SRC2 50DD OP
SRC3 50DD OP
SRC4 50DD OP
Source 1 disturbance detector has operated

ELEMENT:
VTFF (Voltage
transformer fuse
failure)
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP

SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS
Source 1 VT fuse failure detector has operated

Source 1 VT fuse failure detector has dropped out
Source 1 has lost voltage signals (V2 below 15% AND V1 below 5%
of nominal)
SRC2 VT FUSE FAIL to

SRC4 VT FUSE FAIL
Same set of operands as shown for SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL
ELEMENT:
Stub bus
STUB BUS OP
Stub bus is operated
ELEMENT:
Disconnect switch
SWITCH 1 OFF CMD

SWITCH 1 ON CMD
SWITCH 1 A BAD ST
SWITCH 1 C CLSD
SWITCH 1 C OPEN
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS
SWITCH 1 CLOSED
SWITCH 1 OPEN
SWITCH 1 DISCREP
SWITCH 1 TROUBLE
Disconnect switch 1 open command initiated

Disconnect switch 1 close command initiated
Disconnect switch 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between
the 52/a and 52/b contacts)
Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from
one position to another)
Disconnect switch 1 phase A is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase A is open
Disconnect switch 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between
Disconnect switch 1 phase B is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase B is open
Disconnect switch 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between
Disconnect switch 1 phase C is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase C is open
Disconnect switch 1 bad status is detected on any pole
Disconnect switch 1 is closed
Disconnect switch 1 is open
Disconnect switch 1 has discrepancy
Disconnect switch 1 trouble alarm
SWITCH 2...
Same set of operands as shown for SWITCH 1
SWITCH 1 A INTERM
SWITCH 1 A CLSD
SWITCH 1 A OPEN
SWITCH 1 B BAD ST
SWITCH 1 A INTERM
SWITCH 1 B CLSD
SWITCH 1 B OPEN
SWITCH 1 C BAD ST
SWITCH 1 A INTERM
5-106
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC

OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
ELEMENT:
Synchrocheck
SYNC 1 DEAD S OP
SYNC 1 DEAD S DPO
SYNC 1 SYNC OP
SYNC 1 SYNC DPO
SYNC 1 CLS OP
SYNC 1 CLS DPO
SYNC 1 V1 ABOVE MIN
SYNC 1 V1 BELOW MAX
SYNC 1 V2 ABOVE MIN
SYNC 1 V2 BELOW MAX
Synchrocheck 1 dead source has operated

Synchrocheck 1 dead source has dropped out
Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has operated
Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has dropped out
Synchrocheck 1 close has operated
Synchrocheck 1 close has dropped out
Synchrocheck 1 V1 is above the minimum live voltage
Synchrocheck 1 V1 is below the maximum dead voltage
Synchrocheck 1 V2 is above the minimum live voltage
Synchrocheck 1 V2 is below the maximum dead voltage
SYNC 2
Same set of operands as shown for SYNC 1
ELEMENT
Trip output
TRIP 3-POLE
TRIP 1-POLE
TRIP PHASE A
TRIP PHASE B
TRIP PHASE C
TRIP AR INIT 3-POLE
TRIP FORCE 3-POLE
TRIP OUTPUT OP
TRIP Z2PH TMR INIT
TRIP Z2GR TMR INIT
Trip all three breaker poles

A single-pole trip-and-reclose operation is initiated
Trip breaker pole A, initiate phase A breaker fail and reclose
Trip breaker pole B, initiate phase B breaker fail and reclose
Trip breaker pole C, initiate phase C breaker fail and reclose
Initiate a three-pole reclose
Three-pole trip must be initiated
Any trip is initiated by the trip output
Phase distance zone 2 timer is initiated by the trip output
Ground distance zone 2 timer is initiated by the trip output
ELEMENT
Trip bus
TRIP BUS 1 PKP

TRIP BUS 1 OP
Asserted when the trip bus 1 element picks up.

Asserted when the trip bus 1 element operates.
TRIP BUS 2...
Same set of operands as shown for TRIP BUS 1
ELEMENT:
Wattmetric zerosequence
directional
WATTMETRIC 1 PKP
WATTMETRIC 1 OP
Wattmetric directional element 1 has picked up

Wattmetric directional element 1 has operated
WATTMETRIC 2...
Same set of operands as per WATTMETRIC 1 above
FIXED OPERANDS
Off
Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list;

used as Disable by other features.
On
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact inputs
Cont Ip 1
Cont Ip 2
Cont Ip 1
Cont Ip 2
Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.

On
On
(will not appear unless ordered)


Off
Off
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact outputs,
current
(from detector on
form-A output only)
Cont Op 1
Cont Op 2
IOn
IOn

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact outputs,
voltage
(from detector on
form-A output only)
Cont Op 1
Cont Op 2
VOn
VOn

Cont Op 1
Cont Op 2
VOff
VOff

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Direct input
Direct I/P 1-1 On
Direct I/P 1-8 On
(appears only when an inter-relay communications card is used)
(appears only when inter-relay communications card is used)
Direct I/P 2-1 On
Direct I/P 2-8 On
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Remote doublepoint status inputs
RemDPS Ip 1 BAD
RemDPS Ip 1 INTERM
RemDPS Ip 1 OFF
RemDPS Ip 1 ON
Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the bad state.
Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the intermediate
state.
Asserted while the remote double-point status input is off.
Asserted while the remote double-point status input is on.
REMDPS Ip 2...
Same set of operands as per REMDPS 1 above
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Remote inputs
REMOTE INPUT 1 On
REMOTE INPUT 32 On
Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual inputs
Virt Ip 1 On
Virt Ip 64 On
GE Multilin
5-107
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS

OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual outputs
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 96 On
LED INDICATORS:
Fixed front panel
LEDs
LED IN SERVICE
LED TROUBLE
LED TEST MODE
LED TRIP
LED ALARM
LED PICKUP
LED VOLTAGE
LED CURRENT
LED FREQUENCY
LED OTHER
LED PHASE A
LED PHASE B
LED PHASE C
LED NEUTRAL/GROUND
Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel PICKUP LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel VOLTAGE LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel CURRENT LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel FREQUENCY LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel OTHER LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel PHASE A LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel PHASE B LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel PHASE C LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel NEUTRAL/GROUND LED is on.
LED INDICATORS:
LED test
An LED test has been initiated and has not finished.
LED INDICATORS:
User-programmable
LEDs
LED USER 1
Asserted when user-programmable LED 1 is on.
LED USER 2 to 48
The operand above is available for user-programmable LEDs 2 through 48.
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LOC SETG OFF

ACCESS LOC SETG ON
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF
ACCESS LOC CMND ON
ACCESS REM SETG OFF
ACCESS REM SETG ON
ACCESS REM CMND OFF
ACCESS REM CMND ON
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
Asserted when local setting access is disabled.

Asserted when local setting access is enabled.
Asserted when local command access is disabled.
Asserted when local command access is enabled.
Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.
Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.
Asserted when remote command access is disabled.
Asserted when remote command access is enabled.
Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password protected
level of the L90.
REMOTE DEVICES
REMOTE DEVICE 1 On
REMOTE DEVICE 16 On
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off
REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off
RESET OP
RESET OP (COMMS)
RESET OP (OPERAND)
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON)
Reset command is operated (set by all three operands below).

Communications source of the reset command.
Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu) source
of the reset command.
Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command.
ANY MAJOR ERROR

ANY MINOR ERROR
ANY SELF-TESTS
BATTERY FAIL
DIRECT DEVICE OFF
DIRECT RING BREAK
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN
IRIG-B FAILURE
LATCHING OUT ERROR
MAINTENANCE ALERT
PORT 1 OFFLINE
PORT 2 OFFLINE
PORT 3 OFFLINE
PORT 4 OFFLINE
PORT 5 OFFLINE
PORT 6 OFFLINE
PRI ETHERNET FAIL
PROCESS BUS FAILURE
REMOTE DEVICE OFF
RRTD COMM FAIL
SEC ETHERNET FAIL
SNTP FAILURE
SYSTEM EXCEPTION
TEMP MONITOR
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)

Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)
Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
RESETTING
SELFDIAGNOSTICS
5-108
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC

OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
TEMPERATURE
MONITOR
TEMP MONITOR
Asserted while the ambient temperature is greater than the maximum

operating temperature (80C)
USERPROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
ANY PB ON
Pushbutton number 1 is in the On position

Pushbutton number 1 is in the Off position
Any of twelve pushbuttons is in the On position
PUSHBUTTON 2 to 12
Same set of operands as PUSHBUTTON 1
Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID
(identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name
or ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in
the FlexLogic operands table above.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed in the FlexLogic operators table.
Table 59: FLEXLOGIC GATE CHARACTERISTICS
GATES
NUMBER OF INPUTS
NOT
OUTPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF...

input is 0
OR
2 to 16
any input is 1
AND
2 to 16
all inputs are 1

all inputs are 0
NOR
2 to 16
NAND
2 to 16
any input is 0
XOR
only one input is 1
GE Multilin
5-109
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
Table 510: FLEXLOGIC OPERATORS

TYPE
SYNTAX
DESCRIPTION
Editor
INSERT
Insert a parameter in an equation list.
DELETE
Delete a parameter from an equation list.
End
END
The first END encountered signifies the last entry in

the list of processed FlexLogic parameters.
One-shot
Logic
gate
POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge.
NOTES
NEGATIVE ONE
SHOT
One shot that responds to a negative going edge.
DUAL ONE SHOT
One shot that responds to both the positive and

negative going edges.
A one shot refers to a single input gate

that generates a pulse in response to an
edge on the input. The output from a one
shot is True (positive) for only one pass
through the FlexLogic equation. There is
a maximum of 64 one shots.
NOT
Logical NOT
Operates on the previous parameter.
OR(2)
OR(16)
2 input OR gate
16 input OR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
AND(2)
AND(16)
2 input AND gate
16 input AND gate
NOR(2)
NOR(16)
2 input NOR gate
16 input NOR gate
NAND(2)
NAND(16)
2 input NAND gate
16 input NAND gate
XOR(2)
2 input Exclusive OR gate
LATCH (S,R)
Latch (set, reset): reset-dominant
The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is

the reset input. The parameter preceding
the reset input is the set input.
Timer
TIMER 1
TIMER 32
Timer set with FlexLogic timer 1 settings.
Timer set with FlexLogic timer 32 settings.
The timer is started by the preceding

parameter. The output of the timer is
TIMER #.
Assign
virtual
output
= Virt Op 1
= Virt Op 96
Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual

output 1.
Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual

output 96.
The virtual output is set by the preceding

parameter
5.5.2 FLEXLOGIC RULES

When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1.
Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.
2.
Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as
an input to two or more operators.
3.
Assigning the output of an operator to a virtual output terminates the equation.
4.
A timer operator (for example, "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (for example, " = Virt Op 1") may only be used
once. If this rule is broken, a syntax error will be declared.
5.5.3 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION
Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.
NOTE
FlexLogic provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the
set input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; that is, they reset on the re-application of control
power.
When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting
value is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic during
testing, for example, it is suggested to power the unit down and then back up.
5-110
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5.5.4 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE
This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite important as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure
below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation.
In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce virtual outputs 1 and 2, and is only
a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic, it is important to make a note of each virtual output used
a virtual output designation (1 to 96) can only be properly assigned once.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
State=ON
Set
LATCH
OR #1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
State=ON
Reset
Timer 2
XOR
OR #2
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
State=Pickup
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
Time Delay
on Dropout
Operate Output
Relay H1
(200 ms)
Timer 1
Time Delay
on Pickup
AND
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
827025A2.vsd
Figure 541: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME

1.
Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic operators. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs
to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits, which is unlikely but possible. If
the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25
inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs
from these two gates to AND(2).
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator
is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a virtual output.
For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must
therefore be made a virtual output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output must
also be assigned to a virtual output as virtual output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section to operate relay H1 (that is, contact output H1).
Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic equations with outputs of virtual output 3 and
virtual output 4 as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
State=ON
Set
LATCH
OR #1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
State=ON
Reset
Timer 2
XOR
OR #2
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
State=Pickup
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
Time Delay
on Dropout
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
(200 ms)
Timer 1
AND
Time Delay
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c

State=Closed
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827026A2.VSD
Figure 542: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
GE Multilin
5-111
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
2.
5 SETTINGS
Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce virtual output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the
virtual output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these
operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific virtual output). The logic for
virtual output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
AND(2)
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
CONTACT INPUT H1c

State=Closed
827027A2.VSD
Figure 543: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

3.
Prepare a logic diagram for virtual output 4, replacing the logic ahead of virtual output 3 with a symbol identified as virtual output 3, as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
State=ON
Set
LATCH
OR #1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
State=ON
Reset
Timer 2
XOR
OR #2
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
State=Pickup
Time Delay
on Dropout
VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 4
(200 ms)
Timer 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
State=ON
Time Delay
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c

State=Closed
827028A2.VSD
Figure 544: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

4.
Program the FlexLogic equation for virtual output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic parameters.
The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the
output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to
list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99,
and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic, it is suggested that
a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.
01
02
03
04
05
.....
97
98
99
827029A1.VSD
Figure 545: FLEXLOGIC WORKSHEET

5.
Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:

99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter is
therefore "= Virt Op 3."
5-112
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2input AND so the parameter is AND(2). Note that FlexLogic rules require that the number of inputs to most
types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the
two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.
97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is
NOT. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next.
96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be
set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact.
The operand is therefore Cont Ip H1c On.
95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2.
This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".
Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for virtual output 3:
[95]
[96]
[97]
[98]
[99]
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
= Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 3 diagram as a check.
95
96
97
98
99
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
NOT
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
AND (2)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
=Virt Op 3
AND
VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 3
827030A2.VSD
Figure 546: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

6.
Repeating the process described for virtual output 3, select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4.
99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 4 which is parameter = Virt Op 4".
98: The operator preceding the output is timer 2, which is operand TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the
timer are established in the timer programming section.
97: The operator preceding timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter OR(3).
96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand Cont Ip H1c On.
95: The center input to OR #2 is operand TIMER 1".
94: The input to timer 1 is operand Virt Op 3 On".
93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand LATCH (S,R).
92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which
is parameter OR(4).
91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 3 On".
90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand XOR(2).
89: The lower input to the XOR is operand DIG ELEM 1 PKP.
88: The upper input to the XOR is operand Virt Ip 1 On".
87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 2 On".
86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 1 On".
85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand Virt Op 4 On".
GE Multilin
5-113
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
The equation for virtual output 4 is:

[85]
[86]
[87]
[88]
[89]
[90]
[91]
[92]
[93]
[94]
[95]
[96]
[97]
[98]
[99]
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 4 diagram as a check.
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 4 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 1 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 2 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Ip 1 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
XOR
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 3 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
OR (4)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
LATCH (S,R)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 3 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
TIMER 1
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
OR (3)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
TIMER 2
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
=Virt Op 4
Set
LATCH
XOR
OR
Reset
OR
T2
VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 4
T1
827031A2.VSD
Figure 547: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

7.
Now write the complete FlexLogic expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the
equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases
where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause
problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by
sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service.
In the following equation, virtual output 3 is used as an input to both latch 1 and timer 1 as arranged in the order shown
below:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
5-114
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
= Virt Op 3
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
END
In the expression above, the virtual output 4 input to the four-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a
form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.
8.
The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past.
Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic equations. The equations
will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator.
The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and
the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5.5.5 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
FLEXLOGIC
EQUATION EDITOR
MESSAGE
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY
END
1:
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY
END
2:
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512:

END
MESSAGE
There are 512 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled" Element is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated state flag will never be set to 1. The +/ key may be used when
editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
5.5.6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)
TIMER 1
TYPE: millisecond
Range: millisecond, second, minute
MESSAGE
TIMER 1 PICKUP
DELAY:
0
MESSAGE
TIMER 1 DROPOUT
DELAY:
0
FLEXLOGIC
TIMER 1
There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic equations.
TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit.
TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0".
GE Multilin
5-115
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".
5.5.7 FLEXELEMENTS
PATH: SETTING FLEXLOGIC FLEXELEMENTS FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME:
FxE1
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:
Off
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:
Off
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE: Signed
Range: Signed, Absolute
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE: Level
Range: Level, Delta
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION: Over
Range: Over, Under
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt
UNIT: milliseconds
Range: milliseconds, seconds, minutes
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
20
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
Off
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
FLEXELEMENT 1
A FlexElement is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a
net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed
number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice.
FlexElements run every half power cycle (every four protection passes).
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period
of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as
per user's choice.
5-116
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
SETTING
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION:
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE:
Enabled = 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE:
Disabled = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION:
SETTING
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP:
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
AND
Off = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
HYSTERESIS:
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT:
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
DELAY:
RUN
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
DELAY:
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:
Actual Value
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:
Actual Value
tPKP
+
-
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FxE 1 OP
tRST
FxE 1 DPO
FxE 1 PKP
ACTUAL VALUE
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842004A3.CDR
Figure 548: FLEXELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC

The FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands.
This FLEXELEMENT 1 IN setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the
element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not
operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build
the effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to Signed. The element responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to Absolute. Sample applications for the
Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both
directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of
decreases.
The element responds directly to its operating signal as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 IN and FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Level. The element responds to the
rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Delta. In this case the FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The
following figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS settings.
GE Multilin
5-117
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842705A1.CDR
Figure 549: FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS

In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra characteristics as shown in the figure below.
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842706A2.CDR
Figure 550: FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE SETTING
5-118
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set
to Over, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to Under, the
element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal
and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexElement can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is entered in per-unit values using the following definitions of the base units:
Table 511: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS
87L SIGNALS
(Local IA Mag, IB, and IC)
(Diff Curr IA Mag, IB, and IC)
(Terminal 1 IA Mag, IB, and IC)
(Terminal 2 IA Mag, IB and IC)
IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs

(CT primary for source currents, and 87L source primary current for line differential currents)
87L SIGNALS
(Op Square Curr IA, IB, and IC)
(Rest Square Curr IA, IB, and IC)
BASE = Squared CT secondary of the 87L source
BREAKER ARCING AMPS

(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C)
BASE = 2000 kA2 cycle
dcmA
BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and IN inputs.
FREQUENCY
fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE
BASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR
PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs
BASE = 100C
SOURCE CURRENT
IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs
SOURCE ENERGY
(Positive and Negative Watthours,
Positive and Negative Varhours)
EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
SOURCE POWER
PBASE = maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE
VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs
SYNCHROCHECK
(Max Delta Volts)
VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and IN inputs
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting defines the pickupdropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the
hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement direction, pickup, and hysteresis diagram.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT setting specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT setting specifies duration of the time interval for the
rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta.
This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting
specifies the reset delay of the element.
GE Multilin
5-119
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
5.5.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC NON-VOLATILE LATCHES LATCH 1(16)
LATCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 TYPE:
Reset Dominant
Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 SET:
Off
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 RESET:
Off
MESSAGE
LATCH 1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
LATCH 1
EVENTS: Disabled
LATCH 1
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay
is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as
Autorecloser, until a deliberate interface action resets the latch. The settings element operation is described below:
LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.
LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operands 'sets' Latch 1.
LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operand 'resets' Latch 1.

SETTING
SETTING
LATCH 1 FUNCTION:
LATCH 1 TYPE:
Enabled=1
RUN
LATCH N
TYPE
LATCH N
SET
LATCH N
RESET
LATCH N
ON
LATCH N
OFF
Reset
Dominant
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Previous
State
Previous
State
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
LATCH 1 SET:
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Off=0
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Previous
State
Previous
State
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Set
Dominant
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SET
LATCH 1 ON
LATCH 1 OFF
SETTING
LATCH 1 RESET:
Off=0
RESET
842005A3.CDR
Figure 551: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N = 1 to 16) AND LOGIC
5-120
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.6.1 OVERVIEW
Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to setting group designations 1 to 6.
The performance of these elements is defined by the active setting group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the
user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (for example, altered power system configuration, season of the year, etc.). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the
Control elements section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to elements section at the beginning of this chapter.
5.6.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6)
SETTING GROUP 1
LINE DIFFERENTIAL
ELEMENTS
See page 5-122.
MESSAGE
LINE PICKUP
See page 5-127.
MESSAGE
DISTANCE
See page 5-129.
MESSAGE
POWER SWING
DETECT
See page 5-147.
MESSAGE
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
See page 5-156.
MESSAGE
PHASE CURRENT
See page 5-158.
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL CURRENT
See page 5-169.
MESSAGE
WATTMETRIC
GROUND FAULT
See page 5-177.
MESSAGE
GROUND CURRENT
See page 5-180.
MESSAGE
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE
CURRENT
See page 5-182.
MESSAGE
BREAKER FAILURE
See page 5-187.
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
See page 5-196.
MESSAGE
SUPERVISING
ELEMENTS
See page 5-203.
Each of the six setting group menus is identical. Setting group 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active if
no other group is active (see the Control elements section for additional details).
GE Multilin
5-121
5 SETTINGS
5.6.3 LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS
LINE DIFFERENTIAL
ELEMENTS
MESSAGE
CURRENT
DIFFERENTIAL
See page 5-122.
STUB BUS
See page 5-125.
b) CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) LINE DIFFERENTIAL... CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL
CURRENT DIFF
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL

SOURCE 1: SRC 1
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL

SOURCE 2: None
Range: None, SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL

SOURCE 3: None
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL

SOURCE 4: None
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
PICKUP: 0.20 pu
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
CT TAP 1: 1.00
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
CT TAP 2: 1.00
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
RESTRAINT 1: 30%
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
RESTRAINT 2: 50%
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
BREAK PT: 1.0 pu
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF GND

FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF GND

PICKUP: 0.10 pu
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF GND

RESTRAINT: 25%
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF GND

DELAY: 0.10 s
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF DTT:

Enabled
CURRENT
DIFFERENTIAL
5-122
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF KEY DTT:

Off
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
CURRENT DIFF
EVENTS: Disabled
The following settings are available for current differential protection.
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 1: This setting selects the first source for the current differential element local
operating current. If more than one source is configured, the other source currents are scaled to the CT with the maximum primary current assigned by the CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 1 to CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 4 settings. This
source is mandatory and is assigned with the SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE 1 menu.
CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 2, CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 3, and CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL
SOURCE 4: These settings select the second, third, and fourth sources for the current differential function for applications where more than one set of CT circuitry is connected directly to L90.
CURRENT DIFF BLOCK: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand to block the operation of the current differential
element.
CURRENT DIFF PICKUP: This setting is used to select current differential pickup value.
CURRENT DIFF CT TAP 1 and CURRENT DIFF CT TAP 2: These settings adapt the remote terminal 1 or 2 (communication channel) CT ratio to the local ratio if the CT ratios for the local and remote terminals are different. The setting
value is determined by CTprim_rem / CTprim_loc for local and remote terminal CTs (where CTprim_rem / CTprim_loc is
referred to as the CT primary rated current). Ratio matching must always be performed against the remote CT with the
maximum CT primary defined by the CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 1 through CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 4 settings.
See the Current differential settings application example in chapter 9 for additional details.
CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1 and CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 2: These settings select the bias characteristic for
the first and second slope, respectively.
CURRENT DIFF BREAK PT: This setting is used to select an intersection point between the two slopes.
CURRENT DIFF GND FUNCTION: This setting enables and disabled the 87LG neutral differential element, which may
be used to detect high-resistive faults. This element uses restrained characteristics to cope with spurious zerosequence current during system unbalance and signal distortions. The differential neutral current is calculated as the
vector sum of all in-zone CT input neutral currents. The restraint current is derived as the maximum of phase currents
from all terminals flowing through any individual CT, including breaker-and-a-half configurations. The 87LG neutral differential element is blocked when the phase current at any terminal is greater than 3 pu, since the phase differential
element should operate for internal faults. To correctly derive the restraint quantity from the maximum through current
at any terminal, it is important that the 87L phase-segregated differential pickup and slope settings are equal at all terminals. Refer to the Applications of settings chapter for additional details.
CURRENT DIFF GND PICKUP: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for neutral current differential element.
CURRENT DIFF GND RESTRAINT: This setting specifies the bias characteristic for the neutral current differential element.
CURRENT DIFF GND DELAY: This setting specifies the operation delay for the neutral current differential element.
Since this element is used to detect high-resistive faults where fault currents are relatively low, high-speed operation is
usually not critical. This delay will provide security against spurious neutral current during switch-off transients and
external fault clearing.
CURRENT DIFF DTT: This setting enables and disables the sending of a DTT by the current differential element on
per single-phase basis to remote relays. To allow the L90 to restart from master-master to master-slave mode (very
important on three-terminal applications), CURR DIFF DTT must be set to Enabled.
CURRENT DIFF KEY DTT: This setting selects an additional protection element (besides the current differential element; for example, distance element or breaker failure) which keys the DTT on a per three-phase basis.
NOTE
For the current differential element to function properly, it is imperative that all L90 relays on the protected
line have exactly identical firmware revisions. For example, revision 5.62 in only compatible with 5.62, not
5.61 or 5.63.
GE Multilin
5-123
5-124
.H\'77
'77
)XQFWLRQ
6(77,1*6
%ORFN
2II

2II
(QDEOHG
(QDEOHG
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
678%%8623
,&DW7LPHVWDPS
'773+$6($
'773+$6(%
'773+$6(&
,%DW7LPHVWDPS
,$DW7LPHVWDPS
'$7$)5205(027(
&KDQQHO2.
&KDQQHO,')DLO
,%DW7LPHVWDPS
,&DW7LPHVWDPS
'773+$6($
'773+$6(%
'773+$6(&
,$DW7LPHVWDPS
'$7$)5205(027(
&KDQQHO2.
&KDQQHO,')DLO
6(77,1*
1XPEHURI&KDQQHOV
6(77,1*
1XPEHURI7HUPLQDOV
$1'
$1'
25
$1'
$1'
$1'
$1'
$1'
$1'
&RPSXWHORFDO
UHVWUDLQW
&RPSXWHVXP
RIFXUUHQWV
&7UDWLRPDWFKLQJ
25
$1'
25
25
,%
,&
,$
&RPSXWHFKDUJLQJFXUUHQW
3RV6HT&DSDF5HDFWDQFH
=HUR6HT&DSDF5HDFWDQFH
6(77,1*6
25
$1'
25
$1'
25
&ORFNVDUH
V\QFKURQL]HGSKDVH
DQGIUHTXHQF\ORFNHG
ORRS3)//LV2.
&/2&.
6<1&+521,=$7,21
6<67(0
,$DW7LPHVWDPS
,%DW7LPHVWDPS
,&DW7LPHVWDPS
'$7$)520/2&$/(1'
&KDUJLQJ&XUUHQW
25
$1'
$1'
$1'
&RPSXWHSKDVRUV
DQGYDULDQFH
UHPRWH
581
&77DS
6(77,1*
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
''69
,$
,%
,&
,B
(QEDEOHG
,$
,%
,&
&RPSXWHSKDVRUV
DQGYDULDQFH
UHPRWH
581
&77DS
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
*URXQG)XQFWLRQ
3URFHVVSKDVRU
FRPSXWDWLRQV
581
&$/&8/$7(
,$
,%
,&
,B
$1'
&RPSXWH
SKDVRUVDQG
YDULDQFHORFDO
581
&$/&8/$7(
6(77,1*6
6LJQDO6RXUFH
8VHUVHOHFWLRQ
6LJQDO6RXUFH
8VHUVHOHFWLRQ
6LJQDO6RXUFH
8VHUVHOHFWLRQ
6LJQDO6RXUFH
8VHUVHOHFWLRQ
9&*
$&78$/9$/8(6
9$*
9%*
,$
,%
,&
,B
_,*UHVWUDLQW_
_,*RSHUDWH_
$1'
$1'
$1'
581
581
581
_,&UHVWUDLQW_
_,&RSHUDWH_
_,%UHVWUDLQW_
_,%RSHUDWH_
_,$UHVWUDLQW_
_,$RSHUDWH_
5HVWUDLQW
%UHDNSRLQW
3LFNXS
5HVWUDLQW
6(77,1*6
581
*URXQG3LFNXS
*URXQG5HVWUDLQW
6(77,1*6
!
!
!
!
25
25
25
6(77,1*
*URXQG'HOD\
73.3
$1'
$1'
$1'
25
25
25
25
$%&'5
7RUHPRWHUHOD\V
FKDQQHODQG
'773+$6($
'773+$6(%
'773+$6(&
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
/',))23$
/',))23%
/',))23&
/',))5(&9''77$
/',))5(&9''77%
/',))5(&9''77&
/',))3)//)$,/
/',))&+)$,/
/',))&+)$,/
/',))&+/2673.7
/',))&+/2673.7
/',))&+&5&)$,/
/',))&+&5&)$,/
/',))&+,')$,/
/',))&+,')$,/
/',))%/2&.('
/',)).(<'77
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
/',))23
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
/',))23*
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
/',))3.3*
7RUHPRWHUHOD\V
FKDQQHODQG

5 SETTINGS
Figure 552: CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
c) STUB BUS
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS STUB BUS
STUB BUS FUNCTION:

Disabled
MESSAGE
STUB BUS DISCONNECT:

Off
MESSAGE
STUB BUS TRIGGER:

Off
MESSAGE
STUB BUS TARGET:

Self-reset
MESSAGE
STUB BUS EVENTS:

Disabled
STUB BUS
The stub bus element protects for faults between two breakers in a breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configuration when the
line disconnect switch is open. At the same time, if the line is still energized through the remote terminal(s), differential protection is still required (the line may still need to be energized because there is a tapped load on a two terminal line or
because the line is a three terminal line with two of the terminals still connected). Correct operation for this condition is
achieved by the local relay sending zero current values to the remote end(s) so that a local bus fault does not result in tripping the line. At the local end, the differential element is disabled and stub bus protection is provided by a user-selected
overcurrent element. If there is a line fault, the remote end(s) will trip on differential but local differential function and DTT
signal (if enabled) to the local end, will be blocked by the stub bus logic allowing the local breakers to remain closed.
STUB BUS FUNCTION: There are three requirements for stub bus operation: the element must be enabled, an indication that the line disconnect is open, and the STUB BUS TRIGGER setting is set as indicated below. There are two methods of setting the stub bus trigger and thus setting up stub bus operation:
1.
If STUB BUS TRIGGER is On, the STUB BUS OPERATE operand picks up as soon as the disconnect switch opens,
causing zero currents to be transmitted to remote end(s) and DTT receipt from remote end(s) to be permanently
blocked. An overcurrent element, blocked by disconnect switch closed, provides protection for the local bus.
2.
An alternate method is to set STUB BUS TRIGGER to be the pickup of an assigned instantaneous overcurrent element. The instantaneous overcurrent element must operate quickly enough to pick up the STUB BUS OPERATE
operand, disable the local differential, and send zero currents to the other terminal(s). If the bus minimum fault current is above five times the instantaneous overcurrent pickup, tests have confirmed that the STUB BUS OPERATE
operand always pick up correctly for a stub bus fault and prevents tripping of the remote terminal. If minimum stub
bus fault current is below this value, then method 1 should be used. Note also that correct testing of stub bus operation, when this method is used, requires sudden injection of a fault currents above five times instantaneous overcurrent pickup. The assigned current element should be mapped to appropriate output contact(s) to trip the stub
bus breakers. It should be blocked unless disconnect is open. To prevent 87L tripping from remote L90 relays still
protecting the line, the auxiliary contact of line disconnect switch (logic 1 when line switch is open) should be
assigned to block the local 87L function by using the CURRENT DIFF BLOCK setting.
STUB BUS DISCONNECT: Selects a FlexLogic operand to represent the open state of auxiliary contact of line disconnect switch (logic 1 when line disconnect switch is open). If necessary, simple logic representing not only line disconnect switch but also the closed state of the breakers can be created with FlexLogic and assigned to this setting.
STUB BUS TRIGGER: Selects a FlexLogic operand that causes the STUB BUS OPERATE operand to pick up if the
line disconnect is open. It can be set either to On or to an instantaneous overcurrent element (see above). If the
instantaneous overcurrent used for the stub bus protection is set with a time delay, then STUB BUS TRIGGER should use
the associated instantaneous overcurrent pickup operand. The source assigned for the current of this element must
cover the stub between CTs of the associated breakers and disconnect switch.
GE Multilin
5-125
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
STUB BUS
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTING
STUB BUS
DISCONNECT:
Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
STUB BUS OP
SETTING
STUB BUS
TRIGGER:
Off=0
831012A3.CDR
Figure 553: STUB BUS SCHEME LOGIC
5-126
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.6.4 LINE PICKUP
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) LINE PICKUP
LINE PICKUP
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
LINE PICKUP SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC LINE

PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
LINE PICKUP UV PKP:

0.700 pu
MESSAGE
LINE END OPEN PICKUP

DELAY: 0.150 s
MESSAGE
LINE END OPEN RESET

DELAY: 0.090 s
MESSAGE
LINE PICKUP OV PKP

DELAY: 0.040 s
MESSAGE
AR CO-ORD BYPASS:
Enabled
MESSAGE
AR CO-ORD PICKUP
DELAY: 0.045 s
MESSAGE
AR CO-ORD RESET
DELAY: 0.005 s
MESSAGE
TERMINAL OPEN:
Off
MESSAGE
AR ACCELERATE:
Off
MESSAGE
LINE PICKUP DISTANCE

TRIP: Enabled
MESSAGE
LINE PICKUP BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
LINE PICKUP
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
LINE PICKUP
EVENTS: Disabled
LINE PICKUP
The line pickup feature uses a combination of undercurrent and undervoltage to identify a line that has been de-energized
(line end open). Alternately, the user may assign a FlexLogic operand to the TERMINAL OPEN setting that specifies the terminal status. Three instantaneous overcurrent elements are used to identify a previously de-energized line that has been
closed onto a fault. Faults other than close-in faults can be identified satisfactorily with the distance elements.
Co-ordination features are included to ensure satisfactory operation when high speed automatic reclosure (AR) is
employed. The AR CO-ORD DELAY setting allows the overcurrent setting to be below the expected load current seen after
reclose. Co-ordination is achieved by all of the LINE PICKP UV elements resetting and blocking the trip path before the AR
CO-ORD DELAY times out. The AR CO-ORD BYPASS setting is normally enabled. It is disabled if high speed autoreclosure is
implemented.
The line pickup protection incorporates zone 1 extension capability. When the line is being re-energized from the local terminal, pickup of an overreaching zone 2 or excessive phase current within eight power cycles after the autorecloser issues
a close command results in the LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP FlexLogic operand. For security, the overcurrent trip is supervised
GE Multilin
5-127
5 SETTINGS
by an undervoltage condition, which in turn is controlled by the VT FUSE FAIL OP operand with a 10 ms coordination timer. If
a trip from distance in not required, then it can be disabled with the LINE PICKUP DISTANCE TRIP setting. Configure the LINE
PICKUP RCL TRIP operand to perform a trip action if the intent is apply zone 1 extension.
The zone 1 extension philosophy used here normally operates from an under-reaching zone, and uses an overreaching
distance zone when reclosing the line with the other line end open. The AR ACCELERATE setting is provided to achieve
zone 1 extension functionality if external autoreclosure is employed. Another zone 1 extension approach is to permanently
apply an overreaching zone, and reduce the reach when reclosing. This philosophy can be programmed via the autoreclose scheme.
6(77,1*
7HUPLQDO2SHQ
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
/,1(3,&.83893.3
2II
$1'
6(77,1*
2YHUYROWDJH3LFNXS'HOD\
73.3
6(77,1*
)XQFWLRQ
(QDEOHG
'LVDEOHG
25
7567
$1'
6(77,1*
%ORFN
2II
6(77,1*6
/LQH(QG2SHQ3LFNXS'HOD\
/LQH(QG2SHQ5HVHW'HOD\
6(77,1*
8QGHUYROWDJH3LFNXS
581
9$*
9%*
9&*
9$%
9%&
9&$
/(2 OLQHHQGRSHQ
25
$1'
7567
6(77,1*6
$XWRUHFORVH&RRUGLQDWLRQ
3LFNXS'HOD\
5HVHW'HOD\
$1'
581
,$
,%
,&
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
/,1(3,&.83/(23.3
73.3
9$*RU9$%VHWWLQJ
9%*RU9%&VHWWLQJ
9&*RU9&$VHWWLQJ
6(77,1*
6LJQDO6RXUFH
,$SX
,%SX
$1'
73.3
,&SX
$1'
7567
$1'
$1'
6(77,1*
3KDVH,2&/LQH3LFNXS

$1'
581
,$!VHWWLQJ
,%!VHWWLQJ
,&!VHWWLQJ
6(77,1*
%\SDVV
(QDEOHG
'LVDEOHG
25
PV
$1'
25
$1'
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
/,1(3,&.8323
/,1(3,&.833.3
/,1(3,&.83'32
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
*1'',67=3.3
3+',67=3.3
$1'
25
$1'
25
6(77,1*
'LVWDQFH7ULS
$1'
7,0(5
(QDEOHG
'LVDEOHG

F\FOHV
6(77,1*
$XWRUHFORVH$FFHOHUDWH
2II
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
$5&/26(%.5
$5&/26(%.5
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
/,1(3,&.835&/75,3
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
/,1(3,&.83,$
/,1(3,&.83,%
/,1(3,&.83,&
25
'/DQG/RQO\
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
65&;97)86()$,/23
6RXUFHVHOHFWHGLQWKHOLQHSLFNXSHOHPHQW
$.&'5
Figure 554: LINE PICKUP SCHEME LOGIC
5-128
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.6.5 DISTANCE
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE
DISTANCE
SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
MEMORY
DURATION: 10 cycles
Range: 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1
MESSAGE
FORCE SELF-POLAR:
Off
MESSAGE
FORCE MEM-POLAR:
Off
MESSAGE
PHASE DISTANCE Z1
See page 5130.
MESSAGE
PHASE DISTANCE Z2
See page 5130.
MESSAGE
PHASE DISTANCE Z3
See page 5130.
MESSAGE
GROUND DISTANCE Z1
See page 5139.
MESSAGE
GROUND DISTANCE Z2
See page 5139.
MESSAGE
GROUND DISTANCE Z3
See page 5139.
DISTANCE
Four common settings are available for distance protection. The DISTANCE SOURCE identifies the signal source for all distance functions. The mho distance functions use a dynamic characteristic: the positive-sequence voltage either memorized or actual is used as a polarizing signal. The memory voltage is also used by the built-in directional supervising
functions applied for both the mho and quad characteristics.
The MEMORY DURATION setting specifies the length of time a memorized positive-sequence voltage should be used in the
distance calculations. After this interval expires, the relay checks the magnitude of the actual positive-sequence voltage. If
it is higher than 10% of the nominal, the actual voltage is used, if lower the memory voltage continues to be used.
The memory is established when the positive-sequence voltage stays above 80% of its nominal value for five power system
cycles. For this reason it is important to ensure that the nominal secondary voltage of the VT is entered correctly under the
SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK menu.
Set MEMORY DURATION long enough to ensure stability on close-in reverse three-phase faults. For this purpose, the maximum fault clearing time (breaker fail time) in the substation should be considered. On the other hand, the MEMORY DURATION cannot be too long as the power system may experience power swing conditions rotating the voltage and current
phasors slowly while the memory voltage is static, as frozen at the beginning of the fault. Keeping the memory in effect for
too long may eventually lead to incorrect operation of the distance functions.
The distance zones can be forced to become self-polarized through the FORCE SELF-POLAR setting. Any user-selected condition (FlexLogic operand) can be configured to force self-polarization. When the selected operand is asserted (logic 1),
the distance functions become self-polarized regardless of other memory voltage logic conditions. When the selected operand is de-asserted (logic 0), the distance functions follow other conditions of the memory voltage logic as shown below.
The distance zones can be forced to become memory-polarized through the FORCE MEM-POLAR setting. Any user-selected
condition (any FlexLogic operand) can be configured to force memory polarization. When the selected operand is
asserted (logic 1), the distance functions become memory-polarized regardless of the positive-sequence voltage magnitude at this time. When the selected operand is de-asserted (logic 0), the distance functions follow other conditions of the
memory voltage logic.
GE Multilin
5-129
5 SETTINGS
The FORCE SELF-POLAR and FORCE MEM-POLAR settings should never be asserted simultaneously. If this happens, the logic
will give higher priority to forcing self-polarization as indicated in the logic below. This is consistent with the overall philosophy of distance memory polarization.
The memory polarization cannot be applied permanently but for a limited time only; the self-polarization may be
applied permanently and therefore should take higher priority.
NOTE
NOTE
The distance zones of the L90 are identical to that of the UR-series D60 Line Distance Relay. For additional information on the L90 distance functions, please refer to Chapter 8 of the D60 manual, available on the GE EnerVista
CD or free of charge on the GE Multilin web page.
SETTING
Force Memory Polarization
Off = 0
SETTING
Distance Source
= VA, Vrms_A
= VB, Vrms_B
= VC, Vrms_C
= V_1
= IA
= IB
= IC
Update memory
AND
| V_1 | < 1.15 pu

| Vrms | V | | < Vrms / 8
SETTING
Memory duration
0
TIMER
5 cycles
AND
AND
Treset
S Q
| Vrms | V | | < Vrms / 8

| Vrms | V | | < Vrms / 8
| V_1 | > 0.80 pu
| IA | < 0.05 pu
| IB | < 0.05 pu
| IC | < 0.05 pu
| V_1 | < 0.10 pu
RUN
AND
TIMER
6 cycles
Use V_1 memory

OR
AND
OR
Use V_1
R
AND
SETTING
Force Self Polarization
Off = 0
827842A7.CDR
Figure 555: MEMORY VOLTAGE LOGIC

b) PHASE DISTANCE (ANSI 21P)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE PHASE DISTANCE Z1(Z3)
PHS DIST Z1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 DIR:

Forward
Range: Forward, Reverse, Non-directional
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1
SHAPE: Mho
Range: Mho, Quad
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL

CONNECTION: None
Range: None, Dy1, Dy3, Dy5, Dy7, Dy9, Dy11, Yd1, Yd3,
Yd5, Yd7, Yd9, Yd11
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR

CONNECTION: None
Range: None, Dy1, Dy3, Dy5, Dy7, Dy9, Dy11, Yd1, Yd3,
Yd5, Yd7, Yd9, Yd11
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1
REACH:
2.00 ohms
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1
RCA: 85
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 REV

REACH: 2.00 ohms
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 REV

REACH RCA: 85
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1
COMP LIMIT: 90
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1
DIR RCA: 85
PHASE DISTANCE Z1
5-130
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1
DIR COMP LIMIT: 90
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD

RGT BLD: 10.00 ohms
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD

RGT BLD RCA: 85
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD

LFT BLD: 10.00 ohms
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD

LFT BLD RCA: 85
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1
SUPV: 0.200 pu
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 VOLT

LEVEL: 0.000 pu
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 BLK:

Off
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase mho distance function uses a dynamic 100% memory-polarized mho characteristic with additional reactance,
directional, and overcurrent supervising characteristics. When set to Non-directional, the mho function becomes an offset
mho with the reverse reach controlled independently from the forward reach, and all the directional characteristics
removed.
The phase quadrilateral distance function is comprised of a reactance characteristic, right and left blinders, and 100%
memory-polarized directional and current supervising characteristics. When set to Non-directional, the quadrilateral function applies a reactance line in the reverse direction instead of the directional comparators. Refer to Chapter 8 for additional
information.
Each phase distance zone is configured individually through its own setting menu. All of the settings can be independently
modified for each of the zones except:
1.
The SIGNAL SOURCE setting (common for the distance

ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE).
elements of all zones as entered under SETTINGS GROUPED
2.
The MEMORY DURATION setting (common for the distance elements of all zones as entered under SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE).
The common distance settings described earlier must be properly chosen for correct operation of the phase distance elements. Additional details may be found in chapter 8: Theory of operation.
Although all zones can be used as either instantaneous elements (pickup [PKP] and dropout [DPO] FlexLogic operands)
or time-delayed elements (operate [OP] FlexLogic operands), only zone 1 is intended for the instantaneous under-reaching tripping mode.
WARNING
Ensure that the PHASE VT SECONDARY VOLTAGE setting (see the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP
AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK menu) is set correctly to prevent improper operation of associated memory action.
PHS DIST Z1 DIR: All phase distance zones are reversible. The forward direction is defined by the PHS DIST Z1 RCA
setting, whereas the reverse direction is shifted 180 from that angle. The non-directional zone spans between the for-
GE Multilin
5-131
5 SETTINGS
ward reach impedance defined by the PHS DIST Z1 REACH and PHS DIST Z1 RCA settings, and the reverse reach impedance defined by PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH and PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA as illustrated below.
PHS DIST Z1 SHAPE: This setting selects the shape of the phase distance function between the mho and quadrilateral characteristics. The selection is available on a per-zone basis. The two characteristics and their possible variations are shown in the following figures.
COMP LIMIT
REAC
H
DIR COMP LIMIT
DIR COMP LIMIT

DIR RCA
RCA
837720A1.CDR
Figure 556: DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
R E AC H
COMP LIMIT
RCA
REV R
E AC
REV REACH
RCA
837802A1.CDR
Figure 557: NON-DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
5-132
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
COMP LIMIT
COMP LIMIT
REACH
DIR COMP LIMIT
DIR COMP LIMIT

DIR RCA
RCA
LFT BLD RCA
RGT BLD RCA
R
RGT BLD
-LFT BLD
837721A1.CDR
Figure 558: DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
COMP LIMIT
COMP LIMIT
R E AC H
RCA
LFT BLD RCA
RGT BLD RCA
R
-LFT BLD
COMP LIMIT
R E V R E AC H
RGT BLD
REV REACH
RCA
COMP LIMIT
837803A1.CDR
Figure 559: NON-DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
GE Multilin
5-133
5 SETTINGS
RCA
= 80o
COMP LIMIT
= 90o
DIR RCA
= 80o
DIR COMP LIMIT = 60o
REAC
H
REAC
H
RCA
= 80o
COMP LIMIT
= 90o
DIR RCA
= 80o
RCA
= 80o
COMP LIMIT
= 60o
DIR RCA
= 80o
REAC
H
REACH
RCA
= 90o
COMP LIMIT
= 90o
DIR RCA
= 45o
R
837722A1.CDR
Figure 560: MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC SAMPLE SHAPES
REAC
H
RCA
= 90o
COMP LIMIT
= 90o
DIR RCA
= 45o
RGT BLD RCA = 90o
LFT BLD RCA
= 90o
RCA
= 80o
COMP LIMIT
= 80o
DIR RCA
= 45o
RGT BLD RCA = 80o
LFT BLD RCA
= 80o
REAC
H
REACH
RCA
= 80o
COMP LIMIT
= 90o
DIR RCA
= 80o
RGT BLD RCA = 80o
LFT BLD RCA
= 80o
REAC
H
RCA
= 80o
COMP LIMIT
= 90o
DIR RCA
= 80o
RGT BLD RCA = 80o
LFT BLD RCA
= 80o
837723A1.CDR
Figure 561: QUADRILATERAL DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC SAMPLE SHAPES
5-134
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION: The phase distance elements can be applied to look through a three-phase
delta-wye or wye-delta power transformer. In addition, VTs and CTs could be located independently from one another
at different windings of the transformer. If the potential source is located at the correct side of the transformer, this setting shall be set to None.
This setting specifies the location of the voltage source with respect to the involved power transformer in the direction
of the zone. The following figure illustrates the usage of this setting. In section (a), zone 1 is looking through a transformer from the delta into the wye winding. Therefore, the Z1 setting shall be set to Dy11. In section (b), Zone 3 is
looking through a transformer from the wye into the delta winding. Therefore, the Z3 setting shall be set to Yd1. The
zone is restricted by the potential point (location of the VTs) as illustrated in Figure (e).
PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION: This setting specifies the location of the current source with respect to the
involved power transformer in the direction of the zone. In section (a) of the following figure, zone 1 is looking through
a transformer from the delta into the wye winding. Therefore, the Z1 setting shall be set to Dy11. In section (b), the
CTs are located at the same side as the read point. Therefore, the Z3 setting shall be set to None.
See the Theory of operation chapter for more details, and the Application of settings chapter for information on calculating distance reach settings in applications involving power transformers.
(a)
wye, 330o lag
delta
(b)
wye, 330o lag
delta
Z3
Z3
Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None

Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Yd1

Z1
Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11
Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
(c)
wye, 330o lag
delta
5
Z1

Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
(e)
L1
Z3
L2
Zone 3
Zone 1

Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Yd1
ZL1
ZT
ZL2
Z1
Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11
830717A1.CDR
Figure 562: APPLICATIONS OF THE PH DIST XFMR VOL/CUR CONNECTION SETTINGS
PHS DIST Z1 REACH: This setting defines the zone reach for the forward and reverse applications. In the non-directional applications, this setting defines the forward reach of the zone. The reverse reach impedance in non-directional
applications is set independently. The reach impedance is entered in secondary ohms. The reach impedance angle is
entered as the PHS DIST Z1 RCA setting.
PHS DIST Z1 RCA: This setting specifies the characteristic angle (similar to the maximum torque angle in previous
technologies) of the phase distance characteristic for the forward and reverse applications. In the non-directional applications, this setting defines the angle of the forward reach impedance. The reverse reach impedance in the non-directional applications is set independently. The setting is an angle of reach impedance as shown in the distance
characteristic figures shown earlier. This setting is independent from PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA, the characteristic angle of an
extra directional supervising function.
GE Multilin
5-135
5 SETTINGS
PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH: This setting defines the reverse reach of the zone set to non-directional (PHS DIST Z1 DIR
setting). The value must be entered in secondary ohms. This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to
Forward or Reverse.
PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA: This setting defines the angle of the reverse reach impedance if the zone is set to
non-directional (PHS DIST Z1 DIR setting). This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to Forward or
Reverse.
PHS DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: This setting shapes the operating characteristic. In particular, it produces the lens-type
characteristic of the mho function and a tent-shaped characteristic of the reactance boundary of the quadrilateral function. If the mho shape is selected, the same limit angle applies to both the mho and supervising reactance comparators. In conjunction with the mho shape selection, the setting improves loadability of the protected line. In conjunction
with the quadrilateral characteristic, this setting improves security for faults close to the reach point by adjusting the
reactance boundary into a tent-shape.
PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA: This setting selects the characteristic angle (or maximum torque angle) of the directional
supervising function. If the mho shape is applied, the directional function is an extra supervising function as the
dynamic mho characteristic is itself directional. In conjunction with the quadrilateral shape, this setting defines the only
directional function built into the phase distance element. The directional function uses the memory voltage for polarization. This setting typically equals the distance characteristic angle PHS DIST Z1 RCA.
PHS DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: Selects the comparator limit angle for the directional supervising function.
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD: This setting defines the right blinder position of the quadrilateral characteristic along
the resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figures). The angular position of
the blinder is adjustable with the use of the PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA setting. This setting applies only to the
quadrilateral characteristic and should be set giving consideration to the maximum load current and required resistive
coverage.
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the right blinder of the quadrilateral
characteristic (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figures).
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD: This setting defines the left blinder position of the quadrilateral characteristic along the
resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figures). The angular position of the
blinder is adjustable with the use of the PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA setting. This setting applies only to the quadrilateral characteristic and should be set with consideration to the maximum load current.
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the left blinder of the quadrilateral
characteristic (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figures).
PHS DIST Z1 SUPV: The phase distance elements are supervised by the magnitude of the line-to-line current (fault
loop current used for the distance calculations). For convenience, 3 is accommodated by the pickup (that is, before
being used, the entered value of the threshold setting is multiplied by 3 ).
If the minimum fault current level is sufficient, the current supervision pickup should be set above maximum full load
current preventing maloperation under VT fuse fail conditions. This requirement may be difficult to meet for remote
faults at the end of zones 2 and above. If this is the case, the current supervision pickup would be set below the full
load current, but this may result in maloperation during fuse fail conditions.
PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: This setting is relevant for applications on series-compensated lines, or in general, if
series capacitors are located between the relaying point and a point where the zone shall not overreach. For plain
(non-compensated) lines, set to zero. Otherwise, the setting is entered in per unit of the phase VT bank configured
under the DISTANCE SOURCE. Effectively, this setting facilitates dynamic current-based reach reduction. In non-directional applications (PHS DIST Z1 DIR set to Non-directional), this setting applies only to the forward reach of the nondirectional zone. See chapters 8 and 9 for information on calculating this setting for series compensated lines.
PHS DIST Z1 DELAY: This setting allows the user to delay operation of the distance elements and implement stepped
distance protection. The distance element timers for zones 2 and higher apply a short dropout delay to cope with faults
located close to the zone boundary when small oscillations in the voltages or currents could inadvertently reset the
timer. Zone 1 does not need any drop out delay since it is sealed-in by the presence of current.
PHS DIST Z1 BLK: This setting enables the user to select a FlexLogic operand to block a given distance element.
VT fuse fail detection is one of the applications for this setting.
5-136
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 PKP AB
SETTING
PH DIST Z1 DELAY
TPKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
OR
OR
PH DIST Z1 OP
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 PKP BC
TPKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 PKP CA
TPKP
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z1 OP AB
PH DIST Z1 OP BC
PH DIST Z1 OP CA
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC
PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA
OPEN POLE OP **
AND
AND
** D60, L60, and L90 only. Other UR-series models apply regular current seal-in for zone 1.
837017A8.CDR
Figure 563: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 1 OP SCHEME

IURPWKHRSHQSROHHOHPHQW'/DQG/RQO\
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
23(132/(23
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=3.3$%
7,0(5
PV
$1'
25
7,0(5
PV
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=23$%
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=23%&
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=23&$
25
PV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=3.3%&
6(77,1*
3+',67='(/$<
73.3

6(77,1*
3+',67='(/$<
73.3
$1'
25
25
PV

)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=3.3&$
IURPWKHWULSRXWSXWHOHPHQW
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,3=3+705,1,7
7,0(5
PV
$1'
25
PV
25
6(77,1*
3+',67='(/$<
73.3

25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=23
$&'5
Figure 564: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 2 OP SCHEME
NOTE
For phase distance zone 2, there is a provision to start the zone timer with other distance zones or loop the pickup
flag to avoid prolonging phase distance zone 2 operation when the fault evolves from one type to another or
migrates from the initial zone to zone 2. Desired zones in the trip output function should be assigned to accomplish
this functionality.
GE Multilin
5-137
5 SETTINGS
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
23(132/(23
7,0(5
PV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=3.3$%
6(77,1*
3+',67='(/$<
73.3
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=23$%
25
PV
7,0(5
PV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=3.3%&
6(77,1*
3+',67='(/$<
73.3
$1'
PV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=23%&
25
7,0(5
PV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=3.3&$
6(77,1*
3+',67='(/$<
73.3
$1'
PV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=23&$
25

25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3+',67=23
'/DQG/RQO\
$$&'5
Figure 565: PHASE DISTANCE ZONES 3 AND HIGHER OP SCHEME

D60, L60, and L90 only
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
OPEN POLE BLK AB
OPEN POLE BLK BC
OPEN POLE BLK CA
SETTINGS
PH DIST Z1 DIR
PH DIST Z1 SHAPE
PH DIST Z1 XFMR
VOL CONNECTION
PH DIST Z1 XFMR
CUR CONNECTION
PH DIST Z1 REACH
PH DIST Z1 RCA
PH DIST Z1 REV REACH
PH DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA
PH DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT
PH DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD
PH DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA
PH DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD
PH DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA
PH DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL
5
SETTING
PH DIST Z1 FUNCTION
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
AND
SETTING
PH DIST Z1 BLK
Off = 0
SETTING
DISTANCE SOURCE
RUN
IA-IB
Wye
VTs
VAG-VBG
VBG-VCG
VCG-VAG
VAB
VBC
VCA
V_1
I_1
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z1 PKP AB
PH DIST Z1 DPO AB
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z1 PKP BC
PH DIST Z1 DPO BC
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z1 PKP CA
PH DIST Z1 DPO CA
A-B ELEMENT
IB-IC
IC-IA
Delta
VTs
Quadrilateral
characteristic only
RUN
B-C ELEMENT
RUN
C-A ELEMENT
MEMORY
TIMER
1 cycle
V_1 > 0.80 pu
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 PKP
OR
1 cycle
I_1 > 0.025 pu
SETTING
PHS DIST Z1 SUPV
RUN
| IA IB | > 3 Pickup
RUN
| IB IC | > 3 Pickup
RUN
| IC IA | > 3 Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA
837002AL.CDR
Figure 566: PHASE DISTANCE SCHEME LOGIC
5-138
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
c) GROUND DISTANCE (ANSI 21G)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE GROUND DISTANCE Z1(Z3)
GND DIST Z1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 DIR:

Forward
Range: Forward, Reverse, Non-directional
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
SHAPE: Mho
Range: Mho, Quad
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
Z0/Z1 MAG: 2.70
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
Z0/Z1 ANG: 0
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
ZOM/Z1 MAG: 0.00
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
ZOM/Z1 ANG: 0
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
REACH: 2.00
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
RCA: 85
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 REV

REACH: 2.00
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 REV

REACH RCA: 85
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 POL

CURRENT: Zero-seq
Range: Zero-seq, Neg-seq
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 NONHOMOGEN ANG: 0.0
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
COMP LIMIT: 90
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
DIR RCA: 85
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
DIR COMP LIMIT: 90
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 QUAD

RGT BLD: 10.00
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 QUAD

RGT BLD RCA: 85
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 QUAD

LFT BLD: 10.00
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 QUAD

LFT BLD RCA: 85
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
SUPV: 0.200 pu
GROUND DISTANCE Z1
GE Multilin
5-139
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 VOLT

LEVEL: 0.000 pu
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 BLK:

Off
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Self-Rest, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1
EVENTS: Disabled
The ground mho distance function uses a dynamic 100% memory-polarized mho characteristic with additional reactance,
directional, current, and phase selection supervising characteristics. The ground quadrilateral distance function is composed of a reactance characteristic, right and left blinders, and 100% memory-polarized directional, overcurrent, and phase
selection supervising characteristics.
When set to non-directional, the mho function becomes an offset mho with the reverse reach controlled independently from
the forward reach, and all the directional characteristics removed. When set to non-directional, the quadrilateral function
applies a reactance line in the reverse direction instead of the directional comparators.
The reactance supervision for the mho function uses the zero-sequence current for polarization. The reactance line of the
quadrilateral function uses either zero-sequence or negative-sequence current as a polarizing quantity. The selection is
controlled by a user setting and depends on the degree of non-homogeneity of the zero-sequence and negative-sequence
equivalent networks.
The directional supervision uses memory voltage as polarizing quantity and both zero- and negative-sequence currents as
operating quantities.
The phase selection supervision restrains the ground elements during double-line-to-ground faults as they by principles
of distance relaying may be inaccurate in such conditions. Ground distance zones 1 and higher apply additional zerosequence directional supervision. See chapter 8 for additional details.
Each ground distance zone is configured individually through its own setting menu. All of the settings can be independently
modified for each of the zones except:
1.
The SIGNAL SOURCE setting (common for both phase and ground elements for all zones as entered under the SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE menu).
2.
The MEMORY DURATION setting (common for both phase and ground elements for all zones as entered under the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE menu).
The common distance settings noted at the start of this section must be properly chosen for correct operation of the ground
distance elements.
Although all ground distance zones can be used as either instantaneous elements (pickup [PKP] and dropout [DPO] FlexLogic signals) or time-delayed elements (operate [OP] FlexLogic signals), only zone 1 is intended for the instantaneous
under-reaching tripping mode.
WARNING
Ensure that the PHASE VT SECONDARY VOLTAGE (see the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC
INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK menu) is set correctly to prevent improper operation of associated
memory action.
GND DIST Z1 DIR: All ground distance zones are reversible. The forward direction is defined by the GND DIST Z1 RCA
setting and the reverse direction is shifted by 180 from that angle. The non-directional zone spans between the forward reach impedance defined by the GND DIST Z1 REACH and GND DIST Z1 RCA settings, and the reverse reach impedance defined by the GND DIST Z1 REV REACH and GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA settings.
GND DIST Z1 SHAPE: This setting selects the shape of the ground distance characteristic between the mho and
quadrilateral characteristics. The selection is available on a per-zone basis.
5-140
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The directional and non-directional quadrilateral ground distance characteristics are shown below. The directional and
non-directional mho ground distance characteristics are the same as those shown for the phase distance element in
the previous sub-section.
X
"+" NON-HOMOGEN. ANG
"-" NON-HOMOGEN. ANG
COMP LIMIT
COMP LIMIT
REACH
DIR COMP LIMIT
DIR COMP LIMIT

DIR RCA
RCA
LFT BLD RCA
RGT BLD RCA
R
RGT BLD
-LFT BLD
837769A1.CDR
Figure 567: DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL GROUND DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
X
COMP LIMIT
REACH
COMP LIMIT
RCA
LFT BLD RCA
RGT BLD RCA
R
RGT BLD
REV REACH
RCA
COMP LIMIT
RE V REACH
-LFT BLD
COMP LIMIT

837770A1.CDR
Figure 568: NON-DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL GROUND DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 MAG: This setting specifies the ratio between the zero-sequence and positive-sequence impedance required for zero-sequence compensation of the ground distance elements. This setting is available on a perzone basis, enabling precise settings for tapped, non-homogeneous, and series compensated lines.
GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 ANG: This setting specifies the angle difference between the zero-sequence and positivesequence impedance required for zero-sequence compensation of the ground distance elements. The entered value is
the zero-sequence impedance angle minus the positive-sequence impedance angle. This setting is available on a perzone basis, enabling precise values for tapped, non-homologous, and series-compensated lines.
GND DIST Z1 ZOM/Z1 MAG: The ground distance elements can be programmed to apply compensation for the zerosequence mutual coupling between parallel lines. If this compensation is required, the ground current from the parallel
line (3I_0) measured in the direction of the zone being compensated must be connected to the ground input CT of the
CT bank configured under the DISTANCE SOURCE. This setting specifies the ratio between the magnitudes of the mutual
GE Multilin
5-141
5 SETTINGS
zero-sequence impedance between the lines and the positive-sequence impedance of the protected line. It is imperative to set this setting to zero if the compensation is not to be performed. Note that internally the mutual coupling compensation is applied only if 3I_0>1.22*IG to ensure that no mutual coupling compensation is applied when the fault is
on the parallel line.
GND DIST Z1 ZOM/Z1 ANG: This setting specifies the angle difference between the mutual zero-sequence impedance between the lines and the positive-sequence impedance of the protected line.
GND DIST Z1 REACH: This setting defines the reach of the zone for the forward and reverse applications. In nondirectional applications, this setting defines the forward reach of the zone. The reverse reach impedance in non-directional applications is set independently. The angle of the reach impedance is entered as the GND DIST Z1 RCA setting.
The reach impedance is entered in secondary ohms.
GND DIST Z1 RCA: This setting specifies the characteristic angle (similar to the maximum torque angle in previous
technologies) of the ground distance characteristic for the forward and reverse applications. In the non-directional
applications this setting defines the forward reach of the zone. The reverse reach impedance in the non-directional
applications is set independently. This setting is independent from the GND DIST Z1 DIR RCA setting (the characteristic
angle of an extra directional supervising function).
NOTE
The relay internally performs zero-sequence compensation for the protected circuit based on the values
entered for GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 MAG and GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 ANG, and if configured to do so, zero-sequence compensation for mutual coupling based on the values entered for GND DIST Z1 Z0M/Z1 MAG and GND DIST Z1 Z0M/Z1
ANG. The GND DIST Z1 REACH and GND DIST Z1 RCA should, therefore, be entered in terms of positive sequence
quantities. Refer to chapters 8 for additional information
GND DIST Z1 REV REACH: This setting defines the reverse reach of the zone set to non-directional (GND DIST Z1 DIR
setting). The value must be entered in secondary ohms. This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to
Forward or Reverse.
GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA: This setting defines the angle of the reverse reach impedance if the zone is set to
non-directional (GND DIST Z1 DIR setting). This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to Forward or
Reverse.
GND DIST Z1 POL CURRENT: This setting applies only if the GND DIST Z1 SHAPE is set to Quad and controls the
polarizing current used by the reactance comparator of the quadrilateral characteristic. Either the zero-sequence or
negative-sequence current could be used. In general, a variety of system conditions must be examined to select an
optimum polarizing current. This setting becomes less relevant when the resistive coverage and zone reach are set
conservatively. Also, this setting is more relevant in lower voltage applications such as on distribution lines or cables,
as compared with high-voltage transmission lines. This setting applies to both the zone 1 and reverse reactance lines
if the zone is set to non-directional. Refer to chapters 8 and 9 for additional information.
GND DIST Z1 NON-HOMOGEN ANG: This setting applies only if the GND DIST Z1 SHAPE is set to Quad and provides
a method to correct the angle of the polarizing current of the reactance comparator for non-homogeneity of the zerosequence or negative-sequence networks. In general, a variety of system conditions must be examined to select this
setting. In many applications this angle is used to reduce the reach at high resistances in order to avoid overreaching
under far-out reach settings and/or when the sequence networks are greatly non-homogeneous. This setting applies to
both the forward and reverse reactance lines if the zone is set to non-directional. Refer to chapters 8 and 9 for additional information.
GND DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: This setting shapes the operating characteristic. In particular, it enables a lens-shaped
characteristic of the mho function and a tent-shaped characteristic of the quadrilateral function reactance boundary. If
the mho shape is selected, the same limit angle applies to mho and supervising reactance comparators. In conjunction
with the mho shape selection, this setting improves loadability of the protected line. In conjunction with the quadrilateral characteristic, this setting improves security for faults close to the reach point by adjusting the reactance boundary
into a tent-shape.
GND DIST Z1 DIR RCA: Selects the characteristic angle (or maximum torque angle) of the directional supervising
function. If the mho shape is applied, the directional function is an extra supervising function, as the dynamic mho
characteristic itself is a directional one. In conjunction with the quadrilateral shape selection, this setting defines the
only directional function built into the ground distance element. The directional function uses memory voltage for polarization.
GND DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: This setting selects the comparator limit angle for the directional supervising function.
5-142
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD: This setting defines the right blinder position of the quadrilateral characteristic along
the resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figure). The angular position of
the blinder is adjustable with the use of the GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA setting. This setting applies only to the
quadrilateral characteristic and should be set with consideration to the maximum load current and required resistive
coverage.
GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the right blinder of the quadrilateral
characteristic (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figure).
GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD: This setting defines the left blinder position of the quadrilateral characteristic along the
resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figure). The angular position of the
blinder is adjustable with the use of the GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA setting. This setting applies only to the quadrilateral characteristic and should be set with consideration to the maximum load current.
GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the left blinder of the quadrilateral
characteristic (see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figure).
GND DIST Z1 SUPV: The ground distance elements are supervised by the magnitude of the neutral (3I_0) current.
The current supervision pickup should be set less than the minimum 3I_0 current for the end of the zone fault, taking
into account the desired fault resistance coverage to prevent maloperation due to VT fuse failure. Settings less than
0.2 pu are not recommended and should be applied with caution. To enhance ground distance security against spurious neutral current during switch-off transients, three-phase faults, and phase-to-phase faults, a positive-sequence
current restraint of 5% is applied to the neutral current supervision magnitude.
GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: This setting is relevant for applications on series-compensated lines, or in general, if
series capacitors are located between the relaying point and a point for which the zone shall not overreach. For plain
(non-compensated) lines, this setting shall be set to zero. Otherwise, the setting is entered in per unit of the VT bank
configured under the DISTANCE SOURCE. Effectively, this setting facilitates dynamic current-based reach reduction. In
non-directional applications (GND DIST Z1 DIR set to Non-directional), this setting applies only to the forward reach of
the non-directional zone. See chapters 8 and 9 for additional details and information on calculating this setting value
for applications on series compensated lines.
GND DIST Z1 DELAY: This setting enables the user to delay operation of the distance elements and implement a
stepped distance backup protection. The distance element timer applies a short drop out delay to cope with faults
located close to the boundary of the zone when small oscillations in the voltages or currents could inadvertently reset
the timer.
GND DIST Z1 BLK: This setting enables the user to select a FlexLogic operand to block the given distance element.
VT fuse fail detection is one of the applications for this setting.
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z1 PKP A
SETTING
GND DIST Z1 DELAY
TPKP
GND DIST Z1 OP A
GND DIST Z1 OP B
GND DIST Z1 OP C
AND
OR
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z1 PKP B
TPKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z1 PKP C
TPKP
AND
OR
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z1 OP
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GND DIST Z1 SUPN IN
OPEN POLE OP **
AND
AND
OR
** D60, L60, and L90 only. Other UR-series models apply regular current seal-in for zone 1.
837018A7.CDR
Figure 569: GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 1 OP SCHEME
GE Multilin
5-143
5 SETTINGS
IURPWKHRSHQSROHGHWHFWRUHOHPHQW'/DQG/RQO\
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
23(132/(23
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=3.3$
7,0(5
PV
6(77,1*
*1'',67='(/$<
73.3
$1'
25
7,0(5
PV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=23$
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=23%
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=23&
25
PV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=3.3%
$1'
6(77,1*
*1'',67='(/$<
73.3
$1'
25
25
PV

)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=3.3&
7,0(5
PV
$1'
25
25
PV
6(77,1*
*1'',67='(/$<
73.3
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,3=*5705,1,7

25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=23
$&'5
Figure 570: GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 2 OP SCHEME
NOTE
For ground distance zone 2, there is a provision to start the zone timer with the other distance zones or loop pickup
flags to avoid prolonging ground distance zone 2 operation if the fault evolves from one type to another or migrates
from zone 3 or 4 to zone 2. The desired zones should be assigned in the trip output element to accomplish this
functionality.
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
23(132/(23
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=3.3$
7,0(5
PV
6(77,1*
*1'',67='(/$<
73.3
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=23$
25
PV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=3.3%
7,0(5
PV
6(77,1*
*1'',67='(/$<
73.3
$1'
PV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=23%
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=3.3&
7,0(5
PV
6(77,1*
*1'',67='(/$<
73.3
$1'
PV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=23&
25

25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=23
'/DQG/RQO\
$$&'5
Figure 571: GROUND DISTANCE ZONES 3 AND HIGHER OP SCHEME
5-144
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
'/DQG/RQO\
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
23(132/(23$
23(132/(23%
23(132/(23&
6(77,1*6
*1'',67=',5
*1'',67=6+$3(
*1'',67===0$*
*1'',67===$1*
*1'',67==20=0$*
*1'',67==20=$1*
*1'',67=5($&+
*1'',67=5&$
*1'',67=5(95($&+
6(77,1*
*1'',67=)81&7,21
(QDEOHG
'LVDEOHG
*1'',67=5(95($&+5&$
*1'',67=32/&855(17
*1'',67=121+20*(1$1*
*1'',67=&203/,0,7
*1'',67=',55&$
*1'',67=',5&203/,0,7
*1'',67=92/7/(9(/
*1'',67=48$'5*7%/'
*1'',67=48$'5*7%/'5&$
*1'',67=48$'/)7%/'
*1'',67=48$'/)7%/'5&$
$1'
6(77,1*
*1'',67=%/.
2II
6(77,1*
',67$1&(6285&(
4XDGULODWHUDO
FKDUDFWHULVWLF
RQO\
581
,$,%
'HOWD
97V
:\H
97V
,%,&
,&,$
9$*9%*
9%*9&*
9&*9$*
9$%
9%&
9&$
,B
,B
9B
,B
,1
$(/(0(17
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
*1'',67=3.3$%
*1'',67='32$
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
*1'',67=3.3%
*1'',67='32%
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
*1'',67=3.3&
*1'',67='32&
581
%(/(0(17
581
&(/(0(17
0(025<
7,0(5
F\FOH
9B!SX
25
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=3.3
F\FOH
,B!SX
6(77,1*
*1'',67=6839
581
_,1,B_!3LFNXS
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=6831,1
$)&'5
Figure 572: GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-145
5 SETTINGS
'/DQG/RQO\
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
23(132/(23$
23(132/(23%
23(132/(23&
6(77,1*6
*1'',67=',5
*1'',67=6+$3(
*1'',67===0$*
*1'',67===$1*
*1'',67==20=0$*
*1'',67==20=$1*
*1'',67=5($&+
*1'',67=5&$
*1'',67=5(95($&+
6(77,1*
*1'',67=)81&7,21
(QDEOHG
'LVDEOHG
*1'',67=5(95($&+5&$
*1'',67=32/&855(17
*1'',67=121+20*(1$1*
*1'',67=&203/,0,7
*1'',67=',55&$
*1'',67=',5&203/,0,7
*1'',67=92/7/(9(/
*1'',67=48$'5*7%/'
*1'',67=48$'5*7%/'5&$
*1'',67=48$'/)7%/'
*1'',67=48$'/)7%/'5&$
$1'
6(77,1*
*1'',67=%/.
2II
6(77,1*
',67$1&(6285&(
4XDGULODWHUDO
FKDUDFWHULVWLF
RQO\
581
,$,%
'HOWD
97V
:\H
97V
,%,&
,&,$
9$*9%*
9%*9&*
9&*9$*
9$%
9%&
9&$
,B
,B
9B
,B
,1
$(/(0(17
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
*1'',67=3.3$%
*1'',67='32$
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
*1'',67=3.3%
*1'',67='32%
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
*1'',67=3.3&
*1'',67='32&
581
%(/(0(17
581
&(/(0(17
0(025<
7,0(5
F\FOH
9B!SX
25
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=3.3
F\FOH
,B!SX
6(77,1*
*1'',67=6839
581
_,1,B_!3LFNXS
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
*1'',67=6831,1
*1'',67=',56831
23(132/(23
25
'/DQG/RQO\
$+&'5
Figure 573: GROUND DISTANCE ZONES 2 AND HIGHER SCHEME LOGIC

GROUND DIRECTIONAL SUPERVISION:
A dual (zero-sequence and negative-sequence) memory-polarized directional supervision applied to the ground distance
protection elements has been shown to give good directional integrity. However, a reverse double-line-to-ground fault can
lead to a maloperation of the ground element in a sound phase if the zone reach setting is increased to cover high resistance faults.
Ground distance zones 2 and higher use an additional ground directional supervision to enhance directional integrity. The
elements directional characteristic angle is used as a maximum torque angle together with a 90 limit angle.
The supervision is biased toward operation in order to avoid compromising the sensitivity of ground distance elements at
low signal levels. Otherwise, the reverse fault condition that generates concern will have high polarizing levels so that a correct reverse fault decision can be reliably made.
5-146
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
V_0 > 5 volts
SETTING
Distance Source
RUN
= V_0
= I_0
Zero-sequence
directional characteristic
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
TIMER
tpickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z2 DIR SUPN
AND
treset
Co-ordinating time:
pickup = 1.0 cycle, reset = 1.0 cycle
837009A7.CDR
Figure 574: GROUND DIRECTIONAL SUPERVISION SCHEME LOGIC

5.6.6 POWER SWING DETECT
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) POWER SWING DETECT
POWER SWING
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
POWER SWING
SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
POWER SWING
SHAPE: Mho Shape
Range: Mho Shape, Quad Shape
MESSAGE
POWER SWING
MODE: Two Step
Range: Two Step, Three Step
MESSAGE
POWER SWING
SUPV: 0.600 pu
MESSAGE
POWER SWING FWD

REACH: 50.00
MESSAGE
POWER SWING QUAD FWD

REACH MID: 60.00
MESSAGE
POWER SWING QUAD FWD

REACH OUT: 70.00
MESSAGE
POWER SWING FWD

RCA: 75
MESSAGE
POWER SWING REV

REACH: 50.00
MESSAGE
POWER SWING QUAD REV

REACH MID: 60.00
MESSAGE
POWER SWING QUAD REV

REACH OUT: 70.00
MESSAGE
POWER SWING REV

RCA: 75
MESSAGE
POWER SWING OUTER

LIMIT ANGLE: 120
MESSAGE
POWER SWING MIDDLE

LIMIT ANGLE: 90
MESSAGE
POWER SWING INNER

LIMIT ANGLE: 60
POWER SWING
DETECT
GE Multilin
5-147
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
POWER SWING OUTER

RGT BLD: 100.00
MESSAGE
POWER SWING OUTER

LFT BLD: 100.00
MESSAGE
POWER SWING MIDDLE

RGT BLD: 100.00
MESSAGE
POWER SWING MIDDLE

LFT BLD: 100.00
MESSAGE
POWER SWING INNER

RGT BLD: 100.00
MESSAGE
POWER SWING INNER

LFT BLD: 100.00
MESSAGE
POWER SWING PICKUP

DELAY 1: 0.030 s
MESSAGE
POWER SWING RESET

DELAY 1: 0.050 s
MESSAGE
POWER SWING PICKUP

DELAY 2: 0.017 s
MESSAGE
POWER SWING PICKUP

DELAY 3: 0.009 s
MESSAGE
POWER SWING PICKUP

DELAY 4: 0.017 s
MESSAGE
POWER SWING SEAL-IN

DELAY: 0.400 s
MESSAGE
POWER SWING TRIP

MODE: Delayed
Range: Early, Delayed
MESSAGE
POWER SWING BLK:

Off
Range: Flexlogic operand
MESSAGE
POWER SWING
TARGET: Self-Reset
MESSAGE
POWER SWING
EVENTS: Disabled
The power swing detect element provides both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The element measures the positive-sequence apparent impedance and traces its locus with respect to either two or three user-selectable
operating characteristic boundaries. Upon detecting appropriate timing relations, the blocking and tripping indications are
given through FlexLogic operands. The element incorporates an adaptive disturbance detector. This function does not
trigger on power swings, but is capable of detecting faster disturbances faults in particular that may occur during power
swings. Operation of this dedicated disturbance detector is signaled via the POWER SWING 50DD operand.
The power swing detect element asserts two outputs intended for blocking selected protection elements on power swings:
POWER SWING BLOCK is a traditional signal that is safely asserted for the entire duration of the power swing, and POWER
SWING UN/BLOCK is established in the same way, but resets when an extra disturbance is detected during the power swing.
The POWER SWING UN/BLOCK operand may be used for blocking selected protection elements if the intent is to respond to
faults during power swing conditions.

Different protection elements respond differently to power swings. If tripping is required for faults during power swing conditions, some elements may be blocked permanently (using the POWER SWING BLOCK operand), and others may be blocked
and dynamically unblocked upon fault detection (using the POWER SWING UN/BLOCK operand).
5-148
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The operating characteristic and logic figures should be viewed along with the following discussion to develop an understanding of the operation of the element.
The power swing detect element operates in three-step or two-step mode:
Three-step operation: The power swing blocking sequence essentially times the passage of the locus of the positivesequence impedance between the outer and the middle characteristic boundaries. If the locus enters the outer characteristic (indicated by the POWER SWING OUTER FlexLogic operand) but stays outside the middle characteristic (indicated by the POWER SWING MIDDLE FlexLogic operand) for an interval longer than POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1,
the power swing blocking signal (POWER SWING BLOCK FlexLogic operand) is established and sealed-in. The blocking signal resets when the locus leaves the outer characteristic, but not sooner than the POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1
time.
Two-step operation: If the two-step mode is selected, the sequence is identical, but it is the outer and inner characteristics that are used to time the power swing locus.
The out-of-step tripping feature operates as follows for three-step and two-step power swing detection modes:
Three-step operation: The out-of-step trip sequence identifies unstable power swings by determining if the impedance locus spends a finite time between the outer and middle characteristics and then a finite time between the middle
and inner characteristics. The first step is similar to the power swing blocking sequence. After timer POWER SWING
PICKUP DELAY 1 times out, latch 1 is set as long as the impedance stays within the outer characteristic.
If afterwards, at any time (given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the middle characteristic but stays outside the inner characteristic for a period of time defined as POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2, latch
2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic. If afterwards, at any time (given the impedance
stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the inner characteristic and stays there for a period of time
defined as POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3, latch 2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic;
the element is now ready to trip.
If the "Early" trip mode is selected, the POWER SWING TRIP operand is set immediately and sealed-in for the interval
set by the POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY. If the "Delayed" trip mode is selected, the element waits until the impedance
locus leaves the inner characteristic, then times out the POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2 and sets Latch 4; the element is
now ready to trip. The trip operand is set later, when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic.
Two-step operation: The two-step mode of operation is similar to the three-step mode with two exceptions. First, the
initial stage monitors the time spent by the impedance locus between the outer and inner characteristics. Second, the
stage involving the POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2 timer is bypassed. It is up to the user to integrate the blocking
(POWER SWING BLOCK) and tripping (POWER SWING TRIP) FlexLogic operands with other protection functions and
output contacts in order to make this element fully operational.
The element can be set to use either lens (mho) or rectangular (quadrilateral) characteristics as illustrated below. When set
to Mho, the element applies the right and left blinders as well. If the blinders are not required, their settings should be set
high enough to effectively disable the blinders.
GE Multilin
5-149
5 SETTINGS
TE
IN
NE
R
ID
DL
E
FWD RE
ACH
OU
CA
DR
FW
GL
V
RE
IT
A
RC
REV REAC
IT
R
NE
LIM
L
NG
DD
MI
AN
IM
EL
IN
OUTER LIMIT ANGLE
827843A2.CDR
Figure 575: POWER SWING DETECT MHO OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
842734A1.CDR
Figure 576: EFFECTS OF BLINDERS ON THE MHO CHARACTERISTICS
5-150
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
ACH OUT
ACH MID
REV REACH
FWD RCA
QUAD FWD RE
ACH OUT
OUTER RGT BL
QUAD REV RE
BLD
FWD REACH
OUTER LFT BL
INNER RGT BL
MIDDLE RGT
QUAD FWD RE
CH MID
QUAD REV REA
INNER LFT BL
MIDDLE LFT BL
842735A1.CDR
Figure 577: POWER SWING DETECT QUADRILATERAL OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

The FlexLogic output operands for the power swing detect element are described below:
The POWER SWING OUTER, POWER SWING MIDDLE, POWER SWING INNER, POWER SWING TMR2 PKP, POWER SWING
TMR3 PKP, and POWER SWING TMR4 PKP FlexLogic operands are auxiliary operands that could be used to facilitate
testing and special applications.
The POWER SWING BLOCK FlexLogic operand shall be used to block selected protection elements such as distance
functions.
The POWER SWING UN/BLOCK FlexLogic operand shall be used to block those protection elements that are intended
to be blocked under power swings, but subsequently unblocked should a fault occur after the power swing blocking
condition has been established.
The POWER SWING 50DD FlexLogic operand indicates that an adaptive disturbance detector integrated with the element has picked up. This operand will trigger on faults occurring during power swing conditions. This includes both
three-phase and single-pole-open conditions.
The POWER SWING INCOMING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an incoming locus (the
locus enters the inner characteristic).
The POWER SWING OUTGOING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an outgoing locus (the
locus leaving the outer characteristic). This operand can be used to count unstable swings and take certain action only
after pre-defined number of unstable power swings.
The POWER SWING TRIP FlexLogic operand is a trip command.
The settings for the power swing detect element are described below:
POWER SWING FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the entire power swing detection element. The setting
applies to both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions.
POWER SWING SOURCE: The source setting identifies the signal source for both blocking and tripping functions.
POWER SWING SHAPE: This setting selects the shapes (either Mho or Quad) of the outer, middle and, inner characteristics of the power swing detect element. The operating principle is not affected. The Mho characteristics use the
left and right blinders.
GE Multilin
5-151
5 SETTINGS
POWER SWING MODE: This setting selects between the two-step and three-step operating modes and applies to
both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The three-step mode applies if there is enough space
between the maximum load impedances and distance characteristics of the relay that all three (outer, middle, and
inner) characteristics can be placed between the load and the distance characteristics. Whether the spans between
the outer and middle as well as the middle and inner characteristics are sufficient should be determined by analysis of
the fastest power swings expected in correlation with settings of the power swing timers.
The two-step mode uses only the outer and inner characteristics for both blocking and tripping functions. This leaves
more space in heavily loaded systems to place two power swing characteristics between the distance characteristics
and the maximum load, but allows for only one determination of the impedance trajectory.
POWER SWING SUPV: A common overcurrent pickup level supervises all three power swing characteristics. The
supervision responds to the positive sequence current.
POWER SWING FWD REACH: This setting specifies the forward reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner
quadrilateral characteristic. For a simple system consisting of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach should be
higher than the sum of the line and remote source positive-sequence impedances. Detailed transient stability studies
may be needed for complex systems in order to determine this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified
by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting.
POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID: This setting specifies the forward reach of the middle quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if
the shape setting is Mho.
POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT: This setting specifies the forward reach of the outer quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if
POWER SWING FWD RCA: This setting specifies the angle of the forward reach impedance for the mho characteristics, angles of all the blinders, and both forward and reverse reach impedances of the quadrilateral characteristics.
POWER SWING REV REACH: This setting specifies the reverse reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner
quadrilateral characteristic. For a simple system of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach should be higher than
the positive-sequence impedance of the local source. Detailed transient stability studies may be needed for complex
systems to determine this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING REV RCA setting
for Mho, and the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting for Quad.
POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID: This setting specifies the reverse reach of the middle quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if
POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH OUT: This setting specifies the reverse reach of the outer quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if
POWER SWING REV RCA: This setting specifies the angle of the reverse reach impedance for the mho characteristics. This setting applies to mho shapes only.
POWER SWING OUTER LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the outer power swing characteristic. The convention
depicted in the Power swing detect characteristic diagram should be observed: values greater than 90 result in an
apple-shaped characteristic; values less than 90 result in a lens shaped characteristic. This angle must be selected in
consideration of the maximum expected load. If the maximum load angle is known, the outer limit angle should be
coordinated with a 20 security margin. Detailed studies may be needed for complex systems to determine this setting.
This setting applies to mho shapes only.
POWER SWING MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the middle power swing detect characteristic. It is relevant only for the 3-step mode. A typical value would be close to the average of the outer and inner limit angles. This
setting applies to mho shapes only.
POWER SWING INNER LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the inner power swing detect characteristic. The inner
characteristic is used by the out-of-step tripping function: beyond the inner characteristic out-of-step trip action is definite (the actual trip may be delayed as per the TRIP MODE setting). Therefore, this angle must be selected in consideration to the power swing angle beyond which the system becomes unstable and cannot recover.
5-152
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The inner characteristic is also used by the power swing blocking function in the two-step mode. In this case, set this
angle large enough so that the characteristics of the distance elements are safely enclosed by the inner characteristic.
This setting applies to mho shapes only.
POWER SWING OUTER, MIDDLE, and INNER RGT BLD: These settings specify the resistive reach of the right
blinder. The blinder applies to both Mho and Quad characteristics. Set these value high if no blinder is required for
the Mho characteristic.
POWER SWING OUTER, MIDDLE, and INNER LFT BLD: These settings specify the resistive reach of the left blinder.
Enter a positive value; the relay automatically uses a negative value. The blinder applies to both Mho and Quad
characteristics. Set this value high if no blinder is required for the Mho characteristic.
POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1: All the coordinating timers are related to each other and should be set to detect
the fastest expected power swing and produce out-of-step tripping in a secure manner. The timers should be set in
consideration to the power swing detect characteristics, mode of power swing detect operation and mode of out-ofstep tripping. This timer defines the interval that the impedance locus must spend between the outer and inner characteristics (two-step operating mode), or between the outer and middle characteristics (three-step operating mode)
before the power swing blocking signal is established. This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for
the impedance locus to travel between the two selected characteristics during the fastest expected power swing. This
setting is relevant for both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping.
POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1: This setting defines the dropout delay for the power swing blocking signal. Detection of a condition requiring a block output sets latch 1 after PICKUP DELAY 1 time. When the impedance locus leaves
the outer characteristic, timer POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1 is started. When the timer times-out the latch is reset. This
setting should be selected to give extra security for the power swing blocking action.
POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2: Controls the out-of-step tripping function in the three-step mode only. This timer
defines the interval the impedance locus must spend between the middle and inner characteristics before the second
step of the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed. This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for
the impedance locus to travel between the two characteristics during the fastest expected power swing.
POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3: Controls the out-of-step tripping function only. It defines the interval the impedance locus must spend within the inner characteristic before the last step of the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed and the element is armed to trip. The actual moment of tripping is controlled by the TRIP MODE setting. This time
delay is provided for extra security before the out-of-step trip action is executed.
POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 4: Controls the out-of-step tripping function in Delayed trip mode only. This timer
defines the interval the impedance locus must spend outside the inner characteristic but within the outer characteristic
before the element is armed for the delayed trip. The delayed trip occurs when the impedance leaves the outer characteristic. This time delay is provided for extra security and should be set considering the fastest expected power swing.
POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY: The out-of-step trip FlexLogic operand (POWER SWING TRIP) is sealed-in for the
specified period of time. The sealing-in is crucial in the delayed trip mode, as the original trip signal is a very short
pulse occurring when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic after the out-of-step sequence is completed.
POWER SWING TRIP MODE: Selection of the Early trip mode results in an instantaneous trip after the last step in
the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed. The early trip mode will stress the circuit breakers as the currents at
that moment are high (the electromotive forces of the two equivalent systems are approximately 180 apart). Selection
of the Delayed trip mode results in a trip at the moment when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic.
delayed trip mode will relax the operating conditions for the breakers as the currents at that moment are low. The
selection should be made considering the capability of the breakers in the system.
POWER SWING BLK: This setting specifies the FlexLogic operand used for blocking the out-of-step function only.
The power swing blocking function is operational all the time as long as the element is enabled. The blocking signal
resets the output POWER SWING TRIP operand but does not stop the out-of-step tripping sequence.
GE Multilin
5-153
5 SETTINGS
SETTINGS
SETTING
POWER SWING
FUNCTION:
POWER SWING
SHAPE:
POWER SWING OUTER

LIMIT ANGLE:
POWER SWING FWD

REACH:
POWER SWING MIDDLE

LIMIT ANGLE:
POWER SWING QUAD

FWD REACH MID:
POWER SWING INNER

LIMIT ANGLE:
POWER SWING QUAD

FWD REACH OUT:
POWER SWING OUTER

RGT BLD:
POWER SWING FWD

RCA:
POWER SWING OUTER

LFT BLD:
POWER SWING REV

REACH:
POWER SWING MIDDLE

RGT BLD:
POWER SWING QUAD REV POWER SWING MIDDLE

REACH MID:
LFT BLD:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
POWER SWING QUAD REV POWER SWING INNER

REACH OUT:
RGT BLD:
SETTING
POWER SWING REV

RCA:
POWER SWING SOURCE:
POWER SWING INNER

LFT BLD:
RUN
V_1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OUTER IMPEDANCE
REGION
I_1
AND
RUN
POWER SWING OUTER

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
MIDDLE IMPEDANCE
REGION
AND
RUN
POWER SWING MIDDLE

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
INNER IMPEDANCE
REGION
AND
POWER SWING INNER
SETTING
POWER SWING
SUPV:
RUN
I_1 > PICKUP
827840A3.CDR
Figure 578: POWER SWING DETECT SCHEME LOGIC (1 of 3)

SETTING
POWER SWING FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
TIMER
Enabled = 1
0
SETTING
10 cycles
I_0
| |I_0| - |I_0'|| > K_0
I_1
| |I_1| - |I_1'|| > K_1
I_2
| |I_2| - |I_2'|| > K_2
TIMER
AND
RUN
OR
POWER SWING SOURCE:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
POWER SWING 50DD
4 cycles
I_0, I_1, I_2 - present values

I_0', I_1', I_2' - half-a-cycle old values
K_0, K_2 - three times the average change over last power cycle
K_1 - four times the average change over last power cycle
842008A1.CDR
5-154
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
POWER SWING INNER
POWER SWING OUTER
POWER SWING MIDDLE
AND
SETTING
SETTINGS
POWER SWING MODE:
POWER SWING
DELAY 1 PICKUP:
POWER SWING
DELAY 1 RESET:
3-step
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
tPKP
tRST
AND
POWER SWING BLOCK
S Q1
L1
2-step
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
L5
POWER SWING 50DD
POWER SWING UN/BLOCK
S Q5
OR
OR
SETTING
POWER SWING
DELAY 2 PICKUP:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
tPKP
AND
S Q2
L2
R
3-step
2-step
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
POWER SWING
DELAY 3 PICKUP:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
tPKP
0
POWER SWING INCOMING
S Q3
L3
R
SETTING
POWER SWING TRIP
MODE:
SETTING
SETTING
POWER SWING
DELAY 4 PICKUP:
AND
Early
tPKP
0
S Q4
L4
R
POWER SWING
SEAL-IN DELAY:
0
tRST
AND
POWER SWING TRIP
Delayed
SETTING
NOTE:
L1 AND L4 LATCHES ARE SET DOMINANT
L2, L3 AND L5 LATCHES ARE RESET DOMINANT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
POWER SWING BLK:
Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
POWER SWING OUTGOING
827841A4.CDR
GE Multilin
5-155
5 SETTINGS
5.6.7 LOAD ENCROACHMENT
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) LOAD ENCROACHMENT
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
MIN VOLT: 0.250 pu
MESSAGE
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
REACH: 1.00
MESSAGE
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
ANGLE: 30
MESSAGE
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
PKP DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
RST DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
LOAD ENCRMNT BLK:

Off
Range: Flexlogic operand
MESSAGE
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
EVENTS: Disabled
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
The load encroachment element responds to the positive-sequence voltage and current and applies a characteristic shown
in the figure below.
ANGLE
REACH
REACH
ANGLE
R
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
OPERATE
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
OPERATE
827846A1.CDR
Figure 581: LOAD ENCROACHMENT CHARACTERISTIC

The element operates if the positive-sequence voltage is above a settable level and asserts its output signal that can be
used to block selected protection elements such as distance or phase overcurrent. The following figure shows an effect of
the load encroachment characteristics used to block the quadrilateral distance element.
5-156
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
837731A1.CDR
Figure 582: LOAD ENCROACHMENT APPLIED TO DISTANCE ELEMENT
LOAD ENCROACHMENT MIN VOLT: This setting specifies the minimum positive-sequence voltage required for operation of the element. If the voltage is below this threshold a blocking signal will not be asserted by the element. When
selecting this setting one must remember that the L90 measures the phase-to-ground sequence voltages regardless of
the VT connection.
The nominal VT secondary voltage as specified with the SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK X5 PHASE
setting is the per-unit base for this setting.
VT SECONDARY
LOAD ENCROACHMENT REACH: This setting specifies the resistive reach of the element as shown in the Load
encroachment characteristic diagram. This setting should be entered in secondary ohms and be calculated as the positive-sequence resistance seen by the relay under maximum load conditions and unity power factor.
LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE: This setting specifies the size of the blocking region as shown on the Load
encroachment characteristic diagram and applies to the positive-sequence impedance.
SETTING
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTINGS
SETTING
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
REACH:
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
ANGLE:
LOAD ENCRMNT BLK:

Off=0
AND
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
RST DELAY:
SETTING
SETTING
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
SOURCE:
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
MIN VOLT:
Pos Seq Voltage (V_1)
RUN
SETTINGS
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
PKP DELAY:
Load Encroachment
Characteristic
t PKP
t RST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
LOAD ENCHR PKP
LOAD ENCHR DPO
LOAD ENCHR OP
V_1 > Pickup
Pos Seq Current (I_1)

827847A2.CDR
Figure 583: LOAD ENCROACHMENT SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-157
5 SETTINGS
5.6.8 PHASE CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT
PHASE CURRENT
PHASE TOC1
See page 5-163.
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC2
See page 5-163.
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1
See page 5-165.
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC2
See page 5-165.
MESSAGE
PHASE
DIRECTIONAL 1
See page 5-167.
MESSAGE
PHASE
DIRECTIONAL 2
See page 5-167.
b) INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT CHARACTERISTICS

The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the time overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and I2t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices.
If none of these curve shapes is adequate, FlexCurves may be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics.
The definite time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is required.
Table 512: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES
IEEE
IEC
GE TYPE IAC
OTHER
IEEE Extremely Inverse
IEC Curve A (BS142)
IAC Extremely Inverse
I2t
IEEE Very Inverse
IEC Curve B (BS142)
IAC Very Inverse
FlexCurves A, B, C, and D
IEEE Moderately Inverse
IEC Curve C (BS142)
IAC Inverse
Recloser Curves
IEC Short Inverse
IAC Short Inverse
Definite Time
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with
the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional
to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1
or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.
Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the
variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: Instantaneous and Timed. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity
directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Timed selection can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical relays.
5-158
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
IEEE CURVES:
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications
for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae:
A
tr
---------------------------------- + B
----------------------------------I - p
2
T = TDM --------------,
T
TDM
=
I
RESET
1 ----------------
I pickup 1
I pickup
where:
(EQ 5.10)
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
A, B, p = constants, TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed),
tr = characteristic constant
Table 513: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEEE CURVE SHAPE
TR
IEEE Extremely Inverse
28.2
0.1217
2.0000
29.1
IEEE Very Inverse
19.61
0.491
2.0000
21.6
IEEE Moderately Inverse
0.0515
0.1140
0.02000
4.85
Table 514: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
CURRENT ( I / Ipickup)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE

0.5
11.341
4.761
1.823
1.001
0.648
0.464
0.355
0.285
0.237
0.203
1.0
22.682
9.522
3.647
2.002
1.297
0.927
0.709
0.569
0.474
0.407
2.0
45.363
19.043
7.293
4.003
2.593
1.855
1.418
1.139
0.948
0.813
4.0
90.727
38.087
14.587
8.007
5.187
3.710
2.837
2.277
1.897
1.626
6.0
136.090
57.130
21.880
12.010
7.780
5.564
4.255
3.416
2.845
2.439
8.0
181.454
76.174
29.174
16.014
10.374
7.419
5.674
4.555
3.794
3.252
10.0
226.817
95.217
36.467
20.017
12.967
9.274
7.092
5.693
4.742
4.065
IEEE VERY INVERSE

0.5
8.090
3.514
1.471
0.899
0.654
0.526
0.450
0.401
0.368
0.345
1.0
16.179
7.028
2.942
1.798
1.308
1.051
0.900
0.802
0.736
0.689
2.0
32.358
14.055
5.885
3.597
2.616
2.103
1.799
1.605
1.472
1.378
4.0
64.716
28.111
11.769
7.193
5.232
4.205
3.598
3.209
2.945
2.756
6.0
97.074
42.166
17.654
10.790
7.849
6.308
5.397
4.814
4.417
4.134
8.0
129.432
56.221
23.538
14.387
10.465
8.410
7.196
6.418
5.889
5.513
10.0
161.790
70.277
29.423
17.983
13.081
10.513
8.995
8.023
7.361
6.891
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE

0.5
3.220
1.902
1.216
0.973
0.844
0.763
0.706
0.663
0.630
0.603
1.0
6.439
3.803
2.432
1.946
1.688
1.526
1.412
1.327
1.260
1.207
2.0
12.878
7.606
4.864
3.892
3.377
3.051
2.823
2.653
2.521
2.414
4.0
25.756
15.213
9.729
7.783
6.753
6.102
5.647
5.307
5.041
4.827
6.0
38.634
22.819
14.593
11.675
10.130
9.153
8.470
7.960
7.562
7.241
8.0
51.512
30.426
19.458
15.567
13.507
12.204
11.294
10.614
10.083
9.654
10.0
64.390
38.032
24.322
19.458
16.883
15.255
14.117
13.267
12.604
12.068
GE Multilin
5-159
5 SETTINGS
IEC CURVES
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These
are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
K
tr
---------------------------------------------------------------------------2
T = TDM ( I I pickup ) E 1 , T RESET = TDM 1 ( I I
pickup )
where:
(EQ 5.11)
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting, K, E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is Timed)
Table 515: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE
IEC Curve A (BS142)
TR
0.140
0.020
9.7
IEC Curve B (BS142)
13.500
1.000
43.2
IEC Curve C (BS142)
80.000
2.000
58.2
IEC Short Inverse
0.050
0.040
0.500
Table 516: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
0.05
0.860
0.501
0.315
0.249
0.214
0.192
0.176
0.165
0.156
0.149
0.10
1.719
1.003
0.630
0.498
0.428
0.384
0.353
0.330
0.312
0.297
0.20
3.439
2.006
1.260
0.996
0.856
0.767
0.706
0.659
0.623
0.594
0.40
6.878
4.012
2.521
1.992
1.712
1.535
1.411
1.319
1.247
1.188
0.60
10.317
6.017
3.781
2.988
2.568
2.302
2.117
1.978
1.870
1.782
0.80
13.755
8.023
5.042
3.984
3.424
3.070
2.822
2.637
2.493
2.376
1.00
17.194
10.029
6.302
4.980
4.280
3.837
3.528
3.297
3.116
2.971
0.05
1.350
0.675
0.338
0.225
0.169
0.135
0.113
0.096
0.084
0.075
0.10
2.700
1.350
0.675
0.450
0.338
0.270
0.225
0.193
0.169
0.150
0.20
5.400
2.700
1.350
0.900
0.675
0.540
0.450
0.386
0.338
0.300
0.40
10.800
5.400
2.700
1.800
1.350
1.080
0.900
0.771
0.675
0.600
0.60
16.200
8.100
4.050
2.700
2.025
1.620
1.350
1.157
1.013
0.900
0.80
21.600
10.800
5.400
3.600
2.700
2.160
1.800
1.543
1.350
1.200
1.00
27.000
13.500
6.750
4.500
3.375
2.700
2.250
1.929
1.688
1.500
0.05
3.200
1.333
0.500
0.267
0.167
0.114
0.083
0.063
0.050
0.040
0.10
6.400
2.667
1.000
0.533
0.333
0.229
0.167
0.127
0.100
0.081
0.20
12.800
5.333
2.000
1.067
0.667
0.457
0.333
0.254
0.200
0.162
0.40
25.600
10.667
4.000
2.133
1.333
0.914
0.667
0.508
0.400
0.323
0.60
38.400
16.000
6.000
3.200
2.000
1.371
1.000
0.762
0.600
0.485
0.80
51.200
21.333
8.000
4.267
2.667
1.829
1.333
1.016
0.800
0.646
1.00
64.000
26.667
10.000
5.333
3.333
2.286
1.667
1.270
1.000
0.808
0.026
IEC CURVE A
IEC CURVE B
IEC CURVE C
IEC SHORT TIME

0.05
0.153
0.089
0.056
0.044
0.038
0.034
0.031
0.029
0.027
0.10
0.306
0.178
0.111
0.088
0.075
0.067
0.062
0.058
0.054
0.052
0.20
0.612
0.356
0.223
0.175
0.150
0.135
0.124
0.115
0.109
0.104
0.40
1.223
0.711
0.445
0.351
0.301
0.269
0.247
0.231
0.218
0.207
0.60
1.835
1.067
0.668
0.526
0.451
0.404
0.371
0.346
0.327
0.311
0.80
2.446
1.423
0.890
0.702
0.602
0.538
0.494
0.461
0.435
0.415
1.00
3.058
1.778
1.113
0.877
0.752
0.673
0.618
0.576
0.544
0.518
5-160
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
IAC CURVES:
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
D
B
E
tr
T = TDM A + ------------------------------ + -------------------------------------2- + -------------------------------------3- , T RESET = TDM ------------------------------(
C
I
I
I
I
(
(
C
)
(
(
C
)
I
I
2
pkp
pkp
pkp
1 ( I I pkp )
where:
(EQ 5.12)
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = Input current, Ipkp = Pickup Current setting, A to E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is Timed)
Table 517: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC CURVE SHAPE
TR
IAC Extreme Inverse
0.0040
0.6379
IAC Very Inverse
0.0900
0.7955
0.6200
1.7872
0.2461
6.008
0.1000
1.2885
7.9586
IAC Inverse
0.2078
4.678
0.8630
0.8000
0.4180
0.1947
0.990
IAC Short Inverse
0.0428
0.0609
0.6200
0.0010
0.0221
0.222
Table 518: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES

MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE

0.5
1.699
0.749
0.303
0.178
0.123
0.093
0.074
0.062
0.053
0.046
1.0
3.398
1.498
0.606
0.356
0.246
0.186
0.149
0.124
0.106
0.093
2.0
6.796
2.997
1.212
0.711
0.491
0.372
0.298
0.248
0.212
0.185
4.0
13.591
5.993
2.423
1.422
0.983
0.744
0.595
0.495
0.424
0.370
6.0
20.387
8.990
3.635
2.133
1.474
1.115
0.893
0.743
0.636
0.556
8.0
27.183
11.987
4.846
2.844
1.966
1.487
1.191
0.991
0.848
0.741
10.0
33.979
14.983
6.058
3.555
2.457
1.859
1.488
1.239
1.060
0.926
IAC VERY INVERSE

0.5
1.451
0.656
0.269
0.172
0.133
0.113
0.101
0.093
0.087
0.083
1.0
2.901
1.312
0.537
0.343
0.266
0.227
0.202
0.186
0.174
0.165
2.0
5.802
2.624
1.075
0.687
0.533
0.453
0.405
0.372
0.349
0.331
4.0
11.605
5.248
2.150
1.374
1.065
0.906
0.810
0.745
0.698
0.662
6.0
17.407
7.872
3.225
2.061
1.598
1.359
1.215
1.117
1.046
0.992
8.0
23.209
10.497
4.299
2.747
2.131
1.813
1.620
1.490
1.395
1.323
10.0
29.012
13.121
5.374
3.434
2.663
2.266
2.025
1.862
1.744
1.654
0.5
0.578
0.375
0.266
0.221
0.196
0.180
0.168
0.160
0.154
0.148
1.0
1.155
0.749
0.532
0.443
0.392
0.360
0.337
0.320
0.307
0.297
2.0
2.310
1.499
1.064
0.885
0.784
0.719
0.674
0.640
0.614
0.594
4.0
4.621
2.997
2.128
1.770
1.569
1.439
1.348
1.280
1.229
1.188
6.0
6.931
4.496
3.192
2.656
2.353
2.158
2.022
1.921
1.843
1.781
8.0
9.242
5.995
4.256
3.541
3.138
2.878
2.695
2.561
2.457
2.375
10.0
11.552
7.494
5.320
4.426
3.922
3.597
3.369
3.201
3.072
2.969
0.025
IAC INVERSE
IAC SHORT INVERSE

0.5
0.072
0.047
0.035
0.031
0.028
0.027
0.026
0.026
0.025
1.0
0.143
0.095
0.070
0.061
0.057
0.054
0.052
0.051
0.050
0.049
2.0
0.286
0.190
0.140
0.123
0.114
0.108
0.105
0.102
0.100
0.099
4.0
0.573
0.379
0.279
0.245
0.228
0.217
0.210
0.204
0.200
0.197
6.0
0.859
0.569
0.419
0.368
0.341
0.325
0.314
0.307
0.301
0.296
8.0
1.145
0.759
0.559
0.490
0.455
0.434
0.419
0.409
0.401
0.394
10.0
1.431
0.948
0.699
0.613
0.569
0.542
0.524
0.511
0.501
0.493
GE Multilin
5-161
5 SETTINGS
I2t CURVES:
The curves for the I2t are derived from the formulae:
100
100
----------------------------------------------------I 2 , T RESET = TDM I 2
T = TDM ----------------------------- I pickup
I pickup
where:
(EQ 5.13)
T = Operate Time (sec.); TDM = Multiplier Setting; I = Input Current; Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting;
TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Table 519: I2T CURVE TRIP TIMES

MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
0.01
0.44
0.25
0.11
0.06
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.10
4.44
2.50
1.11
0.63
0.40
0.28
0.20
0.16
0.12
0.10
1.00
44.44
25.00
11.11
6.25
4.00
2.78
2.04
1.56
1.23
1.00
10.00
444.44
250.00
111.11
62.50
40.00
27.78
20.41
15.63
12.35
10.00
100.00
4444.4
2500.0
1111.1
625.00
400.00
277.78
204.08
156.25
123.46
100.00
600.00
26666.7
15000.0
6666.7
3750.0
2400.0
1666.7
1224.5
937.50
740.74
600.00
FLEXCURVES:
The custom FlexCurves are described in detail in the FlexCurves section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the
FlexCurves are derived from the formulae:
I
T = TDM FlexCurve Time at ----------------
I pickup
I
when ---------------- 1.00
I pickup
I
T RESET = TDM FlexCurve Time at ----------------
I pickup
where:
I
when ---------------- 0.98
I pickup
(EQ 5.14)
(EQ 5.15)
T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
DEFINITE TIME CURVE:

The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base
definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instantaneous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms.
where:
T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup
(EQ 5.16)
T RESET = TDM in seconds
(EQ 5.17)
T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
RECLOSER CURVES:
The L90 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. Please refer to the FlexCurve section in this chapter for additional details.
5-162
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
c) PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT PHASE TOC1(2)
PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: See Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
RESET: Instantaneous
Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE

RESTRAINT: Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A:

Off
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B:

Off
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C:

Off
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
PHASE TOC1
1.00
The phase time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or
be used as a simple definite time element. The phase current input quantities may be programmed as fundamental phasor
magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse Time overcurrent
curves characteristic sub-section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times, and reset operation). When the element is
blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
The PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting can be dynamically reduced by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This is accomplished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve (see
the figure below); the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting. If the voltage restraint feature
is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.
GE Multilin
5-163
Multiplier for Pickup Current
5 SETTINGS
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Phase-Phase Voltage VT Nominal Phase-phase Voltage

818784A4.CDR
Figure 584: PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC

SETTING
PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-A :
Off=0
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-B:
Off=0
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
INPUT:
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-C:
Off=0
PHASE TOC1
PICKUP:
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
CURVE:
PHASE TOC1
SOURCE:
PHASE TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
IA
PHASE TOC1
RESET:
IB
IC
AND
Seq=ABC Seq=ACB
VAB
VBC
VCA
VAC
VBA
VCB
RUN
MULTIPLY INPUTS
RUN
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase A
RUN
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase B
Set
Calculate Multiplier
Set
Set
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase C
RUN
IA
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE TOC1 A PKP
PICKUP
PHASE TOC1 A DPO
t
AND
RUN
IB
PHASE TOC1 A OP
PHASE TOC1 B PKP
PICKUP
PHASE TOC1 B DPO
t
AND
RUN
IC
PHASE TOC1 B OP
PHASE TOC1 C PKP
PICKUP
PHASE TOC1 C DPO
PHASE TOC1 C OP
SETTING
OR
PHASE TOC1 VOLT

RESTRAINT:
PHASE TOC1 PKP
OR
PHASE TOC1 OP
Enabled
AND
PHASE TOC1 DPO

827072A4.CDR
Figure 585: PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-164
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
d) PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT PHASE IOC 1(2)
PHASE IOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 PICKUP

DELAY:
0.00 s
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 RESET

DELAY:
0.00 s
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A:

Off
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B:

Off
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C:

Off
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
PHASE IOC1
The phase instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
definite time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude. The phase instantaneous overcurrent timing
curves are shown below for form-A contacts in a 60 Hz system.
GE Multilin
5-165
5 SETTINGS

0LOOLVHFRQGV

0D[LPXP

0LQLPXP

0XOWLSOHRISLFNXS
$&'5
Figure 586: PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT TIMING CURVES
SETTING
Function
= Enabled
= Disabled
Pickup
AND
Reset Delay
TPKP
RUN
IA > Pickup
AND
SETTING
Source
= IB
= IC
AND
PHASE IOC1 B PKP

PHASE IOC1 B DPO
PHASE IOC1 C PKP
TRST
TPKP
RUN
IB > Pickup
= IA
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PHASE IOC1 A PKP
PHASE IOC1 A DPO
SETTINGS
Pickup Delay
SETTING
PHASE IOC1 C DPO

TRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PHASE IOC1 A OP
PHASE IOC1 B OP
TPKP
RUN
IC > Pickup
TRST
PHASE IOC1 C OP
SETTINGS
Block A
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE IOC1 PKP
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE IOC1 OP
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE IOC1 DPO
= Off
Block B
= Off
Block C
= Off
827033A6.CDR
Figure 587: PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-166
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
e) PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1(2)
PHASE DIR 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
PHASE DIR 1
ECA: 30
MESSAGE
PHASE DIR POL V1

THRESHOLD: 0.700 pu
MESSAGE
PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK

WHEN V MEM EXP: No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
PHASE DIR 1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
PHASE DIR 1
EVENTS: Disabled
PHASE
DIRECTIONAL 1
The phase directional elements (one for each of phases A, B, and C) determine the phase current flow direction for steady
state and fault conditions and can be used to control the operation of the phase overcurrent elements via the BLOCK inputs
of these elements.
S
UT
TP
OU
90
VAG (Unfaulted)
Fault angle
set at 60 Lag
VPol
VAG(Faulted)
IA
ECA
set at 30
VBC
VBC
VCG
VBG
+90
Phasors for Phase A Polarization:

VPol = VBC (1/_ECA) = polarizing voltage
IA = operating current
ECA = Element Characteristic Angle at 30
827800A2.CDR
Figure 588: PHASE A DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION

This element is intended to apply a block signal to an overcurrent element to prevent an operation when current is flowing
in a particular direction. The direction of current flow is determined by measuring the phase angle between the current from
the phase CTs and the line-line voltage from the VTs, based on the 90 or quadrature connection. If there is a requirement
to supervise overcurrent elements for flows in opposite directions, such as can happen through a bus-tie breaker, two
phase directional elements should be programmed with opposite element characteristic angle (ECA) settings.
GE Multilin
5-167
5 SETTINGS
To increase security for three phase faults very close to the VTs used to measure the polarizing voltage, a voltage memory
feature is incorporated. This feature stores the polarizing voltage the moment before the voltage collapses, and uses it to
determine direction. The voltage memory remains valid for one second after the voltage has collapsed.
The main component of the phase directional element is the phase angle comparator with two inputs: the operating signal
(phase current) and the polarizing signal (the line voltage, shifted in the leading direction by the characteristic angle, ECA).
The following table shows the operating and polarizing signals used for phase directional control:
PHASE
OPERATING
SIGNAL
POLARIZING SIGNAL Vpol

ABC PHASE SEQUENCE
ACB PHASE SEQUENCE
angle of IA
angle of VBC (1ECA)
angle of VCB (1ECA)
angle of IB
angle of VCA (1ECA)
angle of VAC 1ECA)
angle of IC
angle of VAB (1ECA)
angle of VBA (1ECA)
MODE OF OPERATION:
When the function is Disabled, or the operating current is below 5% CT nominal, the element output is 0.
When the function is Enabled, the operating current is above 5% CT nominal, and the polarizing voltage is above
the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL value, the element output is dependent on
the phase angle between the operating and polarizing signals:
The element output is logic 0 when the operating current is within polarizing voltage 90.
For all other angles, the element output is logic 1.
Once the voltage memory has expired, the phase overcurrent elements under directional control can be set to block or
trip on overcurrent as follows:
When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to Yes, the directional element will block the operation of any phase
overcurrent element under directional control when voltage memory expires.
When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to No, the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements
under directional control when voltage memory expires.
In all cases, directional blocking will be permitted to resume when the polarizing voltage becomes greater than the polarizing voltage threshold.
SETTINGS:
PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: This setting is used to select the source for the operating and polarizing signals.
The operating current for the phase directional element is the phase current for the selected current source. The polarizing voltage is the line voltage from the phase VTs, based on the 90 or quadrature connection and shifted in the
leading direction by the element characteristic angle (ECA).
PHASE DIR 1 ECA: This setting is used to select the element characteristic angle, i.e. the angle by which the polarizing voltage is shifted in the leading direction to achieve dependable operation. In the design of the UR-series elements,
a block is applied to an element by asserting logic 1 at the blocking input. This element should be programmed via the
ECA setting so that the output is logic 1 for current in the non-tripping direction.
PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD: This setting is used to establish the minimum level of voltage for which the phase
angle measurement is reliable. The setting is based on VT accuracy. The default value is 0.700 pu.
PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP: This setting is used to select the required operation upon expiration of
voltage memory. When set to "Yes", the directional element blocks the operation of any phase overcurrent element
under directional control, when voltage memory expires; when set to "No", the directional element allows tripping of
phase overcurrent elements under directional control.
NOTE
5-168
The phase directional element responds to the forward load current. In the case of a following reverse fault,
the element needs some time in the order of 8 ms to establish a blocking signal. Some protection elements such as instantaneous overcurrent may respond to reverse faults before the blocking signal is
established. Therefore, a coordination time of at least 10 ms must be added to all the instantaneous protection elements under the supervision of the phase directional element. If current reversal is of a concern, a
longer delay in the order of 20 ms may be needed.
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
PHASE DIR 1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTING
AND
PHASE DIR 1
BLOCK:
Off=0
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE DIR 1 ECA:

I
PHASE DIR 1 SOURCE:
0.05 pu
AND
RUN
0
Vpol
IA
Seq=ABC
Seq=ACB
VBC
VCB
1
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
PHASE DIR 1 POL V

THRESHOLD:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
-Use V when V Min

-Use V memory when
V < Min
V
MINIMUM
PH DIR1 BLK
PH DIR1 BLK A
OR
MEMORY TIMER
1 cycle
1 sec
AND
USE ACTUAL VOLTAGE
SETTING
PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK OC
WHEN V MEM EXP:
USE MEMORIZED VOLTAGE
No
Yes
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE B LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A
PH DIR1 BLK B
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE C LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A
PH DIR1 BLK C
827078A6.CDR
Figure 589: PHASE DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC

5.6.9 NEUTRAL CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT
NEUTRAL CURRENT
GE Multilin
NEUTRAL TOC1
See page 5-170.
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC2
See page 5-170.
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1
See page 5-171.
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC2
See page 5-171.
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL
DIRECTIONAL OC1
See page 5-172.
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL
DIRECTIONAL OC2
See page 5-172.
5-169
5 SETTINGS
b) NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51N)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL TOC1(2)
NEUTRAL TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: See OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
NEUTRAL TOC1
1.00
The neutral time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current
or be used as a simple definite time element. The neutral current input value is a quantity calculated as 3Io from the phase
currents and may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the
application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse time overcurrent curve
characteristics section for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time
accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
SOURCE:
IN
AND
SETTINGS
NEUTRAL TOC1
INPUT:
NEUTRAL TOC1
PICKUP:
NEUTRAL TOC1
CURVE:
NEUTRAL TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
NEUTRAL TOC 1
RESET:
IN PICKUP
RUN
t
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0
827034A3.VSD
Figure 590: NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-170
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
c) NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50N)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL IOC1(2)
NEUTRAL IOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1
PICKUP:
1.000 pu
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP

DELAY:
0.00 s
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET

DELAY:
0.00 s
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
NEUTRAL IOC1
The neutral instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a
definite time function. The element essentially responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency phasor calculated from the phase currents. A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance. A small portion
(6.25%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming
the operating quantity of the element as follows:
I op = 3 ( I_0 K I_1 ) where K = 1 16
(EQ 5.18)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents
resulting from:
System unbalances under heavy load conditions
Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults.
Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults.
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of
pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:
I op = 0.9375 I injected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: I op = 3 I injected ).
SETTING
SETTINGS
NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
SETTING
Enabled=1
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP:
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:
AND
RUN
3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP
NEUTRAL IOC1
PICKUP DELAY :
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEUTRAL IOC1
RESET DELAY :
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP

NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO
tPKP
tRST
NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
Off=0
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 SOURCE:
827035A4.CDR
I_0
Figure 591: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-171
5 SETTINGS
d) NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67N)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1(2)
NEUTRAL DIR OC1

FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1

POLARIZING: Voltage
Range: Voltage, Current, Dual
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL

VOLT: Calculated V0
Range: Calculated V0, Measured VX
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP

CURR: Calculated 3I0
Range: Calculated 3I0, Measured IG
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: 0.063
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1

OFFSET: 0.00
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD

ECA: 75 Lag
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD

LIMIT ANGLE: 90
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD

PICKUP: 0.050 pu
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV

LIMIT ANGLE: 90
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV

PICKUP: 0.050 pu
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK:

Off
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1

TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1

EVENTS: Disabled
NEUTRAL
DIRECTIONAL OC1
The neutral directional overcurrent element provides both forward and reverse fault direction indications the NEUTRAL DIR
OC1 FWD and NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV operands, respectively. The output operand is asserted if the magnitude of the operating current is above a pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direction is seen as forward or reverse, respectively
(directional unit).
The overcurrent unit responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of the either the neutral current calculated from the phase currents or the ground current. There are separate pickup settings for the forward-looking and
reverse-looking functions. If set to use the calculated 3I_0, the element applies a positive-sequence restraint for better performance: a small user-programmable portion of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zerosequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity.
I op = 3 ( I_0 K I_1 )
(EQ 5.19)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents
resulting from:
System unbalances under heavy load conditions.
5-172
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults.
Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults.
pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:
Iop = (1 K) Iinjected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: Iop = 3 Iinjected).
The positive-sequence restraint is removed for low currents. If the positive-sequence current is below 0.8 pu, the restraint is
removed by changing the constant K to zero. This facilitates better response to high-resistance faults when the unbalance
is very small and there is no danger of excessive CT errors as the current is low.
The directional unit uses the zero-sequence current (I_0) or ground current (IG) for fault direction discrimination and may
be programmed to use either zero-sequence voltage (Calculated V0 or Measured VX), ground current (IG), or both for
polarizing. The following tables define the neutral directional overcurrent element.
Table 520: QUANTITIES FOR "CALCULATED 3I0" CONFIGURATION
DIRECTIONAL UNIT
POLARIZING MODE
Voltage
Current
DIRECTION
OVERCURRENT UNIT
COMPARED PHASORS
Forward
V_0 + Z_offset I_0
I_0 1ECA
Reverse
V_0 + Z_offset I_0
I_0 1ECA
Forward
IG
I_0
Reverse
IG
I_0
V_0 + Z_offset I_0
I_0 1ECA
or
Forward
Dual
IG
I_0
V_0 + Z_offset I_0
I_0 1ECA
Iop = 3 (|I_0| K |I_1|) if |I1| > 0.8 pu

Iop = 3 (|I_0|) if |I1| 0.8 pu
or
Reverse
IG
I_0
Table 521: QUANTITIES FOR "MEASURED IG" CONFIGURATION

DIRECTIONAL UNIT
POLARIZING MODE
Voltage
where:
DIRECTION
COMPARED PHASORS
Forward
V_0 + Z_offset IG/3
IG 1ECA
Reverse
V_0 + Z_offset IG/3
IG 1ECA
OVERCURRENT UNIT
Iop = |IG|
1
V_0 = --- ( VAG + VBG + VCG ) = zero sequence voltage ,
3
1
1
I_0 = --- IN = --- ( IA + IB + IC ) = zero sequence current ,
3
3
ECA = element characteristic angle and IG = ground current
When NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT is set to Measured VX, one-third of this voltage is used in place of V_0. The following
figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element.
The figure below shows the voltage-polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault, with:
ECA = 90 (element characteristic angle = centerline of operating characteristic)
FWD LA = 80 (forward limit angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation)
REV LA = 80 (reverse limit angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation)
The element incorporates a current reversal logic: if the reverse direction is indicated for at least 1.25 of a power system
cycle, the prospective forward indication will be delayed by 1.5 of a power system cycle. The element is designed to emulate an electromechanical directional device. Larger operating and polarizing signals will result in faster directional discrimination bringing more security to the element operation.
GE Multilin
5-173
5 SETTINGS
The forward-looking function is designed to be more secure as compared to the reverse-looking function, and therefore,
should be used for the tripping direction. The reverse-looking function is designed to be faster as compared to the forwardlooking function and should be used for the blocking direction. This allows for better protection coordination.
The above bias should be taken into account when using the neutral directional overcurrent element to directionalize other
protection elements.
REV LA
line
FWD LA
line
3V_0 line
VAG
(reference)
REV Operating
Region
FWD Operating
Region
LA
LA
3I_0 line
ECA
ECA line
ECA line
LA
3I_0 line
VCG
LA
VBG
REV LA
line
3V_0 line
FWD LA
line
827805A1.CDR
Figure 592: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL VOLTAGE-POLARIZED CHARACTERISTICS
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING: This setting selects the polarizing mode for the directional unit.
If Voltage polarizing is selected, the element uses the zero-sequence voltage angle for polarization. The user
can use either the zero-sequence voltage V_0 calculated from the phase voltages, or the zero-sequence voltage
supplied externally as the auxiliary voltage V_X, both from the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE.
The calculated V_0 can be used as polarizing voltage only if the voltage transformers are connected in Wye. The
auxiliary voltage can be used as the polarizing voltage provided SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK
AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION is set to Vn and the auxiliary voltage is connected to a zero-sequence voltage
source (such as open delta connected secondary of VTs).
The zero-sequence (V_0) or auxiliary voltage (V_X), accordingly, must be greater than 0.02 pu to be validated for
use as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is invalid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given.
If Current polarizing is selected, the element uses the ground current angle connected externally and configured
under NEUTRAL OC1 SOURCE for polarization. The ground CT must be connected between the ground and neutral
point of an adequate local source of ground current. The ground current must be greater than 0.05 pu to be validated as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not valid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given. In
addition, the zero-sequence current (I_0) must be greater than the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value.
For a choice of current polarizing, it is recommended that the polarizing signal be analyzed to ensure that a known
direction is maintained irrespective of the fault location. For example, if using an autotransformer neutral current
as a polarizing source, it should be ensured that a reversal of the ground current does not occur for a high-side
fault. The low-side system impedance should be assumed minimal when checking for this condition. A similar situation arises for a wye/delta/wye transformer, where current in one transformer winding neutral may reverse when
faults on both sides of the transformer are considered.
5-174
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
If Dual polarizing is selected, the element performs both directional comparisons as described above. A given
direction is confirmed if either voltage or current comparators indicate so. If a conflicting (simultaneous forward
and reverse) indication occurs, the forward direction overrides the reverse direction.
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT: Selects the polarizing voltage used by the directional unit when "Voltage" or "Dual"
polarizing mode is set. The polarizing voltage can be programmed to be either the zero-sequence voltage calculated
from the phase voltages ("Calculated V0") or supplied externally as an auxiliary voltage ("Measured VX").
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: This setting indicates whether the 3I_0 current calculated from the phase currents, or
the ground current shall be used by this protection. This setting acts as a switch between the neutral and ground
modes of operation (67N and 67G). If set to Calculated 3I0 the element uses the phase currents and applies the positive-sequence restraint; if set to Measured IG the element uses ground current supplied to the ground CT of the CT
bank configured as NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE. If this setting is Measured IG, then the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING
setting must be Voltage, as it is not possible to use the ground current as an operating and polarizing signal simultaneously.
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-SEQ RESTRAINT: This setting controls the amount of the positive-sequence restraint. Set
to 0.063 for backward compatibility with firmware revision 3.40 and older. Set to zero to remove the restraint. Set
higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected.
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET: This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection. The primary application for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines. In
regular applications, the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the zero-sequence voltage at the relaying
point is very small. If this is the intent, the offset impedance shall not be larger than the zero-sequence impedance of
the protected circuit. Practically, it shall be several times smaller. The offset impedance shall be entered in secondary
ohms.
See chapter 8 for additional details and chapter 9 for information on how to calculate this setting
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA: This setting defines the characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction in the
"Voltage" polarizing mode. The "Current" polarizing mode uses a fixed ECA of 0. The ECA in the reverse direction is
the angle set for the forward direction shifted by 180.
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit
angle for the forward direction.
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the
forward direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence
restraint technique for the Calculated 3I0 mode of operation.
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit
angle for the reverse direction.
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the
reverse direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint
technique for the Calculated 3I0 mode of operation.
GE Multilin
5-175
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
PICKUP:
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP
CURR:
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT:
SETTING
RUN
NEUTRAL DIR OC1

FUNCTION:
3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP

OR
IG PICKUP
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTING
AND
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK:
SETTINGS
AND
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD

ECA:
Off=0
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD

LIMIT ANGLE:
SETTING
NEUTRAL DIR OC1
SOURCE:
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV

LIMIT ANGLE:
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL

VOLT:
NEUTRAL DIR OC1

OFFSET:
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP

CURR:
Measured VX
Calculated V_0
Zero Seq Crt (I_0)
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
RUN
FWD
Ground Crt (IG)
FWD
REV
OR
-3V_0
AND
1.25 cy
1.5 cy
3I_0 REV
Voltage Polarization
SETTING
IG
0.05 pu
AND
RUN
NEUTRAL DIR OC1

POLARIZING:
Voltage
FWD
Current Polarization
OR
Current
Dual
REV
OR
NOTE:
1) CURRENT POLARIZING IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN RELAYS WITH
THE GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CONNECTED TO
AN ADEQUATE CURRENT POLARIZING SOURCE
2) GROUND CURRENT CAN NOT BE USED FOR POLARIZATION
AND OPERATION SIMULTANEOUSLY
3) POSITIVE SEQUENCE RESTRAINT IS NOT APPLIED WHEN
I_1 IS BELOW 0.8pu
OR
SETTING
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
PICKUP:
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP
CURR:
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT:

RUN
3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP
OR
IG PICKUP
827077AB.CDR
Figure 593: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT LOGIC
5-176
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.6.10 WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT
a) WATTMETRIC ZERO-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL (ANSI 32N)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) WATTMETRIC... WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 1(2)
WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1

FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE

VOLT: Calculated VN
Range: Calculated VN, Measured VX
MESSAGE

OV PKP: 0.20 pu
MESSAGE

CURR: Calculated IN
Range: Calculated IN, Measured IG
MESSAGE

OC PKP: 0.060 pu
MESSAGE

OC PKP DEL: 0.20 s
MESSAGE

PWR PKP: 0.100 pu
MESSAGE

REF PWR: 0.500 pu
MESSAGE

ECA: 0 Lag
Range: 0 to 360 Lag in steps of 1
MESSAGE

PWR PKP DEL: 0.20 s
MESSAGE

CURVE: Definite Time
Range: Definite Time, Inverse, FlexCurves A through D
MESSAGE

MULTIPLIER: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
WATT GND FLT 1 BLK:

Off
MESSAGE

TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE

EVENTS: Disabled
WATTMETRIC
GROUND FAULT 1
The wattmetric zero-sequence directional element responds to power derived from zero-sequence voltage and current in a
direction specified by the element characteristic angle. The angle can be set within all four quadrants and the power can be
active or reactive. Therefore, the element may be used to sense either forward or reverse ground faults in either inductive,
capacitive or resistive networks. The inverse time characteristic allows time coordination of elements across the network.
Typical applications include ground fault protection in solidly grounded transmission networks, grounded/ungrounded/resistor-grounded/resonant-grounded distribution networks, or for directionalizing other non-directional ground elements.
WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 VOLT: The element uses neutral voltage (that is, three times the zero-sequence voltage).
This setting allows selecting between the internally calculated neutral voltage, or externally supplied voltage (broken
delta VT connected to the auxiliary channel bank of the relay). When the latter selection is made, the auxiliary channel
must be identified by the user as a neutral voltage under the VT bank settings. This element will operate only if the auxiliary voltage is configured as neutral.
GE Multilin
5-177
5 SETTINGS
WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 OV PKP: This setting specifies the minimum zero sequence voltage supervising the directional power measurement. This threshold should be higher than possible unbalance during normal operation of the
system. Typically, this setting would be selected at 0.1 to 0.2 pu for the ungrounded or resonant grounded systems,
and at 0.05 to 0.1 pu for solidly or resistor-grounded systems. When using externally supplied voltage via the auxiliary
voltage channel, 1 pu is the nominal voltage of this channel as per VT bank settings. When using internally calculated
neutral voltage, 1 pu is the nominal phase to ground voltage as per the VT bank settings.
WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 CURR: The element responds to the neutral current (that is, three times zero-sequence
current), either calculated internally from the phase currents or supplied externally via the ground CT input from more
accurate sources such as the core balanced CT. This setting allows selecting the source of the operating current.
WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 OC PKP: This setting specifies the current supervision level for the measurement of the
zero-sequence power.
WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 OC PKP DEL: This setting specifies delay for the overcurrent portion of this element. The
delay applies to the WATTMETRIC 1 PKP operand driven from the overcurrent condition.
WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 PWR PKP: This setting specifies the operating point of the element. A value of 1 pu is a
product of the 1 pu voltage as specified for the overvoltage condition of this element, and 1 pu current as specified for
the overcurrent condition of this element.
WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 REF PWR: This setting is used to calculate the inverse time characteristic delay (defined
by Sref in the following equations). A value of 1 pu represents the product of a 1 pu voltage (as specified in the overvoltage condition for this element) and a 1 pu current (as specified in the overcurrent condition for this element.
WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 ECA: This setting adjusts the maximum torque angle of the element. The operating power
is calculated as:
S_op = Re ( V n ( I n 1 ECA ) )
(EQ 5.20)
where * indicates complex conjugate. By varying the element characteristic angle (ECA), the element can be made to
respond to forward or reverse direction in inductive, resistive, or capacitive networks as shown in the Wattmetric characteristic angle response diagram.
WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 PWR PKP DEL: This setting defines a definite time delay before the inverse time characteristic is activated. If the curve selection is set as Definite Time, the element would operate after this security time
delay. If the curve selection is Inverse or one of the FlexCurves, the element uses both the definite and inverse time
timers simultaneously. The definite time timer, specified by this setting, is used and when expires it releases the
inverse time timer for operation (torque control).
WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 CURVE: This setting allows choosing one of three methods to delay operate signal once all
conditions are met to discriminate fault direction.
The Definite Time selection allows for a fixed time delay defined by the WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 PWR PKP DEL setting.
The Inverse selection allows for inverse time characteristics delay defined by the following formula:
S ref
t = m ---------S op
(EQ 5.21)
where m is a multiplier defined by the multiplier setting, Sref is the multiplier setting, and Sop is the operating power at
the time. This timer starts after the definite time timer expires.
The four FlexCurves allow for custom user-programmable time characteristics. When working with FlexCurves, the
element uses the operate to pickup ratio, and the multiplier setting is not applied:
S op
t = FlexCurve ----------
S ref
(EQ 5.22)
Again, the FlexCurve timer starts after the definite time timer expires.
5-178
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
FORWARD FAULT
REVERSE FAULT
INDUCTIVE NETWORK
ECA = 180 to 270
ECA = 0 to 90
Vn
Vn
RESISTIVE NETWORK
In
In
ECA = 180
ECA = 0
Vn
Vn
In
In
CAPACITIIVE NETWORK
In
In
5
Vn
Vn
ECA = 270 to 360
ECA = 90 to 180
837804A1.CDR
Figure 594: WATTMETRIC CHARACTERISTIC ANGLE RESPONSE

WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 MULTIPLIER: This setting is applicable if WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 CURVE above is selected
to Inverse and defines the multiplier factor for the inverse time delay.
SETTINGS
SETTINGS

SOURCE:

PWR PICKUP:

CURRENT:
SETTING

OC PICKUP:
Calculated: Measured:
Neutral, In Ground, Ig

ECA:

OV PICKUP:

VOLTAGE:
S = V*conj (I*exp(-j*ECA))
Calculated: Measured:
Neutral, Vn Auxiliary, Vx

1 PWR PKP DEL:
SOP > PWR PICKUP
tPKP
IMAG > OC PICKUP
AND

REF PWR:
MULTIPLIER:
RUN
0
t = m
AND
WATTMETRIC GND FLT

1 FUNCTION:

CURVE:
SETTING
VMAG > OV PICKUP
SETTINGS
Enabled = 1
WATT GND FLT 1 BLK:
Off = 0
SETTINGS
AND
SETTING
SREF
SOP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
WATTMETRIC 1 OP

OC PKP DEL:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
tPKP
WATTMETRIC 1 PKP
0
837033A4.CDR
Figure 595: WATTMETRIC ZERO-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-179
5 SETTINGS
5.6.11 GROUND CURRENT
a) GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51G)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GROUND CURRENT GROUND TOC1(2)
GROUND TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: see the Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
GROUND TOC1
1.00
This element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple
definite time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to
the Inverse time overcurrent curve characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator
will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and
the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion
range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.
NOTE
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
SOURCE:
IG
AND
SETTINGS
GROUND TOC1
INPUT:
GROUND TOC1
PICKUP:
GROUND TOC1
CURVE:
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
GROUND TOC 1
RESET:
RUN
IG PICKUP
t
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GROUND TOC1 PKP
GROUND TOC1 DPO
GROUND TOC1 OP
I
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0
827036A3.VSD
Figure 596: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-180
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
b) GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50G)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GROUND CURRENT GROUND IOC1(2)
GROUND IOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP

DELAY:
0.00 s
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1 RESET

DELAY:
0.00 s
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
GROUND IOC1
The ground instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
definite time element. The ground current input is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental
phasor magnitude.
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion
range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.
NOTE
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
SOURCE:
IG
AND
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
PICKUP:
RUN
IG PICKUP
SETTINGS
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP
DELAY:
GROUND IOC1 RESET
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GROUND IOC1 PKP
GROUND IOIC DPO
GROUND IOC1 OP
tPKP
tRST
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0
827037A4.VSD
Figure 597: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-181
5 SETTINGS
5.6.12 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT
a) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51_2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT NEG SEQ TOC1(2)
NEG SEQ TOC1

FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ TOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ TOC1

PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ TOC1

CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: see OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ TOC1

TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ TOC1

MESSAGE
NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ TOC1

TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ TOC1

EVENTS: Disabled
NEG SEQ TOC1
The negative-sequence time overcurrent element may be used to determine and clear unbalance in the system. The input
for calculating negative-sequence current is the fundamental phasor value.
Two methods of resetting operation are available; Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse Time Overcurrent Characteristics sub-section for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time
accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
SETTING
NEG SEQ TOC1 INPUT:
NEG SEQ TOC1 PICKUP:
SETTING
NEG SEQ TOC1 CURVE:
NEG SEQ TOC1 FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
NEG SEQ TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER:
Enabled=1
NEG SEQ TOC1 RESET:
SETTING
AND
RUN
NEG SEQ < PICKUP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP
NEG SEQ TOC1 DPO
NEG SEQ TOC1 OP
NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK:
Off=0
SETTING
NEG SEQ TOC1 SOURCE:
Neg Seq
827057A4.CDR
Figure 598: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-182
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
b) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50_2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT NEG SEQ OC1(2)
NEG SEQ IOC1

FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ IOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ IOC1

PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ IOC1 PICKUP

DELAY:
0.00 s
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ IOC1 RESET

DELAY:
0.00 s
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ IOC1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ IOC1

TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ IOC1

EVENTS: Disabled
NEG SEQ IOC1
The negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional
delay or as a definite time function. The element responds to the negative-sequence current fundamental frequency phasor
magnitude (calculated from the phase currents) and applies a positive-sequence restraint for better performance: a small
portion (12.5%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the negative-sequence current magnitude
when forming the operating quantity:
I op = I_2 K I_1
where K = 1 8
(EQ 5.23)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative-sequence currents resulting from:
system unbalances under heavy load conditions

transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during three-phase faults
fault inception and switch-off transients during three-phase faults
pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:
I op = 0.2917 I injected ; three-phase injection, opposite rotation: I op = I injected ).
SETTING
SETTING
NEG SEQ IOC1 FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
NEG SEQ IOC1

PICKUP DELAY:
SETTING
Enabled=1
NEG SEQ IOC1 PICKUP:
SETTING
NEG SEQ IOC1 BLOCK:
AND
RUN
I_2 - K I_1
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEG SEQ IOC1

RESET DELAY:
NEG SEQ IOC1 PKP

NEG SEQ IOC1 DPO
tPKP
PICKUP
tRST
NEG SEQ IOC1 OP
Off=0
SETTING
NEG SEQ IOC1 SOURCE:
I_2
827058A5.CDR
Figure 599: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-183
5 SETTINGS
c) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67_2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT NEG SEQ DIR OC1(2)
NEG SEQ DIR OC1

FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ DIR OC1

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ DIR OC1

OFFSET: 0.00
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ DIR OC1

TYPE: Neg Sequence
Range: Neg Sequence, Zero Sequence
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: 0.063
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD

ECA: 75 Lag
Range: 0 to 90 Lag in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD

LIMIT ANGLE: 90
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD

PICKUP: 0.050 pu
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV

LIMIT ANGLE: 90
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV

PICKUP: 0.050 pu
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 BLK:

Off
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ DIR OC1

TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ DIR OC1

EVENTS: Disabled
NEG SEQ DIR OC1
There are two negative-sequence directional overcurrent protection elements available. The element provides both forward
and reverse fault direction indications through its output operands NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD and NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV,
respectively. The output operand is asserted if the magnitude of the operating current is above a pickup level (overcurrent
unit) and the fault direction is seen as forward or reverse, respectively (directional unit).
The overcurrent unit of the element essentially responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of either
the negative-sequence or zero-sequence current as per user selection. The zero-sequence current should not be mistaken
with the neutral current (factor 3 difference).
A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance: a small user-programmable portion of the positivesequence current magnitude is subtracted from the negative or zero-sequence current magnitude, respectively, when forming the element operating quantity.
I op = I_2 K I_1
or
I op = 3 I_0 K I_1
(EQ 5.24)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative-sequence and
zero-sequence currents resulting from:
System unbalances under heavy load conditions.
Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs).
Fault inception and switch-off transients.
5-184
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pick-up accuracy and response time (multiple of
pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay:
Single-phase injection: Iop = 1/3 (3 K) Iinjected.
The directional unit uses the negative-sequence current and voltage for fault direction discrimination.
The following table defines the negative-sequence directional overcurrent element.

OVERCURRENT UNIT
DIRECTIONAL UNIT
MODE
OPERATING CURRENT
DIRECTION
Negative-sequence
Iop = |I_2| K I_1|
Forward
V_2 + Z_offset I_2
COMPARED PHASORS
I_2 1ECA
Reverse
V_2 + Z_offset I_2
(I_2 1ECA)
Zero-sequence
Iop = 3 |I_0| K |I_1|
Forward
V_2 + Z_offset I_2
I_2 1ECA
Reverse
V_2 + Z_offset I_2
(I_2 1ECA)
The negative-sequence voltage must be greater than the VOLTAGE CUTOFF LEVEL setting specified in the PRODUCT SETUP
DISPLAY PROPERTIES menu to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not validated neither
forward nor reverse indication is given. The following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of
the element.
The figure below shows the phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault, with settings of:
ECA
FWD LA
REV LA
= 75 (element characteristic angle = centerline of operating characteristic)

= 80 (forward limit angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation)
= 80 (reverse limit angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation)
The element incorporates a current reversal logic: if the reverse direction is indicated for at least 1.25 of a power system
cycle, the prospective forward indication will be delayed by 1.5 of a power system cycle. The element is designed to emulate an electromechanical directional device. Larger operating and polarizing signals will result in faster directional discrimination bringing more security to the element operation.
V_2 line
REV
LA
FWD
LA
VAG (reference)
REV Operating
Region
LA
ECA line
LA
ECA
I_2 line
LA
I_2 line
FWD Operating
Region
ECA line
LA
VCG
VBG
V_2 line
REV
LA
FWD
LA
827806A2.CDR
Figure 5100: NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC

The forward-looking function is designed to be more secure as compared to the reverse-looking function, and therefore
should be used for the tripping direction. The reverse-looking function is designed to be faster as compared to the forwardlooking function and should be used for the blocking direction. This allows for better protection coordination. The above
GE Multilin
5-185
5 SETTINGS
bias should be taken into account when using the negative-sequence directional overcurrent element to directionalize other
protection elements. The negative-sequence directional pickup must be greater than the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY
PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value.
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 OFFSET: This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection. The primary application for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines (see
the Application of settings chapter for information on how to calculate this setting). In regular applications, the offset
impedance ensures proper operation even if the negative-sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small. If this is
the intent, the offset impedance shall not be larger than the negative-sequence impedance of the protected circuit.
Practically, it shall be several times smaller. The offset impedance shall be entered in secondary ohms. See the Theory
of operation chapter for additional details.
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE: This setting selects the operating mode for the overcurrent unit of the element. The
choices are Neg Sequence and Zero Sequence. In some applications it is advantageous to use a directional negative-sequence overcurrent function instead of a directional zero-sequence overcurrent function as inter-circuit mutual
effects are minimized.
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POS-SEQ RESTRAINT: This setting controls the positive-sequence restraint. Set to 0.063 (in
Zero Sequence mode) or 0.125 (in Neg Sequence mode) for backward compatibility with revisions 3.40 and earlier.
Set to zero to remove the restraint. Set higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected.
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD ECA: This setting select the element characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction.
The element characteristic angle in the reverse direction is the angle set for the forward direction shifted by 180.
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit
angle for the forward direction.
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit in the forward direction. Upon NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE selection, this pickup threshold applies to zero- or negative-sequence current. When
selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique.
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit
angle for the reverse direction.
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit in the reverse direction. Upon NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE selection, this pickup threshold applies to zero- or negative-sequence current. When
selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique.
6(77,1*6
)RUZDUG3LFNXS
3RVLWLYH6HTXHQFH5HVWUDLQW
$1'
581
$1'
581
_,B_._,B_3LFNXS
25
_,B_._,B_3LFNXS
6(77,1*
)XQFWLRQ
'LVDEOHG
(QDEOHG
6(77,1*6
$1'
)RUZDUG(&$
)RUZDUG/LPLW$QJOH
5HYHUVH/LPLW$QJOH
2IIVHW
$1'
6(77,1*
%ORFN
$1'
2II
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
1(*6(4',52&):'
7,0(5
F\FOHV
581
$1'
)RUZDUG
F\FOHV
$&78$/9$/8(6
9B
,B
,B
5HYHUVH
9ROWDJH3RODUL]DWLRQ
127(
9BLVQHJDWLYHVHTXHQFHYROWDJH
,BLVQHJDWLYHVHTXHQFHFXUUHQW
,BLV]HURVHTXHQFHFXUUHQW
6(77,1*6
5HYHUVH3LFNXS
3RV6HT5HVWUDLQW
6(77,1*
7\SH
$1'
581
$1'
581
$1'
_,B_._,B_3LFNXS
1HJ6HTXHQFH
=HUR6HTXHQFH
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
1(*6(4',52&5(9
_,B_._,B_3LFNXS
$&'5
Figure 5101: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-186
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.6.13 BREAKER FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) BREAKER FAILURE BREAKER FAILURE 1(2)
BREAKER FAILURE 1
GE Multilin
BF1 FUNCTION:
Disabled
MESSAGE
BF1 MODE:
3-Pole
MESSAGE
BF1 SOURCE:
SRC 1
MESSAGE
BF1 USE AMP SUPV:

Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
BF1 USE SEAL-IN:

Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
BF1 3-POLE INITIATE:

Off
MESSAGE
BF1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
BF1 PH AMP SUPV

PICKUP: 1.050 pu
MESSAGE
BF1 N AMP SUPV

PICKUP: 1.050 pu
MESSAGE
BF1 USE TIMER 1:

Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP

DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
BF1 USE TIMER 2:

Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP

DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
BF1 USE TIMER 3:

Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP

DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS1 A/3P:

Off
MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS2 A/3P:

Off
MESSAGE
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON:

Off
MESSAGE
BF1 PH AMP HISET

PICKUP: 1.050 pu
MESSAGE
BF1 N AMP HISET

PICKUP: 1.050 pu
MESSAGE
BF1 PH AMP LOSET

PICKUP: 1.050 pu
5-187
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
BF1 N AMP LOSET

PICKUP: 1.050 pu
MESSAGE
BF1 LOSET TIME

DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
BF1 TRIP DROPOUT

DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
BF1 TARGET
Self-Reset
MESSAGE
BF1 EVENTS
Disabled
MESSAGE
BF1 PH A INITIATE:
Off

Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
MESSAGE
BF1 PH B INITIATE:
Off

MESSAGE
BF1 PH C INITIATE:
Off

MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS1 B

Off

MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS1 C

Off

MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS2 B

Off

MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS2 C

Off

In general, a breaker failure scheme determines that a breaker signaled to trip has not cleared a fault within a definite time,
so further tripping action must be performed. Tripping from the breaker failure scheme should trip all breakers, both local
and remote, that can supply current to the faulted zone. Usually operation of a breaker failure element will cause clearing of
a larger section of the power system than the initial trip. Because breaker failure can result in tripping a large number of
breakers and this affects system safety and stability, a very high level of security is required.
Two schemes are provided: one for three-pole tripping only (identified by the name 3BF) and one for three pole plus single-pole operation (identified by the name 1BF). The philosophy used in these schemes is identical. The operation of a
breaker failure element includes three stages: initiation, determination of a breaker failure condition, and output.
INITIATION STAGE:
A FlexLogic operand representing the protection trip signal initially sent to the breaker must be selected to initiate the
scheme. The initiating signal should be sealed-in if primary fault detection can reset before the breaker failure timers have
finished timing. The seal-in is supervised by current level, so it is reset when the fault is cleared. If desired, an incomplete
sequence seal-in reset can be implemented by using the initiating operand to also initiate a FlexLogic timer, set longer
than any breaker failure timer, whose output operand is selected to block the breaker failure scheme.
NOTE
For the L90 relay, the protection trip signal initially sent to the breaker is already programmed as a trip output. The
protection trip signal does not include other breaker commands that are not indicative of a fault in the protected
zone.
Schemes can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision. It is particularly important in any application to
decide if a current-supervised initiate is to be used. The use of a current-supervised initiate results in the breaker failure element not being initiated for a breaker that has very little or no current flowing through it, which may be the case for transformer faults. For those situations where it is required to maintain breaker fail coverage for fault levels below the BF1 PH
AMP SUPV PICKUP or the BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP setting, a current supervised initiate should not be used. This feature
should be utilized for those situations where coordinating margins may be reduced when high speed reclosing is used.
Thus, if this choice is made, fault levels must always be above the supervision pickup levels for dependable operation of
5-188
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
the breaker fail scheme. This can also occur in breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations where the first breaker closes
into a fault; the protection trips and attempts to initiate breaker failure for the second breaker, which is in the process of
closing, but does not yet have current flowing through it.
When the scheme is initiated, it immediately sends a trip signal to the breaker initially signaled to trip (this feature is usually
described as re-trip). This reduces the possibility of widespread tripping that results from a declaration of a failed breaker.
DETERMINATION OF A BREAKER FAILURE CONDITION:
The schemes determine a breaker failure condition via three paths. Each of these paths is equipped with a time delay, after
which a failed breaker is declared and trip signals are sent to all breakers required to clear the zone. The delayed paths are
associated with breaker failure timers 1, 2, and 3, which are intended to have delays increasing with increasing timer numbers. These delayed paths are individually enabled to allow for maximum flexibility.
Timer 1 logic (early path) is supervised by a fast-operating breaker auxiliary contact. If the breaker is still closed (as indicated by the auxiliary contact) and fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is issued. Operation of the
breaker auxiliary switch indicates that the breaker has mechanically operated. The continued presence of current indicates
that the breaker has failed to interrupt the circuit.
Timer 2 logic (main path) is not supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact. If fault current is detected after the delay interval,
an output is issued. This path is intended to detect a breaker that opens mechanically but fails to interrupt fault current; the
logic therefore does not use a breaker auxiliary contact.
The timer 1 and 2 paths provide two levels of current supervision, high-set and low-set, that allow the supervision level to
change from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after
resistor insertion. The high-set detector is enabled after timeout of timer 1 or 2, along with a timer that will enable the lowset detector after its delay interval. The delay interval between high-set and low-set is the expected breaker opening time.
Both current detectors provide a fast operating time for currents at small multiples of the pickup value. The overcurrent
detectors are required to operate after the breaker failure delay interval to eliminate the need for very fast resetting overcurrent detectors.
Timer 3 logic (slow path) is supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact and a control switch contact used to indicate that the
breaker is in or out-of-service, disabling this path when the breaker is out-of-service for maintenance. There is no current
level check in this logic as it is intended to detect low magnitude faults and it is therefore the slowest to operate.
OUTPUT:
The outputs from the schemes are:
FlexLogic operands that report on the operation of portions of the scheme
FlexLogic operand used to re-trip the protected breaker
FlexLogic operands that initiate tripping required to clear the faulted zone. The trip output can be sealed-in for an
adjustable period.
Target message indicating a failed breaker has been declared
Illumination of the faceplate Trip LED (and the Phase A, B or C LED, if applicable)
MAIN PATH SEQUENCE:

ACTUAL CURRENT MAGNITUDE
FAILED INTERRUPTION
0
AMP
CALCULATED CURRENT MAGNITUDE
CORRECT INTERRUPTION
Rampdown
PROTECTION OPERATION
(ASSUMED 1.5 cycles)
BREAKER INTERRUPTING TIME

(ASSUMED 3 cycles)
MARGIN
(Assumed 2 Cycles)
BACKUP BREAKER OPERATING TIME

(Assumed 3 Cycles)
BREAKER FAILURE TIMER No. 2 (1/8 cycle)
INITIATE (1/8 cycle)
BREAKER FAILURE CURRENT DETECTOR PICKUP (1/8 cycle)

BREAKER FAILURE OUTPUT RELAY PICKUP (1/4 cycle)
FAULT
OCCURS
0
cycles
1
10
11
827083A6.CDR
Figure 5102: BREAKER FAILURE MAIN PATH SEQUENCE
GE Multilin
5-189
5 SETTINGS
The current supervision elements reset in less than 0.7 of a power cycle for any multiple of pickup current as shown below.
0.8
Breaker failure reset time (cycles)
Margin
Maximum
Average
0.6
0.4
0.2
20
40
60
80
100
120
fault current
Mulitple of pickup
threshold setting
140
836769A4.CDR
Figure 5103: BREAKER FAILURE OVERCURRENT SUPERVISION RESET TIME

SETTINGS:
BF1 MODE: This setting is used to select the breaker failure operating mode: single or three pole.
BF1 USE AMP SUPV: If set to "Yes", the element will only be initiated if current flowing through the breaker is above
the supervision pickup level.
BF1 USE SEAL-IN: If set to "Yes", the element will only be sealed-in if current flowing through the breaker is above the
supervision pickup level.
BF1 3-POLE INITIATE: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that will initiate three-pole tripping of the breaker.
BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the phase current initiation and seal-in supervision level.
Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. It can be set as low as
necessary (lower than breaker resistor current or lower than load current) high-set and low-set current supervision
will guarantee correct operation.
BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the neutral current initiate and seal-in supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. Neutral current supervision is
used only in the three phase scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid only for three-pole tripping
schemes.
BF1 USE TIMER 1: If set to "Yes", the early path is operational.
BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status-1 to
open, from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit, plus a safety margin.
BF1 USE TIMER 2: If set to "Yes", the main path is operational.
BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 2 is set to the expected opening time of the breaker, plus a safety margin. This
safety margin was historically intended to allow for measuring and timing errors in the breaker failure scheme equipment. In microprocessor relays this time is not significant. In L90 relays, which use a Fourier transform, the calculated
current magnitude will ramp-down to zero one power frequency cycle after the current is interrupted, and this lag
should be included in the overall margin duration, as it occurs after current interruption. The Breaker failure main path
sequence diagram below shows a margin of two cycles; this interval is considered the minimum appropriate for most
applications.
Note that in bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents less than 25% of the interrupting rating can be
significantly longer than the normal interrupting time.
BF1 USE TIMER 3: If set to "Yes", the Slow Path is operational.
BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 3 is set to the same interval as timer 2, plus an increased safety margin.
Because this path is intended to operate only for low level faults, the delay can be in the order of 300 to 500 ms.
5-190
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
BF1 BKR POS1 A/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker early-type
auxiliary switch contact (52/a). When using the single-pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This is normally a non-multiplied form-A contact. The contact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time.
BF1 BKR POS2 A/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the breaker normal-type auxiliary
switch contact (52/a). When using the single-pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected
breaker auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This may be a multiplied contact.
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON: This setting is used to select the FlexLogic operand that represents the breaker in-service/out-of-service switch set to the out-of-service position.
BF1 PH AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.
BF1 N AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.
Neutral current supervision is used only in the three pole scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid
only for three-pole breaker failure schemes.
BF1 PH AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted
(approximately 90% of the resistor current).
BF1 N AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted
(approximately 90% of the resistor current). This setting is valid only for three-pole breaker failure schemes.
BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY: Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion.
BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY: This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed-in. This
timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker, to which the breaker failure element sends a cancel reclosure signal. Reclosure of a remote breaker can also be prevented by holding a transfer trip
signal on longer than the reclaim time.
BF1 PH A INITIATE / BF1 PH B INITIATE / BF 1 PH C INITIATE: These settings select the FlexLogic operand to initiate phase A, B, or C single-pole tripping of the breaker and the phase A, B, or C portion of the scheme, accordingly.
This setting is only valid for single-pole breaker failure schemes.
BF1 BKR POS1 B / BF1 BKR POS 1 C: These settings select the FlexLogic operand to represents the protected
breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on poles B or C, accordingly. This contact is normally a non-multiplied FormA contact. The contact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time. This setting is valid only for
single-pole breaker failure schemes.
BF1 BKR POS2 B: Selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxiliary
switch contact on pole B (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. This setting is valid only for single-pole breaker failure schemes.
BF1 BKR POS2 C: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type
auxiliary switch contact on pole C (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. For single-pole operation, the scheme has
the same overall general concept except that it provides re-tripping of each single pole of the protected breaker. The
approach shown in the following single pole tripping diagram uses the initiating information to determine which pole is
supposed to trip. The logic is segregated on a per-pole basis. The overcurrent detectors have ganged settings. This
setting is valid only for single-pole breaker failure schemes.
Upon operation of the breaker failure element for a single pole trip command, a three-pole trip command should be
given via output operand BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP.
GE Multilin
5-191
5 SETTINGS
In D60, L60, and L90 only

From Trip Output
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
TRIP PHASE C
TRIP PHASE B
TRIP 3-POLE
TRIP PHASE A
SETTING
BF1 FUNCTION:
Enable=1
Disable=0
SETTING
AND
BF1 BLOCK :
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 PH A INITIATE:
OR
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 3-POLE INITIATE :
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA
OR
OR
AND
Off=0
Initiated Ph A
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
SETTING
BF1 USE SEAL-IN:
YES=1
AND
NO=0
SETTING
SEAL-IN PATH
AND
OR
BF1 USE AMP SUPV:

YES=1
OR
NO=0
OR
SETTING
BF1 PH B INITIATE :
OR
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB
OR
AND
Off=0
SEAL-IN PATH
AND
Initiated Ph B
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
OR
SETTING
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BF1 PH C INITIATE :
OR
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 SOURCE :
BF1 PH AMP SUPV

PICKUP :
IB
IC
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC
AND
SETTING
IA
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
(Initiated)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SEAL-IN PATH
RUN
IA
RUN
IB
PICKUP
RUN
IC
PICKUP
AND
Initiated Ph C
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
PICKUP
OR
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
(827070.CDR)
827069A6.CDR
Figure 5104: SINGLE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, INITIATE (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-192
GE Multilin
GE Multilin
1R
<HV
1R
<HV
<HV
2II
IURPVLQJOHSROHEUHDNHUIDLOXUHORJLFVKHHW
,QLWLDWHG
%UHDNHU7HVW2Q
%UHDNHU3RV3KDVH&
2II
%UHDNHU3RV3KDVH%
2II
%UHDNHU3RV3KDVH$3
2II
8VH7LPHU
6(77,1*6
,$
,%
,&
IURPVLQJOHSROHEUHDNHU
IDLOXUHORJLFVKHHW
,QLWLDWHGSKDVH&
%UHDNHU3RV3KDVH%
2II
6(77,1*6
,QLWLDWHGSKDVH%
IDLOXUHORJLFVKHHW
%UHDNHU3RV3KDVH%
2II
6(77,1*6
8VH7LPHU
6(77,1*
,QLWLDWHGSKDVH$
IDLOXUHORJLFVKHHW
8VH7LPHU
%UHDNHU3RV3KDVH$3
2II
6(77,1*6
$1'
$1'
$1'
$1'
$1'
$1'
$1'
6(77,1*
7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\
6(77,1*
7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\
6(77,1*
7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\
6(77,1*
7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\
6(77,1*
7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\
6(77,1*
7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\
6(77,1*
7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\
$1'
$1'
$1'
25
25
25
25
25
,$
3LFNXS
,%
3LFNXS
,&
3LFNXS
/R6HW7LPH'HOD\
6(77,1*
581
3KDVH&XUUHQW+L6HW3LFNXS
6(77,1*
/R6HW7LPH'HOD\
6(77,1*
581
6(77,1*
/R6HW7LPH'HOD\
6(77,1*
581
6(77,1*
,$
3LFNXS
,%
3LFNXS
581
,&
3LFNXS
3KDVH&XUUHQW/R6HW3LFNXS
6(77,1*
581
6(77,1*
581
6(77,1*
25
6(77,1*

7ULS'URSRXW'HOD\
$&'5
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%.5)$,/723
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%.5)$,/75,323
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%.5)$,/723
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%.5)$,/723
5 SETTINGS
Figure 5105: SINGLE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, TIMERS (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-193
5 SETTINGS
Figure 5106: THREE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, INITIATE (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-194
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Figure 5107: THREE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, TIMERS (Sheet 2 of 2)
GE Multilin
5-195
5 SETTINGS
5.6.14 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
PHASE
UNDERVOLTAGE1
See page 5197.
MESSAGE
PHASE
UNDERVOLTAGE2
See page 5197.
MESSAGE
PHASE
OVERVOLTAGE1
See page 5198.
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1
See page 5199.
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV2
See page 5199.
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV3
See page 5199.
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY UV1
See page 5200.
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY UV2
See page 5200.
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY OV1
See page 5201.
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY OV2
See page 5201.
These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications such as:
Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases the
drawn current which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used
to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time
delay.
Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning of external devices by operating an output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage feature may also be
used to block the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements.
Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load
from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source.
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a definite time delay characteristic. The definite time curve operates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time. The time delay is adjustable from 0 to
600.00 seconds in steps of 0.01. The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay characteristic.
The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below.
D
T = ---------------------------------V
1 -----------------
V pickup
where:
5-196
(EQ 5.25)
T = operating time
D = undervoltage delay setting (D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)
V = secondary voltage applied to the relay
Vpickup = pickup level
GE Multilin
Time (seconds)
5 SETTINGS
% of voltage pickup
842788A1.CDR
Figure 5108: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES

At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY setting.
NOTE
b) PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27P)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1(3)
PHASE UV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1 MODE:

Phase to Ground
Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
CURVE: Definite Time
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
DELAY:
1.00 s
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1 MINIMUM

VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
EVENTS: Disabled
PHASE
UNDERVOLTAGE1
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage
(phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase for wye VT connection, or phase-to-phase for delta VT connection) or as a definite
time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting
selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage
below which the element is blocked (a setting of 0 will allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
GE Multilin
5-197
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE UV1
FUNCTION:
PHASE UV1
PICKUP:
Disabled = 0
PHASE UV1
CURVE:
Enabled = 1
SETTING
AND
PHASE UV1
BLOCK:
AND
PHASE UV1
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP
PHASE UV1 A PKP

PHASE UV1 A DPO
PHASE UV1 A OP
Off = 0
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE UV1 SOURCE:
Source VT = Delta
VAB
VBC
VCA
Source VT = Wye
SETTING
PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground Phase to Phase
VAG
VAB
VBG
VBC
VCG
VCA
PHASE UV1
MINIMUM VOLTAGE:
VAG or VAB < Minimum
VBG or VBC < Minimum
VCG or VCA < Minimum
AND
V
RUN VBG or VBC< PICKUP
PHASE UV1 B PKP

PHASE UV1 B DPO
PHASE UV1 B OP
AND
V
RUN VCG or VCA < PICKUP
PHASE UV1 C PKP
PHASE UV1 C DPO

PHASE UV1 C OP
V
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
PHASE UV1 PKP
OR
PHASE UV1 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
PHASE UV1 DPO

827039AB.CDR
Figure 5109: PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC

c) PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59P)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1
PHASE OV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE OV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
PHASE OV1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
PHASE OV1 PICKUP

DELAY:
1.00 s
MESSAGE
PHASE OV1 RESET

DELAY:
1.00 s
MESSAGE
PHASE OV1 BLOCK:

Off
Range: FlexLogic Operand
MESSAGE
PHASE OV1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
PHASE OV1
EVENTS: Disabled
PHASE
OVERVOLTAGE1
The phase overvoltage element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or as a definite
time element. The input voltage is the phase-to-phase voltage, either measured directly from delta-connected VTs or as calculated from phase-to-ground (wye) connected VTs. The specific voltages to be used for each phase are shown below.
5-198
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTINGS
SETTING
PHASE OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
PHASE OV1 PICKUP

DELAY:
PHASE OV1
PICKUP:
PHASE OV1 RESET

DELAY:
RUN
tPKP
VAB PICKUP
SETTING
AND
RUN
PHASE OV1
BLOCK:
RUN
Off = 0
VBC PICKUP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PHASE OV1 A PKP
PHASE OV1 A DPO
PHASE OV1 A OP
tRST
PHASE OV1 B PKP

PHASE OV1 B DPO
tPKP
PHASE OV1 B OP
tRST
VCA PICKUP
PHASE OV1 C PKP

PHASE OV1 C DPO
tPKP
PHASE OV1 C OP
tRST
SETTING
PHASE OV1
SOURCE:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Source VT = Delta
OR
PHASE OV1 OP
VAB
VBC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
VCA
AND
Source VT = Wye
PHASE OV1 DPO

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
PHASE OV1 PKP

827066A7.CDR
Figure 5110: PHASE OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC
NOTE
If the source VT is wye-connected, then the phase overvoltage pickup condition is V > 3 Pickup for VAB, VBC,
and VCA.
d) NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59N)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS NEUTRAL OV1(3)
NEUTRAL OV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP:

0.300 pu
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE:

Definite time
Range: Definite time, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B,

FlexCurve C
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP:

DELAY: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET:

DELAY: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 TARGET:

Self-reset
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 EVENTS:

Disabled
NEUTRAL OV1
There are three neutral overvoltage elements available. The neutral overvoltage element can be used to detect asymmetrical system voltage condition due to a ground fault or to the loss of one or two phases of the source. The element responds
to the system neutral voltage (3V_0), calculated from the phase voltages. The nominal secondary voltage of the phase voltage channels entered under SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK PHASE VT SECONDARY is the
p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
The neutral overvoltage element can provide a time-delayed operating characteristic versus the applied voltage (initialized
from FlexCurves A, B, or C) or be used as a definite time element. The NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP DELAY setting applies only if
the NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE setting is Definite time. The source assigned to this element must be configured for a phase VT.
GE Multilin
5-199
5 SETTINGS
VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element. This function requires the VTs to
be wye-connected.
Figure 5111: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC

e) AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27X)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS AUXILIARY UV1(2)
AUX UV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 PICKUP:

0.700 pu
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 CURVE:

Definite Time
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 DELAY:

1.00 s
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 MINIMUM:

VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 TARGET:

Self-reset
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 EVENTS:

Disabled
AUXILIARY UV1
The L90 contains one auxiliary undervoltage element for each VT bank. This element is intended for monitoring undervoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The AUX UV1 PICKUP selects the voltage level at which the time undervoltage element starts timing. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SETTINGS SYSTEM
SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK X5 AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY is the per-unit base used when setting the
pickup level.
The AUX UV1 DELAY setting selects the minimum operating time of the auxiliary undervoltage element. Both AUX UV1 PICKUP
and AUX UV1 DELAY settings establish the operating curve of the undervoltage element. The auxiliary undervoltage element
can be programmed to use either definite time delay or inverse time delay characteristics. The operating characteristics
and equations for both definite and inverse time delay are as for the phase undervoltage element.
5-200
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The element resets instantaneously. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is
blocked.
SETTING
AUX UV1
FUNCTION:
SETTING
Disabled=0
AUX UV1 PICKUP:
Enabled=1
AUX UV1 CURVE:
SETTING
AUX UV1 DELAY:
AUX UV1 BLOCK:
Off=0
AND
AUX UV1 MINIMUM

VOLTAGE:
AUX UV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE:
AUX UV1 PKP

AUX UV1 DPO
SETTING
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Vx < Pickup
RUN
AUX UV1 OP
Vx < Minimum
AUX VOLT Vx
V
827849A2.CDR
Figure 5112: AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

f) AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59X)X
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS AUXILIARY OV1(2)
AUX OV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 PICKUP:

0.300 pu
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 PICKUP

DELAY: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 RESET

DELAY: 1.00 s
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 TARGET:

Self-reset
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 EVENTS:

Disabled
AUXILIARY OV1
The L90 contains one auxiliary overvoltage element for each VT bank. This element is intended for monitoring overvoltage
conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SYSTEM
SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK X5 AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY is the per-unit (pu) base used when setting the
pickup level.
A typical application for this element is monitoring the zero-sequence voltage (3V_0) supplied from an open-corner-delta
VT connection.
GE Multilin
5-201
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
AUX OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
SETTING
Enabled=1
SETTING
AND
AUX OV1 PICKUP:
SETTING
RUN
AUX OV1 PICKUP

DELAY :
AUX OV1 BLOCK:
AUX OV1 RESET

DELAY :
Off=0
Vx < Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
tPKP
SETTING
tRST
AUX OV1 OP
AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE:
AUX OV1 PKP
AUXILIARY VOLT (Vx)

827836A2.CDR
Figure 5113: AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC
5-202
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.6.15 SUPERVISING ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) SUPERVISING ELEMENTS
SUPERVISING
ELEMENTS
MESSAGE
DISTURBANCE
DETECTOR
See page 5-203.
87L TRIP
See page 5-205.
b) DISTURBANCE DETECTOR
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) SUPERVISING ELEMENTS DISTURBANCE DETECTOR
DD
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
DD NON-CURRENT SUPV:
Off
MESSAGE
DD CONTROL LOGIC:
Off
MESSAGE
DD LOGIC SEAL-IN:
Off
MESSAGE
DD
EVENTS: Disabled
DISTURBANCE
DETECTOR
The disturbance detector (50DD) element is an 87L-dedicated sensitive current disturbance detector that is used to detect
any disturbance on the protected system. This detector is intended for such functions as trip output supervision and starting
oscillography The disturbance detector also signals the 87L function that a disturbance (possible fault) occurred and to
resize the operating window to remove the pre-fault current. It is essential to have the disturbance detector enabled for
applications where the 87L operating time is critical.
If the disturbance detector is used to supervise the operation of the 87L function, it is recommended that the 87L trip element be used. The 50DD SV disturbance detector FlexLogic operand must then be assigned to an 87L TRIP SUPV setting.
The disturbance detector function measures the magnitude of the negative-sequence current (I_2), the magnitude of the
zero-sequence current (I_0), the change in negative-sequence current (I_2), the change in zero-sequence current (I_0),
and the change in positive-sequence current (I_1). The disturbance detector element uses net local current, computed as
a sum of all sources configured in the current differential element, to detect system disturbances.
The adaptive level detector operates as follows:
When the absolute level increases above 0.12 pu for I_0 or I_2, the adaptive level detector output is active and the
next highest threshold level is increased 8 cycles later from 0.12 to 0.24 pu in steps of 0.02 pu. If the level exceeds
0.24 pu, the current adaptive level detector setting remains at 0.24 pu and the output remains active (as well as the
disturbance detector output) when the measured value remains above the current setting.
When the absolute level is decreasing from in range from 0.24 to 0.12 pu, the lower level is set every 8 cycles without
the adaptive level detector active. Note that the 50DD output remains inactive during this change as long as the delta
change is less than 0.04 pu.
The delta level detectors (I) detectors are designed to pickup for the 0.04 pu change in I_1, I_2, and I_0 currents. The I
value is measured by comparing the present value to the value calculated 4 cycles earlier.
DD FUNCTION: This setting is used to enable/disable the operation of the disturbance detector.
DD NON-CURRENT SUPV: This setting is used to select a FlexLogic operand which will activate the output of the
disturbance detector upon events (such as frequency or voltage change) not accompanied by a current change.
DD CONTROL LOGIC: This setting is used to prevent operation of I_0 and I_2 logic of disturbance detector during
conditions such as single breaker pole being open which leads to unbalanced load current in single-pole tripping
schemes. Breaker auxiliary contact can be used for such scheme.
GE Multilin
5-203
5 SETTINGS
DD LOGIC SEAL-IN: This setting is used to maintain disturbance detector output for such conditions as balanced
three-phase fault, low level time overcurrent fault, etc. whenever the disturbance detector might reset. Output of the
disturbance detector will be maintained until the chosen FlexLogic operand resets.
The user may disable the DD EVENTS setting as the disturbance detector element will respond to any current disturbance on the system which may result in filling the events buffer and possible loss of valuable data.
NOTE
SETTING
DD FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
Disabled=0
LOGIC
ACTUAL
DELTA LEVEL
DETECTOR
COMPUTE SEQ.
CURRENTS
RUN
I_1
ABS (I_1-I_1')>0.04 pu
(I_1' is 4 cycles old)
I_2
ABS (I_2-I_2')>0.04 pu
I_0
ABS (I_0-I_0')>0.04 pu
LOGIC
SETTING
ADAPTIVE LEVEL
DETECTOR
DD CONTROL
LOGIC:
Off=0
OR
AND
RUN
I_0 > 0.12 to 0.24 pu
OR
I_2 > 0.12 to 0.24 pu

NOTE:
ADJUSTMENTS ARE
MADE ONCE EVERY
8 CYCLES TO THE
NEXT LEVEL (HIGHER
OR LOWER) IN 0.02 pu
STEPS USING THE
HIGHEST VALUE OF
I_0 AND I_2.
SETTING
DD LOGIC
SEAL-IN:
Off=0
OR
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
50DD SV
AND
SETTING
DD NON-CURRENT
SUPV:
Off=0
AND
827044A6.CDR
Figure 5114: DISTURBANCE DETECTOR SCHEME LOGIC
5-204
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
c) 87L TRIP
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) SUPERVISING ELEMENTS 87L TRIP
87L TRIP FUNCTION:

Disabled
MESSAGE
87L TRIP SOURCE:

SRC 1
MESSAGE
87L TRIP MODE:

3-Pole
MESSAGE
87L TRIP SUPV:

Off
MESSAGE
87L TRIP FORCE 3-:

Off
MESSAGE
87L TRIP SEAL-IN:

Disabled
MESSAGE
87L TRIP SEAL-IN

PICKUP: 0.20 pu
MESSAGE
87L TRIP TARGET:

Self-reset
MESSAGE
87L TRIP EVENTS:

Disabled
87L TRIP
The 87L trip element must be used to secure the generation of tripping outputs. It is especially recommended for use in all
single-pole tripping applications. It provides the user with the capability of maintaining the trip signal while the fault current
is still flowing, to choose single-pole or three-pole tripping, to employ the received direct transfer trip (DTT) signals, and to
assign supervising trip elements like the disturbance detector. The logic is used to ensure that the relay will:
Trip the faulted phase for a single line to ground fault, as detected by the line differential element.
Trip all three phases for any internal multiphase fault.
Trip all three phases for a second single line to ground fault during or following a single pole trip cycle.
For maximum security, it is recommended the disturbance detector (plus other elements if required) be assigned to see a
change in system status before a trip output is permitted. This ensures the relay will not issue a trip signal as a result of
incorrect settings, incorrect manipulations with a relay, or inter-relay communications problems (for example, extremely
noisy channels). The open pole detector provides forcing of three-pole tripping for sequential faults and close-onto-fault if
desired. The open pole detector feature must be employed and adequately programmed for proper operation of this feature. The 87L TRIP 1P OP and 87L TRIP 3P OP operands are provided to initiate single-pole or three-pole autoreclosing.
NOTE
If a direct transfer trip (DTT) is not required for the 87L trip scheme to operate, it should be disabled at the remote
relay via the GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL settings menu.
87L TRIP FUNCTION: This setting is used to enable or disable the element.
87L TRIP SOURCE: This setting is used to assign a source for seal-in function.
87L TRIP MODE: This setting is used to select either three-pole or single-pole mode of operation.
87L TRIP SUPV: This setting is used to assign a trip supervising element. The 50DD SV FlexLogic operand is recommended (the element has to be enabled); otherwise, elements like instantaneous overcurrent, distance, etc. can be
used.
87L TRIP FORCE 3-: This setting is used to select an element forcing three-pole tripping if any type fault occurs
when this element is active. Autoreclosure disabled can be utilized, or the autoreclosure counter if, for example, the
second trip is required to be a three-pole signal. Likewise, any operand representing a change in the power system
configuration, can be applied.
GE Multilin
5-205
5 SETTINGS
87L TRIP SEAL-IN: This setting is used to enable/disable seal-in of the trip signal by measurement of the current flowing.
87L TRIP SEAL-IN PICKUP: This setting is used to select a pickup setting of the current seal-in function.
SETTING
87L TRIP FUNCTION
= Disabled
= Enabled
SETTING
87L TRIP SOURCE
= Ia
= Ib
SETTING
87L TRIP SEAL-IN PICKUP
Ia > PICKUP
Ib > PICKUP
= Ic
Ic > PICKUP
SETTING
87L TRIP SEAL-IN
= Enabled
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L DIFF OP A
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L TRIP OP A
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L TRIP OP B
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L TRIP OP C
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L RECVD DTT A
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L DIFF OP B
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L RECVD DTT B
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L DIFF OP C
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L TRIP OP
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L RECVD DTT C
OR
OR
SETTING
87L TRIP MODE
XOR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L TRIP 1P OP
= 1-Pole
= 3-Pole
AND
AND
SETTING
87L TRIP SUPV
= 50DD SV
AND
OR
0
OR
50
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
87L TRIP 3P OP
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
OPEN POLE OP A
AND
OPEN POLE OP B
OPEN POLE OP C
OPEN POLE OP
AND
OR
OR
AND
SETTING
87L TRIP FORCE 3-
OR
AND
= Off
831020A5.CDR
Figure 5115: 87L TRIP SCHEME LOGIC
5-206
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.7.1 OVERVIEW
Control elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the
beginning of this chapter for further information.
5.7.2 TRIP BUS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS TRIP BUS TRIP BUS 1(6)
TRIP BUS 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP

DELAY:
0.00 s
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 RESET

DELAY:
0.00 s
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1:

Off
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2:

Off
TRIP BUS 1
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16:

Off
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING: Disabled
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 RESET:

Off
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 TARGET:

Self-reset
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1
EVENTS: Disabled
The trip bus element allows aggregating outputs of protection and control elements without using FlexLogic and assigning them a simple and effective manner. Each trip bus can be assigned for either trip or alarm actions. Simple trip conditioning such as latch, delay, and seal-in delay are available.
The easiest way to assign element outputs to a trip bus is through the EnerVista UR Setup software A protection summary
is displayed by navigating to a specific protection or control protection element and checking the desired bus box. Once the
desired element is selected for a specific bus, a list of element operate-type operands are displayed and can be assigned
to a trip bus. If more than one operate-type operand is required, it may be assigned directly from the trip bus menu.
GE Multilin
5-207
5 SETTINGS
Figure 5116: TRIP BUS FIELDS IN THE PROTECTION SUMMARY

The following settings are available.
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK: The trip bus output is blocked when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted.
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay to produce an output depending on how output is
used.
TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay to reset an output command. The time delay should be
set long enough to allow the breaker or contactor to perform a required action.
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16: These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an
input to the trip bus.
TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING: This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output. This is typically used when
lockout is required or user acknowledgement of the relay response is required.
TRIP BUS 1 RESET: The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted. Note that the
RESET OP operand is pre-wired to the reset gate of the latch, As such, a reset command the front panel interface or via
communications will reset the trip bus output.
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1
SETTINGS
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2
= Off
Non-volatile,
set-dominant
OR
***
AND
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP

DELAY
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
DELAY
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 OP
TPKP
Latch
= Off
R
TRST
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
FUNCTION
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
AND
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
= Off
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET OP
842023A1.CDR
Figure 5117: TRIP BUS LOGIC
5-208
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.7.3 SETTING GROUPS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTINGS GROUPS
SETTING GROUPS
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
SETTING GROUPS BLK:

Off
MESSAGE
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON:

Off
MESSAGE

Off
SETTING GROUPS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

Off
GROUP 1 NAME:
GROUP 2 NAME:
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GROUP 6 NAME:
SETTING GROUP
EVENTS: Disabled
The setting groups menu controls the activation and deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED
settings menu. The faceplate Settings In Use LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized
LED) is in service.
ELEMENTS
The SETTING GROUPS BLK setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic parameter is set to
"On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the
breaker being open.
The GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON to GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON settings select a FlexLogic operand which, when set, will make the
particular setting group active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a
given time the highest-numbered group which is activated by its ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lowernumbered groups. There is no activate on setting for group 1 (the default active group), because group 1 automatically
becomes active if no other group is active.
The SETTING GROUP 1 NAME to SETTING GROUP 6 NAME settings allows to user to assign a name to each of the six settings
groups. Once programmed, this name will appear on the second line of the GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6)
menu display.
The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default
settings group. The following FlexLogic equation (see the figure below) illustrates requests via remote communications
(for example, VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ON) or from a local contact input (for example, CONTACT IP 1 ON) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular
settings group. The assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the On state of a particular settings group.
GE Multilin
5-209
5 SETTINGS
VIRT IP 1 ON (VI1)
CONT IP 1 ON (H5A)
OR (2)
PHASE TOC1 PKP
NOT
PHASE TOC2 PKP
NOT
AND (3)
= VIRT OP 1 (VO1)
10
END
OR (2)
= VIRT OP 1 (VO1)
AND (3)
842789A1.CDR
Figure 5118: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP

5.7.4 SELECTOR SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SELECTOR SWITCH SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 FULL
RANGE: 7
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:
5.0 s
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:
Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP
MODE: Time-out
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 ACK:
Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:

Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1:

Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:

Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT
MODE: Time-out
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:

Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP
MODE: Restore
Range: Restore, Synchronize, Sync/Restore
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 TARGETS:
Self-reset
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
5-210
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The selector switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group
control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic.
The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a
time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The three-bit control input allows setting the selector to the position defined by a three-bit word.
The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after timeout or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile memory.
Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current three-bit word (user setting). Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; for example, the three-bit control input being out
of range.
A selector switch runs every two power cycles.
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through available positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (position 1). When using a direct threebit control word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word
is within the range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established
by setting the SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds.
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in
the following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is Time-out, the setting specifies the required period of
inactivity of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEPUP MODE is Acknowledge, the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is
re-started by any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT
timer expires; otherwise, the change will not take place and an alarm will be set.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new
position at each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1
FULL RANGE) to the first (position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every
50 ms. After each rising edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1:
POS Z CHNG INITIATED target message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for
the time specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out
(Time-out mode), or when the acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (Acknowledge mode).
When the new position is applied, the relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message. Typically,
a user-programmable pushbutton is configured as the stepping up control input.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the
selector will change its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and
does not require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to Acknowledge,
the selector will change its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the
acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change
and an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds.
SELECTOR 1 ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under Acknowledge mode of
operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the
last activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2: These settings specify a three-bit control input of the selector. The three-bit control word pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention:
GE Multilin
A2
A1
A0
POSITION
rest
5-211
5 SETTINGS
The rest position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the
three-bit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is Time-out, the pre-selected position is
applied in SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the three-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is
Acknowledge, the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging
input.
The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the three-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2)
lock-out mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the three-bit control input is inactive; once the three-bit
control sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the selector
changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not
require explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to Acknowledge, the selector changes its position only after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a
pre-defined period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT
ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the three-bit control input. The preselected position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic operand. This setting is active only under
the Acknowledge mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the three-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and
three-bit control input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accordingly).
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay.
When set to Restore, the last position of the selector (stored in the non-volatile memory) is restored after powering up
the relay. If the position restored from memory is out of range, position 0 (no output operand selected) is applied and
an alarm is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
When set to Synchronize selector switch acts as follows. For two power cycles, the selector applies position 0 to the
switch and activates SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM. After two power cycles expire, the selector synchronizes to the position
dictated by the three-bit control input. This operation does not wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When the
synchronization attempt is unsuccessful (that is, the three-bit input is not available (0,0,0) or out of range) then the
selector switch output is set to position 0 (no output operand selected) and an alarm is established (SELECTOR 1 PWR
ALARM).
The operation of Synch/Restore mode is similar to the Synchronize mode. The only difference is that after an
unsuccessful synchronization attempt, the switch will attempt to restore the position stored in the relay memory. The
Synch/Restore mode is useful for applications where the selector switch is employed to change the setting group in
redundant (two relay) protection schemes.
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: If enabled, the following events are logged:

EVENT NAME
5-212
DESCRIPTION
SELECTOR 1 POS Z
Selector 1 changed its position to Z.
The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been
confirmed before the time out.
The selector position pre-selected via the three-bit control input has not been confirmed
before the time out.
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The following figures illustrate the operation of the selector switch. In these diagrams, T represents a time-out setting.
pre-existing
position 2
changed to 4 with
a pushbutton
changed to 1 with
a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with a
pushbutton
changed to 7 with
a 3-bit input
STEP-UP
T
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
T
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842737A1.CDR
Figure 5119: TIME-OUT MODE
GE Multilin
5-213
pre-existing
position 2
5 SETTINGS
changed to 4 with
a pushbutton
changed to 1 with
a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with
a pushbutton
STEP-UP
ACK
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
3BIT ACK
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842736A1.CDR
Figure 5120: ACKNOWLEDGE MODE

APPLICATION EXAMPLE
Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control setting groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting
groups are to be controlled from both user-programmable pushbutton 1 and from an external device via contact inputs 1
through 3. The active setting group shall be available as an encoded three-bit word to the external device and SCADA via
output contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group shall be applied automatically after 5 seconds of inactivity of
the control inputs. When the relay powers up, it should synchronize the setting group to the three-bit control input.
Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUPS menu:
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: Enabled
SETTING GROUPS BLK: Off
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS
GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS
2"
3"

SELECTOR 1 POS 4"

Off
Off
Make the following changes to selector switch element in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SELECTOR SWITCH
menu to assign control to user programmable pushbutton 1 and contact inputs 1 through 3:
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
5-214
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Enabled

SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: 4
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: 5.0 s
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: PUSHBUTTON 1
SELECTOR 1 ACK: Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: CONT IP 1 ON

SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Off
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: Synchronize
ON
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the selector switch element by making the following
changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE:
OUTPUT H2 OPERATE:
OUTPUT H3 OPERATE:
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0"

SELECTOR 1 BIT 1"
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2"
Finally, assign configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS PRODUCT
SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.10 s
The logic for the selector switch is shown below:

SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE:
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE:
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE:
ACTUAL VALUE
SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE:
Enabled = 1
RUN
SELECTOR 1 POSITION
Off = 0
step up
SELECTOR 1 POS 1
SELECTOR 1 ACK:
Off = 0
Off = 0
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
Off = 0
SELECTOR 1 POS 3
4
three-bit control input
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1:
SELECTOR 1 POS 2
acknowledge
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:

Off = 0
ON
SELECTOR 1 POS 4
SELECTOR 1 POS 5
SELECTOR 1 POS 6
SELECTOR 1 POS 7
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:

3-bit acknowledge

3-bit position out
OR
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
842012A2.CDR
Figure 5121: SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-215
5 SETTINGS
5.7.5 TRIP OUTPUT
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS TRIP OUTPUT
TRIP MODE:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, 3 Pole Only, 3 Pole & 1 Pole
MESSAGE
TRIP 3-POLE INPUT-1:

Off
MESSAGE

Off
TRIP OUTPUT
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE
TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-1:

Off
MESSAGE

Off
5-216
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE
TRIP SEAL-IN DELAY:

0.000 s
MESSAGE
TRIP RESET:
CBaux OR Custom
Range: Pole Curr OR Custom, CBaux OR Custom,

Custom
MESSAGE
START TMR Z2PH Inp1:

Off
MESSAGE
START TMR Z2PH Inp2:

Off
MESSAGE
START TMR Z2GR Inp1:

Off
MESSAGE
START TMR Z2GR Inp2:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR A OPEN:
Off
MESSAGE
BKR B OPEN:
Off
MESSAGE
BKR C OPEN:
Off
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
TRIP FORCE 3-POLE:

Off
MESSAGE
TRIP PILOT PRIORITY:

0.000 s
MESSAGE
REVERSE FAULT:
Off
MESSAGE
TRIP DELAY ON EVOLV

FAULTS: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
TRIP EVENTS:
Disabled
The trip output element is primarily used to collect trip requests from protection elements and other inputs to generate output operands to initiate trip operations. Three pole trips will only initiate reclosure if programmed to do so, whereas single
pole trips will always automatically initiate reclosure. The TRIP 3-POLE and TRIP 1-POLE output operands can also be used
as inputs to a FlexLogic OR gate to operate the faceplate Trip indicator LED.
THREE POLE OPERATION:
In applications where single-pole tripping is not required this element provides a convenient method of collecting inputs to
initiate tripping of circuit breakers, the reclose element and breaker failure elements.
SINGLE POLE OPERATION:
This element must be used in single pole operation applications.
NOTE
In these applications this element is used to:
Determine if a single pole operation should be performed.
Collect inputs to initiate three pole tripping, the recloser and breaker failure elements.
Collect inputs to initiate single pole tripping, the recloser and breaker failure elements.
Assign a higher priority to pilot aided scheme outputs than to exclusively local inputs.
The trip output element works in association with other L90 elements (refer to the Theory of operation chapter for a complete description of single-pole operations) that must be programmed and in-service for successful operation. The necessary elements are: recloser, breaker control, open pole detector, and phase selector. The recloser must also be in the
Reset state before a single pole trip can be issued. Outputs from this element are also directly connected as initiate signals to the breaker failure elements.
The trip output element is used to aggregate inputs from appropriate protection elements (including 87L line differential, distance, and instantaneous overcurrent functions) to provide single-pole tripping. The line current differential function is hardwired through the 87L TRIP function, which has to be enabled and configured properly.
The 87L TRIP function collects inputs from both the 87L line differential and 87L DTT functions. It can be supervised by the
disturbance detector and determines if the fault type is single-line-to-ground or multi-phase. The 87L TRIP function sends a
direct command to the trip output element to execute appropriate tripping action without any consultation with phase selector.
Other protective functions, such as distance and overcurrent, need to be assigned to appropriate trip output single-pole or
three-pole inputs and will require phase selector fault identification for tripping action. A timer defined by the TRIP PILOT PRIORITY setting can be used to delay the output decision from other local protection elements to give 87L operational priority.
This prevents three-pole operation where a single pole operation is permitted.
NOTE
To ensure correct operation of the single-pole tripping feature, any non-distance protection used for single pole tripping (such as high-set overcurrent using the instantaneous or directional overcurrent elements) must be blocked by
the OPEN POLE OP A, OPEN POLE OP B, or OPEN POLE OP C operands. For example, instantaneous overcurrent phase A will be blocked by OPEN POLE OP A operand. This blocking condition is pre-wired for distance protection.
The following settings are available for the trip output element.
GE Multilin
5-217
5 SETTINGS
TRIP MODE: This setting is used to select the required mode of operation. If selected to 3 Pole Only outputs for all
three phases are always set simultaneously. If selected to 3 Pole & 1 Pole outputs for all three phases are set simultaneously unless the phase selector or a pilot aided scheme determines the fault is single-phase-to-ground. If the fault
is identified as being AG, BG or CG only the operands for the faulted phase will be asserted.
TRIP 3-POLE INPUT-1 to TRIP 3-POLE INPUT-6: These settings are used to select an operand representing a fault
condition that is not desired to initiate a single pole operation (for example, phase undervoltage). Use a FlexLogic ORgate if more than six inputs are required.
TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-1 to TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-6: These settings are used to select an operand representing a fault
condition that is desired to initiate a single pole trip-and-reclose if the fault is single phase to ground (for example, distance zone 1). Use a FlexLogic OR-gate if more than six inputs are required. The inputs do not have to be phasespecific as the phase selector determines the fault type.
The AR FORCE 3-P TRIP operand is asserted by the autorecloser 1.5 cycles after single-pole reclosing is initiated. This
operand calls for a three-pole trip if any protection element configured under TRIP 1-POLE INPUT remains picked-up. The
open pole detector provides blocking inputs to distance elements, and therefore the latter will reset immediately after
the TRIP 1-POLE operand is asserted. For other protection elements used in single-pole tripping, the user must ensure
they will reset immediately after tripping, otherwise the fact that they are still picked up will be detected as an evolving
fault and the relay will trip three-poles. For example, if high-set phase instantaneous overcurrent is used (TRIP 1-POLE
INPUT X: PHASE IOC1 OP), then OPEN POLE OP A shall be used for blocking phase A of the instantaneous overcurrent element. In this way, after tripping phase A, the phase a instantaneous overcurrent element is forced to reset.
Phases B and C are still operational and can detect an evolving fault as soon as 8 ms after tripping phase A. Neutral
and negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent elements shall be blocked from the OPEN POLE BLK N operand
unless the pickup setting is high enough to prevent pickup during single-pole reclosing.
TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-1 to TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-6: These settings select an operand representing a fault condition that is desired to initiate three pole reclosing (for example, phase distance zone 1). Use a FlexLogic OR-gate if
more than six inputs are required. These inputs will also include the TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-1 to TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-6 values,
which are intended to initiate three-pole reclosing in situations where single-pole tripping commands are changed to
three-pole tripping commands. This may happen in cases where the phase selector identifies a multi-phase fault or the
AR FORCE 3P TRIP command is present.
TRIP SEAL-IN DELAY: This setting specifies the minimum time that trip command signals are maintained to provide
sufficient time to open the breaker poles. If a value of 0 is specified, then the output signal is reset once the protection
elements initiating the trip are reset. If a value other than 0 is specified, then the protection elements must reset and
the timer initiated at the first trip command must expire.
TRIP RESET: This setting selects the option to reset the trip latches. If Pole Curr OR Custom is chosen, then the
OPEN POLE CURRENT PKP setting should be programmed accordingly. If CBaux OR Custom is chosen, then the breakers should be set appropriately. Both the Current and CBaux options can be complimented by custom conditions
using the BKR A OPEN, BKR B OPEN, and BKR C OPEN settings indicated below. Alternately, a purely custom condition can be applied to reset trip output latches.
START TMR Z2PH Inp1 and START TMR Z2PH Inp2: These settings select an operand that will start the phase distance zone 2 timer to avoid a trip delay if the fault evolves from one type to another type (for example, from a singlelineto-ground fault to a multi-phase fault) or from one zone of protection to another zone of protection (for example,
from zone 3 to zone 2). For instance, the GND DIST Z2 PKP FlexLogic operand or the PH DIST Z3 PKP FlexLogic
operand could be assigned to either of these settings. Use a FlexLogic OR-gate if more than two inputs are required.
Refer to phase distance logic diagrams for additional information.
START TMR Z2GR Inp1 and START TMR Z2GR Inp2: These settings select an operand that will start the ground distance zone 2 timer to avoid a trip delay if the fault evolves from one zone of protection to another zone of protection (for
example, from zone 3 to zone 2). For instance, the GND DIST Z3 PKP FlexLogic operand could be assigned to these
settings. Use a FlexLogic OR-gate if more than two inputs are required. Refer to ground distance logic diagrams for
additional information.
BKR A OPEN, BKR B OPEN, and BKR C OPEN: This settings are used to select an operand to indicates that
phase A, B, or C of the breaker is open, respectively.
TRIP FORCE 3-POLE: Selects an operand that will force an input selected for single pole operation to produce a three
pole operation. The AR DISABLED FlexLogic operand is the recommended value for this setting. Power system configurations or conditions which require such operations may be considered as well.
5-218
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
TRIP PILOT PRIORITY: This setting is used to set an interval equal to the inter-relay channel communications time,
plus an appropriate margin, during which outputs are not asserted. This delay permits fault identification information
from a remote terminal to be used instead of local data only.
REVERSE FAULT: This setting should be used to guarantee accuracy of single-pole tripping under evolving external to
internal faults. When a close-in external fault occurs, the relay is biased toward very fast operation on a following internal fault. This is primarily due to depressed voltages and elevated currents in response to the first, external fault. The
phase selector may exhibit some time lag compared to the main protection elements. This may potentially result in a
spurious three-pole operation on a single-line-to-ground internal fault. Delaying tripping on internal faults that follow
detection of reverse faults solves the problem.
As long as the operand indicated under this setting is asserted the trip action will be delayed by TRIP DELAY ON EVOLV
FAULTS time. Typically this operand should combine reverse zone indications (such as zone 4 pickup) with a half-cycle
pickup delay, and two-cycle dropout delay. This setting should be used only in single-pole tripping applications, when
evolving faults are of importance, and slightly delayed operation on evolving faults could be traded for enhanced accuracy of single-pole tripping.
TRIP DELAY ON EVOLV FAULTS: This setting should be used in conjunction with the REVERSE FAULT setting (see
above). Typically this value should be set around half a power system cycle. This setting should be used only in singlepole tripping applications, when evolving faults are of importance, and slightly delayed operation on evolving faults
could be traded for enhanced accuracy of single-pole tripping.
GE Multilin
5-219
5 SETTINGS
6(77,1*6
7ULS0RGH
3ROH2QO\
3ROHDQG3ROH
7ULS)RUFH3ROH
2II
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
23(132/(23
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3
75,3)25&(32/(
25
F\F

25
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
$5)25&(375,3
6(77,1*
2SHQ3ROH0RGH
(1$%/('
$1'
7RWULSRXWSXW
ORJLFVKHHW
$
$FFHOHUDWHG
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
/,1(3,&.8323
'RQO\
/RQO\
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
327775,33
'87775,33
387775,33
+<%5,'327775,33
',5%/2&.75,33
'&8%75,33
25
$1'
/75,3323
6(77,1*
7ULS3ROH,QSXW
25
2II
$1'
6(77,1*
7ULS3ROH,QSXW
25
2II
$1'
6(77,1*
7ULS3ROH,QSXW
$1'
2II
6(77,1*
7ULS3ROH,QSXW
25
6(77,1*
$1'
75,33,/27
35,25,7<
$1'
2II
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
3+$6(6(/(&708/7,3
3+$6(6(/(&792,'
3+$6(6(/(&7$*
3+$6(6(/(&7%*
3+$6(6(/(&7&*
25
$1'
25
3+$6($
25
3+$6(%
$1'
'RQO\
/RQO\
'RQO\
/RQO\
'RQO\
/RQO\
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
327775,3$
'87775,3$
387775,3$
+<%5,'327775,3$
',5%/2&.75,3$
'&8%75,3$
/75,323$
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
327775,3%
'87775,3%
387775,3%
+<%5,'327775,3%
',5%/2&.75,3%
'&8%75,3%
/75,323%
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
327775,3&
'87775,3&
387775,3&
+<%5,'327775,3&
',5%/2&.75,3&
'&8%75,3&
/75,323&
$1'
25
3+$6(&
7RWULSRXWSXW
ORJLFVKHHW
$

25
25
2QO\RIFDQ
EHDVVHUWHG
3
25
25
$*&'5
Figure 5122: TRIP OUTPUT SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-220
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
6(77,1*
7ULS'HOD\RQ(YROYLQJ)DXOWV
)URPWULSRXWSXWORJLFVKHHW$*
3+$6($
25
3+$6(%
3+$6(&
/DWFK
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,33+$6($
/DWFK
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,33+$6(%
$1'
6(77,1*

6(77,1*
5HYHUVH)DXOW
25
$1'
2II
6(77,1*

6
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,33+$6(&
/DWFK
$1'
)URPWULSRXWSXWORJLF
VKHHW$*
3
/DWFK
25
$1'
6(77,1*
7ULS6HDO,Q'HOD\
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,332/(
$1'
;25
25
25
$1'
7,0(5
$1'
6(77,1*
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
23(132/(,$
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,332/(
75,328738723
PV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,3$5,1,732/(
7ULS5HVHW
25
23(132/(%.5$23
3ROH&XUU25&XVWRP
6(77,1*
%NU3KDVH$2SHQ
2II
&%DX[25&XVWRP
25
$1'
&XVWRP
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
23(132/(,%
25
23(132/(%.5%23
3ROH&XUU25&XVWRP
6(77,1*
%NU3KDVH%2SHQ
2II
&%DX[25&XVWRP
25
$1'
&XVWRP
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
23(132/(,%
25
23(132/(%.5%23
3ROH&XUU25&XVWRP
6(77,1*
%NU3KDVH%2SHQ
2II
&%DX[25&XVWRP
25
$1'
&XVWRP
6(77,1*
7ULS5HFORVH,QSXW
2II
6(77,1*
7ULS5HFORVH,QSXW
25
2II
6(77,1*6
6WDUW7LPHU=3K,Q
WRSKDVHGLVWDQFH]RQHORJLF
2II
6WDUW7LPHU=3K,Q
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,3=3+705,1,7
25
$1'
2II
6WDUW7LPHU=*U,Q
WRJURXQGGLVWDQFH]RQHORJLF
2II
6WDUW7LPHU=*U,Q

)URPWULSRXWSXW
ORJLFVKHHW
$*
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,3=*5705,1,7
25
2II
$1'
(1$%/('
$&'5
Figure 5123: TRIP OUTPUT SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)
GE Multilin
5-221
5 SETTINGS
5.7.6 SYNCHROCHECK
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SYNCHROCHECK SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)
SYNCHK1 FUNCTION:
Disabled
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE:
SRC 1
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE:
SRC 2
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT

DIFF: 10000 V
Range: 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE

DIFF: 30
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ

DIFF: 1.00 Hz
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ

HYSTERESIS: 0.06 Hz
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE

SELECT: LV1 and DV2
Range: None, LV1 and DV2, DV1 and LV2, DV1 or DV2,
DV1 Xor DV2, DV1 and DV2
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 DEAD V1
MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 DEAD V2
MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 LIVE V1
MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 LIVE V2
MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 TARGET:
Self-reset
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 EVENTS:
Disabled
SYNCHROCHECK 1
The are two identical synchrocheck elements available, numbered 1 and 2.

The synchronism check function is intended for supervising the paralleling of two parts of a system which are to be joined
by the closure of a circuit breaker. The synchrocheck elements are typically used at locations where the two parts of the
system are interconnected through at least one other point in the system.
Synchrocheck verifies that the voltages (V1 and V2) on the two sides of the supervised circuit breaker are within set limits
of magnitude, angle and frequency differences. The time that the two voltages remain within the admissible angle difference is determined by the setting of the phase angle difference and the frequency difference F (slip frequency). It can
be defined as the time it would take the voltage phasor V1 or V2 to traverse an angle equal to 2 at a frequency equal
to the frequency difference F. This time can be calculated by:
1
T = -------------------------------360
------------------ F
2
(EQ 5.26)
where: = phase angle difference in degrees; F = frequency difference in Hz.
5-222
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
If one or both sources are de-energized, the synchrocheck programming can allow for closing of the circuit breaker using
undervoltage control to by-pass the synchrocheck measurements (dead source function).
SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V1 (see NOTES below).
SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V2, which must not be the same as used for the
V1 (see NOTES below).
SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF: This setting selects the maximum primary voltage difference in volts between the two
sources. A primary voltage magnitude difference between the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF: This setting selects the maximum angular difference in degrees between the two
sources. An angular difference between the two input voltage phasors below this value is within the permissible limit
for synchronism.
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF: This setting selects the maximum frequency difference in Hz between the two sources.
A frequency difference between the two input voltage systems below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS: This setting specifies the required hysteresis for the maximum frequency difference condition. The condition becomes satisfied when the frequency difference becomes lower than SYNCHK1 MAX
FREQ DIFF. Once the Synchrocheck element has operated, the frequency difference must increase above the SYNCHK1
MAX FREQ DIFF + SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS sum to drop out (assuming the other two conditions, voltage and
angle, remain satisfied).
SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT: This setting selects the combination of dead and live sources that will by-pass
synchronism check function and permit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages (V1 or/and V2)
are below the maximum voltage threshold. A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level. Six
options are available:
None:
LV1 and DV2:
DV1 and LV2:
DV1 or DV2:
DV1 Xor DV2:
DV1 and DV2:
Dead Source function is disabled

Live V1 and Dead V2
Dead V1 and Live V2
Dead V1 or Dead V2
Dead V1 exclusive-or Dead V2 (one source is Dead and the other is Live)
Dead V1 and Dead V2
SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V1 in 1 pu. Below this
magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Dead or de-energized.
SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V2 in pu. Below this
magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Dead or de-energized.
SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V1 in pu. Above this magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Live or energized.
SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V2 in pu. Above this magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Live or energized.
NOTES ON THE SYNCHROCHECK FUNCTION:

1.
The selected sources for synchrocheck inputs V1 and V2 (which must not be the same source) may include both a
three-phase and an auxiliary voltage. The relay will automatically select the specific voltages to be used by the synchrocheck element in accordance with the following table.
NO.
V1 OR V2
(SOURCE Y)
V2 OR V1
(SOURCE Z)
SOURCE Y
SOURCE Z
Phase VTs and

Auxiliary VT
Phase VTs and

Auxiliary VT
Phase
Phase
VAB
Phase VTs and

Auxiliary VT
Phase VT
Phase
Phase
VAB
Phase VT
Phase VT
Phase
Phase
VAB
GE Multilin
AUTO-SELECTED
COMBINATION
AUTO-SELECTED VOLTAGE
5-223

NO.
V1 OR V2
(SOURCE Y)
5 SETTINGS
V2 OR V1
(SOURCE Z)
AUTO-SELECTED
COMBINATION
SOURCE Y
SOURCE Z
AUTO-SELECTED VOLTAGE
Phase VT and
Auxiliary VT
Auxiliary VT
Phase
Auxiliary
V auxiliary
(as set for Source z)
Auxiliary VT
Auxiliary VT
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
V auxiliary
(as set for selected sources)
The voltages V1 and V2 will be matched automatically so that the corresponding voltages from the two sources will be
used to measure conditions. A phase to phase voltage will be used if available in both sources; if one or both of the
Sources have only an auxiliary voltage, this voltage will be used. For example, if an auxiliary voltage is programmed to
VAG, the synchrocheck element will automatically select VAG from the other source. If the comparison is required on a
specific voltage, the user can externally connect that specific voltage to auxiliary voltage terminals and then use this
"Auxiliary Voltage" to check the synchronism conditions.
If using a single CT/VT module with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage, ensure that only the auxiliary voltage
is programmed in one of the sources to be used for synchrocheck.
Exception: Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye connected auxiliary voltage.
NOTE
2.
The relay measures frequency and Volts/Hz from an input on a given source with priorities as established by the configuration of input channels to the source. The relay will use the phase channel of a three-phase set of voltages if programmed as part of that source. The relay will use the auxiliary voltage channel only if that channel is programmed as
part of the Source and a three-phase set is not.
5-224
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
6<1&9$%29(0,1
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
6<1&9$%29(0,1
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
6<1&9%(/2:0$;
$1'
6(77,1*6
)XQFWLRQ
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
(QDEOHG
'LVDEOHG
%ORFN
6<1&9%(/2:0$;
$1'
$1'
2II
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
6<1&'($'623
6<1&'($'6'32
$1'
$1'
6(77,1*
'HDG6RXUFH6HOHFW
$1'
1RQH
/9DQG'9
'9DQG/9
'9RU'9
'9[RU'9
'9DQG'9
25
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
6<1&&/623
6<1&&/6'32
$1'
$1'
6(77,1*
'HDG90D[9ROW
90D[LPXP
;25
6(77,1*
'HDG90D[9ROW
25
90D[LPXP
6(77,1*
/LYH90LQ9ROW
$1'
90LQLPXP
6(77,1*
/LYH90LQ9ROW
$1'
90LQLPXP
6(77,1*
96RXUFH
65&
&$/&8/$7(
0DJQLWXGH9
$QJOH
)UHTXHQF\)
6(77,1*
0D[9ROW'LII
&DOFXODWH
,99, 9
90D[LPXP
6(77,1*
0D[$QJOH'LII
&DOFXODWH
,,
6(77,1*
96RXUFH
65&
&$/&8/$7(
0DJQLWXGH9
$QJOH
)UHTXHQF\)
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
6<1&6<1&23
6<1&6<1&'32
0D[LPXP
6(77,1*6
0D[)UHT'LII
)UHT+\VWHUHVLV
&DOFXODWH
,)), )
$1'
6<1&+52&+(&.
)0D[LPXP
$&78$/9$/8(
6\QFKURFKHFN9
6\QFKURFKHFN
6\QFKURFKHFN)
$%&'5
Figure 5124: SYNCHROCHECK SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-225
5 SETTINGS
5.7.7 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS DIGITAL ELEMENTS DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(48)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:

Dig Element 1
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM
Off
1 INPUT:
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM
DELAY:
1 PICKUP
0.000 s
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM
DELAY:
1 RESET
0.000 s
MESSAGE
DIG ELEMENT 1
PICKUP LED: Enabled
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM
Off
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
1 BLOCK:
Digital elements run once per power system cycle.

NOTE
As such they can easily fail to react to an input signal or a block signal with a duration less than one power system
cycle. This also means that digital element output can react up to one power system cycle later than the pickup and
reset delay settings indicate.
Do not use digital elements with transient signals, such as communications commands. Do not use digital elements
where random delays of up to one cycle cannot be tolerated, such as in high speed protection.
There are 48 identical digital elements available, numbered 1 to 48. A digital element can monitor any FlexLogic operand
and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element
settings include a name which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic
operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT: Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set to "0".
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to 0.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED: This setting enables or disabled the digital element pickup LED. When set to
Disabled, the operation of the pickup LED is blocked.
5-226
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
INPUT:
Off = 0
SETTINGS
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
PICKUP DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
RESET DELAY:
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
NAME:
RUN
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DIG ELEM 01 DPO
DIG ELEM 01 PKP
DIG ELEM 01 OP
tPKP
INPUT = 1
tRST
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
BLOCK:
Off = 0
827042A1.VSD
Figure 5125: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC

CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS:
Some versions of the digital input modules include an active voltage monitor circuit connected across form-A contacts. The
voltage monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see technical specifications for form-A).
As long as the current through the voltage monitor is above a threshold (see technical specifications for form-A), the Cont
Op 1 VOn FlexLogic operand will be set (for contact input 1 corresponding operands exist for each contact output). If
the output circuit has a high resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below the threshold and
the Cont Op 1 VOff FlexLogic operand will be set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators
of the integrity of the circuits in which form-A contacts are inserted.
EXAMPLE 1: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING
In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output contact
detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resistance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the
breaker is open (see diagram below). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must
include the breaker position.
85VHULHVGHYLFH
ZLWKIRUP$FRQWDFWV
+D
,
+E
'&
'&
+F
, FXUUHQWPRQLWRU
9 YROWDJHPRQLWRU
D
7ULSFRLO
$&'5
Figure 5126: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1
GE Multilin
5-227
5 SETTINGS
Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an ID name; for
example, Cont Op 1". Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status.
Using the contact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, for example, Cont Ip 1", and will be set On when the
breaker is closed. The settings to use digital element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit are indicated below (EnerVista UR
Setup example shown):
The PICKUP DELAY setting should be greater than the operating time of the breaker to avoid nuisance
alarms.
NOTE
EXAMPLE 2: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING
If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to
maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the figure below). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure below) across the auxiliary contact in the trip
circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position the BLOCK setting is
selected to Off. In this case, the settings are as follows (EnerVista UR Setup example shown).
5-228
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
85VHULHVGHYLFH
ZLWKIRUP$FRQWDFWV
9DOXHVIRUUHVLVWRU5
+D
,
+E
'&
'&
+F
, FXUUHQWPRQLWRU
9 YROWDJHPRQLWRU
D
7ULSFRLO
5
%\SDVV
UHVLVWRU
3RZHUVXSSO\
5HVLVWDQFH
9'&

3RZHU
:
9'&

:
9'&

:
9'&

:
9'&

:
9'&

:
$&'5
Figure 5127: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2

The wiring connection for two examples above is applicable to both form-A contacts with voltage monitoring and
solid-state contact with voltage monitoring.
NOTE
5.7.8 DIGITAL COUNTERS

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS DIGITAL COUNTERS COUNTER 1(8)
COUNTER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
COUNTER 1 NAME:
Counter 1
COUNTER 1 UNITS:
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
0
Range: 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
0
Range: 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 UP:
Off
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 DOWN:
Off
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
CNT1 SET TO PRESET:

Off
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 RESET:
Off
MESSAGE
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off
MESSAGE
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off
COUNTER 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
There are 8 identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from
Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an
external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.
GE Multilin
5-229
5 SETTINGS
COUNTER 1 UNITS: Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted.
The units label will appear in the corresponding actual values status.
COUNTER 1 PRESET: Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case
where a substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic output
operands are provided to indicate if the present value is more than (HI), equal to (EQL), or less than (LO) the set
value.
COUNTER 1 UP: Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to 2,147,483,648.
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is
received when the accumulated value is at the limit of 2,147,483,648 counts, the counter will rollover to
+2,147,483,647.
COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Selects the FlexLogic operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are
blocked.
CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter will
be set to the preset value in the following situations:
1.
2.
When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled
and CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter will be set to 0).
When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO
changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count).
PRESET
3.
When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value
1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the
value 0, the counter will be set to 0).
COUNTER 1 RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for setting the count to either 0 or the preset value depending
on the state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand.
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to 0.
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated
value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is
interrupted, the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power down operation.
5-230
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
SETTINGS
COUNTER 1 NAME:
COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
RUN
AND
COUNTER 1 UP:
Off = 0
SETTING
COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
SETTING
CALCULATE
VALUE
COUNTER 1 DOWN:
Off = 0
Count more than Comp.

Count equal to Comp.
Count less than Comp.
FLEXLOGIC
OPERANDS
COUNTER 1 HI
COUNTER 1 EQL
COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off = 0
SET TO PRESET VALUE

SET TO ZERO
SETTING
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING
AND
ACTUAL VALUES
COUNTER 1 RESET:
Off = 0
ACTUAL VALUE
COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
COUNTER 1 FROZEN:
OR
STORE DATE & TIME
Date & Time
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off = 0
OR
827065A1.VSD
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off = 0
Figure 5128: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-231
5 SETTINGS
5.7.9 MONITORING ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS
MONITORING
ELEMENTS
5-232
BREAKER 1
ARCING CURRENT
See page 5233.
MESSAGE
BREAKER 2
ARCING CURRENT
See page 5233.
MESSAGE
BREAKER 3
ARCING CURRENT
See page 5233.
MESSAGE
BREAKER 4
ARCING CURRENT
See page 5233.
MESSAGE
BREAKER
FLASHOVER 1
See page 5235.
MESSAGE
BREAKER
FLASHOVER 2
See page 5235.
MESSAGE
BREAKER
FLASHOVER 3
See page 5235.
MESSAGE
BREAKER
FLASHOVER 4
See page 5235.
MESSAGE
CONTINUOUS MONITOR
See page 5238.
MESSAGE
CT FAILURE
DETECTOR
See page 5240.
MESSAGE
VT FUSE FAILURE 1
See page 5242.
MESSAGE
VT FUSE FAILURE 2
See page 5242.
MESSAGE
VT FUSE FAILURE 3
See page 5242.
MESSAGE
VT FUSE FAILURE 4
See page 5242.
MESSAGE
OPEN POLE
See page 5243.
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
b) BREAKER ARCING CURRENT

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS BREAKER 1(4) ARCING CURRENT
BKR 1 ARC AMP

FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-A:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-B:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-C:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP

DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT:

1000 kA2-cyc
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP

TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP

EVENTS: Disabled
BREAKER 1
ARCING CURRENT
Range: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1
There is one breaker arcing current element available per CT bank, with a minimum of two elements. This element calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring and integrating the current squared passing
through the breaker contacts as an arc. These per-phase values are added to accumulated totals for each phase and compared to a programmed threshold value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, the relay can set an output operand
to 1. The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed as an actual value.
The operation of the scheme is shown in the following logic diagram. The same output operand that is selected to operate
the output relay used to trip the breaker, indicating a tripping sequence has begun, is used to initiate this feature. A time
delay is introduced between initiation and the starting of integration to prevent integration of current flow through the
breaker before the contacts have parted. This interval includes the operating time of the output relay, any other auxiliary
relays and the breaker mechanism. For maximum measurement accuracy, the interval between change-of-state of the
operand (from 0 to 1) and contact separation should be measured for the specific installation. Integration of the measured
current continues for 100 ms, which is expected to include the total arcing period.
The feature is programmed to perform fault duration calculations. Fault duration is defined as a time between operation of
the disturbance detector occurring before initiation of this feature, and reset of an internal low-set overcurrent function. Correction is implemented to account for a non-zero reset time of the overcurrent function.
Breaker arcing currents and fault duration values are available under the ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS MAINTENANCE
BREAKER 1(4) menus.
BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-A(C): Select the same output operands that are configured to operate the output relays used to
trip the breaker. In three-pole tripping applications, the same operand should be configured to initiate arcing current
calculations for poles A, B and C of the breaker. In single-pole tripping applications, per-pole tripping operands should
be configured to initiate the calculations for the poles that are actually tripped.
BKR 1 ARC AMP DELAY: This setting is used to program the delay interval between the time the tripping sequence is
initiated and the time the breaker contacts are expected to part, starting the integration of the measured current.
BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT: Selects the threshold value above which the output operand is set.
GE Multilin
5-233
5 SETTINGS
Breaker
Contacts
Part
Initiate
Arc
Extinguished
Total Area =
Breaker
Arcing
Current
(kAcycle)
Programmable
Start Delay
100 ms
Start
Integration
Stop
Integration
Figure 5129: ARCING CURRENT MEASUREMENT
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP FUNCTION:
AND
SETTING
Disabled=0
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP DELAY:
Enabled=1
OR
SETTING
100 ms
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP BLOCK:
Off=0
AND
SETTINGS
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP INIT-A:
Off=0
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP INIT-B:
Off=0
OR
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP INIT-C:
Off=0
AND
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP SOURCE:
RUN
Integrate
SETTING
AND
RUN
Integrate
IB
IB 2 -Cycle
IC 2 -Cycle
IC
AND
SETTING
Add to
Accumulator
IA 2 -Cycle
IA
Select
Highest
Value
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP LIMIT:
2
KA * Cycle Limit
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BKR1 ARC OP
BKR1 ARC DPO
RUN
COMMAND
CLEAR BREAKER 1
ARCING AMPS:
Integrate
ACTUAL VALUE
Set All To Zero
BKR 1 ARCING AMP A
NO=0
BKR 1 ARCING AMP B
YES=1
BKR 1 ARCING AMP C
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME A
827071A3.CDR
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME B

BKR 1 OPERATING TIME C
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME
Figure 5130: BREAKER ARCING CURRENT SCHEME LOGIC
5-234
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
c) BREAKER FLASHOVER
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS BREAKER FLASHOVER 1(4)
BKR 1 FLSHOVR
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1

SRC: SRC 1
MESSAGE
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2

SRC: None
MESSAGE
BKR 1 STATUS CLSD A:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 STATUS CLSD B:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 STATUS CLSD C:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 FLSHOVR V PKP:

0.850 pu
MESSAGE
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V

PKP: 1000 V
Range: 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1
MESSAGE
BKR 1 FLSHOVR AMP

PKP: 0.600 pu
MESSAGE
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP

DELAY: 0.100 s
MESSAGE
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV A:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV B:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV C:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 FLSHOVR BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 FLSHOVR
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
BKR 1 FLSHOVR
EVENTS: Disabled
BREAKER
FLASHOVER 1
The detection of the breaker flashover is based on the following condition:

1.
Breaker open,
2.
Voltage drop measured from either side of the breaker during the flashover period,
3.
Voltage difference drop, and
4.
Measured flashover current through the breaker.
Furthermore, the scheme is applicable for cases where either one or two sets of three-phase voltages are available across
the breaker.
GE Multilin
5-235
5 SETTINGS
THREE VT BREAKER FLASHOVER APPLICATION

When only one set of VTs is available across the breaker, the BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC setting should be None. To detect
an open breaker condition in this application, the scheme checks if the per-phase voltages were recovered (picked up), the
status of the breaker is open (contact input indicating the breaker status is off), and no flashover current is flowing. A contact showing the breaker status must be provided to the relay. The voltage difference will not be considered as a condition
for open breaker in this part of the logic.
NOTE
Voltages must be present prior to flashover conditions. If the three VTs are placed after the breaker on the
line (or feeder), and the downstream breaker is open, the measured voltage would be zero and the flashover element will not be initiated.
The flashover detection will reset if the current drops back to zero, the breaker closes, or the selected FlexLogic operand
for supervision changes to high. Using supervision through the BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV A, BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV B, and BRK 1
FLSHOVR SPV C settings is recommended by selecting a trip operand that will not allow the flashover element to pickup prior
to the trip.
The flashover detection can be used for external alarm, re-tripping the breaker, or energizing the lockout relay.
Consider the following configuration:
Bus
CTs
Breaker
Line/Feeder
Bus VTs
842746A1.CDR
The source 1 (SRC1) phase currents are feeder CTs and phase voltages are bus VTs, and Contact Input 1 is set as Breaker
52a contact. The conditions prior to flashover detection are:
1.
52a status = 0.
2.
VAg, VBg, or VCg is greater than the pickup setting.
3.
IA, IB, IC = 0; no current flows through the breaker.
4.
VA is greater than pickup (not applicable in this scheme).
The conditions at flashover detection are:

1.
52a status = 0.
2.
VAg, VBg, or VCg is lower than the pickup setting.
3.
IA, IB, or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker.
4.
VA is greater than pickup (not applicable in this scheme).
SIX VT BREAKER FLASHOVER APPLICATION

The per-phase voltage difference approaches zero when the breaker is closed. The is well below any typical minimum
pickup voltage. Select the level of the BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP setting to be less than the voltage difference measured
across the breaker when the close or open breaker resistors are left in service. Prior to flashover, the voltage difference is
larger than BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP. This applies to either the difference between two live voltages per phase or when the
voltage from one side of the breaker has dropped to zero (line de-energized), at least one per-phase voltage is larger than
the BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP setting, and no current flows through the breaker poles. During breaker flashover, the per-phase
voltages from both sides of the breaker drops below the pickup value defined by the BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP setting, the voltage difference drops below the pickup setting, and flashover current is detected. These flashover conditions initiate FlexLogic pickup operands and start the BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP DELAY timer.
This application do not require detection of breaker status via a 52a contact, as it uses a voltage difference larger than the
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP setting. However, monitoring the breaker contact will ensure scheme stability.
5-236
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Consider the following configuration:
Bus
CTs
Breaker
Line/Feeder
VTs
VTs
842745A1.CDR
The source 1 (SRC1) phase currents are CTs and phase voltages are bus VTs. The source 2 (SRC2) phase voltages are
line VTs. Contact input 1 is set as the breaker 52a contact (optional).
The conditions prior to flashover detection are:
1.
VA is greater than pickup
2.
VAg, VBg, or VCg is greater than the pickup setting
3.
IA, IB, IC = 0; no current flows through the breaker
4.
52a status = 0 (optional)
The conditions at flashover detection are:

1.
VA is less than pickup
2.
VAg, VBg, or VCg is lower than the pickup setting
3.
IA, IB, or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker
4.
52a status = 0 (optional)
The element is operational only when phase-to-ground voltages are connected to relay terminals. The
flashover element will not operate if delta voltages are applied.
NOTE
The breaker flashover settings are described below.
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 SRC: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide three-phase voltages and threephase currents from one side of the current breaker. The source selected as a setting and must be configured with
breaker phase voltages and currents, even if only three (3) VTs are available across the breaker.
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide another set of three phase voltages whenever six (6) VTs are available across the breaker.
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD A to BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C: These settings specify FlexLogic operands to indicate the
open status of the breaker. A separate FlexLogic operand can be selected to detect individual breaker pole status
and provide flashover detection. The recommended setting is 52a breaker contact or another operand defining the
breaker poles open status.
BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP: This setting specifies a pickup level for the phase voltages from both sides of the breaker. If
six VTs are available, opening the breaker leads to two possible combinations live voltages from only one side of the
breaker, or live voltages from both sides of the breaker. Either case will set the scheme ready for flashover detection
upon detection of voltage above the selected value. Set BRK FLSHOVR V PKP to 85 to 90% of the nominal voltage.
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP: This setting specifies a pickup level for the phase voltage difference when two VTs per
phase are available across the breaker. The pickup voltage difference should be below the monitored voltage difference when close or open breaker resistors are left in service. The setting is selected as primary volts difference
between the sources.
BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP: This setting specifies the normal load current which can flow through the breaker.
Depending on the flashover protection application, the flashover current can vary from levels of the charging current
when the line is de-energized (all line breakers open), to well above the maximum line (feeder) load (line/feeder connected to load).
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV A to BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV C: These settings specifiy FlexLogic operands (per breaker
pole) that supervise the operation of the element per phase. Supervision can be provided by operation of other protec-
GE Multilin
5-237
5 SETTINGS
tion elements, breaker failure, and close and trip commands. A six-cycle time delay applies after the selected FlexLogic operand resets.
BRK FLSHOVR PKP DELAY: This setting specifies the time delay to operate after a pickup condition is detected.
SETTINGS
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV A:
0
FlexLogic operand: Off=0

BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV B:
6 cycle
Phase B
logic

BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV C:
Phase C
logic
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

SETTING
BREAKER FLASHOVER
FUNCTION:
Enable=1
Block: OFF=0
BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP:
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO A

VA > PKP
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO B
AND
0
5 cycle
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO C
SET
dominant
Phase C logic
Va > PKP
Phase B logic
RESET
SETTINGS
5 cycle
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD A:
OR
RUN
FlexLogic operand: On=1
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD B:
RUN
SET
dominant
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C:

RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
0
BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP A
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Phase C
logic
OR
RESET
Phase B logic
BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP B
Phase C logic
BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP C
OR
BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP
SETTING
SRC 1, SRC 2, , SRC 6

VA
BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP:
VB
VC
RUN
IA
IA > PKP
IB
AND
IC
SETTINGS
SETTING
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2

SRC:
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V

PKP:
SRC 1, SRC 2, , SRC 6, none

Vb
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP

DELAY:
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1

SRC:
Va
SETTING
tPKP
Phase B
logic
SETTINGS
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
RUN
AND
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP
OR
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP C
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP A

BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP B
SETTING
RUN
VA = | VA - Va |
VA > PKP
842018A2.CDR
Vc
Figure 5131: BREAKER FLASHOVER SCHEME LOGIC

d) CONTINUOUS MONITOR
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS CONTINUOUS MONITOR
CONT MONITOR
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
CONT MONITOR I-OP:

Off

Any Current Element(s) OP
MESSAGE
CONT MONITOR I-SUPV:

Off

To supervise current logic, use 50DD OP
MESSAGE
CONT MONITOR V-OP:

Off

Any Voltage Element(s) OP
MESSAGE
CONT MONITOR V-SUPV:

Off
Range: FlexLogic operand. To supervise voltage logic,

use VT FUSE FAIL OP
MESSAGE
CONT MONITOR
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
CONT MONITOR
EVENTS: Disabled
CONTINUOUS MONITOR
5-238
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The continuous monitor logic is intended to detect the operation of any tripping element that has operated under normal
load conditions; that is, when the disturbance detector has not operated. Because all tripping is supervised by the disturbance detector function, no trip will be issued under these conditions. This could occur when an element is incorrectly set
so that it may misoperate under load. The continuous monitor can detect this state and issue an alarm and/or block the tripping of the relay.
SETTING
CONT MONITOR
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
AND
SETTING
CONT MONITOR
I_SUPV:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING
CONT MONITOR
I_OP:
CONSTANT
Off = 0
CONT
MONITOR
TIMER
OR
pkp
= 1 sec
SETTING
CONT MONITOR
V_SUPV:
t RST = 0
AND
Off = 0
SETTING
CONT MONITOR
V_OP:
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
CONT MONITOR OP
CONT MONITOR PKP
CONT MONITOR DPO
AND
827049A3.vsd
Figure 5132: CONTINUOUS MONITOR SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-239
5 SETTINGS
e) CT FAILURE DETECTOR
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS CT FAILURE DETECTOR
CT FAIL FUNCTION:
Disabled
MESSAGE
CT FAIL BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 1:

SRC 1
MESSAGE
CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 1

PKP: 0.20 pu
MESSAGE
CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 2:

SRC 2
MESSAGE
CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 2

PKP: 0.20 pu
MESSAGE
CT FAIL 3V0 INPUT:

SRC 1
MESSAGE
CT FAIL 3V0 INPUT

PKP: 0.20 pu
MESSAGE
CT FAIL PICKUP
DELAY: 1.000 s
MESSAGE
CT FAIL TARGET:
Self-reset
MESSAGE
CT FAIL EVENTS:
Disabled
CT FAILURE
DETECTOR
The CT failure function is designed to detect problems with system current transformers used to supply current to the relay.
This logic detects the presence of a zero-sequence current at the supervised source of current without a simultaneous
zero-sequence current at another source, zero-sequence voltage, or some protection element condition.
The CT failure logic (see below) is based on the presence of the zero-sequence current in the supervised CT source and
the absence of one of three or all of the three following conditions.
1.
Zero-sequence current at different source current (may be different set of CTs or different CT core of the same CT).
2.
Zero-sequence voltage at the assigned source.
3.
Appropriate protection element or remote signal.
The CT failure settings are described below.
CT FAIL FUNCTION: This setting enables or disables operation of the CT failure element.
CT FAIL BLOCK: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand to block operation of the element during some condition
(for example, an open pole in process of the single pole tripping-reclosing) when CT fail should be blocked. Local signals or remote signals representing operation of some remote current protection elements via communication channels can also be chosen.
CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 1: This setting selects the current source for input 1. The most critical protection element should
also be assigned to the same source.
CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 1 PICKUP: This setting selects the 3I_0 pickup value for input 1 (the main supervised CT source).
CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 2: This setting selects the current source for input 2. Input 2 should use a different set of CTs or a
different CT core of the same CT. If 3I_0 does not exist at source 2, then a CT failure is declared.
CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 2 PICKUP: This setting selects the 3I_0 pickup value for input 2 (different CT input) of the relay.
CT FAIL 3V0 INPUT: This setting selects the voltage source.
5-240
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
CT FAIL 3V0 INPUT PICKUP: This setting specifies the pickup value for the 3V_0 source.
CT FAIL PICKUP DELAY: This setting specifies the pickup delay of the CT failure element.
SETTING
CT FAIL FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTING
CT FAIL BLOCK:
Off=0
SETTING
SETTING
SETTING
CT FAIL 3IO INPUT1:
CT FAIL 3IO INPUT1 PKP:
SRC1
RUN
SETTING
SETTING
CT FAIL 3IO INPUT2:
CT FAIL 3IO INPUT2 PKP:
SRC2
RUN
SETTING
SETTING
CT FAIL 3VO INPUT:
CT FAIL 3VO INPUT:
SRC1
RUN
CT FAIL PICKUP DELAY:

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
CT FAIL OP
3IO > PICKUP

CT FAIL PKP
3IO > PICKUP
OR
3VO > PICKUP
827048A6.CDR
Figure 5133: CT FAILURE DETECTOR SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-241
5 SETTINGS
f) VT FUSE FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS VT FUSE FAILURE 1(4)
VT FUSE FAILURE 1
VT FUSE FAILURE 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Every signal source includes a fuse failure scheme.

The VT fuse failure detector can be used to raise an alarm and/or block elements that may operate incorrectly for a full or
partial loss of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. Some elements that might be blocked (via the BLOCK input)
are distance, voltage restrained overcurrent, and directional current.
There are two classes of fuse failure that may occur:
Class A: loss of one or two phases.
Class B: loss of all three phases.
Different means of detection are required for each class. An indication of class A failures is a significant level of negative
sequence voltage, whereas an indication of class B failures is when positive sequence current is present and there is an
insignificant amount of positive sequence voltage. These noted indications of fuse failure could also be present when faults
are present on the system, so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure declarations during these events is provided. Once the fuse failure condition is declared, it will be sealed-in until the cause that generated it disappears.
An additional condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de-energized; positive
sequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels.
The function setting enables and disables the fuse failure feature for each source.
$1'
5HVHWGRPLQDQW
6(7
25
/DWFK
$1'
)$8/7
5(6(7
6(77,1*
)XQFWLRQ
'LVDEOHG
(QDEOHG
$1'
&203$5$7256
6285&(
5XQ
9B!SX
9B
9B
5XQ
25
25
9BSX
,B
$1'
5XQ
)86(
)$,/
6(7
,B!SX
5XQ
$1'
7,0(5
9BSX
F\FOHV
5XQ
,BSX
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
$1'
F\FOHV
/DWFK
65&97)86()$,/23
65&97)86()$,/'32
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
65&''23
23(132/(23
7KH23(132/(23RSHUDQGLVDSSOLFDEOH
WRWKH'/DQG/RQO\
$1'
25
$1'
5(6(7
5HVHWGRPLQDQW
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
$1'
65&97)86()$,/92//266
$0&'5
Figure 5134: VT FUSE FAIL SCHEME LOGIC
5-242
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
g) OPEN POLE DETECTOR

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS OPEN POLE
OPEN POLE FUNCTION:

Disabled
MESSAGE
OPEN POLE BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
OPEN POLE VOLTAGE

SUPV: Disabled
MESSAGE
OPEN POLE CURRENT

PKP: 0.050 pu
MESSAGE
OPEN POLE LINE XC1:

9999.9
MESSAGE
OPEN POLE LINE XC0:

9999.9
MESSAGE
OPEN POLE REM CURR

PKP: 0.050 pu
MESSAGE
OPEN POLE MODE:

Accelerated
Range: Accelerated, Traditional
MESSAGE
OPEN POLE DETECTION:

I AND V AND CBaux
Range: I AND V AND CBaux, I AND V only
MESSAGE
OPEN POLE TARGET:

Self-Reset
MESSAGE
OPEN POLE EVENTS:

Disabled
OPEN POLE
The open pole detector is intended to identify an open pole of the line circuit breaker. The scheme monitors the breakers
auxiliary contacts, current in the circuit and optionally voltage on the line. The scheme generates output operands used to
block the phase selector and some specific protection elements, thus preventing maloperation during the dead time of a
single-pole autoreclose cycle or any other open pole conditions.
The scheme declares an open pole at the moment a single-pole trip is issued.
In two-breaker and breaker-and-a-half applications, an open pole condition is declared when one or more of the following
hold:
Both breakers have an open pole on the same phase.
The current on the line drops below a threshold.
The current and voltage on the line drop below a threshold.
The open pole feature uses signals defined by the GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE DISTANCE
setting. Voltage supervision can be used only with wye VTs on the line side of the breaker.
SOURCE
The OPEN POLE CURRENT PICKUP setting establishes the current threshold below which an open pole is declared.
The OPEN POLE LINE XC1 setting specifies positive-sequence reactance of the entire line. If shunt reactors are applied, this
value should be a net capacitive reactance of the line and the reactors installed between the line breakers. The value is
entered in secondary ohms. This setting is relevant if open pole condition at the remote end of the line is to be sensed and
utilized by the relay.
The OPEN POLE LINE XC0 setting specifies zero-sequence reactance of the entire line. If shunt reactors are applied, this
value should be a net capacitive reactance of the line and the reactors installed between the line breakers. The value shall
be entered in secondary ohms. This setting is relevant if open pole condition at the remote end of the line is to be sensed
and utilized by the relay (OPEN POLE REM OP FlexLogic operand).
GE Multilin
5-243
5 SETTINGS
The OPEN POLE REM CURR PKP setting specifies pickup level for the remote-end current estimated by the relay as the local
current compensated by the calculated charging current. The latter is calculated based on the local voltages and the capacitive reactances of the line. This setting is relevant if open pole condition at the remote end of the line is to be sensed and
utilized by the relay (OPEN POLE REM OP FlexLogic operand).
The OPEN POLE MODE setting selects the mode of operation of the open pole function. When the Accelerated mode is chosen, an open pole will be declared cycle after trip output operation and before the breaker pole opens. This blocks distance loops involved in the faulted phase and phase selector, and arms the trip output to produce three-pole trip for the next
fault. If the fault evolves into multi-phase fault before breaker pole opens for the first fault, the remaining in-service distance
loops would initiate a three-pole trip. When the Traditional mode is selected, then an open pole is declared only after the
breaker opens and current disappears. If the fault evolves into a multi-phase fault before the circuit breaker pole opens for
the first fault, the phase selector will change the fault type from a single-line-to-ground fault to a multi-phase fault, thereby
initiating a three-pole trip.
The OPEN POLE DETECTION setting selects the signals used to detect an open pole condition. When I AND V AND CBaux
value is selected, the breaker 52 contacts and the current with optional voltage signals are used to determine open pole
conditions. For the I AND V only selection, only the current with optional voltage signals are used.
For convenience, the position of the breaker poles defined in the breaker control feature and available as FlexLogic operand BREAKER 1 A CLSD through BREAKER 1 C CLSD and BREAKER 1 OOS are used by the open pole feature if the I AND
V AND CBaux detection value is selected.
For correct operation of the open pole detector, the breaker control, trip output, and single-pole autoreclose features must
be enabled and configured properly. When used in configuration with only one breaker, the BREAKER 2 FUNCTION should be
Enabled and the BREAKER 2 OUT OF SV setting should be On (refer to the Breaker Control section earlier in this chapter
for additional details).
5-244
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
6(77,1*
)XQFWLRQ
(QDEOHG
'LVDEOHG
WRRSHQSROHORJLFVKHHW
(1$%/('
$1'
%ORFN
2II
WRWKHWULSRXWSXWVFKHPH
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
23(132/(,$
6(77,1*
23(132/(,%
23(132/(,&
&XUUHQW3LFNXS
581
,$3LFNXS
,%3LFNXS
,&3LFNXS
6(77,1*
9ROWDJH6XSHUYLVLRQ
$1'
25
$1'
(QDEOHG
'LVDEOHG
$1'
&$/&8/$7(
581
6(77,1*
'LVWDQFH6RXUFH
$1'
9ROWDJH
VXSHUYLVLRQ
FDOFXODWLRQV
,$
,%
,&
9$*
9%*
9&*
25
$1'
9$*!SX
9%*!SX
9&*!SX
6(77,1*6
$1'
25
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
%5($.(5$&/6'
%5($.(5%&/6'
2SHQ3ROH/LQH;&
2SHQ3ROH/LQH;&
%5($.(5&&/6'
&KDUJLQJFXUUHQW
FDOFXODWLRQV
&KDUJLQJ
FXUUHQW
FDOFXODWRLQV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
%5($.(5226
%5($.(5&/26('
%5($.(523(132/(
3+$6(&
WRWKHWULSRXWSXWVFKHPH
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
23(132/(%.523$
25
23(132/(%.523%
23(132/(%.523&
25
25
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
%5($.(5$&/6'
%5($.(5%&/6'
25
%5($.(5&&/6'
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
%5($.(5226
%5($.(5&/26('
%5($.(523(132/(
3+$6(%
$1'
$1'
6(77,1*
2SHQ3ROH'HWHFWLRQ
,DQG9DQG&%DX[
,DQG9RQO\
3+$6($
$1'
25
25
25
7,0(56
F\FOHV
6(77,1*
2SHQ3ROH5HP&XUUHQW3NS
581
F\FOHV
F\FOHV
,$UHPRWH3LFNXS
,%UHPRWH3LFNXS
,&UHPRWH3LFNXS
F\FOHV
F\FOHV
F\FOHV
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
23(132/(5(023$
23(132/(5(023%
23(132/(5(023&
$&&'5
Figure 5135: OPEN POLE DETECTOR LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)
GE Multilin
5-245
5 SETTINGS
IURPRSHQSROHORJLFVKHHW
(1$%/('
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,33+$6($
;25
7,0(5
F\FOHV
7,0(5

$1'
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
23(132/(23$

F\FOH
25
3+$6($
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,33+$6(%
7,0(5
F\FOHV
7,0(5

$1'
$1'
F\FOH
25
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,33+$6(&
7,0(5
F\FOHV
7,0(5

$1'
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
23(132/(%/.$%
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
23(132/(23%
3+$6(%
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
23(132/(%/.1
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
23(132/(%/.%&
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
23(132/(23&

F\FOH
25
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
23(132/(%/.&$
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
23(132/(23
3+$6(&
6(77,1*
2SHQ3ROH0RGH
$FFHOHUDWHG
7UDGLWLRQDO
$&'5
Figure 5136: OPEN POLE DETECTOR LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-246
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.7.10 PILOT SCHEMES
a) PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (POTT)

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS PILOT SCHEMES POTT SCHEME
POTT SCHEME
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
POTT PERMISSIVE
ECHO: Disabled
MESSAGE
POTT RX PICKUP
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
TRANS BLOCK PICKUP

DELAY: 0.020 s
MESSAGE
TRANS BLOCK RESET

DELAY: 0.090 s
MESSAGE
ECHO DURATION:
0.100 s
MESSAGE
ECHO LOCKOUT:
0.250 s
MESSAGE

DELAY: 0.050 s
MESSAGE
POTT SEAL-IN
DELAY: 0.400 s
MESSAGE
GND DIR O/C FWD:

Off
MESSAGE
POTT RX:
Off
MESSAGE
POTT SCHEME TARGET:

Self-Reset
MESSAGE
POTT SCHEME EVENTS:

Disabled
POTT SCHEME
This scheme is intended for two-terminal line applications only. It uses an over-reaching zone 2 distance element to essentially compare the direction to a fault at both the ends of the line. Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the
relay can be used in conjunction with the zone 2 distance element to key the scheme and initiate its operation. This provides increased coverage for high resistance faults.
For proper scheme operation, the zone 2 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured, and set per
the rules of distance relaying. The line pickup element should be enabled, configured and set properly to detect line-endopen/weak-infeed conditions. If used by this scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent functions must be
enabled, configured, and set accordingly.
POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO: If set to "Enabled" this setting will result in sending a permissive echo signal to the remote
end. The permissive signal is echoed back upon receiving a reliable POTT RX signal from the remote end while the
line-end-open condition is identified by the line pickup logic. The permissive echo is programmed as a one-shot logic.
The echo is sent only once and then the echo logic locks out for a settable period of time (ECHO LOCKOUT setting). The
duration of the echo pulse does not depend on the duration or shape of the received POTT RX signal but is settable as
ECHO DURATION.
POTT RX PICKUP DELAY: This setting enables the relay to cope with spurious receive signals. The delay should be
set longer than the longest spurious TX signal that can occur simultaneously with the zone 2 pickup. The selected
delay will increase the response time of the scheme.
GE Multilin
5-247
5 SETTINGS
TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the POTT
scheme for coping with the exposure of a ground directional overcurrent function (if used) to current reversal conditions. The transient blocking mechanism applies to the ground overcurrent path only as the reach settings for the zone
2 distance functions is not expected to be long for two-terminal applications, and the security of the distance functions
is not endangered by the current reversal conditions. Upon receiving the POTT RX signal, the transient blocking mechanism allows the RX signal to be passed and aligned with the GND DIR O/C FWD indication only for a period of time
defined as TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY. After that the ground directional overcurrent path will be virtually disabled for a
period of time specified as TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY.
The TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY should be long enough to give the selected ground directional overcurrent function
time to operate, but not longer than the fastest possible operation time of the protection system that can create current
reversal conditions within the reach of the selected ground directional overcurrent function. This setting should take
into account the POTT RX PICKUP DELAY. The POTT RX signal is shaped for aligning with the ground directional indication as follows: the original RX signal is delayed by the POTT RX PICKUP DELAY, then terminated at TRANS BLOCK PICKUP
DELAY after the pickup of the original POTT TX signal, and eventually, locked-out for TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY.
TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the POTT scheme
for coping with the exposure of a ground directional overcurrent function (if used) to current reversal conditions (see
also the TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY). This delay should be selected long enough to cope with transient conditions
including not only current reversals but also spurious negative and zero-sequence currents occurring during breaker
operations. The breaker failure time of the surrounding protection systems within the reach of the ground directional
function used by the POTT scheme may be considered to make sure that the ground directional function is not jeopardized during delayed breaker operations.
ECHO DURATION: This setting defines the guaranteed and exact duration of the echo pulse. The duration does not
depend on the duration and shape of the received POTT RX signal. This setting enables the relay to avoid a permanent
lock-up of the transmit/receive loop.
ECHO LOCKOUT: This setting defines the lockout period for the echo logic after sending the echo pulse.
LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY: This setting defines the pickup setting for validation of the line end open conditions
as detected by the Line Pickup logic through the LINE PICKUP LEO PKP FlexLogic operand. The validated line end
open condition is a requirement for the POTT scheme to return a received echo signal (if the echo feature is enabled).
The value of this setting should take into account the principle of operation and settings of the line pickup element.
POTT SEAL-IN DELAY: The output FlexLogic operand (POTT OP) is produced according to the POTT scheme logic.
A seal-in time delay is applied to this operand for coping with noisy communication channels. This setting specifies a
minimum guaranteed duration of the POTT OP pulse.
GND DIR O/C FWD: This setting selectes the FlexLogic operand (if any) of a protection element used in addition to
zone 2 for identifying faults on the protected line, and thus, for keying the communication channel and initiating operation of the scheme. Good directional integrity is the key requirement for an over-reaching forward-looking protection
element used as GND DIR O/C FWD. Even though any FlexLogic operand could be used as GND DIR O/C FWD allowing
the user to combine responses of various protection elements, or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic equations, this extra signal is primarily meant to be the output operand from either the negative-sequence directional overcurrent or neutral directional overcurrent elements. Both of these elements have separate forward and reverse output
operands. The forward indication should be used (NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD or NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD). For greater security
and to overcome spurious directional element operation during transients, adding at least 0.5 cycles of pickup delay to
the forward directional element is recommended.
POTT RX: This setting enables the user to select the FlexLogic operand that represents the receive signal (RX) for
the scheme. Typically an input contact interfacing with a signaling system is used. Other choices include remote inputs
and FlexLogic equations. The POTT transmit signal (TX) should be appropriately interfaced with the signaling system by assigning the output FlexLogic operand (POTT TX) to an output contact. The remote output mechanism is
another choice.
The output operand from the scheme (POTT OP) must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in particular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be programmed
to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and autoreclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application.
5-248
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
POTT SCHEME
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
PH DIST Z2 PKP
AND
OR
GND DIST Z2 PKP

SETTINGS
POTT SEAL-IN
DELAY:
SETTING
GND DIR O/C FWD:
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
POTT OP
t RST
AND
Off = 0
SETTINGS
POTT RX PICKUP
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
POTT RX:
Off = 0
AND
AND
t PKP
0
SETTINGS
TRANS BLOCK PICKUP
DELAY:
AND
TRANS BLOCK RESET

DELAY:
t PKP
t RST
SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LINE PICKUP LEO PKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

DELAY:
SETTINGS
OR
POTT TX
ECHO DURATION:
t PKP
0
ECHO LOCKOUT:
SETTING
AND
Echo duration and lockout logic
POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO:

Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
837014A9.CDR
Figure 5137: POTT SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-249
5 SETTINGS
5.7.11 AUTORECLOSE
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS AUTORECLOSE AUTORECLOSE
AR FUNCTION:
Disabled
MESSAGE
AR MODE:
1 & 3 Pole
Range: 1 & 3 Pole, 1 Pole, 3 Pole-A, 3 Pole-B
MESSAGE
AR MAX NUMBER OF
SHOTS: 2
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4
MESSAGE
AR INITIATE MODE:
Protection AND CB
Range: Protection AND CB, Protection Only
MESSAGE
AR BLOCK BKR1:
Off
MESSAGE
AR CLOSE TIME BKR 1:

0.10 s
MESSAGE
AR BKR MAN CLOSE:

Off
MESSAGE
AR BLK TIME UPON MAN

CLS: 10.00 s
MESSAGE
AR 1P INIT:
Off
MESSAGE
AR 3P INIT:
Off
MESSAGE
AR 3P TD INIT:
Off
MESSAGE
AR MULTI-P FAULT:
Off
MESSAGE
BKR ONE POLE OPEN:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 3 POLE OPEN:

Off
MESSAGE
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1:

0.50 s
MESSAGE
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2:

1.20 s
MESSAGE
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 3:

2.00 s
MESSAGE
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 4:

4.00 s
MESSAGE
AR EXTEND DEAD T 1:
Off
MESSAGE
AR DEAD TIME 1
EXTENSION: 0.50 s
MESSAGE
AR RESET:
Off
AUTORECLOSE
5-250
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
AR RESET TIME:
60.00 s
MESSAGE
AR BKR CLOSED:
Off
MESSAGE
AR BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
AR PAUSE:
Off
MESSAGE
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ
TIME: 5.00 s
MESSAGE
AR BLOCK BKR2:
Off
MESSAGE
AR CLOSE TIME BKR2:

0.10 s
MESSAGE
AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2:
No
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1:
No
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION:

Continue
Range: Continue, Lockout
MESSAGE
AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION:

Continue
Range: Continue, Lockout
MESSAGE
AR 1-P DEAD TIME:

1.00 s
MESSAGE
AR BKR SEQUENCE:
1-2
Range: 1, 2, 1&2, 12, 21
MESSAGE
AR TRANSFER TIME:
4.00 s
MESSAGE
AR BUS FLT INIT:

Off
MESSAGE
AR EVENT:
Disabled
The autoreclose scheme is intended for use on transmission lines with circuit breakers operated in both the single pole and
three pole modes, in one or two breaker arrangements. The autoreclose scheme provides four programs with different
operating cycles, depending on the fault type. Each of the four programs can be set to trigger up to four reclosing attempts.
The second, third, and fourth attempts always perform three-pole reclosing and have independent dead time delays.
When used in two breaker applications, the reclosing sequence is selectable. The reclose signal can be sent to one
selected breaker only, to both breakers simultaneously or to both breakers in sequence (one breaker first and then, after a
delay to check that the reclose was successful, to the second breaker). When reclosing in sequence, the first breaker
should reclose with either the single-pole or three-pole dead time according to the fault type and reclose mode; the second
breaker should follow the successful reclosure of the first breaker. When reclosing simultaneously, for the first shot both
breakers should reclose with either the single-pole or three-pole dead time, according to the fault type and the reclose
mode.
The signal used to initiate the autoreclose scheme is the trip output from protection. This signal can be single pole tripping
for single phase faults and three phase tripping for multi-phase faults. The autoreclose scheme has five operating states.
GE Multilin
5-251
STATE
5 SETTINGS
CHARACTERISTICS
Enabled
Scheme is permitted to operate
Disabled
Scheme is not permitted to operate
Reset
Scheme is permitted to operate and shot count is reset to 0
Reclose in progress
Scheme has been initiated but the reclose cycle is not finished (successful or not)
Lockout
Scheme is not permitted to operate until reset received
AR PROGRAMS:
The autorecloser provides four programs that can cause from one to four reclose attempts (shots). After the first shot, all
subsequent recloses will always be three-pole. If the maximum number of shots selected is 1 (only one reclose attempt)
and the fault is persistent, after the first reclose the scheme will go to lockout upon another Initiate signal.
For the 3-pole reclose programs (modes 3 and 4), an AR FORCE 3-P FlexLogic operand is set. This operand can be used
in connection with the tripping logic to cause a three-pole trip for single-phase faults.
Table 522: AUTORECLOSE PROGRAMS
MODE
AR MODE
FIRST SHOT
SECOND SHOT
THIRD SHOT
FOURTH SHOT
SINGLEPHASE
FAULT
MULTIPHASE
FAULT
SINGLEPHASE
FAULT
MULTIPHASE
FAULT
SINGLEPHASE
FAULT
MULTIPHASE
FAULT
SINGLEPHASE
FAULT
MULTIPHASE
FAULT
1 & 3 POLE
1 POLE
3 POLE
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
1 POLE
1 POLE
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE-A
3 POLE
LO
3 POLE or
LO
LO
3 POLE or
LO
LO
3 POLE or
LO
LO
3 POLE-B
3 POLE
3 POLE
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
3 POLE or
LO
The four autoreclose modes are described below:

1.
1 & 3 Pole: In this mode, the autorecloser starts the AR 1-P DEAD TIME timer for the first shot if the autoreclose is single-phase initiated, the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 timer if the autoreclose is three-pole initiated, and the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2
timer if the autoreclose is three-phase time delay initiated. If two or more shots are enabled, the second, third, and
fourth shots are always three-pole and start the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2(4) timers.
2.
1 Pole: In this mode, the autorecloser starts the AR 1-P DEAD TIME for the first shot if the fault is single phase. If the
fault is three-phase or a three-pole trip on the breaker occurred during the single-pole initiation, the scheme goes to
lockout without reclosing. If two or more shots are enabled, the second, third, and fourth shots are always three-pole
and start the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2(4) timers.
3.
3 Pole-A: In this mode, the autorecloser is initiated only for single phase faults, although the trip is three pole. The
autorecloser uses the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 for the first shot if the fault is single phase. If the fault is multi phase the
scheme will go to Lockout without reclosing. If two or more shots are enabled, the second, third, and fourth shots are
always three-phase and start the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2(4) timers.
4.
3 Pole-B: In this mode, the autorecloser is initiated for any type of fault and starts the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 for the first
shot. If the initiating signal is AR 3P TD INIT the scheme starts AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 for the first shot. If two or more shots
are enabled, the second, third, and fourth shots are always three-phase and start the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2(4) timers.
BASIC RECLOSING OPERATION:

Reclosing operation is determined primarily by the AR MODE and AR BKR SEQUENCE settings. The reclosing sequences are
started by the initiate inputs. A reclose initiate signal will send the scheme into the reclose-in-progress (RIP) state, asserting
the AR RIP FlexLogic operand. The scheme is latched into the RIP state and resets only when an AR CLS BKR 1 (autoreclose breaker 1) or AR CLS BKR 2 (autoreclose breaker 2) operand is generated or the scheme goes to the Lockout state.
The dead time for the initial reclose operation will be determined by either the AR 1-P DEAD TIME, AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1, or AR
setting, depending on the fault type and the mode selected. After the dead time interval the scheme will
assert the AR CLOSE BKR 1 or AR CLOSE BKR 2 operands, as determined by the sequence selected. These operands are
latched until the breaker closes or the scheme goes to Reset or Lockout.
3-P DEAD TIME 2
5-252
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
There are three initiate programs: single pole initiate, three pole initiate and three pole, time delay initiate. Any of these
reclose initiate signals will start the reclose cycle and set the reclose-in-progress (AR RIP) operand. The reclose-in-progress
operand is sealed-in until the Lockout or Reset signal appears.
The three-pole initiate and three-pole time delay initiate signals are latched until the CLOSE BKR1 OR BKR2 or Lockout or
Reset signal appears.
AR PAUSE:
The pause input offers the possibility of freezing the autoreclose cycle until the pause signal disappears. This may be done
when a trip occurs and simultaneously or previously, some conditions are detected such as out-of step or loss of guard frequency, or a remote transfer trip signal is received. The pause signal blocks all three dead timers. When the pause signal
disappears the autoreclose cycle is resumed by initiating AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2.
This feature can be also used when a transformer is tapped from the protected line and a reclose is not desirable until the
transformer is removed from the line. In this case, the reclose scheme is paused until the transformer is disconnected. The
AR PAUSE input will force a three-pole trip through the 3-P DEADTIME 2 path.
EVOLVING FAULTS:
1.25 cycles after the single pole dead time has been initiated, the AR FORCE 3P TRIP operand is set and it will be reset only
when the scheme is reset or goes to Lockout. This will ensure that when a fault on one phase evolves to include another
phase during the single pole dead time of the auto-recloser the scheme will force a 3 pole trip and reclose.
RECLOSING SCHEME OPERATION FOR ONE BREAKER:
Permanent Fault: Consider Mode 1, which calls for 1-Pole or 3-Pole Time Delay 1 for the first reclosure and 3-Pole
Time Delay 2 for the second reclosure, and assume a permanent fault on the line. Also assume the scheme is in the
Reset state. For the first single-phase fault the AR 1-P DEAD TIME timer will be started, while for the first multi-phase fault
the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 timer will be started. If the AR 3P TD INIT signal is high, the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 will be started for
the first shot.
If AR MAX NO OF SHOTS is set to 1, upon the first reclose the shot counter is set to 1. Upon reclosing, the fault is again
detected by protection and reclose is initiated. The breaker is tripped three-pole through the AR SHOT COUNT >0 operand that will set the AR FORCE 3P operand. Because the shot counter has reached the maximum number of shots permitted the scheme is sent to the Lockout state.
If AR MAX NO OF SHOTS is set to 2, upon the first reclose the shot counter is set to 1. Upon reclosing, the fault is again
detected by protection and reclose is initiated. The breaker is tripped three-pole through the AR SHOT COUNT >0 operand that will set the AR FORCE 3P operand. After the second reclose the shot counter is set to 2. Upon reclosing, the
fault is again detected by protection, the breaker is tripped three-pole, and reclose is initiated again. Because the shot
counter has reached the maximum number of shots permitted the scheme is sent to the lockout state.
Transient Fault: When a reclose output signal is sent to close the breaker the reset timer is started. If the reclosure
sequence is successful (there is no initiating signal and the breaker is closed) the reset timer will time out returning the
scheme to the reset state with the shot counter set to "0" making it ready for a new reclose cycle.
RECLOSING SCHEME OPERATION FOR TWO BREAKERS:
Permanent Fault: The general method of operation is the same as that outlined for the one breaker applications
except for the following description, which assumes AR BKR SEQUENCE is 1-2 (reclose Breaker 1 before Breaker 2)
The signal output from the dead time timers passes through the breaker selection logic to initiate reclosing of Breaker
1. The Close Breaker 1 signal will initiate the Transfer Timer. After the reclose of the first breaker the fault is again
detected by the protection, the breaker is tripped three pole and the autoreclose scheme is initiated. The Initiate signal
will stop the transfer timer. After the 3-P dead time times out the Close Breaker 1 signal will close first breaker again
and will start the transfer timer. Since the fault is permanent the protection will trip again initiating the autoreclose
scheme that will be sent to Lockout by the SHOT COUNT = MAX signal.
Transient Fault: When the first reclose output signal is sent to close Breaker 1, the reset timer is started. The close
Breaker 1 signal initiates the transfer timer that times out and sends the close signal to the second breaker. If the reclosure sequence is successful (both breakers closed and there is no initiating signal) the reset timer will time out, returning the scheme to the reset state with the shot counter set to 0. The scheme will be ready for a new reclose cycle.
GE Multilin
5-253
5 SETTINGS
AR BKR1(2) RECLS FAIL:

If the selected sequence is 12 or 21 and after the first or second reclose attempt the breaker fails to close, there are
two options. If the AR BKR 1(2) FAIL OPTION is set to Lockout, the scheme will go to lockout state. If the AR BKR 1(2) FAIL
OPTION is set to Continue, the reclose process will continue with Breaker 2. At the same time the shot counter will be
decreased (since the closing process was not completed).
SCHEME RESET AFTER RECLOSURE:
When a reclose output signal is sent to close either breaker 1 or 2 the reset timer is started. If the reclosure sequence is
successful (there is no initiating signal and the breakers are closed) the reset timer will time out, returning the scheme to
the reset state, with the shot counter set to 0, making it ready for a new reclose cycle.
In two breaker schemes, if one breaker is in the out-of-service state and the other is closed at the end of the reset time, the
scheme will also reset. If at the end of the reset time at least one breaker, which is not in the out-of-service state, is open
the scheme will be sent to Lockout.
The reset timer is stopped if the reclosure sequence is not successful: an initiating signal present or the scheme is in Lockout state. The reset timer is also stopped if the breaker is manually closed or the scheme is otherwise reset from lockout.
LOCKOUT:
When a reclose sequence is started by an initiate signal the scheme moves into the reclose-in-progress state and starts the
incomplete sequence timer. The setting of this timer determines the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose
shot. If a close breaker 1 or 2 signal is not present before this time expires, the scheme goes to Lockout.
There are four other conditions that can take the scheme to the Lockout state, as shown below:
Receipt of Block input while in the reclose-in-progress state
The reclosing program logic: when a 3P Initiate is present and the autoreclose mode is either 1 Pole or 3Pole-A (3 pole
autoreclose for single pole faults only)
Initiation of the scheme when the count is at the maximum allowed
If at the end of the reset time at least one breaker, which is not in the out-of-service state, is open the scheme will be
sent to Lockout. The scheme will be also sent to Lockout if one breaker fails to reclose and the setting AR BKR FAIL
OPTION is set to Lockout.
Once the Lockout state is set it will be latched until one or more of the following occurs:
The scheme is intentionally reset from Lockout, employing the Reset setting of the Autorecloser;
The Breaker(s) is(are) manually closed from panel switch, SCADA or other remote control through the AR BRK MAN
setting;
CLOSE
10 seconds after breaker control detects that breaker(s) were closed.
BREAKER OPEN BEFORE FAULT:

A logic circuit is provided that inhibits the close breaker 1 and close breaker 2 outputs if a reclose initiate (RIP) indicator is
not present within 30 ms of the Breaker Any Phase Open input. This feature is intended to prevent reclosing if one of the
breakers was open in advance of a reclose initiate input to the recloser. This logic circuit resets when the breaker is closed.
TRANSFER RECLOSE WHEN BREAKER IS BLOCKED:
1.
When the reclosing sequence 1-2 is selected and Breaker 1 is blocked (AR BKR1 BLK operand is set) the reclose signal
can be transferred direct to the Breaker 2 if AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2 is set to Yes. If set to No, the scheme will be sent to
Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
2.
When the reclosing sequence 2-1 is selected and Breaker 2 is blocked (AR BKR2 BLK operand is set) the reclose signal
can be transferred direct to the Breaker 1 if AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1 is set to Yes. If set to No the scheme will be sent to
Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
FORCE 3-POLE TRIPPING:

The reclosing scheme contains logic that is used to signal trip logic that three-pole tripping is required for certain conditions.
This signal is activated by any of the following:
Autoreclose scheme is paused after it was initiated.
Autoreclose scheme is in the lockout state.
5-254
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Autoreclose mode is programmed for three-pole operation
The shot counter is not at 0; that is, the scheme is not in the reset state. This ensures a second trip will be three-pole
when reclosing onto a permanent single phase fault.
1.25 cycles after the single-pole reclose is initiated by the AR 1P INIT signal.
ZONE 1 EXTENT:
The zone 1 extension philosophy here is to apply an overreaching zone permanently as long as the relay is ready to
reclose, and reduce the reach when reclosing. Another zone 1 extension approach is to operate normally from an underreaching zone, and use an overreaching distance zone when reclosing the line with the other line end open. This philosophy could be programmed via the line pickup scheme.
The Extended Zone 1" is 0 when autoreclose is in lockout or disabled and 1 when autoreclose is in reset.
1.
When "Extended Zone 1" is 0, the distance functions shall be set to normal underreach Zone 1 setting.
2.
When "Extended Zone 1" is 1, the distance functions may be set to Extended Zone 1 Reach, which is an overreaching
setting.
3.
During a reclose cycle, "Extended Zone 1" goes to 0 as soon as the first CLOSE BREAKER signal is issued (AR SHOT
COUNT > 0) and remains 0 until the recloser goes back to reset.
USE OF SETTINGS:
The single-phase autoreclose settings are described below.
AR MODE: This setting selects the Autoreclose operating mode, which functions in conjunction with signals received
at the initiation inputs as described previously.
AR MAX NUMBER OF SHOTS: This setting specifies the number of reclosures that can be attempted before reclosure goes to lockout when the fault is permanent.
AR INITIATE MODE: This setting selects the autoreclose initiation mode. When selected as Protection AND CB, the
autoreclose element will be initiated by protection operation and will begin incrementing the autoreclose dead time
timer when a circuit breaker is open. Breaker status is determined from breaker auxiliary contacts which should be correctly configured in breaker settings. In Protection only initiation mode, the autoreclose element will be initiated by
protection operation and will begin incrementing the dead time when protection resets, without the need of breaker
auxiliary contacts.
AR BLOCK BKR1: This input selects an operand that will block the reclose command for breaker 1. This condition can
be for example: breaker low air pressure, reclose in progress on another line (for the central breaker in a breaker and
a half arrangement), or a sum of conditions combined in FlexLogic.
AR CLOSE TIME BKR1:This setting represents the closing time for the breaker 1 from the moment the Close command is sent to the moment the contacts are closed.
AR BKR MAN CLOSE: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that represents manual close command to a
breaker associated with the autoreclose scheme.
AR BLK TIME UPON MAN CLS: The autoreclose scheme can be disabled for a programmable time delay after an
associated circuit breaker is manually commanded to close, preventing reclosing onto an existing fault such as
grounds on the line. This delay must be longer than the slowest expected trip from any protection not blocked after
manual closing. If the autoreclose scheme is not initiated after a manual close and this time expires the autoreclose
scheme is set to the reset state.
AR 1P INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that is intended to initiate single-pole autoreclosure.
AR 3P INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that is intended to initiate three-pole autoreclosure, first timer
(AR 3P DEAD TIME 1) that can be used for a high-speed autoreclosure.
AR 3P TD INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand intended to initiate three-pole autoreclosure. second timer
(AR 3P DEAD TIME 2) can be used for a time-delay autoreclosure.
AR MULTI-P FAULT: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that indicates a multi-phase fault. The operand value
should be zero for single-phase to ground faults.
BKR ONE POLE OPEN: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand which indicates that the breaker has opened correctly following a single phase to ground fault and the autoreclose scheme can start timing the single pole dead time
(for 1-2 reclose sequence for example, breaker 1 should trip single pole and breaker 2 should trip 3 pole).
GE Multilin
5-255
5 SETTINGS
The scheme has a pre-wired input that indicates breaker status.
BKR 3 POLE OPEN: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand which indicates that the breaker has opened three
pole and the autoreclose scheme can start timing the three pole dead time. The scheme has a pre-wired input that indicates breaker status.
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1: This is the dead time following the first three pole trip. This intentional delay can be used for a
high-speed three-pole autoreclose. However, it should be set longer than the estimated de-ionizing time following the
three-pole trip.
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2: This is the dead time following the second three-pole trip or initiated by the AR 3P TD INIT input.
This intentional delay is typically used for a time delayed three-pole autoreclose (as opposed to high speed three-pole
autoreclose).
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 3: This setting represents the dead time following the third three-pole trip.
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 4: This setting represents the dead time following the third three-pole trip.
AR EXTEND DEAD T 1: This setting selects an operand that will adapt the duration of the dead time for the first shot
to the possibility of non-simultaneous tripping at the two line ends. Typically this is the operand set when the communication channel is out of service
AR DEAD TIME 1 EXTENSION: This timer is used to set the length of the dead time 1 extension for possible nonsimultaneous tripping of the two ends of the line.
AR RESET: This setting selects the operand that forces the autoreclose scheme from any state to reset. Typically this
is a manual reset from lockout, local or remote.
AR RESET TIME: A reset timer output resets the recloser following a successful reclosure sequence. The setting is
based on the breaker time which is the minimum time required between successive reclose sequences.
AR BKR CLOSED: This setting selects an operand that indicates that the breakers are closed at the end of the reset
time and the scheme can reset.
AR BLOCK: This setting selects the operand that blocks the autoreclose scheme (it can be a sum of conditions such
as: time delayed tripping, breaker failure, bus differential protection, etc.). If the block signal is present before autoreclose scheme initiation the AR DISABLED FlexLogic operand will be set. If the block signal occurs when the scheme
is in the RIP state the scheme will be sent to lockout.
AR PAUSE: The pause input offers the ability to freeze the autoreclose cycle until the pause signal disappears. This
may be done when a trip occurs and simultaneously or previously, some conditions are detected such as out-of step or
loss of guard frequency, or a remote transfer trip signal is received. When the pause signal disappears the autoreclose
cycle is resumed. This feature can also be used when a transformer is tapped from the protected line and a reclose is
not desirable until the it is disconnected from the line. In this situation, the reclose scheme is paused until the transformer is disconnected.
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME: This timer is used to set the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose shot. It
is started whenever a reclosure is initiated and is active until the CLOSE BKR1 or CLOSE BKR2 signal is sent. If all conditions allowing a breaker closure are not satisfied when this time expires, the scheme goes to Lockout. The minimum permissible setting is established by the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 timer setting. Settings beyond this will determine the
wait time for the breaker to open so that the reclose cycle can continue and/or for the AR PAUSE signal to reset and
allow the reclose cycle to continue and/or for the AR BKR1 BLK signal to disappear and allow the AR CLOSE BKR1 signal
to be sent.
AR BLOCK BKR2: This input selects an operand that will block the reclose command for breaker 2. This condition can
be for example: breaker low air pressure, reclose in progress on another line (for the central breaker in a breaker and
a half arrangement), or a sum of conditions combined in FlexLogic.
AR CLOSE TIME BKR2: This setting represents the closing time for the breaker 2 from the moment the Close command is sent to the moment the contacts are closed.
AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 1-2
and breaker 1 is blocked. When set to Yes the closing command will be transferred direct to breaker 2 without waiting
the transfer time. When set to No the closing command will be blocked by the AR BKR1 BLK signal and the scheme
will be sent to lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 2-1
and breaker 2 is blocked. When set to Yes the closing command will be transferred direct to breaker 1 without waiting
5-256
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
the transfer time. When set to No, the closing command will be blocked by the AR BKR2 BLK signal and the scheme
will be sent to lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 12 and Breaker 1 has failed to close. When set to Continue the closing command will be transferred to breaker 2 which
will continue the reclosing cycle until successful (the scheme will reset) or unsuccessful (the scheme will go to Lockout). When set to Lockout the scheme will go to lockout without attempting to reclose breaker 2.
AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 21 and Breaker 2 has failed to close. When set to Continue the closing command will be transferred to breaker 1 which
will continue the reclosing cycle until successful (the scheme will reset) or unsuccessful (the scheme will go to Lockout). When set to Lockout the scheme will go to lockout without attempting to reclose breaker 1.
AR 1-P DEAD TIME: Set this intentional delay longer than the estimated de-ionizing time after the first single-pole trip.
AR BREAKER SEQUENCE: This setting selects the breakers reclose sequence: Select 1 for reclose breaker 1 only,
2 for reclose breaker 2 only, 1&2 for reclose both breakers simultaneously, 1-2 for reclose breakers sequentially;
Breaker 1 first, and 2-1 for reclose breakers sequentially; Breaker 2 first.
AR TRANSFER TIME: The transfer time is used only for breaker closing sequence 1-2 or 2-1, when the two breakers
are reclosed sequentially. The transfer timer is initiated by a close signal to the first breaker. The transfer timer transfers the reclose signal from the breaker selected to close first to the second breaker. The time delay setting is based on
the maximum time interval between the autoreclose signal and the protection trip contact closure assuming a permanent fault (unsuccessful reclose). Therefore, the minimum setting is equal to the maximum breaker closing time plus
the maximum line protection operating time plus a suitable margin. This setting will prevent the autoreclose scheme
from transferring the close signal to the second breaker unless a successful reclose of the first breaker occurs.
AR BUS FLT INIT: This setting is used in breaker-and-a-half applications to allow the autoreclose control function to
perform reclosing with only one breaker previously opened by bus protection. For line faults, both breakers must open
for the autoreclose reclosing cycles to take effect.
GE Multilin
5-257
6(77,1*
5 SETTINGS
7,0(5
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
6(77,1*
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
6(77,1*
6(77,1*6
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
7,0(5
6(77,1*
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
7,0(5
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
6(77,1*
Figure 5138: SINGLE-POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 3)
5-258
GE Multilin
GE Multilin
RESET
from sheet 1
SETTING
Bkr Closed
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OPEN
SETTING
Block Bkr2
No = 0
=1
=2
=1&2
=12
=21
Off = 0
Off = 0
Continue = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OOS
SETTING
Bkr2 Fail Option
SETTING
Transfer 2 to 1
CLOSE
from sheet 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR LO
AR INITIATE
from sheet 1
No = 0
Off = 0
Continue = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR RIP
SETTING
Bkr Sequence
SETTING
Bkr1 Fail Option
SETTING
Transfer 1 to 2
PROTECTION & CB
From sheet 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 OOS
SETTING
Block Bkr1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 OPEN
AND
To sheet 3
AND
OR
OR
AND
AND
30 ms
TIMER
30 ms
OR
OR
TIMER
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR BKR 1 BLK
Latch
AND
BKR CLOSED
from sheet 3
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
OR
AND
SETTING
Reset Time
AND
SETTING
Transfer Time
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
Lockout
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR BKR 2 BLK
OR
OR
Lockout
OR
AND
AND
OR
Reset count
Decrement
shout count
Increment
shout count
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
LOCKOUT
AND
AND
AND
Latch
2 ms
OR
150 ms
Latch
2 ms
SETTING
Close Time Bkr2
=4
=3
=2
=1
=0
= maximum
150 ms
SETTING
Close Time Bkr1
OR
SETTING
Max Number of Shots
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
LOCKOUT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
AND
OR
OR
AND
AND
to autoreclose
logic sheet 1
827090AC.CDR
to autoreclose
logic sheet 3
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR RESET
BKR2 MNL OPEN
RESET
2 ms
SETTING
Close Time Bkr2
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR CLOSE BKR 2
BKR FAIL TO RECLS
to autoreclose
logic sheet 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR SHOT CNT > 0
ACTUAL VALUES
AR SHOT COUNT: 4
AR SHOT COUNT: 3
AR SHOT COUNT: 2
AR SHOT COUNT: 1
AR SHOT COUNT: 0
CLOSE BKR 1 OR 2
to Lockout
to autoreclose
logic sheet 3
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR CLOSE BKR 1
AND
SHOT COUNT = MAX
OR
2 ms
SETTING
Close Time Bkr1
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR SHOT CNT = 4
AR SHOT CNT = 3
AR SHOT CNT = 2
AR SHOT CNT = 1
AND
BKR1 MNL OPEN
5 SETTINGS
5-259
From sheet 2
From
Breaker Control
scheme
5 SETTINGS
BKR 1 MNL OPEN

OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 OOS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OOS
OR
From sheet 2
5
From
Breaker Control
scheme
BKR 2 MNL OPEN

1
2
1&2
1-2
2-1
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
OR
BKR MANUAL CLOSE

(To sheet 1)
OR
BKR CLOSED
(To sheet 1 and 2)
OR
BKR 3 POLE OPEN

(To sheet 1)
OR
BKR ONE POLE OPEN

(To sheet 1)
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 MNL CLS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
AND
OR
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 OPEN
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 2 OPEN
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BUS-FLT INIT
OR
OFF = 0
AND
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
AND
OR
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
AND
827833AA.CDR
5-260
GE Multilin
GE Multilin
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ. TIME
AR TRANSFER TIME
AR CLOSE BKR2
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
AR 3P/2 RIP
AR 3P INIT
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
AR SHOT COUNT > 0
AR RESET TIME
AR CLOSE BKR1
CLOSE
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
AR 1-P RIP
AR RIP
AR 1P INIT
PREFAULT
F
A
U
L
T
T
R
I
P
1.25 cycle
1-P DEAD TIME
T PROT RESET
T TRIP BKR
T PROT
1ST SHOT
T PROT
T TRIP BKR
T CLOSE BKR1
3-P/2 DEAD TIME
T PROT RESET
T CLOSE BKR1
TRANSFER TIME
2ND SHOT
RESET TIME
T CLOSE BKR2
R
E
S
E
T
842703A4.CDR
5 SETTINGS
Figure 5141: EXAMPLE RECLOSING SEQUENCE
5-261
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
5.8INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.8.1 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUT H5a
MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT H5a ID:

Cont Ip 1
MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT H5a

DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms
MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT H5a

EVENTS: Disabled
CONTACT INPUT xxx
CONTACT INPUT
THRESHOLDS
MESSAGE
Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
MESSAGE
Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
MESSAGE
Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group
of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which
contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.
An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The CONTACT IP X On (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to contact input X being closed, while CONTACT IP X Off corresponds to contact input X being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to
overcome contact bouncing conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT
INPUT EVENTS is set to Enabled, every change in the contact input state will trigger an event.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below.
The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a usersettable debounce time in order for the L90 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set
at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once validated (debounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting.
A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the contact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system
cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic operand reflecting
the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the figure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well
as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.
5-262
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The FlexLogic operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one
protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs
just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of
the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a
delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is
below 1msec.
For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a contact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1
ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 s accuracy using the
time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the
DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce
timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change.
INPUT
VOLTAGE
The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks
no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD
2
Time stamp of the first
scan corresponding to
the new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
3
TM
At this time, the

new (HIGH)
contact state is
validated
The FlexLogic
operand is going to
be asserted at this
protection pass
Time stamp of the first

scan corresponding to the
new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
At this time, the new

(LOW) contact state is
validated
RAW CONTACT
STATE
7
The FlexLogicTM
operand is going to be
de-asserted at this
protection pass
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
FLEXLOGICTM
OPERAND
4
SCAN TIME
(0.5 msec)
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
The FlexLogicTM operand

changes reflecting the
validated contact state
The FlexLogicTM operand

changes reflecting the
validated contact state
PROTECTION PASS
(8 times a cycle controlled by the
frequency tracking mechanism)
842709A1.cdr
Figure 5142: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING
Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each
group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This
value should be selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V
sources and 166 for 250 V sources.
For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in
the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5A ID: "Breaker Closed
CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS: "Enabled"
(52b)"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.
GE Multilin
5-263
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
5.8.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64)
VIRTUAL INPUT
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUT
Virt Ip 1
1 ID:
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUT
TYPE: Latched
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 64 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (via the COMmenu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to Off (logic 0) unless the appropriate input signal is received.
MANDS
If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to Disabled, the input will be forced to off (logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the
input. If set to Enabled, the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic operands in
response to received input signals and the applied settings.
There are two types of operation: self-reset and latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is Self-Reset, when the input signal transits from off to on, the output operand will be set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return
to off. If set to Latched, the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received
input.
NOTE
The self-reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic
equations. If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic equation, it will
likely have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
S
AND
Latch
Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1
SETTING
Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
AND
SETTING
OR
(Flexlogic Operand)
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE:
Latched
AND
Self - Reset
827080A2.CDR
Figure 5143: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC
5-264
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.8.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS
a) DIGITAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID
Cont Op 1
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE:
Off
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN:
Off
MESSAGE
CONTACT OUTPUT H1
EVENTS: Enabled
CONTACT OUTPUT H1
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis
which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs.
An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output may be any FlexLogic
operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic operand may be used to
SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so.
For example, the trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A contacts (see the trip circuit example in the Digital elements section). The monitor will set a flag (see the specifications for
Form-A). The name of the FlexLogic operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the
name of the flag; for example, CONT OP 1 ION.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current
flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring
an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect operation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the
trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping
circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called trip seal-in.
This can be realized in the L90 using the CONT OP 1 ION FlexLogic operand to seal-in the contact output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: Cont Op 1"
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Cont Op 1 IOn
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: Enabled
operand
b) LATCHING OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
OUTPUT H1a ID
L-Cont Op 1
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE:

Off
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a RESET:

Off
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a TYPE:

Operate-dominant
Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a EVENTS:

Disabled
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
GE Multilin
5-265
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
The L90 latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such
they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and populates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the hardware
before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic).
The latching output modules, either as a part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all
latching contacts opened. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching contacts when replacing a module.
Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring capabilities for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test error is
declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic operand, event, and target message.
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the close coil of the contact. The
relay will seal-in this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off),
any activity of the OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and
RESET inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
OUTPUT H1a RESET: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the trip coil of the contact. The relay
will seal-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any
activity of the RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET
inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
OUTPUT H1a TYPE: This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the
OPERATE and RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact will close if set to
Operate-dominant and will open if set to Reset-dominant.
Application Example 1:
A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The
following settings should be applied.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
OUTPUT H1a RESET: PUSHBUTTON 2 ON
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus:

A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while
the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed
after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1
OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO2
OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2

OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO1
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they will not
operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time may occur. Therefore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay will not guarantee any specific sequence of operation (such
as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the control inputs as shown in the next application example.
A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement
this functionality as described below:
5-266
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
Both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) should be set to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTand CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
PUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a

OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2

OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO3
A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact should stay closed as long as VO1
is high, and should stay opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTmenu (assuming an H4L module):
PUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a

5.8.4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(96)
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
Virt Op 1
1 ID
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 96 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic. If not assigned, the output will be forced to OFF (Logic
0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the
FlexLogic equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings
would be programmed as follows:
GE Multilin
5-267
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip"

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"
5.8.5 REMOTE DEVICES

a) REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS OVERVIEW
Remote inputs and outputs provide a means of exchanging digital state information between Ethernet-networked devices.
The IEC 61850 GSSE (Generic Substation State Event) and GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) standards are used.
The IEC 61850 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented on Ethernet.
For UR-series relays, Ethernet communications is provided on all CPU modules except type 9E.
NOTE
The sharing of digital point state information between GSSE/GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to FlexLogic, allowing distributed FlexLogic by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications network. In addition to digital point states, GSSE/GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other
information required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data only from
messages that have originated in selected devices.
IEC 61850 GSSE messages are compatible with UCA GOOSE messages and contain a fixed set of digital points. IEC
61850 GOOSE messages can, in general, contain any configurable data items. When used by the remote input/output feature, IEC 61850 GOOSE messages contain the same data as GSSE messages.
Both GSSE and GOOSE messages are designed to be short, reliable, and high priority. GOOSE messages have additional
advantages over GSSE messages due to their support of VLAN (virtual LAN) and Ethernet priority tagging functionality.
The GSSE message structure contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The IEC 61850
specification provides 32 DNA bit pairs that represent the state of two pre-defined events and 30 user-defined events. All
remaining bit pairs are UserSt bit pairs, which are status bits representing user-definable events. The L90 implementation
provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs.
The IEC 61850 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting
and receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GSSE/GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when
the state of any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the default update time) if a change-of-state has not
occurred. The transmitting device also sends a hold time which is set greater than three times the programmed default
time required by the receiving device.
Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the
identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the message time allowed to live. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to this time interval, and if it
has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communicating, so
it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. If a message is received from a
remote device before the time allowed to live expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained in the
message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where Offline indicates non-communicating, can
be displayed.
The remote input/output facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs.
The L90 provides an additional method of sharing digital point state information among different relays: direct messages.
Direct messages are only used between UR-series relays inter-connected via dedicated type 7X communications modules,
usually between substations. The digital state data conveyed by direct messages are direct inputs and direct outputs.
b) DIRECT MESSAGES
Direct messages are only used between UR-series relays containing the type 7X UR communications module. These messages are transmitted every one-half of the power frequency cycle (10 ms for 50 Hz and 8.33 ms for 60 Hz) This facility is
of particular value for pilot schemes and transfer tripping. Direct messaging is available on both single channel and dual
channel communications modules. The inputs and outputs on communications channel 1 are numbered 1-1 through 1-8,
and the inputs and outputs on communications channel 2 are numbered 2-1 through 2-8.
Settings associated with direct messages are automatically presented in accordance with the number of
channels provided in the communications module in a specific relay.
NOTE
5-268
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
c) LOCAL DEVICES: DEVICE ID FOR TRANSMITTING GSSE MESSAGES

In a L90 relay, the device ID that represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of each
GOOSE message is programmed in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION FIXED GOOSE GOOSE ID setting.
Likewise, the device ID that represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE message is programmed in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE
CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION GSSE GSSE ID setting.
In L90 releases previous to 5.0x, these name strings were represented by the RELAY NAME setting.
d) REMOTE DEVICES: DEVICE ID FOR RECEIVING GSSE MESSAGES
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
REMOTE DEVICE
REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID:

Remote Device 1
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 1
ETYPE APPID: 0
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 1
DATASET: Fixed
Range: Fixed, GOOSE 1 through GOOSE 8
Remote devices are available for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be programmed to capture messages from only
those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific remote devices by entering (bottom row)
the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices.
The REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID setting is only used with GOOSE messages; they are not applicable to GSSE messages. This setting identifies the Ethernet application identification in the GOOSE message. It should match the corresponding settings on the sending device.
The REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET setting provides for the choice of the L90 fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset (that is, containing
DNA and UserSt bit pairs), or one of the configurable datasets.
Note that the dataset for the received data items must be made up of existing items in an existing logical node. For this reason, logical node GGIO3 is instantiated to hold the incoming data items. GGIO3 is not necessary to make use of the
received data. The remote input data item mapping takes care of the mapping of the inputs to remote input FlexLogic
operands. However, GGIO3 data can be read by IEC 61850 clients.
5.8.6 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1(32)
REMOTE INPUT 1
REMOTE INPUT
Remote Ip 1
1 ID:
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE:
Remote Device 1
Range: 1 to 16 inclusive
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN
None
Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32,

Config Item 1 to Config Item 64
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT
STATE: Off
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN 1
EVENTS: Disabled
1 ITEM:
Remote Inputs that create FlexLogic operands at the receiving relay are extracted from GSSE/GOOSE messages originating in remote devices. Each remote input can be selected from a list consisting of 64 selections: DNA-1 through DNA-32
and UserSt-1 through UserSt-32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the IEC 61850 specification and is presented in
GE Multilin
5-269
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
the IEC 61850 DNA Assignments table in the Remote outputs section. The function of UserSt inputs is defined by the user
selection of the FlexLogic operand whose state is represented in the GSSE/GOOSE message. A user must program a
DNA point from the appropriate FlexLogic operand.
Remote input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local
use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above.
The REMOTE INPUT 1 ID setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the remote input. The REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE setting
selects the number (1 to 16) of the remote device which originates the required signal, as previously assigned to the remote
device via the setting REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) ID (see the Remote devices section). The REMOTE IN 1 ITEM setting selects the
specific bits of the GSSE/GOOSE message required.
The REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or
the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available:
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to On value defaults the input to logic 1.
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Off value defaults the input to logic 0.
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/On freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to logic 1.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/Off freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to logic 0.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
For additional information on GSSE/GOOOSE messaging, refer to the Remote devices section in this chapter.
NOTE
5.8.7 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUT 1(5)
REM DPS IN 1 ID:

RemDPS Ip 1
MESSAGE
REM DPS IN 1 DEV:

Remote Device 1
Range: Remote Device 1 to Remote Device 16
MESSAGE
REM DPS IN 1 ITEM:

None
Range: None, Dataset Item 1 to Dataset Item 64
MESSAGE
REM DPS IN 1
EVENTS: Disabled
REMOTE DPS INPUT 1
Remote double-point status inputs are extracted from GOOSE messages originating in the remote device. Each remote
double point status input must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device
for local use. This functionality is accomplished with the five remote double-point status input settings.
REM DPS IN 1 ID: This setting assigns descriptive text to the remote double-point status input.
REM DPS IN 1 DEV: This setting selects a remote device ID to indicate the origin of a GOOSE message. The range is
selected from the remote device IDs specified in the Remote devices section.
REM DPS IN 1 ITEM: This setting specifies the required bits of the GOOSE message.
The configurable GOOSE dataset items must be changed to accept a double-point status item from a GOOSE dataset
(changes are made in the SETTINGS COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION
RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8) CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS menus). Dataset
items configured to receive any of GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stV to GGIO3.ST.IndPos5.stV will accept double-point status
information that will be decoded by the remote double-point status inputs configured to this dataset item.
The remote double point status is recovered from the received IEC 61850 dataset and is available as through the RemDPS
Ip 1 BAD, RemDPS Ip 1 INTERM, RemDPS Ip 1 OFF, and RemDPS Ip 1 ON FlexLogic operands. These operands can then be
used in breaker or disconnect control schemes.
5-270
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.8.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS
a) DNA BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUPUTS DNA- 1(32) BIT PAIR
REMOTE OUTPUTS
DNA- 1 BIT PAIR
MESSAGE
DNA- 1 OPERAND:
Off
DNA- 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Remote outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic operands inserted into GSSE/GOOSE messages that are transmitted to remote
devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted.
Table 523: IEC 61850 DNA ASSIGNMENTS
DNA
IEC 61850 DEFINITION
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Test
IEC 61850 TEST MODE
ConfRev
IEC 61850 CONF REV
b) USERST BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1(32) BIT PAIR
REMOTE OUTPUTS
UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR
MESSAGE
UserSt- 1 OPERAND:
Off
UserSt- 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Remote outputs 1 to 32 originate as GSSE/GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the
message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The setting above is used to select the
operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted.
The following setting represents the time between sending GSSE/GOOSE messages when there has been no change of
state of any selected digital point. This setting is located in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION settings menu.
DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE
UPDATE TIME: 60 s
For more information on GSSE/GOOSE messaging, refer to Remote Inputs/Outputs Overview in the
Remote Devices section.
NOTE
5.8.9 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
a) DESCRIPTION
The relay provides eight direct inputs conveyed on communications channel 1 (numbered 1-1 through 1-8) and eight direct
inputs conveyed on communications channel 2 (on three-terminal systems only, numbered 2-1 through 2-8). The user must
program the remote relay connected to channels 1 and 2 of the local relay by assigning the desired FlexLogic operand to
be sent via the selected communications channel.
This relay allows the user to create distributed protection and control schemes via dedicated communications channels.
Some examples are directional comparison pilot schemes and transfer tripping. It should be noted that failures of communications channels will affect direct input/output functionality. The 87L function must be enabled to utilize the direct inputs.
Direct input and output FlexLogic operands to be used at the local relay are assigned as follows:
Direct input/output 1-1 through direct input/output 1-8 for communications channel 1.
Direct input/output 2-1 through direct input/output 2-8 for communications channel 2 (three-terminal systems only).
GE Multilin
5-271
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
NOTE
5 SETTINGS
On the two-terminal, two channel system (redundant channel), direct outputs 1-1 to 1-8 are send over both channels simultaneously and are received separately as direct inputs 1-1 to 1-8 at channel 1 and direct inputs 2-1 to 2-8
at channel 2. Therefore, to take advantage of redundancy, the respective operands from channel 1 and 2 can be
ORed with FlexLogic or mapped separately.
b) DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT DIRECT INPUTS
DIRECT INPUTS
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1-1

DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On
DIRECT INPUT 1-2

DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1-8

DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 2-1

DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 2-2

DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 2-8

DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On
The DIRECT INPUT 1-1(8) DEFAULT setting selects the logic state of this particular bit used for this point if the local relay has
just completed startup or the local communications channel is declared to have failed. Setting DIRECT INPUT 1-1(8) DEFAULT
to On means that the corresponding local FlexLogic operand (DIRECT I/P 1-1(8)) will have logic state 1 on relay startup
or during communications channel failure. When the channel is restored, the operand logic state reflects the actual state of
the corresponding remote direct output.
c) DIRECT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT DIRECT OUTPUTS
DIRECT OUTPUTS
MESSAGE
DIRECT OUTPUT 1-1:

Off
DIRECT OUTPUT 1-2:

Off
MESSAGE
DIRECT OUTPUT 1-8:

Off
MESSAGE
DIRECT OUTPUT 2-1:

Off
MESSAGE
DIRECT OUTPUT 2-2:

Off
MESSAGE
DIRECT OUTPUT 2-8:

Off
The relay provides eight direct outputs that are conveyed on communications channel 1 (numbered 1-1 through 1-8) and
eight direct outputs that are conveyed on communications channel 2 (numbered 2-1 through 2-8). Each digital point in the
message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The setting above is used to select the
operand which represents a specific function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted.
5-272
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Direct outputs 2-1 to 2-8 are only functional on three-terminal systems.

NOTE
L90-1
L90-2
ACTUAL VALUES
SETTING
CHANNEL 1 STATUS:
DIRECT INPUT 1-1

DEFAULT:
(same for 1-2...1-8)
SETTING
DIRECT OUTPUT 1-1:
(same for 1-2...1-8)
Fail
Off (Flexlogic Operand)
OK
SETTING
ACTUAL VALUES
DIRECT INPUT 1-1

DEFAULT:
(same for 1-2...1-8)
CHANNEL 1 STATUS:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
On
Off
OR
DIRECT I/P 1-1

(same for 1-2...1-8)
L90 communication channel

(87L is Enabled)
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
DIRECT I/P 1-1
(same for 1-2...1-8)
On
OR
Off
Fail
DIRECT OUTPUT 1-1:

(same for 1-2...1-8)
OK
Off (Flexlogic Operand)
831024A1.CDR
Figure 5144: DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-273
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
5.8.10 RESETTING
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS RESETTING
RESETTING
RESET OPERAND:
Off
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once
set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition
has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic latches) to the reset
state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset button, a remote device via a communications channel,
or any programmed operand.
When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic operands are created. These operands, which are
stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each create the RESET OP FlexLogic operand. Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual operand
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. The setting
shown above selects the operand that will create the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.
5.8.11 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1(16)
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT:
1000.000
MESSAGE
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT
MODE: Default Value
Range: Default Value, Last Known
MESSAGE
GOOSE ANALOG
UNITS:
MESSAGE
GOOSE ANALOG 1 PU:

1.000
GOOSE ANALOG
INPUT 1
The IEC 61850 GOOSE analog inputs feature allows the transmission of analog values between any two UR-series
devices. The following settings are available for each GOOSE analog input.
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT: This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE analog input when the sending device is offline
and the ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to Default Value.This setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating
point number. Because of the large range of this setting, not all possible values can be stored. Some values may be
rounded to the closest possible floating point number.
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE: When the sending device is offline and this setting is Last Known, the value of the
GOOSE analog input remains at the last received value. When the sending device is offline and this setting value is
Default Value, then the value of the GOOSE analog input is defined by the ANALOG 1 DEFAULT setting.
GOOSE ANALOG 1 UNITS: This setting specifies a four-character alphanumeric string that can is used in the actual
values display of the corresponding GOOSE analog input value.
GOOSE Analogs are floating-point values, with no units. The GOOSE UNIT and PU base settings allow the user to
configure GOOSE Analog, so that it can be used in a FlexElement.
GOOSE Analogs that represent current, voltage, power, frequency, angles, or power factor can be used in a FlexElement. The following text must be used in the UNITS setting, to represent these types of analogs: A, V, W, var, VA, Hz,
deg, and no text (blank setting) for power factor.
GOOSE Analogs can be compared to other GOOSE Analogs with any character string or no string.
GOOSE ANALOG 1 PU: This setting specifies the per-unit base factor when using the GOOSE analog input FlexAnalog values in other L90 features, such as FlexElements. The base factor is applied to the GOOSE analog input
FlexAnalog quantity to normalize it to a per-unit quantity. The base units are described in the following table.
The per-unit base setting represents thousands, not single units. For example, a PU base of 1.000 is actually 1000 and
a PU base of 0.001 is 1.
5-274
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
When using GOOSE Analogs and PU base in FlexElements, the largest value that can be displayed in the FlexElement actual values is 2,140,000.000.
Table 524: GOOSE ANALOG INPUT BASE UNITS
ELEMENT
BASE UNITS
87L SIGNALS

87L SIGNALS
BREAKER ARCING AMPS

dcmA
FREQUENCY
fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE
POWER FACTOR
PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs
BASE = 100C
SOURCE CURRENT
SOURCE ENERGY
(Positive and Negative Watthours,
Positive and Negative Varhours)
SOURCE POWER
SOURCE VOLTAGE
SYNCHROCHECK
(Max Delta Volts)
The GOOSE analog input FlexAnalog values are available for use in other L90 functions that use FlexAnalog values.
5.8.12 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS GOOSE UINTEGER INPUT 1(16)
GOOSE UINTEGER
INPUT 1
MESSAGE
UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT:
1000
UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT
MODE: Default Value
Range: Default Value, Last Known
The IEC 61850 GOOSE uinteger inputs feature allows the transmission of FlexInteger values between any two URseries devices. The following settings are available for each GOOSE uinteger input.
UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT: This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE uinteger input when the sending device is
offline and the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to Default Value.This setting is stored as a 32-bit unsigned integer
number.
UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE: When the sending device is offline and this setting is Last Known, the value of the
GOOSE uinteger input remains at the last received value. When the sending device is offline and this setting value is
Default Value, then the value of the GOOSE uinteger input is defined by the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT setting.
The GOOSE integer input FlexInteger values are available for use in other L90 functions that use FlexInteger values.
GE Multilin
5-275
5 SETTINGS
5.9TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
5.9.1 DCMA INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT H1(U8)
DCMA INPUT H1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT H1 ID:

DCMA Ip 1
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT H1
UNITS: A
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT H1
RANGE: 0 to -1 mA
Range: 0 to 1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, 1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5 mA,

0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT H1 MIN

VALUE:
0.000
Range: 9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT H1 MAX

VALUE:
0.000
Range: 9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
DCMA INPUT H1
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of 1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most common
transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.
Before the dcmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range
and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies
this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter.
dcmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels
with the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of
a type 5F transducer module installed in slot H.
The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled. If Disabled, no actual values are created for the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to each channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual value, along with the
programmed units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as volts, C, megawatts, etc. This ID is
also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The
DCMA INPUT H1 RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel.
The DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in
primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250C; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1
MIN VALUE value is 0 and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE value is 250. Another example would be a watts transducer with
a span from 20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE value would be 20 and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX
VALUE value 180. Intermediate values between the min and max values are scaled linearly.
5-276
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.9.2 RTD INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT H1(U8)
RTD INPUT H1
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
RTD INPUT H1 ID:

RTD Ip 1
MESSAGE
RTD INPUT H1 TYPE:

100 Nickel
Range: 100 Nickel, 10 Copper, 100 Platinum,

120 Nickel
RTD INPUT H1
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external resistance temperature detectors and convert these
signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in
common use. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.
RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with
the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of
a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot.
The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled. If Disabled, there will not be an actual value created for
the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual values. It is also
used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the
type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel.
Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements feature.
In FlexElements, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100C. For example, a trip level of 150C is achieved by setting
the operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement operands are available to FlexLogic for further interlocking or to operate an
output contact directly.
Refer to the following table for reference temperature values for each RTD type.
GE Multilin
5-277
5 SETTINGS
Table 525: RTD TEMPERATURE VS. RESISTANCE
TEMPERATURE
RESISTANCE (IN OHMS)
100 PT
(DIN 43760)
120 NI
100 NI
10 CU
50
58
80.31
86.17
71.81
7.10
40
40
84.27
92.76
77.30
7.49
30
22
88.22
99.41
82.84
7.88
20
92.16
106.15
88.45
8.26
10
14
96.09
113.00
94.17
8.65
32
100.00
120.00
100.00
9.04
10
50
103.90
127.17
105.97
9.42
20
68
107.79
134.52
112.10
9.81
30
86
111.67
142.06
118.38
10.19
40
104
115.54
149.79
124.82
10.58
50
122
119.39
157.74
131.45
10.97
60
140
123.24
165.90
138.25
11.35
70
158
127.07
174.25
145.20
11.74
80
176
130.89
182.84
152.37
12.12
90
194
134.70
191.64
159.70
12.51
100
212
138.50
200.64
167.20
12.90
110
230
142.29
209.85
174.87
13.28
120
248
146.06
219.29
182.75
13.67
130
266
149.82
228.96
190.80
14.06
140
284
153.58
238.85
199.04
14.44
150
302
157.32
248.95
207.45
14.83
160
320
161.04
259.30
216.08
15.22
170
338
164.76
269.91
224.92
15.61
180
356
168.47
280.77
233.97
16.00
190
374
172.46
291.96
243.30
16.39
200
392
175.84
303.46
252.88
16.78
210
410
179.51
315.31
262.76
17.17
220
428
183.17
327.54
272.94
17.56
230
446
186.82
340.14
283.45
17.95
240
464
190.45
353.14
294.28
18.34
250
482
194.08
366.53
305.44
18.73
5-278
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.9.3 DCMA OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA OUTPUTS DCMA OUTPUT H1(U8)
DCMA OUTPUT H1
SOURCE: Off
MESSAGE
DCMA OUTPUT H1
RANGE: 1 to 1 mA
Range: 1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
MESSAGE
DCMA OUTPUT H1
MIN VAL: 0.000 pu
MESSAGE
DCMA OUTPUT H1
MAX VAL: 1.000 pu
DCMA OUTPUT H1
Hardware and software is provided to generate dcmA signals that allow interfacing with external equipment. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3. The dcmA output channels are arranged in a manner similar to transducer input or
CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown below.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the
relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same manner used
for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as
the channel number.
Both the output range and a signal driving a given output are user-programmable via the following settings menu (an example for channel M5 is shown).
The relay checks the driving signal (x in equations below) for the minimum and maximum limits, and subsequently rescales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE. The following equation is applied:
I out
where:
I min if x < MIN VAL
= I max if x > MAX VAL
k ( x MIN VAL ) + I min otherwise
(EQ 5.27)
x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting

Imin and Imax are defined by the RANGE setting
k is a scaling constant calculated as:
I max I min
k = ------------------------------------------------MAX VAL MIN VAL
(EQ 5.28)
The feature is intentionally inhibited if the MAX VAL and MIN VAL settings are entered incorrectly, e.g. when MAX VAL MIN
< 0.1 pu. The resulting characteristic is illustrated in the following figure.
VAL
OUTPUT CURRENT
Imax
Imin
DRIVING SIGNAL
MIN VAL
MAX VAL
842739A1.CDR
Figure 5145: DCMA OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC
GE Multilin
5-279
5 SETTINGS
The dcmA output settings are described below.
DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: This setting specifies an internal analog value to drive the analog output. Actual values
(FlexAnalog parameters) such as power, current amplitude, voltage amplitude, power factor, etc. can be configured as
sources driving dcmA outputs. Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of FlexAnalog parameters.
DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: This setting allows selection of the output range. Each dcmA channel may be set independently to work with different ranges. The three most commonly used output ranges are available.
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: This setting allows setting the minimum limit for the signal that drives the output. This
setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered
in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output. This
setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered
in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.
The DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL and DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL settings are ignored for power factor base units (i.e. if
the DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE is set to FlexAnalog value based on power factor measurement).
NOTE
Three application examples are described below.

EXAMPLE: POWER MONITORING
A three phase active power on a 13.8 kV system measured via UR-series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the dcmA H1
output of the range of 1 to 1 mA. The following settings are applied on the relay: CT ratio = 1200:5, VT secondary 115, VT
connection is delta, and VT ratio = 120. The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0.90. The
power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20% overload compared to the nominal.
The nominal three-phase power is:

3 13.8 kV 0.8 kA 0.9 = 17.21 MW
P =
(EQ 5.29)
The three-phase power with 20% overload margin is:

P max = 1.2 17.21 MW = 20.65 MW
(EQ 5.30)
The base unit for power (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
P BASE = 115 V 120 1.2 kA = 16.56 MW
(EQ 5.31)
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
20.65 MW
minimum power = ------------------------------ = 1.247 pu,
16.56 MW
20.65 MW
maximum power = --------------------------- = 1.247 pu
16.56 MW
(EQ 5.32)
The following settings should be entered:

DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: SRC 1 P
DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: 1 to 1 mA
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: 1.247 pu
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: 1.247 pu
With the above settings, the output will represent the power with the scale of 1 mA per 20.65 MW. The worst-case error for
this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or 0.005 ( 1 ( 1 ) ) 20.65 MW = 0.207 MW
1% of reading error for the active power at power factor of 0.9
For example at the reading of 20 MW, the worst-case error is 0.01 20 MW + 0.207 MW = 0.407 MW.
EXAMPLE: CURRENT MONITORING
The phase A current (true RMS value) is to be monitored via the H2 current output working with the range from 4 to 20 mA.
The CT ratio is 5000:5 and the maximum load current is 4200 A. The current should be monitored from 0 A upwards, allowing for 50% overload.
The phase current with the 50% overload margin is:
5-280
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

I max = 1.5 4.2 kA = 6.3 kA
(EQ 5.33)
The base unit for current (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
I BASE = 5 kA
(EQ 5.34)
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
0 kA
minimum current = ------------ = 0 pu,
5 kA
6.3 kA
maximum current = ----------------- = 1.26 pu
5 kA
(EQ 5.35)

DCMA OUTPUT H2 SOURCE: SRC 1 Ia RMS
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or 0.005 ( 20 4 ) 6.3 kA = 0.504 kA
0.25% of reading or 0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) for currents between 0.1 and 2.0 of nominal
For example, at the reading of 4.2 kA, the worst-case error is max(0.0025 4.2 kA, 0.001 5 kA) + 0.504 kA = 0.515 kA.
EXAMPLE: VOLTAGE MONITORING
A positive-sequence voltage on a 400 kV system measured via source 2 is to be monitored by the dcmA H3 output with a
range of 0 to 1 mA. The VT secondary setting is 66.4 V, the VT ratio setting is 6024, and the VT connection setting is
Delta. The voltage should be monitored in the range from 70% to 110% of nominal.
The minimum and maximum positive-sequence voltages to be monitored are:
400 kV
V min = 0.7 ------------------- = 161.66 kV,
3
400 kV
V max = 1.1 ------------------- = 254.03 kV
3
(EQ 5.36)
The base unit for voltage (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
V BASE = 0.0664 kV 6024 = 400 kV
(EQ 5.37)
The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored (in pu) are:
161.66 kV
minimum voltage = --------------------------- = 0.404 pu,
400 kV
254.03 kV
maximum voltage = --------------------------- = 0.635 pu
400 kV
(EQ 5.38)

DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE: SRC 2 V_1
mag
The limit settings differ from the expected 0.7 pu and 1.1 pu because the relay calculates the positive-sequence quantities
scaled to the phase-to-ground voltages, even if the VTs are connected in Delta (refer to the Metering conventions section
in chapter 6), while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings. Consequently the settings required in
this example differ from naturally expected by the factor of 3 .
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or 0.005 ( 1 0 ) 254.03 kV = 1.27 kV
0.5% of reading
For example, under nominal conditions, the positive-sequence reads 230.94 kV and the worst-case error is
0.005 x 230.94 kV + 1.27 kV = 2.42 kV.
GE Multilin
5-281
5.10 TESTING
5 SETTINGS
5.10TESTING
5.10.1 TEST MODE
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE
SETTINGS
TESTING
MESSAGE
TEST MODE
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Isolated, Forcible
TEST MODE FORCING:

On
The L90 provides a test facility to verify the functionality of contact inputs and outputs, some communication channels and
the phasor measurement unit (where applicable), using simulated conditions. The test mode is indicated on the relay faceplate by a Test Mode LED indicator.
The test mode may be in any of three states: disabled, isolated, or forcible.
In the Disabled mode, L90 operation is normal and all test features are disabled.
In the Isolated mode, the L90 is prevented from performing certain control actions, including tripping via contact outputs.
All relay contact outputs, including latching outputs, are disabled. Channel tests and phasor measurement unit tests remain
usable on applicable UR-series models.
In the Forcible mode, the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting controls the relay inputs and outputs. If the
test mode is forcible, and the operand assigned to the TEST MODE FORCING setting is Off, the L90 inputs and outputs operate normally. If the test mode is forcible, and the operand assigned to the TEST MODE FORCING setting is On, the L90 contact inputs and outputs are forced to the values specified in the following sections. Forcing may be controlled by manually
changing the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting between on and off, or by selecting a user-programmable pushbutton, contact input, or communication-based input operand. Channel tests and phasor measurement unit tests
remain usable on applicable UR-series models.
Communications based inputs and outputs remain fully operational in test mode. If a control action is programmed
using direct inputs and outputs or remote inputs and outputs, then the test procedure must take this into account.
NOTE
When in Forcible mode, the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting dictates further response of the L90 to
testing conditions. To force contact inputs and outputs through relay settings, set TEST MODE FORCING to On. To force contact inputs and outputs through a user-programmable condition, such as FlexLogic operand (pushbutton, digital input,
communication-based input, or a combination of these), set TEST MODE FORCING to the desired operand. The contact input
or output is forced when the selected operand assumes a logic 1 state.
The L90 remains fully operational in test mode, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular, the protection and
control elements, FlexLogic, and communication-based inputs and outputs function normally.
The only difference between the normal operation and the test mode is the behavior of the input and output contacts. The
contact inputs can be forced to report as open or closed or remain fully operational, whereas the contact outputs can be
forced to open, close, freeze, or remain fully operational. The response of the digital input and output contacts to the test
mode is programmed individually for each input and output using the force contact inputs and force contact outputs test
functions described in the following sections.
The test mode state is indicated on the relay faceplate by a combination of the Test Mode LED indicator, the In-Service LED
indicator, and by the critical fail relay, as shown in the following table.
5-282
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.10 TESTING
Table 526: TEST MODE OPERATION

TEST MODE
FUNCTION
TEST MODE
FORCING
OPERAND
IN-SERVICE
LED
TEST MODE
LED
CRITICAL
FAIL
RELAY
INPUT AND OUTPUT BEHAVIOR
Disabled
No effect
Unaffected
Off
Unaffected
Contact outputs and inputs are under normal

operation. Channel tests and PMU tests not
operational (where applicable).
Isolated
No effect
Off
On
Deenergized
Contact outputs are disabled and contact inputs

are operational. Channel tests and PMU tests
are also operational (where applicable).
Forcible
On (logic 1)
Off
Flashing
Deenergized
Contact inputs and outputs are controlled by the

force contact input and force contact output
functions. Channel tests and PMU tests are
Off (logic 0)
Off
Flashing
Deenergized
Contact outputs and inputs are under normal

operation. Channel tests and PMU tests are also
The TEST MODE FUNCTION setting can only be changed by a direct user command. Following a restart, power up, settings
upload, or firmware upgrade, the test mode will remain at the last programmed value. This allows a L90 that has been
placed in isolated mode to remain isolated during testing and maintenance activities. On restart, the TEST MODE FORCING
setting and the force contact input and force contact output settings all revert to their default states.
5.10.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
FORCE CONTACT
INPUTS
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Ip 1
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
FORCE Cont Ip 2
:Disabled
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Ip xx
:Disabled
The relay digital inputs (contact inputs) could be pre-programmed to respond to the test mode in the following ways:
If set to Disabled, the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can
be turned on and off by external circuitry. This value should be selected if a given input must be operational during the
test. This includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence.
If set to Open, the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
If set to Closed, the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once
enabled, the relay is placed into test mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test
Mode LED will be on, indicating that the relay is in test mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as Disabled, Open, or Closed. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.
GE Multilin
5-283
5.10 TESTING
5 SETTINGS
5.10.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
FORCE CONTACT
OUTPUTS
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Op 1
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
FORCE Cont Op 2
:Disabled
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Op xx
:Disabled
The relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond to the test mode.
If set to Disabled, the contact output remains fully operational. If operates when its control operand is logic 1 and will
resets when its control operand is logic 0. If set to Energized, the output will close and remain closed for the entire duration of the test mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to De-energized, the output will open and remain opened for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of the status of the
operand configured to control the output contact. If set to Freeze, the output retains its position from before entering the
test mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact.
These settings are applied two ways. First, external circuits may be tested by energizing or de-energizing contacts. Second, by controlling the output contact state, relay logic may be tested and undesirable effects on external circuits avoided.
Example 1: Initiating test mode through user-programmable pushbutton 1
For example, the test mode can be initiated from user-programmable pushbutton 1. The pushbutton will be programmed as
Latched (pushbutton pressed to initiate the test, and pressed again to terminate the test). During the test, digital input 1
should remain operational, digital inputs 2 and 3 should open, and digital input 4 should close. Also, contact output 1 should
freeze, contact output 2 should open, contact output 3 should close, and contact output 4 should remain fully operational.
The required settings are shown below.
To enable user-programmable pushbutton 1 to initiate the test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS
TESTING TEST MODE menu: TEST MODE FUNCTION: Enabled and TEST MODE INITIATE: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
Make the following changes to configure the contact inputs and outputs. In the SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT
INPUTS and FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS menus, set:
FORCE Cont Ip 1: Disabled, FORCE Cont Ip 2: Open, FORCE Cont Ip 3: Open, and FORCE Cont Ip 4:
FORCE Cont Op 1: Freeze, FORCE Cont Op 2: De-energized, FORCE Cont Op 3: Energized,
and FORCE Cont Op 4: Disabled
Closed
Example 2: Initiating a test from user-programmable pushbutton 1 or through remote input 1

In this example, the test can be initiated locally from user-programmable pushbutton 1 or remotely through remote input 1.
Both the pushbutton and the remote input will be programmed as Latched. Write the following FlexLogic equation:
Set the user-programmable pushbutton as latching by changing SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE
USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION to Latched. To enable either pushbutton 1 or remote
input 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE menu:
PUSHBUTTONS
TEST MODE FUNCTION:
5-284
Enabled and TEST MODE INITIATE: VO1
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.10 TESTING
5.10.4 CHANNEL TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING CHANNEL TESTS
CHANNEL TESTS
LOCAL LOOPBACK
MESSAGE
REMOTE LOOPBACK
This function performs checking of the communications established by both relays.

LOCAL LOOPBACK
MESSAGE
REMOTE LOOPBACK
MESSAGE
LOCAL LOOPBACK
FUNCTION: No
Range: Yes, No
LOCAL LOOPBACK
CHANNEL NUMBER: 1
Range: 1, 2
REMOTE LOOPBACK
FUNCTION: No
Range: Yes, No
REMOTE LOOPBACK
CHANNEL NUMBER: 1
Range: 1, 2
Refer to the Commissioning chapter for a detailed description of using the channel tests.
5.10.5 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT TEST VALUES
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING PMU TEST VALUES PMU 1 TEST VALUES
PMU 1 TEST
FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VA TEST
MAGNITUDE: 500.00 kV
Range: 0.00 to 700.00 kV in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VA TEST
ANGLE: 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VB TEST
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VB TEST
ANGLE: 120.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VC TEST
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VC TEST
ANGLE: 120.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VX TEST
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VX TEST
ANGLE: 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IA TEST
MAGNITUDE: 1.000 kA
Range: 0.000 to 9.999 kA in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IA TEST
ANGLE: 10.00
PMU 1
TEST VALUES
GE Multilin
5-285
5.10 TESTING
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IB TEST
MAGNITUDE: 1.000 kA
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IB TEST
ANGLE: 130.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IC TEST
MAGNITUDE: 1.000 kA
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IC TEST
ANGLE: 110.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IG TEST
MAGNITUDE: 0.000 kA
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IG TEST
ANGLE: 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 TEST
FREQUENCY: 60.000 Hz
MESSAGE
PMU 1 TEST
df/dt: 0.000 Hz/s
The relay must be in test mode to use the PMU test mode. That is, the TESTING TEST MODE FUNCTION setting must be
Enabled and the TESTING TEST MODE INITIATE initiating signal must be On.
During the PMU test mode, the physical channels (VA, VB, VC, VX, IA, IB, IC, and IG), frequency, and rate of change of frequency are substituted with user values, while the symmetrical components are calculated from the physical channels. The
test values are not explicitly marked in the outgoing data frames. When required, it is recommended to use the user-programmable digital channels to signal the C37.118 client that test values are being sent in place of the real measurements.
5-286
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.1 OVERVIEW
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW
ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
ACTUAL VALUES
METERING
6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
CONTACT INPUTS
See page 6-3.
VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 6-3.
REMOTE INPUTS
See page 6-3.
REMOTE DPS INPUTS
See page 6-4.
DIRECT INPUTS
See page 6-4.
CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 6-4.
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 6-5.
AUTORECLOSE
See page 6-5.
REMOTE DEVICES
STATUS
See page 6-5.
REMOTE DEVICES
STATISTICS
See page 6-6.
CHANNEL TESTS
See page 6-6.
DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 6-7.
SELECTOR SWITCHES
See page 6-7.
FLEX STATES
See page 6-8.
ETHERNET
See page 6-8.
IEC 61850
GOOSE UINTEGERS
See page 6-8.
ETHERNET SWITCH
See page 6-9.
87L DIFFERENTIAL
CURRENT
See page 6-13.
SOURCE SRC 1
See page 6-14.
SOURCE SRC 2
SOURCE SRC 3
GE Multilin
6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW
6 ACTUAL VALUES
SOURCE SRC 4
ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
ACTUAL VALUES
PRODUCT INFO
6-2
SYNCHROCHECK
See page 6-19.
TRACKING FREQUENCY
See page 6-19.
FLEXELEMENTS
See page 6-19.
IEC 61850
GOOSE ANALOGS
See page 6-20.
WATTMETRIC
GROUND FAULT 1
See page 6-20.
WATTMETRIC
GROUND FAULT 2
See page 6-20.
PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT
See page 6-20.
TRANSDUCER I/O
DCMA INPUTS
See page 6-21.
TRANSDUCER I/O
RTD INPUTS
See page 6-21.
FAULT REPORTS
See page 6-22.
EVENT RECORDS
See page 6-22.
OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 6-23.
DATA LOGGER
See page 6-23.
PMU RECORDS
See page 6-23.
MAINTENANCE
See page 6-24.
MODEL INFORMATION
See page 6-25.
FIRMWARE REVISIONS
See page 6-25.
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS
6.2STATUS
For status reporting, On represents Logic 1 and Off represents Logic 0.
NOTE
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
MESSAGE
Cont Ip 1
Off
Range: On, Off
Cont Ip 2
Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
Range: On, Off
Cont Ip xx
Off
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
input. For example, Cont Ip 1 refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the contact input.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 1
Off
Range: On, Off
Virt Ip 2
Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
Range: On, Off
Virt Ip 64
Off
The present status of the 64 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
input. For example, Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name. The second line of the display indicates
the logic state of the virtual input.
6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS
MESSAGE
REMOTE INPUT
STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off
REMOTE INPUT
STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off
REMOTE INPUT 32
STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here.

The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be Offline in which
case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.
GE Multilin
6-3
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.4 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DPS INPUTS
REMOTE DPS INPUTS
MESSAGE
REMOTE DPS INPUT

STATUS: Bad
Range: On, Off, Intermediate, Bad
REMOTE DPS INPUT

STATUS: Bad
MESSAGE
REMOTE DPS INPUT

STATUS: Bad
The present state of the remote double-point status inputs is shown here. The actual values indicate if the remote doublepoint status inputs are in the on (close), off (open), intermediate, or bad state.
6.2.5 DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT INPUTS
DIRECT INPUTS
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1-1:

Off
Range: On, Off
DIRECT INPUT 1-2:

Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1-8:

Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 2-1:

Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 2-2:

Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 2-8:

Off
Range: On, Off
The present state of the direct inputs from communications channels 1 and 2 are shown here. The state displayed will be
that of the remote point unless channel 1 or 2 has been declared to have failed, in which case the value shown is the programmed default state defined in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT DIRECT INPUTS menu.
6.2.6 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUTS
MESSAGE
Cont Op 1
Off
Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff
Cont Op 2
Off
MESSAGE
6-4
Cont Op xx
Off
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
output. For example, Cont Op 1 refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of
the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.
For form-A contact outputs, the state of the voltage and current detectors is displayed as Off, VOff, IOff,
On, IOn, and VOn. For form-C contact outputs, the state is displayed as Off or On.
NOTE
6.2.7 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
MESSAGE
Virt Op
Off
Range: On, Off
Virt Op
Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
Range: On, Off
Virt Op 96
Off
The present state of up to 96 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
output. For example, Virt Op 1 refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic equation for that output.
6.2.8 AUTORECLOSE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS AUTORECLOSE
AUTORECLOSE
AUTORECLOSE
SHOT COUNT:
Range: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
The automatic reclosure shot count is shown here.

6.2.9 REMOTE DEVICES
a) STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
All REMOTE DEVICES

ONLINE: No
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 1
STATUS: Offline
Range: Online, Offline
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 2
STATUS: Offline
REMOTE DEVICES
STATUS
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 16
STATUS: Offline
The present state of up to 16 programmed remote devices is shown here. The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indicates whether or not all programmed remote devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one
required remote device is not online.
GE Multilin
6-5
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
b) STATISTICS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
REMOTE DEVICE
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE
StNum:
REMOTE DEVICE
SqNum:
0
0
Statistical data (two types) for up to 16 programmed remote devices is shown here.
The StNum number is obtained from the indicated remote device and is incremented whenever a change of state of at
least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs. The SqNum number is obtained from the indicated remote device and is incremented
whenever a GSSE message is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4 294 967 295 is incremented.
6.2.10 CHANNEL TESTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS
CHANNEL 1
STATUS: n/a
Range: n/a, FAIL, OK
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 1 LOST
PACKETS:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1. Reset count to 0 through

the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu.
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 1 LOCAL
LOOPBCK STATUS: n/a
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 1 REMOTE
LOOPBCK STATUS: n/a
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 1
LOOP DELAY:
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 1 ASYMMETRY:
+0.0 ms
Range: 10 to 10 ms in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 2
STATUS: n/a
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 2 LOST
PACKETS:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1. Reset count to 0 through

the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu.
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 2 LOCAL
LOOPBCK STATUS: n/a
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 2 REMOTE
LOOPBCK STATUS: n/a
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 2
LOOP DELAY:
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 2 ASYMMETRY:
+0.0 ms
Range: 10 to 10 ms in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
VALIDITY OF CHANNEL
CONFIGURATION: n/a
MESSAGE
PFLL
STATUS: n/a
CHANNEL TESTS
0.0 ms
0.0 ms
The status information for two channels is shown here. A brief description of each actual value is below:
6-6
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS
CHANNEL 1(2) STATUS: This represents the receiver status of each channel. If the value is OK, the 87L current differential element is enabled and data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is FAIL, the 87L element
is enabled and data is not being received from the remote terminal. If n/a, the 87L element is disabled.
CHANNEL 1(2) LOST PACKETS: Current, timing, and control data is transmitted to the remote terminals in data packets at a rate of two packets per cycle. The number of lost packets represents data packets lost in transmission; this
count can be reset through the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu.
CHANNEL 1(2) LOCAL LOOPBACK STATUS: The result of the local loopback test is displayed here.
CHANNEL 1(2) REMOTE LOOPBACK STATUS: The result of the remote loopback test is displayed here.
CHANNEL 1(2) LOOP DELAY: Displays the round trip channel delay (including loopback processing time of the
remote relay) computed during a remote loopback test under normal relay operation, in milliseconds (ms).
CHANNEL 1(2) ASYMMETRY: The result of channel asymmetry calculations derived from GPS signal is being displayed here for both channels if CHANNEL ASYMMETRY is Enabled. A positive + sign indicates the transit delay in the
transmitting direction is less than the delay in the receiving direction; a negative sign indicates the transit delay in
the transmitting direction is more than the delay in the receiving direction. A displayed value of 0.0 indicates that
either asymmetry is not present or can not be estimated due to failure with local/remote GPS clock source.
VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION: The current state of the communications channel identification check,
and hence validity, is displayed here. If a remote relay ID number does not match the programmed number at the local
relay, the FAIL value is displayed. The n/a value appears if the local relay ID is set to a default value of 0 or if the
87L element is disabled. Refer to SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP L90 POWER SYSTEM section for more information
PFLL STATUS: This value represents the status of the phase and frequency locked loop (PFLL) filter which uses timing information from local and remote terminals to synchronize the clocks of all terminals. If PFLL STATUS is OK, the
clocks of all terminals are synchronized and 87L protection is enabled. If it is FAIL, the clocks of all terminals are not
synchronized and 87L protection is disabled. If n/a, then PFLL is disabled.
At startup, the clocks of all terminals are not synchronized and the PFLL status displayed is FAIL. It takes
up to 8 seconds after startup for the value displayed to change from FAIL to OK.
NOTE
6.2.11 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIGITAL COUNTERS DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)
DIGITAL COUNTERS
Counter 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Counter 1
ACCUM:
0
Counter 1
FROZEN:
0
Counter 1
FROZEN:
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Counter 1
MICROS:
0
The present status of the eight digital counters is shown here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter
name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date and
time stamp for the frozen count. The COUNTER 1 MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.
6.2.12 SELECTOR SWITCHES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS SELECTOR SWITCHES
SELECTOR SWITCHES
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
POSITION: 0/7
Range: Current Position / 7
SELECTOR SWITCH 2
POSITION: 0/7
Range: Current Position / 7
6-7
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the
actual value.
6.2.13 FLEX STATES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS FLEX STATES
FLEX STATES
MESSAGE
PARAM
Off
1: Off
Range: Off, On
PARAM
Off
2: Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
PARAM 256: Off

Off
Range: Off, On
There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.
6.2.14 ETHERNET
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS ETHERNET
ETHERNET
MESSAGE
ETHERNET PRI LINK

STATUS: OK
Range: Fail, OK
ETHERNET SEC LINK

STATUS: OK
Range: Fail, OK
These values indicate the status of the primary and secondary Ethernet links.
6.2.15 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS
IEC 61850
GOOSE UINTEGERS
MESSAGE
UINT INPUT
0
UINT INPUT
0
MESSAGE
UINT INPUT 16
0
The IEC 61850 GGIO5 integer input data points are displayed in this menu. The GGIO5 integer data values are received
via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages sent from other devices.
6-8
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS
6.2.16 ETHERNET SWITCH
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS ETHERNET SWITCH
ETHERNET SWITCH
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 PORT
STATUS: OK
Range: FAIL, OK
SWITCH 2 PORT
STATUS: OK
Range: FAIL, OK
MESSAGE
SWITCH 6 PORT
STATUS: OK
Range: FAIL, OK
MESSAGE
SWITCH MAC ADDRESS:

00A0F40138FA
Range: standard MAC address format
These actual values appear only if the L90 is ordered with an Ethernet switch module (type 2S or 2T). The status information for the Ethernet switch is shown in this menu.
SWITCH 1 PORT STATUS to SWITCH 6 PORT STATUS: These values represents the receiver status of each port on
the Ethernet switch. If the value is OK, then data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is FAIL,
then data is not being received from the remote terminal or the port is not connected.
SWITCH MAC ADDRESS: This value displays the MAC address assigned to the Ethernet switch module.
GE Multilin
6-9
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3METERING
6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS
a) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING POWER AND ENERGY

The following figure illustrates the conventions established for use in UR-series relays.
PER IEEE CONVENTIONS
Generator
PARAMETERS AS SEEN
BY THE UR RELAY
G
Voltage
+Q
VCG
IC
WATTS = Positive
PF = Lead
PF = Lag
VARS = Positive
IA
PF = Lag
-P
VAG
Current
IB
+P
IA
PF = Lag
PF = Lead
UR RELAY
LOAD
Inductive
Resistive
VBG
-Q
-
S=VI
Generator
G
+Q
VCG
Voltage
PF = Lead
WATTS = Positive
PF = Lead
-P
VAG
+P
IA
Current
PF = Lag
IB
UR RELAY
-Q
S=VI
-
Resistive
Inductive
Resistive
LOAD
PF = Lead
VBG
LOAD
PF = Lag
IA
IC
VARS = Negative
+Q
VCG
Voltage
PF = Lead
IB
IA
WATTS = Negative
VAG
VARS = Negative
PF = Lag
-P
PF = Lag
+P
IA
PF = Lag
IC
Current
PF = Lead
VBG
-Q
UR RELAY
G
-
Generator
S=VI
3
Resistive
LOAD
+Q
VCG
Voltage
IB
PF = Lead
VARS = Positive
-P
VAG
PF = Lead
IA
G
Generator
+P
IC
PF = Lag
Current
UR RELAY
PF = Lag
IA
WATTS = Negative
VBG
PF = Lead
-Q
827239AC.CDR
S=VI
Figure 61: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS
6-10
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING
b) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING PHASE ANGLES

All phasors calculated by UR-series relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that
maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.
For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected
by the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting
defines a particular AC signal source to be used as the reference.
The relay will first determine if any Phase VT bank is indicated in the source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is
used as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any Aux VT bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage
channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this
hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include Phase CT bank and Ground CT bank.
If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The
phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to
more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.
-270o
-225o
-315o
positive
angle
direction
-180o
UR phase angle
reference
-135o
0o
-45o
-90o
827845A1.CDR
Figure 62: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION

c) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS
The UR-series of relays calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage,
and symmetrical components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase
angle relations between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument
transformers. This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages.
For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common reference as described in the previous sub-section.
WYE-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:
ABC phase rotation:
1
V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG )
3
1
2
V_1 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG )
3
1
2
V_2 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG )
3
ACB phase rotation:

1
V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG )
3
1
2
V_1 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG )
3
1
2
V_2 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG )
3
The above equations apply to currents as well.
GE Multilin
6-11
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
DELTA-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:
ABC phase rotation:
ACB phase rotation:

V_0 = N/A
1 30
2
V_1 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA )
3 3
1 30
2
V_2 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA )
3 3
V_0 = N/A
1 30
2
V_1 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA )
3 3
1
30
2
V_2 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA )
3 3
The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to
zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation.
Table 61: SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE
SYSTEM VOLTAGES, SEC. V *
RELAY INPUTS, SEC. V
SYMM. COMP, SEC. V
F5AC
F6AC
F7AC
V0
V1
V2
85.4
241
WYE
13.9
0
76.2
125
79.7
250
19.5
192
56.5
7
23.3
187
85.4
288
DELTA
84.9
0
138.3
144
85.4
288
N/A
56.5
54
23.3
234
VBG
VCG
VAB
VBC
VCA
13.9
0
76.2
125
79.7
250
84.9
313
138.3
97
84.9
0
138.3
144
UNKNOWN (only V1 and V2

can be determined)
VT
CONN.
VAG
The power system voltages are phase-referenced for simplicity to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a
relative matter. It is important to remember that the L90 displays are always referenced as specified under SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.
The example above is illustrated in the following figure.
UR phase angle
reference
SYMMETRICAL
COMPONENTS
UR phase angle
reference
SYSTEM VOLTAGES
WYE VTs
C
B
2
U
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
le
A
DELTA VTs
U
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
le
C
B
2
827844A1.CDR
Figure 63: MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS
6-12
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING
6.3.2 DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING 87L DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT
87L DIFFERENTIAL
CURRENT
LOCAL IA:
0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
LOCAL IB:
0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
LOCAL IC:
0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
TERMINAL 1 IA:
0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
TERMINAL 1 IB:
0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
TERMINAL 1 IC:
0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
TERMINAL 2 IA:
0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
TERMINAL 2 IB:
0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
TERMINAL 2 IC:
0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
IA DIFF. CURRENT:
0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
IA RESTR. CURRENT:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
IB DIFF. CURRENT:
0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
IB RESTR. CURRENT:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
IC DIFF. CURRENT:
0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
IC RESTR. CURRENT:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
IG DIFF. CURRENT:
0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
IG RESTR. CURRENT:
0.000 A
The metered current values are displayed for all line terminals in fundamental phasor form. All angles are shown with
respect to the reference common for all L90 devices; that is, frequency, source currents, and voltages. The metered primary differential and restraint currents are displayed for the local relay.
Terminal 1 refers to the communication channel 1 interface to a remote L90 at terminal 1. Terminal 2 refers
to the communication channel 2 interface to a remote L90 at terminal 2.
NOTE
GE Multilin
6-13
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3.3 SOURCES
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC1
SOURCE SRC 1
PHASE CURRENT
SRC 1
See page 614.
MESSAGE
GROUND CURRENT
SRC 1
See page 615.
MESSAGE
PHASE VOLTAGE
SRC 1
See page 615.
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
SRC 1
See page 616.
MESSAGE
POWER
SRC 1
See page 616.
MESSAGE
ENERGY
SRC 1
See page 617.
MESSAGE
DEMAND
SRC 1
See page 617.
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY
SRC 1
See page 618.
This menu displays the metered values available for each source.
Metered values presented for each source depend on the phase and auxiliary VTs and phase and ground CTs assignments
for this particular source. For example, if no phase VT is assigned to this source, then any voltage, energy, and power values will be unavailable.
b) PHASE CURRENT METERING

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT
PHASE CURRENT
SRC 1
6-14
SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000

b: 0.000 c: 0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ia:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ib:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ic:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS In:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ia:

0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ib:

0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ic:

0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR In:

0.000 A
0.0
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING
MESSAGE
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0:

0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 POS SEQ I1:

0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2:

0.000 A
0.0
The metered phase current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES).
c) GROUND CURRENT METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 GROUND CURRENT
GROUND CURRENT
SRC 1
SRC 1 RMS Ig:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ig:

0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Igd:

0.000 A
0.0
The metered ground current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
d) PHASE VOLTAGE METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE VOLTAGE
PHASE VOLTAGE
SRC 1
GE Multilin
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vag:
V
MESSAGE
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vbg:
V
MESSAGE
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vcg:
V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vag:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vab:
V
MESSAGE
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vbc:
V
MESSAGE
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vca:
V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vab:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc:

0.000 V
0.0
6-15
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vca:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 POS SEQ V1:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2:

0.000 V
0.0
The metered phase voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
e) AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
SRC 1
MESSAGE
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vx:
V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vx:

0.000 V
0.0
The metered auxiliary voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
f) POWER METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 POWER
POWER
SRC 1
6-16
SRC 1 REAL POWER

3: 0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REAL POWER

a: 0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REAL POWER

b: 0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REAL POWER

c: 0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

3: 0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

a: 0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

b: 0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

c: 0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

3: 0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

a: 0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

b: 0.000 VA
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING
MESSAGE
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

c: 0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1
3:
POWER FACTOR
1.000
MESSAGE
SRC 1
a:
POWER FACTOR
1.000
MESSAGE
SRC 1
b:
POWER FACTOR
1.000
MESSAGE
SRC 1
c:
POWER FACTOR
1.000
The metered values for real, reactive, and apparent power, as well as power factor, are displayed in this menu. The "SRC
1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES).
g) ENERGY METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 ENERGY
ENERGY
SRC 1
SRC 1 POS WATTHOUR:

0.000 Wh
MESSAGE
SRC 1 NEG WATTHOUR:

0.000 Wh
MESSAGE
SRC 1 POS VARHOUR:

0.000 varh
MESSAGE
SRC 1 NEG VARHOUR:

0.000 varh
The metered values for real and reactive energy are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever
name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES).
Because energy values are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing
CT or VT characteristics.
h) DEMAND METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 DEMAND
DEMAND
SRC 1
GE Multilin
SRC 1 DMD IA:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IA MAX:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IA DATE:

2001/07/31 16:30:07
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IB:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IB MAX:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IB DATE:

2001/07/31 16:30:07
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IC:

0.000 A
6-17
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IC MAX:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IC DATE:

2001/07/31 16:30:07
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD W:
0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD W MAX:

0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD W DATE:

2001/07/31 16:30:07
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD VAR:

0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD VAR MAX:

0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD VAR DATE:

2001/07/31 16:30:07
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD VA:

0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD VA MAX:

0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD VA DATE:

2001/07/31 16:30:07
The metered values for current and power demand are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL
SOURCES).
The relay measures (absolute values only) the source demand on each phase and average three phase demand for real,
reactive, and apparent power. These parameters can be monitored to reduce supplier demand penalties or for statistical
metering purposes. Demand calculations are based on the measurement type selected in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP
DEMAND menu. For each quantity, the relay displays the demand over the most recent demand time interval, the maximum demand since the last maximum demand reset, and the time and date stamp of this maximum demand value. Maximum demand quantities can be reset to zero with the CLEAR RECORDS CLEAR DEMAND RECORDS command.
i) FREQUENCY METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
SRC 1
SRC 1 FREQUENCY:
0.00 Hz
The metered frequency values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES).
is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a
Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration
(see the SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM settings). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The
final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and
transients.
SOURCE FREQUENCY
If the 87L function is enabled, then dedicated 87L frequency tracking is engaged. In this case, the relay uses the METERING
TRACKING FREQUENCY TRACKING FREQUENCY value for all computations, overriding the SOURCE FREQUENCY value.
6-18
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING
6.3.4 SYNCHROCHECK
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SYNCHROCHECK SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)
SYNCHROCHECK 1
SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA
VOLT: 0.000 V
MESSAGE
PHASE:
0.0
MESSAGE
FREQ:
0.00 Hz
The actual values menu for synchrocheck 2 is identical to that of synchrocheck 1. If a synchrocheck function setting is "Disabled", the corresponding actual values menu item will not be displayed.
6.3.5 TRACKING FREQUENCY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRACKING FREQUENCY
TRACKING FREQUENCY
TRACKING FREQUENCY:
60.00 Hz
The tracking frequency is displayed here. The frequency is tracked based on configuration of the reference source. The
TRACKING FREQUENCY is based upon positive sequence current phasors from all line terminals and is synchronously
adjusted at all terminals. If currents are below 0.125 pu, then the NOMINAL FREQUENCY is used.
6.3.6 FLEXELEMENTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING FLEXELEMENTS FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
FLEXELEMENT 1
FLEXELEMENT 1
OpSig: 0.000 pu
The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units.
Table 62: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS (Sheet 1 of 2)
87L SIGNALS

87L SIGNALS
BREAKER ARCING AMPS

dcmA
FREQUENCY
fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE
POWER FACTOR
PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs
BASE = 100C
SOURCE CURRENT
SOURCE ENERGY
(SRC X Positive and Negative
Watthours); (SRC X Positive and
Negative Varhours)
SOURCE POWER
GE Multilin
6-19
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
Table 62: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS (Sheet 2 of 2)

SOURCE VOLTAGE
SYNCHROCHECK
(Max Delta Volts)
6.3.7 IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS
IEC 61850
GOOSE ANALOGS
MESSAGE
ANALOG INPUT
0.000
ANALOG INPUT
0.000
MESSAGE
ANALOG INPUT 16
0.000
The IEC 61850 GGIO3 analog input data points are displayed in this menu. The GGIO3 analog data values are received
via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages sent from other devices.
6.3.8 WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 1(2)
WATTMETRIC
GROUND FAULT 1
WATT GND FLT 1:

0.000 W
This menu displays the wattmetric zero-sequence directional element operating power values.
6.3.9 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PMU 1(4)
PMU 1 VA:
0.0000 kV, 0.00
Range: Va or Vab per VT bank connection
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VB:
0.0000 kV, 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VC:
0.0000 kV, 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VX:
0.0000 kV, 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 V1:
0.0000 kV, 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 V2:
0.0000 kV, 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 V0:
0.0000 kV, 0.00
PMU 1
6-20
Range: Substituted with zero if delta-connected VTs.
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IA:
0.0000 kA, 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IB:
0.0000 kA, 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IC:
0.0000 kA, 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 IG:
0.0000 kA, 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 I1:
0.0000 kA, 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 I2:
0.0000 kA, 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 I0:
0.0000 kA, 0.00
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQUENCY:
0.0000 Hz
MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt:
0.0000 Hz/s
MESSAGE
PMU 1 CONFIG CHANGE

COUNTER: 0
Range: 0 to 65535
The above actual values are displayed without the corresponding time stamp as they become available per the recording
rate setting. Also, the recording post-filtering setting is applied to these values.
6.3.10 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT xx
DCMA INPUT xx
DCMA INPUT xx
0.000 mA
Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID
and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT xx
RTD INPUT xx
RTD INPUT xx
-50 C
Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and
the bottom line as the value.
GE Multilin
6-21
6.4 RECORDS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4RECORDS
6.4.1 FAULT REPORTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS FAULT REPORTS FAULT REPORT 1(15)
NO FAULTS TO REPORT
or
FAULT 1
LINE ID: SRC 1
MESSAGE
FAULT 1
2000/08/11
Range: YYYY/MM/DD
MESSAGE
FAULT 1
TIME:
00:00:00.000000
Range: HH:MM:SS.ssssss
MESSAGE
FAULT 1
ABG
TYPE:
Range: not available if the source VTs are in the Delta

configuration
MESSAGE
FAULT 1
00.0 km
LOCATION
Range: not available if the source VTs are in the Delta

configuration
MESSAGE
FAULT 1 FAULTED
SEGMENT: Local
MESSAGE
FAULT 1
SHOT: 0
FAULT REPORT 1
DATE:
RECLOSE
Range: N/A, Local (two-terminal configuration and local

section for three-terminal), Remote 1, Remote 2
(three-terminal configuration only)
Range: where applicable
The latest 15 fault reports can be stored. The most recent fault location calculation (when applicable) is displayed in this
menu, along with the date and time stamp of the event which triggered the calculation. See the SETTINGS PRODUCT
SETUP FAULT REPORTS menu for assigning the source and trigger for fault calculations. Refer to the COMMANDS
CLEAR RECORDS menu for manual clearing of the fault reports and to the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CLEAR RELAY
RECORDS menu for automated clearing of the fault reports.
The faulted segment of the line is indicated when the synchronized voltage and currents method is used. When the faulted
segment can be determined, the FAULT 1 FAULTED SEGMENT value displays N/A. For three-terminal lines, the fault location
(distance to the fault) is reported as seen from the terminal adjacent to the fault.
6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS EVENT RECORDS
EVENT RECORDS
EVENT: XXXX
RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)
MESSAGE
EVENT: 3
POWER ON
EVENT 3
DATE: 2000/07/14
MESSAGE
EVENT: 2
POWER OFF
EVENT 3
TIME: 14:53:00.03405
MESSAGE
EVENT: 1
EVENTS CLEARED
Date and Time Stamps
The event records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order
from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new record is
added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated with the
event trigger. Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records.
6-22
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4 RECORDS
6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSCILLOGRAPHY
FORCE TRIGGER?
No
MESSAGE
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
0
MESSAGE
AVAILABLE RECORDS:
0
MESSAGE
CYCLES PER RECORD:

0.0
MESSAGE
LAST CLEARED DATE:

2000/07/14 15:40:16
Range: No, Yes
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The
CYCLES PER RECORD value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillography section of chapter 5 for additional details.
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting Yes to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. Refer to the COMMANDS
menu for information on clearing the oscillography records.
CLEAR RECORDS
6.4.4 DATA LOGGER

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME:

2000/01/14 13:45:51
MESSAGE
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME:

2000/01/14 15:21:19
The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time at which the oldest available samples were taken. It will be static until the log
gets full, at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate. The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time the
most recent samples were taken. It counts up at the defined sampling rate. If the data logger channels are defined, then
both values are static.
Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing data logger records.
6.4.5 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS PMU RECORDS
PMU
RECORDS
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
0
MESSAGE
PMU 1
RECORDING
See below.
The number of triggers applicable to the phasor measurement unit recorder is indicated by the NUMBER OF TRIGGERS value.
The status of the phasor measurement unit recorder is indicated as follows:
GE Multilin
6-23
6.4 RECORDS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS PMU RECORDS PMU 1 RECORDING
PMU 1 FORCE TRIGGER:

Yes
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
PUM 1 AVAILABLE
RECORDS: 0
MESSAGE
PUM 1 SECONDS
PER RECORD: 0.0
Range: 0 to 6553.5 in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
PUM 1 LAST CLEARED:

2005/07/14 015:40:16
Range: date and time in format shown
PMU 1
RECORDING
6.4.6 BREAKER MAINTENANCE

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS MAINTENANCE BREAKER 1(4)
BKR 1 ARCING AMP A:

0.00 kA2-cyc
BREAKER 1
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARCING AMP B:

0.00 kA2-cyc
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARCING AMP C:

0.00 kA2-cyc
MESSAGE

A:
0 ms
MESSAGE

B:
0 ms
MESSAGE

C:
0 ms
MESSAGE
BKR 1 OPERATING
TIME:
0 ms
There is an identical menu for each of the breakers. The BKR 1 ARCING AMP values are in units of kA2-cycles. Refer to the
COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing breaker arcing current records. The BREAKER OPERATING TIME is
defined as the slowest operating time of breaker poles that were initiated to open.
6-24
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.5PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION
ORDER CODE LINE 1:

L90-E00-HCH-F8F-H6A
Range: standard GE multilin order code format;

example order code shown
ORDER CODE LINE 2:
Range: standard GE multilin order code format
ORDER CODE LINE 3:
ORDER CODE LINE 4:
SERIAL NUMBER:
Range: standard GE multilin serial number format
MESSAGE
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS

000000000000
Range: standard Ethernet MAC address format
MESSAGE
MANUFACTURING DATE:
0
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
PMU FEATURE ACTIVE:

No
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
CT/ VT ADVANCED DIAG

ACTIVE: No
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
OPERATING TIME:
0:00:00
Range: opearting time in HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
LAST SETTING CHANGE:

1970/01/01 23:11:19
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MODEL INFORMATION
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date and time of manufacture, and operating time are shown here.
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO FIRMWARE REVISIONS
FIRMWARE REVISIONS
UR Relay
REVISION:
5.7x
Range: 0.00 to 655.35

Revision number of the application firmware.
MESSAGE
MODIFICATION FILE
NUMBER:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE)

Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.
MESSAGE
BOOT PROGRAM
REVISION:
3.01
Range: 0.00 to 655.35

Revision number of the boot program firmware.
MESSAGE
FRONT PANEL PROGRAM

REVISION:
0.08
Range: 0.00 to 655.35

Revision number of faceplate program firmware.
MESSAGE
COMPILE DATE:
2004/09/15 04:55:16
Range: Any valid date and time.

Date and time when product firmware was built.
MESSAGE
BOOT DATE:
2004/09/15 16:41:32
Range: Any valid date and time.

Date and time when the boot program was built.
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been
installed.
GE Multilin
6-25
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6-26
GE Multilin
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.1 COMMANDS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1COMMANDS
7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU
COMMANDS
MESSAGE
COMMANDS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
MESSAGE
COMMANDS
CLEAR RECORDS
MESSAGE
COMMANDS
SET DATE AND TIME
MESSAGE
COMMANDS
RELAY MAINTENANCE
MESSAGE
COMMANDS
PMU ONE-SHOT
The commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from
unauthorized access via the command password; see the Security section of chapter 5 for details. The following flash message appears after successfully command entry:
COMMAND
EXECUTED
PATH: COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS
COMMANDS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
Virt Ip
Off
Range: Off, On
Virt Ip
Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 64
Off
Range: Off, On
The states of up to 64 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The
second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a state off (logic 0) or on (logic 1).
GE Multilin
7-1
7.1 COMMANDS

7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS
PATH: COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS
COMMANDS
CLEAR RECORDS
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS?

No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS?

No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY?
No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR DATA LOGGER?

No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR BREAKER 1
ARCING AMPS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR BREAKER 2
ARCING AMPS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR DEMAND
RECORDS?: No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR CHANNEL TEST

RECORDS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR ENERGY?
No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED
ACCESS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR PMU 1 RECORDS?

No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR PMU 1 CONFIG

CHANGE COUNTER? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR ALL RELAY

RECORDS? No
Range: No, Yes
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the event records. Data is cleared by changing a command setting to Yes and pressing the ENTER key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to No.
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME
PATH: COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME
COMMANDS
SET DATE AND TIME
SET DATE AND TIME:

2000/01/14 13:47:03
(YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)
The date and time can be entered here via the faceplate keypad only if the IRIG-B or SNTP signal is not in use. The time
setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The new time will take effect at the moment the ENTER key is clicked.
7-2
GE Multilin
7.1 COMMANDS
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
PATH: COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE
COMMANDS
RELAY MAINTENANCE
PERFORM LAMPTEST?
No
Range: No, Yes
UPDATE ORDER CODE?

No
Range: No, Yes
SERVICE COMMAND:
0
Range: 0, 101
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands for the lamp test and order code are activated
by changing a command setting to Yes and pressing the ENTER key. The command setting will then automatically revert
to No. The service command is activated by entering a numerical code and pressing the ENTER key.
The PERFORM LAMPTEST command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The UPDATE
ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to
match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown.
UPDATING...
PLEASE WAIT
There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the ORDER
CODE NOT UPDATED message will be shown.
The SERVICE COMMAND is used to perform specific L90 service actions. Presently, there is only one service action available.
Code 101 is used to clear factory diagnostic information stored in the non-volatile memory. If a code other than 101 is
entered, the command will be ignored and no actions will be taken. Various self-checking diagnostics are performed in the
background while the L90 is running, and diagnostic information is stored on the non-volatile memory from time to time
based on the self-checking result. Although the diagnostic information is cleared before the L90 is shipped from the factory,
the user may want to clear the diagnostic information for themselves under certain circumstances. For example, it may be
desirable to clear diagnostic information after replacement of hardware. Once the diagnostic information is cleared, all selfchecking variables are reset to their initial state and diagnostics will restart from scratch.
7.1.6 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ONE-SHOT
PATH: COMMANDS PMU ONE-SHOT
COMMANDS
PMU ONE-SHOT
PMU ONE-SHOT
FUNCTION: Disabled
PMU ONE-SHOT
SEQUENCE NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to nominal frequency 1 in steps of 1
PMU ONE-SHOT TIME:

2005/06/14 7:58:35
Range: 24h time format
This feature allows pre-scheduling a PMU measurement at a specific point in time. This functionality can be used to test for
accuracy of the PMU, and for manual collection of synchronized measurements through the system, as explained below.
When enabled, the function continuously compares the present time with the pre-set PMU ONE-SHOT TIME. When the two
times match, the function compares the present sequence number of the measured synchrophasors with the pre-set PMU
ONE-SHOT SEQUENCE NUMBER. When the two numbers match, the function freezes the synchrophasor actual values and
the corresponding protocol data items for 30 seconds. This allows manual read-out of the synchrophasor values for the preset time and pre-set sequence number (via the faceplate display, supported communication protocols such as Modbus or
DNP, and the EnerVista UR Setup software).
When freezing the actual values the function also asserts a PMU ONE-SHOT OP FlexLogic operand. This operand may be
configured to drive an output contact and trigger an external measuring device such as a digital scope with the intent to verify the accuracy of the PMU under test.
With reference to the figure below, the PMU one-shot function (when enabled) controls three FlexLogic operands:
GE Multilin
7-3
7.1 COMMANDS
The PMU ONE-SHOT EXPIRED operand indicates that the one-shot operation has been executed, and the present time
is at least 30 seconds past the scheduled one-shot time.
The PMU ONE-SHOT PENDING operand indicates that the one-shot operation is pending; that is, the present time is
before the scheduled one-shot time.
The PMU ONE-SHOT OP operand indicates the one-shot operation and remains asserted for 30 seconds afterwards.
When the function is disabled, all three operands are de-asserted. The one-shot function applies to all logical PMUs of a
given L90 relay.
Figure 71: PMU ONE-SHOT FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

TESTING ACCURACY OF THE PMU:
The one-shot feature can be used to test accuracy of the synchrophasor measurement. GPS-synchronized tests sets perform a similar function to PMUs: instead of measuring the phasor from physical signals with respect to the externally provided time reference, they produce the physical signals with respect to the externally provided time reference, given the
desired phasor values. Therefore the GPS-synchronized test sets cannot be automatically assumed more accurate then
the PMUs under test. This calls for a method to verify both the measuring device (PMU) and the source of signal (test set).
With reference to the figure below, the one-shot feature could be configured to trigger a high-accuracy scope to capture
both the time reference signal (rising edge of the 1 pps signal of the IRIG-B time reference), and the measured waveform.
The high-accuracy high-sampling rate record of the two signals captured by the scope can be processed using digital tools
to verify the magnitude and phase angle with respect to the time reference signal. As both the time reference and the measured signals are raw inputs to the PMU under test, their independently captured record, processed using third-party software, is a good reference point for accuracy calculations. Such a record proves useful when discussing the test results, and
should be retained as a part of the testing documentation.
Note that the PMU under such test does not have to be connected to a real GPS receiver as the accuracy is measured with
respect to the timing reference provided to the PMU and not to the absolute UTC time. Therefore a simple IRIG-B generator could be used instead. Also, the test set does not have to support GPS synchronization. Any stable signal source can
7-4
GE Multilin
7.1 COMMANDS
be used. If both the PMU under test and the test set use the timing reference, they should be driven from the same IRIG-B
signal: either the same GPS receiver or IRIG-B generator. Otherwise, the setpoints of the test set and the PMU measurements should not be compared as they are referenced to different time scales.
Figure 72: USING THE PMU ONE-SHOT FEATURE TO TEST SYNCHROPHASOR MEASUREMENT ACCURACY
COLLECTING SYNCHRONIZED MEASUREMENTS AD HOC:
The one-shot feature can be used for ad hoc collection of synchronized measurements in the network. Two or more PMU
can be pre-scheduled to freeze their measurements at the same time. When frozen the measurements could be collected
using EnerVista UR Setup or a protocol client.
GE Multilin
7-5
7.2 TARGETS
7.2TARGETS
7.2.1 TARGETS MENU
TARGETS
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT
LATCHED
1:
Displayed only if targets for this element are active.

Example shown.
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 48:

LATCHED
Displayed only if targets for this element are active.

Example shown.
MESSAGE
The status of any active targets will be displayed in the targets menu. If no targets are active, the display will read NO
ACTIVE TARGETS:
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES

When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that message. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer
times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the target message.
The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a target message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed.
Table 71: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS
PRIORITY
ACTIVE STATUS
DESCRIPTION
OP
element operated and still picked up
PKP
element picked up and timed out
LATCHED
element had operated but has dropped out
If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed.
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS
a) DESCRIPTION
The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and
minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator will turn on and a
target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the
RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present.
Major self-test errors also result in the following:
The critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized.
All other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation.
The faceplate In Service LED indicator is turned off.
A RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded.
7-6
GE Multilin
7.2 TARGETS
b) MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

The major self-test errors are listed and described below.
MODULE FAILURE___:
Contact Factory (xxx)
Latched target message: Yes.
Description of problem: Module hardware failure detected.
How often the test is performed: Module dependent.
What to do: Contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. The xxx text identifies the failed module (for example, F8L).
INCOMPATIBLE H/W:
Contact Factory (xxx)
Description of problem: One or more installed hardware modules is not compatible with the L90 order code.
How often the test is performed: Module dependent.
What to do: Contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. The xxx text identifies the failed module (for example, F8L).
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH:
with 2nd line detail
Latched target message: No.
Description of problem: The configuration of modules does not match the order code stored in the L90.
How often the test is performed: On power up. Afterwards, the backplane is checked for missing cards every five seconds.
What to do: Check all modules against the order code, ensure they are inserted properly, and cycle control power. If
the problem persists, contact the factory.
FLEXLOGIC ERROR:
with 2nd line detail
Description of problem: A FlexLogic equation is incorrect.
How often the test is performed: The test is event driven, performed whenever FlexLogic equations are modified.
What to do: Finish all equation editing and use self tests to debug any errors.
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED:
Check Settings
Description of problem: The PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS setting indicates the L90 is not programmed.
How often the test is performed: On power up and whenever the PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS
setting is altered.
What to do: Program all settings and then set PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS to Programmed.
GE Multilin
7-7
7.2 TARGETS
c) MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

Most of the minor self-test errors can be disabled. Refer to the settings in the User-programmable self-tests section in chapter 5 for additional details.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Replace Battery
Description of problem: The battery is not functioning.
How often the test is performed: The battery is monitored every five seconds. The error message is displayed after 60
seconds if the problem persists.
What to do: Replace the battery located in the power supply module (1H or 1L).
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Direct I/O Ring Break
Description of problem: Direct input and output settings are configured for a ring, but the connection is not in a ring.
How often the test is performed: Every second.
What to do: Check direct input and output configuration and wiring.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
ENET MODULE OFFLINE
Description of problem: The L90 has failed to detect the Ethernet switch.
How often the test is performed: Monitored every five seconds. An error is issued after five consecutive failures.
What to do: Check the L90 device and switch IP configuration settings. Check for incorrect UR port (port 7) settings on
the Ethernet switch. Check the power to the switch.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
ENET PORT # OFFLINE
Description of problem: The Ethernet connection has failed for the specified port.
How often the test is performed: Every five seconds.
What to do: Check the Ethernet port connection on the switch.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
**Bad IRIG-B Signal**
Description of problem: A bad IRIG-B input signal has been detected.
How often the test is performed: Monitored whenever an IRIG-B signal is received.
What to do: Ensure the following:
7-8
The IRIG-B cable is properly connected.
Proper cable functionality (that is, check for physical damage or perform a continuity test).
The IRIG-B receiver is functioning.
Check the input signal level (it may be less than specification).
GE Multilin
7.2 TARGETS
If none of these apply, then contact the factory.

MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Port ## Failure
Description of problem: An Ethernet connection has failed.
How often the test is performed: Monitored every five seconds.
What to do: Check Ethernet connections. Port 1 is the primary port and port 2 is the secondary port.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
SNTP Failure
Description of problem: The SNTP server is not responding.
How often the test is performed: Every 10 to 60 seconds.
What to do: Check SNTP configuration and network connections.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
4L Discrepancy
Description of problem: A discrepancy has been detected between the actual and desired state of a latching contact
output of an installed type 4L module.
How often the test is performed: Upon initiation of a contact output state change.
What to do: Verify the state of the output contact and contact the factory if the problem persists.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
GGIO Ind xxx oscill
Description of problem: A data item in a configurable GOOSE data set is oscillating.
How often the test is performed: Upon scanning of each configurable GOOSE data set.
What to do: The xxx text denotes the data item that has been detected as oscillating. Evaluate all logic pertaining to
this item.
DIRECT I/O FAILURE:

COMM Path Incomplete
Description of problem: A direct device is configured but not connected.
How often the test is performed: Every second.
What to do: Check direct input and output configuration and wiring.
REMOTE DEVICE FAIL:

COMM Path Incomplete
Description of problem: One or more GOOSE devices are not responding.
GE Multilin
7-9
7.2 TARGETS
How often the test is performed: Event driven. The test is performed when a device programmed to receive GOOSE
messages stops receiving. This can be from 1 to 60 seconds, depending on GOOSE packets.
What to do: Check GOOSE setup.
TEMP MONITOR:
OVER TEMPERATURE
Description of problem: The ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating temperature (+80C).
How often the test is performed: Every hour.
What to do: Remove the L90 from service and install in a location that meets operating temperature standards.
UNEXPECTED RESTART:
Press RESET key
Description of problem: Abnormal restart from modules being removed or inserted while the L90 is powered-up, when
there is an abnormal DC supply, or as a result of internal relay failure.
How often the test is performed: Event driven.
What to do: Contact the factory.
7-10
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
8 SECURITY 8.1PASSWORD SECURITY
8.1.1 OVERVIEW
Two levels of password security are provided via the ACCESS LEVEL setting: command and setting. The factory service level
is not available and intended for factory use only.
The following operations are under command password supervision:
Operating the breakers via faceplate keypad.
Changing the state of virtual inputs.
Clearing the event records.
Clearing the oscillography records.
Clearing fault reports.
Changing the date and time.
Clearing the breaker arcing current.
Clearing energy records.
Clearing the data logger.
Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states.
The following operations are under setting password supervision:
Changing any setting.
Test mode operation.
The command and setting passwords are defaulted to 0 when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is
set to 0, the password security feature is disabled.
and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear
communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
The PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS settings allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.
The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either by
the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout.
The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands.
ACCESS LOC SETG OFF: Asserted when local setting access is disabled.
ACCESS LOC SETG ON: Asserted when local setting access is enabled.
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF: Asserted when local command access is disabled.
ACCESS LOC CMND ON: Asserted when local command access is enabled.
ACCESS REM SETG OFF: Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.
ACCESS REM SETG ON: Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.
ACCESS REM CMND OFF: Asserted when remote command access is disabled.
ACCESS REM CMND ON: Asserted when remote command access is enabled.
The appropriate events are also logged in the Event Recorder as well. The FlexLogic operands and events are updated
every five seconds.
GE Multilin
8-1
8 SECURITY
A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of all the remote and local security operands
shown above.
NOTE
8.1.2 PASSWORD SECURITY MENU

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,

Factory Service (for factory use only)
MESSAGE
CHANGE LOCAL
PASSWORDS
See page 82.
MESSAGE
ACCESS
SUPERVISION
See page 83.
MESSAGE
DUAL PERMISSION
SECURITY ACCESS
See page 84.
MESSAGE
PASSWORD ACCESS
EVENTS: Disabled
8.1.3 LOCAL PASSWORDS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
Range: 0 to 9999999999
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED SETTING
Range: 0 to 9999999999
CHANGE LOCAL
PASSWORDS
Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters.
When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD setting is programmed to Yes via the front panel
interface, the following message sequence is invoked:
1.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
2.
VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
3.
NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a Restricted setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to Setting and
then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the
password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. Accessibility automatically reverts to the Restricted level according
to the access level timeout setting values.
If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD.
If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and settings.
NOTE
8-2
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY

8.1.4 REMOTE PASSWORDS
The remote password settings are only visible from a remote connection via the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the
Settings > Product Setup > Password Security menu item to open the remote password settings window.
Figure 81: REMOTE PASSWORD SETTINGS WINDOW

Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access. A command or setting password consists
of 1 to 10 numerical characters and are initially programmed to 0. The following procedure describes how the set the command or setting password.
1.
Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field.
2.
Re-enter the password in the Confirm New Password field.
3.
Click the Change button. This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password.
4.
If the original password is not 0, then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send
Password to Device button.
5.
The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the ENCRYPTED PASSWORD item.
If a command or setting password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding Encrypted Password
value.
8.1.5 ACCESS SUPERVISION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION
ACCESS
SUPERVISION
GE Multilin
ACCESS LEVEL
TIMEOUTS
MESSAGE
INVALID ATTEMPTS
BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3
MESSAGE
PASSWORD LOCKOUT
DURATION: 5 min
8-3
8 SECURITY
The following access supervision settings are available.
INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be
entered within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED and
REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operands are set to On. These operands are returned to the Off state upon
expiration of the lockout.
PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: This setting specifies the time that the L90 will lockout password access after
the number of invalid password entries specified by the INVALID ATTEMPS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting has occurred.
The L90 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing
a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is
asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be
used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS RESET UNAUTHORIZED
ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The
operand does not generate events or targets.
If events or targets are required, the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed
with event logs or targets enabled.
The access level timeout settings are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
ACCESS LEVEL
TIMEOUTS
MESSAGE
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS

TIMEOUT: 5 min
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS

TIMEOUT: 30 min
These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the restricted access level. Note
that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled.
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
8.1.6 DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
LOCAL SETTING AUTH:

On
Range: selected FlexLogic operands (see below)
MESSAGE
REMOTE SETTING AUTH:

On
MESSAGE
ACCESS AUTH
TIMEOUT: 30 min.
DUAL PERMISSION
SECURITY ACCESS
The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended
upload of settings to a relay through the local or remote interfaces interface.
The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.
LOCAL SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision.
Valid values for the FlexLogic operands are either On (default) or any physical Contact Input ~~ On value.
If this setting is On, then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this
setting is any contact input on FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing
the local setting password to gain setting access.
8-4
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain
setting access, then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message is displayed on the front panel.
REMOTE SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
required). If this setting is Off, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is
provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the remote setting password to gain setting access.
ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable
when the LOCAL SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except On. The state of the FlexLogic operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer programmed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is
immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product
Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.
The Remote Settings Authorization setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
required). If this setting is Off, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the
remote setting password to gain setting access.
The Access Authorization Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. This setting is applicable
when the Remote Settings Authorization setting is programmed to any operand except On or Off. The state of the
FlexLogic operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorization Timeout setting value is started. When this timer
expires, remote setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic
operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
GE Multilin
8-5
8 SECURITY
8.2SETTINGS SECURITY
8.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES
Setting file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An example of this is a substation that has ten similar feeders protected by ten UR-series F60 relays.
In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical between all devices. The templates feature allows
engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so they are not available to users. For example,
these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate
on the specific settings.
The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers installing the devices. These will be settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.
The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings will be visible in EnerVista UR Setup. Settings templates can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The functionality is identical for both purposes.
The settings template feature requires that both the EnerVista UR Setup software and the L90 firmware are at versions 5.40 or higher.
NOTE
a) ENABLING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings template for UR-series settings files.
1.
Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Right-click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue. The settings file is now in template editing
mode.
Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings. The following procedure describes this process.
1.
Select an installed device from the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Right-click on the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The software will prompt for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be
at least four characters in length.
3.
The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.
b) EDITING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in
EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic equation editor settings are locked.
1.
2.
Select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template editing mode.
3.
Enter the template password then click OK.
4.
Open the relevant settings windows that contain settings to be specified as viewable.
8-6
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of
the settings window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the
phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.
Figure 82: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, ALL SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS LOCKED

5.
Specify which settings to make viewable by clicking on them.

The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below.
Figure 83: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE

6.
Click on Save to save changes to the settings template.
7.
Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings.
c) ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE

It is highly recommended that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security.
The following procedure describes how to add password protection to a settings file template.
1.
Select a settings file from the offline window on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Selecting the Template Mode > Password Protect Template option.
GE Multilin
8-7
8 SECURITY
The software will prompt for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.
3.
The settings file template is now secured with password protection.

When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It
does not need to be added after the template is created.
NOTE
d) VIEWING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or
settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:
Display only those settings available for editing.
Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out.
Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing.
1.
2.
Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option.
3.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The
effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
8

842858A1.CDR
Figure 84: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE COMMAND
8-8
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings tree, showing only the settings categories that contain
editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings tree view is shown below.
Typical settings tree view without template applied.
Typical settings tree view with template applied via

the Template Mode > View In Template Mode
command.
842860A1.CDR
Figure 85: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE SETTINGS COMMAND
Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template.
1.
2.
Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View All Settings option.
3.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings
will be shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.

the Template Mode > View All Settings command.
842859A1.CDR
Figure 86: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND
e) REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
It may be necessary at some point to remove a settings template. Once a template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and
it will be necessary to define a new settings template.
1.
Select an installed device or settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Select the Template Mode > Remove Settings Template option.
3.
Enter the template password and click OK to continue.
GE Multilin
8-9

4.
8 SECURITY
Verify one more time that you wish to remove the template by clicking Yes.
The EnerVista software will remove all template information and all settings will be available.
8.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS
The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of
critical FlexLogic applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within
Secured FlexLogic equations will remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.
a) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATION ENTRIES
The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation.
1.
Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the settings template feature.
2.
Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item.
By default, all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on
the upper right of the window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.
3.
Specify which entries to lock by clicking on them.

The locked entries will be displayed against a grey background as shown in the example below.
8
Figure 87: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES IN EDIT MODE
4.
Click on Save to save and apply changes to the settings template.
5.
Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.
6.
Apply a password to the template then click OK to secure the FlexLogic equation.
8-10
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the FlexLogic entries not locked by the template. The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic entries in the above procedure is shown below.
Typical FlexLogic entries without template applied.
Typical FlexLogic entries locked with template via

842861A1.CDR
Figure 88: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES THROUGH SETTING TEMPLATES

The FlexLogic entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view (as shown below) and on the front panel display.
8
Figure 89: SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW
b) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER
A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number. Once the desired
FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific
serial number.
1.
Select the settings file in the offline window.
2.
Right-click on the file and select the Edit Settings File Properties item.
GE Multilin
8-11
8 SECURITY
The following window is displayed.
Figure 810: TYPICAL SETTINGS FILE PROPERTIES WINDOW

3.
Enter the serial number of the L90 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic equations are now locked to the L90 device specified by the serial
number.
8.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY
A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a L90 device have been
changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transfered to a L90 device, the date, time,
and serial number of the L90 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC. This information can be compared with the L90 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised.
The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the L90
device or obtained from the L90 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability
information to the settings file.
SETTINGS FILE TRANSFERRED

TO UR-SERIES DEVICE
The serial number and last setting change date

are stored in the UR-series device.
8
The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer
date are added to the settings file when settings files
are transferred to the device.
Compare transfer dates in the settings file and the
UR-series device to determine if security
has been compromised.
SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE

SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND
ADDED TO SETTINGS FILE.
842864A1.CDR
Figure 811: SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY MECHANISM

With respect to the above diagram, the traceability feature is used as follows.
8-12
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
1.
The transfer date of a setting file written to a L90 is logged in the relay and can be viewed via EnerVista UR Setup or
the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a setting file saved to a local PC is logged in EnerVista UR Setup.
2.
Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future will indicate if any changes
have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.
a) SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to an L90 device.
The L90 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup
offline window as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in settings

file device definition
842863A1.CDR
Figure 812: DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example below.
Traceability data
in settings report
842862A1.CDR
Figure 813: SETTINGS FILE REPORT SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA
GE Multilin
8-13
8 SECURITY
b) ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The L90 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual
Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista UR Setup online window as shown in the
example below.
Traceability data in online

device actual values page
842865A1.CDR
Figure 814: TRACEABILITY DATA IN ACTUAL VALUES WINDOW

This infomormation if also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER
ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE
c) ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES

The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature
If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is
removed from the settings file.
If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file.
If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed
from the settings file.
If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings
file.
8-14
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
8.3ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
8.3.1 OVERVIEW
The EnerVista security management system is a role-based access control (RBAC) system that allows a security administrator to easily manage the security privileges of multiple users. This allows for access control of URPlus-series devices by
multiple personnel within a substation and conforms to the principles of RBAC as defined in ANSI INCITS 359-2004. The
EnerVista security management system is disabled by default to allow the administrator direct access to the EnerVista software after installation. It is recommended that security be enabled before placing the device in service.
8.3.2 ENABLING THE SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The EnerVista security management system is disabled by default. This allows access to the device immediately after
installation. When security is disabled, all users are granted administrator access.
1.
Select the Security > User Management menu item to open the user management configuration window.
2.
Check the Enable Security box in the lower-left corner to enable the security management system.
Security is now enabled for the EnerVista UR Setup software. It will now be necessary to enter a username and password
upon starting the software.
8.3.3 ADDING A NEW USER
The following pre-requisites are required to add new users to the EnerVista security management system.
The user adding the new user must have administrator rights.
The EnerVista security management system must be enabled.
The following procedure describes how to add new users.

1.
2.
Enter a username in the User field. The username must be between 4 and 20 characters in length.
GE Multilin
8-15

3.
8 SECURITY
Select the user access rights by checking one or more of the fields shown.
The access rights are described in the following table

Table 81: ACCESS RIGHTS SUMMARY
4.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Delete Entry
Checking this box will delete the user when exiting the user management configuration window.
Actual Values
Checking this box allows the user to read actual values.
Settings
Checking this box allows the user to read setting values.
Commands
Checking this box allows the user to execute commands.
Event Recorder
Checking this box allows the user to use the digital fault recorder.
FlexLogic
Checking this box allows the user to read FlexLogic values.
Update Info
Checking this box allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of
the Settings, Event Recorder, and FlexLogic boxes are checked by themselves, the user is granted read
access. When any of these are checked in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and
write access. The user will not be granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update
Info field is checked.
Admin
When this box is checked, the user will become an EnerVista URPlus Setup administrator, therefore
receiving all of the administrative rights. Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.
Click OK to add the new user to the security management system.

8.3.4 MODIFYING USER PRIVILEGES
The following pre-requisites are required to modify user privileges in the EnerVista security management system.
The user modifying the privileges must have administrator rights.
The EnerVista security management system must be enabled.
The following procedure describes how to modify user privileges.

1.
2.
Locate the username in the User field.
8-16
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
3.
Modify the user access rights by checking or clearing one or more of the fields shown.
The access rights are described in the following table

Table 82: ACCESS RIGHTS SUMMARY
4.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Delete Entry
Checking this box will delete the user when exiting the user management configuration window.
Actual Values
Checking this box allows the user to read actual values.
Settings
Checking this box allows the user to read setting values.
Commands
Checking this box allows the user to execute commands.
Event Recorder
Checking this box allows the user to use the digital fault recorder.
FlexLogic
Checking this box allows the user to read FlexLogic values.
Update Info
Checking this box allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of
the Settings, Event Recorder, and FlexLogic boxes are checked by themselves, the user is granted read
access. When any of these are checked in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and
write access. The user will not be granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update
Info field is checked.
Admin
When this box is checked, the user will become an EnerVista URPlus Setup administrator, therefore
receiving all of the administrative rights. Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.
Click OK to save the changes to user to the security management system.
GE Multilin
8-17
8 SECURITY
8-18
GE Multilin
9 THEORY OF OPERATION
9.1 OVERVIEW
9 THEORY OF OPERATION 9.1OVERVIEW
9.1.1 L90 DESIGN
All differential techniques rely on the fact that under normal conditions, the sum of the currents entering each phase of a
transmission line from all connected terminals is equal to the charging current for that phase. Beyond the fundamental differential principle, the three most important technical considerations are; data consolidation, restraint characteristic, and
sampling synchronization. The L90 uses new and unique concepts in these areas.
Data consolidation refers to the extraction of appropriate parameters to be transmitted from raw samples of transmission
line phase currents. By employing data consolidation, a balance is achieved between transient response and bandwidth
requirements. Consolidation is possible along two dimensions: time and phases. Time consolidation consists of combining
a time sequence of samples to reduce the required bandwidth. Phase consolidation consists of combining information from
three phases and neutral. Although phase consolidation is possible, it is generally not employed in digital schemes,
because it is desired to detect which phase is faulted. The L90 relay transmits data for all three phases.
Time consolidation reduces communications bandwidth requirements. Time consolidation also improves security by eliminating the possibility of falsely interpreting a single corrupted data sample as a fault.
The L90 relay system uses a new consolidation technique called phaselets. Phaselets are partial sums of the terms
involved in a complete phasor computation. The use of phaselets in the L90 design improves the transient response performance without increasing the bandwidth requirements.
Phaselets themselves are not the same as phasors, but they can be combined into phasors over any time window that is
aligned with an integral number of phaselets (see the Phaselet Computation section in this chapter for details). The number
of phaselets that must be transmitted per cycle per phase is the number of samples per cycle divided by the number of
samples per phaselet. The L90 design uses 64 samples per cycle and 32 samples per phaselet, leading to a phaselet communication bandwidth requirement of 2 phaselets per cycle. Two phaselets per cycle fits comfortably within a communications bandwidth of 64 Kbaud, and can be used to detect faults within a half cycle plus channel delay.
The second major technical consideration is the restraint characteristic, which is the decision boundary between situations
that are declared to be a fault and those that are not. The L90 uses an innovative adaptive decision process based on an
on-line computation of the sources of measurement error. In this adaptive approach, the restraint region is an ellipse with
variable major axis, minor axis, and orientation. Parameters of the ellipse vary with time to make best use of the accuracy
of current measurements.
The third major element of L90 design is sampling synchronization. In order for a differential scheme to work, the data
being compared must be taken at the same time. This creates a challenge when data is taken at remote locations.
The GE approach to clock synchronization relies upon distributed synchronization. Distributed synchronization is accomplished by synchronizing the clocks to each other rather than to a master clock. Clocks are phase synchronized to each
other and frequency synchronized to the power system frequency. Each relay compares the phase of its clock to the phase
of the other clocks and compares the frequency of its clock to the power system frequency and makes appropriate adjustments. As long as there are enough channels operating to provide protection, the clocks will be synchronized.
9.1.2 L90 ARCHITECTURE
The L90 system uses a peer to peer architecture in which the relays at every terminal are identical. Each relay computes
differential current and clocks are synchronized to each other in a distributed fashion. The peer to peer architecture is
based on two main concepts that reduce the dependence of the system on the communication channels: replication of protection and distributed synchronization.
Replication of protection means that each relay is designed to be able to provide protection for the entire system, and does
so whenever it has enough information. Thus a relay provides protection whenever it is able to communicate directly with
all other relays. For a multi-terminal system, the degree of replication is determined by the extent of communication interconnection. If there is a channel between every pair of relays, every relay provides protection. If channels are not provided
between every pair of relays, only those relays that are connected to all other relays provide protection.
Each L90 relay measures three phase currents 64 times per cycle. Synchronization in sampling is maintained throughout
the system via the distributed synchronization technique.
The next step is the removal of any decaying offset from each phase current measurement. This is done using a digital simulation of the so-called mimic circuit (based on the differential equation of the inductive circuit that generates the offset).
Next, phaselets are computed by each L90 for each phase from the outputs of the mimic calculation, and transmitted to the
GE Multilin
9-1
9.1 OVERVIEW
other relay terminals. Also, the sum of the squares of the raw data samples is computed for each phase, and transmitted
with the phaselets.
At the receiving relay, the received phaselets are combined into phasors. Also, ground current is reconstructed from phase
information. An elliptical restraint region is computed by combining sources of measurement error. In addition to the
restraint region, a separate disturbance detector is used to enhance security.
The possibility of a fault is indicated by the detection of a disturbance as well as the sum of the current phasors falling outside of the elliptical restraint region. The statistical distance from the phasor to the restraint region is an indication of the
severity of the fault. To provide speed of response that is commensurate with fault severity, the distance is filtered. For mild
faults, filtering improves measurement precision at the expense of a slight delay, on the order of one cycle. Severe faults
are detected within a single phaselet. Whenever the sum of phasors falls within the elliptical restraint region, the system
assumes there is no fault, and uses whatever information is available for fine adjustment of the clocks.
9.1.3 REMOVAL OF DECAYING OFFSET
The inductive behavior of power system transmission lines gives rise to decaying exponential offsets during transient conditions, which could lead to errors and interfere with the determination of how well measured current fits a sinewave.
The current signals are pre-filtered using an improved digital MIMIC filter. The filter removes effectively the DC component(s) guaranteeing transient overshoot below 2% regardless of the initial magnitude and time constant of the dc component(s). The filter has significantly better filtering properties for higher frequencies as compared with a classical MIMIC filter.
This was possible without introducing any significant phase delay thanks to the high sampling rate used by the relay. The
output of the MIMIC calculation is the input for the phaselet computation. The MIMIC computation is applied to the data
samples for each phase at each terminal. The equation shown is for one phase at one terminal.
9.1.4 PHASELET COMPUTATION
Phaselets are partial sums in the computation for fitting a sine function to measured samples. Each slave computes phaselets for each phase current and transmits phaselet information to the master for conversion into phasors. Phaselets enable
the efficient computation of phasors over sample windows that are not restricted to an integer multiple of a half cycle at the
power system frequency. Determining the fundamental power system frequency component of current data samples by
minimizing the sum of the squares of the errors gives rise to the first frequency component of the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). In the case of a data window that is a multiple of a half cycle, the computation is simply sine and cosine
weighted sums of the data samples. In the case of a window that is not a multiple of a half-cycle, there is an additional correction that results from the sine and cosine functions not being orthogonal over such a window. However, the computation
can be expressed as a two by two matrix multiplication of the sine and cosine weighted sums.
Phaselets and sum of squares are computed for each phase at each terminal as follows. For the real part, we have:
4
I 1_Re_A ( k ) = ---N
N 2 1
p=0
2 ( p + 1 2 -)
i 1_f_A ( k p ) cos ------------------------------
(EQ 9.1)
For the imaginary part, we have:
I 1_Im_A ( k )
where:
4
= ---N
N 2 1
p=0
2 ( p + 1 2 )-
i 1_f_A ( k p ) sin ------------------------------
(EQ 9.2)
k is the present phaselet index,

N is the number of samples per cycle, and
p is the present sample index
The computation of phaselets and sum of squares is basically a consolidation process. The phaselet sums are converted
into stationary phasors by multiplying by a precomputed matrix. Phaselets and partial sums of squares are computed and
time stamped at each relay and communicated to the remote relay terminals, where they are added and the matrix multiplication is performed. Since the sampling clocks are synchronized, the time stamp is simply a sequence number.
9-2
GE Multilin
9.1 OVERVIEW
9.1.5 DISTURBANCE DETECTION
A disturbance detection algorithm is used to enhance security and to improve transient response. Conditions to detect a
disturbance include the magnitude of zero-sequence current, the magnitude of negative-sequence current, and changes in
positive, negative, or zero-sequence current. Normally, differential protection is performed using a full-cycle Fourier transform. Continuous use of a full-cycle Fourier means that some pre-fault data is also used for computation this may lead to
a slowdown in the operation of the differential function. To improve operating time, the window is resized to the half-cycle
Fourier once a disturbance is detected, thus removing pre-fault data.
9.1.6 FAULT DETECTION
Normally, the sum of the current phasors from all terminals is zero for each phase at every terminal. A fault is detected for a
phase when the sum of the current phasors from each terminal for that phase falls outside of a dynamic elliptical restraint
boundary for that phase. The severity of the fault is computed as follows for each phase.
The differential current is calculated as a sum of local and remote currents. The real part is expressed as:
I DIFF_RE_A = I LOC_PHASOR_RE_A + I REM1_PHASOR_RE_A + I REM2_PHASOR_RE_A
(EQ 9.3)
The imaginary part is expressed as:

I DIFF_IM_A = I LOC_PHASOR_IM_A + I REM1_PHASOR_IM_A + I REM2_PHASOR_IM_A
(EQ 9.4)
The differential current is squared for the severity equation:

2
( I DIFF_A ) = ( I DIFF_RE_A ) + ( I DIFF_IM_A )
(EQ 9.5)
The restraint current is composed from two distinctive terms: traditional and adaptive. Each relay calculates local portion of
the traditional and restraint current to be used locally and sent to remote peers for use with differential calculations. If more
than one CT are connected to the relay (breaker-and-the half applications), then a maximum of all (up to 4) currents is chosen to be processed for traditional restraint:
The current chosen is expressed as:
2
( I LOC_TRAD_A ) = max ( ( I 1_MAG_A ) , ( I 2_MAG_A ) , ( I 3_MAG_A ) , ( I 4_MAG_A ) , ( I q_MAG_A ) )
(EQ 9.6)
This current is then processed with the slope (S1 and S2) and breakpoint (BP) settings to form a traditional part of the
restraint term for the local current as follows. For two-terminal systems, we have:
2
If ( I LOC_TRAD_A ) < BP
2
2
then ( I LOC_REST_TRAD_A ) = 2 ( S 1 I LOC_TRAD_A )
(EQ 9.7)
2
else ( I LOC_REST_TRAD_A ) = 2 ( ( S 2 I LOC_TRAD_A ) ( S 2 BP ) ) + 2 ( S 1 BP )
For three-terminal systems we have

2
If ( I LOC_TRAD_A ) < BP
4
2
2
then ( I LOC_REST_TRAD_A ) = --- ( S 1 I LOC_TRAD_A )
3
4
4
2
2
2
2
else ( I LOC_REST_TRAD_A ) = --- ( ( S 2 I LOC_TRAD_A ) ( S 2 BP ) ) + --- ( S 1 BP )
3
3
(EQ 9.8)
The final restraint current sent to peers and used locally in differential calculations is as follows:
I LOC_RESTRAINT_A =
where:
( I LOC_REST_TRAD_A ) + MULT A ( I LOC_ADA_A )
(EQ 9.9)
MULTA is a multiplier that increases restraint if CT saturation is detected (see CT Saturation Detection for details);
ILOC_ADA_A is an adaptive restraint term (see Online Estimate Of Measurement Error for details)
The squared restraining current is calculated as a sum of squared local and all remote restraints:
GE Multilin
9-3
9.1 OVERVIEW
2
2
( I REST_A ) = ( I LOC_PHASOR_RESTRAINT_A ) + ( I REM1_PHASOR_RESTRAINT_A ) + ( I REM2_PHASOR_RESTRAINT_A )
(EQ 9.10)
The fault severity for each phase is determined by following equation:

2
S A = ( I DIFF_A ) ( 2P + ( I REST_A ) )
(EQ 9.11)
where P is the pickup setting.

This equation is based on the adaptive strategy and yields an elliptical restraint characteristic. The elliptical area is the
restraint region. When the adaptive portion of the restraint current is small, the restraint region shrinks. When the adaptive
portion of the restraint current increases, the restraint region grows to reflect the uncertainty of the measurement. The computed severity increases with the probability that the sum of the measured currents indicates a fault. With the exception of
Restraint, all quantities are defined in previous sections. Adaptive Restraint is a restraint multiplier, analogous to the
slope setting of traditional differential approaches, for adjusting the sensitivity of the relay.
Raising the restraint multiplier corresponds to demanding a greater confidence interval, and has the effect of decreasing
sensitivity while lowering it is equivalent to relaxing the confidence interval and increases sensitivity. Thus, the restraint
multiplier is an application adjustment that is used to achieve the desired balance between sensitivity and security. The
computed severity is zero when the operate phasor is on the elliptical boundary, is negative inside the boundary, and positive outside the boundary. Outside of the restraint boundary, the computed severity grows as the square of the fault current.
The restraint area grows as the square of the error in the measurements.
9.1.7 GROUND DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT
The line ground differential function allows sensitive ground protection for single-line to-ground faults, allowing the phase
differential element to be set higher (above load) to provide protection for multi-phase faults. The L90 ground differential
function calculates ground differential current from all terminal phase currents. The maximum phase current is used for the
restraint. The L90 is applied in dual-breaker applications to cope with significant through current at remote terminals that
may cause CT errors or saturation.
The line ground differential function uses the same CT matched and time-aligned phasors as the phase-segregated current
differential function. The operate signal is calculated for both real and imaginary parts as follows:
I OP_87G_RE = I LOC_PHASOR_RE_A + I LOC_PHASOR_RE_B + I LOC_PHASOR_RE_C + I REM1_PHASOR_RE_A + I REM1_PHASOR_RE_B
+ I REM1_PHASOR_RE_C + I REM2_PHASOR_RE_A + I REM2_PHASOR_RE_B + I REM2_PHASOR_RE_C
(EQ 9.12)
I OP_87G_IM = I LOC_PHASOR_IM_A + I LOC_PHASOR_IM_B + I LOC_PHASOR_IM_C + I REM1_PHASOR_IM_A + I REM1_PHASOR_IM_B

+ I REM1_PHASOR_IM_C + I REM2_PHASOR_IM_A + I REM2_PHASOR_IM_B + I REM2_PHASOR_IM_C
(EQ 9.13)
The terms for the second remote terminal are omitted in two-terminal applications.
The maximum through current is available locally and re-constructed from the received remote restraint based on the maximum remote restraint current shown in the previous section and as indicated below.
For two-terminal applications:
2
( I REM_RESTRAINT_A )
2
2
2
If ( I REM_REST_A ) < BP , then ( I REM_REST_A ) = ---------------------------------------------------2
2S 1
(EQ 9.14)
( I REM_RESTRAINT_A ) 2 ( S 1 BP )
- + BP 2
else ( I REM_REST_A ) = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2
2S 2
2
For three-terminal applications:
9-4
GE Multilin
9.1 OVERVIEW
2
( I REM_RESTRAINT_A )
2
2
2
If ( I REM_REST_A ) < BP , then ( I REM_REST_A ) = ---------------------------------------------------2
4
--- S
3
1
(EQ 9.15)
2 4
2
( I REM_RESTRAINT_A ) --- ( S 1 BP )
3
2
2
else ( I REM_REST_A ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + BP
2
4
--- S 2
3
The 87G restraining signal is calculated as follows:

2
( I RES_87G ) = max ( ( I LOC_REST_A ) , ( I LOC_REST_B ) , ( I LOC_REST_C ) , ( I REM1_REST_A ) , ( I REM1_REST_B ) ,

2
(EQ 9.16)
( I REM1_REST_C ) , ( I REM2_REST_A ) , ( I REM2_REST_B ) , ( I REM2_REST_C ) )

The terms for the second remote terminal are omitted in two-terminal applications.
2
The operate signal for the ground differential function, ( I OP_87G ) , is then calculated as:
2
( I OP_87G ) = ( I OP_87G_RE ) + ( I OP_87G_IM )
(EQ 9.17)
The restraint signal, ( I 87G ) , is calculated as follows for two-terminal applications:

2
( I 87G ) = 2S 87G ( I RES_87G )
(EQ 9.18)
The restraint signal, ( I 87G ) , is calculated as follows for three-terminal applications:

4
2
2
2
( I 87G ) = --- S 87G ( I RES_87G )
3
(EQ 9.19)
where S 87G is the slope setting for the ground differential function.
The ground differential element picks up if the following condition holds.
2
( ( I OP_87G ) ( 2P 87G + ( I 87G ) ) > 0 ) and ( ( I RES_87G ) < ( 3 pu ) )
(EQ 9.20)
where P 87G is the pickup setting for the ground differential function.
In other words, when the squared magnitude of the operating signal is greater than the total restraining squared signal, the
element operates. For additional security, the function is blocked if the restraining signal is high, indicating the 87LG function is not required to clear high-current faults, allowing for more sensitive settings to be used for the 87LG function.
9.1.8 CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION
Synchronization of data sampling clocks is needed in a digital differential protection scheme, because measurements must
be made at the same time. Synchronization errors show up as phase angle and transient errors in phasor measurements at
the terminals. By phase angle errors, we mean that identical currents produce phasors with different phase angles. By transient errors, we mean that when currents change at the same time, the effect is seen at different times at different measurement points. For best results, samples should be taken simultaneously at all terminals.
In the case of peer to peer architecture, synchronization is accomplished by synchronizing the clocks to each other rather
than to a master clock. Each relay compares the phase of its clock to the phase of the other clocks and compares the frequency of its clock to the power system frequency and makes appropriate adjustments. The frequency and phase tracking
algorithm keeps the measurements at all relays within a plus or minus 25 microsecond error during normal conditions for a
2 or 3 terminal system. For 4 or more terminals the error may be somewhat higher, depending on the quality of the communications channels. The algorithm is unconditionally stable. In the case of 2 and 3 terminal systems, asymmetric communications channel delay is automatically compensated for. In all cases, an estimate of phase error is computed and used to
automatically adapt the restraint region to compensate. Frequency tracking is provided that will accommodate any frequency shift normally encountered in power systems.
GE Multilin
9-5
9.1 OVERVIEW
9.1.9 FREQUENCY TRACKING AND PHASE LOCKING
Each relay has a digital clock that determines when to take data samples and which is phase synchronized to all other
clocks in the system and frequency synchronized to the power system frequency. Phase synchronization drives the relative
timing error between clocks to zero, and is needed to control the uncertainty in the phase angle of phasor measurements,
which will be held to under 26 microseconds (0.6 degrees). Frequency synchronization to the power system eliminates a
source of error in phasor measurements that arises when data samples do not exactly span one cycle.
The block diagram for clock control for a two terminal system is shown in Figure 84. Each relay makes a local estimate of
the difference between the power system frequency and the clock frequency based on the rotation of phasors. Each relay
also makes a local estimate of the time difference between its clock and the other clocks either by exchanging timing information over communications channels or from information that is in the current phasors, depending on whichever one is
more accurate at any given time. A loop filter then uses the frequency and phase angle deviation information to make fine
adjustments to the clock frequency. Frequency tracking starts if the current at one or more terminals is above 0.125 pu of
nominal; otherwise, the nominal frequency is used.
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
System
Frequency
f
+
+
+
+
Compute
Frequency
Deviation
f f1
_
f2
f1
Compute
Frequency
Deviation
f f2
Phase Frequency
Loop Filter
Phase Frequency
Loop Filter
1
+
+
+
(2 1)/2
Ping-Pong
Phase
Deviation
time stamps
Ping-Pong
Phase
Deviation
(2 1)/2
(2 1)/2
GPS
Phase
Deviation
time stamps
GPS
Phase
Deviation
(2 1)/2
GPS
Clock
GPS
Clock
831026A1.CDR
Figure 91: BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION IN A TWO-TERMINAL SYSTEM

The L90 provides sensitive digital current differential protection by computing differential current from current phasors. To
improve sensitivity, the clocks are controlling current sampling are closely synchronized via the ping-pong algorithm. However, this algorithm assumes the communication channel delay is identical in each direction. If the delays are not the same,
the error between current phasors is equal to half of the transmit-receive time difference. If the error is high enough, the
relay perceives the apparent differential current and misoperates.
For applications where the communication channel is not symmetric (for example, SONET ring), the L90 allows the use of
GPS (Global Positioning System) to compensate for the channel delay asymmetry. This feature requires a GPS receiver to
provide a GPS clock signal to the L90 IRIG-B input. With this option there are two clocks as each terminal: a local sampling
clock and a local GPS clock. The sampling clock controls data sampling while the GPS clock provides an accurate, absolute time reference used to measure channel asymmetry. The local sampling clocks are synchronized to each other in
phase and to the power system in frequency. The local GPS clocks are synchronized to GPS time using the externally provided GPS time signal.
GPS time stamp is included in the transmitted packet along with the sampling clock time stamp. Both sampling clock deviation and channel asymmetry are computed from the four time-stamps. One half of the channel asymmetry is then subtracted from the computed sampling clock deviation. The compensated deviation drives the phase and frequency lock loop
9-6
GE Multilin
9.1 OVERVIEW
(PFLL) as shown on the diagram above. If GPS time reference is lost, the channel asymmetry compensation is not
enabled, and the relay clock may start to drift and accumulate differential error. In this case, the 87L function has to be
blocked. Refer to Chapter 9: Application of Settings for samples of how to program the relay.
9.1.10 FREQUENCY DETECTION
Estimation of frequency deviation is done locally at each relay based on rotation of positive sequence current, or on rotation
of positive sequence voltage, if it is available. The counter clockwise rotation rate is proportional to the difference between
the desired clock frequency and the actual clock frequency. With the peer to peer architecture, there is redundant frequency
tracking, so it is not necessary that all terminals perform frequency detection.
Normally each relay will detect frequency deviation, but if there is no current flowing nor voltage measurement available at
a particular relay, it will not be able to detect frequency deviation. In that case, the frequency deviation input to the loop filter
is set to zero and frequency tracking is still achieved because of phase locking to the other clocks. If frequency detection is
lost at all terminals because there is no current flowing then the clocks continue to operate at the frequency present at the
time of the loss of frequency detection. Tracking will resume as soon as there is current.
The rotational rate of phasors is equal to the difference between the power system frequency and the ratio of the sampling
frequency divided by the number of samples per cycle. The correction is computed once per power system cycle at each
relay. For conciseness, we use a phasor notation:
I ( n ) = Re ( Phasor n ) + j Im ( Phasor n )
I a, k ( n ) = I ( n )
for phase a from the kth terminal at time step n
I b, k ( n ) = I ( n )
for phase b from the kth terminal at time step n
I c, k ( n ) = I ( n )
for phase c from the kth terminal at time step n
(EQ 9.21)
Each terminal computes positive sequence current:

1
j2 3
j2 3
I pos, k ( n ) = --- ( I a, k ( n ) + I b, k ( n ) e
+ I c, k ( n ) e
)
3
(EQ 9.22)
Each relay computes a quantity derived from the positive sequence current that is indicative of the amount of rotation from
one cycle to the next, by computing the product of the positive sequence current times the complex conjugate of the positive sequence current from the previous cycle:
Deviation k ( n ) = I pos, k ( n ) I pos, k ( n N )
(EQ 9.23)
The angle of the deviation phasor for each relay is proportional to the frequency deviation at that terminal. Since the clock
synchronization method maintains frequency synchronism, the frequency deviation is approximately the same for each
relay. The clock deviation frequency is computed from the deviation phasor:
1
f
tan ( Im ( Deviation ) Re ( Deviation ) )
FrequencyDeviation = ----- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------f
2
(EQ 9.24)
Note that a four quadrant arctangent can be computed by taking the imaginary and the real part of the deviation separately
for the two arguments of the four quadrant arctangent. Also note that the input to the loop filter is in radian frequency which
is two pi times the frequency in cycles per second; that is, = 2 f .
So the radian frequency deviation can be calculated simply as:
1
= f tan ( Im ( Deviation ) Re ( Deviation ) )
(EQ 9.25)
9.1.11 PHASE DETECTION

There are two separate sources of clock phase information; exchange of time stamps over the communications channels
and the current measurements themselves (although voltage measurements can be used to provide frequency information,
they cannot be used for phase detection). Current measurements can generally provide the most accurate information, but
are not always available and may contain large errors during faults or switching transients. Time stamped messages are
GE Multilin
9-7
9.1 OVERVIEW
the most reliable source of phase information but suffer from a phase offset due to a difference in the channel delays in
each direction between a pair of relays. In some cases, one or both directions may be switched to a different physical path,
leading to gross phase error.
The primary source of phase information are CPU time-tagged messages. If GPS compensation is enabled, GPS time
stamps are used to compensate for asymmetry. In all cases, frequency deviation information is also used when available.
The phase difference between a pair of clocks is computed by an exchange of time stamps. Each relay exchanges time
stamps with all other relays that can be reached.
It is not necessary to exchange stamps with every relay, and the method works even with some of the channels failed. For
each relay that a given relay can exchange time stamps with, the clock deviation is computed each time a complete set of
time stamps arrives. The net deviation is the total deviation divided by the total number of relays involved in the exchange.
For example, in the case of two terminals, each relay computes a single time deviation from time stamps, and divides the
result by two. In the case of three terminals, each relay computes two time deviations and divides the result by three. If a
channel is lost, the single deviation that remains is divided by two.
Four time stamps are needed to compute round trip delay time and phase deviation. Three stamps are included in the message in each direction. The fourth time stamp is the time when the message is received. Each time a message is received
the oldest two stamps of the four time stamps are saved to become the first two time stamps of the next outgoing message.
The third time stamp of an outgoing message is the time when the message is transmitted. A fixed time shift is allowed
between the stamp values and the actual events, provided the shift for outgoing message time stamps is the same for all
relays, and the shift incoming message time stamps is also identical.
To reduce bandwidth requirements, time stamps are spread over 3 messages. In the case of systems with 4 messages per
cycle, time stamps are sent out on three of the four messages, so a complete set is sent once per cycle. In the case of systems with 1 message per cycle, three time stamps are sent out each cycle in a single message. The transmit and receive
time stamps are based on the first message in the sequence.
One of the strengths of this approach is that it is not necessary to explicitly identify or match time stamp messages. Usually,
two of the time stamps in an outgoing message are simply taken from the last incoming message. The third time stamp is
the transmittal time. However, there are two circumstances when these time stamps are not available. One situation is
when the first message is transmitted by a given relay. The second is when the exchange is broken long enough to invalidate the last received set of time stamps (if the exchange is broken for longer than 66 ms, the time stamps from a given
clock could roll over twice, invalidating time difference computations). In either of these situations, the next outgoing set of
time stamps is a special start-up set containing transmittal time only. When such a message is received, nothing is computed from it, except the message time stamp and the received time stamp are saved for the next outgoing message (it is
neither necessary nor desirable to reset the local clock when such a message is received).
Error analysis shows that time stamp requirements are not very stringent because of the smoothing behavior of the phase
locked loop. The time stamp can be basically a sample count with enough bits to cover the worst round trip, including channel delay and processing delay. An 8 bit time stamp with 1 bit corresponding to 1/64 of a cycle will accommodate a round
trip delay of up to 4 cycles, which should be more than adequate.
The computation of round trip delay and phase offset from four time stamps is as follows:
a = Ti 2 Ti 3
b = Ti Ti 1
i = a + b
(EQ 9.26)
ab
i = -----------2
The Ts are the time stamps, with Ti the newest. Delta is the round trip delay. Theta is the clock offset, and is the correct sign
for the feedback loop. Note that the time stamps are unsigned numbers that wrap around, while a and b can be positive or
negative; i must be positive and i can be positive or negative. Some care must be taken in the arithmetic to take into
account possible roll over of any of the time stamps. If Ti 2 is greater than Ti 1, there was a roll over in the clock responsible for those two time stamps.
To correct for the roll over, subtract 256 from the round trip and subtract 128 from the phase angle. If Ti 3 is greater than Ti,
add 256 to the round trip and add 128 to the phase angle. Also, if the above equations are computed using integer values
of time stamps, a conversion to phase angle in radians is required by multiplying by / 32.
9-8
GE Multilin
9.1 OVERVIEW
Time stamp values are snapshots of the local 256 bit sample counter taken at the time of the transmission or receipt of the
first message in a time stamp sequence. This could be done either in software or hardware, provided the jitter is limited to
less than plus or minus 130 s. A fixed bias in the time stamp is acceptable, provided it is the same for all terminals.
Relay 1
Relay 2
COMMUNICATION PATH
Send T1i-3
Store T1i-3
Clocks mismatch
Send T2i-3
Store T2i-3
8.3 ms
Capture T2i-2
T2i-2
Capture T1i-2
T1i-2
8.3 ms
Send T1i-2
Send T2 i-2
8.3 ms
Store T1 i-2
Store T2 i-2
8.3 ms
T1i-1
Send T1i-1
T2 i-1
Send T2i-1
T2 i
Capture T1 i-1, T2 i
( T2 i -3, T1i -2, T1i-1, T2 i )
Calculate 2, 2.
8.3 ms
T1 i
Capture T2 i-1, T1 i
( T1 i -3, T2 i-2, T2 i -1, T1i )
Calculate 1, 1.
Speed up
Slow down
t1
t2
831729A2.CDR
Figure 92: ROUND TRIP DELAY AND CLOCK OFFSET COMPUTATION FROM TIME STAMPS
GE Multilin
9-9
9.1 OVERVIEW
9.1.12 PHASE LOCKING FILTER
Filters are used in the phase locked loop to assure stability, to reduce phase and frequency noise. This is well known technology. The primary feedback mechanism shown in the Loop Block Diagram is phase angle information through the well
known proportional plus integral (PI) filter (the Z in the diagram refers to a unit delay, and 1 / (Z 1) represents a simple
digital first order integrator). This loop is used to provide stability and zero steady state error.
A PI filter has two time parameters that determine dynamic behavior: the gain for the proportional term and the gain for the
integral. Depending on the gains, the transient behavior of the loop can be underdamped, critically damped, or over
damped. For this application, critically damped is a good choice.
This sets a constraint relating the two parameters. A second constraint is derived from the desired time constants of the
loop. By considering the effects of both phase and frequency noise in this application it can be shown that optimum behavior results with a certain proportion between phase and frequency constraints.
A secondary input is formed through the frequency deviation input of the filter. Whenever frequency deviation information is
available, it is used for this input; otherwise, the input is zero. Because frequency is the derivative of phase information, the
appropriate filter for frequency deviation is an integrator, which is combined with the integrator of the PI filter for the phase.
It is very important to combine these two integrators into a single function because it can be shown if two separate integrators are used, they can drift in opposite directions into saturation, because the loop would only drive their sum to zero.
In normal operation, frequency tracking at each terminal matches the tracking at all other terminals, because all terminals
will measure approximately the same frequency deviation. However, if there is not enough current at a terminal to compute
frequency deviation, frequency tracking at that terminal is accomplished indirectly via phase locking to other terminals. A
small phase deviation must be present for the tracking to occur.
Also shown in the loop is the clock itself, because it behaves like an integrator. The clock is implemented in hardware and
software with a crystal oscillator and a counter.
Delta frequency
KF
1/(Z1)
+
KI
Delta phi time
New frequency
KP
1/(Z1)
GPS channel
asymmetry
Clock
(sample timer)
phi
831028A1.CDR
Figure 93: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF LOOP FILTER

There are 4 gains in the filter that must be selected once and for all as part of the design of the system. The gains are determined by the time step of the integrators, and the desired time constants of the system as follows:
T repeat
T repeat
2 - , KP = ---------------KI = ----------------, KF = -------------------------2
T
T
phase
frequency
T phase
9
where:
9-10
(EQ 9.27)
Trepeat = the time between execution of the filter algorithm

Tphase = time constant for the primary phase locked loop
Tfrequency = time constant for the frequency locked loop
GE Multilin
9.1 OVERVIEW
9.1.13 MATCHING PHASELETS
An algorithm is needed to match phaselets, detect lost messages, and detect communications channel failure. Channel failure is defined by a sequence of lost messages, where the length of the sequence is a design parameter. In any case, the
sequence should be no longer than the maximum sequence number (4 cycles) in order to be able to match up messages
when the channel is assumed to be operating normally.
A channel failure can be detected by a watchdog software timer that times the interval between consecutive incoming messages. If the interval exceeds a maximum limit, channel failure is declared and the channel recovery process is initiated.
While the channel is assumed to be operating normally, it is still possible for an occasional message to be lost, in which
case fault protection is suspended for the time period that depends on that message, and is resumed on the next occasional message. A lost message is detected simply by looking at the sequence numbers of incoming messages. A lost
message will show up as a gap in the sequence.
Sequence numbers are also used to match messages for the protection computation. Whenever a complete set of current
measurements from all terminals with matching sequence numbers are available, the differential protection function is computed using that set of measurements.
9.1.14 START-UP
Initialization in our peer-to-peer architecture is done independently at each terminal. Relays can be turned on in any order
with the power system either energized or de-energized. Synchronization and protection functions are accomplished automatically whenever enough information is available.
After a relay completes other initialization tasks such as resetting of buffer pointers and determining relay settings, initial
values are computed for any state variables in the loop filters or the protection functions. The relay starts its clock at the
nominal power system frequency. Phaselet information is computed and transmitted.
Outgoing messages over a given channel are treated in the same way as during the channel recovery process. The
special start-up message is sent each time containing only a single time step value.
When incoming messages begin arriving over a channel, that channel is placed in service and the loop filters are
started up for that channel.
Whenever the total clock uncertainty is less than a fixed threshold, the phase locking filter is declared locked and differential protection is enabled.
9.1.15 HARDWARE AND COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS
The average total channel delay in each direction is not critical, provided the total round trip delay is less than 4 power system cycles. The jitter is important, and should be less than 130 s in each direction. The effect of a difference in the average delay between one direction and the other depends on the number of terminals. In the case of a 2 or 3 terminal system,
the difference is not critical, and can even vary with time. In the case of a 4 or more terminal system, variation in the difference limits the sensitivity of the system.
The allowable margin of 130 s jitter includes jitter in servicing the interrupt generated by an incoming message. For
both incoming and outgoing messages, the important parameter is the jitter between when the time stamp is read and
when the message begins to go out or to come in.
The quality of the crystal driving the clock and software sampling is not critical, because of the compensation provided
by the phase and frequency tracking algorithm, unless it is desired to perform under or over frequency protection.
From the point of view of current differential protection only, the important parameter is the rate of drift of crystal frequency, which should be less than 100 parts per million per minute.
A 6 Mhz clock with a 16-bit hardware counter is adequate, provided the method is used for achieving the 32-bit resolution that is described in this document.
An 8-bit time stamp is adequate provided time stamp messages are exchanged once per cycle.
A 4-bit message sequence number is adequate.
GE Multilin
9-11
9.1 OVERVIEW
Depending on the 87L settings, channel asymmetry (the difference in the transmitting and receiving paths channel delay)
cannot be higher than 1 to 1.5 ms if channel asymmetry compensation is not used. However, if the relay detects asymmetry
higher than 1.5 ms, the 87L DIFF CH ASYM DET FlexLogic operand is set high and the event and target are raised (if they
are enabled in the CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL menu) to provide an indication about potential danger.
9.1.16 ONLINE ESTIMATE OF MEASUREMENT ERRORS
GE's adaptive elliptical restraint characteristic is a good approximation to the cumulative effects of various sources of error
in determining phasors. Sources of error include power system noise, transients, inaccuracy in line charging current computation, current sensor gain, phase and saturation error, clock error, and asynchronous sampling. Errors that can be controlled are driven to zero by the system. For errors that cannot be controlled, all relays compute and sum the error for each
source of error for each phase. The relay computes the error caused by power system noise, CT saturation, harmonics,
and transients. These errors arise because power system currents are not always exactly sinusoidal. The intensity of these
errors varies with time; for example, growing during fault conditions, switching operations, or load variations. The system
treats these errors as a Gaussian distribution in the real and in the imaginary part of each phasor, with a standard deviation
that is estimated from the sum of the squares of the differences between the data samples and the sine function that is
used to fit them. This error has a spectrum of frequencies. Current transformer saturation is included with noise and transient error. The error for noise, harmonics, transients, and current transformer saturation is computed as follows. First, the
sum of the squares of the errors in the data samples is computed from the sum of squares information for the present
phaselet:
SumSquares 1_A ( k )
4
= ---N
N 2 1
( i 1_f_A ( k p ) )
(EQ 9.28)
p=0
Then fundamental magnitude is computed as follows for the same phaselet:

I 1_MAG_A =
( I 1_RE_A ) + ( I 1_IM_A )
(EQ 9.29)
Finally, the local adaptive restraint term is computed as follows, for each local current:
4
2
2
( I 1_ADA_A ) = ---- ( SumSquares 1_A ( k ) ( I 1_MAG_A ) )
N
(EQ 9.30)
Another source of the measurement errors is clock synchronization error, resulting in a clock uncertainty term. The L90
algorithm accounts for two terms of synchronization error corresponding to:
Raw clock deviation computed from time stamps. There are several effects that cause it to not track exactly. First, the
ping-pong algorithm inherently produces slightly different estimates of clock deviation at each terminal. Second,
because the transmission of time stamps is spread out over several packets, the clock deviation estimate is not up to
date with other information it is combined with. Channel asymmetry also contributes to this term. The clock deviation
computation is indicated in equation 8.15 as i. If 2 channels are used, clock deviation is computed for both channels
and then average of absolute values is computed. If GPS compensation is used, then GPS clock compensation is subtracted from the clock deviation.
Startup error. This term is used to estimate the initial startup transient of PFLLs. During startup conditions, a decaying
exponential is computed to simulate envelope of the error during startup
The clock uncertainty is expressed as:

clock_unc = clock_dev + start_up_error
(EQ 9.31)
Eventually, the local clock error is computed as:

2
( clock_unc )
2
2
CLOCK A = ---------------------------------- ( ( I LOC_RE_A ) + ( I LOC_IM_A ) )
9
(EQ 9.32)
The local squared adaptive restraint is computed from all local current sources (1 to 4) and is obtained as follows:
2
( I LOC_ADA_A ) = 18 ( ( I 1_ADA_A ) + ( I 2_ADA_A ) + ( I 3_ADA_A ) + ( I 4_ADA_A ) + ( I q_ADA_A ) + CLOCK A )
9-12
(EQ 9.33)
GE Multilin
9.1 OVERVIEW
9.1.17 CT SATURATION DETECTION
Current differential protection is inherently dependent on adequate CT performance at all terminals of the protected line,
especially during external faults. CT saturation, particularly when it happens at only one terminal of the line, introduces a
spurious differential current that may cause the differential protection to misoperate.
The L90 applies a dedicated mechanism to cope with CT saturation and ensure security of protection for external faults.
The relay dynamically increases the weight of the square of errors (the so-called sigma) portion in the total restraint quantity, but for external faults only. The following logic is applied:
First, the terminal currents are compared against a threshold of 3 pu to detect overcurrent conditions that may be
caused by a fault and may lead to CT saturation.
For all the terminal currents that are above the 3 pu level, the relative angle difference is calculated. If all three terminals see significant current, then all three pairs (1, 2), (2, 3), and (1, 3) are considered and the maximum angle difference is used in further calculations.
Depending on the angle difference between the terminal currents, the value of sigma used for the adaptive restraint
current is increased by the multiple factor of 1, 5, or 2.5 to 5 as shown below. As seen from the figure, a factor of 1 is
used for internal faults, and a factor of 2.5 to 5 is used for external faults. This allows the relay to be simultaneously
sensitive for internal faults and robust for external faults with a possible CT saturation.
If more than one CT is connected to the relay (breaker-and-the half applications), the CT saturation mechanism is executed
between the maximum local current against the sum of all others, then between the maximum local and remote currents to
select the secure multiplier MULT. A Maximum of two (local and remote) is selected and then applied to adaptive restraint.
arg(I1/I2)=180 degrees
(external fault)
MULT=5
MULT = abs(arg(I1/I2)) x 5/180
MULT=1
MULT=1
arg(I1/I2)= 0 degrees
(internall fault)
831744A2.CDR
Figure 94: CT SATURATION ADAPTIVE RESTRAINT MULTIPLIER

9.1.18 CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION
The basic premise for the operation of differential protection schemes in general, and of the L90 line differential element in
particular, is that the sum of the currents entering the protected zone is zero. In the case of a power system transmission
line, this is not entirely true because of the capacitive charging current of the line. For short transmission lines the charging
current is a small factor and can therefore be treated as an unknown error. In this application the L90 can be deployed without voltage sensors and the line charging current is included as a constant term in the total variance, increasing the differential restraint current. For long transmission lines the charging current is a significant factor, and should be computed to
provide increased sensitivity to fault current.
Compensation for charging current requires the voltage at the terminals be supplied to the relays. The algorithm calculates
C dv dt for each phase, which is then subtracted from the measured currents at both ends of the line. This is a simple
approach that provides adequate compensation of the capacitive current at the fundamental power system frequency. Travelling waves on the transmission line are not compensated for, and contribute to restraint by increasing the measurement of
errors in the data set.
GE Multilin
9-13
9.1 OVERVIEW
The underlying single phase model for compensation for a two and three terminal system are shown below.
Ir
Is
Vs
Vr
L
C/2
C/2
831793A1.CDR
Figure 95: 2-TERMINAL TRANSMISSION LINE SINGLE PHASE MODEL FOR COMPENSATION
C/3
C/3
C/3
831019A1.CDR
Figure 96: 3-TERMINAL TRANSMISSION LINE SINGLE PHASE MODEL FOR COMPENSATION
Apportioning the total capacitance among the terminals is not critical for compensating the fundamental power system frequency charging current as long as the total capacitance is correct. Compensation at other frequencies will be approximate.
If the VTs are connected in wye, the compensation is accurate for both balanced conditions (i.e. all positive, negative and
zero sequence components of the charging current are compensated). If the VTs are connected in delta, the compensation
is accurate for positive and negative sequence components of the charging current. Since the zero sequence voltage is not
available, the L90 cannot compensate for the zero sequence current.
The compensation scheme continues to work with the breakers open, provided the voltages are measured on the line side
of the breakers.
For very long lines, the distributed nature of the line leads to the classical transmission line equations which can be solved
for voltage and current profiles along the line. What is needed for the compensation model is the effective positive and zero
sequence capacitance seen at the line terminals.
Finally, in some applications the effect of shunt reactors needs to be taken into account. With very long lines shunt reactors
may be installed to provide some of the charging current required by the line. This reduces the amount of charging current
flowing into the line. In this application, the setting for the line capacitance should be the residual capacitance remaining
after subtracting the shunt inductive reactance from the total capacitive reactance at the power system frequency.
9.1.19 DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT CHARACTERISTICS
The differential element is completely dependent on receiving data from the relay at the remote end of the line, therefore,
upon startup, the differential element is disabled until the time synchronization system has aligned both relays to a common
time base. After synchronization is achieved, the differential is enabled. Should the communications channel delay time
increase, such as caused by path switching in a SONET system or failure of the communications power supply, the relay
will act as outlined in the next section.
The L90 incorporates an adaptive differential algorithm based on the traditional percent differential principle. In the traditional percent differential scheme, the operating parameter is based on the phasor sum of currents in the zone and the
restraint parameter is based on the scalar (or average scalar) sum of the currents in the protected zone - when the operating parameter divided by the restraint parameter is above the slope setting, the relay will operate. During an external fault,
the operating parameter is relatively small compared to the restraint parameter, whereas for an internal fault, the operating
parameter is relatively large compared to the restraint parameter. Because the traditional scheme is not adaptive, the element settings must allow for the maximum amount of error anticipated during an out-of-zone fault, when CT errors may be
high and/or CT saturation may be experienced.
9-14
GE Multilin
9.1 OVERVIEW
The major difference between the L90 differential scheme and a percent differential scheme is the use of an estimate of
errors in the input currents to increase the restraint parameter during faults, permitting the use of more sensitive settings
than those used in the traditional scheme. The inclusion of the adaptive feature in the scheme produces element characteristic equations that appear to be different from the traditional scheme, but the differences are minimal during system
steady-state conditions. The element equations are shown in the Operating condition calculations section.
9.1.20 RELAY SYNCHRONIZATION
On startup of the relays, the channel status will be checked first. If channel status is OK, all relays will send a special
startup message and the synchronization process will be initiated. It will take about 5 to 7 seconds to declare PFLL status
as OK and to start performing current differential calculations. If one of the relays was powered off during the operation, the
synchronization process will restart from the beginning. Relays tolerate channel delay (resulting sometimes in step change
in communication paths) or interruptions up to four power cycles round trip time (about 66 ms at 60 Hz) without any deterioration in performance. If communications are interrupted for more than four cycles, the following applies:
In two-terminal mode:
1.
With second redundant channel, relays will not lose functionality at all if second channel is live.
2.
With one channel only, relays have a five second time window. If the channel is restored within this time, it takes about
two to three power cycles of valid PFLL calculations (and if estimated error is still within margin) to declare that PFLL is
OK. If the channel is restored later than 5 seconds, PFLL at both relays will be declared as failed and the re-synchronization process will be initiated (about 5 to 7 seconds) after channel status becomes OK.
In three-terminal mode:
1.
If one of the channels fails, the configuration reverts from master-master to master-slave where the master relay has
both channels live. The master relay PFLL keeps the two slave relays in synchronization, and therefore there is no
time limit for functionality. The PFLL of the slave relays will be suspended (that is, the 87L function will not be performed at these relays but they can still trip via DTT from the master relay) until the channel is restored. If the estimated error is within margin upon channel restoration and after two to three power cycles of valid PFLL calculations,
the PFLL will be declared as OK and the configuration will revert back to master-master.
2.
If 2 channels fail, PFLL at all relays will be declared as failed and when the channels are back into service, the re-synchronization process will be initiated (about 5 to 7 seconds) after channel status becomes OK.
Depending on the system configuration (number of terminals and channels), the 87L function operability depends on the
status of channel(s), status of synchronization, and status of channel(s) ID validation. All these states are available as FlexLogic operands, for viewing in actual values, logged in the event recorder (if events are enabled in 87L menu), and also
trigger targets (if targets are enabled in the 87L function). These FlexLogic operands can to be used to trigger alarms,
illuminate LEDs, and be captured in oscillography.
However, the 87L BLOCKED FlexLogic operand reflects whether the local current differential function is blocked due to
communications or settings problems. The state of this operand is based on the combination of conditions outlined above.
As such, it is recommended that it be used to enable backup protection if 87L is not available.
The 87L BLOCKED operand is set when the 87L function is enabled and any of the following three conditions apply:
1.
At least one channel failed on a two or three-terminal single-channel system, or both channels failed on a two-terminal
two-channel system.
2.
PFFL has failed or is suspended,
3.
A channel ID failure has been detected on at least one channel in a two-terminal single-channel system or in a threeterminal system, or a channel ID failure has been detected on both channels in a two-terminal dual-channel system.
All L90 communications alarms can be divided by major and minor alarms.
The major alarms are CHANNEL FAIL, PFLL FAIL, and CHANNEL ID FAIL. The relay is blocked automatically if any of these
conditions occur. Therefore, there is no need to assign these operands to a current differential block setting.
The minor alarms are CRC FAIL and LOST PACKET, which are indicators of a poor or noisy communications channel. If the
relay recognizes that a packet is lost or corrupted, the 87L feature is not processed at that protection pass. Instead, it waits
for the next valid packet.
GE Multilin
9-15

9.2OPERATING CONDITION CHARACTERISTICS
9.2.1 DESCRIPTION
Characteristics of differential elements can be shown in the complex plane. The operating characteristics of the L90 are
fundamentally dependant on the relative ratios of the local and remote current phasor magnitudes and the angles of I loc /
I rem as shown in the Restraint Characteristics figure.
The main factors affecting the trip-restraint decisions are:
1.
Difference in angles (+ real represents pure internal fault when currents are essentially in phase, real represents
external fault when currents are 180 apart).
2.
The magnitude of remote current.
3.
The magnitude of the local current.
4.
Dynamically estimated errors in calculations.
5.
Settings.
The following figure also shows the relay's capability to handle week-infeed conditions by increasing the restraint ellipse
when the remote current is relatively small (1.5 pu). Therefore, uncertainty is greater when compared with higher remote
currents (3 pu). The characteristic shown is also dependant on settings. The second graph shows how the relay's triprestraint calculation is made with respect to the variation in angle difference between local and remote currents. The characteristic for 3 terminal mode is similar where both remote currents are combined together.
9-16
GE Multilin
GE Multilin
-4

RESTRAINT
-2
-1
-3
-2
-1
2 - For Irem =3 pu and angle 0-360 with respect to Iloc

o
Irem
(Angle between Iloc and Irem is

ideally 0o for internal fault)
Iloc
OPERATE
Trip point (angle between

Iloc and Irem 0o)
Real
Iloc
Irem
Boundary point (angle between Iloc and Irem about 140o)
1 - For Irem =1.5 pu and angle 0-360o with respect to Iloc
-3
Restraint point (angle between

Iloc and Irem 180o)
Boundary point (angle between Iloc and Irem about 130o)
Imaginary
Iloc
Irem
-180
-150
-120
-90
-60
-30
30
60
90
120
150
180
RESTRAINT
RESTRAINT
Iloc - Irem
OPERATE
831726A1.CDR
Iloc
Irem
Figure 97: RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTICS
9-17
9.2.2 TRIP DECISION EXAMPLE
Assume the following settings:
Slope 1: S1 = 10%
Slope 2: S2 = 10%
Breakpoint: BP = 5 pu secondary
Pickup: P = 0.5 pu
Assume the following local and remote currents:
Local current: Ilocal = 4.0 pu 0
Remote current: Iremote= 0.8 pu 180
The assumed condition is a radial line with a high resistance fault, with the source at the local end only, and through a resistive load current. The operating current is:
2
I op = I_L + I_R
= 4.0 0 + 0.8 180
= 10.24
(EQ 9.34)
Since the current at both ends is less than the breakpoint value of 5.0, the equation for two-terminal mode is used to calculate restraint as follows.
2
I Rest = ( 2 S 1 I_L ) + ( 2 S 1 I_R ) + 2P +

2
= ( 2 ( 0.1 ) 4 ) + ( 2 ( 0.1 ) 0.8 ) + 2 ( 0.5 ) + 0

= 0.8328
(EQ 9.35)
where = 0, assuming a pure sine wave.

9.2.3 TRIP DECISION TEST
The trip condition is shown below.
2
I Op
10.24
----------- > 1 ------------------ = 12.3 > 1 Trip
2
0.8328
I Rest
(EQ 9.36)
The use of the CURRENT DIFF PICKUP, CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1, CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 2, and CURRENT DIFF BREAK PT
settings are discussed in the Current differential section of chapter 5.
The following figure shows how the L90 settings affect the restraint characteristics. The local and remote currents are 180
apart, which represents an external fault. The breakpoint between the two slopes indicates the point where the restraint
area is becoming wider to override uncertainties from CT saturation, fault noise, harmonics, etc. Increasing the slope percentage increases the width of the restraint area.
9-18
GE Multilin
Iloc pu
20
OPERATE
16
RESTRAINT
BP=8, P=2, S1=30%, S2=50%
BP=4, P=1, S1=30%, S2=50%
10
BP=4, P=1, S1=20%, S2=40%
OPERATE
Irem pu
0
4
12
16
20
0
831725A1.CDR
Figure 98: SETTINGS IMPACT ON RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC
GE Multilin
9-19
9.3SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING
9.3.1 OVERVIEW
a) INTRODUCTION
Single pole operations make use of many features of the relay. At the minimum, the trip output, recloser, breaker control,
open pole detector, and phase selector must be fully programmed and in service; and either protection elements or digital
inputs representing fault detection must be available for successful operation. When single pole trip-and-reclose is required
overall control within the relay is performed by the trip output element. This element includes interfaces with pilot aided
schemes, the line pickup, breaker control, and breaker failure elements.
Single pole operations are based on use of the phase selector to identify the type of the fault, to eliminate incorrect fault
identification that can be made by distance elements in some circumstances and to provide trip initiation from elements that
are not capable of any fault type identification, such as high-set negative-sequence directional overcurrent element. The
scheme is also designed to make use of the advantages provided by communications channels with multiple-bit capacities
for fault identification.
Phase selector
Reset
output
Volts
and
amps
Fault locator
Block specific protection elements

Volts
and
amps
Trip output
Setting
Inputs
Setting
Single-pole
trip request
Single-pole
trip
Open
pole
detector
Pilotaided
schemes
Setting
Setting
Inputs
Outputs
Trip
A or B or C
Initiate breaker
failure
Single-pole
operation
Communications
channels
AG
BG
CG
Breaker
1 and 2
pole state
SLG
faulted
phase
Setting
Breaker
1 and 2
out-of-service
Permission
Setting
Inputs
Reset
Breaker
control
Outputs
Setting
Three-pole
trip
Setting
Force
three-oole
operation
CLOSE 1
CLOSE 2
CLOSE 1
CLOSE 2
Line pickup
Multi-phase
Void
Three-pole
trip
request
Breaker 1 and 2
Protection
elements
Three-pole
operation
Operator
Setting
AR FORCE 3-P
Reclose request
Trip
AR Initiate 3-Pole
Initiate
Initiate
Recloser
Multi-phase
837026A5.CDR
Figure 99: SINGLE-POLE OPERATION
The trip output element receives requests for single and three pole trips and three pole reclose initiation, which it then processes to generate outputs that are used to:
Determine whether a single or three pole operation should be performed.
Initiate tripping of breaker poles A, B and C, either individually or as a group.
Initiate breaker failure protection for phases A, B and C, either individually or as a group.
Notify the open pole detector when a single pole operation is imminent.
Initiate either single or three pole reclosing.
9-20
GE Multilin
Notify the phase selector when a trip operation is imminent.
When notified that a single pole operation has been initiated open pole detector will:
Initiate blocking of protection elements that could potentially maloperate when a breaker pole is open.
Instruct the phase selector to de-assert all outputs, as an open pole invalidates calculations.
It is assumed for this discussion that the relay features that are shown on Single pole operation diagram above have all
been programmed for the application and are in service. The description begins with line breakers open at both the local
and remote ends, and the operation of the scheme is described in chronological order.
Because the line is de-energized the line pickup element is armed. The recloser is presently enabled. An operator requests
that breaker control close the breaker, and it operates output relays to close breaker poles A, B and C. This operator manual close request is also forwarded from breaker control to recloser, which becomes disabled, de-asserting its Enabled
output. This output is transferred to trip output, where it converts any input request for a single pole operation into a threepole operation. At the recloser, the AR1 BLK TIME @ MAN CLOSE timer is started.
The breaker closes and status monitoring contacts on the breaker poles change state; the new breaker pole states are
reported to breaker control, which in turn transfers these states to the recloser, trip output, breaker failure and open pole
detector. Because a fault is not detected the AR1 BLK TIME @ MAN CLOSE times out and the recloser is enabled, which
asserts the Enabled output, informing the trip output element that single pole trip operations are now permitted. When normal voltage appears on the line the line pickup element is disarmed. As the local line breaker has not tripped the operator
closes the breaker at the remote end of the line, placing the line in service.
Several scenarios are considered below.
b) SLG FAULT
At this moment the request to trip is placed for the trip output. As the fault is recognized as an AG fault, the TRIP PHASE A
operand is asserted by the trip output. This signal is passed to the breaker control scheme and results in tripping pole A of
the breaker.
Simultaneously with the TRIP PHASE A operand, the TRIP 1-POLE operand is asserted. This operand activates the open pole
detector. The latter detector responds to the TRIP PHASE A signal by declaring phase A open by asserting OPEN POLE OP
A (even before it is actually opened). The TRIP PHASE A signal resets only after the breaker actually operates as indicated
by its auxiliary contact. At this moment the open pole detector responds to the breaker position and continues to indicate
phase A opened. This indication results in establishing blocking signals for distance elements (OPEN POLE BLK AB, OPEN
POLE BLK CA operands are asserted). If neutral and negative-sequence overcurrent elements are mapped into the trip output to trigger single-pole tripping, they must be blocked with the OPEN POLE BLK N operand, specifically provided for this
purpose. The OPEN POLE BLK N operand must be assigned through the block setting of the overcurrent element. The two
latter operands block phase distance AB and CA elements, respectively (all zones); the OPEN POLE A OP blocks the
ground distance AG elements (all zones). As a result, the Z1 OP and Z2 PKP operands that were picked-up reset immediately. The following distance elements remain operational guarding the line against evolving faults: BG, CG and BC.
The TRIP 1-POLE operand initiates automatically a single-pole autoreclose. The autoreclose is started and asserts the AR
RIP operand. This operand keeps blocking the phase selector so that it does not respond to any subsequent events. At the
same time the operand removes zero-sequence directional supervision from ground distance zones 2 and 3 so that they
could respond to a single-line-to-ground fault during open pole conditions.
The AR FORCE 3-P TRIP operand is asserted 1.25 cycles following autoreclose initiation. This operand acts as an enabler
for any existing trip request. In this case none of the protection elements is picked up at this time, therefore no more trips
are initiated.
When the recloser dead time interval is complete it signals the breaker control element to close the breaker. The breaker
control element operates output relays to close the breaker.
When pole A of the breaker closes this new status is reported to the breaker control element, which transfers this data to
the breaker failure, autorecloser, open pole detector and trip output elements. The response at breaker failure is dependent
on the programming of that element. The response at the autorecloser is not relevant to this discussion. At the open pole
detector, the blocking signals to protection elements are de-asserted.
If the fault was transient the reset time would expire at the autorecloser and the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP and RIP outputs would
be de-asserted, returning all features to the state described at the beginning of this description.
If the fault was permanent appropriate protection elements would detect it and place a trip request for the trip output element. As the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP is still asserted, the request is executed as a three-pole trip.
GE Multilin
9-21
The response of the system from this point is as described above for the second trip, except the autorecloser will go to lockout upon the next initiation (depending on the number of shots programmed).
c) SLG FAULT EVOLVING INTO LLG
When an AG fault occurs the events unfold initially as in the previous example. If the fault evolves quickly, the phase selector will change its initial assessment from AG to ABG fault and when the trip request is placed either by the zone 1 or the
POTT scheme, a three-pole trip will be initiated. If this is the case, all three TRIP PHASE A, B and C operands will be
asserted. The command is passed to the breaker control element and results in a three-pole trip. At the same time the
recloser is initiated as per settings of the trip output. As the TRIP 3-POLE operand is asserted (not the TRIP 1-POLE operand)
the open pole is not activated. Because the AR RIP in progress is asserted, the phase selector is blocked as well.
If the fault evolves slowly, the sequence is different: The relay trips phase A as in the previous example. The phase selector
resets, the open pole detector is activated and forces the zone 1 and zone 2 AG, AB, CA and negative-sequence overcurrent elements to reset. If the zone 1 BG element picks up, or the zone 2 BG element picks up resulting in operation of the
POTT scheme, no trip command will be issued until the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP is asserted. This happens 1.25 cycles after the
first trip. If at this time or any time later a request for trip is placed (due to an evolving fault), a three-pole trip is initiated. The
TRIP 1-POLE operand is de-asserted by the TRIP 3-POLE operand, resetting the open pole detector. Shortly all three-poles
are opened.
When the dead time expires, the recloser signals the breaker control to close the breaker. At this time all the protection elements are operational, as the open pole detector is not blocking any elements. If the line-side VTs are used, the line pickup
element is armed as well. If there is a fault on the line, these elements will pickup the fault and issue next request for trip.
This request results in three-pole trip as the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP is still asserted.
The response of the system from this point is as described above for the second trip, except the recloser will go to lockout
upon the next initiation (depending on the number of shots programmed).
9-22
GE Multilin

9.3.2 PHASE SELECTION
The L90 uses phase relations between current symmetrical components for phase selection. First, the algorithm validates if
there is enough zero-sequence, positive-sequence, and negative-sequence currents for reliable analysis. The comparison
is adaptive; that is, the magnitudes of the three symmetrical components used mutually as restraints confirm if a given component is large enough to be used for phase selection. Once the current magnitudes are validated, the algorithm analyzes
phase relations between the negative-sequence and positive-sequence currents and negative-sequence and zerosequence currents (when applicable) as illustrated below.
AG
I2F
BC,
BCG
CG,
ABG
AB,
ABG
BG
I2F
AG,
BCG
I1F
CG
CA,
CAG
I0F
BG,
CAG
837725A1.CDR
Figure 910: PHASE SELECTION PRINCIPLE (ABC PHASE ROTATION)

Due to dual comparisons, the algorithm is very secure. For increased accuracy and to facilitate operation in weak systems,
the pre-fault components are removed from the analyzed currents. The algorithm is very fast and ensures proper phase
selection before any of the correctly set protection elements operates.
Under unusual circumstances such as weak-infeed conditions with the zero-sequence current dominating during any
ground fault, or during cross-country faults, the current-based phase selector may not recognize any of the known fault pattern. If this is the case, voltages are used for phase selection. The voltage algorithm is the same as the current-based algorithm; for example, phase angles between the zero-sequence, negative-sequence, and positive-sequence voltages are
used. The pre-fault values are subtracted prior to any calculations.
The pre-fault quantities are captured and the calculations start when the disturbance detector (50DD) operates. When an
open pole is declared, the phase selector resets all its outputs operands and ignores any subsequent operations of the disturbance detector.
The phase selector runs continuously. When there is no disturbance in the power system, and the disturbance detector
(50DD) from the source assigned as the DISTANCE SOURCE is reset, then the PHASE SELECT VOID FlexLogic operand is
set and all other phase selector operands are reset. All current and voltage sequence components are memorized and continuously updated.
When the disturbance detector (50DD) operates, memory stops being updated and retains two cycles of old current and
voltage values. First, purely fault components of current and voltage are calculated by removing the pre-fault (memory)
quantities from presently calculated values. A series of conditions are checked with respect to magnitudes and phase
angles of current and voltage symmetrical components in order to detect the fault type. Secondly, currents are used to identify the fault type (AG, BG, CG, AB, BC, CA, ABG, BCG or CAG) according to the Phase selection principle figure above. If
the currents fail to identify the fault type, and voltages are available, then voltages are used. If any of the above types is
determined, then the corresponding FlexLogic operand below is asserted.
GE Multilin
9-23
OPERAND
DESCRIPTION
PHASE SELECT AG
Asserted when a phase A to ground fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT BG
Asserted when a phase B to ground fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT CG
Asserted when a phase C to ground fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT AB
Asserted when a phase A to B fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT BC
Asserted when a phase B to C fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT CA
Asserted when a phase C to A fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT ABG
Asserted when a phase A to B to ground fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT BCG
Asserted when a phase B to C to ground fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT CAG
Asserted when a phase C to A to ground fault is detected.
If none of the fault types indicated above is determined, then three-phase fault conditions are checked to detect the presence of positive-sequence current and the absence of both zero-sequence and negative-sequence current. If these conditions are met, then the PHASE SELECT 3P FlexLogic operand is asserted; otherwise, the PHASE SELECT VOID operand is
asserted, indicating that the phase selector failed to identify the fault type.
Finally, the states of the following additional FlexLogic operands are determined.
OPERAND
DESCRIPTION
PHASE SELECT SLG
Asserted if any of PHASE SELECT AG, PHASE SELECT BG, or PHASE SELECT CG
operands is active.
Asserted if neither the PHASE SELECT SLG nor PHASE SELECT VOID operands are being
asserted.
The phase selector operands are reset cycle after the OPEN POLE OP FlexLogic operand is asserted or 500 ms after
the disturbance detector (50DD) initially operated. In the reset state, all phase selector FlexLogic operands are reset until
reset conditions are removed and the phase selector is ready for the next operation.
DELAY
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0.5 cycles
OPEN POLE OP
RESET
DELAY
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SRCn 50DD OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DELAY
4 cycles
AND
500 ms
PHASE SELECT AG
START
PHASE SELECT BG
PHASE SELECT CG
PHASE SELECTOR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SRCn VT FUSE FAIL OP
SETTING
DISTANCE SOURCE:
PHASE SELECT AB
PHASE SELECT BC
PHASE SELECT CA
PHASE SELECT ABG
PHASE SELECT BCG
PHASE SELECT CAG
PHASE SELECT 3P
I_0
PHASE SELECT SLG
I_1
I_2
PHASE SELECT VOID
V_0
V_1
V_2
837027A5.CDR
Figure 911: PHASE SELECTOR LOGIC
9-24
GE Multilin
9.4 FAULT LOCATOR
9.4FAULT LOCATOR
9.4.1 OVERVIEW
The L90 uses two methods to determine fault type and fault location
A multi-ended fault location algorithm using synchronized currents and voltage measurements from all line terminals.
A single-ended method based on the measurement from local terminal relay only during channel failures.
9.4.2 MULTI-ENDED FAULT LOCATOR
a) DESCRIPTION
The multi-ended fault location method is based on synchronized voltage and current measurements at all ends of the transmission line. This method makes it possible to compute the fault location without any assumptions or approximations. A
single composite voltage and single composite current signal represent voltage and current measurements at any line terminal. These composite voltage and current signals are non-zero regardless of the fault type. The composite voltage at the
fault can be computed from each end of the line by subtracting the line drop to the fault from the voltage at that end.
The multi-ended algorithm executes separately on each terminal. All terminals compute the same fault location, since they
use the same equations applied to the same set of data. The algorithm is executed for both two-terminal and three-terminal
applications. The three-terminal algorithm executes at each terminal that has information from all three terminals. If there is
a communications failure on one channel, it will affect only one of the three terminals, since there are fault phasors from all
three terminals to compute the fault location. The three-terminal algorithm has two parts: one part that determines which
line segment is faulted, and another part that locates the fault on the faulted segment. Each terminal may report a slightly
different fault resistance. The algorithm achieves greater accuracy by removing the line charging current.
The fault location algorithm does not need to explicitly determine the composite voltage at the fault. Instead, it eliminates
the fault voltage from the equations for fault location by using other information instead.
For the purpose of fault location, the ABC quantities are represented by a single composite signal using the following base
equation.
1
S ( X ) = --- ( 2S ( A ) bS ( B ) b S ( C ) )
3
(EQ 9.37)
In the above equation, b is a complex number defined as:

b = 1 + j tan ( )
(EQ 9.38)
b = 1 j tan ( )
(EQ 9.39)
and b* is the conjugate of b, or mathematically:
where = 45.
The expanded Clarke transform shown above is selected to yield non-zero operating signals under balanced and unbalanced conditions. This allows reducing the amount of exchanged information between devices and avoiding phase selection. The above defining equation applies to the wye connection of signals under ABC phase rotation. For delta connections
and ACB rotation, there is a small modification in this equation.
The following composite signals in (in per-unit values) are obtained from base equation shown above, taking into account
system phase rotation, CT nominal values, and VT nominal values and connections as set under the phase VT bank of the
first 87L source.
I LOC ( A, B, C ) I LOC ( X ), I REM1 ( A, B, C ) I REM1 ( X ), I REM2 ( A, B, C ) I REM2 ( X )
V LOC ( A, B, C ) V LOC ( X )
(EQ 9.40)
Composite currents are calculated locally at each terminal locally. Composite voltage is continuously transmitted to remote
terminals, where upon receipt it is labeled as VREM1(X) for channel 1 and VREM2(X) for channel 2. The transmitted composite
voltage signal is supervised by a VT fuse fail condition of the first source of 87L function. During VT fuse fail conditions,
transmitted voltage is substituted with zero, signaling to remote peers that multi-ended fault location should be inhibited.
The impedance for fault location calculation (in per-unit values) is calculated as follows.
GE Multilin
9-25
9.4 FAULT LOCATOR
CT sec
Z pu = Z sec --------------- for wye-connected VTs
VT sec
Z pu =
CT sec
3 Z sec --------------- for delta-connected VTs
VT sec
(EQ 9.41)
Consequently, the positive-sequence line secondary impedance entered under in the fault locator menu yields following
signals used for calculation. For two-terminal applications, we have:
Z 1LINE Z
L = corresponding line length
(EQ 9.42)
For three-terminal applications, we have:

Z 1LINE Z LOC T
Z REM1 TAP Z REM1 T
(EQ 9.43)
Z REM2 TAP Z REM2 T

L LOC T, L REM1 T, L REM2 T = corresponding lengths of the three line segments
For two-terminal applications, fault calculations can be executed directly using the signals above. For three-terminal applications, it is first necessary to define the faulted line segment. This is done by estimating the tap voltage as seen from all
three line terminals.
V T ( LOC ) = V LOC ( X ) Z LOC T I LOC ( X )
V T ( REM1 ) = V REM1 ( X ) Z REM1 T I REM1 ( X )
(EQ 9.44)
V T ( REM2 ) = V REM2 ( X ) Z REM2 T I REM2 ( X )

The fault current is calculated as follows.
I FLT ( X ) = I LOC ( X ) + I REM1 ( X ) + I REM2 ( X )
(EQ 9.45)
The faulted segment can be found by recognizing that the sum of the voltage drops around a loop through the unfaulted
segments is zero. The residual voltage phasors are computed for each loop. The loop with the lowest residual voltage contains the two unfaulted segments. Therefore, the differences between each pair of estimates is calculated as follows.
V LOC REM1 = V T ( LOC ) V T ( REM1 )
V LOC REM2 = V T ( LOC ) V T ( REM2 )
(EQ 9.46)
V REM1 REM2 = V T ( REM1 ) V T ( REM2 )

The faulted segment is selected as follows.
If V LOC REM1 = min ( V LOC REM1, V LOC REM2, V REM1 REM2 )
and V LOC REM1 < max ( 0.025 ( V T ( LOC ) + V T ( REM1 ) ), 0.01 pu )
(EQ 9.47)
then the fault is between the tap and remote terminal 2

Where:
L = L REM2 T
Z = Z REM2 T
1
V TAP ( X ) = --- ( V T ( LOC ) + V T ( REM1 ) )
2
I TAP ( X ) = I LOC ( X ) + I REM1 ( X )
(EQ 9.48)
V 1 ( X ) = V REM2 ( X )
A similar set of equations is applied to determine whether the fault is between the tap and the local terminal or between the
tap and remote terminal 1.
Next, having all the data prepared, the following universal equation is used to calculate the fault location.
9-26
GE Multilin
9.4 FAULT LOCATOR
D pu
1 ( X ) V TAP ( X )
V
--------------------------------------- + I TAP ( X )
Z
----------------------------------------------------------------
= Re
I
FLT ( X )
(EQ 9.49)
D units = D pu L
For two-terminal applications, the following equalities hold for the above equation.
V 1 ( X ) = V LOC ( X )
V TAP ( X ) = V REM1 ( X )
(EQ 9.50)
I TAP ( X ) = I REM1 ( X )
I FLT ( X ) = I LOC ( X ) + I REM1 ( X )
For two-terminal applications, the distance is reported from the local relay. In three-terminal applications, the distance is
reported from the terminal of a given line segment.
Phase rotation must be the same at all line terminals for correct operation of the multi-ended fault locator.
NOTE
b) EXAMPLE
Consider a three-terminal, 500 kV application with no charging current compensation or zero-sequence removal. The
phase rotation is ABC and the following CT and VT data is known.
Table 91: CT AND VT APPLICATION DATA FOR MULTI-ENDED EXAMPLE
VALUE
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
CT primary
1200 A
1000 A
RELAY 3
1600 A
CT secondary
5A
1A
5A
VT connection
wye
delta
wye
VT secondary
57.73 V
83.33 V
57.73 V
VT ratio
5000:1
6000:1
5000:1
The tap settings are shown below.

Table 92: TAP SETTINGS MULTI-ENDED EXAMPLE
VALUE
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
CT tap 1 for remote terminal 1
1000 / 1200 = 0.8333
1200 / 1000 = 1.200
1200 / 1600 = 0.750
CT tap 1 for remote terminal 2
1600 / 1200 = 1.3333
1600 / 1000 = 1.600
1000 / 1600 = 0.625
The primary positive-sequence impedances and length for the line are shown below.
Table 93: LINE LENGTH AND POSITIVE-SEQUENCE IMPEDANCE FOR MULTI-ENDED EXAMPLE
VALUE
RELAY 1 TO TAP
RELAY 2 TO TAP
RELAY 3 TO TAP
Impedance
21.29 80.5
36.50 80.5
16.73 80.5
Length
70 km
120 km
55 km
The three relays are connected as shown below.
GE Multilin
9-27
9.4 FAULT LOCATOR
channel 1
Relay 1
channel 1
70 km
120 km
Relay 2
channel 2
55 km
channel 2
Relay 3
channel 1
channel 2
831811A1.CDR
Figure 912: RELAY CONNECTIONS FOR MULTI-ENDED FAULT LOCATOR EXAMPLE

The following settings are entered into the relays. These values are calculated in secondary ohms as shown in the following
tables.
Table 94: LINE IMPEDANCE SETTINGS (ALL ANGLES ARE 80.5)
VALUE
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
Local to tap
1.0219 sec. ohms (relay 1 to tap

in relay 1 secondary ohms)


Remote 1 to tap



Remote 2 to tap



Assume the following signals are measured by the relays when the fault locator was triggered.
Table 95: RELAY MEASUREMENTS (PHYSICAL INPUTS)
VALUE
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
F1
10.64 A 87.5
8.592 A 88.5
9.652 A 43
F2
1.652 A 88.9
1.273 A 78.6
5.201 A 99
F3
1.66 A 31.2
1.614 A 43
6.269 A 139.3
F5
52.71 V 0.8
76.943 V 24.579
49.6 V 10.1
F6
58.21 V 121.4
86.321 V 98.052
57.1 V 115.6
F7
58.93 V 121.9
78.795 V 137.27
59.12 V 130.8
These measurement are shown below in per-unit values of the CT and VT nominal of the 87L source.
Table 96: RELAY MEASUREMENTS (PER-UNIT VALUES)
VALUE
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
IA
2.128 pu 87.5
8.592 pu 88.5
1.9304 pu 43
IB
0.3304 pu 88.9
1.273 pu 78.6
1.0402 pu 99
IC
0.332 pu 31.2
1.614 pu 43
1.2538 pu 139.3
VA (VAB)
0.91304 pu 0.8
0.92335 pu 24.579
0.85917 pu 10.1
VB (VBC)
1.0083 pu 121.4
1.0359 pu 98.052
0.98909 pu 115.6
VC (VCA)
1.0208 pu 121.9
0.94557 pu 137.27
1.0241 pu 130.8
When subjected to the expanded Clarke transform in the previous sub-section, the local currents yield the following values
(in relay per-unit values):
Relay 1: 1.3839 pu 84.504
Relay 2: 5.4844 pu 85.236
Relay 3: 1.2775 pu 56.917
When subjected to the expanded Clarke transform in the previous sub-section, the local voltages yield the following values
(in per-unit values of the nominal primary phase-to-ground voltage):
9-28
GE Multilin
Relay 1: 0.38781 pu 0.26811
Relay 2: 0.30072 pu 12.468
Relay 3: 0.37827 pu 8.9388
9.4 FAULT LOCATOR
Since they have a common per-unit base, the composite voltages are used at all locations. The currents are ratio matched
using the tap settings.
For example, the composite current at relay 1 is 1.3839 pu of its local CT; that is, 1.3839 1200 A = 1.6607 kA. When calculated at relay 2 from the data sent from relay 1 to relay 2, this value is 1.6607 kA / 1000 A = 1.6607 pu of the relay 2 CT.
This is due to the procedure of applying tap settings to the received phase currents before calculating the composite signal.
As a result, the three relays work with the following signals.
Table 97: COMPOSITE SIGNALS AT ALL THREE RELAYS
VALUE
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
VLOC(X)
0.38781 pu 0.26811
0.30072 pu 12.468
0.37827 pu 8.9388
VREM1(X)
0.30072 pu 12.468
0.38781 pu 0.26811
0.38781 pu 0.26811
VREM2(X)
0.37827 pu 8.9388
0.37827 pu 8.9388
0.30072 pu 12.468
ILOC(X)
1.3839 pu 84.504
5.4844 pu 85.236
1.2775 pu 56.917
IREM1(X)
4.5704 pu 85.236
1.6607 pu 84.504
1.0379 pu 84.504
IREM2(X)
1.7033 pu 56.917
2.0439 pu 56.917
3.4278 pu 85.236
The line impedances entered in secondary ohms are recalculated as follows (refer to the previous sub-section for equations).
Table 98: PER-UNIT LINE IMPEDANCE
VALUE
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
Local to tap
0.088509 pu 80.5
0.12644 pu 80.5
0.092735 pu 80.5
Remote 1 to tap
0.15174 pu 80.5
0.073754 pu 80.5
0.11801 pu 80.5
Remote 2 to tap
0.069551 pu 80.5
0.057957 pu 80.5
0.20232 pu 80.5
Using the data in the previous two tables, the tap voltages are calculated as follows (refer to the previous sub-section for
equations).
Table 99: CALCULATED TAP VOLTAGES USING TERMINAL DATA
VALUE
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
VT(LOC)
0.26581 pu 2.2352
0.39755 pu 178.9
0.26535 pu 2.4583
VT(REM1)
0.39758 pu 178.9
0.26582 pu 2.2351
0.26581 pu 2.2352
VT(REM2)
0.26535 pu 2.4583
0.26535 pu 2.4587
0.39758 pu 178.9
From the above table, it is already visible that:
Looking from relay 1 there is no fault between the tap and the local terminal and between the tap and remote 2 terminal. Therefore, the fault must be between the remote 1 terminal = relay 2 and the tap.
Looking from relay 2 there is no fault between the tap and the remote 1 terminal, and between the tap and remote 2
terminal. Therefore, the fault must be between the local terminal = relay 2 and the tap.
Looking from relay 3 there is no fault between the tap and the remote 1 terminal, and between the tap and the local terminal. Therefore, the fault must be between the remote 2 terminal = relay 2 and the tap.
Note that the correct value of the tap voltage is equal for all three relays. This is expected since the per-unit base for the
composite voltages is equal for all three relays.
The three relays calculate the differences as follows (refer to the previous sub-section for equations).
GE Multilin
9-29
9.4 FAULT LOCATOR
Table 910: TAP VOLTAGE DIFFERENCES USING TERMINAL DATA

VALUE
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
LOC-REM1
0.66337 pu
0.66334 pu
0.0011344 pu
LOC-REM2
0.0011344 pu
0.66286 pu
0.66289 pu
REM1-REM2
0.66289 pu
0.001137 pu
0.66337 pu
Applying the results of the table above to the equations in the previous sub-section, the algorithm arrives at the following:
Relay 1 determines remote 1 to tap.
Relay 2 determines local to tap.
Relay 3 determines remote 2 to tap.
As a result, the relays use the following data for further calculations.
Table 911: INPUT DATA FOR MAIN FAULT LOCATION
VALUE
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
3
Fault segment
120 km
120 km
120 km
0.1517 pu 80.5
0.1264 pu 80.5
0.2023 pu 80.5
VTAP
0.26558 pu 2.3467
0.26559 pu 2.3468
0.26558 pu 2.3467
V1
0.30072 pu 12.468
0.30072 pu 12.468
0.30072 pu 12.468
ITAP
2.9991 pu 69.256
3.599 pu 69.256
2.2494 pu 69.256
IFLT
7.4992 pu 78.915
8.999 pu 78.915
5.6244 pu 78.915
The data above are effectively identical. The difference in current magnitudes results from different per-unit bases at the
three relays (1200 A, 1000 A, and 1600 A). The difference in impedances results from different CT and VT ratios at the
three relays.
The tap voltage is the actual voltage at the tap (0.26558 500 kV /
(0.30072 pu = 86.81 kV).
3 = 76.67 kV). The V1 voltage is the voltage at relay 2
The tap current is the total feed from the tap towards the fault and is 2.9991 1200 A = 3.599 pu 1000 A =
2.2494 pu 1600 A = 3.599 kA. The fault current is 7.4992 pu 1200 A = 8.999 pu 1000 A = 5.6244 pu 1600 A =
8.999 kA.
The data above results in the following fault locations.
Relay 1 fault location = 0.4173 pu or 0.4173 120 km = 50.0704 km from its remote terminal 1 (relay 2)
Relay 2 fault location = 0.4172 pu or 0.4172 120 km = 50.07 km from local terminal (relay 2)
Relay 3 fault location = 0.4173 pu or 0.4173 120 km = 50.0704 km from its remote terminal 2 (relay 2)
The actual fault location in this example was 50.00km from relay 2 as shown below.
AG
channel 1
Relay 1
70 km
120 km
channel 1
50 km
Relay 2
channel 2
channel 2
55 km
9
channel 1
Relay 3
channel 2
831812A1.CDR
Figure 913: ACTUAL FAULT LOCATION
9-30
GE Multilin
9.4 FAULT LOCATOR

9.4.3 SINGLE-ENDED FAULT LOCATOR
When the multi-ended fault locator cannot be executed due to communication channel problems or invalid signals from
remote terminals, then the single-ended method is used to report fault location.
Fault type determination is required for calculation of fault location the algorithm uses the angle between the negative and
positive sequence components of the relay currents. To improve accuracy and speed of operation, the fault components of
the currents are used; that is, the pre-fault phasors are subtracted from the measured current phasors. In addition to the
angle relationships, certain extra checks are performed on magnitudes of the negative and zero-sequence currents.
The single-ended fault location method assumes that the fault components of the currents supplied from the local (A) and
remote (B) systems are in phase. The figure below shows an equivalent system for fault location.
distance to fault
Remote
bus
Local bus
ZA
EA
IA
VA
mZ
(1-m)Z
VF
RF
IB
ZB
VB
EB
842780A1.CDR
Figure 914: EQUIVALENT SYSTEM FOR FAULT LOCATION

The following equations hold true for this equivalent system.
VA = m Z IA + RF ( IA + IB )
where:
(EQ 9.51)
m = sought pu distance to fault, Z = positive sequence impedance of the line.
The currents from the local and remote systems can be parted between their fault (F) and pre-fault load (pre) components:
I A = I AF + I Apre
(EQ 9.52)
I B = I BF I Apre
(EQ 9.53)
and neglecting shunt parameters of the line:
Inserting the IA and IB equations into the VA equation and solving for the fault resistance yields:
VA m Z IA
R F = ----------------------------------I BF
I AF 1 + --------
I AF
(EQ 9.54)
Assuming the fault components of the currents, IAF and IBF are in phase, and observing that the fault resistance, as impedance, does not have any imaginary part gives:
VA m Z IA
Im ----------------------------------- = 0
I AF
(EQ 9.55)
where: Im() represents the imaginary part of a complex number. Solving the above equation for the unknown m creates the
following fault location algorithm:
Im ( V A I AF )
m = ---------------------------------------Im ( Z I A I AF )
(EQ 9.56)
where * denotes the complex conjugate and I AF = I A I Apre .
GE Multilin
9-31
9.4 FAULT LOCATOR
Depending on the fault type, appropriate voltage and current signals are selected from the phase quantities before applying
the two equations above (the superscripts denote phases, the subscripts denote stations).
For AG faults:
A
I A = I A + K 0 I 0A
I A = I A + K 0 I 0A
VA = VA ,
(EQ 9.57)
For BG faults:
VA = VA ,
(EQ 9.58)
For CG faults:
C
VA = VA ,
BC
I A = I A + K 0 I 0A
(EQ 9.59)
For AB and ABG faults:

A
IA = IA IA
IA = IA IA
IA = IA IA
VA = VA VA ,
(EQ 9.60)
For BC and BCG faults:

VA = VA VA ,
(EQ 9.61)
For CA and CAG faults:

VA = VA VA ,
(EQ 9.62)
where K0 is the zero sequence compensation factor (for the first six equations above)
For ABC faults, all three AB, BC, and CA loops are analyzed and the final result is selected based upon consistency of the
results
The element calculates the distance to the fault (with m in miles or kilometers) and the phases involved in the fault.
The relay allows locating faults from delta-connected VTs. If the FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION setting is set to None,
and the VTs are connected in wye, the fault location is performed based on the actual phase to ground voltages. If the VTs
are connected in delta, fault location is suspended.
If the FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION setting value is V0 and the VTs are connected in a wye configuration, the fault
location is performed based on the actual phase to ground voltages. If the VTs are connected in a delta configuration, fault
location is performed based on the delta voltages and externally supplied neutral voltage:
1
V A = --- ( V N + V AB V CA )
3
1
V B = --- ( V N + V BC V AB )
3
1
V B = --- ( V N + V CA V BC )
3
(EQ 9.63)
If the FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION setting value is I0 and the VTs are connected in a wye configuration, the fault location is performed based on the actual phase to ground voltages. If the VTs are connected in a delta configuration, fault location is performed based on the delta voltages and zero-sequence voltage approximated based on the zero-sequence
current:
1
V A = --- ( V AB V CA ) Z SYS0 I 0
3
1
V B = --- ( V BC V AB ) Z SYS0 I 0
3
1
V B = --- ( V CA V BC ) Z SYS0 I 0
3
(EQ 9.64)
where ZSYS0 is the equivalent zero-sequence impedance behind the relay as entered under the fault report setting menu.
9-32
GE Multilin
9.4 FAULT LOCATOR
SETTINGS
FAULT REPORT 1 Z1
MAG:
FAULT REPORT 1 Z1
ANGLE:
FAULT REPORT 1 Z0
MAG:
FAULT REPORT 1 Z0
ANGLE:
FAULT REPORT 1
LENGTH UNITS:
FAULT REPORT 1
LENGTH:
FAULT REPORT 1 VT
SUBSTITUTION:
SETTING
FAULT REPORT
TRIG:
FAULT REP 1
SYSTEM Z0 MAG:
Off=0
FAULT REP 1
SYSTEM Z0 ANGLE:
SETTINGS
AND
FAULT REPORT
SOURCE:
SRC X 50DD OP
IA
IB
IC
3I_0
RUN
ACTUAL VALUES
FAULT REPORT #
3 SEC
DATE
TIME
FAULT
LOCATOR 1
FAULT TYPE
FAULT LOCATION
FAULT# RECLOSE SHOT
VA or VAB
VB or VBC
VC or VCA
Vn or V_0
SHOT # FROM
AUTO RECLOSURE
827094A5.CDR
Figure 915: FAULT LOCATOR SCHEME
NOTE
Since the fault locator algorithm is based on the single-end measurement method, in three-terminal configuration the estimation of fault location may not be correct at all three terminals especially if fault occurs
behind the line's tap respective to the given relay.
GE Multilin
9-33
9.4 FAULT LOCATOR
9-34
GE Multilin
10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10.1CT REQUIREMENTS
10.1.1 INTRODUCTION
In general, proper CT selection is required to provide both adequate fault sensitivity and prevention of operation on highcurrent external faults that could result from CT saturation. The use of high-quality CTs (such as class X) improves relay
stability during transients and CT saturation and can increase relay sensitivity. A current differential scheme is highly
dependent on adequate signals from the source CTs. Ideally, CTs selected for line current differential protection should be
based on the criteria described below. If the available CTs do not meet the described criteria, the L90 will still provide good
security for CT saturation for external faults. The L90 adaptive restraint characteristics, based on estimates of measurement errors and CT saturation detection, allow the relay to be secure on external faults while maintaining excellent performance for severe internal faults. Where CT characteristics do not meet criteria or where CTs at both ends may have
different characteristics, the differential settings should be adjusted as per section 9.2.1.
The capability of the CTs, and the connected burden, should be checked as follows:
1.
The CTs should be class TPX or TPY (class TPZ should only be used after discussion with both the manufacturer of
the CT and GE Multilin) or IEC class 5P20 or better.
2.
The CT primary current rating should be somewhat higher than the maximum continuous current, but not extremely
high relative to maximum load because the differential element minimum sensitivity setting is approximately 0.2 CT
rating (the L90 relay allows for different CT ratings at each of the terminals).
3.
The VA rating of the CTs should be above the Secondary Burden CT Rated Secondary Current. The maximum secondary burden for acceptable performance is:
CT Rated VA
R b + R r < ------------------------------------------------------------2( CT Secondary I rated )
where:
4.
(EQ 10.1)
Rb = total (two-way) wiring resistance plus any other load

Rr = relay burden at rated secondary current
The CT kneepoint voltage (per the Vk curves from the manufacturer) should be higher than the maximum secondary
voltage during a fault. This can be estimated by:
X
V k > I fp ---- + 1 ( R CT + R L + R r ) for phase-phase faults
R
X
V k > I fg ---- + 1 ( R CT + 2R L + R r ) for phase-ground faults
R
where:
(EQ 10.2)
Ifp = maximum secondary phase-phase fault current

Ifg = maximum secondary phase-ground fault current
X / R = primary system reactance / resistance ratio
RCT = CT secondary winding resistance
RL = AC secondary wiring resistance (one-way)
10.1.2 CALCULATION EXAMPLE 1
This example illustrates how to check the performance of a class C400 ANSI/IEEE CT, ratios 2000/1800/1600/1500 : 5 A
connected at 1500:5. The burden and kneepoints are verified in this example.
Given the following values:
maximum Ifp = 14 000 A
maximum Ifg = 12 000 A
impedance angle of source and line = 78
CT secondary leads are 75 m of AWG 10.
The following procedure verifies the burden. ANSI/IEEE class C400 requires that the CT can deliver 1 to 20 times the rated
secondary current to a standard B-4 burden (4 ohms or lower) without exceeding a maximum ratio error of 10%.
1.
The maximum allowed burden at the 1500/5 tap is ( 1500 2000 ) 4 = 3 .
2.
The RCT, Rr, and RL values are calculated as:
GE Multilin
10
10-1
R CT = 0.75
0.2 VA
R r = -----------------2- = 0.008
(5 A)
(EQ 10.3)
3.75
R L = 2 75 m -------------------- = 2 0.26 = 0.528
1000 m
3.
This gives a total burden of:

Total Burden = R CT + R r + R L = 0.75 + 0.008 + 0.52 = 1.28 .
4.
(EQ 10.4)
This is less than the allowed 3 , which is OK.
The following procedure verifies the kneepoint voltage.

1.
The maximum voltage available from the CT = ( 1500 2000 ) 400 = 300 V .
2.
The system X/R ratio = tan 78 = 4.71 .
3.
The CT voltage for maximum phase fault is:

14000 A
V = ----------------------------------- ( 4.71 + 1 ) ( 0.75 + 0.26 + 0.008 ) = 271.26 V (< 300 V, which is OK)
ratio of 300:1
4.
The CT voltage for maximum ground fault is:

12000 A
V = ----------------------------------- ( 4.71 + 1 ) ( 0.75 + 0.52 + 0.008 ) = 291.89 V (< 300 V, which is OK)
ratio of 300:1
5.
(EQ 10.5)
(EQ 10.6)
The CT will provide acceptable performance in this application.

10.1.3 CALCULATION EXAMPLE 2
To check the performance of an IEC CT of class 5P20, 15 VA, ratio 1500:5 A, assume the following values:
maximum Ifp = 14 000 A
maximum Ifg = 12 000 A
impedance angle of source and line = 78
CT secondary leads are 75 m of AWG 10.
The IEC rating requires the CT deliver up to 20 times the rated secondary current without exceeding a maximum ratio error
of 5%, to a burden of:
15 VA
Burden = ----------------2 = 0.6 at the 5 A rated current
(5 A)
(EQ 10.7)
The total Burden = Rr + Rl = 0.008 + 0.52 = 0.528 , which is less than the allowed 0.6 , which is OK.
The following procedure verifies the kneepoint voltage.
1.
The maximum voltage available from the CT = ( 1500 2000 ) 400 = 300 V .
2.
The system X/R ratio = tan 78 = 4.71 .
3.
The CT voltage for maximum phase fault is:

14000 A
V = ----------------------------------- ( 4.71 + 1 ) ( 0.75 + 0.26 + 0.008 ) = 271.26 V (< 300 V, which is OK)
ratio of 300:1
4.
The CT voltage for maximum ground fault is:

12000 A
V = ----------------------------------- ( 4.71 + 1 ) ( 0.75 + 0.52 + 0.008 ) = 291.89 V (< 300 V, which is OK)
ratio of 300:1
10
5.
(EQ 10.8)
(EQ 10.9)
The CT will provide acceptable performance in this application.
10-2
GE Multilin
10.2CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL (87L) SETTINGS
NOTE
10.2.1 INTRODUCTION
Software is available from the GE Multilin website that is helpful in selecting settings for the specific application. Checking the performance of selected element settings with respect to known power system fault
parameters makes it relatively simple to choose the optimum settings for the application.
This software program is also very useful for establishing test parameters. It is strongly recommended this
program be downloaded.
The differential characteristic is defined by four settings: CURRENT DIFF PICKUP, CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1, CURRENT DIFF
RESTRAINT 2, and CURRENT DIFF BREAK PT (breakpoint). As is typical for current-based differential elements, the settings
are a trade-off between operation on internal faults against restraint during external faults.
10.2.2 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP
This setting established the sensitivity of the element to high impedance faults, and it is therefore desirable to choose a low
level, but this can cause a maloperation for an external fault causing CT saturation. The selection of this setting is influenced by the decision to use charging current compensation. If charging current compensation is Enabled, pickup should
be set to a minimum of 150% of the steady-state line charging current, to a lower limit of 10% of CT rating. If charging current compensation is Disabled, pickup should be set to a minimum of 250% of the steady-state line charging current to a
lower limit of 10% of CT rating.
If the CT at one terminal can saturate while the CTs at other terminals do not, this setting should be increased by approximately 20 to 50% (depending on how heavily saturated the one CT is while the other CTs are not saturated) of CT rating to
prevent operation on a close-in external fault.
10.2.3 CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1
This setting controls the element characteristic when current is below the breakpoint, where CT errors and saturation
effects are not expected to be significant. The setting is used to provide sensitivity to high impedance internal faults, or
when system configuration limits the fault current to low values. A setting of 10 to 20% is appropriate in most cases, but this
should be raised to 30% if the CTs can perform quite differently during faults.
10.2.4 CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 2
This setting controls the element characteristic when current is above the breakpoint, where CT errors and saturation
effects are expected to be significant. The setting is used to provide security against high current external faults. A setting
of 30 to 40% is appropriate in most cases, but this should be raised to 70% if the CTs can perform quite differently during
faults.
NOTE
Assigning the CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1(2) settings to the same value reverts dual slope bias characteristics into
single slope bias characteristics.
10.2.5 CURRENT DIFF BREAK POINT
This setting controls the threshold where the relay changes from using the restraint 1 to the restraint 2 characteristics. Two
approaches can be considered.
1.
Program the setting to 150 to 200% of the maximum emergency load current on the line, on the assumption that a
maintained current above this level is a fault.
2.
Program the setting below the current level where CT saturation and spurious transient differential currents can be
expected.
The first approach gives comparatively more security and less sensitivity; the second approach provides less security for
more sensitivity.
10
GE Multilin
10-3
10.2.6 CT TAP
If the CT ratios at the line terminals are different, the CURRENT DIFF CT TAP 1(2) setting must be used to correct the ratios to
a common base. In this case, a user should modify the CURRENT DIFF BREAK PT and CURRENT DIFF PICKUP settings
because the local current phasor is used as a reference to determine which differential equation is used, based on the
value of local and remote currents. If the setting is not modified, the responses of individual relays, especially during an
external fault, can be asymmetrical, as one relay can be below the breakpoint and the other above the breakpoint. There
are two methods to overcome this potential problem:
1.
Set CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1 and CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 2 to the same value (e.g. 40% or 50%). This converts the
relay characteristics from dual slope into single slope and the breakpoint becomes immaterial. Next, adjust differential
pickup at all terminals according to CT ratios, referencing the desired pickup to the line primary current (see below).
2.
Set the breakpoints in each relay individually in accordance with the local CT ratio and the CT TAP setting. Next, adjust
the differential pickup setting according to the terminal CT ratios. The slope value must be identical at all terminals.
Consider a two-terminal configuration with the following CT ratios for relays 1 and 2.
CT ratio ( relay 1 ) = 1000 5
(EQ 10.10)
Consequently, we have the following CT tap value for relays 1 and 2.

CT tap ( relay 1 ) = 2.0
CT tap ( relay 2 ) = 0.5
(EQ 10.11)
To achieve maximum differential sensitivity, the minimum pickup is set as 0.2 pu at the terminal with the higher CT primary
current; in this case 2000:5 for relay 2. The other terminal pickup is adjusted accordingly. The pickup values are set as follows:
Pickup ( relay 1 ) = 0.4
(EQ 10.12)
Choosing relay 1 as a reference with a breakpoint of 5.0, the break point at relay 2 is chosen as follows:
CT ratio ( relay 1 )
Breakpoint ( relay 2 ) = Breakpoint ( relay 1 ) ---------------------------------------CT ratio ( relay 2 )
1000 5
= 5.0 -------------------- = 2.5
2000 5
(EQ 10.13)
Use the following equality the verify the calculated breakpoint:

Breakpoint ( relay 1 ) CT ratio ( relay 1 ) = Breakpoint ( relay 2 ) CT ratio ( relay 2 )
(EQ 10.14)
Therefore, we have a breakpoint of 5.0 for relay 1 and 2.5 for relay 2.
Now, consider a three-terminal configuration with the following CT ratios for relays 1, 2, and 3.
(EQ 10.15)

Consequently, we have the following CT tap value for relays 1, 2, and 3.
10
CTtap1 ( relay 1 ) = 2.00
CT tap2 ( relay 1 ) = 0.50
CT tap1 ( relay 2 ) = 0.50
CT tap2 ( relay 2 ) = 0.25
CT tap1 ( relay 3 ) = 2.00
CT tap2 ( relay 3 ) = 4.00
(EQ 10.16)
In this case, the relay channels communicate as follows:
For relay 1, channel 1 communicates to relay 2 and channel 2 communicates to relay 3
10-4
GE Multilin
Consequently, to achieve the maximum sensitivity of 0.2 pu at the terminal with a CT ratio of 2000/5 (400 amps line primary
differential current), the following pickup values are chosen:
(EQ 10.17)
Choosing relay as a reference with a breakpoint value of 5.0 pu, breakpoints for relays 2 and 3 are calculated as follows:
1000 5
= 5.0 -------------------- = 2.5
2000 5
1000 5
= 5.0 -------------------- = 10.0
500 5
(EQ 10.18)
(EQ 10.19)
To verify the calculated values, we have:

Breakpoint ( relay 1 ) CT ratio ( relay 1 ) = 5.0 1000 5 = 1000
(EQ 10.20)

This satisfies the equality condition indicated earlier.
During on-load tests, the differential current at all terminals should be the same and generally equal to the charging current
if the tap and CT ratio settings are chosen correctly.
10
GE Multilin
10-5
10.2.7 BREAKER-AND-A-HALF
Assume a breaker-and-the-half configuration shown in the figure below. This section provides guidance on configuring the
L90 relay for this application. The L90 is equipped with two CT/VT modules: F8F and L8F.
1.
CTs and VTs are connected to L90 CT/VT modules as follows:

CT1 circuitry is connected to the F1 to F3 terminals of the F8F module (three-phase CT inputs, CT bank F).
CT2 circuitry is connected to the F1 to F3 terminals of the L8F module (three-phase CT inputs, CT bank L).
VT1 circuitry is connected to the F8 terminals of the F8F module (single-phase VT for synchrocheck 1, VT bank F).
VT2 circuitry is connected to the F8 terminals of the L8F module (single-phase VT for synchrocheck 2, VT bank L).
VT3 circuitry is connected to the F5 to F7 terminals of the F8F modules (three-phase VT for distance, metering, synchrocheck, charging current compensation, etc.; VT bank F).
Figure 101: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF APPLICATION

2.
The CTs and VTs are configured according to the following ratios and connections (EnerVista UR Setup example
shown):
10
10-6
GE Multilin
3.
The sources are configured as follows:

Source 1:
First current source for current differential,

voltage source for charging current compensation,
current source for breaker failure 1
Source 2:
Second current source for current differential,

current source for breaker failure 2, and
voltage source for synchrocheck 2.
Source 3:
Current source for distance, backup overcurrent,

voltage source for distance,
voltage source for synchrocheck 1 and 2.
Source 4:
Voltage source for synchrocheck 1.
The EnerVista UR Setup configuration is shown below:
4.
Sources are assigned accordingly in the specific element menus. For current differential, set CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL
to SRC 1 and CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 2 to SRC 2.
SOURCE 1
For distance and backup overcurrent, make the following settings changes (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
10
GE Multilin
10-7
For breaker failure 1 and 2, make the following settings changes (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
For synchrocheck 1 and 2, make the following settings changes (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
10
10-8
GE Multilin

10.2.8 DISTRIBUTED BUS PROTECTION
In some cases, buses of the same substation are located quite far from each other or even separated by the line. In these
cases, it is challenging to apply conventional bus protection because of the CT cable length. In other cases, there are no
CTs available on the line side of the line to be protected. Taking full advantage of L90 capability to support up to 4 directlyconnected CTs, the relay can be applied to protect both line and buses as shown below. Proper CT/VT modules must be
ordered for such applications. The varying CT ratios at the breakers can be compensated locally by using the sources
mechanism and with the CT TAP settings between remote relays. If more than 4 but less than 8 CTs are to be connected to
the L90 at one bus, the 3-terminal system can be applied, provided the user does not exceed a total of 12 CTs.
831787A1.CDR
Figure 102: DISTRIBUTED BUS PROTECTION
10
GE Multilin
10-9

10.3CHANNEL ASYMMETRY COMPENSATION USING GPS
10.3.1 DESCRIPTION
As indicated in the Settings chapter, the L90 provides three basic methods of applying channel asymmetry compensation
using GPS. Channel asymmetry can also be monitored with actual values and an indication signalled (FlexLogic operands 87L DIFF 1(2) MAX ASYM asserted) if channel asymmetry exceeds preset values. Depending on the implemented
relaying philosophy, the relay can be programmed to perform the following on the loss of the GPS signal:
1.
Enable GPS compensation on the loss of the GPS signal at any terminal and continue to operate the 87L element
(using the memorized value of the last asymmetry) until a change in the channel round-trip delay is detected.
2.
Enable GPS compensation on the loss of the GPS signal at any terminal and block the 87L element after a specified
time.
3.
Continuously operate the 87L element but only enable GPS compensation when valid GPS signals are available. This
provides less sensitive protection on the loss of the GPS signal at any terminal and runs with higher pickup and
restraint settings.
10.3.2 COMPENSATION METHOD 1
Enable GPS compensation on the loss of the GPS signal at any terminal and continue to operate the 87L element until a
change in the channel round-trip delay is detected.
If GPS is enabled at all terminals and the GPS signal is present, the L90 compensates for the channel asymmetry. On the
loss of the GPS signal, the L90 stores the last measured value of the channel asymmetry per channel and compensates for
the asymmetry until the GPS clock is available. However, if the channel was switched to another physical path during GPS
loss conditions, the 87L element must be blocked, since the channel asymmetry cannot be measured and system is no longer accurately synchronized. The value of the step change in the channel is preset in L90 POWER SYSTEM settings menu
and signaled by the 87L DIFF 1(2) TIME CHNG FlexLogic operand. To implement this method, follow the steps below:
1.
Enable Channel Asymmetry compensation by setting it to ON. Assign the GPS receiver failsafe alarm contact with the
setting Block GPS Time Ref.
2.
Create FlexLogic similar to that shown below to block the 87L element on GPS loss if step change in the channel
delay occurs during GPS loss conditions or on a startup before the GPS signal is valid. For three-terminal systems, the
87L DIFF 1 TIME CHNG operand must be ORed with the 87L DIFF 2 TIME CHNG FlexLogic operand. The Block
87L (VO1) output is reset if the GPS signal is restored and the 87L element is ready to operate.
10
10-10
GE Multilin
3.
87L DIFF GPS FAIL
87L DIFF BLOCKED
AND(2)
87L DIFF GPS FAIL
AND(2)
TIMER 1
OR(2)
87L DIFF BLOCKED
10
NOT
11
87L DIFF GPS FAIL
12
NOT
13
AND(2)
14
TIMER 2
15
LATCH
16
= BLOCK 87L (VO1)
AND(2)
OR(2)
AND(2)
Set
LATCH
Reset
= BLOCK 87L (VO1)
AND(2)
831777A1.CDR
Assign virtual output BLOCK 87L (VO1) to the 87L Current Differential Block setting. It can be used to enable backup
protection, raise an alarm, and perform other functions as per the given protection philosophy.
Enable GPS compensation on the loss of the GPS signal at any terminal and block the 87L element after a specified time.
This is a simple and conservative way of using the GPS feature. Follow steps 1 and 3 in compensation method 1. The FlexLogic is simple: 87L DIFF GPS FAIL-Timer-Virtual Output Block 87L (VO1). It is recommended that the timer be set no
higher than 10 seconds.
Continuously operate the 87L element but enable GPS compensation only when valid GPS signals are available. This provides less sensitive protection on GPS signal loss at any terminal and runs with higher pickup and restraint settings.
This approach can be used carefully if maximum channel asymmetry is known and doesn't exceed certain values (2.0 to
2.5 ms). The 87L DIFF MAX ASYM operand can be used to monitor and signal maximum channel asymmetry. Essentially,
the L90 switches to another setting group with higher pickup and restraint settings, sacrificing sensitivity to keep the 87L
function operational.
1.
Create FlexLogic similar to that shown below to switch the 87L element to Settings Group 2 (with most sensitive settings) if the L90 has a valid GPS time reference. If a GPS or 87L communications failure occurs, the L90 will switch
back to Settings Group 1 with less sensitive settings.
10
GE Multilin
10-11
17
87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM
18
NOT
19
87L DIFF GPS FAIL
20
NOT
21
AND(2)
22
87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM
23
87L DIFF GPS FAIL
24
OR(2)
25
TIMER 3
26
LATCH
27
= GPS ON-GR.2 (VO2)
AND(2)
Set
LATCH
Reset
= GPS ON-GR.2 (VO2)
OR(2)
831778A1.CDR
2.
Set the 87L element with different differential settings for Settings Groups 1 and 2 as shown below
3.
Enable GPS compensation when the GPS signal is valid and switch to Settings Group 2 (with more sensitive settings)
as shown below.
10
10-12
GE Multilin
10.4DISTANCE BACKUP/SUPERVISION
10.4.1 DESCRIPTION
Many high voltage lines have transformers tapped to the line serving as an economic approach to the supply of customer
load. A typical configuration is shown in the figure below.
Terminal 1
Terminal 2
831021A1.CDR
Figure 103: TYPICAL HV LINE CONFIGURATION

Two distinctly different approaches are available, Distance Backup and Distance Supervision, depending on which concerns are dominant. In either case, the distance function can provide a definite time backup feature to give a timed clearance for a failure of the L90 communications. Additionally, a POTT (Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip) scheme can
be selected and activated after detection of an L90 communications failure, if an alternate lower bandwidth communications
channel is available.
If Distance Backup is employed, dependability concerns usually relate to a failure of the communications. The distance
elements can then effectively provide a means of fault identification and clearance. However, for a line with tapped transformers, a number of other issues need to be considered to ensure stability for the L90.
Any differential scheme has a potential problem when a LV fault occurs at the tapped transformer location, and the current
at the tap is not measured. Because the transformer size can become quite large, the required increase in the differential
setting to avoid operation for the LV bus fault can result in a loss of sensitivity.
If the tapped transformer is a source of zero sequence infeed, then the L90 zero-sequence current removal has to enabled
as described in the next section.
The zero sequence infeed creates an apparent impedance setting issue for the backup ground distance and the zero
sequence compensation term is also not accurate, so that the positive sequence reach setting must be increased to compensate. The phase distance reach setting may also have to be increased to cope with a transfer across the two transformers, but this is dependent on the termination and configuration of the parallel line.
Three terminal line applications generally will result in larger reach settings for the distance backup and require a calculation of the apparent impedance for a remote fault. This should be carried out for each of the three terminals, as the calculated apparent impedance will be different at each terminal.
Distance Supervision essentially offers a solution for the LV fault condition, but the differential setting must still be
increased to avoid operation for an external L-g or L-L-g fault external ground fault. In addition, the distance element reach
setting must still see all faults within the protected line and be less than the impedance for a LV bus fault
The effective SIR (source impedance ratio) for the LV fault generally is not high, so that CVT transients do not contribute to
measuring errors.
If the distance supervision can be set to avoid operation for a transformer LV fault, then generally the filtering associated
with the distance measuring algorithm will ensure no operation under magnetizing inrush conditions. The distance element
can be safely set up to 2.5 Vnom / Ipeak, where Vnom is the system nominal voltage and Ipeak is the peak value of the magnetizing inrush current.
For those applications where the tapped station is close to one terminal, then it may be difficult to set the distance supervision to reach the end of the line, and at the same time avoid operation for a LV fault. For this system configuration, a 3-terminal L90 should be utilized; the third terminal is then fed from CT on the high side of the tapped transformer.
10
GE Multilin
10-13
10.4.2 PHASE DISTANCE
a) PHASE CURRENT SUPERVISION AND THE FUSE FAILURE ELEMENT

The phase-to-phase (delta) current is used to supervise the phase distance elements, primarily to ensure that in a de-energized state the distance elements will not be picked up due to noise or induced voltages, on the line.
However, this supervision feature may also be employed to prevent operation under fuse failure conditions. This obviously
requires that the setting must be above maximum load current and less than the minimum fault conditions for which operation is expected. This potential problem may be avoided by the use of a separate fuse fail function, which means that the
phase current supervision can be set much lower, typically two times the capacitance charging current of the line.
The usage of the fuse fail function is also important during double-contingency events such as an external fault during fuse
fail conditions. The current supervision alone would not prevent maloperation in such circumstances.
It must be kept in mind that the fuse failure element provided on the L90 needs some time to detect fuse fail conditions.
This may create a race between the instantaneous zone 1 and the fuse failure element. Therefore, for maximum security, it
is recommended to both set the current supervision above the maximum load current and use the fuse failure function. The
current supervision prevents maloperation immediately after the fuse fail condition giving some time for the fuse failure element to take over and block the distance elements permanently. This is of a secondary importance for time-delayed zones
2 and up as the fuse failure element has some extra time for guaranteed operation. The current supervision may be set
below the maximum load current for the time delayed zones.
Blocking distance elements during fuse fail conditions may not be acceptable in some applications and/or under some protection philosophies. Applied solutions may vary from not using the fuse failure element for blocking at all; through using it
and modifying through FlexLogic and multiple setting groups mechanisms other protection functions or other relays to
provide some protection after detecting fuse fail conditions and blocking the distance elements; to using it and accepting
the fact that the distance protection will not respond to subsequent internal faults until the problem is addressed.
NOTE
To be fully operational, the Fuse Failure element must be enabled, and its output FlexLogic operand must be indicated as the blocking signal for the selected protection elements.
For convenience, the current supervision threshold incorporates the
3 factor.
b) PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 1

As typically used for direct tripping, the zone 1 reach must be chosen so that it does not extend beyond the far end(s) of the
protected line. Zone 1 provides nominally instantaneous protection for any phase fault within a pre-determined distance
from the relay location. To ensure that no overreach occurs, typically requires a setting of 80 to 90% of the line length,
which covers CT and VT errors, relay inaccuracy and transient overreach as well as uncertainty in the line impedance for
each phase, although transposition may minimize this latter concern.
The total relay inaccuracy including both steady state and transient overreach even when supplied from CVTs under the
source impedance ratios of up to 30, is below 5%.
c) PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 2
Zone 2 is an overreaching element, which essentially covers the final 10 to 20% whole of the line length with a time delay.
The additional function for the zone 2 is as a timed backup for faults on the remote bus. Typically the reach is set to 125%
of the positive-sequence impedance of the line, to ensure operation, with an adequate margin, for a fault at 100% of the line
length. The necessary time delay must ensure that coordination is achieved with the clearance of a close-in fault on the
next line section, including the breaker operating time.
The zone 2 time delay is typically set from 0.2 to 0.6 seconds, although this may have to be reviewed more carefully if a
short line terminates on the remote bus, since the two zone 2 elements may overlap and therefore not coordinate in a satisfactory manner.
d) PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 3
10
If a remote backup philosophy is followed, then the reach of this element must be set to account for any infeed at the
remote bus, plus the impedance of the longest line which terminates on this remote bus. The time delay must coordinate
with other time-delayed protections on any remote line. Circuit loading limitations created by a long zone reach may be
overcome by using lens or quadrilateral characteristics and/or a load encroachment supervising characteristic. Consider-
10-14
GE Multilin
ation should also be given to a situation where the load impedance may enter into the relay characteristic for a time longer
than the chosen time delay, which could occur transiently during a system power swing. For this reason the power swing
blocking function should be used.
10.4.3 GROUND DISTANCE
a) NEUTRAL CURRENT SUPERVISION
The current supervision for the ground distance elements responds to an internally calculated neutral current (3 I_0). The
setting for this element should be based on twice the zero-sequence line capacitance current or the maximum zerosequence unbalance under maximum load conditions. This element should not be used to prevent an output when the load
impedance is inside the distance characteristic on a steady state basis.
b) GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 1
The zone 1 reach must be set so that nominally instantaneous operation does not extend beyond the end of the protected
line. However this may be somewhat more complicated than for the phase elements, because of zero sequence mutual
induction with an adjacent parallel line, possibly carried on the same tower, which can be out of service and grounded at
multiple points. A fault beyond 100% of the protected line may cause overreach unless the reach is reduced significantly,
sometimes as low as 65% of the line length. If the line being protected does not have a significant interaction with an adjacent circuit, then the typical 80% setting may be used. If there is significant mutual coupling between the parallel lines, then
the mutual compensation feature of the ground distance elements can be used instead of a drastic reduction in the reach.
However, even in this case, there is more uncertainty as compared with the phase distance elements because the zerosequence impedance of the line and thus the zero-sequence-compensating factors may vary significantly due to weather
and other conditions.
c) GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 2
To ensure that the zone 2 can see 100% of the line, inter-circuit mutual effects must be considered, as they can contribute
to a significant under-reach. Typically this may occur on double circuit lines, when both lines may carry the same current.
An analytical study should be carried out to determine the appropriate reach setting.
The main purpose of this element is to operate for faults beyond the reach of the local zone 1 element, and therefore a time
delay must be used similar to the phase fault case.
d) GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 3
This remote back up function must have a reach which is set to account for any infeed at the remote bus, plus the impedance of the longest line which terminates on this remote bus. Similar to the phase fault case, a zone 3 element must be
time coordinated with timed clearances on the next section.
10
GE Multilin
10-15
10.5 POTT SIGNALING SCHEME
10.5POTT SIGNALING SCHEME
10.5.1 DESCRIPTION
This scheme is intended for two-terminal line applications only.

This scheme uses an over-reaching Zone 2 distance element to essentially compare the direction to a fault at both the ends
of the line.
Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the relay can be used in conjunction with the Zone 2 distance element
to key the scheme and initiate its operation. This provides increased coverage for high-resistance faults.
Good directional integrity is the key requirement for an over-reaching forward-looking protection element used to supplement Zone 2. Even though any FlexLogic operand could be used for this purpose allowing the user to combine
responses of various protection elements, or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic equations, this extra signal is
primarily meant to be the output operand from the Neutral Directional IOC. Both of these elements have separate forward
(FWD) and reverse (REV) output operands. The forward indication should be used (NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD).
An important consideration is when one of the line terminals is open. It is then necessary to identify this condition and
arrange for a continuous sending of the permissive signal or use a slower but more secure echo feature to send a signal to
the other terminal, which is producing the fault infeed. With any echo scheme however, a means must be provided to avoid
a permanent lock up of the transmit/receive loop. The echo co-ordination (ECHO DURATION) and lock-out (ECHO LOCKOUT) timers perform this function by ensuring that the permissive signal is echoed once for a guaranteed duration of time
before going to a lockout for a settable period of time.
It should be recognized that in ring bus or breaker and a half situations, it may be the line disconnect or a combination of
the disconnect and/or the breaker(s) status that is the indication that the terminal is open.
The POTT RX PICKUP DELAY timer is included in the permissive receive path to ride through spurious receive outputs that
may be produced during external faults, when power line carrier is utilized as the communications medium.
No current reversal logic is included for the overreaching phase and ground distance elements, because long reaches are
not usually required for two terminal lines. A situation can occur however, where the ground distance element will have an
extended reach. This situation is encountered when it is desired to account for the zero sequence inter-circuit mutual coupling. This is not a problem for the ground distance elements in the L90 which do have a current reversal logic built into
their design as part of the technique used to improve ground fault directionality.
Unlike the distance protection elements the ground directional overcurrent functions do not have their reach well defined,
therefore the current reversal logic is incorporated for the extra signal supplementing Zone 2 in the scheme. The transient
blocking approach for this POTT scheme is to recognize that a permissive signal has been received and then allow a settable time TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY for the local forward looking directional element to pick up.
The scheme generates an output operand (POTT TX) that is used to transmit the signal to the remote end. Choices of communications channel include Remote Inputs/Outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operand should be assigned to operate an output contact connected to key the transmitter at the
interface. Power Line Carrier (PLC) channels are not recommended for this scheme since the PLC signal can be interrupted by a fault.
For proper operation of the scheme the Zone 2 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set
per rules of distance relaying. The Line Pickup element should be enabled, configured and set properly to detect line-endopen/weak-infeed conditions.
If used by this scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent function(s) must be enabled, configured and set accordingly The output operand from the scheme (POTT OP) must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output
contacts in particular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be programmed to
initiate a trip, breaker fail, and auto-reclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application.
10
10-16
GE Multilin
10.6SERIES COMPENSATED LINES
10.6.1 DISTANCE SETTINGS ON SERIES COMPENSATED LINES
Traditionally, the reach setting of an underreaching distance function shall be set based on the net inductive impedance
between the potential source of the relay and the far-end busbar, or location for which the zone must not overreach. Faults
behind series capacitors on the protected and adjacent lines need to be considered for this purpose. For further illustration
a sample system shown in the figure below is considered.
SENDING
BUS
INFINITE
BUS
0.5 pu
-2
F2
RECEIVING
BUS
0.6 pu
-4
10
0.5 pu
-3
A B
B A
0.7 pu
-5
reactance
INFINITE
BUS
voltage
protection
level
F1
Protected Line
Figure 104: SAMPLE SERIES COMPENSATED SYSTEM

Assuming 20% security margin, the underreaching zone shall be set as follows.
At the Sending Bus, one must consider an external fault at F1 as the 5 capacitor would contribute to the overreaching
effect. Any fault behind F1 is less severe as extra inductive line impedance increases the apparent impedance:
Reach Setting: 0.8 x (10 3 5) = 1.6 if the line-side (B) VTs are used
Reach Setting: 0.8 x (10 4 3 5) = 1.6 if the bus-side (A) VTs are used
The negative value means that an underreaching zone cannot be used as the circuit between the potential source of the
relay and an external fault for which the relay must not pick-up, is overcompensated, i.e. capacitive.
At the Receiving Bus, one must consider a fault at F2:
Reach Setting: 0.8 x (10 4 2) = 3.2 if the line-side (B) VTs are used
Reach Setting: 0.8 x (10 4 3 2) = 0.8 if the bus-side (A) VTs are used
Practically, however, to cope with the effect of sub-synchronous oscillations, one may need to reduce the reach even more.
As the characteristics of sub-synchronous oscillations are in complex relations with fault and system parameters, no solid
setting recommendations are given with respect to extra security margin for sub-synchronous oscillations. It is strongly recommended to use a power system simulator to verify the reach settings or to use an adaptive L90 feature for dynamic
reach control.
If the adaptive reach control feature is used, the PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL setting shall be set accordingly.
This setting is a sum of the overvoltage protection levels for all the series capacitors located between the relay potential
source and the far-end busbar, or location for which the zone must not overreach. The setting is entered in pu of the phase
VT nominal voltage (RMS, not peak value).
If a minimum fault current level (phase current) is causing a voltage drop across a given capacitor that prompts its air gap to
flash over or its MOV to carry practically all the current, then the series capacitor shall be excluded from the calculations
(the capacitor is immediately by-passed by its overvoltage protection system and does not cause any overreach problems).
If a minimum fault current does not guarantee an immediate capacitor by-pass, then the capacitor must be included in the
calculation: its overvoltage protection level, either air gap flash-over voltage or MOV knee-point voltage, shall be used
(RMS, not peak value).
Assuming none of the series capacitors in the sample system is guaranteed to get by-passed, the following calculations
apply:
For the Sending Bus:
0.5 + 0.7 = 1.2 pu if the line-side (B) VTs are used

0.6 + 0.5 + 0.7 = 1.8 pu if the bus-side (A) VTs are used
For the Receiving Bus:
0.6 + 0.5 = 1.1 pu if the line-side (B) VTs are used

0.6 + 0.5 + 0.5 = 1.6 pu if the bus-side (A) VTs are used
GE Multilin
10
10-17
10.6.2 GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
Ground directional overcurrent function (negative-sequence or neutral) uses an offset impedance to guarantee correct fault
direction discrimination. The following setting rules apply.
1.
If the net impedance between the potential source and the local equivalent system is inductive, then there is no need
for an offset. Otherwise, the offset impedance shall be at least the net capacitive reactance.
2.
The offset cannot be higher than the net inductive reactance between the potential source and the remote equivalent
system. For simplicity and extra security, the far-end busbar may be used rather than the remote equivalent system.
As the ground directional functions are meant to provide maximum fault resistance coverage, it is justified to assume that
the fault current is very low and none of the series capacitors is guaranteed to get by-passed. Consider settings of the negative-sequence directional overcurrent protection element for the Sample Series Compensated System.
For the Sending Bus relay, bus-side VTs:
Net inductive reactance from the relay into the local system = 2 + 3 = 1 > 0; there is no need for offset.
Net inductive reactance from relay through far-end busbar = 4 + 10 3 = 3 ; the offset cannot be higher than 3 .
It is recommended to use 1.5 offset impedance.
For the Sending Bus relay, line-side VTs:
Net inductive reactance from relay into local system = 2 + 3 4 = 3 < 0; an offset impedance 3 must be used.
Net inductive reactance from relay through far-end busbar = 10 3 = 7 ; the offset cannot be higher than 7 .
It is recommended to use 5 offset impedance.
For the Receiving Bus relay, bus-side VTs:
Net inductive reactance from relay into local system = 5 + 7 = 2 > 0; there is no need for offset.
Net inductive reactance from relay through far-end busbar = 3 + 10 4 = 3 ; the offset cannot be higher than 3 .
For the Receiving Bus relay, line-side VTs:
Net inductive reactance from relay into local system = 3 5 + 7 = 1 < 0; an offset impedance 1 must be used.
Net inductive reactance from relay through far-end busbar = 10 4 = 6 ; the offset cannot be higher than 6 .
10
10-18
GE Multilin
10.7LINES WITH TAPPED TRANSFORMERS
10.7.1 DESCRIPTION
The L90 protection system could be applied to lines with tapped transformer(s) even if the latter has its windings connected
in a grounded wye on the line side and the transformer(s) currents are not measured by the L90 protection system. The following approach is recommended.
If the setting SYSTEM SETUP L90 POWER SYSTEM ZERO-SEQ CURRENT REMOVAL is Enabled, all relays at the line terminals are calculating zero-sequence for both local and remote currents and are removing this current from the phase currents. This ensures the differential current is immune to the zero-sequence current outfeed caused by the in-zone
transformer with a primary wye-connected winding solidly grounded neutral.
At all terminals the following is being performed:
I_L_0 = (I_L_A + I_L_B + I_L_C) / 3) : local zero-sequence current
I_R_0 = (I_R_A + I_R_B + I_R_C) / 3 : remote zero-sequence current
Now, the I_PHASE I_0 values (for Local and Remote) are being used instead of pure phase currents for differential and
restraint current calculations. See the Theory of Operation chapter for additional details.
For example, the operating current in phase A is determined as:
I2op_A = |(I_L_A I_L_0) + (I_R_A I_R_0) |2 : squared operating current, phase A
where:
I_L_A = local current phase A

I_R_A = remote current phase A
I_L_0 = local zero-sequence current
I_R_0 = remote zero-sequence current
I2op_A = operating (differential) squared current phase A
The restraint current is calculated in a similar way.
NOTE
When the ZERO-SEQ CURRENT REMOVAL feature is enabled, the modified (I_0 removed) differential current in all
three phases is shown in the ACTUAL VALUES METERING 87L DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT menu. Local and remote
currents values are not changed.
10.7.2 TRANSFORMER LOAD CURRENTS
As the tapped line may be energized from one terminal only, or there may be a low current flowing through the line, the
slope setting of the differential characteristic would not guarantee stability of the relay on transformer load currents. Consequently, a pickup setting must be risen accordingly in order to prevent maloperation. The L90 forms its restraint current in a
unique way as explained in Chapter 8. Unlike traditional approaches, the effects of slope and pickup settings are combined:
the higher the slope, the lower the pickup setting required for the same restraining effect.
Assuming the line energized from one terminal and the current is below the lower break-point of the characteristic one
should consider the following stability conditions in order to select the pickup (P) and slope (S1) settings (ILOAD is a maximum total load current of the tapped transformer(s)).
Two-terminal applications:
2
I op = I LOAD
2
Three-terminal applications:
2
I op = I LOAD
2 2
I REST = 2S 1 I LOAD + 2P
2 2
Stability condition: 2S 1 I LOAD + 2P > I LOAD
4 22
2
2
I REST = --- S 1 I LOAD + 2P
3
4 22
2
2
Stability condition: --- S 1 I LOAD + 2P > I LOAD
3
The above calculations should take into account the requirement for the pickup setting resulting from line charging currents.
Certainly, a security factor must be applied to the above stability conditions. Alternatively, distance supervision can be considered to prevent maloperation due to transformer load currents.
10
GE Multilin
10-19
10.7.3 LV-SIDE FAULTS
Distance supervision should be used to prevent maloperation of the L90 protection system during faults on the LV side of
the transformer(s). As explained earlier, the distance elements should be set to overreach all line terminals, and at the
same time safely underreach the LV busbars of all the tapped transformers. This may present some challenges, particularly
for long lines and large transformer tapped close to the substations. If the L90 system retrofits distance relays, there is a
good chance that one can set the distance elements to satisfy the imposed. If more than one transformer is tapped, particularly on parallel lines, and the LV sides are interconnected, detailed short circuit studies may be needed to determine the
distance settings.
10.7.4 EXTERNAL GROUND FAULTS
External ground faults behind the line terminals will be seen by the overreaching distance elements. At the same time, the
tapped transformer(s), if connected in a grounded wye, will feed the zero-sequence current. This current is going to be
seen at one L90 terminal only, will cause a spurious differential signal, and consequently, may cause maloperation.
The L90 ensures stability in such a case by removing the zero-sequence current from the phase cur-rents prior to calculating the operating and restraining signals (SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP L90 POWER SYSTEM ZERO-SEQ CURRENT
REMOVAL = Enabled). Removing the zero-sequence component from the phase currents may cause the L90 to overtrip
healthy phases on internal ground fault. This is not a limitation, as the single-pole tripping is not recommended for lines with
tapped transformers.
10
10-20
GE Multilin
10.8INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENTS

10.8.1 INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENT ERROR DURING L90 SYNCHRONIZATION
As explained in the Theory of Operation chapter, two or three L90 relays are synchronized to each other and to system frequency to provide digital differential protection and accurate measurements for other protection and control functions.
When an L90 system is starting up, the relays adjust their frequency aggressively to bring all relays into synchronization
with the system quickly. The tracking frequency can differ from nominal (or system frequency) by a few Hertz, especially
during the first second of synchronization. The 87L function is blocked during synchronization; therefore, the difference
between system frequency and relay sampling frequency does not affect 87L function. However, instantaneous elements
have additional error caused by the sensitivity of Fourier phasor estimation to the difference between signal frequency and
tracking frequency.
To secure instantaneous element operation, it is recommended either to use FlexLogic as shown below to block the
instantaneous elements during synchronization, or to use a different setting group with more conservative pickup for this
brief interval.
87L DIFF PFLL FAIL

87L DIFF CH1 FAIL
87L DIFF CH2 FAIL
0 ms
AND(2)
OR(2)
700 ms
0 ms
= BLOCK INST (VO5)
50 ms
OR(2)
NEGATIVE ONE SHOT
TIMER 2
AND(2)
TIMER 1
= BLOCK INST (VO5)
831792A2.CDR
Figure 105: FLEXLOGIC TO BLOCK INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENT DURING 87L STARTUP

The elements must be treated selectively. If, for example, the phase undervoltage setting includes margin sufficient to
accommodate the maximum additional error on startup, blocking or delay are not needed for phase undervoltage. Similarly,
if the phase instantaneous overcurrent setting has sufficient margin, blocking is not needed. Note that significant zerosequence and negative-sequence current or voltage error will not appear during L90 startup, therefore all elements using
these quantities are safe.
The table below indicates the maximum error and recommended block durations for different elements.
ELEMENT
MAXIMUM ERROR ON STARTUP,

(OPERATE SIGNAL VS. SETTING)
RECOMMENDED BLOCK
DURATION
Phase undervoltage
18%
0.7 seconds
Phase instantaneous overcurrent
9%
0.5 seconds
Ground distance zone 1
7%
Not needed
Phase distance zone 1
4%
Not needed
10
GE Multilin
10-21
10
10-22
GE Multilin
11 COMMISSIONING
11.1 TESTING
11 COMMISSIONING 11.1TESTING
11.1.1 CHANNEL TESTING
The communications system transmits and receives data between two or three terminals for the 87L function. The system
is designed to work with multiple channel options including direct and multiplexed optical fiber, G.703, and RS422. The
speed is 64 Kbaud in a transparent synchronous mode with automatic synchronous character detection and CRC insertion.
The Local Loopback Channel Test verifies the L90 communication modules are working properly. The Remote Loopback
Channel Test verifies the communication link between the relays meets requirements (BER less than 104). All tests are
verified by using the internal channel monitoring and the monitoring in the Channel Tests. All of the tests presented in this
section must be either OK or PASSED.
1.
Verify that a type W module is placed in slot W in both relays (e.g. W7J).
2.
Interconnect the two relays using the proper media (e.g. single mode fiber cable) observing correct connection of
receiving (Rx) and transmitting (Tx) communications paths and turn power on to both relays.
3.
Verify that the Order Code in both relays is correct.
4.
Cycle power off/on in both relays.
5.
Verify and record that both relays indicate In Service on the front display.
6.
Make the following setting change in both relays: GROUPED ELEMENTS GROUP 1
MENTS CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT DIFF FUNCTION: Enabled.
7.
Verify and record that both relays have established communications with the following status checks:
ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS CHANNEL 1 STATUS:
ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS CHANNEL 2 STATUS:
CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL ELE-
OK
OK (If used)
8.
Make the following setting change in both relays: TESTING TEST MODE: Enabled.
9.
Make the following setting change in both relays:

TESTING CHANNEL TESTS LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST LOCAL LOOPBACK CHANNEL NUMBER:
"1"
10. Initiate the Local Loopback Channel Tests by making the following setting change:
TESTING CHANNEL TESTS LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST LOCAL LOOPBACK FUNCTION:
"Yes"
Expected result: In a few seconds Yes should change to Local Loopback Test PASSED and then to No, signifying the test was successfully completed and the communication modules operated properly.
11. If Channel 2 is used, make the following setting change and repeat Step 10 for Channel 2 as performed for channel 1:
TESTING CHANNEL TESTS LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST LOCAL LOOPBACK CHANNEL NUMBER:
"2"
12. Verify and record that the Local Loopback Test was performed properly with the following status check:
ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS CHANNEL 1(2) LOCAL LOOPBACK STATUS:
"OK"
13. Make the following setting change in one of the relays:

TESTING CHANNEL TESTS REMOTE LOOPBACK TEST REMOTE LOOPBACK CHANNEL NUMBER:
"1"
14. Initiate the Remote Loopback Channel Tests by making the following setting change:
TESTING CHANNEL TESTS REMOTE LOOPBACK REMOTE LOOPBACK FUNCTION:
"Yes"
Expected result: The Running Remote Loopback Test message appears; within 60 to 100 sec. the Remote Loopback Test PASSED message appears for a few seconds and then changes to No, signifying the
test successfully completed and communications with the relay were successfully established. The
Remote Loopback Test FAILED message indicates that either the communication link quality does
not meet requirements (BER less than 104) or the channel is not established check the communications link connections.
15. If Channel 2 is used, make the following setting change and repeat Step 14 for Channel 2 as performed for Channel 1:
TESTING CHANNEL TESTS REMOTE LOOPBACK TEST REMOTE LOOPBACK CHANNEL NUMBER:
"2"
16. Verify and record the Remote Loopback Test was performed properly with the following status check:
ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS CHANNEL 1(2) REMOTE LOOPBACK STATUS:
GE Multilin
"OK"
11-1
11
11.1 TESTING
11
11 COMMISSIONING
17. Verify and record that Remote Loopback Test fails during communications failures as follows: start test as per Steps 13
to 14 and in 2 to 5 seconds disconnect the fiber Rx cable on the corresponding channel.
Expected result: The "Running Remote Loopback Test" message appears. When the channel is momentarily cut off,
the "Remote Loopback Test FAILED" message is displayed. The status check should read as follows: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS CHANNEL 1(2) LOCAL LOOPBACK STATUS: "Fail"
18. Re-connect the fiber Rx cable. Repeat Steps 13 to 14 and verify that Remote Loopback Test performs properly again.
19. Verify and record that Remote Loopback Test fails if communications are not connected properly by disconnecting the
fiber Rx cable and repeating Steps 13 to 14.
Expected result: The ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS CHANNEL 1(2) REMOTE LOOPBACK TEST:
"Fail" message should be constantly on the display.
20. Repeat Steps 13 to 14 and verify that Remote Loopback Test is correct.
21. Make the following setting change in both relays: TESTING TEST MODE: "Disabled"
NOTE
During channel tests, verify in the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS CHANNEL 1(2) LOST PACKETS display that the values are very low even 0. If values are comparatively high, settings of communications equipment (if applicable) should be checked.
11.1.2 CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION TESTS
The 87L clock synchronization is based upon a peer-to-peer architecture in which all relays are Masters. The relays are
synchronized in a distributed fashion. The clocks are phase synchronized to each other and frequency synchronized to the
power system frequency. The performance requirement for the clock synchronization is a maximum error of 130 s.
All tests are verified by using PFLL status displays. All PFLL status displays must be either OK or Fail.
1.
Ensure that Steps 1 through 7 inclusive of the previous section are completed.
2.
Verify and record that both relays have established communications with the following checks after 60 to 120 seconds:
ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS CHANNEL 1(2) STATUS: OK
ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS REMOTE LOOPBACK STATUS:
ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS PFLL STATUS: OK
3.
n/a
Disconnect the fiber Channel 1(2) Tx cable for less than 66 ms (not possible with direct fiber module).
Expected result:

n/a
If fault conditions are applied to the relay during these tests, it trips with a specified 87L operation time.
4.
Disconnect the fiber Channel 1(2) Tx cable for more than 66 ms but less than 5 seconds.
Expected result:

ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS REMOTE LOOPBACK STATUS: n/a
If fault conditions are applied to the relay (after the channel is brought back) during these tests, it trips with a specified
87L operation time plus 50 to 80 ms required for establishing PFLL after such interruption.
5.
Disconnect the fiber Channel 1(2) Tx cable for more than 5 seconds.
Expected result:
6.

ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS PFLL STATUS: Fail
n/a
Reconnect the fiber Channel 1(2) Tx cable and in 6 to 8 seconds confirm that the relays have re-established communications again with the following status checks:
ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS REMOTE LOOPBACK STATUS: n/a
11-2
GE Multilin
11 COMMISSIONING
7.
11.1 TESTING
Apply a current of 0.5 pu at a frequency 1 to 3% higher or lower than nominal only to local relay phase A to verify that
frequency tracking will not affect PFLL when only one relay has a current input and both relays track frequency. Wait
200 seconds and verify the following:
ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRACKING FREQUENCY TRACKING FREQUENCY: actual
frequency at both relays
For 3-terminal configuration, the above-indicated tests should be carried out accordingly.
NOTE
11.1.3 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL

The 87L element has adaptive restraint and dual slope characteristics. The pickup slope settings and the breakpoint settings determine the element characteristics. The relay displays both local and remote current magnitudes and angles and
the differential current which helps with start-up activities. When a differential condition is detected, the output operands
from the element will be asserted along with energization of faceplate event indicators.
1.
Ensure that relay will not issue any undesired signals to other equipment.
2.
Ensure that relays are connected to the proper communication media, communications tests have been performed
and the CHANNEL and PFLL STATUS displays indicate OK.
3.
Minimum pickup test with local current only:
Ensure that all 87L setting are properly entered into the relay and connect a test set to the relay to inject current
into Phase A.
Slowly increase the current until the relay operates and note the pickup value. The theoretical value of operating
current below the breakpoint is given by the following formula, where P is the pickup setting and S1 is the Slope 1
setting (in decimal format):
2
I op =
4.
P
2 ------------------21 2S 1
Repeat the above test for different slope and pickup settings, if desired.
Repeat the above tests for Phases B and C.
(EQ 11.1)
Minimum pickup test with local current and simulated remote current (pure internal fault simulation):
Disconnect the local relay from the communications channel.
Loop back the transmit signal to the receive input on the back of the relay.
Wait until the CHANNEL and PFLL status displays indicate OK.
Slowly increase the current until the relay operates and note the pickup value. The theoretical value of operating
current below breakpoint is given by the following formula:
2
I op =
2P
------------------------------------------------------------------------2
2
2
( 1 + TAP ) 2S 1 ( 1 + TAP )
(EQ 11.2)
where TAP represents the CT Tap setting for the corresponding channel.
Repeat the above test for different slope and pickup settings, if desired.
During the tests, observe the current phasor at ACTUAL VALUES METERING 87L DIFF CURRENT LOCAL IA.
This phasor should also be seen at ACTUAL VALUES METERING 87L DIFF CURRENT TERMINAL 1(2) IA along
with a phasor of twice the magnitude at ACTUAL VALUES METERING 87L DIFF CURRENT IA DIFF.
Repeat the above tests for Phases B and C.
Restore the communication circuits to normal.
NOTE
Download the UR Test software from the GE Multilin website (http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin) or contact GE
Multilin for information about the UR current differential test program which allows the user to simulate different
operating conditions for verifying correct responses of the relays during commissioning activities.
GE Multilin
11-3
11
11.1 TESTING
11
11 COMMISSIONING
11.1.4 LOCAL-REMOTE RELAY TESTS
a) DIRECT TRANSFER TRIP (DTT) TESTS

The direct transfer trip is a function by which one relay sends a signal to a remote relay to cause a trip of remote equipment.
The local relay trip outputs will close upon receiving a direct transfer trip from the remote relay. The test procedure is as follows:
1.
Ensure that relay will not issue any undesired signals to other equipment and all previous tests have been completed
successfully.
2.
Cycle power off/on in both relays.
3.
Verify and record that both relays indicate In Service on the faceplate display.
4.
Make the following setting change in the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL menu of both relays:
CURRENT DIFF FUNCTION: Enabled
5.
Verify and record that both relays have established communications by performing the following status check thorough
the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS menu:
CHANNEL 1(2) STATUS: OK
6.
At the remote relay, make the following changes in the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEmenu:
MENTS CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL

CURRENT DIFF DTT: Enabled
7.
At the Local relay, make the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT N1 menu:
CONTACT OUTPUT N1 OPERATE: 87L DIFF RECVD DTT A
CONTACT OUTPUT N2 OPERATE: 87L DIFF RECVD DTT B
CONTACT OUTPUT N3 OPERATE: 87L DIFF RECVD DTT C
8.
At the Local relay, verify that ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT OUTPUTS Cont Op N1 is in the Off state.
9.
Apply current to phase A of the remote relay and increase until 87L operates.
10. At the Local relay, observe ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT OUTPUTS Cont Op N1 is now in the On state.
11. Repeat steps 8 through 10 for phases A and B and observe Contact Outputs N2 and N3, respectively.
12. Repeat steps 8 through 11 with the Remote and Local relays inter-changed.
13. Make the following setting change in the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL menu of both relays:
CURRENT DIFF FUNCTION: Disabled
14. At the Remote relay, set SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT N1 CONTACT OUTPUT N1 OPERATE to
the CURRENT DIFF KEY DTT operand.
15. At the Local relay, observe under the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT OUTPUTS menu that CONTACT OUTPUT
N1, N2 and N3 are Off.
16. At the Remote relay, set SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT INPUTS FORCE Cont Ip N1 to Closed.
17. At the Local relay, observe under ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT OUTPUTS that CONTACT OUTPUT N1, N2 and
N3 are now On.
18. At both the Local and Remote relays, return all settings to normal.
b) FINAL TESTS
As proper operation of the relay is fundamentally dependent on the correct installation and wiring of the CTs, it must be confirmed that correct data is brought into the relays by an on-load test in which simultaneous measurements of current and
voltage phasors are made at all line terminals. These phasors and differential currents can be monitored at the ACTUAL VALUES METERING 87L DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT menu where all current magnitudes and angles can be observed and conclusions of proper relay interconnections can be made.
11-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
AppendicesAPPENDIX A FlexAnalog and FlexInteger ParametersA.1Parameter Lists
A.1.1 FLEXANALOG ITEMS
A
Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 1 of 11)
ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
5688
Channel 1 Asymmetry
---
Channel 1 asymmetry
5690
Channel 2 Asymmetry
---
Channel 2 asymmetry
6144
SRC 1 Ia RMS
Amps
Source 1 phase A current RMS
6146
SRC 1 Ib RMS
Amps
Source 1 phase B current RMS
6148
SRC 1 Ic RMS
Amps
Source 1 phase C current RMS
6150
SRC 1 In RMS
Amps
Source 1 neutral current RMS
6152
SRC 1 Ia Mag
Amps
Source 1 phase A current magnitude
6154
SRC 1 Ia Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase A current angle
6155
SRC 1 Ib Mag
Amps
Source 1 phase B current magnitude
6157
SRC 1 Ib Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase B current angle
6158
SRC 1 Ic Mag
Amps
Source 1 phase C current magnitude
6160
SRC 1 Ic Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase C current angle
6161
SRC 1 In Mag
Amps
Source 1 neutral current magnitude
6163
SRC 1 In Angle
Degrees
Source 1 neutral current angle
6164
SRC 1 Ig RMS
Amps
Source 1 ground current RMS
6166
SRC 1 Ig Mag
Degrees
Source 1 ground current magnitude
6168
SRC 1 Ig Angle
Amps
Source 1 ground current angle
6169
SRC 1 I_0 Mag
Degrees
Source 1 zero-sequence current magnitude
6171
SRC 1 I_0 Angle
Amps
Source 1 zero-sequence current angle
6172
SRC 1 I_1 Mag
Degrees
Source 1 positive-sequence current magnitude
6174
SRC 1 I_1 Angle
Amps
Source 1 positive-sequence current angle
6175
SRC 1 I_2 Mag
Degrees
Source 1 negative-sequence current magnitude
6177
SRC 1 I_2 Angle
Amps
Source 1 negative-sequence current angle
6178
SRC 1 Igd Mag
Degrees
Source 1 differential ground current magnitude
6180
SRC 1 Igd Angle
Amps
Source 1 differential ground current angle
6208
SRC 2 Ia RMS
Amps
6210
SRC 2 Ib RMS
Amps
6212
SRC 2 Ic RMS
Amps
6214
SRC 2 In RMS
Amps
6216
SRC 2 Ia Mag
Amps
6218
SRC 2 Ia Angle
Degrees
6219
SRC 2 Ib Mag
Amps
6221
SRC 2 Ib Angle
Degrees
6222
SRC 2 Ic Mag
Amps
6224
SRC 2 Ic Angle
Degrees
6225
SRC 2 In Mag
Amps
6227
SRC 2 In Angle
Degrees
6228
SRC 2 Ig RMS
Amps
6230
SRC 2 Ig Mag
Degrees
6232
SRC 2 Ig Angle
Amps
6233
SRC 2 I_0 Mag
Degrees
6235
SRC 2 I_0 Angle
Amps
6236
SRC 2 I_1 Mag
Degrees
6238
SRC 2 I_1 Angle
Amps
6239
SRC 2 I_2 Mag
Degrees
GE Multilin
A-1
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
APPENDIX A

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
6241
SRC 2 I_2 Angle
Amps
6242
SRC 2 Igd Mag
Degrees
6244
SRC 2 Igd Angle
Amps
6272
SRC 3 Ia RMS
Amps
6274
SRC 3 Ib RMS
Amps
6276
SRC 3 Ic RMS
Amps
6278
SRC 3 In RMS
Amps
6280
SRC 3 Ia Mag
Amps
6282
SRC 3 Ia Angle
Degrees
6283
SRC 3 Ib Mag
Amps
6285
SRC 3 Ib Angle
Degrees
6286
SRC 3 Ic Mag
Amps
6288
SRC 3 Ic Angle
Degrees
6289
SRC 3 In Mag
Amps
6291
SRC 3 In Angle
Degrees
6292
SRC 3 Ig RMS
Amps
6294
SRC 3 Ig Mag
Degrees
6296
SRC 3 Ig Angle
Amps
6297
SRC 3 I_0 Mag
Degrees
6299
SRC 3 I_0 Angle
Amps
6300
SRC 3 I_1 Mag
Degrees
6302
SRC 3 I_1 Angle
Amps
6303
SRC 3 I_2 Mag
Degrees
6305
SRC 3 I_2 Angle
Amps
6306
SRC 3 Igd Mag
Degrees
6308
SRC 3 Igd Angle
Amps
6336
SRC 4 Ia RMS
Amps
6338
SRC 4 Ib RMS
Amps
6340
SRC 4 Ic RMS
Amps
6342
SRC 4 In RMS
Amps

6344
SRC 4 Ia Mag
Amps
6346
SRC 4 Ia Angle
Degrees
6347
SRC 4 Ib Mag
Amps
6349
SRC 4 Ib Angle
Degrees
6350
SRC 4 Ic Mag
Amps
6352
SRC 4 Ic Angle
Degrees
6353
SRC 4 In Mag
Amps
6355
SRC 4 In Angle
Degrees
6356
SRC 4 Ig RMS
Amps
6358
SRC 4 Ig Mag
Degrees
6360
SRC 4 Ig Angle
Amps
6361
SRC 4 I_0 Mag
Degrees
6363
SRC 4 I_0 Angle
Amps
6364
SRC 4 I_1 Mag
Degrees
6366
SRC 4 I_1 Angle
Amps
6367
SRC 4 I_2 Mag
Degrees
6369
SRC 4 I_2 Angle
Amps
A-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
6370
SRC 4 Igd Mag
Degrees
6372
SRC 4 Igd Angle
Amps
6656
SRC 1 Vag RMS
Volts
Source 1 phase AG voltage RMS
6658
SRC 1 Vbg RMS
Volts
Source 1 phase BG voltage RMS
6660
SRC 1 Vcg RMS
Volts
Source 1 phase CG voltage RMS
6662
SRC 1 Vag Mag
Volts
Source 1 phase AG voltage magnitude
6664
SRC 1 Vag Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase AG voltage angle
6665
SRC 1 Vbg Mag
Volts
Source 1 phase BG voltage magnitude
6667
SRC 1 Vbg Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase BG voltage angle
6668
SRC 1 Vcg Mag
Volts
Source 1 phase CG voltage magnitude
6670
SRC 1 Vcg Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase CG voltage angle
6671
SRC 1 Vab RMS
Volts
Source 1 phase AB voltage RMS
6673
SRC 1 Vbc RMS
Volts
Source 1 phase BC voltage RMS
6675
SRC 1 Vca RMS
Volts
Source 1 phase CA voltage RMS

Source 1 phase AB voltage magnitude
6677
SRC 1 Vab Mag
Volts
6679
SRC 1 Vab Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase AB voltage angle
6680
SRC 1 Vbc Mag
Volts
Source 1 phase BC voltage magnitude
6682
SRC 1 Vbc Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase BC voltage angle
6683
SRC 1 Vca Mag
Volts
Source 1 phase CA voltage magnitude
6685
SRC 1 Vca Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase CA voltage angle
6686
SRC 1 Vx RMS
Volts
Source 1 auxiliary voltage RMS
6688
SRC 1 Vx Mag
Volts
Source 1 auxiliary voltage magnitude
6690
SRC 1 Vx Angle
Degrees
Source 1 auxiliary voltage angle
6691
SRC 1 V_0 Mag
Volts
Source 1 zero-sequence voltage magnitude
6693
SRC 1 V_0 Angle
Degrees
Source 1 zero-sequence voltage angle
6694
SRC 1 V_1 Mag
Volts
Source 1 positive-sequence voltage magnitude
6696
SRC 1 V_1 Angle
Degrees
Source 1 positive-sequence voltage angle
6697
SRC 1 V_2 Mag
Volts
Source 1 negative-sequence voltage magnitude
6699
SRC 1 V_2 Angle
Degrees
Source 1 negative-sequence voltage angle
6720
SRC 2 Vag RMS
Volts
6722
SRC 2 Vbg RMS
Volts
6724
SRC 2 Vcg RMS
Volts
6726
SRC 2 Vag Mag
Volts
6728
SRC 2 Vag Angle
Degrees
6729
SRC 2 Vbg Mag
Volts
6731
SRC 2 Vbg Angle
Degrees
6732
SRC 2 Vcg Mag
Volts
6734
SRC 2 Vcg Angle
Degrees
6735
SRC 2 Vab RMS
Volts
6737
SRC 2 Vbc RMS
Volts
6739
SRC 2 Vca RMS
Volts
6741
SRC 2 Vab Mag
Volts
6743
SRC 2 Vab Angle
Degrees
6744
SRC 2 Vbc Mag
Volts
6746
SRC 2 Vbc Angle
Degrees
6747
SRC 2 Vca Mag
Volts
6749
SRC 2 Vca Angle
Degrees
GE Multilin
A-3
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
APPENDIX A

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
6750
SRC 2 Vx RMS
Volts
6752
SRC 2 Vx Mag
Volts
6754
SRC 2 Vx Angle
Degrees
6755
SRC 2 V_0 Mag
Volts
6757
SRC 2 V_0 Angle
Degrees
6758
SRC 2 V_1 Mag
Volts

6760
SRC 2 V_1 Angle
Degrees
6761
SRC 2 V_2 Mag
Volts
6763
SRC 2 V_2 Angle
Degrees
6784
SRC 3 Vag RMS
Volts
6786
SRC 3 Vbg RMS
Volts
6788
SRC 3 Vcg RMS
Volts
6790
SRC 3 Vag Mag
Volts
6792
SRC 3 Vag Angle
Degrees

6793
SRC 3 Vbg Mag
Volts
6795
SRC 3 Vbg Angle
Degrees
6796
SRC 3 Vcg Mag
Volts
6798
SRC 3 Vcg Angle
Degrees
6799
SRC 3 Vab RMS
Volts
6801
SRC 3 Vbc RMS
Volts
6803
SRC 3 Vca RMS
Volts
6805
SRC 3 Vab Mag
Volts
6807
SRC 3 Vab Angle
Degrees
6808
SRC 3 Vbc Mag
Volts
6810
SRC 3 Vbc Angle
Degrees
6811
SRC 3 Vca Mag
Volts
6813
SRC 3 Vca Angle
Degrees
6814
SRC 3 Vx RMS
Volts
6816
SRC 3 Vx Mag
Volts
6818
SRC 3 Vx Angle
Degrees
6819
SRC 3 V_0 Mag
Volts
6821
SRC 3 V_0 Angle
Degrees
6822
SRC 3 V_1 Mag
Volts
6824
SRC 3 V_1 Angle
Degrees
6825
SRC 3 V_2 Mag
Volts
6827
SRC 3 V_2 Angle
Degrees
6848
SRC 4 Vag RMS
Volts
6850
SRC 4 Vbg RMS
Volts
6852
SRC 4 Vcg RMS
Volts
6854
SRC 4 Vag Mag
Volts
6856
SRC 4 Vag Angle
Degrees
6857
SRC 4 Vbg Mag
Volts
6859
SRC 4 Vbg Angle
Degrees
6860
SRC 4 Vcg Mag
Volts
6862
SRC 4 Vcg Angle
Degrees
6863
SRC 4 Vab RMS
Volts
6865
SRC 4 Vbc RMS
Volts
A-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
6867
SRC 4 Vca RMS
Volts
6869
SRC 4 Vab Mag
Volts
6871
SRC 4 Vab Angle
Degrees
6872
SRC 4 Vbc Mag
Volts
6874
SRC 4 Vbc Angle
Degrees
6875
SRC 4 Vca Mag
Volts
6877
SRC 4 Vca Angle
Degrees
6878
SRC 4 Vx RMS
Volts
6880
SRC 4 Vx Mag
Volts
6882
SRC 4 Vx Angle
Degrees
6883
SRC 4 V_0 Mag
Volts
6885
SRC 4 V_0 Angle
Degrees
6886
SRC 4 V_1 Mag
Volts
6888
SRC 4 V_1 Angle
Degrees
6889
SRC 4 V_2 Mag
Volts
6891
SRC 4 V_2 Angle
Degrees
7168
SRC 1 P
Watts
Source 1 three-phase real power
7170
SRC 1 Pa
Watts
Source 1 phase A real power
7172
SRC 1 Pb
Watts
Source 1 phase B real power
7174
SRC 1 Pc
Watts
Source 1 phase C real power
7176
SRC 1 Q
Vars
Source 1 three-phase reactive power
7178
SRC 1 Qa
Vars
Source 1 phase A reactive power
7180
SRC 1 Qb
Vars
Source 1 phase B reactive power
7182
SRC 1 Qc
Vars
Source 1 phase C reactive power
7184
SRC 1 S
VA
Source 1 three-phase apparent power
7186
SRC 1 Sa
VA
Source 1 phase A apparent power
7188
SRC 1 Sb
VA
Source 1 phase B apparent power
7190
SRC 1 Sc
VA
Source 1 phase C apparent power
7192
SRC 1 PF
---
Source 1 three-phase power factor
7193
SRC 1 Phase A PF
---
Source 1 phase A power factor
7194
SRC 1 Phase B PF
---
Source 1 phase B power factor
7195
SRC 1 Phase C PF
---
Source 1 phase C power factor
7200
SRC 2 P
Watts
7202
SRC 2 Pa
Watts
7204
SRC 2 Pb
Watts
7206
SRC 2 Pc
Watts
7208
SRC 2 Q
Vars
7210
SRC 2 Qa
Vars
7212
SRC 2 Qb
Vars
7214
SRC 2 Qc
Vars
7216
SRC 2 S
VA
7218
SRC 2 Sa
VA
7220
SRC 2 Sb
VA
7222
SRC 2 Sc
VA
7224
SRC 2 PF
---
7225
SRC 2 Phase A PF
---
7226
SRC 2 Phase B PF
---
GE Multilin
A-5
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
APPENDIX A

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
7227
SRC 2 Phase C PF
---
7232
SRC 3 P
Watts
7234
SRC 3 Pa
Watts
7236
SRC 3 Pb
Watts
7238
SRC 3 Pc
Watts
7240
SRC 3 Q
Vars
7242
SRC 3 Qa
Vars
7244
SRC 3 Qb
Vars
7246
SRC 3 Qc
Vars
7248
SRC 3 S
VA
7250
SRC 3 Sa
VA
7252
SRC 3 Sb
VA
7254
SRC 3 Sc
VA
7256
SRC 3 PF
---
7257
SRC 3 Phase A PF
---
7258
SRC 3 Phase B PF
---
7259
SRC 3 Phase C PF
---
7264
SRC 4 P
Watts
7266
SRC 4 Pa
Watts
7268
SRC 4 Pb
Watts
7270
SRC 4 Pc
Watts
7272
SRC 4 Q
Vars
7274
SRC 4 Qa
Vars
7276
SRC 4 Qb
Vars
7278
SRC 4 Qc
Vars
7280
SRC 4 S
VA
7282
SRC 4 Sa
VA
7284
SRC 4 Sb
VA
7286
SRC 4 Sc
VA
7288
SRC 4 PF
---
7289
SRC 4 Phase A PF
---
7290
SRC 4 Phase B PF
---
7291
SRC 4 Phase C PF
---
7552
SRC 1 Frequency
Hz
Source 1 frequency
7553
SRC 2 Frequency
Hz
Source 2 frequency
7554
SRC 3 Frequency
Hz
Source 3 frequency
7555
SRC 4 Frequency
Hz
Source 4 frequency
7680
SRC 1 Demand Ia
Amps
Source 1 phase A current demand
7682
SRC 1 Demand Ib
Amps
Source 1 phase B current demand
7684
SRC 1 Demand Ic
Amps
Source 1 phase C current demand
7686
SRC 1 Demand Watt
Watts
Source 1 real power demand
7688
SRC 1 Demand var
Vars
Source 1 reactive power demand
7690
SRC 1 Demand Va
VA
Source 1 apparent power demand
7696
SRC 2 Demand Ia
Amps
7698
SRC 2 Demand Ib
Amps
7700
SRC 2 Demand Ic
Amps
7702
SRC 2 Demand Watt
Watts
A-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
7704
SRC 2 Demand var
Vars
7706
SRC 2 Demand Va
VA
7712
SRC 3 Demand Ia
Amps
7714
SRC 3 Demand Ib
Amps
7716
SRC 3 Demand Ic
Amps
7718
SRC 3 Demand Watt
Watts
7720
SRC 3 Demand var
Vars
7722
SRC 3 Demand Va
VA
7728
SRC 4 Demand Ia
Amps
7730
SRC 4 Demand Ib
Amps
7732
SRC 4 Demand Ic
Amps
7734
SRC 4 Demand Watt
Watts
7736
SRC 4 Demand var
Vars
7738
SRC 4 Demand Va
VA
9024
Prefault Ia Mag [0]
Amps
Fault 1 pre-fault phase A current magnitude
9026
Prefault Ia Ang [0]
Degrees
Fault 1 pre-fault phase A current angle
9027
Prefault Ib Mag [0]
Amps
Fault 1 pre-fault phase B current magnitude
9029
Prefault Ib Ang [0]
Degrees
Fault 1 pre-fault phase B current angle

Fault 1 pre-fault phase C current magnitude
9030
Prefault Ic Mag [0]
Amps
9032
Prefault Ic Ang [0]
Degrees
Fault 1 pre-fault phase C current angle
9033
Prefault Va Mag [0]
Volts
Fault 1 pre-fault phase A voltage magnitude
9035
Prefault Va Ang [0]
Degrees
Fault 1 pre-fault phase A voltage angle
9036
Prefault Vb Mag [0]
Volts
Fault 1 pre-fault phase B voltage magnitude
9038
Prefault Vb Ang [0]
Degrees
Fault 1 pre-fault phase B voltage angle
9039
Prefault Vc Mag [0]
Volts
Fault 1 pre-fault phase C voltage magnitude
9041
Prefault Vc Ang [0]
Degrees
Fault 1 pre-fault phase C voltage angle
9042
Postfault Ia Mag [0]
Amps
Fault 1 post-fault phase A current magnitude
9044
Postfault Ia Ang [0]
Degrees
Fault 1 post-fault phase A current angle
9045
Postfault Ib Mag [0]
Amps
Fault 1 post-fault phase B current magnitude
9047
Postfault Ib Ang [0]
Degrees
Fault 1 post-fault phase B current angle
9048
Postfault Ic Mag [0]
Amps
Fault 1 post-fault phase C current magnitude
9050
Postfault Ic Ang [0]
Degrees
Fault 1 post-fault phase C current angle
9051
Postfault Va Mag [0]
Volts
Fault 1 post-fault phase A voltage magnitude
9053
Postfault Va Ang [0]
Degrees
Fault 1 post-fault phase A voltage angle
9054
Postfault Vb Mag [0]
Volts
Fault 1 post-fault phase B voltage magnitude
9056
Postfault Vb Ang [0]
Degrees
Fault 1 post-fault phase B voltage angle
9057
Postfault Vc Mag [0]
Volts
Fault 1 post-fault phase C voltage magnitude
9059
Postfault Vc Ang [0]
Degrees
Fault 1 post-fault phase C voltage angle
9060
Fault Type [0]
---
Fault 1 type
9061
Fault Location [0]
---
Fault 1 location
9216
Synchchk 1 Delta V
Volts
Synchrocheck 1 delta voltage
9218
Synchchk 1 Delta F
Hz
Synchrocheck 1 delta frequency
9219
Synchchk 1 Delta Phs
Degrees
Synchrocheck 1 delta phase
9220
Synchchk 2 Delta V
Volts
Synchrocheck 2 delta voltage
9222
Synchchk 2 Delta F
Hz
Synchrocheck 2 delta frequency
9223
Synchchk 2 Delta Phs
Degrees
Synchrocheck 2 delta phase
9344
Local IA Mag
Amps
Local terminal phase A current magnitude
GE Multilin
A-7
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
APPENDIX A

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
9346
Local IB Mag
Amps
Local terminal phase B current magnitude
9348
Local IC Mag
Amps
Local terminal phase C current magnitude
9350
Terminal 1 IA Mag
Amps
Remote terminal 1 phase A current magnitude
9352
Terminal 1 IB Mag
Amps
Remote terminal 1 phase B current magnitude
9354
Terminal 1 IC Mag
Amps
Remote terminal 1 phase C current magnitude
9356
Terminal 2 IA Mag
Amps
Remote terminal 2 phase A current magnitude
9358
Terminal 2 IB Mag
Amps
Remote terminal 2 phase B current magnitude
9360
Terminal 2 IC Mag
Amps
Remote terminal 2 phase C current magnitude
9362
Diff Curr IA Mag
Amps
Differential current phase A magnitude
9364
Diff Curr IB Mag
Amps
Differential current phase B magnitude
9366
Diff Curr IC Mag
Amps
Differential current phase C magnitude
9368
Local IA Angle
Degrees
Local terminal current phase A angle
9369
Local IB Angle
Degrees
Local terminal current phase B angle
9370
Local IC Angle
Degrees
Local terminal current phase C angle
9371
Terminal 1 IA Angle
Degrees
Remote terminal 1 current phase A angle
9372
Terminal 1 IB Angle
Degrees
Remote terminal 1 current phase B angle
9373
Terminal 1 IC Angle
Degrees
Remote terminal 1 current phase C angle
9374
Terminal 2 IA Angle
Degrees
Remote terminal 2 current phase A angle
9375
Terminal 2 IB Angle
Degrees
Remote terminal 2 current phase B angle
9376
Terminal 2 IC Angle
Degrees
Remote terminal 2 current phase C angle
9377
Diff Curr IA Angle
Degrees
Differential current phase A angle
9378
Diff Curr IB Angle
Degrees
Differential current phase B angle
9379
Diff Curr IC Angle
Degrees
Differential current phase C angle
9380
Op Square Curr IA
Amps
Phase A operating square current
9382
Op Square Curr IB
Amps
Phase B operating square current
9384
Op Square Curr IC
Amps
Phase C operating square current
9386
Rest Square Curr IA
Amps
Phase A restraint square current
9388
Rest Square Curr IB
Amps
Phase B restraint square current
9390
Rest Square Curr IC
Amps
Phase C restraint square current
9536
PMU 1 Va Mag
Volts
Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A voltage magnitude
9538
PMU 1 Va Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A voltage angle
9539
PMU 1 Vb Mag
Volts
Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B voltage magnitude
9541
PMU 1 Vb Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B voltage angle
9542
PMU 1 Vc Mag
Volts
Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C voltage magnitude
9544
PMU 1 Vc Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C voltage angle
9545
PMU 1 Vx Mag
Volts
Phasor measurement unit 1 auxiliary voltage magnitude
9547
PMU 1 Vx Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 auxiliary voltage angle
9548
PMU 1 V1 Mag
Volts
Phasor measurement unit 1 positive-sequence voltage magnitude
9550
PMU 1 V1 Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 positive-sequence voltage angle
9551
PMU 1 V2 Mag
Volts
Phasor measurement unit 1 negative-sequence voltage magnitude
9553
PMU 1 V2 Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 negative-sequence voltage angle
9554
PMU 1 V0 Mag
Volts
Phasor measurement unit 1 zero-sequence voltage magnitude
9556
PMU 1 V0 Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 zero-sequence voltage angle
9557
PMU 1 Ia Mag
Amps
Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A current magnitude
9559
PMU 1 Ia Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A current angle
9560
PMU 1 Ib Mag
Amps
Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B current magnitude
9562
PMU 1 Ib Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B current angle
A-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
9563
PMU 1 Ic Mag
Amps
Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C current magnitude
9565
PMU 1 Ic Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C current angle
9566
PMU 1 Ig Mag
Amps
Phasor measurement unit 1 ground current magnitude
9568
PMU 1 Ig Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 ground current angle
9569
PMU 1 I1 Mag
Amps
Phasor measurement unit 1 positive-sequence current magnitude
9571
PMU 1 I1 Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 positive-sequence current angle
9572
PMU 1 I2 Mag
Amps
Phasor measurement unit 1 negative-sequence current magnitude
9574
PMU 1 I2 Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 negative-sequence current angle
9575
PMU 1 I0 Mag
Amps
Phasor measurement unit 1 zero-sequence current magnitude
9577
PMU 1 I0 Angle
Degrees
Phasor measurement unit 1 zero-sequence current angle
9578
PMU 1 Freq
Hz
Phasor measurement unit 1 frequency
9580
PMU 1 df dt
Hz/s
Phasor measurement unit 1 rate of change of frequency
9581
PMU 1 Conf Ch
---
Phasor measurement unit 1 configuration change counter
13504
DCMA Inputs 1 Value
mA
dcmA input 1 actual value
13506
DCMA Inputs 2 Value
mA
13508
DCMA Inputs 3 Value
mA
13510
DCMA Inputs 4 Value
mA
13512
DCMA Inputs 5 Value
mA
13514
DCMA Inputs 6 Value
mA
13516
DCMA Inputs 7 Value
mA
13518
DCMA Inputs 8 Value
mA
13520
DCMA Inputs 9 Value
mA
13522
DCMA Inputs 10 Value
mA
13524
mA
13526
mA
13528
mA
13530
mA
13532
mA
13534
mA
13536
mA
13538
mA
13540
mA
13542
mA
13544
mA
13546
mA
13548
mA
13550
mA
13552
RTD Inputs 1 Value
---
RTD input 1 actual value
13553
RTD Inputs 2 Value
---
13554
RTD Inputs 3 Value
---
13555
RTD Inputs 4 Value
---
13556
RTD Inputs 5 Value
---
13557
RTD Inputs 6 Value
---
13558
RTD Inputs 7 Value
---
13559
RTD Inputs 8 Value
---
13560
RTD Inputs 9 Value
---
13561
RTD Inputs 10 Value
---
GE Multilin
A-9
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
APPENDIX A

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
13562
RTD Inputs 11 Value
---
13563
RTD Inputs 12 Value
---
13564
RTD Inputs 13 Value
---
13565
RTD Inputs 14 Value
---
13566
RTD Inputs 15 Value
---
13567
RTD Inputs 16 Value
---
13568
RTD Inputs 17 Value
---
13569
RTD Inputs 18 Value
---
13570
RTD Inputs 19 Value
---
13571
RTD Inputs 20 Value
---
13572
RTD Inputs 21 Value
---
13573
RTD Inputs 22 Value
---
13574
RTD Inputs 23 Value
---
13575
RTD Inputs 24 Value
---
13576
RTD Inputs 25 Value
---
13577
RTD Inputs 26 Value
---
13578
RTD Inputs 27 Value
---
13579
RTD Inputs 28 Value
---
13580
RTD Inputs 29 Value
---
13581
RTD Inputs 30 Value
---
13582
RTD Inputs 31 Value
---
13583
RTD Inputs 32 Value
---
13584
RTD Inputs 33 Value
---
13585
RTD Inputs 34 Value
---
13586
RTD Inputs 35 Value
---
13587
RTD Inputs 36 Value
---
13588
RTD Inputs 37 Value
---
13589
RTD Inputs 38 Value
---
13590
RTD Inputs 39 Value
---
13591
RTD Inputs 40 Value
---
13592
RTD Inputs 41 Value
---
13593
RTD Inputs 42 Value
---
13594
RTD Inputs 43 Value
---
13595
RTD Inputs 44 Value
---
13596
RTD Inputs 45 Value
---
13597
RTD Inputs 46 Value
---
13598
RTD Inputs 47 Value
---
13599
RTD Inputs 48 Value
---
24459
Active Setting Group
---
Current setting group
32768
Tracking Frequency
Hz
Tracking frequency
39425
FlexElement 1 Value
---
FlexElement 1 actual value
39427
FlexElement 2 Value
---
39429
FlexElement 3 Value
---
39431
FlexElement 4 Value
---
39433
FlexElement 5 Value
---
39435
FlexElement 6 Value
---
39437
FlexElement 7 Value
---
A-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
39439
FlexElement 8 Value
---
45584
GOOSE Analog In 1
---
IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1
45586
GOOSE Analog In 2
---
45588
GOOSE Analog In 3
---
45590
GOOSE Analog In 4
---
45592
GOOSE Analog In 5
---
45594
GOOSE Analog In 6
---
45596
GOOSE Analog In 7
---
45598
GOOSE Analog In 8
---
45600
GOOSE Analog In 9
---
45602
GOOSE Analog In 10
---
45604
GOOSE Analog In 11
---
45606
GOOSE Analog In 12
---
45608
GOOSE Analog In 13
---
45610
GOOSE Analog In 14
---
45612
GOOSE Analog In 15
---
45614
GOOSE Analog In 16
---
61449
PMU Num Triggers
---
Phasor measurement unit recording number of triggers
A.1.2 FLEXINTEGER ITEMS
Table A2: FLEXINTEGER DATA ITEMS

ADDRESS
FLEXINTEGER NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
9736
PMU 1 SOC
seconds
PMU 1 SOC timestamps
9738
PMU 1 FRACSEC
seconds
PMU 1 FRACSEC timestamps
9740
PMU 1 STAT
---
PMU 1 STAT flags
9968
GOOSE UInt Input 1
---
IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 1
9970
GOOSE UInt Input 2
---
9972
GOOSE UInt Input 3
---
9974
GOOSE UInt Input 4
---
9976
GOOSE UInt Input 5
---
9978
GOOSE UInt Input 6
---
9980
GOOSE UInt Input 7
---
9982
GOOSE UInt Input 8
---
9984
GOOSE UInt Input 9
---
9986
GOOSE UInt Input 10
---
9988
GOOSE UInt Input 11
---
9990
GOOSE UInt Input 12
---
9992
GOOSE UInt Input 13
---
9994
GOOSE UInt Input 14
---
9996
GOOSE UInt Input 15
---
9998
GOOSE UInt Input 16
---
GE Multilin
A-11
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
APPENDIX A
A-12
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
APPENDIX B MODBUS COMMUNICATIONSB.1MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
B.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The UR-series relays support a number of communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal
computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most
basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus is available via RS232 or RS485 serial links or via ethernet (using the Modbus/TCP specification). The following description is intended primarily for users who wish to develop their own master communication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. Note that:
The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to
requests issued by a master computer.
For Modbus, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitoring, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands.
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER
The Modbus RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hardware configurations including RS232 and RS485. The relay includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear terminal communications ports that may be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10Base-T, or 10Base-F. Data flow is half-duplex
in all configurations. See chapter 3 for details on communications wiring.
Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity
bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit
data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300).
The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity are available. Refer to the Communications section of chapter 5 for further details.
The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate. The relay will
not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relays slave address (unless the
address is the broadcast address see below).
A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, the relay will
accept any address when the Modbus RTU protocol is used.
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER
Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master transmits a
packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by dead-time on the communications line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive packets. For exact details on packet formatting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code.
Table B1: MODBUS PACKET FORMAT
DESCRIPTION
SIZE
SLAVE ADDRESS
1 byte
FUNCTION CODE
1 byte
DATA
N bytes
CRC
2 bytes
DEAD TIME
3.5 bytes transmission time
SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master
and to perform the desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent
bus contention. All of the relays ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see chapter 5 for
details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an
exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address.
A master transmit packet with slave address 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link
take action based on the packet, but none respond to the master. Broadcast mode is only recognized when associated
with function code 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcast mode slave address 0 will be ignored.
GE Multilin
B-1
APPENDIX B
FUNCTION CODE: This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to perform. See the Supported Function Codes section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indicated by setting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the Exception Responses section
for further details.
DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, settings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master.
CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus includes a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check
(CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus slave device
receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device will not act upon or respond to the packet
thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 Algorithm section for details on calculating the CRC.
DEAD TIME: A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms
at 2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 s at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps
between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves
start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave.
B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM
The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one continuous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial
(11000000000000101B). The 16-bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The
resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no transmission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most significant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder.
A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request.
Table B2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM
SYMBOLS:
ALGORITHM:
B-2
-->
data transfer
16 bit working register
Alow
low order byte of A
Ahigh
high order byte of A
CRC
16 bit CRC-16 result
i,j
loop counters
(+)
logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator
total number of data bytes
Di
i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)
16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed
shr (x)
right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits
are shifted right one location)
1.
FFFF (hex) --> A
2.
0 --> i
3.
0 --> j
4.
Di (+) Alow --> Alow
5.
j + 1 --> j
6.
shr (A)
7.
Is there a carry?
No: go to 8; Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue.
8.
Is j = 8?
No: go to 5; Yes: continue
9.
i + 1 --> i
10.
Is i = N?
11.
A --> CRC
No: go to 3; Yes: continue
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.2MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
Modbus officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports
some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.
FUNCTION CODE
MODBUS DEFINITION
GE MULTILIN DEFINITION
Read holding registers
Read actual values or settings
04
Read holding registers
Read actual values or settings
05
Force single coil
Execute operation
06
Preset single register
Store single setting
10
16
Preset multiple registers
Store multiple settings
HEX
DEC
03
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H)

This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay.
Data registers are always 16-bit (two-byte) values transmitted with high order byte first. The maximum number of registers
that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the Modbus memory map table for exact details on the data registers.
Since some PLC implementations of Modbus only support one of function codes 03h and 04h. The L90 interpretation
allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will
determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting
three register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the values 40, 300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively.
Table B3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION
SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
EXAMPLE (HEX)
11
FUNCTION CODE
04
FUNCTION CODE
04
06
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high
40
BYTE COUNT
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low
50
DATA #1 - high
00
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - high
00
DATA #1 - low
28
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - low
03
DATA #2 - high
01
2C
CRC - low
A7
DATA #2 - low
CRC - high
4A
DATA #3 - high
00
DATA #3 - low
00
CRC - low
0D
CRC - high
60
GE Multilin
B-3
APPENDIX B
B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)
This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are shown in the Summary of operation codes table below.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting the
slave device 11h (17 decimal) to perform a reset. The high and low code value bytes always have the values FF and 00
respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus definition of this function code.
MASTER TRANSMISSION
SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
FUNCTION CODE
05
FUNCTION CODE
05
OPERATION CODE - high
00
OPERATION CODE - high
00
OPERATION CODE - low
01
OPERATION CODE - low
01
CODE VALUE - high
FF
CODE VALUE - high
FF
CODE VALUE - low
00
CODE VALUE - low
00
CRC - low
DF
CRC - low
DF
CRC - high
6A
CRC - high
6A
Table B5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES FOR FUNCTION 05H

OPERATION
CODE (HEX)
DEFINITION
DESCRIPTION
0000
NO OPERATION
Does not do anything.
0001
RESET
Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key.
0005
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS
Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu
command.
0006
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY
Clears all oscillography records.
1000 to 103F
VIRTUAL IN 1 to 64 ON/OFF
Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 64 either ON or OFF.
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)

This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are
always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The following table shows the format of the master and
slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device
11h (17 dec).
MASTER TRANSMISSION
PACKET FORMAT
SLAVE RESPONSE
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
FUNCTION CODE
06
FUNCTION CODE
06
40
40
51
51
DATA - high
00
DATA - high
00
DATA - low
C8
DATA - low
C8
CRC - low
CE
CRC - low
CE
CRC - high
DD
CRC - high
DD
B-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B

B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Setting
registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that can be
stored in a single packet is 60. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows
a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to
slave device 11h (17 decimal).
MASTER TRANSMISSION
SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
EXMAPLE (HEX)
11
FUNCTION CODE
10
FUNCTION CODE
10
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi
40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi
40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo
51
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo
51
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi
00
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi
00
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo
02
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo
02
BYTE COUNT
04
CRC - lo
07
DATA #1 - high order byte
00
CRC - hi
64
DATA #1 - low order byte
C8
DATA #2 - high order byte
00
DATA #2 - low order byte
01
CRC - low order byte
12
CRC - high order byte
62
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES

Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception
response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order
bit of the function code set to 1.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device sending the
unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11.
MASTER TRANSMISSION
SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
B9
FUNCTION CODE
39
FUNCTION CODE
CD
ERROR CODE
01
F2
93
95
GE Multilin
B-5
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
APPENDIX B
B.3FILE TRANSFERS
B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS
a) DESCRIPTION
The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of
files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)"
and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100 in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file from
the UR relay, use the following steps:
1.
Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter
than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case
sensitive.
2.
Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is
not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The
"position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have
read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244.
3.
Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indicates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size.
4.
If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is
only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the previous operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous
block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).
The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus
connections.
b) OTHER PROTOCOLS
All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for
example, TFTP or MMS).
c) COMTRADE, OSCILLOGRAPHY, AND DATA LOGGER FILES
Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7c (02 September 1997). The files may be obtained in either text or binary COMTRADE format.
d) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES
Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. Refer to the Oscillography section in Chapter 5 for additional details.
The Oscillography Number of Triggers register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered (captured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography file
is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the
Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by
periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available.
The Oscillography Number of Records register specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data
per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The Oscillography Available Records register specifies the actual number of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay.
Writing Yes (i.e. the value 1) to the Oscillography Clear Data register clears oscillography data files, clears both the Oscillography Number of Triggers and Oscillography Available Records registers to zero, and sets the Oscillography Last
Cleared Date to the present date and time.
To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames:
OSCnnnn.CFG and OSCnnn.DAT
Replace nnn with the desired oscillography trigger number. For ASCII format, use the following file names
OSCAnnnn.CFG and OSCAnnn.DAT
B-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
e) READING DATA LOGGER FILES

Familiarity with the data logger feature is required to understand this description. Refer to the Data Logger section of Chapter 5 for details. To read the entire data logger in binary COMTRADE format, read the following files.
datalog.cfg and datalog.dat
To read the entire data logger in ASCII COMTRADE format, read the following files.
dataloga.cfg and dataloga.dat
To limit the range of records to be returned in the COMTRADE files, append the following to the filename before writing it:
To read from a specific time to the end of the log: <space> startTime
To read a specific range of records: <space> startTime <space> endTime
Replace <startTime> and <endTime> with Julian dates (seconds since Jan. 1 1970) as numeric text.
f) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES

To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename:
EVT.TXT
To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename:
EVTnnn.TXT (replace nnn with the desired starting record number)
To read from a specific record to another specific record, use the following filename:
EVT.TXT xxxxx yyyyy (replace xxxxx with the starting record number and yyyyy with the ending record number)
g) READING FAULT REPORT FILES
Fault report data has been available via the L90 file retrieval mechanism since UR firmware version 2.00. The file name is
faultReport#####.htm. The ##### refers to the fault report record number. The fault report number is a counter that
indicates how many fault reports have ever occurred. The counter rolls over at a value of 65535. Only the last ten fault
reports are available for retrieval; a request for a non-existent fault report file will yield a null file. The current value fault
report counter is available in Number of Fault Reports Modbus register at location 0x3020.
For example, if 14 fault reports have occurred then the files faultReport5.htm, faultReport6.htm, up to
faultReport14.htm are available to be read. The expected use of this feature has an external master periodically polling the Number of Fault Reports' register. If the value changes, then the master reads all the new files.
The contents of the file is in standard HTML notation and can be viewed via any commercial browser.
B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION
and the faceplate RS232 connection. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
The command password is set up at memory location 4000. Storing a value of 0 removes command password protection.
When reading the password setting, the encrypted value (zero if no password is set) is returned. Command security is
required to change the command password. Similarly, the setting password is set up at memory location 4002. These are
the same settings and encrypted values found in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP PASSWORD SECURITY menu via the
keypad. Enabling password security for the faceplate display will also enable it for Modbus, and vice-versa.
To gain command level security access, the command password must be entered at memory location 4008. To gain setting
level security access, the setting password must be entered at memory location 400A. The entered setting password must
match the current setting password setting, or must be zero, to change settings or download firmware.
GE Multilin
B-7
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
APPENDIX B
Command and setting passwords each have a 30 minute timer. Each timer starts when you enter the particular password,
and is re-started whenever you use it. For example, writing a setting re-starts the setting password timer and writing a command register or forcing a coil re-starts the command password timer. The value read at memory location 4010 can be used
to confirm whether a command password is enabled or disabled (a value of 0 represents disabled). The value read at memory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a setting password is enabled or disabled.
Command or setting password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP/IP connection on which
the entry was made. Passwords must be entered when accessing the relay through other ports or connections, and the
passwords must be re-entered after disconnecting and re-connecting on TCP/IP.
B-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B.4MEMORY MAPPING
B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP
Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 57)

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Product Information (Read Only)

0000
UR Product Type
0 to 65535
---
F001
0002
Product Version
0 to 655.35
---
0.01
F001
1
0
Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)

0010
Serial Number
---
---
---
F203
0020
Manufacturing Date
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
0022
Modification Number
0 to 65535
---
F001
0040
Order Code
---
---
---
F204
Order Code x
0090
Ethernet MAC Address
---
---
---
F072
0093
Reserved (13 items)
---
---
---
F001
00A0
CPU Module Serial Number
---
---
---
F203
(none)
00B0
CPU Supplier Serial Number
---
---
---
F203
(none)
00C0
Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items)
---
---
---
F203
(none)
0 to 4294967295
F143
Self Test Targets (Read Only)

0200
Self Test States (2 items)
Front Panel (Read Only)

0204
LED Column n State, n = 1 to 10 (10 items)
0 to 65535
---
F501
0220
Display Message
---
---
---
F204
(none)
0248
Last Key Pressed
0 to 47
---
F530
0 (None)
0 to 42
---
F190
0 (No key -- use

between real keys)
Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)

0280
Simulated keypress -- write zero before each keystroke
Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (64 modules)

0400
Virtual Input 1 State
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0401
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0402
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0403
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0404
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0405
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0406
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0407
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0408
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0409
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
040A
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
040B
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
040C
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
040D
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
040E
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
040F
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0410
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0411
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0412
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0413
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0414
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0415
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0416
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0417
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0418
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0419
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
041A
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
041B
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
GE Multilin
B-9
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
041C
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
041D
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
041E
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
041F
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0420
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0421
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0422
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0423
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0424
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0425
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0426
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0427
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0428
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0429
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
042A
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
042B
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
042C
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
042D
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
042E
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
042F
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0430
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0431
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0432
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0433
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0434
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0435
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0436
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0437
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0438
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0439
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
043A
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
043B
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
043C
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
043D
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
043E
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
043F
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules)

0800
Digital Counter 1 Value
-2147483647 to
2147483647
---
F004
0802
Digital Counter 1 Frozen
-2147483647 to
2147483647
---
F004
0804
Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
0806
Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp us
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
0808
...Repeated for Digital Counter 2
0810
0818
0820
0828
0830
0838

0 to 65535
---
F001
0 to 65535
---
F502
FlexStates (Read Only)

0900
FlexState Bits (16 items)
Element States (Read Only)

1000
B-10
Element Operate States (64 items)
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
---
---
---
F200
(none)
0 to 65535
---
F001
User Displays Actuals (Read Only)

1080
Formatted user-definable displays (16 items)
Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only)

1200
User Map Values (256 items)
Element Targets (Read Only)

14C0
Target Sequence
0 to 65535
---
F001
14C1
Number of Targets
0 to 65535
---
F001
0 to 65535
---
F001
---
---
---
F200
Element Targets (Read/Write)

14C2
Target to Read
Element Targets (Read Only)

14C3
Target Message
Digital Input/Output States (Read Only)

1500
Contact Input States (6 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1508
Virtual Input States (8 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1510
Contact Output States (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1518
Contact Output Current States (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1520
Contact Output Voltage States (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1528
Virtual Output States (6 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1530
Contact Output Detectors (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
Remote Input/Output States (Read Only)

1540
Remote Device States
0 to 65535
---
F500
1542
Remote Input States (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1550
Remote Devices Online
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
1551
Remote Double-Point Status Input 1 State
0 to 3
---
F605
3 (Bad)
1552
0 to 3
---
F605
3 (Bad)
1553
0 to 3
---
F605
3 (Bad)
1554
0 to 3
---
F605
3 (Bad)
1555
0 to 3
---
F605
3 (Bad)
Direct Input/Output States (Read Only)

15A0
Direct Input 1-1 State (8 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
15A8
Direct Input 1-2 State (8 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
15B0
Direct Input 1 State
0 to 65535
---
F500
15B1
Direct Input 2 State
0 to 65535
---
F500
Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)

1610
Ethernet primary fibre channel status
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
1611
Ethernet secondary fibre channel status
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
Data Logger Actuals (Read Only)

1618
Data logger channel count
0 to 16
channel
F001
1619
Time of oldest available samples
0 to 4294967295
seconds
F050
161B
Time of newest available samples
0 to 4294967295
seconds
F050
161D
Data logger duration
0 to 999.9
days
0.1
F001
0
1 (OK)
Channel Status (Read Only)

1620
Channel 1 Status
1621
Channel 1 Number of Lost Packets
1622
Channel 1 Local Loopback Status
1623
Channel 1 Remote Loopback Status
1626
Channel 1 Loop Delay
1627
Channel 2 Status
0 to 2
---
F134
0 to 65535
---
F001
0 to 2
---
F134
2 (n/a)
2 (n/a)
0 to 2
---
F134
0 to 200
ms
0.1
F001
0 to 2
---
F134
2 (n/a)
1628
Channel 2 Number of Lost Packets
1629
Channel 2 Local Loopback Status
162A
Channel 2 Remote Loopback Status
0 to 2
---
F134
2 (n/a)
162B
Network Status
0 to 2
---
F134
1 (OK)
162E
Channel 2 Loop Delay
0 to 200
ms
0.1
F001
162F
Channel PFLL Status
0 to 2
---
F134
1 (OK)
GE Multilin
0 to 65535
---
F001
0 to 2
---
F134
2 (n/a)
B-11
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
Channel Status Commands (Read/Write Command)

1630
L90 Channel Status Clear
Channel Status Actuals (Read/Write Command)
1638
Channel 1 Asymmetry
-65.535 to 65.535
ms
0.001
F004
1638
Channel 2 Asymmetry
-99.999 to 99.999
ms
0.001
F004
Source Current (Read Only) (6 modules)

1800
Source 1 Phase A Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1802
Source 1 Phase B Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1804
Source 1 Phase C Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1806
Source 1 Neutral Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1808
Source 1 Phase A Current Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
180A
Source 1 Phase A Current Angle
180B
Source 1 Phase B Current Magnitude
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
180D
Source 1 Phase B Current Angle
180E
Source 1 Phase C Current Magnitude
1810
Source 1 Phase C Current Angle
1811
Source 1 Neutral Current Magnitude
1813
Source 1 Neutral Current Angle
1814
Source 1 Ground Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1816
Source 1 Ground Current Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1818
Source 1 Ground Current Angle
1819
Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude
181B
Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle
181C
Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude
181E
Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle
181F
Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude
1821
Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle
1822
Source 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude
1824
Source 1 Differential Ground Current Angle
1825
Reserved (27 items)
1840
...Repeated for Source 2
1880
18C0
1900
1940
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
0
0
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
---
---
---
F001
Source Voltage (Read Only) (6 modules)

1A00
Source 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS
F060
1A02
Source 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS
F060
1A04
Source 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS
F060
0
0
1A06
Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude
1A08
Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle
1A09
Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1A0B
Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle
1A0C
Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1A0E
Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle
1A0F
Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1A11
Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1A13
Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1A15
Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1A17
Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle
1A18
Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude
1A1A
Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle
1A1B
Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude
1A1D
Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle
B-12
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
1A1E
Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS
RANGE
1A20
Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude
1A22
Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle
1A23
Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude
1A25
Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle
1A26
Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude
1A28
Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle
1A29
Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude

Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle
1A2C
Reserved (20 items)
1A40
1A80

1B00
1B40
STEP
1A2B
1AC0
UNITS
FORMAT
DEFAULT
F060
0
0
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
0
0
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
---
---
---
F001
Source Power (Read Only) (6 modules)

1C00
Source 1 Three Phase Real Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
0.001
F060
1C02
Source 1 Phase A Real Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
0.001
F060
1C04
Source 1 Phase B Real Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
0.001
F060
1C06
Source 1 Phase C Real Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
0.001
F060
1C08
Source 1 Three Phase Reactive Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
var
0.001
F060
1C0A
Source 1 Phase A Reactive Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
var
0.001
F060
1C0C
Source 1 Phase B Reactive Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
var
0.001
F060
1C0E
Source 1 Phase C Reactive Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
var
0.001
F060
1C10
Source 1 Three Phase Apparent Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
VA
0.001
F060
1C12
Source 1 Phase A Apparent Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
VA
0.001
F060
1C14
Source 1 Phase B Apparent Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
VA
0.001
F060
1C16
Source 1 Phase C Apparent Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
VA
0.001
F060
1C18
Source 1 Three Phase Power Factor
-0.999 to 1
---
0.001
F013
1C19
Source 1 Phase A Power Factor
-0.999 to 1
---
0.001
F013
1C1A
Source 1 Phase B Power Factor
-0.999 to 1
---
0.001
F013
1C1B
Source 1 Phase C Power Factor
-0.999 to 1
---
0.001
F013
---
---
---
F001
1C1C
Reserved (4 items)
1C20
1C40
1C60
1C80
1CA0
Source Energy (Read Only Non-Volatile) (6 modules)

1D00
Source 1 Positive Watthour
0 to 1000000000000
Wh
0.001
F060
1D02
Source 1 Negative Watthour
0 to 1000000000000
Wh
0.001
F060
1D04
Source 1 Positive Varhour
0 to 1000000000000
varh
0.001
F060
1D06
Source 1 Negative Varhour
0 to 1000000000000
varh
0.001
F060
1D08
Reserved (8 items)
---
---
---
F001
1D10
1D20
GE Multilin
B-13
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
1D30
1D40
1D50
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
Energy Commands (Read/Write Command)
1D60
Energy Clear Command
Source Frequency (Read Only) (6 modules)

1D80
Frequency for Source 1
---
Hz
---
F003
1D82
---
Hz
---
F003
1D84
---
Hz
---
F003
1D86
---
Hz
---
F003
1D88
---
Hz
---
F003
1D8A
---
Hz
---
F003
Source Demand (Read Only) (6 modules)

1E00
Source 1 Demand Ia
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1E02
Source 1 Demand Ib
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1E04
Source 1 Demand Ic
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1E06
Source 1 Demand Watt
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1E08
Source 1 Demand Var
0 to 999999.999
var
0.001
F060
0 to 999999.999
VA
0.001
F060
---
---
---
F001
1E0A
Source 1 Demand Va
1E0C
Reserved (4 items)
1E10
1E20
1E30
1E40
1E50
Source Demand Peaks (Read Only Non-Volatile) (6 modules)

1E80
Source 1 Demand Ia Maximum
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1E82
Source 1 Demand Ia Maximum Date
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
1E84
Source 1 Demand Ib Maximum
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1E86
Source 1 Demand Ib Maximum Date
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
1E88
Source 1 Demand Ic Maximum
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1E8A
Source 1 Demand Ic Maximum Date
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
1E8C
Source 1 Demand Watt Maximum
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1E8E
Source 1 Demand Watt Maximum Date
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
1E90
Source 1 Demand Var
0 to 999999.999
var
0.001
F060
1E92
Source 1 Demand Var Maximum Date
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
1E94
Source 1 Demand Va Maximum
0 to 999999.999
VA
0.001
F060
1E96
Source 1 Demand Va Maximum Date
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
1E98
Reserved (8 items)
---
---
---
F001
1EA0
1EC0
1EE0
1F00
1F20
Breaker flashover (read/write setting) (2 modules)

21A6
Breaker flashover 1 function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
21A7
Breaker flashover 1 side 1 source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
21A8
Breaker flashover 1 side 2 source
0 to 6
---
F211
0 (None)
21A9
Breaker flashover 1 status closed A
0 to 65535
---
F300
21AA
Breaker flashover 1 status closed B
0 to 65535
---
F300
21AB
Breaker flashover 1 status closed C
0 to 65535
---
F300
21AC
Breaker flashover 1 voltage pickup level
0 to 1.5
pu
0.001
F001
850
21AD
Breaker flashover 1 voltage difference pickup level
21AF
Breaker flashover 1 current pickup level
B-14
0 to 100000
F060
1000
0 to 1.5
pu
0.001
F001
600
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
21B0
Breaker flashover 1 pickup delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
100
21B1
Breaker flashover 1 supervision phase A
0 to 65535
---
F300
21B2
Breaker flashover 1 supervision phase B
0 to 65535
---
F300
21B3
Breaker flashover 1 supervision phase C
0 to 65535
---
F300
21B4
Breaker flashover 1 block
0 to 65535
---
F300
21B5
Breaker flashover 1 events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
21B6
Breaker flashover 1 target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-Reset)
21B7
Reserved (4 items)
21BB
...Repeated for breaker flashover 2
---
---
---
F001
0 to 99999999
kA2-cyc
F060
Breaker Arcing Current Actuals (Read Only Non-Volatile) (2 modules)

21E0
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Phase A
0 to 99999999
kA2-cyc
F060
21E2
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Phase B
0 to 99999999
kA2-cyc
F060
21E4
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Phase C
0 to 99999999
kA2-cyc
F060
21E6
Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase A
0 to 65535
ms
F001
21E7
Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase B
0 to 65535
ms
F001
21E8
Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase C
0 to 65535
ms
F001
21E9
Breaker 1 Operating Time
0 to 65535
ms
F001
21EA
...Repeated for Breaker Arcing Current 2
Breaker Arcing Current Commands (Read/Write Command) (2 modules)

2224
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Clear Command
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
2225
Breaker 2 Arcing Current Clear Command
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
Passwords Unauthorized Access (Read/Write Command)

2230
Reset Unauthorized Access
Fault Location (Read Only) (5 modules)

2340
Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Current Magnitude
2342
Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Current Angle
2343
Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Current Magnitude
2345
Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Current Angle
2346
Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Current Magnitude
2348
Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Current Angle
2349
Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Voltage Magnitude
234B
Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Voltage Angle
234C
Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Voltage Magnitude
234E
Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Voltage Angle
234F
Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Voltage Magnitude
2351
Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Voltage Angle
2352
Fault 1 Phase A Current Magnitude
2354
Fault 1 Phase A Current Angle
2355
Fault 1 Phase B Current Magnitude
2357
Fault 1 Phase B Current Angle
2358
Fault 1 Phase C Current Magnitude
235A
Fault 1 Phase C Current Angle
235B
Fault 1 Phase A Voltage Magnitude
235D
Fault 1 Phase A Voltage Angle
235E
Fault 1 Phase B Voltage Magnitude
2360
Fault 1 Phase B Voltage Angle
2361
Fault 1 Phase C Voltage Magnitude
2363
Fault 1 Phase C Voltage Angle
2364
Fault 1 Type
2365
Fault 1 Location based on Line length units (km or miles)
2366
...Repeated for Fault 2
238C
23B2
23D8
GE Multilin
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
0
0
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 11
---
F148
0 (NA)
-3276.7 to 3276.7
---
0.1
F002
B-15
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
F060
Synchrocheck Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)

2400
Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage
2402
Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency
0 to 655.35
Hz
0.01
F001
2403
Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase
0 to 179.9
degrees
0.1
F001
2404
...Repeated for Synchrocheck 2

0
Autoreclose Status (Read Only) (6 modules)

2410
Autoreclose 1 Count
0 to 65535
---
F001
2411
Autoreclose 2 Count
0 to 65535
---
F001
2412
Autoreclose 3 Count
0 to 65535
---
F001
2413
Autoreclose 4 Count
0 to 65535
---
F001
2414
Autoreclose 5 Count
0 to 65535
---
F001
2415
Autoreclose 6 Count
0 to 65535
---
F001
Current Differential (Read Only)

2480
Local IA Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2482
Local IB Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2484
Local IC Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2486
Terminal 1 IA Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2488
Terminal 1 IB Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
248A
Terminal 1 IC Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
248C
Terminal 2 IA Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
248E
Terminal 2 IB Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2490
Terminal 2 IC Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2492
Differential Current IA Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2494
Differential Current IB Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2496
Differential Current IC Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2498
Local IA Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
2499
Local IB Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
249A
Local IC Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
249B
Terminal 1 IA Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
249C
Terminal 1 IB Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
249D
Terminal 1 IC Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
249E
Terminal 2 IA Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
249F
Terminal 2 IB Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
24A0
Terminal 2 IC Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
24A1
Differential Current IA Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
24A2
Differential Current IB Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
24A3
Differential Current IC Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
24A4
Op Square Current IA
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
24A6
Op Square Current IB
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
24A8
Op Square Current IC
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
24AA
Restraint Square Current IA
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
24AC
Restraint Square Current IB
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
24AE
Restraint Square Current IC
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
24B0
Restraint Current IA
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
24B2
Restraint Current IB
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
24B4
Restraint Current IC
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
24B6
Differential Current IG Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
24B8
Differential Current IG Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
24B9
Restraint Current IG
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
24BB
Local IG Magnitude
24BD
Local IG Angle
24BE
Terminal 1 IG Magnitude
24C0
Terminal 1 IG Angle
B-16
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
24C1
Terminal 2 IG Magnitude
24C3
Terminal 2 IG Angle
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0
0
Phasor Measurement Unit actual values (Read Only) (4 modules)

2540
PMU 1 Phase A Voltage Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2542
PMU Unit 1 Phase A Voltage Angle
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
2543
PMU 1 Phase B Voltage Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2545
PMU 1 Phase B Voltage Angle
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
2546
PMU 1 Phase C Voltage Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2548
PMU 1 Phase C Voltage Angle
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2549
PMU 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude
254B
PMU 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle
254C
PMU 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude
254E
PMU 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle
254F
PMU 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude
2551
PMU 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
2552
PMU 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
2554
PMU 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle
2555
PMU 1 Phase A Current Magnitude
2557
PMU 1 Phase A Current Angle
2558
PMU 1 Phase B Current Magnitude
255A
PMU 1 Phase B Current Angle
255B
PMU 1 Phase C Current Magnitude
255D
PMU 1 Phase C Current Angle
255E
PMU 1 Ground Current Magnitude
2560
PMU 1 Ground Current Angle
2561
PMU 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude
2563
PMU 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle
2564
PMU 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude
2566
PMU 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle
2567
PMU 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude
2569
PMU 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle
256A
PMU 1 Frequency
256C
PMU 1 df/dt
256D
PMU 1 Configuration Change Counter
256E
Reserved (4 items)
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
0
0
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
0.1
F002
2 to 90
Hz
0.001
F003
-327.67 to 327.67
Hz/s
0.01
F002
0 to 655.35
0 to 1
0.01
F001
---
F001
0
0
Phasor measurement unit integer values (read only actual value registers)
2608
PMU 1 SOC timestamp
0 to 4294967295
seconds
F003
260A
PMU 1 FRAMESEC timestamp
0 to 4294967295
seconds
F003
260C
PMU 1 STAT flags
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
Remote double-point status inputs (read/write setting registers)

2620
Remote double-point status input 1 device
1 to 32
---
F001
2621
Remote double-point status input 1 item
0 to 128
---
F156
0 (None)
2622
Remote double-point status input 1 name
1 to 64
---
F205
"Rem Ip 1"
2628
Remote double-point status input 1 events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
2629
... Repeated for double-point status input 2
2632
263B
2644
IEC 61850 GGIO5 configuration (read/write setting registers)

26B0
IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 1 operand
---
---
---
F612
26B1
---
---
---
F612
26B2
---
---
---
F612
26B3
---
---
---
F612
26B4
---
---
---
F612
GE Multilin
B-17
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
26B5
---
---
---
F612
26B6
---
---
---
F612
26B7
---
---
---
F612
26B8
---
---
---
F612
26B9
---
---
---
F612
26BA
---
---
---
F612
26BB
---
---
---
F612
26BC
---
---
---
F612
26BD
---
---
---
F612
26BE
---
---
---
F612
26BF
---
---
---
F612
IEC 61850 received integers (read only actual values)

26F0
IEC 61850 received uinteger 1
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
26F2
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
26F4
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
26F6
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
26F8
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
26FA
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
26FC
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
26FE
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
2700
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
2702
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
2704
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
2706
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
2708
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
270A
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
270C
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
270E
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0 (Off)
Expanded FlexStates (Read Only)

2B00
FlexStates, one per register (256 items)
Expanded Digital Input/Output states (Read Only)

2D00
Contact Input States, one per register (96 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
2D80
Contact Output States, one per register (64 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
2E00
Virtual Output States, one per register (96 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
Expanded Remote Input/Output Status (Read Only)

2F00
Remote Device States, one per register (16 items)
0 to 1
---
F155
0 (Offline)
2F80
Remote Input States, one per register (64 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
Oscillography Values (Read Only)

3000
Oscillography Number of Triggers
0 to 65535
---
F001
3001
Oscillography Available Records
0 to 65535
---
F001
3002
Oscillography Last Cleared Date
0 to 400000000
---
F050
3004
Oscillography Number Of Cycles Per Record
0 to 65535
---
F001
Oscillography Commands (Read/Write Command)

3005
Oscillography Force Trigger
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
3011
Oscillography Clear Data
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 65535
---
F001
Fault Report Indexing (Read Only Non-Volatile)

3020
Number of Fault Reports
Fault Report Actuals (Read Only Non-Volatile) (15 modules)

3030
Fault Report 1 Time
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
3032
Fault Report 2 Time
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
3034
Fault Report 3 Time
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
3036
Fault Report 4 Time
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
3038
Fault Report 5 Time
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
303A
Fault Report 6 Time
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
B-18
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
303C
Fault Report 7 Time
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
DEFAULT
0
303E
Fault Report 8 Time
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
3040
Fault Report 9 Time
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
3042
Fault Report 10 Time
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
3044
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
3046
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
3048
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
304A
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
304C
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
---
---
---
F204
(none)
0
Modbus file transfer (read/write)

3100
Name of file to read
Modbus file transfer values (read only)

3200
Character position of current block within file
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
3202
Size of currently-available data block
0 to 65535
---
F001
3203
Block of data from requested file (122 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
Event recorder actual values (read only)

3400
Events Since Last Clear
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
3402
Number of Available Events
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
3404
Event Recorder Last Cleared Date
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
Event recorder commands (read/write)

3406
Event Recorder Clear Command
DCMA Input Values (Read Only) (24 modules)

34C0
DCMA Inputs 1 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34C2
DCMA Inputs 2 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34C4
DCMA Inputs 3 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34C6
DCMA Inputs 4 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34C8
DCMA Inputs 5 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34CA
DCMA Inputs 6 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34CC
DCMA Inputs 7 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34CE
DCMA Inputs 8 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34D0
DCMA Inputs 9 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34D2
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34D4
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34D6
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34D8
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34DA
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34DC
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34DE
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34E0
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34E2
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34E4
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34E6
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34E8
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34EA
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34EC
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34EE
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
RTD Input Values (Read Only) (48 modules)

34F0
RTD Input 1 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F1
RTD Input 2 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F2
RTD Input 3 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F3
RTD Input 4 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F4
RTD Input 5 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F5
RTD Input 6 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F6
RTD Input 7 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
GE Multilin
B-19
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
34F7
RTD Input 8 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
DEFAULT
0
34F8
RTD Input 9 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F9
RTD Input 10 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34FA
RTD Input 11 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34FB
RTD Input 12 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34FC
RTD Input 13 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34FD
RTD Input 14 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34FE
RTD Input 15 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34FF
RTD Input 16 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3500
RTD Input 17 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3501
RTD Input 18 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3502
RTD Input 19 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3503
RTD Input 20 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3504
RTD Input 21 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3505
RTD Input 22 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3506
RTD Input 23 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3507
RTD Input 24 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3508
RTD Input 25 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3509
RTD Input 26 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
350A
RTD Input 27 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
350B
RTD Input 28 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
350C
RTD Input 29 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
350D
RTD Input 30 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
350E
RTD Input 31 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
350F
RTD Input 32 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3510
RTD Input 33 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3511
RTD Input 34 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3512
RTD Input 35 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3513
RTD Input 36 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3514
RTD Input 37 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3515
RTD Input 38 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3516
RTD Input 39 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3517
RTD Input 40 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3518
RTD Input 41 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3519
RTD Input 42 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
351A
RTD Input 43 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
351B
RTD Input 44 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
351C
RTD Input 45 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
351D
RTD Input 46 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
351E
RTD Input 47 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
351F
RTD Input 48 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
Passwords (Read/Write Command)

4000
Command Password Setting
Passwords (Read/Write Setting)

4002
Setting Password Setting
Passwords (Read/Write)
4008
Command Password Entry
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
400A
Setting Password Entry
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
Passwords (read only actual values)

4010
Command password status
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
4011
Setting password status
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
Passwords (read/write settings)

4012
Control password access timeout
5 to 480
minutes
F001
4013
Setting password access timeout
5 to 480
minutes
F001
30
B-20
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
4014
Invalid password attempts
REGISTER NAME
2 to 5
---
F001
DEFAULT
3
4015
Password lockout duration
5 to 60
minutes
F001
4016
Password access events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
4017
Local setting authorization
1 to 65535
---
F300
4018
Remote setting authorization
0 to 65535
---
F300
4019
Access authorization timeout
5 to 480
minutes
F001
30
0 to 65535
---
F300
User Display Invoke (Read/Write Setting)

4040
Invoke and Scroll Through User Display Menu Operand
LED Test (Read/Write Setting)

4048
LED Test Function
4049
LED Test Control
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0
0 (English)
Preferences (Read/Write Setting)

404F
Language
0 to 3
---
F531
4050
Flash Message Time
0.5 to 10
0.1
F001
10
4051
Default Message Timeout
10 to 900
F001
300
4052
Default Message Intensity
0 to 3
---
F101
0 (25%)
4053
Screen Saver Feature
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
4054
Screen Saver Wait Time
1 to 65535
min
F001
30
4055
Current Cutoff Level
0.002 to 0.02
pu
0.001
F001
20
4056
Voltage Cutoff Level
0.1 to 1
0.1
F001
10
Communications (Read/Write Setting)

407E
COM1 minimum response time
0 to 1000
ms
10
F001
407F
COM2 minimum response time
0 to 1000
ms
10
F001
4080
Modbus Slave Address
1 to 254
---
F001
254
4083
RS485 Com1 Baud Rate
0 to 11
---
F112
8 (115200)
4084
RS485 Com1 Parity
0 to 2
---
F113
0 (None)
4085
RS485 Com2 Baud Rate
0 to 11
---
F112
8 (115200)
4086
RS485 Com2 Parity
0 to 2
---
F113
0 (None)
4087
IP Address
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
56554706
4089
IP Subnet Mask
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
4294966272
408B
Gateway IP Address
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
56554497
408D
Network Address NSAP
---
---
---
F074
409A
DNP Channel 1 Port
0 to 4
---
F177
0 (None)
0 (None)
409B
DNP Channel 2 Port
409C
DNP Address
0 to 4
---
F177
0 to 65519
---
F001
409D
Reserved
0 to 1
---
F001
409E
DNP Client Addresses (2 items)
40A3
TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
1 to 65535
---
F001
502
40A4
40A5
TCP/UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol
1 to 65535
---
F001
20000
TCP Port Number for the HTTP (Web Server) Protocol
1 to 65535
---
F001
80
40A6
Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol
1 to 65535
---
F001
69
40A7
Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP Protocol

(zero means automatic) (2 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
0
0 (Disabled)
40A9
DNP Unsolicited Responses Function
0 to 1
---
F102
40AA
DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout
0 to 60
F001
40AB
DNP unsolicited responses maximum retries
1 to 255
---
F001
10
40AC
DNP unsolicited responses destination address
0 to 65519
---
F001
40AD
Ethernet operation mode
0 to 1
---
F192
0 (Half-Duplex)
40AE
DNP current scale factor
0 to 8
---
F194
2 (1)
40AF
DNP voltage scale factor
0 to 8
---
F194
2 (1)
40B0
DNP power scale factor
0 to 8
---
F194
2 (1)
40B1
DNP energy scale factor
0 to 8
---
F194
2 (1)
40B2
DNP power scale factor
0 to 8
---
F194
2 (1)
40B3
DNP other scale factor
0 to 8
---
F194
2 (1)
GE Multilin
B-21
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
40B4
DNP current default deadband
0 to 65535
---
F001
DEFAULT
30000
40B6
DNP voltage default deadband
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40B8
DNP power default deadband
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40BA
DNP energy default deadband
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40BE
DNP other default deadband
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40C0
DNP IIN time synchronization bit period
1 to 10080
min
F001
1440
40C1
DNP message fragment size
30 to 2048
---
F001
240
40C2
DNP client address 3
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
40C4
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
40C6
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
40C8
DNP number of paired binary output control points
0 to 32
---
F001
40C9
DNP TCP connection timeout
10 to 65535
---
F001
120
40CA
Reserved (22 items)
40E0
TCP port number for the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
40E1
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol function
40E2
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol common address of ASDU
40E3
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol cyclic data transmit period
0 to 1
---
F001
1 to 65535
---
F001
2404
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F001
1 to 65535
F001
60
30000
40E4
IEC 60870-5-104 current default threshold
0 to 65535
---
F001
40E6
IEC 60870-5-104 voltage default threshold
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40E8
IEC 60870-5-104 power default threshold
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40EA
IEC 60870-5-104 energy default threshold
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40EC
IEC 60870-5-104 power default threshold
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40EE
IEC 60870-5-104 other default threshold
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40F0
IEC 60870-5-104 client address (5 items)
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
4104
IEC 60870-5-104 redundancy port
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
4005
Reserved (59 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
4140
DNP object 1 default variation
1 to 2
---
F001
4141
1 to 3
---
F001
4142
0 to 3
---
F523
0 (1)
4143
0 to 3
---
F524
0 (1)
4144
0 to 3
---
F523
0 (1)
0 (1)
4145
0 to 3
---
F523
4146
1 to 5
---
F001
4147
0 to 5
---
F525
0 (1)
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
3232235778
1 to 65535
---
F001
502
Ethernet switch (Read/Write Setting)

4148
Ethernet switch IP address
414A
Ethernet switch Modbus IP port number
414B
Ethernet switch Port 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
414C
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
414D
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
414E
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
414F
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
4150
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
Ethernet switch (Read Only Actual Values)

4151
Ethernet switch MAC address
---
---
F072
4154
Ethernet switch Port 1 Status
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
4155
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
4156
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
4157
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
4158
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
4159
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
415A
Switch Firmware Version
0.00 to 99.99
---
0.01
F001
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
Simple Network Time Protocol (Read/Write Setting)

4168
B-22
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) function
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
4169
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server IP address
REGISTER NAME
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
DEFAULT
0
416B
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) UDP port number
1 to 65535
---
F001
123
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
---
---
---
F600
0 to 1
---
F260
0 (continuous)
Data Logger Commands (Read/Write Command)

4170
Data Logger Clear
Data Logger (Read/Write Setting)

4181
Data Logger Channel Settings (16 items)
4191
Data Logger Mode
4192
Data Logger Trigger
4193
Data Logger Rate
0 to 65535
---
F300
15 to 3600000
ms
F003
60000
0 to 235959
---
F050
0
0
Clock (Read/Write Command)

41A0
Real Time Clock Set Time
Clock (Read/Write Setting)

41A2
SR Date Format
0 to 4294967295
---
F051
41A4
SR Time Format
0 to 4294967295
---
F052
41A6
IRIG-B Signal Type
0 to 2
---
F114
0 (None)
41A7
Clock Events Enable / Disable
0 (Disabled)
41A8
Time Zone Offset from UTC
41A9
0 to 1
---
F102
24 to 24
hours
0.5
F002
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
41AA
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Month
0 to 11
---
F237
0 (January)
41AB
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Day
0 to 6
---
F238
0 (Sunday)
41AC
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Day Instance
0 to 4
---
F239
0 (First)
41AD
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Hour
0 to 23
---
F001
41AE
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Month
0 to 11
---
F237
0 (January)
41AF
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Day
0 to 6
---
F238
0 (Sunday)
41B0
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Day Instance
0 to 4
---
F239
0 (First)
41B1
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Hour
0 to 23
---
F001
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
Fault Report Commands (Read/Write Command)

41B2
Fault Reports Clear Data Command
Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)

41C0
Oscillography Number of Records
1 to 64
---
F001
41C1
Oscillography Trigger Mode
0 to 1
---
F118
0 (Auto. Overwrite)
50
41C2
Oscillography Trigger Position
0 to 100
F001
41C3
Oscillography Trigger Source
0 to 65535
---
F300
41C4
Oscillography AC Input Waveforms
0 to 4
---
F183
2 (16 samples/cycle)
41D0
Oscillography Analog Channel n (16 items)
0 to 65535
---
F600
4200
Oscillography Digital Channel n (63 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
Trip and Alarm LEDs (Read/Write Setting)

4260
Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
4261
Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)

4280
FlexLogic Operand to Activate LED
4281
User LED type (latched or self-resetting)
4282
...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 2
4284
4286
4288
428A
428C
428E
4290
4292
4294
4296
4298
GE Multilin
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F127
1 (Self-Reset)
B-23
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
429A
429C
429E
42A0
42A2
42A4
42A6
42A8
42AA
42AC
42AE
42B0
42B2
42B4
42B6
42B8
42BA
42BC
42BE
42C0
42C2
42C4
42C6
42C8
42CA
42CC
42CE
42D0
42D2
42D4
42D6
42D8
42DA
42DC
42DE
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 1
---
---
F133
0 (Not Programmed)
---
---
F202
Relay-1
1 (Enabled)
Installation (Read/Write Setting)

43E0
Relay Programmed State
43E1
Relay Name
User Programmable Self Tests (Read/Write Setting)

4441
User Programmable Detect Ring Break Function
0 to 1
---
F102
4442
User Programmable Direct Device Off Function
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
4443
User Programmable Remote Device Off Function
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
4444
User Programmable Primary Ethernet Fail Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
4445
User Programmable Secondary Ethernet Fail Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
4446
User Programmable Battery Fail Function
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
4447
User Programmable SNTP Fail Function
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
4448
User Programmable IRIG-B Fail Function
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
4449
User Programmable Ethernet Switch Fail Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
CT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)

4480
Phase CT 1 Primary
4481
Phase CT 1 Secondary
4482
Ground CT 1 Primary
4483
Ground CT 1 Secondary
4484
...Repeated for CT Bank 2
B-24
1 to 65000
F001
0 to 1
---
F123
0 (1 A)
1 to 65000
F001
0 to 1
---
F123
0 (1 A)
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
4488
448C
4490
4494
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)

4500
Phase VT 1 Connection
0 to 1
---
F100
0 (Wye)
4501
Phase VT 1 Secondary
50 to 240
0.1
F001
664
4502
Phase VT 1 Ratio
1 to 24000
:1
F060
4504
Auxiliary VT 1 Connection
0 to 6
---
F166
1 (Vag)
4505
Auxiliary VT 1 Secondary
50 to 240
0.1
F001
664
4506
Auxiliary VT 1 Ratio
1 to 24000
:1
F060
4508
...Repeated for VT Bank 2
4510
...Repeated for VT Bank 3

SRC 1"
Source Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)

4580
Source 1 Name
---
---
---
F206
4583
Source 1 Phase CT
0 to 63
---
F400
4584
Source 1 Ground CT
0 to 63
---
F400
4585
Source 1 Phase VT
0 to 63
---
F400
4586
Source 1 Auxiliary VT
0 to 63
---
F400
4587
458E
4595
459C
45A3
Power System (Read/Write Setting)

4600
Nominal Frequency
25 to 60
Hz
F001
60
4601
Phase Rotation
0 to 1
---
F106
0 (ABC)
4602
Frequency And Phase Reference
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
4603
Frequency Tracking Function
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
2
87L Power System (Read/Write Setting)

4610
Number of Terminals
2 to 3
---
F001
4611
Number of Channels
1 to 2
---
F001
4612
Charging Current Compensation
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
4613
Positive Sequence Reactance
0.1 to 65.535
kohms
0.001
F001
100
4614
Zero Sequence Reactance
0.1 to 65.535
kohms
0.001
F001
100
4615
Zero Sequence Current Removal
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
4616
Local Relay ID
0 to 255
---
F001
4617
Terminal 1 ID
0 to 255
---
F001
4618
Terminal 2 ID
0 to 255
---
F001
4619
Channel Asymmetry Compensation
0 to 65535
---
F300
461A
Block GPS Time Reference
0 to 65535
---
F300
461B
Maximum Channel Asymmetry
0 to 10
ms
0.1
F001
15
461C
Round Trip Time
0 to 10
ms
0.1
F001
15
0 (Disabled)
Breaker control (read/write settings)

4700
Breaker 1 function
0 to 1
---
F102
4701
Breaker 1 name
---
---
---
F206
Bkr 1"
4704
Breaker 1 mode
0 to 1
---
F157
0 (3-Pole)
4705
Breaker 1 open
0 to 65535
---
F300
4706
Breaker 1 close
0 to 65535
---
F300
4707
Breaker 1 phase A / three-pole closed
0 to 65535
---
F300
4708
Breaker 1 phase B closed
0 to 65535
---
F300
4709
Breaker 1 phase C closed
0 to 65535
---
F300
470A
Breaker 1 external alarm
0 to 65535
---
F300
470B
Breaker 1 alarm delay
0 to 1000000
0.001
F003
GE Multilin
B-25
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
470D
Breaker 1 pushbutton control
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0
470E
Breaker 1 manual close recall time
0 to 1000000
0.001
F003
4710
Breaker 1 out of service
0 to 65535
---
F300
4711
Breaker 1 block open
0 to 65535
---
F300
4712
Breaker 1 block close
0 to 65535
---
F300
4713
Breaker 1 phase A / three-pole opened
0 to 65535
---
F300
4714
Breaker 1 phase B opened
0 to 65535
---
F300
4715
Breaker 1 phase C opened
0 to 65535
---
F300
4716
Breaker 1 operate time
0 to 2
0.001
F001
70
4717
Breaker 1 events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
---
---
4718
Reserved
4719
...Repeated for breaker 2
4732
474B
Synchrocheck (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)

47A0
Synchrocheck 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
47A1
Synchrocheck 1 V1 Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
47A2
Synchrocheck 1 V2 Source
0 to 5
---
F167
1 (SRC 2)
47A3
Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Voltage Difference
0 to 400000
F060
10000
47A5
Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Angle Difference
0 to 100
degrees
F001
30
47A6
Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Frequency Difference
0 to 2
Hz
0.01
F001
100
47A7
Synchrocheck 1 Dead Source Select
0 to 5
---
F176
1 (LV1 and DV2)
47A8
Synchrocheck 1 Dead V1 Maximum Voltage
0 to 1.25
pu
0.01
F001
30
47A9
Synchrocheck 1 Dead V2 Maximum Voltage
0 to 1.25
pu
0.01
F001
30
47AA
Synchrocheck 1 Live V1 Minimum Voltage
0 to 1.25
pu
0.01
F001
70
47AB
Synchrocheck 1 Live V2 Minimum Voltage
0 to 1.25
pu
0.01
F001
70
47AC
Synchrocheck 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
0 (Disabled)
47AD
Synchrocheck 1 Events
47AE
Synchrocheck 1 Block
47AF
Synchrocheck 1 Frequency Hysteresis
47B0
...Repeated for Synchrocheck 2
0 to 1
---
F102
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 0.1
Hz
0.01
F001
Demand (Read/Write Setting)

47D0
Demand Current Method
0 to 2
---
F139
0 (Thrm. Exponential)
47D1
Demand Power Method
0 to 2
---
F139
0 (Thrm. Exponential)
47D2
Demand Interval
47D3
Demand Input
0 to 5
---
F132
2 (15 MIN)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
Demand (Read/Write Command)

47D4
Demand Clear Record
Flexcurves A and B (Read/Write Settings)

4800
FlexCurve A (120 items)
0 to 65535
ms
F011
48F0
FlexCurve B (120 items)
0 to 65535
ms
F011
0 to 65535
---
F001
Modbus User Map (Read/Write Setting)

4A00
Modbus Address Settings for User Map (256 items)
User Displays Settings (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

4C00
User-Definable Display 1 Top Line Text
---
---
---
F202
4C0A
User-Definable Display 1 Bottom Line Text
---
---
---
F202
4C14
Modbus Addresses of Display 1 Items (5 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
4C19
Reserved (7 items)
---
---
---
F001
4C20
...Repeated for User-Definable Display 2
4C40
4C60
4C80
4CA0
4CC0
B-26
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
4CE0
RANGE
4D00
4D20
4D40
4D60
4D80
4DA0
4DC0
4DE0
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (12 modules)

4E00
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Function
0 to 2
---
F109
2 (Disabled)
4E01
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Top Line
---
---
---
F202
(none)
4E0B
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text
---
---
---
F202
(none)
4E15
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text
---
---
---
F202
(none)
4E1F
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop-Out Time
0 to 60
0.05
F001
4E20
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
4E21
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events
4E22
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 LED Operand
4E23
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Delay
4E24
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Function
4E25
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Local Lock
4E26
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Message Priority
4E27
4E28
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 600
0.05
F001
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 2
---
F220
0 (Disabled)
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Remote Lock
0 to 65535
---
F300
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
4E29
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Set
0 to 65535
---
F300
4E2A
...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 2
0 to 65535
---
F300
16384
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
F205
RTD Ip 1
0 to 3
---
F174
0 (100 ohm Platinum)
4E54
4E7E
4EA8
4ED2
4EFC
4F26
4F50
4F7A
4FA4
4FCE
Flexlogic (Read/Write Setting)

5000
FlexLogic Entry (512 items)
RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)

5400
RTD Input 1 Function
5401
RTD Input 1 ID
5407
RTD Input 1 Type
5413
...Repeated for RTD Input 2
5426
5439
544C
545F
5472
5485
5498
54AB
54BE
54D1
54E4
GE Multilin
B-27
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
54F7
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 (millisecond)
550A
551D
5530
5543
5556
5569
557C
558F
55A2
55B5
55C8
55DB
55EE
5601
5614
5627
563A
564D
5660
5673
5686
5699
56AC
56BF
56D2
56E5
56F8
570B
571E
5731
5744
5757
576A
577D
Flexlogic Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)

5800
FlexLogic Timer 1 Type
0 to 2
---
F129
5801
FlexLogic Timer 1 Pickup Delay
0 to 60000
---
F001
5802
FlexLogic Timer 1 Dropout Delay
0 to 60000
---
F001
5803
Reserved (5 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
5808
...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 2
5810
5818
5820
5828
5830
5838
5840
5848
5850
5858
5860
5868
5870
B-28
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
5878
5880
5888
5890
5898
58A0
58A8
58B0
58B8
58C0
58C8
58D0
58D8
58E0
58E8
58F0
58F8
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Phase Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)

5900
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
5901
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (Disabled)
0 (SRC 1)
5902
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Input
0 to 1
---
F122
0 (Phasor)
5903
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
5904
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Curve
0 to 16
---
F103
0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5905
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier
0 to 600
---
0.01
F001
100
5906
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Reset
0 to 1
---
F104
0 (Instantaneous)
5907
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Voltage Restraint
0 (Disabled)
5908
Phase TOC 1 Block For Each Phase (3 items)
590B
0 to 1
---
F102
0 to 65535
---
F300
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
590C
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
590D
Reserved (3 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
5910
...Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 2
5920
5930
5940
5950
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)

5A00
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
5A01
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
5A02
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
5A03
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
5A04
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
5A05
Phase IOC1 Block For Phase A
0 to 65535
---
F300
5A06
Phase IOC1 Block For Phase B
0 to 65535
---
F300
5A07
Phase IOC1 Block For Phase C
0 to 65535
---
F300
5A08
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
5A09
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
5A0A
Reserved (6 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
5A10
...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
5A20
5A30
5A40
5A50
5A60
5A70
GE Multilin
B-29
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
5A80
RANGE
5A90
5AA0
5AB0
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 (Disabled)
Neutral Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)

5B00
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
5B01
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
5B02
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Input
0 to 1
---
F122
0 (Phasor)
5B03
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
5B04
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Curve
0 to 16
---
F103
0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5B05
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier
0 to 600
---
0.01
F001
100
5B06
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Reset
0 to 1
---
F104
0 (Instantaneous)
5B07
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
5B08
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
5B09
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
5B0A
Reserved (6 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
5B10
...Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 2
5B20
5B30
5B40
5B50
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)

5C00
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
5C01
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
5C02
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
5C03
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
5C04
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
5C05
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
5C06
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
5C07
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
5C08
Reserved (8 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
5C10
...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
5C20
5C30
5C40
5C50
5C60
5C70
5C80
5C90
5CA0
5CB0

0 (Disabled)
Ground Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)

5D00
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
5D01
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
5D02
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Input
0 to 1
---
F122
0 (Phasor)
5D03
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
5D04
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Curve
0 to 16
---
F103
0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5D05
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier
0 to 600
---
0.01
F001
100
5D06
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Reset
0 to 1
---
F104
0 (Instantaneous)
5D07
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
5D08
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
5D09
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
5D0A
Reserved (6 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
B-30
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
5D10
...Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 2
RANGE
5D20
5D30
5D40
5D50
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)

5E00
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
5E01
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
5E02
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
5E03
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
5E04
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
5E05
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
5E06
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
5E07
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
5E08
Reserved (8 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
5E10
...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
5E20
5E30
5E40
5E50
5E60
5E70
5E80
5E90
5EA0
5EB0
L90 Trip Logic (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

5EE0
87L Trip Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
5EE1
87L Trip Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
5EE2
87L Trip Mode
0 to 1
---
F157
0 (3-Pole)
5EE3
87L Trip Supervision
0 to 65535
---
F300
5EE4
87L Trip Force 3 Phase
0 to 65535
---
F300
5EE5
87L Trip Seal In
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
5EE6
87L Trip Seal In Pickup
0.2 to 0.8
pu
0.01
F001
20
5EE7
87L Trip Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
5EE8
87L Trip Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 (Disabled)
Stub Bus (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

5F10
Stub Bus Function
5F11
Stub Bus Disconnect
5F12
Stub Bus Trigger
0 to 1
---
F102
0 to 65535
---
F300
---
---
F300
5F13
Stub Bus Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
5F14
Stub Bus Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 (Disabled)
50DD Disturbance Detection (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

5F20
50DD Function
0 to 1
---
F102
5F21
50DD Non Current Supervision
0 to 65535
---
F300
5F22
50DD Control Logic
0 to 65535
---
F300
5F23
50DD Logic Seal In
0 to 65535
---
F300
5F24
50DD Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting)

5F80
Setting Group for Modbus Comms (0 means group 1)
0 to 5
---
F001
5F81
Setting Groups Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
5F82
FlexLogic to Activate Groups 2 through 6 (5 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
5F89
Setting Group Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
5F8A
Setting Group Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
GE Multilin
B-31
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 5
---
F001
Setting Groups (Read Only)

5F8B
Current Setting Group
Setting Group Names (Read/Write Setting)
5F8C
Setting Group 1 Name
---
---
---
F203
(none)
5F94
---
---
---
F203
(none)
5F9C
---
---
---
F203
(none)
5FA4
---
---
---
F203
(none)
5FAC
---
---
---
F203
(none)
5FB4
---
---
---
F203
(none)
0 (Disabled)
Current Differential 87L (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

6000
87L Current Differential Function
6001
87L Current Differential Block
0 to 1
---
F102
0 to 65535
---
F300
6002
87L Current Differential Signal Source 1
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
6003
6004
87L Minimum Phase Current Sensitivity
0.1 to 4
pu
0.01
F001
20
87L Current Differential Tap Setting
0.2 to 5
---
0.01
F001
100
6005
87L Current Differential Phase Percent Restraint 1
1 to 50
F001
30
6006
87L Current Differential Phase Percent Restraint 2
1 to 70
F001
50
6007
87L Current Differential Phase Dual Slope Breakpoint
0 to 20
pu
0.1
F001
10
6008
87L Current Differential Ground Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
6009
87L Current Differential Ground Pickup
0.05 to 1
pu
0.01
F001
10
600A
87L Current Differential Ground Restraint
1 to 50
F001
25
600B
87L Current Differential Ground Delay
0 to 5
seconds
0.01
F001
10
600C
87L Current Differential Key DTT
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
600D
87L Current Differential External Key DTT
600E
87L Current Differential Target
600F
87L Current Differential Event
6010
87L Current Differential Tap 2 Setting
6011
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
0 (Disabled)
0 to 1
---
F102
0.2 to 5
---
0.01
F001
100
0 to 6
---
F211
0 (None)
6012
0 to 6
---
F211
0 (None)
6014
0 to 6
---
F211
0 (None)
0 (Disabled)
Wattmetric ground fault settings (read/write grouped, 2 modules)

6050
Wattmetric ground fault 1 function
0 to 1
---
F102
6051
Wattmetric ground fault 1 source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
6052
Wattmetric ground fault 1 voltage
0 to 1
---
F234
0 (Calculated VN)
6053
Wattmetric ground fault 1 overvoltage pickup
0.02 to 3.00
pu
0.01
F001
20
6054
Wattmetric ground fault 1 current
0 to 1
---
F235
(Calculated IN)
6055
Wattmetric ground fault 1 overcurrent pickup
0.002 to 30.000
pu
0.001
F001
60
6056
Wattmetric ground fault 1 overcurrent pickup delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
20
6057
Wattmetric ground fault 1 power pickup
0.001 to 1.2
pu
0.001
F001
100
6058
Wattmetric ground fault 1 ECA
0 to 360
Lag
F001
6059
Wattmetric ground fault 1 power pickup delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
20
605A
Wattmetric ground fault 1 curve
605B
Wattmetric ground fault 1 multiplier
0 to 5
---
F236
0 (Definite Time)
0.01 to 2
0.01
F001
605C
100
Wattmetric ground fault 1 block
0 to 65535
---
F300
605D
Wattmetric ground fault 1 target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
605E
Wattmetric ground fault 1 events
605F
Wattmetric ground fault 1 reference power
6060
Reserved
6061
...Repeated for wattmetric ground fault 2
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0.001 to 1.2
pu
0.001
F001
500
---
---
---
---
---
Wattmetric ground fault actual values (read only)

6072
Wattmetric ground fault 1 operating power
0.000 to 1000000.000
0.001
F060
6074
Wattmetric ground fault 2 operating power
0.000 to 1000000.000
0.001
F060
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
CT Failure Detector (Read/Write Setting)

6124
B-32
CT Fail Function
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
0 to 65535
---
F300
CT Fail Current Source 1
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
6127
CT Fail Current Pickup 1
0 to 2
pu
0.1
F001
6128
CT Fail Current Source 2
0 to 5
---
F167
1 (SRC 2)
6125
CT Fail Block
6126
DEFAULT
6129
CT Fail Current Pickup 2
0 to 2
pu
0.1
F001
612A
CT Fail Voltage Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
612B
CT Fail Voltage Pickup
0 to 2
pu
0.01
F001
20
612C
CT Fail Pickup Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
1000
612D
CT Fail Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
612E
CT Fail Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
Continuous Monitor (Read/Write Setting)

6130
Continuous Monitor Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
6131
Continuous Monitor I OP
0 to 65535
---
F300
6132
Continuous Monitor I Supervision
0 to 65535
---
F300
6133
Continuous Monitor V OP
0 to 65535
---
F300
6134
Continuous Monitor V Supervision
0 to 65535
---
F300
6135
Continuous Monitor Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
6136
Continuous Monitor Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)

6300
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
6301
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
6302
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
6303
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Curve
0 to 16
---
F103
0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
6304
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier
0 to 600
---
0.01
F001
100
6305
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Reset
0 to 1
---
F104
0 (Instantaneous)
6306
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
6307
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
6308
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
6309
Reserved (7 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
6310
...Repeated for Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 2
Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)

6400
Negative Sequence Instantaneous OC 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
6401
Negative Sequence Instantaneous OC 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
6402
Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
6403
Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
6404
Negative Sequence Instantaneous OC 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
6405
Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
6406
Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
6407
Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
6408
Reserved (8 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
6410
...Repeated for Negative Sequence Instantaneous OC 2

0 (Disabled)
Power Swing Detect (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

65C0
Power Swing Detect Function
0 to 1
---
F102
65C1
Power Swing Detect Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
65C2
Power Swing Detect Mode
0 to 1
---
F513
0 (Two Step)
65C3
Power Swing Detect Supervision
0.05 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
600
65C4
Power Swing Detect Forward Reach
0.1 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
5000
40 to 90
degrees
F001
75
0.1 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
5000
65C5
Power Swing Detect Forward RCA
65C6
Power Swing Detect Reverse Reach
65C7
Power Swing Detect Reverse RCA
40 to 90
degrees
F001
75
65C8
Power Swing Detect Outer Limit Angle
40 to 140
degrees
F001
120
90
65C9
Power Swing Detect Middle Limit Angle
40 to 140
degrees
F001
65CA
Power Swing Detect Inner Limit Angle
40 to 140
degrees
F001
60
65CB
Power Swing Detect Delay 1 Pickup
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
30
GE Multilin
B-33
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
65CC
Power Swing Detect Delay 1 Reset
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
DEFAULT
50
65CD
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
17
65CE
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
65CF
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
17
65D0
Power Swing Detect Seal In Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
400
65D1
Power Swing Detect Trip Mode
0 to 1
---
F514
0 (Delayed)
65D2
Power Swing Detect Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
65D3
Power Swing Detect Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
65D4
Power Swing Detect Event
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
65D5
Power Swing Detect Shape
0 to 1
---
F085
0 (Mho Shape)
65D6
Power Swing Detect Quad Forward Middle
0.1 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
6000
65D7
Power Swing Detect Quad Forward Outer
0.1 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
7000
65D8
Power Swing Detect Quad Reverse Middle
0.1 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
6000
65D9
Power Swing Detect Quad Reverse Outer
0.1 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
7000
65DA
Power Swing Detect Outer Right Blinder
0.1 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
10000
65DB
Power Swing Detect Outer Left Blinder
0.1 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
10000
65DC
Power Swing Detect Middle Right Blinder
0.1 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
10000
65DD
Power Swing Detect Middle Left Blinder
0.1 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
10000
65DE
Power Swing Detect Inner Right Blinder
0.1 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
10000
65DF
Power Swing Detect Inner Left Blinder
0.1 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
10000
Load Encroachment (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

6700
Load Encroachment Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
6701
Load Encroachment Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
6702
Load Encroachment Minimum Voltage
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
250
6703
Load Encroachment Reach
0.02 to 250
ohms
0.01
F001
100
6704
Load Encroachment Angle
5 to 50
degrees
F001
30
6705
Load Encroachment Pickup Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
6706
Load Encroachment Reset Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
6707
Load Encroachment Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
6708
Load Encroachment Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
6709
Load Encroachment Events
670A
Reserved (6 items)
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F001
Trip Output (Read/Write Setting)

67E0
Trip Mode
0 to 2
---
F195
0 (Disabled)
67E1
Trip 3-Pole Input1
0 to 65535
---
F300
67E2
Trip 3-Pole Input2
0 to 65535
---
F300
67E3
Trip 3-Pole Input3
0 to 65535
---
F300
67E4
Trip 3-Pole Input4
0 to 65535
---
F300
67E5
Trip 3-Pole Input5
0 to 65535
---
F300
67E6
Trip 3-Pole Input6
0 to 65535
---
F300
67E7
Trip 1-Pole Input1
0 to 65535
---
F300
67E8
Trip 1-Pole Input2
0 to 65535
---
F300
67E9
Trip 1-Pole Input3
0 to 65535
---
F300
67EA
Trip 1-Pole Input4
0 to 65535
---
F300
67EB
Trip 1-Pole Input5
0 to 65535
---
F300
67EC
Trip 1-Pole Input6
0 to 65535
---
F300
67ED
Trip Reclose Input1
0 to 65535
---
F300
67EE
Trip Reclose Input2
0 to 65535
---
F300
67EF
Trip Reclose Input3
0 to 65535
---
F300
67F0
Trip Reclose Input4
0 to 65535
---
F300
67F1
Trip Reclose Input5
0 to 65535
---
F300
67F2
Trip Reclose Input6
0 to 65535
---
F300
67F3
Trip Force 3-Pole
0 to 65535
---
F300
67F4
Trip Pilot Priority
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
B-34
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
67F5
REGISTER NAME
Breaker Phase A Open
0 to 65535
---
F300
67F6
Breaker Phase B Open
0 to 65535
---
F300
67F7
Breaker Phase C Open
0 to 65535
---
F300
67F8
Trip Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
67F9
Reverse Fault Operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
67FA
Trip Delay On Evolving Faults
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
67FB
Trip Seal-In Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
67FC
Trip Reset
0 to 2
---
F609
0 (Pole Curr OR
Custom)
67FD
Start Timer Zone 2 Phase Input 1
0 to 65535
---
F300
67FE
Start Timer Zone 2 Phase Input 2
0 to 65535
---
F300
67FF
Start Timer Zone 2 Ground Input 1
0 to 65535
---
F300
6800
Start Timer Zone 2 Ground Input 2
0 to 65535
---
F300
6801
Reserved (5 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
0
0 (Disabled)
Open Pole Detect (Read/Write Setting)

6820
Open Pole Function
6821
Open Pole Block
0 to 1
---
F102
0 to 65535
---
F300
6822
Open Pole Voltage Supervision
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
6823
Open Pole Current Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
50
6824
Open Pole Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
6825
Open Pole Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
6826
Open Pole Line XC0
300 to 9999.9
ohms
0.1
F003
99999
6828
Open Pole Line XC1
300 to 9999.9
ohms
0.1
F003
99999
682A
Open Pole Remote Current Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
50
682B
Open Pole Detection
0 to 1
---
F608
0 (I AND V AND
CBaux)
682C
Open Pole Mode
0 to 1
---
F607
0 (Accelerated)
682D
Reserved (5 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
Autoreclose 1P 3P (Read/Write Setting)

6890
Autoreclose Mode
0 to 3
---
F080
0 (1 & 3 Pole)
6891
Autoreclose Maximum Number of Shots
1 to 4
---
F001
6892
Autoreclose Block Breaker 1
0 to 65535
---
F300
6893
Autoreclose Close Time Breaker 1
0 to 655.35
0.01
F001
10
6894
Autoreclose Breaker Manual Close
0 to 65535
---
F300
6895
Autoreclose Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
6896
Autoreclose Block Time Manual Close
0 to 655.35
0.01
F001
1000
6897
Autoreclose 1P Initiate
0 to 65535
---
F300
6898
Autoreclose 3P Initiate
0 to 65535
---
F300
6899
Autoreclose 3P TD Initiate
0 to 65535
---
F300
689A
Autoreclose Multi-Phase Fault
0 to 65535
---
F300
689B
Autoreclose Breaker 1 Pole Open
0 to 65535
---
F300
689C
Autoreclose Breaker 3 Pole Open
0 to 65535
---
F300
689D
Autoreclose 3-Pole Dead Time 1
0 to 655.35
0.01
F001
50
689E
Autoreclose 3-Pole Dead Time 2
0 to 655.35
0.01
F001
120
689F
Autoreclose Extend Dead T1
0 to 65535
---
F300
68A0
Autoreclose Dead T1 Extension
0 to 655.35
0.01
F001
50
68A1
Autoreclose Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
68A2
Autoreclose Reset Time
0 to 655.35
0.01
F001
6000
68A3
Autoreclose Breaker Closed
0 to 65535
---
F300
68A4
Autoreclose Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
68A5
Autoreclose Pause
0 to 65535
---
F300
68A6
Autoreclose Incomplete Sequence Time
0 to 655.35
0.01
F001
500
68A7
Autoreclose Block Breaker 2
0 to 65535
---
F300
68A8
Autoreclose Close Time Breaker 2
0 to 655.35
0.01
F001
10
68A9
Autoreclose Transfer 1 to 2
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
GE Multilin
B-35
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
68AA
Autoreclose Transfer 2 to 1
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
68AB
Autoreclose Breaker 1 Fail Option
0 to 1
---
F081
0 (Continue)
0 (Continue)
68AC
Autoreclose Breaker 2 Fail Option
68AD
Autoreclose 1P Dead Time
68AE
Autoreclose Breaker Sequence
68AF
Autoreclose Transfer Time
68B0
Autoreclose Event
DEFAULT
0 to 1
---
F081
0 to 655.35
0.01
F001
100
0 to 4
---
F082
3 (1 - 2)
0 to 655.35
0.01
F001
400
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
68B1
Autoreclose 3P Dead Time 3
0 to 655.35
0.01
F001
200
68B2
Autoreclose 3P Dead Time 4
0 to 655.35
0.01
F001
400
68B3
Autoreclose Bus Fault Initiate
0 to 65535
0.01
F300
68B4
Autoreclose Initiate Mode
0 to 1
---
F610
0 (Protection AND CB)
68B5
Reserved (11 items)
---
---
---
F001
Phase Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)

7000
Phase Undervoltage 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7001
Phase Undervoltage 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
7002
Phase Undervoltage 1 Pickup
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
1000
7003
Phase Undervoltage 1 Curve
0 to 1
---
F111
0 (Definite Time)
7004
Phase Undervoltage 1 Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
100
7005
Phase Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
100
7006
Phase Undervoltage 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
7007
Phase Undervoltage 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
7008
Phase Undervoltage 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7009
Phase Undervoltage 1 Measurement Mode
0 to 1
---
F186
0 (Phase to Ground)
700A
Reserved (6 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
7013
...Repeated for Phase Undervoltage 2
Phase Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

7040
Phase Overvoltage 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7041
Phase Overvoltage 1 Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
7042
Phase Overvoltage 1 Pickup
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
1000
7043
Phase Overvoltage 1 Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
100
7044
Phase Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
100
7045
Phase Overvoltage 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
7046
Phase Overvoltage 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
7047
Phase Overvoltage 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7048
Reserved (8 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
Distance (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

7060
Distance Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
7061
Memory Duration
5 to 25
cycles
F001
10
7062
Force Self-Polarization
0 to 65535
---
F300
7062
Force Memory Polarization
0 to 65535
---
F300
Phase Distance (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (5 modules)

7070
Phase Distance Zone 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7071
Phase Distance Zone 1 Current Supervision
0.05 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
200
7072
Phase Distance Zone 1 Reach
0.02 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
200
7073
Phase Distance Zone 1 Direction
0 to 2
---
F154
0 (Forward)
7074
Phase Distance Zone 1 Comparator Limit
30 to 90
degrees
F001
90
7075
Phase Distance Zone 1 Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
7076
Phase Distance Zone 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
7077
Phase Distance Zone 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
7078
Phase Distance Zone 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7079
Phase Distance Zone 1 Shape
0 to 1
---
F120
0 (Mho)
707A
Phase Distance Zone 1 RCA
30 to 90
degrees
F001
85
707B
Phase Distance Zone 1 DIR RCA
30 to 90
degrees
F001
85
707C
Phase Distance Zone 1 DIR Comp Limit
30 to 90
degrees
F001
90
B-36
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
707D
Phase Distance Zone 1 Quad Right Blinder
707E
Phase Distance Zone 1 Quad Right Blinder RCA
707F
Phase Distance Zone 1 Quad Left Blinder
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0.02 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
1000
60 to 90
degrees
F001
85
0.02 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
1000
85
7080
Phase Distance Zone 1 Quad Left Blinder RCA
60 to 90
degrees
F001
7081
Phase Distance Zone 1 Volt Limit
0 to 5
pu
0.001
F001
7082
Phase Distance Zone 1 Transformer Voltage Connection
0 to 12
---
F153
0 (None)
7083
Phase Distance Zone 1 Transformer Current Connection
0 to 12
---
F153
0 (None)
7084
Phase Distance Zone 1 Rev Reach
0.02 to 500
ohms
0.01
F001
200
7085
Phase Distance Zone 1 Rev Reach RCA
30 to 90
degrees
F001
85
7086
Reserved (10 items)
---
---
---
F001
7090
...Repeated for Phase Distance Zone 2
70B0
...Repeated for Phase Distance Zone 3
Line Pickup (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

71F0
Line Pickup Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
71F1
Line Pickup Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
71F2
Line Pickup Phase IOC Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
71F3
Line Pickup UV Pickup
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
700
71F4
Line End Open Pickup Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
150
71F5
Line End Open Reset Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
90
71F6
Line Pickup OV Pickup Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
40
71F7
Autoreclose Coordination Pickup Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
45
71F8
Autoreclose Coordination Reset Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
71F9
Autoreclose Coordination Bypass
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
71FA
Line Pickup Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
71FB
Line Pickup Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
71FC
Line Pickup Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
71FD
Terminal Open
0 to 65535
---
F300
71FE
Autoreclose Accelerate
0 to 65535
---
F300
Phase Directional Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)

7260
Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7261
Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
7262
Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
7263
Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 ECA
0 to 359
---
F001
30
7264
Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Pol V Threshold
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
700
7265
Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Block Overcurrent
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
7266
Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
7267
Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7268
Reserved (8 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
7270
...Repeated for Phase Directional Overcurrent 2

0 (Disabled)
Neutral Directional Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)

7280
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
7281
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
7282
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Polarizing
0 to 2
---
F230
0 (Voltage)
7283
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward ECA
-90 to 90
Lag
F002
75
7284
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Limit Angle
40 to 90
degrees
F001
90
7285
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Pickup
0.002 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
50
7286
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Limit Angle
40 to 90
degrees
F001
90
7287
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Pickup
0.002 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
50
7288
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
7289
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
728A
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
728B
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Polarizing Voltage
0 to 1
---
F231
0 (Calculated V0)
728C
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Op Current
0 to 1
---
F196
0 (Calculated 3I0)
728D
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Offset
0 to 250
ohms
0.01
F001
GE Multilin
B-37
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
728E
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Pos Seq Restraint
0 to 0.5
---
0.001
F001
63
728F
Reserved
0 to 1
---
F001
7290
...Repeated for Neutral Directional Overcurrent 2

0 (Disabled)
Negative-sequence directional overcurrent (read/write grouped settings) (2 modules)
72A0
Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
72A1
Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
72A2
Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Type
0 to 1
---
F179
0 (Neg Sequence)
72A3
Neg Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward ECA
0 to 90
Lag
F002
75
72A4
Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Limit Angle
40 to 90
degrees
F001
90
72A5
Neg Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Pickup
0.015 to 30
pu
0.05
F001
72A6
Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Limit Angle
40 to 90
degrees
F001
90
72A7
Neg Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Pickup
0.015 to 30
pu
0.05
F001
72A8
Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
72A9
Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
72AA
Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
72AB
Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Offset
0 to 250
ohms
0.01
F001
72AC
Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 1 Pos Seq Restraint
0 to 0.5
---
0.001
F001
63
0 to 1
---
F001
72AD
Reserved (3 items)
72B0
...Repeated for Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 2
Breaker Arcing Current Settings (Read/Write Setting)

72C0
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
72C1
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
72C2
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Initiate A
0 to 65535
---
F300
72C3
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Initiate B
0 to 65535
---
F300
72C4
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Initiate C
0 to 65535
---
F300
72C5
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
0
1000
72C6
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Limit
0 to 50000
kA2-cyc
F001
72C7
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
72C8
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
72C9
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
72CA
...Repeated for Breaker 2 Arcing Current
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
F205
DCMA I 1"
72D4
72DE
dcmA Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)

7300
dcmA Inputs 1 Function
7301
dcmA Inputs 1 ID
7307
Reserved 1 (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
730B
dcmA Inputs 1 Units
---
---
---
F206
mA
730E
dcmA Inputs 1 Range
0 to 6
---
F173
6 (4 to 20 mA)
730F
dcmA Inputs 1 Minimum Value
-9999.999 to 9999.999
---
0.001
F004
4000
7311
dcmA Inputs 1 Maximum Value
-9999.999 to 9999.999
---
0.001
F004
20000
7313
Reserved (5 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
7318
...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 2
7330
7348
7360
7378
7390
73A8
73C0
73D8
73F0
7408
7420
B-38
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
7438
7450
7468
7480
7498
74B0
74C8
74E0
74F8
7510
7528
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Disconnect switches (read/write settings)

7540
Disconnect switch 1 function
0 to 1
---
F102
7541
Disconnect switch 1 name
---
---
---
F206
0 (Disabled)
SW 1"
7544
Disconnect switch 1 mode
0 to 1
---
F157
0 (3-Pole)
7545
Disconnect switch 1 open
0 to 65535
---
F300
7546
Disconnect switch 1 block open
0 to 65535
---
F300
7547
Disconnect switch 1 close
0 to 65535
---
F300
7548
Disconnect switch 1 block close
0 to 65535
---
F300
7549
Disconnect switch 1 phase A / three-pole closed
0 to 65535
---
F300
754A
Disconnect switch 1 phase A / three-pole opened
0 to 65535
---
F300
754B
Disconnect switch 1 phase B closed
0 to 65535
---
F300
754C
Disconnect switch 1 phase B opened
0 to 65535
---
F300
754D
Disconnect switch 1 phase C closed
0 to 65535
---
F300
754E
Disconnect switch 1 phase C opened
0 to 65535
---
F300
754F
Disconnect switch 1 operate time
0 to 2
0.001
F001
70
7550
Disconnect switch 1 alarm delay
0 to 1000000
0.001
F003
7552
Disconnect switch 1 events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7553
Reserved (2 items)
---
---
---
---
---
7555
...Repeated for disconnect switch 2
756A
757F
7594
75A9
75BE
75D3
75E8
75FD
7612
7627
763C
7651
7666
767B
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

7B60
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Function
0 to 2
---
F109
2 (Disabled)
7B61
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Top Line
---
---
---
F202
(none)
7B6B
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text
---
---
---
F202
(none)
7B75
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text
---
---
---
F202
(none)
7B7F
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop-Out Time
0 to 60
0.05
F001
7B80
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
7B81
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events
7B82
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 LED Operand
7B83
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Delay
GE Multilin
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 600
0.05
F001
B-39
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
7B84
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Function
7B85
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Local Lock
7B86
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Message Priority
7B87
7B88
7B89
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 2
---
F220
0 (Disabled)
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Remote Lock
0 to 65535
---
F300
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Set
0 to 65535
---
F300
7B8A
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Hold
0 to 10
0.1
F001
7B8B
7BB6
7BE1
7C0C
7C37
7C62
7C8D
7CB8
7CE3
7D0E
7D39
7D64
7D8F
7DBA
7DE5
Neutral Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)

7F00
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7F01
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
7F02
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup
0 to 3.00
pu
0.001
F001
300
7F03
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
100
7F04
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
100
7F05
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
7F06
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
7F07
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7F08
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Curves
0 to 3
---
F116
0 (Definite Time)
7F09
Reserved (8 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
7F10
...Repeated for Neutral Overvoltage 2
7F20
...Repeated for Neutral Overvoltage 3
Auxiliary Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)

7F30
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7F31
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
7F32
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
300
7F33
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
100
7F34
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
100
7F35
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
7F36
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
7F37
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Events
7F38
Reserved (8 items)
7F40
...Repeated for Auxiliary Overvoltage 2
7F50
...Repeated for Auxiliary Overvoltage 3
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F001
Auxiliary Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)

7F60
Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7F61
Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
7F62
Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Pickup
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
700
7F63
Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
100
7F64
Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Curve
0 to 1
---
F111
0 (Definite Time)
7F65
Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
100
B-40
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
7F66
REGISTER NAME
Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
7F67
Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F001
7F68
Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Events
7F69
Reserved (7 items)
7F70
...Repeated for Auxiliary Undervoltage 2
7F80
...Repeated for Auxiliary Undervoltage 3
DEFAULT
Frequency (Read Only)

8000
Tracking Frequency
---
Hz
---
F001
0
0 (Disabled)
Breaker Failure (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)

8600
Breaker Failure 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
8601
Breaker Failure 1 Mode
0 to 1
---
F157
0 (3-Pole)
8602
Breaker Failure 1 Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
8603
Breaker Failure 1 Amp Supervision
0 to 1
---
F126
1 (Yes)
8604
Breaker Failure 1 Use Seal-In
0 to 1
---
F126
1 (Yes)
8605
Breaker Failure 1 Three Pole Initiate
0 to 65535
---
F300
8606
Breaker Failure 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
8607
Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Supv Pickup
0.001 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1050
8608
Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Supv Pickup
0.001 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1050
8609
Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 1
0 to 1
---
F126
1 (Yes)
860A
Breaker Failure 1 Timer 1 Pickup
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
860B
0 to 1
---
F126
1 (Yes)
860C
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
860D
0 to 1
---
F126
1 (Yes)
860E
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
860F
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase A/3P
0 to 65535
---
F300
8610
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase A/3P
0 to 65535
---
F300
8611
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Test On
0 to 65535
---
F300
8612
Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Hiset Pickup
0.001 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1050
8613
Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Hiset Pickup
0.001 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1050
8614
Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Loset Pickup
0.001 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1050
8615
Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Loset Pickup
0.001 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1050
8616
Breaker Failure 1 Loset Time
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
8617
Breaker Failure 1 Trip Dropout Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
8618
Breaker Failure 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
8619
Breaker Failure 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
861A
Breaker Failure 1 Phase A Initiate
0 to 65535
---
F300
861B
Breaker Failure 1 Phase B Initiate
0 to 65535
---
F300
861C
Breaker Failure 1 Phase C Initiate
0 to 65535
---
F300
861D
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase B
0 to 65535
---
F300
861E
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase C
0 to 65535
---
F300
861F
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase B
0 to 65535
---
F300
8620
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase C
0 to 65535
---
F300
8621
...Repeated for Breaker Failure 2
8642
8663
---
---
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
F203
Dig Element 1
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F003
8684
86A5
FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting)

8800
FlexState Parameters (256 items)
Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)

8A00
Digital Element 1 Function
8A01
Digital Element 1 Name
8A09
Digital Element 1 Input
8A0A
Digital Element 1 Pickup Delay
GE Multilin
B-41
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
8A0C
Digital Element 1 Reset Delay
8A0E
Digital Element 1 Block
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F003
DEFAULT
0
0 to 65535
---
F300
8A0F
Digital Element 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
8A10
Digital Element 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
8A11
Digital Element 1 Pickup LED
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
8A12
Reserved (2 items)
---
---
---
F001
8A14
...Repeated for Digital Element 2
8A28
8A3C
8A50
8A64
8A78
8A8C
8AA0
8AB4
8AC8
8ADC
8AF0
8B04
8B18
8B2C
8B40
8B54
8B68
8B7C
8B90
8BA4
8BB8
8BCC
8BE0
8BF4
8C08
8C1C
8C30
8C44
8C58
8C6C
8C80
8C94
8CA8
8CBC
8CD0
8CE4
8CF8
8D0C
8D20
8D34
8D48
8D5C
8D70
8D84
8D98
8DAC
B-42
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 1
---
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
F300
Trip Bus (Read/Write Setting)

8E00
Trip Bus 1 Function
8E01
Trip Bus 1 Block
8E02
Trip Bus 1 Pickup Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
8E03
Trip Bus 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
8E04
Trip Bus 1 Input 1
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E05
Trip Bus 1 Input 2
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E06
Trip Bus 1 Input 3
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E07
Trip Bus 1 Input 4
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E08
Trip Bus 1 Input 5
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E09
Trip Bus 1 Input 6
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E0A
Trip Bus 1 Input 7
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E0B
Trip Bus 1 Input 8
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E0C
Trip Bus 1 Input 9
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E0D
Trip Bus 1 Input 10
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E0E
Trip Bus 1 Input 11
0 to 65535
---
F300
0
0
8E0F
Trip Bus 1 Input 12
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E10
Trip Bus 1 Input 13
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E11
Trip Bus 1 Input 14
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E12
Trip Bus 1 Input 15
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E13
Trip Bus 1 Input 16
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E14
Trip Bus 1 Latching
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
8E15
Trip Bus 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E16
Trip Bus 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
8E16
Trip Bus 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
8E18
Reserved (8 items)
---
---
---
F001
8E20
...Repeated for Trip Bus 2
8E40
8E60
8E80
8EA0
FlexElement (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

9000
FlexElement 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
9001
FlexElement 1 Name
---
---
---
F206
FxE 1
9004
FlexElement 1 InputP
0 to 65535
---
F600
9005
FlexElement 1 InputM
0 to 65535
---
F600
9006
FlexElement 1 Compare
0 to 1
---
F516
0 (LEVEL)
9007
FlexElement 1 Input
0 to 1
---
F515
0 (SIGNED)
9008
FlexElement 1 Direction
0 to 1
---
F517
0 (OVER)
9009
FlexElement 1 Hysteresis
0.1 to 50
0.1
F001
30
900A
FlexElement 1 Pickup
-90 to 90
pu
0.001
F004
1000
900C
FlexElement 1 DeltaT Units
0 to 2
---
F518
0 (Milliseconds)
900D
FlexElement 1 DeltaT
20 to 86400
---
F003
20
900F
FlexElement 1 Pickup Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
9010
FlexElement 1 Reset Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
9011
FlexElement 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
9012
FlexElement 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
9013
FlexElement 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
9014
...Repeated for FlexElement 2
9028
903C
9050
9064
9078
GE Multilin
B-43
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
908C
90A0
90B4
90C8
90DC
90F0
9104
9118
912C
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 (SRC 1)
Fault Report Settings (Read/Write Setting) (up to 5 modules)

9200
Fault Report 1 Source
0 to 5
---
F167
9201
Fault Report 1 Trigger
0 to 65535
---
F300
9202
Fault Report 1 Z1 Magnitude
0.01 to 250
ohms
0.01
F001
300
9203
Fault Report 1 Z1 Angle
9204
Fault Report 1 Z0 Magnitude
9205
Fault Report 1 Z0 Angle
9206
Fault Report 1 Line Length Units
9207
Fault Report 1 Line Length
9208
Fault Report 1 VT Substitution
9208
Fault Report 1 System Z0 Magnitude
9208
Fault Report 1 System Z0 Angle
920B
...Repeated for Fault Report 2
9216
9221
922C
25 to 90
degrees
F001
75
0.01 to 650
ohms
0.01
F001
900
25 to 90
degrees
F001
75
0 to 1
---
F147
0 (km)
0 to 2000
0.1
F001
1000
---
F270
0 (None)
0.01 to 650.00
ohms
0.01
F001
900
25 to 90
degrees
F001
75
0 to 2
dcmA Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)

9300
dcmA Output 1 Source
0 to 65535
---
F600
9301
dcmA Output 1 Range
0 to 2
---
F522
0 (1 to 1 mA)
9302
dcmA Output 1 Minimum
90 to 90
pu
0.001
F004
9304
dcmA Output 1 Maximum
90 to 90
pu
0.001
F004
1000
9306
...Repeated for dcmA Output 2
930C
9312
9318
931E
9324
932A
9330
9336
933C
9342
9348
934E
9354
935A
9360
9366
936C
9372
9378
937E
9384
938A
B-44
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 429496295
---
F003
1000
0 to 1
---
F491
0 (Default Value)
IEC 61850 received integers (read/write setting registers)

9910
IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 1 default value
9912
IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 1 mode
9913
...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 2
9916
9919
991C
991F
9922
9925
9928
992B
992E
9931
9934
9937
993A
993D
FlexElement Actuals (Read Only) (16 modules)

9A01
FlexElement 1 Actual
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A03
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A05
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A07
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A09
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A0B
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A0D
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A0F
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
VT Fuse Failure (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)

A040
VT Fuse Failure Function
A041
...Repeated for module number 2
A042
A043
A044
A045
Permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT) settings (read/write)

A070
POTT Scheme Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
A071
POTT Permissive Echo
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
A072
POTT Rx Pickup Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
A073
POTT Transient Block Pickup Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
20
A074
POTT Transient Block Reset Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
90
A075
POTT Echo Duration
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
100
A076
POTT Line End Open Pickup Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
50
A077
POTT Seal In Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
400
A078
POTT Ground Direction OC Forward
0 to 65535
---
F300
A079
POTT Rx
0 to 65535
---
F300
A07A
POTT Echo Lockout
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
250
A07B
POTT Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
A07C
POTT Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
Selector switch actual values (read only)

A210
Selector switch 1 position
1 to 7
---
F001
A211
Selector switch 2 position
1 to 7
---
F001
Selector switch settings (read/write, 2 modules)

A280
Selector 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
A281
Selector 1 Range
1 to 7
---
F001
GE Multilin
B-45
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
A282
Selector 1 Timeout
3 to 60
0.1
F001
50
A283
Selector 1 Step Up
0 to 65535
---
F300
A284
Selector 1 Step Mode
0 to 1
---
F083
0 (Time-out)
A285
Selector 1 Acknowledge
0 to 65535
---
F300
A286
Selector 1 Bit0
0 to 65535
---
F300
A287
Selector 1 Bit1
0 to 65535
---
F300
A288
Selector 1 Bit2
0 to 65535
---
F300
A289
Selector 1 Bit Mode
0 to 1
---
F083
0 (Time-out)
A28A
Selector 1 Bit Acknowledge
0 to 65535
---
F300
A28B
Selector 1 Power Up Mode
0 to 2
---
F084
0 (Restore)
A28C
Selector 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
A28D
Selector 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
A28E
Reserved (10 items)
---
---
F001
A298
...Repeated for Selector 2
DNP/IEC Points (Read/Write Setting)

A300
DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 Binary Input Points (256 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
A400
DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 Analog Input Points (256 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
Flexcurves C and D (Read/Write Setting)

A600
FlexCurve C (120 items)
0 to 65535
ms
F011
A680
FlexCurve D (120 items)
0 to 65535
ms
F011
Non Volatile Latches (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

A700
Non-Volatile Latch 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
A701
Non-Volatile Latch 1 Type
0 to 1
---
F519
0 (Reset Dominant)
A702
Non-Volatile Latch 1 Set
0 to 65535
---
F300
A703
Non-Volatile Latch 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
A704
Non-Volatile Latch 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
A705
Non-Volatile Latch 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
A706
Reserved (4 items)
---
---
---
F001
A70A
...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 2
A714
A71E
A728
A732
A73C
A746
A750
A75A
A764
A76E
A778
A782
A78C
A796
Digital Counter (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)

A800
Digital Counter 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
A801
Digital Counter 1 Name
---
---
---
F205
Counter 1"
A807
Digital Counter 1 Units
---
---
---
F206
(none)
A80A
Digital Counter 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
A80B
Digital Counter 1 Up
0 to 65535
---
F300
A80C
Digital Counter 1 Down
0 to 65535
---
F300
A80D
Digital Counter 1 Preset
2147483647 to
2147483647
---
F004
A80F
Digital Counter 1 Compare
2147483647 to
2147483647
---
F004
A811
Digital Counter 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
B-46
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
A812
Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
A813
Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Count
0 to 65535
---
F300
A814
Digital Counter 1 Set To Preset
0 to 65535
---
F300
A815
Reserved (11 items)
---
---
---
F001
A820
A840
A860
A880
A8A0
A8C0
A8E0
DEFAULT
IEC 61850 received analog settings (read/write)

AA00
IEC 61850 GOOSE analog 1 default value
AA02
IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 mode
AA03
IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 units
AA05
IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 per-unit base
AA07
...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 2
AA0E
AA15
AA1C
AA23
AA2A
AA31
AA38
AA3F
AA46
AA4D
AA54
AA5B
AA62
AA69
1000000 to 1000000
---
0.001
F060
1000
0 to 1
---
F491
0 (Default Value)
---
---
---
F207
(none)
0 to 999999999.999
---
0.001
F060
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
IEC 61850 XCBR configuration (read/write settings)

AB24
Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR1.ST.Loc status
AB25
Command to clear XCBR1 OpCnt (operation counter)
AB26
AB27
AB28
AB29
AB2A
AB2B
AB2C
AB2D
AB2E
AB2F
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
(none)
IEC 61850 LN name prefixes (read/write settings)

AB30
IEC 61850 logical node LPHD1 name prefix
0 to 65534
---
F206
AB33
IEC 61850 logical node PIOCx name prefix (72 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AC0B
IEC 61850 logical node PTOCx name prefix (24 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AC53
IEC 61850 logical node PTUVx name prefix (13 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AC7A
IEC 61850 logical node PTOVx name prefix (10 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AC98
IEC 61850 logical node PDISx name prefix (10 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
ACB6
IEC 61850 logical node RBRFx name prefix (24 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
ACFE
IEC 61850 logical node RPSBx name prefix
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD01
IEC 61850 logical node RRECx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
GE Multilin
B-47
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
AD13
IEC 61850 logical node MMXUx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
DEFAULT
(none)
AD25
IEC 61850 logical node GGIOx name prefix (5 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD34
IEC 61850 logical node RFLOx name prefix (5 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD43
IEC 61850 logical node XCBRx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD55
IEC 61850 logical node PTRCx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD67
IEC 61850 logical node PDIFx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD73
IEC 61850 logical node MMXNx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
ADE2
IEC 61850 logical node CSWIx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AE3C
IEC 61850 logical node XSWIx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
4 to 32
---
F001
IEC 61850 XSWI configuration (read/write settings)

AECF
Operand for IEC 61850 XSWI1.ST.Loc status
AED0
Command to clear XSWI1 OpCnt (operation counter)
AED1
Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI2
AED3
AED5
AED7
AED9
AEDB
AEDD
AEDF
AEE1
AEE3
AEE5
AEE7
AEE9
AEEB
AEED
AEEF
AEF1
AEF3
AEF5
AEF7
AEF9
AEFB
AEFD
IEC 61850 GGIO4 general analog configuration settings (read/write)

AF00
Number of analog points in GGIO4
IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input points configuration settings (read/write)

AF10
IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 value
---
---
---
F600
AF11
IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 deadband
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
100000
AF13
IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 minimum
1000000000000 to
1000000000000
---
0.001
F060
AF15
IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 maximum
1000000000000 to
1000000000000
---
0.001
F060
1000000
AF17
...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 2
AF1E
AF25
AF2C
AF33
AF3A
AF41
AF48
AF4F
AF56
AF5D
B-48
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
AF64
RANGE
AF6B
AF72
AF79
AF80
AF87
AF8E
AF95
AF9C
AFA3
AFAA
AFB1
AFB8
AFBF
AFC6
AFCD
AFD4
AFDB
AFE2
AFE9
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
IEC 61850 Logical Node Name Prefixes (Read/Write Setting)

AB30
IEC 61850 Logical Node LPHD1 Name Prefix
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AB33
IEC 61850 Logical Node PIOCx Name Prefix (72 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AC0B
IEC 61850 Logical Node PTOCx Name Prefix (24 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AC53
IEC 61850 Logical Node PTUVx Name Prefix (12 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AC77
IEC 61850 Logical Node PTOVx Name Prefix (8 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
(None)
AC8F
IEC 61850 Logical Node PDISx Name Prefix (10 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
ACAD
IEC 61850 Logical Node RRBFx Name Prefix (24 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
ACF5
IEC 61850 Logical Node RPSBx Name Prefix
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
ACF8
IEC 61850 Logical Node RRECx Name Prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD0A
IEC 61850 Logical Node MMXUx Name Prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD1C
IEC 61850 Logical Node GGIOx Name Prefix (4 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD28
IEC 61850 Logical Node RFLOx Name Prefix (5 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD37
IEC 61850 Logical Node XCBRx Name Prefix (2 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD3D
IEC 61850 Logical Node PTRCx Name Prefix (2 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD43
IEC 61850 Logical Node PDIFx Name Prefix (4 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD4F
IEC 61850 Logical Node MMXNx Name Prefix (37 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
IEC 61850 GOOSE/GSSE Configuration (Read/Write Setting)

B01C
Default GOOSE/GSSE Update Time
1 to 60
F001
60
B01D
IEC 61850 GSSE Function (GsEna)
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
B013
IEC 61850 GSSE ID
B03F
IEC 61850 GOOSE Function (GoEna)
---
---
---
F209
GSSEOut
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
B040
B043
IEC 61850 GSSE Destination MAC Address
---
---
---
F072
IEC 61850 Standard GOOSE ID
---
---
---
F209
GOOSEOut
0
B064
IEC 61850 Standard GOOSE Destination MAC Address
B067
IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority
---
---
---
F072
0 to 7
---
F001
B068
IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN ID
0 to 4095
---
F001
B069
IEC 61850 GOOSE ETYPE APPID
0 to 16383
---
F001
B06A
Reserved (2 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
IEC 61850 Server Configuration (Read/Write Settings/Commands)

B06C
TCP Port Number for the IEC 61850 / MMS Protocol
1 to 65535
---
F001
102
B06D
IEC 61850 Logical Device Name
---
---
---
F213
IECName
B07D
IEC 61850 Logical Device Instance
---
---
---
F213
LDInst
B08D
IEC 61850 LPHD Location
---
---
---
F204
Location
GE Multilin
B-49
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B0B5
Include non-IEC 61850 Data
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
B06B
IEC 61850 Server Data Scanning Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
B0B7
Reserved (15 items)
IEC 61850 MMXU Deadbands (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
B0C0
IEC 61850 MMXU TotW Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0C2
IEC 61850 MMXU TotVAr Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0C4
IEC 61850 MMXU TotVA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0C6
IEC 61850 MMXU TotPF Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0C8
IEC 61850 MMXU Hz Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0CA
IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsAB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0CC
IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsBC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0CE
IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsCA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0D0
IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsADeadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0D2
IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0D4
IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0D6
IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0D8
IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0DA
IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0DC
IEC 61850 MMXU A.neut Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0DE
IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0E0
IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0E2
IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0E4
IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0E6
IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0E8
IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0EA
IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0EC
IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0EE
IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0F0
IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0F2
IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0F4
IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0F6
...Repeated for Deadband 2
B12C
B162
B198
B1CE
IEC 61850 Report Settings (Read/Write Setting) (14 modules)

B280
IEC 61850 Report Control 1 RptID
---
---
---
F209
B2A1
IEC 61850 Report Control 1 OptFlds
0 to 65535
---
F001
B2A2
IEC 61850 Report Control 1 BufTm
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
B2A4
IEC 61850 Report Control 1 TrgOps
0 to 65535
---
F001
B2A5
IEC 61850 Report Control 1 IntgPd
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
B2A7
...Repeated for Report 2
B2CE
B2F5
B31C
B343
B36A
B391
B3B8
B3DF
B406
B42D
B454
B-50
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
B47B
B4A2
B4C9
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
8 to 128
---
F001
---
---
F300
IEC 61850 GGIO1 Configuration Settings (Read/Write Setting)

B500
Number of Status Indications in GGIO1
B501
IEC 61850 GGIO1 Indication operands (128 items)
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Transmission (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)

B5A0
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Function
B5A1
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ID
B5C2
Configurable GOOSE Destination MAC Address
B5C5
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority
B5C6
B5C7
B5C8
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ConfRev
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (None)
---
---
---
F209
GOOSEOut_x_
---
---
---
F072
0 to 7
---
F001
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN ID
0 to 4095
---
F001
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ETYPE APPID
0 to 16383
---
F001
1 to 4294967295
---
F003
0 to 3
---
F611
3 (Relaxed)
0 to 542
---
F232
0 (None)
---
F233
0 (None)
B5CA
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Retransmission Curve
B5CB
Configurable GOOSE Dataset Items for Transmission

(64 items)
B60B
...Repeated for Module 2
B676
B6E1
B74C
B7B7
B822
B88D
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Reception (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)

B900
Configurable GOOSE Dataset Items for Transmission
B940
B980
B9C0
BA00
BA40
BA80
BAC0
0 to 128
Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)

BB00
Contact Input 1 Name
---
---
---
F205
Cont Ip 1
BB06
Contact Input 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
BB07
Contact Input 1 Debounce Time
0 to 16
ms
0.5
F001
20
BB08
...Repeated for Contact Input 2
BB10
BB18
BB20
BB28
BB30
BB38
BB40
BB48
BB50
BB58
BB60
BB68
BB70
BB78
BB80
BB88
GE Multilin
B-51
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
BB90
BB98
BBA0
BBA8
BBB0
BBB8
BBC0
BBC8
BBD0
BBD8
BBE0
BBE8
BBF0
BBF8
BC00
BC08
BC10
BC18
BC20
BC28
BC30
BC38
BC40
BC48
BC50
BC58
BC60
BC68
BC70
BC78
BC80
BC88
BC90
BC98
BCA0
BCA8
BCB0
BCB8
BCC0
BCC8
BCD0
BCD8
BCE0
BCE8
BCF0
BCF8
BD00
BD08
BD10
BD18
BD20
BD28
BD30
BD38
B-52
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
BD40
BD48
BD50
BD58
BD60
BD68
BD70
BD78
BD80
BD88
BD90
BD98
BDA0
BDA8
BDB0
BDB8
BDC0
BDC8
BDD0
BDD8
BDE0
BDE8
BDF0
BDF8
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting)

BE00
Contact Input n Threshold, n = 1 to 24 (24 items)
0 to 3
---
F128
1 (33 Vdc)
0 to 1
---
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
F205
Virt Ip 1
F127
0 (Latched)
Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)

BE30
Virtual Input 1 Function
BE31
Virtual Input 1 Name
BE37
Virtual Input 1 Programmed Type
0 to 1
---
BE38
Virtual Input 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
BE39
Reserved (3 items)
---
---
---
F001
BE3C
...Repeated for Virtual Input 2
BE48
BE54
BE60
BE6C
BE78
BE84
BE90
BE9C
BEA8
BEB4
BEC0
BECC
BED8
BEE4
BEF0
BEFC
BF08
BF14
BF20
BF2C
BF38
GE Multilin
B-53
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
BF44
BF50
BF5C
BF68
BF74
BF80
BF8C
BF98
BFA4
BFB0
BFBC
BFC8
BFD4
BFE0
BFEC
BFF8
C004
C010
C01C
C028
C034
C040
C04C
C058
C064
C070
C07C
C088
C094
C0A0
C0AC
C0B8
C0C4
C0D0
C0DC
C0E8
C0F4
C100
C10C
C118
C124
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)

C130
Virtual Output 1 Name
---
---
---
F205
Virt Op 1
C136
Virtual Output 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
C137
Reserved
---
---
---
F001
C138
...Repeated for Virtual Output 2
C140
C148
C150
C158
C160
C168
C170
C178
B-54
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
C180
C188
C190
C198
C1A0
C1A8
C1B0
C1B8
C1C0
C1C8
C1D0
C1D8
C1E0
C1E8
C1F0
C1F8
C200
C208
C210
C218
C220
C228
C230
C238
C240
C248
C250
C258
C260
C268
C270
C278
C280
C288
C290
C298
C2A0
C2A8
C2B0
C2B8
C2C0
C2C8
C2D0
C2D8
C2E0
C2E8
C2F0
C2F8
C300
C308
C310
C318
C320
C328
GE Multilin
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B-55
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
C330
C338
C340
C348
C350
C358
C360
C368
C370
C378
C380
C388
C390
C398
C3A0
C3A8
C3B0
C3B8
C3C0
C3C8
C3D0
C3D8
C3E0
C3E8
C3F0
C3F8
C400
C408
C410
C418
C420
C428
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Mandatory (Read/Write Setting)

C430
Test Mode Function
0 to 1
---
F245
0 (Disabled)
C431
Force VFD and LED
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
C432
Test Mode Forcing
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
Clear commands (read/write)

C433
Clear All Relay Records Command
Synchrophasor actual values (read only)

C435
Synchrophasors active
Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)

C440
Contact Output 1 Name
---
---
---
F205
Cont Op 1"
C446
Contact Output 1 Operation
0 to 65535
---
F300
C447
Contact Output 1 Seal In
0 to 65535
---
F300
C448
Latching Output 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
C449
Contact Output 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
C44A
Latching Output 1 Type
0 to 1
---
F090
0 (Operate-dominant)
---
---
---
F001
C44B
Reserved
C44C
...Repeated for Contact Output 2
C458
C464
C470
C47C
C488
B-56
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
C494
C4A0
C4AC
C4B8
C4C4
C4D0
C4DC
C4E8
C4F4
C500
C50C
C518
C524
C530
C53C
C548
C554
C560
C56C
C578
C584
C590
C59C
C5A8
C5B4
C5C0
C5CC
C5D8
C5E4
C5F0
C5FC
C608
C614
C620
C62C
C638
C644
C650
C65C
C668
C674
C680
C68C
C698
C6A4
C6B0
C6BC
C6C8
C6D4
C6E0
C6EC
C6F8
C704
C710
GE Multilin
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B-57
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
C71C
C728
C734
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 65535
---
F300
Reset (Read/Write Setting)
C750
FlexLogic operand which initiates a reset
Control Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (7 modules)

C760
Control Pushbutton 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
C761
Control Pushbutton 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
C762
...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 2
C764
C766
C768
C76A
C76C
Clear Records (Read/Write Setting)

C770
Clear Fault Reports operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C772
Clear Event Records operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C773
Clear Oscillography operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C774
Clear Data Logger operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C775
Clear Breaker 1 Arcing Current operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C776
0 to 65535
---
F300
C777
0 to 65535
---
F300
C778
0 to 65535
---
F300
C77B
Clear Demand operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C77C
Clear Channel Status operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C77D
Clear Energy operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C77F
Clear Unauthorized Access operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C782
Reserved (13 items)
---
---
---
F001
Force Contact Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Settings)

C7A0
Force Contact Input x State (96 items)
0 to 2
---
F144
0 (Disabled)
C800
Force Contact Output x State (64 items)
0 to 3
---
F131
0 (Disabled)
0 (No)
Channel Tests (Read/Write)

C840
Local Loopback Function
0 to 1
---
F126
C841
Local Loopback Channel
1 to 2
---
F001
C842
Remote Loopback Function
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
C843
Remote Loopback Channel
1 to 2
---
F001
C844
Remote Diagnostics Transmit
0 to 2
---
F223
0 (NO TEST)
Direct Input/Output Settings (Read/Write Setting)

C850
Direct Input Default States (8 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
C858
Direct Input Default States (8 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
C860
Direct Output x 1 Operand (8 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
C868
Direct Output x 2 Operand (8 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0
Remote Device 1
Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

CB00
Remote Device 1 GSSE/GOOSE Application ID
CB21
Remote Device 1 GOOSE Ethernet APPID
---
---
---
F209
0 to 16383
---
F001
CB22
Remote Device 1 GOOSE Dataset
0 to 8
---
F184
0 (Fixed)
CB23
Remote Device 1 in PMU Scheme
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
CB24
...Repeated for Device 2
CB48
CB6C
CB90
CBB4
CBD8
CBFC
B-58
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
CC20
CC44
CC68
CC8C
CCB0
CCD4
CCF8
CD1C
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)

CFA0
Remote Input 1 Device
1 to 16
---
F001
CFA1
Remote Input 1 Item
0 to 64
---
F156
0 (None)
CFA2
Remote Input 1 Default State
0 to 3
---
F086
0 (Off)
CFA3
Remote Input 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
CFA4
Remote Input 1 Name
1 to 64
---
F205
Rem Ip 1
CFAA
...Repeated for Remote Input 2
CFB4
CFBE
CFC8
CFD2
CFDC
CFE6
CFF0
CFFA
D004
D00E
D018
D022
D02C
D036
D040
D04A
D054
D05E
D068
D072
D07C
D086
D090
D09A
D0A4
D0AE
D0B8
D0C2
D0CC
D0D6
Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)

D220
Remote Output DNA 1 Operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
D221
Remote Output DNA 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
D222
Reserved (2 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
D224
...Repeated for Remote Output 2
D228
D22C
D230
D234
GE Multilin
B-59
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
D238
D23C
D240
D244
D248
D24C
D250
D254
D258
D25C
D260
D264
D268
D26C
D270
D274
D278
D27C
D280
D284
D288
D28C
D290
D294
D298
D29C
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)

D2A0
Remote Output UserSt 1 Operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
D2A1
Remote Output UserSt 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
D2A2
Reserved (2 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
D2A4
D2A8
D2AC
D2B0
D2B4
D2B8
D2BC
D2C0
D2C4
D2C8
D2CC
D2D0
D2D4
D2D8
D2DC
D2E0
D2E4
D2E8
D2EC
D2F0
D2F4
D2F8
D2FC
D300
B-60
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
D304
D308
D30C
D310
D314
D318
D31C
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
IEC 61850 GGIO2 Control Configuration (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)

D320
IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO1.ctlModel Value
0 to 2
---
F001
D321
0 to 2
---
F001
D322
0 to 2
---
F001
D323
0 to 2
---
F001
D324
0 to 2
---
F001
D325
0 to 2
---
F001
D326
0 to 2
---
F001
D327
0 to 2
---
F001
D328
0 to 2
---
F001
D329
0 to 2
---
F001
D32A
0 to 2
---
F001
D32B
0 to 2
---
F001
D32C
0 to 2
---
F001
D32D
0 to 2
---
F001
D32E
0 to 2
---
F001
D32F
0 to 2
---
F001
D330
0 to 2
---
F001
D331
0 to 2
---
F001
D332
0 to 2
---
F001
D333
0 to 2
---
F001
D334
0 to 2
---
F001
D335
0 to 2
---
F001
D336
0 to 2
---
F001
D337
0 to 2
---
F001
D338
0 to 2
---
F001
D339
0 to 2
---
F001
D33A
0 to 2
---
F001
D33B
0 to 2
---
F001
D33C
0 to 2
---
F001
D33D
0 to 2
---
F001
D33E
0 to 2
---
F001
D33F
0 to 2
---
F001
D340
0 to 2
---
F001
D341
0 to 2
---
F001
D342
0 to 2
---
F001
D343
0 to 2
---
F001
D344
0 to 2
---
F001
D345
0 to 2
---
F001
D346
0 to 2
---
F001
D347
0 to 2
---
F001
D348
0 to 2
---
F001
D349
0 to 2
---
F001
D34A
0 to 2
---
F001
D34B
0 to 2
---
F001
D34C
0 to 2
---
F001
D34D
0 to 2
---
F001
GE Multilin
B-61
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
D34E
0 to 2
---
F001
DEFAULT
2
D34F
0 to 2
---
F001
D350
0 to 2
---
F001
D351
0 to 2
---
F001
D352
0 to 2
---
F001
D353
0 to 2
---
F001
D354
0 to 2
---
F001
D355
0 to 2
---
F001
D356
0 to 2
---
F001
D357
0 to 2
---
F001
D358
0 to 2
---
F001
D359
0 to 2
---
F001
D35A
0 to 2
---
F001
D35B
0 to 2
---
F001
D35C
0 to 2
---
F001
D35D
0 to 2
---
F001
D35E
0 to 2
---
F001
Remote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)

D380
Remote Device 1 StNum
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
D382
Remote Device 1 SqNum
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
D384
...Repeated for Remote Device 2
D388
D38C
D390
D394
D398
D39C
D3A0
D3A4
D3A8
D3AC
D3B0
D3B4
D3B8
D3BC
D3C0
D3C4
D3C8
D3CC
D3D0
D3D4
D3D8
D3DC
D3E0
D3E4
D3E8
D3EC
D3F0
D3F4
D3F8
D3FC
Phasor Measurement Unit Communication (Read/Write Setting)

D400
PMU 1 Communication Port 1 Type
0 to 3
---
F545
0 (Network)
D401
0 to 3
---
F545
0 (Network)
B-62
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
D402
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 3
---
F545
0 (Network)
D403
PMU 1 Port 1 PHS-x (14 items)
0 to 14
---
F543
1 (Va)
D411
0 to 14
---
F543
1 (Va)
D41F
0 to 14
---
F543
1 (Va)
D42D
PMU 1 Communication Port 1 PHS-x Name (14 items)
---
---
---
F203
GE-UR-PMU-PHS 1
D49D
PMU 1 Port 2 PHS-x Name (14 items)
---
---
---
F203
GE-UR-PMU-PHS 1
D50D
PMU 1 Port 3 PHS-x Name (14 items)
---
---
---
F203
GE-UR-PMU-PHS 1
D57D
PMU 1 Port 1 A-CH-x (8 items)
0 to 65535
---
F600
D585
0 to 65535
---
F600
D58D
0 to 65535
---
F600
D595
PMU 1 Port 1 A-CH-x Name (8 items)
---
---
---
F203
AnalogChannel 1
D5D5
---
---
---
F203
AnalogChannel 1
D615
---
---
---
F203
AnalogChannel 1
D655
PMU 1 Port 1 D-CH-x (16 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
D665
0 to 65535
---
F300
D675
0 to 65535
---
F300
D685
PMU 1 Port 1 D-CH-x Name (16 items)
---
---
---
F203
Dig Channel 1
D705
---
---
---
F203
Dig Channel 1
D785
---
---
---
F203
Dig Channel 1
D705
PMU 1 Port 1 D-CH-x Normal State (16 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
D715
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
D725
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
Phasor Measurement Unit Recording Command (Read/Write Command)

E4D4
PMU 1 Recording Clear Command
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
E4D5
PMU 1 Recording Force Trigger
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 10
---
F544
3 (10/sec.)
---
---
F001
1 to 128
---
F001
---
F542
0 (Auto Overwrite)
10
Phasor Measurement Unit Recording (Read/Write Setting)

E4DC
PMU 1 Recording Rate
E4DD
Reserved
E4DE
PMU 1 No Of Timed Records
E4DF
PMU 1 Trigger Mode
0 to 1
E4E0
PMU 1 Timed Trigger Position
1 to 50
F001
E4E1
Reserved
---
---
F001
E4E2
PMU 1 Record PHS-1 (14 items)
0 to 14
---
F543
1 (Va)
GE-UR-PMU-PHS 1
E4F0
PMU 1 Record PHS-x Name (14 items)
E560
PMU 1 Record A-CH-x (8 items)
E568
PMU 1 Record A-CH-x Name (8 items)
E5A8
PMU 1 Record D-CH-x (16 items)
E5B8
PMU 1 Record D-CH-x Name (16 items)
---
---
---
F203
0 to 65535
---
F600
---
---
---
F203
AnalogChannel 1
0 to 65535
---
F300
---
---
---
F203
Dig Channel 1
0 (Disabled)
Phasor Measurement Unit Network Reporting Configuration (Read/Write Setting)

EA4C
PMU Network Reporting Function
0 to 1
---
F102
EA4D
PMU Network Reporting ID Code
1 to 65534
---
F001
EA4E
PMU Network Reporting Rate
0 to 11
---
F544
3 (10/sec.)
EA4F
PMU Network Reporting Style
0 to 1
---
F546
0 (Polar)
EA50
PMU Network Reporting Format
0 to 1
---
F547
0 (Integer)
EA51
PMU Network PDC Control
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
EA52
PMU TCP port number
1 to 65535
---
F001
4712
EA53
PMU UDP port number 1
1 to 65535
---
F001
4713
EA54
PMU UDP port number 2
1 to 65535
---
F001
4714
0 (Disabled)
Phasor Measurement Unit Basic Configuration (Read/Write Setting)

EA58
PMU 1 Function
EA59
PMU 1 IDcode
EA5A
PMU 1 STN
0 to 1
---
F102
1 to 65534
---
F001
---
---
---
F203
GE-UR-PMU
EA62
PMU 1 Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
EA63
PMU 1 Post-Filter
0 to 3
---
F540
1 (Symm-3-point)
GE Multilin
B-63
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Phasor Measurement Unit Calibration (Read/Write Setting)
EA88
PMU 1 Va Calibration Angle
-5 to 5
0.05
F002
EA89
PMU 1 Vb Calibration Angle
-5 to 5
0.05
F002
EA8A
PMU 1 Vc Calibration Angle
-5 to 5
0.05
F002
EA8B
PMU 1 Vx Calibration Angle
-5 to 5
0.05
F002
EA8C
PMU 1 Ia Calibration Angle
-5 to 5
0.05
F002
EA8D
PMU 1 Ib Calibration Angle
-5 to 5
0.05
F002
EA8E
PMU 1 Ic Calibration Angle
-5 to 5
0.05
F002
EA8F
PMU 1 Ig Calibration Angle
-5 to 5
0.05
F002
EA90
PMU 1 Sequence Voltage Shift Angle
-180 to 180
30
F002
EA91
PMU 1 Sequence Current Shift Angle
-180 to 180
30
F002
0 to 65535
---
F300
Phasor Measurement Unit Triggering (Read/Write Setting)

EAB0
PMU 1 User Trigger
Phasor Measurement Unit Current Trigger (Read/Write Setting)

EAB4
PMU 1 Current Trigger Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
EAB5
PMU 1 Current Trigger Pickup
0.1 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1800
EAB6
PMU 1 Current Trigger Pickup Time
0 to 600
0.01
F001
10
EAB7
PMU 1 Current Trigger Dropout Time
0 to 600
0.01
F001
100
EAB8
PMU 1 Current Trigger Block (3 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
EABB
PMU 1 Current Trigger Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
EABC
PMU 1 Current Trigger Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 (Disabled)
Phasor Measurement Unit df/dt Trigger (Read/Write Setting)

EAD8
PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Function
0 to 1
---
F102
EAD9
PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Raise
0.1 to 15
Hz/s
0.01
F001
25
EADA
PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Fall
0.1 to 15
Hz/s
0.01
F001
25
EADB
PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Pickup Time
0 to 600
0.01
F001
10
EADC
PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Dropout Time
0 to 600
0.01
F001
100
EADD
PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Block (3 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
EAE0
PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
EAE1
PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
Phasor Measurement Unit Frequency Trigger (Read/Write Setting)

EB00
PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
EB01
PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Low Frequency
20 to 70
Hz
0.01
F001
4900
EB02
PMU 1 Frequency Trigger High Frequency
20 to 70
Hz
0.01
F001
6100
EB03
PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Pickup Time
0 to 600
0.01
F001
10
EB04
PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Dropout Time
0 to 600
0.01
F001
100
EB05
PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Block (3 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
EB08
PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
EB09
PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 (Disabled)
Phasor Measurement Unit Power Trigger (Read/Write Setting)

EB28
PMU 1 Power Trigger Function
0 to 1
---
F102
EB29
PMU 1 Power Trigger Active
0.25 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
1250
EB2A
PMU 1 Power Trigger Reactive
0.25 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
1250
1250
EB2B
PMU 1 Power Trigger Apparent
0.25 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
EB2C
PMU 1 Power Trigger Pickup Time
0 to 600
0.01
F001
10
EB2D
PMU 1 Power Trigger Dropout Time
0 to 600
0.01
F001
100
EB2E
PMU 1 Power Trigger Block (3 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
EB31
PMU 1 Power Trigger Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
EB32
PMU 1 Power Trigger Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 (Disabled)
Phasor Measurement Unit Voltage Trigger (Read/Write Setting)

EB54
PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Function
0 to 1
---
F102
EB55
PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Low Voltage
0.25 to 1.25
pu
0.001
F001
800
EB56
PMU 1 Voltage Trigger High Voltage
0.75 to 1.75
pu
0.001
F001
1200
EB57
PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Pickup Time
0 to 600
0.01
F001
10
B-64
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
EB58
PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Dropout Time
0 to 600
0.01
F001
100
EB59
PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Block (3 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
EB5C
PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
EB5D
PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
Phasor Measurement Unit One-shot Command (Read/Write Setting)

EB82
PMU One-shot Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
EB83
PMU One-shot Sequence Number
0 to 59
---
F001
EB84
PMU One-shot Time
0 to 235959
---
F050
Phasor Measurement Unit Test Values (Read/Write Setting)

EB86
PMU 1 Test Function
EB87
PMU 1 Phase A Voltage Test Magnitude
EB89
PMU 1 Phase A Voltage Test Angle
EB8A
PMU 1 Phase B Voltage Test Magnitude
EB8C
PMU 1 Phase B Voltage Test Angle
EB8D
PMU 1 Phase C Voltage Test Magnitude
EB8F
PMU 1 Phase C Voltage Test Angle
EB90
PMU 1 Auxiliary Voltage Test Magnitude
EB92
PMU 1 Auxiliary Voltage Test Angle
EB93
PMU 1 Phase A Current Test Magnitude
EB95
PMU 1 Phase A Current Test Angle
EB96
PMU 1 Phase B Current Test Magnitude
EB98
PMU 1 Phase B Current Test Angle
EB99
PMU 1 Phase C Current Test Magnitude
EB9B
PMU 1 Phase C Current Test Angle
EB9C
PMU 1 Ground Current Test Magnitude
EB9E
PMU 1 Ground Current Test Angle
EB9F
EBA1
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 700
kV
0.01
F003
50000
-180 to 180
0.05
F002
0 to 700
kV
0.01
F003
50000
-180 to 180
0.05
F002
-120
0 to 700
kV
0.01
F003
50000
-180 to 180
0.05
F002
120
0 to 700
kV
0.01
F003
50000
-180 to 180
0.05
F002
0 to 9.999
kA
0.001
F004
1000
-180 to 180
0.05
F002
-10
0 to 9.999
kA
0.001
F004
1000
-180 to 180
0.05
F002
-130
0 to 9.999
kA
0.001
F003
1000
-180 to 180
0.05
F002
110
0 to 9.999
kA
0.001
F004
-180 to 180
0.05
F002
PMU 1 Test Frequency
20 to 70
Hz
0.001
F003
60000
PMU 1 Test df/dt
-10 to 10
Hz/s
0.001
F002
F126
0 (No)
Phasor Measurement Unit Recorder Configuration Counter Command (Read/Write Command)

EBF6
PMU 1 Recorder Clear Configuration Counter
0 to 1
---
Phasor Measurement Unit Recording Values (Read Only)

EBFA
PMU 1 Available Records
0 to 65535
---
F001
EBFB
PMU 1 Second Per Record
0 to 6553.5
---
0.1
F001
EBFD
PMU 1 Last Cleared Date
0 to 400000000
---
F050
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
---
---
---
---
---
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
0 to 65535
---
F001
0 to 65535
samples
F001
Setting file template values (read only)

ED00
FlexLogic displays active
ED01
Reserved (6 items)
ED07
Last settings change date
ED09
Template bitmask (750 items)
Phasor Measurement Unit Records (Read Only)

EFFF
PMU Recording Number of Triggers
GE Multilin
B-65
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
B.4.2 DATA FORMATS
F001
UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F040
UR_UINT48 48-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER
F002
UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F050
UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER)
F003
UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
High order word is stored in the first register.
Low order word is stored in the second register.
F004
UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
High order word is stored in the first register/
Low order word is stored in the second register.
F051
UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format (alternate format for F050)
First 16 bits are Month/Day (MM/DD/xxxx). Month: 1=January,
2=February,...,12=December; Day: 1 to 31 in steps of 1
Last 16 bits are Year (xx/xx/YYYY): 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1
F052
UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format (alternate format for F050)
First 16 bits are Hours/Minutes (HH:MM:xx.xxx).
Hours: 0=12am, 1=1am,...,12=12pm,...23=11pm;
Minutes: 0 to 59 in steps of 1
F005
UR_UINT8 UNSIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
Last 16 bits are Seconds

1=00.001,...,59999=59.999s)
F006
UR_SINT8 SIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
(xx:xx:.SS.SSS):
0=00.000s,
F060
FLOATING_POINT IEEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits)
F011
UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 points)
A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x, y) which
are interpolated to generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the user
defined trip or operation time setting; the x-axis is the pickup ratio
and is pre-defined. Refer to format F119 for a listing of the pickup
ratios; the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicates the offset into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time
value is stored.
F070
HEX2 2 BYTES - 4 ASCII DIGITS
F071
F072
F012
DISPLAY_SCALE DISPLAY SCALING
(unsigned 16-bit integer)
MSB indicates the SI units as a power of ten. LSB indicates the
number of decimal points to display.
Example: Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three
decimal places and base units in Amps. If the retrieved value is
12345.678 A and the display scale equals 0x0302 then the displayed value on the unit is 12.35 kA.
F013
POWER_FACTOR (SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER)
Positive values indicate lagging power factor; negative values
indicate leading.
B-66
Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January

1, 1970.
F073
F074
F081
ENUMERATION: AUTORECLOSE 1P/3P BKR FAIL OPTION
0 = Continue, 1 = Lockout
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F082
ENUMERATION: AUTORECLOSE SINGLE-PHASE /
THREE-PHASE BREAKER SEQUENCE
0 = 1, 1 = 2, 2 = 1 & 2, 3 = 1 2, 4 = 2 1
F103
ENUMERATION: CURVE SHAPES
bitmask
curve shape
bitmask
IEEE Mod Inv
curve shape
IAC Inverse
IEEE Very Inv
10
IAC Short Inv
F083
ENUMERATION: SELECTOR MODES
IEEE Ext Inv
11
I2t
IEC Curve A
12
Definite Time
0 = Time-Out, 1 = Acknowledge
IEC Curve B
13
FlexCurve A
IEC Curve C
14
FlexCurve B
IEC Short Inv
15
FlexCurve C
IAC Ext Inv
16
FlexCurve D
IAC Very Inv
F084
ENUMERATION: SELECTOR POWER UP
0 = Restore, 1 = Synchronize, 2 = Sync/Restore
F104
ENUMERATION: RESET TYPE
F085
ENUMERATION: POWER SWING SHAPE
0 = Instantaneous, 1 = Timed, 2 = Linear
0 = Mho Shape, 1 = Quad Shape
F086
ENUMERATION: DIGITAL INPUT DEFAULT STATE
0 = Off, 1 = On, 2= Latest/Off, 3 = Latest/On
F108
ENUMERATION: OFF/ON
F100
ENUMERATION: VT CONNECTION TYPE
0 = Off, 1 = On
0 = Wye; 1 = Delta
F101
ENUMERATION: MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY
0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled, 1 = Input 1, 2 = Input 2
0 = ABC, 1 = ACB
0 = Operate-dominant, 1 = Reset-dominant
F102
ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED
F105
ENUMERATION: LOGIC INPUT
F106
ENUMERATION: PHASE ROTATION
F090
ENUMERATION: LATCHING OUTPUT TYPE
0 = 25%, 1 = 50%, 2 = 75%, 3 = 100%
F109
ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION
0 = Self-reset, 1 = Latched, 2 = Disabled
F110
ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL
0 = Trip, 1 = Alarm, 2 = None
F111
ENUMERATION: UNDERVOLTAGE CURVE SHAPES
0 = Definite Time, 1 = Inverse Time
GE Multilin
B-67
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F112
ENUMERATION: RS485 BAUD RATES
bitmask
value
F119
ENUMERATION: FLEXCURVE PICKUP RATIOS
bitmask
value
bitmask
mask
value
mask
value
mask
value
mask
value
300
9600
value
115200
0.00
30
0.88
60
2.90
90
5.90
1200
19200
14400
0.05
31
0.90
61
3.00
91
6.00
2400
38400
10
28800
0.10
32
0.91
62
3.10
92
6.50
4800
57600
11
33600
0.15
33
0.92
63
3.20
93
7.00
0.20
34
0.93
64
3.30
94
7.50
0.25
35
0.94
65
3.40
95
8.00
0.30
36
0.95
66
3.50
96
8.50
0.35
37
0.96
67
3.60
97
9.00
0.40
38
0.97
68
3.70
98
9.50
0.45
39
0.98
69
3.80
99
10.00
F113
ENUMERATION: PARITY
0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even
F114
ENUMERATION: IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE
10
0.48
40
1.03
70
3.90
100
10.50
11
0.50
41
1.05
71
4.00
101
11.00
0 = None, 1 = DC Shift, 2 = Amplitude Modulated
12
0.52
42
1.10
72
4.10
102
11.50
13
0.54
43
1.20
73
4.20
103
12.00
14
0.56
44
1.30
74
4.30
104
12.50
F115
ENUMERATION: BREAKER STATUS
15
0.58
45
1.40
75
4.40
105
13.00
16
0.60
46
1.50
76
4.50
106
13.50
0 = Auxiliary A, 1 = Auxiliary B
17
0.62
47
1.60
77
4.60
107
14.00
18
0.64
48
1.70
78
4.70
108
14.50
19
0.66
49
1.80
79
4.80
109
15.00
20
0.68
50
1.90
80
4.90
110
15.50
21
0.70
51
2.00
81
5.00
111
16.00
22
0.72
52
2.10
82
5.10
112
16.50
23
0.74
53
2.20
83
5.20
113
17.00
24
0.76
54
2.30
84
5.30
114
17.50
F117
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
25
0.78
55
2.40
85
5.40
115
18.00
26
0.80
56
2.50
86
5.50
116
18.50
0 = 172 cycles, 1 = 336 cycles, 2 = 718 cycles, 3 = 159 cycles
27
0.82
57
2.60
87
5.60
117
19.00
28
0.84
58
2.70
88
5.70
118
19.50
29
0.86
59
2.80
89
5.80
119
20.00
F116
ENUMERATION: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE CURVES
0 = Definite Time, 1 = FlexCurve A, 2 = FlexCurve B,
3 = FlexCurve C
F118
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE
0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected
F120
ENUMERATION: DISTANCE SHAPE
0 = Mho, 1 = Quad
F122
ENUMERATION: ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE
0 = Phasor, 1 = RMS
F123
ENUMERATION: CT SECONDARY
0 = 1 A, 1 = 5 A
B-68
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

bitmask
F124
ENUMERATION: LIST OF ELEMENTS
element
71
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 8
72
element
73
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
74
75
80
Ground Time Overcurrent 1
81
82
83
84
85
96
Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
97
Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
10
101
Opposite Phase Rotation
11
112
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1
Phase Time Overcurrent 1
113
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 2
17
120
Negative Sequence Overvoltage
18
121
Wattmetric Zero-Sequence Directional 1
122
Wattmetric Zero-Sequence Directional 2
20
140
Auxiliary Undervoltage 1
21
144
Phase Undervoltage 1
Phase Directional Overcurrent 1
145
Phase Undervoltage 2
25
Phase Directional Overcurrent 2
148
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1
32
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
152
Phase Overvoltage 1
154
Compensated Overvoltage 1
156
Neutral Overvoltage 1
35
161
Phase Distance Zone 2
36
168
Line Pickup
172
Ground Distance Zone 1
173
Ground Distance Zone 2
180
Load Encroachment
40
185
PUTT Pilot Scheme
41
190
Power Swing Detect
42
224
SRC1 VT Fuse Failure
43
225
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1
226
227
228
229
232
SRC1 50DD (Disturbance Detection)
233
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1
234
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 2
235
Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1
240
87L Current Differential
61
Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 2
244
50DD Disturbance Detector
64
245
Continuous Monitor
65
246
CT Failure
66
254
87L Trip (Current Differential Trip)
255
Stub Bus
68
280
Breaker Failure 1
69
281
Breaker Failure 2
282
Breaker Failure 3
283
Breaker Failure 4
bitmask
0
1
6
7
8
9
16
19
24
33
34
37
38
39
48
49
50
51
52
53
56
57
60
67
70
GE Multilin
B-69
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

bitmask
element
APPENDIX B
bitmask
element
288
Breaker Arcing Current 1
548
Digital Counter 5
289
549
Digital Counter 6
290
550
Digital Counter 7
291
551
Digital Counter 8
292
692
Digital Element 1
293
693
Digital Element 2
294
Breaker 1 Flashover
694
Digital Element 3
295
Breaker 2 Flashover
695
Digital Element 4
311
Phasor measurement unit one-shot
696
Digital Element 5
312
Synchrocheck 1
697
Digital Element 6
313
Synchrocheck 2
698
Digital Element 7
336
Setting Group
699
Digital Element 8
337
Reset
700
Digital Element 9
360
Trip Output
701
Digital Element 10
362
Phase Selector
702
Digital Element 11
363
Open Pole Detector
703
Digital Element 12
388
Selector 1
704
Digital Element 13
389
Selector 2
705
Digital Element 14
390
Control pushbutton 1
706
Digital Element 15
391
707
Digital Element 16
392
708
Digital Element 17
393
709
Digital Element 18
394
710
Digital Element 19
395
711
Digital Element 20
396
712
Digital Element 21
400
FlexElement 1
713
Digital Element 22
401
FlexElement 2
714
Digital Element 23
402
FlexElement 3
715
Digital Element 24
403
FlexElement 4
716
Digital Element 25
404
FlexElement 5
717
Digital Element 26
405
FlexElement 6
718
Digital Element 27
406
FlexElement 7
719
Digital Element 28
407
FlexElement 8
720
Digital Element 29
420
Non-volatile Latch 1
721
Digital Element 30
421
722
Digital Element 31
422
723
Digital Element 32
423
724
Digital Element 33
424
725
Digital Element 34
425
726
Digital Element 35
426
727
Digital Element 36
427
728
Digital Element 37
428
729
Digital Element 38
429
730
Digital Element 39
430
731
Digital Element 40
431
732
Digital Element 41
432
733
Digital Element 42
433
734
Digital Element 43
434
735
Digital Element 44
435
736
Digital Element 45
544
Digital Counter 1
737
Digital Element 46
545
Digital Counter 2
738
Digital Element 47
546
Digital Counter 3
739
Digital Element 48
547
Digital Counter 4
740
Phasor Measurement Unit 1 Frequency
B-70
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
bitmask
746
element
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

bitmask
element
Phasor Measurement Unit 1 Voltage
890
RTD Input 42
752
Phasor Measurement Unit 1 Current
891
RTD Input 43
758
Phasor Measurement Unit 1 Power
892
RTD Input 44
764
PMU 1 Rate of Change of Frequency
893
RTD Input 45
770
Phasor Measurement Unit 1
894
RTD Input 46
842
Trip Bus 1
895
RTD Input 47
843
Trip Bus 2
896
RTD Input 48
844
Trip Bus 3
900
User-Programmable Pushbutton 1
845
Trip Bus 4
901
846
Trip Bus 5
902
847
Trip Bus 6
903
849
RTD Input 1
904
850
RTD Input 2
905
851
RTD Input 3
906
852
RTD Input 4
907
853
RTD Input 5
908
854
RTD Input 6
909
855
RTD Input 7
910
856
RTD Input 8
911
857
RTD Input 9
912
858
RTD Input 10
913
859
RTD Input 11
914
860
RTD Input 12
915
861
RTD Input 13
920
Disconnect switch 1
862
RTD Input 14
921
Disconnect switch 2
863
RTD Input 15
922
Disconnect switch 3
864
RTD Input 16
923
Disconnect switch 4
865
RTD Input 17
924
Disconnect switch 5
866
RTD Input 18
925
Disconnect switch 6
867
RTD Input 19
926
Disconnect switch 7
868
RTD Input 20
927
Disconnect switch 8
869
RTD Input 21
928
Disconnect switch 9
870
RTD Input 22
929
Disconnect switch 10
871
RTD Input 23
930
872
RTD Input 24
931
873
RTD Input 25
932
874
RTD Input 26
933
875
RTD Input 27
934
876
RTD Input 28
935
877
RTD Input 29
968
Breaker 1
878
RTD Input 30
969
Breaker 2
879
RTD Input 31
970
Breaker 3
880
RTD Input 32
971
Breaker 4
881
RTD Input 33
882
RTD Input 34
883
RTD Input 35
884
RTD Input 36
885
RTD Input 37
886
RTD Input 38
887
RTD Input 39
888
RTD Input 40
F126
ENUMERATION: NO/YES CHOICE
889
RTD Input 41
0 = No, 1 = Yes
GE Multilin
F125
ENUMERATION: ACCESS LEVEL
0 = Restricted; 1 = Command, 2 = Setting, 3 = Factory Service
B-71
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F127
ENUMERATION: LATCHED OR SELF-RESETTING
F138
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE
0 = Latched, 1 = Self-Reset
0 = Data File, 1 = Configuration File, 2 = Header File
F128
ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD
F139
ENUMERATION: DEMAND CALCULATIONS
0 = 17 V DC, 1 = 33 V DC, 2 = 84 V DC, 3 = 166 V DC
0 = Thermal Exponential, 1 = Block Interval, 2 = Rolling Demand
F129
ENUMERATION: FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE
F140
ENUMERATION: CURRENT, SENS CURRENT, VOLTAGE,
DISABLED
0 = millisecond, 1 = second, 2 = minute
0 = Disabled, 1 = Current 46 A, 2 = Voltage 280 V,

3 = Current 4.6 A, 4 = Current 2 A, 5 = Notched 4.6 A,
6 = Notched 2 A
F130
ENUMERATION: SIMULATION MODE
0 = Off. 1 = Pre-Fault, 2 = Fault, 3 = Post-Fault
F141
ENUMERATION: SELF TEST ERRORS
F131
ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
0 = Disabled, 1 = Energized, 2 = De-energized, 3 = Freeze
Bitmask
0
Error
Any Self Tests
IRIG-B Failure
Port 1 Offline
F132
ENUMERATION: DEMAND INTERVAL
Port 2 Offline
Port 3 Offline
0 = 5 min, 1 = 10 min, 2 = 15 min, 3 = 20 min, 4 = 30 min,

5 = 60 min
Port 4 Offline
Port 5 Offline
Port 6 Offline
RRTD Communcations Failure
F133
ENUMERATION: PROGRAM STATE
0 = Not Programmed, 1 = Programmed
Voltage Monitor
10
FlexLogic Error Token
11
Equipment Mismatch
12
Process Bus Failure
F134
ENUMERATION: PASS/FAIL
13
Unit Not Programmed
14
System Exception
0 = Fail, 1 = OK, 2 = n/a
15
Latching Output Discrepancy
16
Ethernet Switch Fail
17
Maintenance Alert 01
F135
ENUMERATION: GAIN CALIBRATION
18
SNTP Failure
19
---
0 = 0x1, 1 = 1x16
20
Primary Ethernet Fail
21
Secondary Ethernet Fail
F136
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
0 = 31 x 8 cycles, 1 = 15 x 16 cycles, 2 = 7 x 32 cycles
3 = 3 x 64 cycles, 4 = 1 x 128 cycles
F137
ENUMERATION: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON
FUNCTION
0 = Disabled, 1 = Self-Reset, 2 = Latched
B-72
22
Temperature Monitor
23
Process Bus Trouble
24
Brick Trouble
25
Field RTD Trouble
26
Field TDR Trouble
27
Remote Device Offline
28
Direct Device Offline
29
Direct Input/Output Ring Break
30
Any Minor Error
31
Any Major Error
32
Unit Not Calibrated
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
Bitmask
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Error
F146
ENUMERATION: MISCELLANEOUS EVENT CAUSES
33
---
34
---
35
---
36
Watchdog Error
37
Low On Memory
Oscillography Triggered
38
---
Date/time Changed
43
Module Failure 01
Default Settings Loaded
44
Module Failure 02
Test Mode Forcing On
45
Module Failure 03
Test Mode Forcing Off
46
Module Failure 04
Power On
47
Module Failure 05
Power Off
48
Module Failure 06
Relay In Service
49
Module Failure 07
Relay Out Of Service
50
Module Failure 08
10
Watchdog Reset
51
Module Failure 09
11
Oscillography Clear
52
Incompatible Hardware
12
Reboot Command
53
Module Failure 10
13
Led Test Initiated
54
Module Failure 11
14
Flash Programming
55
Module Failure 12
15
Fault Report Trigger
16
User Programmable Fault Report Trigger
bitmask
definition
Events Cleared
17
---
18
Reload CT/VT module Settings
19
---
20
Ethernet Port 1 Offline
21
F143
UR_UINT32: 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies bit number)
22
23
A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error
24
F142
ENUMERATION: EVENT RECORDER ACCESS FILE TYPE
0 = All Record Data, 1 = Headers Only, 2 = Numeric Event Cause
F144
ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE
0 = Disabled, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed
F145
ENUMERATION: ALPHABET LETTER
bitmask type
bitmask type
bitmask type
bitmask type
26
Test Mode Isolated
27
Test Mode Forcible
28
Test Mode Disabled
29
Temperature Warning On
30
Temperature Warning Off
31
Unauthorized Access
32
System Integrity Recovery
33
System Integrity Recovery 06
34
System Integrity Recovery 07
null
14
21
15
22
16
23
10
17
24
F147
ENUMERATION: LINE LENGTH UNITS
11
18
25
0 = km, 1 = miles
12
19
26
13
20
GE Multilin
25
B-73
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F148
ENUMERATION: FAULT TYPE
F155
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE STATE
0 = Offline, 1 = Online
bitmask
fault type
bitmask
fault type
NA
AC
AG
ABG
BG
BCG
CG
ACG
AB
10
ABC
bitmask
value
bitmask
value
ABCG
NONE
35
UserSt-3
DNA-1
36
UserSt-4
DNA-2
37
UserSt-5
DNA-3
38
UserSt-6
DNA-4
39
UserSt-7
UserSt-8
BC
11
F156
ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS
F151
ENUMERATION: RTD SELECTION
bitmask
RTD#
bitmask
RTD#
bitmask
RTD#
DNA-5
40
NONE
17
RTD 17
33
RTD 33
DNA-6
41
UserSt-9
RTD 1
18
RTD 18
34
RTD 34
DNA-7
42
UserSt-10
RTD 2
19
RTD 19
35
RTD 35
DNA-8
43
UserSt-11
RTD 3
20
RTD 20
36
RTD 36
DNA-9
44
UserSt-12
RTD 4
21
RTD 21
37
RTD 37
10
DNA-10
45
UserSt-13
RTD 5
22
RTD 22
38
RTD 38
11
DNA-11
46
UserSt-14
RTD 6
23
RTD 23
39
RTD 39
12
DNA-12
47
UserSt-15
RTD 7
24
RTD 24
40
RTD 40
13
DNA-13
48
UserSt-16
RTD 8
25
RTD 25
41
RTD 41
14
DNA-14
49
UserSt-17
RTD 9
26
RTD 26
42
RTD 42
15
DNA-15
50
UserSt-18
10
RTD 10
27
RTD 27
43
RTD 43
16
DNA-16
51
UserSt-19
11
RTD 11
28
RTD 28
44
RTD 44
17
DNA-17
52
UserSt-20
12
RTD 12
29
RTD 29
45
RTD 45
18
DNA-18
53
UserSt-21
13
RTD 13
30
RTD 30
46
RTD 46
19
DNA-19
54
UserSt-22
14
RTD 14
31
RTD 31
47
RTD 47
20
DNA-20
55
UserSt-23
15
RTD 15
32
RTD 32
48
RTD 48
21
DNA-21
56
UserSt-24
16
RTD 16
22
DNA-22
57
UserSt-25
23
DNA-23
58
UserSt-26
24
DNA-24
59
UserSt-27
25
DNA-25
60
UserSt-28
26
DNA-26
61
UserSt-29
27
DNA-27
62
UserSt-30
28
DNA-28
63
UserSt-31
29
DNA-29
64
UserSt-32
30
DNA-30
65
Dataset Item 1
F152
ENUMERATION: SETTING GROUP
0 = Active Group, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3
4 = Group 4, 5 = Group 5, 6 = Group 6
F153
ENUMERATION: DISTANCE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION
31
DNA-31
66
Dataset Item 2
bitmask
type
bitmask
type
bitmask
type
32
DNA-32
67
Dataset Item 3
None
Dy9
10
Yd7
33
UserSt-1
Dy1
Dy11
11
Yd9
34
UserSt-2
128
Dataset Item 64
Dy3
Yd1
12
Yd11
Dy5
Yd3
Dy7
Yd5
F157
ENUMERATION: BREAKER MODE
0 = 3-Pole, 1 = 1-Pole
F154
ENUMERATION: DISTANCE DIRECTION
0 = Forward, 1 = Reverse, 2 = Non-Directional
F158
ENUMERATION: SCHEME CALIBRATION TEST
0 = Normal, 1 = Symmetry 1, 2 = Symmetry 2, 3 = Delay 1
4 = Delay 2
B-74
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F159
ENUMERATION: BREAKER AUX CONTACT KEYING
F174
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE
0 = 52a, 1 = 52b, 2 = None
0 = 100 Ohm Platinum, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel,

2 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 3 = 10 Ohm Copper
F166
ENUMERATION: AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE
F175
ENUMERATION: PHASE LETTERS
0 = Vn, 1 = Vag, 2 = Vbg, 3 = Vcg, 4 = Vab, 5 = Vbc, 6 = Vca
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C
F167
ENUMERATION: SIGNAL SOURCE
F176
ENUMERATION: SYNCHROCHECK DEAD SOURCE SELECT
0 = SRC 1, 1 = SRC 2, 2 = SRC 3, 3 = SRC 4,

4 = SRC 5, 5 = SRC 6
bitmask
synchrocheck dead source
None
F168
ENUMERATION: INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION
LV1 and DV2
DV1 and LV2
0 = Disabled, 1 = Adapt. 2nd, 2 = Trad. 2nd
DV1 or DV2
F170
ENUMERATION: LOW/HIGH OFFSET and GAIN
TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT SELECTION
DV1 Xor DV2
DV1 and DV2
F177
ENUMERATION: COMMUNICATION PORT
0 = LOW, 1 = HIGH
0 = None, 1 = COM1-RS485, 2 = COM2-RS485,

3 = Front Panel-RS232, 4 = Network - TCP, 5 = Network - UDP
F171
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER CHANNEL INPUT TYPE
F178
ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER RATES
0 = dcmA IN, 1 = Ohms IN, 2 = RTD IN, 3 = dcmA OUT,

4 = RRTD IN
0 = 1 sec, 1 = 1 min, 2 = 5 min, 3 = 10 min, 4 = 15 min,

5 = 20 min, 6 = 30 min, 7 = 60 min, 8 = 15 ms, 9 = 30 ms,
10 = 100 ms, 11 = 500 ms
F172
ENUMERATION: SLOT LETTERS
bitmask
slot
bitmask
slot
bitmask
slot
bitmask
slot
12
13
F179
ENUMERATION: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL
OVERCURRENT TYPE
10
14
0 = Neg Sequence, 1 = Zero Sequence
11
15
F173
ENUMERATION: DCMA INPUT/OUTPUT RANGE
bitmask
dcmA input/output range
0 to 1 mA
0 to 1 mA
1 to 1 mA
0 to 5 mA
0 to 10 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
GE Multilin
F180
ENUMERATION: PHASE/GROUND
0 = PHASE, 1 = GROUND
F181
ENUMERATION: ODD/EVEN/NONE
0 = ODD, 1 = EVEN, 2 = NONE
B-75
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
bitmsk
F183
ENUMERATION: AC INPUT WAVEFORMS
bitmask
0
1
2
3
4
keypress
bitmsk
keypress
15
Message Up
43
User-programmable key 13
16
Message Down
44
definition
17
Message Left
45
Off
18
Message Right
46
8 samples/cycle
19
Menu
47
User 4 (control pushbutton)
16 samples/cycle
20
Help
48
32 samples/cycle
21
Escape
49
64 samples/cycle
22
---
50
F184
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE GOOSE DATASET
F192
ENUMERATION: ETHERNET OPERATION MODE
0 = Half-Duplex, 1 = Full-Duplex
value
GOOSE dataset
Off
GooseIn 1
GooseIn 2
GooseIn 3
GooseIn 4
GooseIn 5
GooseIn 6
GooseIn 7
GooseIn 8
F194
ENUMERATION: DNP SCALE
0 = 0.01, 1 = 0.1, 2 = 1, 3 = 10, 4 = 100, 5 = 1000, 6 = 10000,
7 = 100000, 8 = 0.001
F195
ENUMERATION: SINGLE POLE TRIP MODE
0 = Disabled, 1 = 3 Pole Only, 2 = 3 Pole & 1 Pole
F185
ENUMERATION: PHASE A,B,C, GROUND SELECTOR
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = G
F196
ENUMERATION: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
OPERATING CURRENT
0 = Calculated 3I0, 1 = Measured IG
F186
ENUMERATION: MEASUREMENT MODE
F199
ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED/CUSTOM
0 = Phase to Ground, 1 = Phase to Phase
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Custom

F190
ENUMERATION: SIMULATED KEYPRESS
bitmsk
keypress
bitmsk
keypress
20 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
--use between real keys
23
Reset
24
User 1
25
User 2
26
User 3
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
10
34
11
Decimal Point
35
12
Plus/Minus
36
13
Value Up
37
14
Value Down
38
B-76
F200
TEXT40: 40-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
F201
TEXT8: 8-CHARACTER ASCII PASSCODE
F202
F203
F204
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F205
F231
ENUMERATION: POLARIZING VOLTAGE
0 = Calculated V0, 1 = Measured VX
F206
F232
ENUMERATION: CONFIGURABLE GOOSE DATASET ITEMS
FOR TRANSMISSION
F207
value
F208
F211
ENUMERATION: SOURCE SELECTION
F213
F220
ENUMERATION: PUSHBUTTON MESSAGE PRIORITY
priority
Disabled
Normal
High Priority
None
GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q
GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal
GGIO1.ST.Ind2.q
GGIO1.ST.Ind2.stVal
0 = None, 1 = SRC 1, 2 = SRC 2, 3 = SRC 3, 4 = SRC 4,

5 = SRC 5, 6 = SRC 6
value
GOOSE dataset item
255
GGIO1.ST.Ind128.q
256
GGIO1.ST.Ind128.stVal
257
MMXU1.MX.TotW.mag.f
258
MMXU1.MX.TotVAr.mag.f
259
MMXU1.MX.TotVA.mag.f
260
MMXU1.MX.TotPF.mag.f
261
MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f
262
MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f
263
MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f
264
MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f
265
MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f
266
MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f
267
MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f
268
MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f
269
MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f
F222
ENUMERATION: TEST ENUMERATION
270
MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f
271
MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f
0 = Test Enumeration 0, 1 = Test Enumeration 1
272
MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f
273
MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f
274
MMXU1.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f
F223
ENUMERATION: DIAGNOSTIC TEST
275
MMXU1.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f
276
MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f
0 = No Test, 1 = Run Test, 2 = End Test
277
MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f
278
MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f
F226
ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT/OUTPUT TRANSFER
METHOD
0 = None, 1 = GSSE, 2 = GOOSE
279
MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f
280
MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f
281
MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f
282
MMXU1.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f
283
MMXU1.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f
284
MMXU1.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f
F227
ENUMERATION: RELAY SERVICE STATUS
285
MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f
286
MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f
0 = Unknown, 1 = Relay In Service, 2 = Relay Out Of Service
287
MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f
288
MMXU1.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f
F230
ENUMERATION: DIRECTIONAL POLARIZING
0 = Voltage, 1 = Current, 2 = Dual
GE Multilin
289
MMXU1.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f
290
MMXU1.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f
291
MMXU1.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f
292
MMXU1.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f
B-77
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

value
293
GOOSE dataset item
APPENDIX B
value
GOOSE dataset item
MMXU1.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f
346
294
MMXU2.MX.TotW.mag.f
347
295
348
296
349
297
350
298
MMXU2.MX.Hz.mag.f
351
299
352
300
353
301
354
302
355
303
356
304
357
305
358
306
359
307
360
308
361
309
362
310
363
311
364
312
365
313
366
314
367
315
368
MMXU4.MX.TotW.mag.f
316
369
317
370
318
371
319
372
MMXU4.MX.Hz.mag.f
320
373
321
374
322
375
323
376
324
377
325
378
326
379
327
380
328
381
329
382
330
383
331
MMXU3.MX.TotW.mag.f
384
332
385
333
386
334
387
335
MMXU3.MX.Hz.mag.f
388
336
389
337
390
338
391
339
392
340
393
341
394
342
395
343
396
344
397
345
398
B-78
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
value
399
GOOSE dataset item
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

value
GOOSE dataset item
452
400
453
401
454
402
455
403
456
404
457
405
MMXU5.MX.TotW.mag.f
458
406
459
407
460
408
461
409
MMXU5.MX.Hz.mag.f
462
410
463
411
464
412
465
413
466
414
467
415
468
416
469
417
470
418
471
419
472
420
473
421
474
422
475
423
476
424
477
425
478
426
479
GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.mag.f
427
480
428
481
429
482
430
483
431
484
432
485
433
486
434
487
435
488
436
489
437
490
438
491
439
492
440
493
441
494
442
MMXU6.MX.TotW.mag.f
495
443
496
444
497
445
498
446
MMXU6.MX.Hz.mag.f
499
447
500
448
501
449
502
450
503
451
504
GE Multilin
B-79
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

value
APPENDIX B
GOOSE dataset item
value
GOOSE dataset item
505
130
506
131
507
132
508
133
509
134
510
135
511
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.q
136
512
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.stVal
137
513
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn2.q
138
514
139
515
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn3.q
140
516
141
517
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn4.q
142
518
143
519
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn5.q
144
520
145
521
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn6.q
146
522
147
523
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn7.q
148
524
149
525
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn8.q
150
526
151
527
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn9.q
152
528
153
529
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn10.q
154
530
155
531
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn11.q
156
532
157
533
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn12.q
158
534
159
535
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn13.q
160
536
161
GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stVal
537
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn14.q
162
538
163
539
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn15.q
164
540
165
541
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn16.q
166
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn1.q
542
167
168
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn2.q
F233
ENUMERATION: CONFIGURABLE GOOSE DATASET ITEMS
FOR RECEPTION
value
169
170
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn3.q
171
172
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn4.q
GOOSE dataset item
173
None
174
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn5.q
GGIO3.ST.Ind1.q
175
GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal
176
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn6.q
GGIO3.ST.Ind2.q
177
GGIO3.ST.Ind2.stVal
178
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn7.q
179
127
GGIO1.ST.Ind64q
180
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn8.q
128
GGIO1.ST.Ind64.stVal
181
129
182
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn9.q
B-80
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
value
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
GOOSE dataset item
value
day
183
Monday
184
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn10.q
Tuesday
185
Wednesday
186
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn11.q
Thursday
187
Friday
188
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn12.q
Saturday
189
190
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn13.q
191
192
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn14.q
193
F239
ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
TIME START DAY INSTANCE
value
instance
194
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn15.q
195
196
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn16.q
Second
197
Third
Fourth
Last
F234
ENUMERATION: WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT VOLTAGE
value
Calculated VN
Measured VX
F235
ENUMERATION: WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT CURRENT
value
current
Calculated IN
Measured IG
month
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
10
November
11
December
F238
ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK DAY
value
0
GE Multilin
day
Sunday
Value
Function
Disabled
Isolated
Forcible
F260
ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER MODE
0 = Continuous, 1 = Trigger
F237
ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK MONTH
value
First
F254
ENUMERATION: TEST MODE FUNCTION
voltage
F270
ENUMERATION: FAULT REPORT VT SUBSTITUTION
Value
Description
None
I_0
V_0
F300
UR_UINT16: FLEXLOGIC BASE TYPE (6-bit type)
The FlexLogic BASE type is 6 bits and is combined with a 9 bit
descriptor and 1 bit for protection element to form a 16 bit value.
The combined bits are of the form: PTTTTTTDDDDDDDDD,
where P bit if set, indicates that the FlexLogic type is associated
with a protection element state and T represents bits for the BASE
type, and D represents bits for the descriptor.
The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix
[PTTTTTT] and the values in round brackets indicate the descriptor range.
[0] Off(0) this is boolean FALSE value
[0] On (1) this is boolean TRUE value
[2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 to 96)
[3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1 to 96)
B-81
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
[4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1 to 64)

[6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1 to 96)
[10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED (1 to 64)
[11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1 to 64)
[12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1 to 64)
[13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1 to 64)
[14] REMOTE INPUTS (1 to 32)
[28] INSERT (via keypad only)
[32] END
[34] NOT (1 INPUT)
[36] 2 INPUT XOR (0)
[38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 inputs)
[40] OR (2 to 16 inputs)
[42] AND (2 to 16 inputs)
[44] NOR (2 to 16 inputs)
[46] NAND (2 to 16 inputs)
[48] TIMER (1 to 32)
[50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 to 96)
[52] SELF-TEST ERROR (see F141 for range)
[56] ACTIVE SETTING GROUP (1 to 6)
[62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (see F146 for range)
[64 to 127] ELEMENT STATES
Card 1 Contact 1 to 4
F504
BITFIELD: 3-PHASE ELEMENT STATE
bitmask
element state
Pickup
Operate
Pickup Phase A
Pickup Phase B
Pickup Phase C
Operate Phase A
Operate Phase B
Operate Phase C
0 = Contact State, 1 = Voltage Detected, 2 = Current Detected
bank selection
Each bit contains the operate state for an element. See the F124
format code for a list of element IDs. The operate bit for element ID
X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].
F505
BITFIELD: CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
F400
UR_UINT16: CT/VT BANK SELECTION
bitmask
F502
BITFIELD: ELEMENT OPERATE STATES
F506|
BITFIELD: SINGLE-PHASE ELEMENT STATE
0 = Pickup, 1 = Operate
F507
BITFIELD: COUNTER ELEMENT STATE
F491
ENUMERATION: ANALOG INPUT MODE
0 = Count Greater Than, 1 = Count Equal To, 2 = Count Less Than
0 = Default Value, 1 = Last Known

F508
BITFIELD: DISTANCE ELEMENT STATE
bitmask
F500
UR_UINT16: PACKED BITFIELD
distance element state
Pickup
First register indicates input/output state with bits 0 (MSB) to 15

(LSB) corresponding to input/output state 1 to 16. The second register indicates input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to
input/output state 17 to 32 (if required) The third register indicates
input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output
state 33 to 48 (if required). The fourth register indicates input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output state 49 to
64 (if required).
Operate
Pickup AB
Pickup BC
Operate CA
The number of registers required is determined by the specific

data item. A bit value of 0 = Off and 1 = On.
Timed
F501
UR_UINT16: LED STATUS
Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing
the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates
the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off.
B-82
Pickup CA
Operate AB
Operate BC
Operate IAB
10
Operate IBC
11
Operate ICA
F509
BITFIELD: SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
0 = Operate
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F510
BITFIELD: 87L ELEMENT STATE
bitmask
F518
ENUMERATION: FLEXELEMENT UNITS
0 = Milliseconds, 1 = Seconds, 2 = Minutes
87L Element State
Operate A
Operate B
Operate C
F519
ENUMERATION: NON-VOLATILE LATCH
Received DTT
0 = Reset-Dominant, 1 = Set-Dominant
Operate
Key DTT
PFLL FAIL
PFLL OK
Channel 1 FAIL
Channel 2 FAIL
10
Channel 1 Lost Packet
11
Channel 2 Lost Packet
12
Channel 1 CRC Fail
13
Channel 2 CRC Fail
F521
ENUMERATION: GROUND DISTANCE POLARIZING CURRENT
0 = Zero-Sequence; 1 = Negative-Sequence
F522
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA OUTPUT RANGE
0 = 1 to 1 mA; 1 = 0 to 1 mA; 2 = 4 to 20 mA
F511
BITFIELD: 3-PHASE SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
0 = Operate, 1 = Operate A, 2 = Operate B, 3 = Operate C
F523
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECTS 20, 22, AND 23 DEFAULT
VARIATION
bitmask
default variation
F513
ENUMERATION: POWER SWING MODE
0 = Two Step, 1 = Three Step
F514
ENUMERATION: POWER SWING TRIP MODE
0 = Delayed, 1 = Early
F524
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 21 DEFAULT VARIATION
bitmask
Default Variation
F515
ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE
0 = Signed, 1 = Absolute
10
F516
ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE
0 = Level, 1 = Delta
F517
ENUMERATION: ELEMENT DIRECTION OPERATION
0 = Over, 1 = Under
GE Multilin
F525
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION
bitmask
default variation
B-83
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F530
ENUMERATION: FRONT PANEL INTERFACE KEYPRESS
value
keypress
value
keypress
value
keypress
None
15
33
User PB 3
Menu
16
Enter
34
User PB 4
Message Up
17
Message
Down
35
User PB 5
F544
ENUMERATION: PMU RECORDING/REPORTING RATE
value
rate
value
rate
1/second
15/second
2/second
20second
4/second
25/second
18
36
User PB 6
5/second
30/second
19
Decimal
37
User PB 7
10/second
10
50/second
20
+/
38
User PB 8
12/second
11
60/second
Help
21
Value Up
39
User PB 9
Message Left
22
Value Down
40
User PB 10
23
Reset
41
User PB 11
24
User 1
42
User PB 12
10
25
User 2
44
User 4
11
Escape
26
User 3
45
User 5
12
Message
Right
31
User PB 1
46
User 6
13
32
User PB 2
47
User 7
14
F545
ENUMERATION: PMU COM PORT TYPE
0 = Network, 1 = RS485, 2 = Dir Comm Ch1, 3 = Dir Comm Ch2,
4 = GOOSE, 5 = None
F546
ENUMERATION: PMU REPORTING STYLE
0 = Polar, 1 = Rectangular
F531
ENUMERATION: LANGUAGE
F547
ENUMERATION: PMU REPORTING FORMAT
0 = English, 1 = French, 2 = Chinese, 3 = Russian
0 = Integer, 1 = Floating
F540
ENUMERATION: PMU POST-FILTER
F600
UR_UINT16: FLEXANALOG PARAMETER
0 = None, 1 = Symm-3-Point, 2 = Symm-5-Point,

3 = Symm-7-Point
Corresponds to the Modbus address of the value used when this

parameter is selected. Only certain values may be used as FlexAnalogs (basically all metering quantities used in protection).
F542
ENUMERATION: PMU TRIGGERING MODE
F605
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUT
STATUS
0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected
Enumeration
F543
ENUMERATION: PMU PHASORS
Remote DPS input status
Intermediate
Off
value
phasor
value
phasor
On
Off
Ig
Bad
Va
V_1
Vb
10
V_2
Vc
11
V_0
Vx
12
I_1
Ia
13
I_2
Enumeration
Ib
14
I_0
None
Ic
Remote input 1
Remote input 2
Remote input 3
F606
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUT
Remote double-point status input
64
B-84
Remote input 64
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F607
ENUMERATION: OPEN POLE DETECTOR MODE
Enumeration
0
1
Open Pole Mode

Enumeration
Accelerated
Traditional
F608
ENUMERATION: OPEN POLE DETECTION FUNCTION
Enumeration
I AND V AND CBaux
I AND V only
Trip Reset
Pole Curr OR Custom
CBaux OR Custom
Custom
GE Multilin
Protection AND CB
Protection Only
F611
ENUMERATION: GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEME
Enumeration
F609
ENUMERATION: TRIP OUTPUT TRIP RESET FUNCTION
Initiation Mode
Open Pole Detection
Enumeration
F610
ENUMERATION: SINGLE-POLE AUTORECLOSE INITIATION
MODE
Configurable GOOSE retransmission scheme
Heartbeat
Aggressive
Medium
Relaxed
F612
UR_UINT16: FLEXINTEGER PARAMETER
This 16-bit value corresponds to the Modbus address of the
selected FlexInteger paramter. Only certain values may be used
as FlexIntegers.
B-85
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
B-86
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONSC.1OVERVIEW
C.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of electric utilities and vendors of electronic equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration, testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview
IEC 61850-2: Glossary
IEC 61850-3: General requirements
IEC 61850-4: System and project management
IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models
IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations related to IEDs
IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Principles and models
IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract communication service
interface (ACSI)
IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment Common data classes
IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment Compatible logical node classes
and data classes
IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Mappings to MMS (ISO 9506-1 and ISO 9506-2)
and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended that all those involved with
any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.
C.1.2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES
IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (application) layer for transfer
of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for several of years and provides a set of services suitable for the
transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Actual MMS protocol services are mapped to IEC 61850 abstract services in IEC 61850-8-1.
The L90 relay supports IEC 61850 server services over both TCP/IP and TP4/CLNP (OSI) communication protocol stacks.
The TP4/CLNP profile requires the L90 to have a network address or Network Service Access Point (NSAP) to establish a
communication link. The TCP/IP profile requires the L90 to have an IP address to establish communications. These
addresses are located in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK menu. Note that the L90
supports IEC 61850 over the TP4/CLNP or TCP/IP stacks, and also operation over both stacks simultaneously. It is possible to have up to five simultaneous connections (in addition to DNP and Modbus/TCP (non-IEC 61850) connections).
Client/server: This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC 61850 clients are often substation computers running HMI programs
or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such as protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer tap changers, or bay controllers.
Peer-to-peer: This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation equipment such as protection relays. GSSE and GOOSE are methods of peer-to-peer communication.
Substation configuration language (SCL): A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe
the configuration of substation equipment. Each configured device has an IEC Capability Description (ICD) file. The
substation single line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file.
GE Multilin
C-1
APPENDIX C
C.2SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION
C.2.1 OVERVIEW
IEC 61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC 61850 physical device can contain one or
more logical device(s). Each logical device can contain many logical nodes. Each logical node can contain many data
objects. Each data object is composed of data attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each
level for performing various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each L90 IED represents one IEC 61850 physical device. The physical device contains one logical device, and the logical
device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD1 contains information about the L90 IED physical device. The
logical node LLN0 contains information about the L90 IED logical device.
C.2.2 GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES
The GGIO1 logical node is available in the L90 to provide access to as many 128 digital status points and associated timestamps and quality flags. The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO1 provides digital status
points for access by clients.
It is intended that clients use GGIO1 in order to access digital status values from the L90. Configuration settings are provided to allow the selection of the number of digital status indications available in GGIO1 (8 to 128), and to allow the choice
of the L90 FlexLogic operands that drive the status of the GGIO1 status indications. Clients can utilize the IEC 61850
buffered and unbuffered reporting features available from GGIO1 in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI
display screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the
chances of missing data state changes. Unbuffered reporting should generally be used for local status display.
C.2.3 GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES
The GGIO2 logical node is available to provide access to the L90 virtual inputs. Virtual inputs are single-point control
(binary) values that can be written by clients. They are generally used as control inputs. GGIO2 provides access to the virtual inputs through the IEC 61850 standard control model (ctlModel) services:
Status only.
Direct control with normal security.
SBO control with normal security.
Configuration settings are available to select the control model for each point. Each virtual input used through GGIO2
should have its VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64) FUNCTION setting programmed as Enabled and its corresponding GGIO2 CF SPSCO1(64)
CTLMODEL setting programmed to the appropriate control configuration.
C.2.4 GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM RECEIVED GOOSE DATA
The GGIO3 logical node is available to provide access for clients to values received via configurable GOOSE messages.
The values of the digital status indications and analog values in GGIO3 originate in GOOSE messages sent from other
devices.
C.2.5 GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES
The GGIO4 logical node provides access to as many as 32 analog value points, as well as associated timestamps and
quality flags. The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO4 provides analog values for access
by clients.
It is intended that clients use GGIO4 to access generic analog values from the L90. Configuration settings allow the selection of the number of analog values available in GGIO4 (4 to 32) and the choice of the FlexAnalog values that determine
the value of the GGIO4 analog inputs. Clients can utilize polling or the IEC 61850 unbuffered reporting feature available
from GGIO4 in order to obtain the analog values provided by GGIO4.
C-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C

C.2.6 MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES
A limited number of measured analog values are available through the MMXU logical nodes.
Each MMXU logical node provides data from a L90 current and voltage source. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source (programmed in the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES menu). MMXU1 provides data
from L90 source 1, and MMXU2 provides data from L90 source 2.
MMXU data is provided in two forms: instantaneous and deadband. The instantaneous values are updated every time a
read operation is performed by a client. The deadband values are calculated as described in IEC 61850 parts 7-1 and 7-3.
The selection of appropriate deadband settings for the L90 is described in chapter 5 of this manual.
IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting capability is available in all MMXU logical nodes. MMXUx logical nodes provide the following data for each source:
MMXU1.MX.TotW: three-phase real power
MMXU1.MX.TotVAr: three-phase reactive power
MMXU1.MX.TotVA: three-phase apparent power
MMXU1.MX.TotPF: three-phase power factor
MMXU1.MX.Hz: frequency
MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.A.neut: ground current magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.W.phsA: phase A real power
MMXU1.MX.W.phsB: phase B real power
MMXU1.MX.W.phsC: phase C real power
MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsA: phase A reactive power
MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsB: phase B reactive power
MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsC: phase C reactive power
MMXU1.MX.VA.phsA: phase A apparent power
MMXU1.MX.VA.phsB: phase B apparent power
MMXU1.MX.VA.phsC: phase C apparent power
MMXU1.MX.PF.phsA: phase A power factor
MMXU1.MX.PF.phsB: phase B power factor
MMXU1.MX.PF.phsC: phase C power factor

C.2.7 PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES
The following list describes the protection elements for all UR-series relays. The L90 relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.
PDIF: bus differential, transformer instantaneous differential, transformer percent differential
GE Multilin
C-3
APPENDIX C
PDIS: phase distance, ground distance
PIOC: phase instantaneous overcurrent, neutral instantaneous overcurrent, ground instantaneous overcurrent, negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent.
PTOC: phase time overcurrent, neutral time overcurrent, ground time overcurrent, negative-sequence time overcurrent, neutral directional overcurrent, negative-sequence directional overcurrent
PTUV: phase undervoltage, auxiliary undervoltage, third harmonic neutral undervoltage
PTOV: phase overvoltage, neutral overvoltage, auxiliary overvoltage, negative sequence overvoltage
RBRF: breaker failure
RREC: autoreclosure
RPSB: power swing detection
RFLO: fault locator
XCBR: breaker control
XSWI: circuit switch
CSWI: switch controller
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags. For example, the start flag for PIOC1 is
PIOC1.ST.Str.general. The operate flag for PIOC1 is PIOC1.ST.Op.general. For the L90 protection elements, these flags
take their values from the pickup and operate FlexLogic operands for the corresponding element.
Some protection elements listed above contain directional start values. For example, the directional start value for PDIS1 is
PDIS1.ST.Str.dirGeneral. This value is built from the directional FlexLogic operands for the element.
The RFLO logical node contains the measurement of the distance to fault calculation in kilometers. This value originates in
the fault locator function.
The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control feature.
XCBR1.ST.Loc: This is the state of the XCBR1 local/remote switch. A setting is provided to assign a FlexLogic operand to determine the state. When local mode is true, IEC 61850 client commands will be rejected.
XCBR1.ST.Opcnt: This is an operation counter as defined in IEC 61850. Command settings are provided to allow the
counter to be cleared.
XCBR1.ST.Pos: This is the position of the breaker. The breaker control FlexLogic operands are used to determine
this state. If the breaker control logic indicates that the breaker, or any single pole of the breaker, is closed, then the
breaker position state is on. If the breaker control logic indicates that the breaker is open, then the breaker position
state is off.
XCBR1.ST.BlkOpn: This is the state of the block open command logic. When true, breaker open commands from IEC
61850 clients will be rejected.
XCBR1.ST.BlkCls: This is the state of the block close command logic. When true, breaker close commands from IEC
61850 clients will be rejected.
XCBR1.CO.Pos: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue open or close commands to the breaker. SBO control with
normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.
XCBR1.CO.BlkOpn: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue block open commands to the breaker. Direct control
with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.
XCBR1.CO.BlkCls: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue block close commands to the breaker. Direct control
with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.
C-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.3SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION
C.3.1 BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING
IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting is provided in the GGIO1 logical nodes (for binary status values) and MMXU1
to MMXU6 (for analog measured values). Report settings can be configured using the EnerVista UR Setup software, substation configurator software, or via an IEC 61850 client. The following items can be configured:
TrgOps: Trigger options. The following bits are supported by the L90:
Bit 1: data-change
Bit 4: integrity
Bit 5: general interrogation
OptFlds: Option Fields. The following bits are supported by the L90:
Bit 1: sequence-number
Bit 2: report-time-stamp
Bit 3: reason-for-inclusion
Bit 4: data-set-name
Bit 5: data-reference
Bit 6: buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)
Bit 7: entryID (for buffered reports only)
Bit 8: conf-revision
Bit 9: segmentation
IntgPd: Integrity period.
BufTm: Buffer time.

C.3.2 FILE TRANSFER
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record, or other files from a L90 relay.
C.3.3 TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING
The timestamp values associated with all IEC 61850 data items represent the time of the last change of either the value or
quality flags of the data item. To accomplish this functionality, all IEC 61850 data items must be regularly scanned for data
changes, and the timestamp updated when a change is detected, regardless of the connection status of any IEC 61850 clients. For applications where there is no IEC 61850 client in use, the IEC 61850 SERVER SCANNING setting can be programmed as Disabled. If a client is in use, this setting should be programmed as Enabled to ensure the proper
generation of IEC 61850 timestamps.
C.3.4 LOGICAL DEVICE NAME
The logical device name is used to identify the IEC 61850 logical device that exists within the L90. This name is composed
of two parts: the IED name setting and the logical device instance. The complete logical device name is the combination of
the two character strings programmed in the IEDNAME and LD INST settings. The default values for these strings are IEDName and LDInst. These values should be changed to reflect a logical naming convention for all IEC 61850 logical
devices in the system.
C.3.5 LOCATION
The LPHD1 logical node contains a data attribute called location (LPHD1.DC.PhyNam.location). This is a character string
meant to describe the physical location of the L90. This attribute is programmed through the LOCATION setting and its
default value is Location. This value should be changed to describe the actual physical location of the L90.
GE Multilin
C-5
APPENDIX C
C.3.6 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES
IEC 61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters. The name is composed of:
a five or six-character name prefix.
a four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
a one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPIOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable. Details regarding the
logical node naming rules are given in IEC 61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is recommended that a consistent naming convention
be used for an entire substation project.
C.3.7 CONNECTION TIMING

A built-in TCP/IP connection timeout of two minutes is employed by the L90 to detect dead connections. If there is no data
traffic on a TCP connection for greater than two minutes, the connection will be aborted by the L90. This frees up the connection to be used by other clients. Therefore, when using IEC 61850 reporting, clients should configure report control
block items such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes (120000 ms). This ensures that the L90 will
not abort the connection. If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection at least once every 2 minutes, this timeout will not apply.
C.3.8 NON-IEC 61850 DATA
The L90 relay makes available a number of non-IEC 61850 data items. These data items can be accessed through the
UR MMS domain. IEC 61850 data can be accessed through the standard IEC 61850 logical device. To access the nonIEC data items, the INCLUDE NON-IEC DATA setting must be Enabled.
C.3.9 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES
The exact structure and values of the supported IEC 61850 logical nodes can be seen by connecting to a L90 relay with an
MMS browser, such as the MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS DDE/OPC server from Sisco Inc.
C-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.4GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE
C.4.1 OVERVIEW
IEC 61850 specifies two types of peer-to-peer data transfer services: Generic Substation State Events (GSSE) and Generic
Object Oriented Substation Events (GOOSE). GSSE services are compatible with UCA 2.0 GOOSE. IEC 61850 GOOSE
services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support, Ethernet priority tagging, and Ethertype Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be given
a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific VLANs. Because of the additional
features of GOOSE services versus GSSE services, it is recommended that GOOSE be used wherever backwards compatibility with GSSE (or UCA 2.0 GOOSE) is not required.
Devices that transmit GSSE and/or GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GSSE publisher contains a GSSE
control block to configure and control the transmission. Each GOOSE publisher contains a GOOSE control block to configure and control the transmission. The transmission is also controlled via device settings. These settings can be seen in
the ICD and/or SCD files, or in the device configuration software or files.
IEC 61850 recommends a default priority value of 4 for GOOSE. Ethernet traffic that does not contain a priority tag has a
default priority of 1. More details are specified in IEC 61850 part 8-1.
IEC 61850 recommends that the Ethertype Application ID number be configured according to the GOOSE source. In the
L90, the transmitted GOOSE Application ID number must match the configured receive Application ID number in the
receiver. A common number may be used for all GOOSE transmitters in a system. More details are specified in IEC 61850
part 8-1.
C.4.2 GSSE CONFIGURATION
IEC 61850 Generic Substation Status Event (GSSE) communication is compatible with UCA GOOSE communication.
GSSE messages contain a number of double point status data items. These items are transmitted in two pre-defined data
structures named DNA and UserSt. Each DNA and UserSt item is referred to as a bit pair. GSSE messages are transmitted in response to state changes in any of the data points contained in the message. GSSE messages always contain the
same number of DNA and UserSt bit pairs. Depending the on the configuration, only some of these bit pairs may have values that are of interest to receiving devices.
The GSSE FUNCTION, GSSE ID, and GSSE DESTINATION MAC ADDRESS settings are used to configure GSSE transmission.
GSSE FUNCTION is set to Enabled to enable the transmission. If a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is entered for the
GSSE DESTINATION MAC ADDRESS setting, this address will be used as the destination MAC address for GSSE messages. If
a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is not entered (for example, 00 00 00 00 00 00), the L90 will use the source Ethernet MAC address as the destination, with the multicast bit set.
C.4.3 FIXED GOOSE
The L90 supports two types of IEC 61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) communication: fixed
GOOSE and configurable GOOSE. All GOOSE messages contain IEC 61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this dataset
that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The dataset transferred using the L90 fixed GOOSE is the same data
that is transferred using the GSSE feature; that is, the DNA and UserSt bit pairs. The FlexLogic operands that determine
the state of the DNA and UserSt bit pairs are configurable via settings, but the fixed GOOSE dataset always contains the
same DNA/UserSt data structure. Upgrading from GSSE to GOOSE services is simply a matter of enabling fixed GOOSE
and disabling GSSE. The remote inputs and outputs are configured in the same manner for both GSSE and fixed GOOSE.
It is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between URseries IEDs. Configurable GOOSE may be used for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series
IEDs and devices from other manufacturers.
C.4.4 CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
The configurable GOOSE feature allows for the configuration of the datasets to be transmitted or received from the L90.
The L90 supports the configuration of eight (8) transmission and reception datasets, allowing for the optimization of data
transfer between devices.
GE Multilin
C-7
APPENDIX C
Items programmed for dataset 1 and 2 will have changes in their status transmitted as soon as the change is detected.
Dataset 1 should be used for high-speed transmission of data that is required for applications such as transfer tripping,
blocking, and breaker fail initiate. At least one digital status value needs to be configured in dataset 1 to enable transmission of all data configured for dataset 1. Configuring analog data only to dataset 1 will not activate transmission.
Items programmed for datasets 3 through 8 will have changes in their status transmitted at a maximum rate of every
100 ms. Datasets 3 through 8 will regularly analyze each data item configured within them every 100 ms to identify if any
changes have been made. If any changes in the data items are detected, these changes will be transmitted through a
GOOSE message. If there are no changes detected during this 100 ms period, no GOOSE message will be sent.
For all datasets 1 through 8, the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre-configured rate even if no
changes in the data items are detected.
The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE messages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message.
The L90 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be
caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station
components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the L90 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a minimum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the L90 will continue to
block transmission of the dataset. The L90 will assert the MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill self-test error message on the front panel display, where XXX denotes the data item detected as oscillating.
The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series
IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data
transfer between UR-series IEDs.
IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the
successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact
match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is
possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Setupsoftware can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (refer to
the IEC 61850 IED configuration section later in this appendix).
The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The
general steps required for transmission configuration are:
1.
Configure the transmission dataset.
2.
3.
Configure the data.
The general steps required for reception configuration are:

1.
Configure the reception dataset.
2.
3.
Configure the data.
This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status
value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value.
The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration.
1.
Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION

GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
The transmission dataset now contains a set of quality flags and a single point status Boolean value. The reception
dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure.
2.
C-8
Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 settings menu:
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
3.
Set CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to Enabled.
Set CONFIG GSE 1 ID to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is GOOSEOut_1).
Set CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56).
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY; the default value of 4 is OK for this example.
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID value; the default value is 0, but some switches may require this value to be 1.
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID value. This setting represents the Ethertype application ID and must match the
configuration on the receiver (the default value is 0).
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For
this example it can be left at its default value.
Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOsettings menu:
COL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to a FlexLogic operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example,
a contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).
The L90 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration.
1.
Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC
61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above.
2.
3.
Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES
REMOTE DEVICE 1 settings menu:
Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter GOOSEOut_1.
Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID to match the Ethertype application ID from the transmitting device. This is 0 in
the example above.
Set the REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using
configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as GOOSEIn 1.
Configure the data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1
settings menu:
Set REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE to GOOSEOut_1.
Set REMOTE IN 1 ITEM to Dataset Item 2. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status
item to remote input 1.
Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic equations or other settings. The L90 must be rebooted (control power
removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value
in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a complete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software.
C.4.5 ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE
Ethernet capable devices each contain a unique identifying address called a Media Access Control (MAC) address. This
address cannot be changed and is unique for each Ethernet device produced worldwide. The address is six bytes in length
and is usually represented as six hexadecimal values (for example, 00 A0 F4 01 02 03). It is used in all Ethernet frames as
the source address of the frame. Each Ethernet frame also contains a destination address. The destination address can
be different for each Ethernet frame depending on the intended destination of the frame.
GE Multilin
C-9
APPENDIX C
A special type of destination address called a multicast address is used when the Ethernet frame can be received by more
than one device. An Ethernet MAC address is multicast when the least significant bit of the first byte is set (for example, 01
00 00 00 00 00 is a multicast address).
GSSE and GOOSE messages must have multicast destination MAC addresses.
By default, the L90 is configured to use an automated multicast MAC scheme. If the L90 destination MAC address setting
is not a valid multicast address (that is, the least significant bit of the first byte is not set), the address used as the destination MAC will be the same as the local MAC address, but with the multicast bit set. Thus, if the local MAC address is 00 A0
F4 01 02 03, then the destination MAC address will be 01 A0 F4 01 02 03.
C.4.6 GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS
GSSE messages contain an identifier string used by receiving devices to identify the sender of the message, defined in IEC
61850 part 8-1 as GsID. This is a programmable 65-character string. This string should be chosen to provide a descriptive
name of the originator of the GSSE message.
GOOSE messages contain an identifier string used by receiving devices to identify the sender of the message, defined in
IEC 61850 part 8-1 as GoID. This programmable 65-character string should be a descriptive name of the originator of the
GOOSE message. GOOSE messages also contain two additional character strings used for identification of the message:
DatSet - the name of the associated dataset, and GoCBRef - the reference (name) of the associated GOOSE control block.
These strings are automatically populated and interpreted by the L90; no settings are required.
C-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.5IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP
C.5.1 OVERVIEW
The L90 can be configured for IEC 61850 via the EnerVista UR Setup software as follows.
1.
An ICD file is generated for the L90 by the EnerVista UR Setup software that describe the capabilities of the IED.
2.
The ICD file is then imported into a system configurator along with other ICD files for other IEDs (from GE or other vendors) for system configuration.
3.
The result is saved to a SCD file, which is then imported back to EnerVista UR Setup to create one or more settings
file(s). The settings file(s) can then be used to update the relay(s) with the new configuration information.
The configuration process is illustrated below.
Creating ICD (GE Multilin)
IED (UR-series)
OR
EnerVista
UR Setup
Setting files
(.URS)
IEC 61850 related

configuration for the
IED (GSSE/GOOSE,
server, logical node
prefixes, MMXU
deadbands, GGIO2
control, etc.)
Process of
creating ICD
(vendor 2)
Process of
creating ICD
(vendor 3)
Process of
creating ICD
(vendor N)
ICD file 2
ICD file 3
ICD file N
ICD file 1
System
specification data
Import
SSD file
System specification tool
System configurator
System Configuration
(network, crosscommunications, IED setting
modification, etc.)
SCD file
Updating IED with new configuration (GE Multilin)

EnerVista UR Setup
URS 1
Write settings
file to device
Vendor specific tool

for updating new
configuration to IED
(vendor 2)
URS X
URS 2

for updating new
(vendor 3)

for updating new
(vendor N)
Write settings file

to other devices
UR relay 1
UR relay 2
UR relay X
Vendor relay 2
Vendor relay 3
Vendor relay N
Ethernet
842790A1.CDR
Figure 01: IED CONFIGURATION PROCESS

The following acronyms and abbreviations are used in the procedures describing the IED configuration process for IEC
61850:
BDA: Basic Data Attribute, that is not structured
DAI: Instantiated Data Attribute
DO: Data Object type or instance, depending on the context
GE Multilin
C-11
APPENDIX C
DOI: Instantiated Data Object
IED: Intelligent Electronic Device
LDInst: Instantiated Logical Device
LNInst: Instantiated Logical Node
SCL: Substation Configuration Description Language. The configuration language is an application of the Extensible
Markup Language (XML) version 1.0.
SDI: Instantiated Sub DATA; middle name part of a structured DATA name
UR: GE Multilin Universal Relay series
URI: Universal Resource Identifier
URS: UR-series relay setting file
XML: Extensible Markup Language
The following SCL variants are also used:
ICD: IED Capability Description
CID: Configured IED Description
SSD: System Specification Description
SCD: Substation Configuration Description
The following IEC related tools are referenced in the procedures that describe the IED configuration process for IEC 61850:
System configurator or Substation configurator: This is an IED independent system level tool that can import or
export configuration files defined by IEC 61850-6. It can import configuration files (ICD) from several IEDs for system
level engineering and is used to add system information shared by different IEDs. The system configuration generates
a substation related configuration file (SCD) which is fed back to the IED configurator (for example, EnerVista UR
Setup) for system related IED configuration. The system configurator should also be able to read a system specification file (SSD) to use as base for starting system engineering, or to compare it with an engineered system for the same
substation.
IED configurator: This is a vendor specific tool that can directly or indirectly generate an ICD file from the IED (for
example, from a settings file). It can also import a system SCL file (SCD) to set communication configuration parameters (that is, required addresses, reception GOOSE datasets, IDs of incoming GOOSE datasets, etc.) for the IED. The
IED configurator functionality is implemented in the GE Multilin EnerVista UR Setup software.
C.5.2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS
Before creating an ICD file, the user can customize the IEC 61850 related settings for the IED. For example, the IED name
and logical device instance can be specified to uniquely identify the IED within the substation, or transmission GOOSE
datasets created so that the system configurator can configure the cross-communication links to send GOOSE messages
from the IED. Once the IEC 61850 settings are configured, the ICD creation process will recognize the changes and generate an ICD file that contains the updated settings.
Some of the IED settings will be modified during they system configuration process. For example, a new IP address may be
assigned, line items in a Transmission GOOSE dataset may be added or deleted, or prefixes of some logical nodes may be
changed. While all new configurations will be mapped to the L90 settings file when importing an SCD file, all unchanged
settings will preserve the same values in the new settings file.
These settings can be configured either directly through the relay panel or through the EnerVista UR Setup software (preferred method). The full list of IEC 61850 related settings for are as follows:
Network configuration: IP address, IP subnet mask, and default gateway IP address (access through the Settings >
Product Setup > Communications > Network menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
Server configuration: IED name and logical device instance (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Server Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
Logical node prefixes, which includes prefixes for all logical nodes except LLN0 (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Logical Node Prefixes menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
C-12
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
MMXU deadbands, which includes deadbands for all available MMXUs. The number of MMXUs is related to the number of CT/VT modules in the relay. There are two MMXUs for each CT/VT module. For example, if a relay contains two
CT/VT modules, there will be four MMXUs available (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > MMXU Deadbands menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
GGIO1 status configuration, which includes the number of status points in GGIO1 as well as the potential internal mappings for each GGIO1 indication. However only the number of status points will be used in the ICD creation process
(access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO1 Status Configuration
menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
GGIO2 control configuration, which includes ctlModels for all SPCSOs within GGIO2 (access through the Settings >
Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO2 Control Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR
Setup).
Configurable transmission GOOSE, which includes eight configurable datasets that can be used for GOOSE transmission. The GOOSE ID can be specified for each dataset (it must be unique within the IED as well as across the whole
substation), as well as the destination MAC address, VLAN priority, VLAN ID, ETYPE APPID, and the dataset items.
The selection of the dataset item is restricted by firmware version; for version 5.7x, only GGIO1.ST.Indx.stVal and
GGIO1.ST.Indx.q are valid selection (where x is between 1 to N, and N is determined by number of GGIO1 status
points). Although configurable transmission GOOSE can also be created and altered by some third-party system configurators, we recommend configuring transmission GOOSE for GE Multilin IEDs before creating the ICD, and strictly
within EnerVista UR Setup software or the front panel display (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GSSE/GOOSE Configuration > Transmission > Tx Configurable GOOSE menu tree
in EnerVista UR Setup).
Configurable reception GOOSE, which includes eight configurable datasets that can be used for GOOSE reception.
However, unlike datasets for transmission, datasets for reception only contains dataset items, and they are usually created automatically by process of importing the SCD file (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GSSE/GOOSE Configuration > Reception > Rx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in
EnerVista UR Setup).
Remote devices configuration, which includes remote device ID (GOOSE ID or GoID of the incoming transmission
GOOSE dataset), ETYPE APPID (of the GSE communication block for the incoming transmission GOOSE), and
DATASET (which is the name of the associated reception GOOSE dataset). These settings are usually done automatically by process of importing SCD file (access through the Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Devices menu tree
in EnerVista UR Setup).
Remote inputs configuration, which includes device (remote device ID) and item (which dataset item in the associated
reception GOOSE dataset to map) values. Only the items with cross-communication link created in SCD file should be
mapped. These configurations are usually done automatically by process of importing SCD file (access through the
Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Inputs menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
C.5.3 ABOUT ICD FILES
The SCL language is based on XML, and its syntax definition is described as a W3C XML Schema. ICD is one type of SCL
file (which also includes SSD, CID and SCD files). The ICD file describes the capabilities of an IED and consists of four
major sections:
Header
Communication
IEDs
DataTypeTemplates
GE Multilin
C-13
APPENDIX C
The root file structure of an ICD file is illustrated below.

SCL
Header (id, version, revision, toolID, nameStructure)
Communication
IED (name, type, manufacture, configVersion)
DataTypeTemplates
842795A1.CDR
Figure 02: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, SCL (ROOT) NODE
The Header node identifies the ICD file and its version, and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals
The Communication node describes the direct communication connection possibilities between logical nodes by means of
logical buses (sub-networks) and IED access ports. The communication section is structured as follows.
Communication
SubNetwork (name)
ConnectedAP (iedName, apName)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements
GSE (IdInst, cbName)

Address
P (type)
Text
842796A1.CDR
Other GSE elements
Other P elements
Figure 03: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, COMMUNICATIONS NODE

The SubNetwork node contains all access points which can (logically) communicate with the sub-network protocol and
without the intervening router. The ConnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub-network. The
Address node contains the address parameters of the access point. The GSE node provides the address element for stating the control block related address parameters, where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the
IED on which the control block is located, and cbName is the name of the control block.
The IED node describes the (pre-)configuration of an IED: its access points, the logical devices, and logical nodes instantiated on it. Furthermore, it defines the capabilities of an IED in terms of communication services offered and, together with
its LNType, instantiated data (DO) and its default or configuration values. There should be only one IED section in an ICD
since it only describes one IED.
C-14
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
IED (name, type, manufacture, configVersion)

Services
DynAssoication
GetDataSetValue
ReadWrite
ConfLogControl (max)
GetDirectory
SetDataSetValue
TimerActivatedControl
GSEDir
GetDateObjectDefinition
DataSetDirectory
ConfReportControl (max)
GOOSE (max)
DataObjectDirectory
ConfDataSet (max, maxAttributes)
GetCBValues
GSSE (max)
AccessPoint (name)
Server
Authentication (none)
LDevice (inst)
LN0 (InType, InClass, inst)
DataSet (name)
FCDA (fc, doName, daName, IdInst, prefix, InClass, InInst)
Other FCDA elements
Other DataSet elements
ReportControl (name, datSet, intgPd, rptID, confRev, buffered)
TrgOps (dchg)
RptEnabled
OptFields (seqNum)
Other ReportControl elements
DOI (name)
SDI (name)
DAI (name)
Val
Text
SDI (name)
Other DOI elements
DAI (name)
Val
GSEControl (name, datSet, type, confRev, appID)
Text
Other GSEControl elements

LN (InType, InClass, prefix, inst)
DataSet (name)
FCDA (IdInst, prefix, InClass, InInst, doName, fc)
Other FCDA elements
Other DataSet elements
ReportControl (name, datSet, intgPd, rptID, confRev, buffered)
TrgOps (dchg)
OptFields (seqNum)
RptEnabled
Other ReportControl elements

DOI (name)
SDI (name)
DAI (name)
Val
Other DOI elements
Text
SDI (name)
DAI (name)
Val
Text
Other LN elements
Other LDevice elements
842797A1.CDR
Figure 04: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, IED NODE
GE Multilin
C-15
APPENDIX C
The DataTypeTemplates node defines instantiable logical node types. A logical node type is an instantiable template of the
data of a logical node. A LnodeType is referenced each time that this instantiable type is needed with an IED. A logical
node type template is built from DATA (DO) elements, which again have a DO type, which is derived from the DATA classes
(CDC). DOs consist of attributes (DA) or of elements of already defined DO types (SDO). The attribute (DA) has a functional constraint, and can either have a basic type, be an enumeration, or a structure of a DAType. The DAType is built from
BDA elements, defining the structure elements, which again can be BDA elements of have a base type such as DA.
DataTypeTemplates
LNodeType (id, InClass)
DO (name, type)
Other DO elements
Other LNodeType elements

DOType (id, cdc)
SDO (name, type)
DA (name, fc, bType, type)
Other SDO elements
Other DA elements
Val
Text
Other DOType elements
DAType (id)
BDA (name, bType, type)
Other BDA elements
Other DAType elements
EnumType (id)
EnumVal (ord)
Text
Other EnumVal elements
Other EnumType elements

842798A1.CDR
Figure 05: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, DATATYPETEMPLATES NODE
C-16
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C

C.5.4 CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
An ICD file can be created directly from a connected L90 IED or from an offline L90 settings file with the EnerVista UR
Setup software using the following procedure:
1.
Right-click the connected UR-series relay or settings file and select Create ICD File.
2.
The EnerVista UR Setup will prompt to save the file. Select the file path and enter the name for the ICD file, then click
OK to generate the file.
The time to create an ICD file from the offline L90 settings file is typically much quicker than create an ICD file directly from
the relay.
C.5.5 ABOUT SCD FILES
System configuration is performed in the system configurator. While many vendors (including GE Multilin) are working their
own system configuration tools, there are some system configurators available in the market (for example, Siemens DIGSI
version 4.6 or above and ASE Visual SCL Beta 0.12).
Although the configuration tools vary from one vendor to another, the procedure is pretty much the same. First, a substation
project must be created, either as an empty template or with some system information by importing a system specification
file (SSD). Then, IEDs are added to the substation. Since each IED is represented by its associated ICD, the ICD files are
imported into the substation project, and the system configurator validates the ICD files during the importing process. If the
ICD files are successfully imported into the substation project, it may be necessary to perform some additional minor steps
to attach the IEDs to the substation (see the system configurator manual for details).
Once all IEDs are inserted into the substation, further configuration is possible, such as:
assigning network addresses to individual IEDs
customizing the prefixes of logical nodes
creating cross-communication links (configuring GOOSE messages to send from one IED to others)
When system configurations are complete, the results are saved to an SCD file, which contains not only the configuration
for each IED in the substation, but also the system configuration for the entire substation. Finally, the SCD file is passed
back to the IED configurator (vendor specific tool) to update the new configuration into the IED.
The SCD file consists of at least five major sections:
GE Multilin
C-17
Header
Substation
Communication
IED section (one or more)
DataTypeTemplates
APPENDIX C
The root file structure of an SCD file is illustrated below.

SCL
Header (id, version, revision, toolID, nameStructure)
Substation
Communication
IED Section (IED 1)
IED Section (IED 2)
Other IED Sections
DataTypeTemplates
842791A1.CDR
Figure 06: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, SCL (ROOT) NODE

Like ICD files, the Header node identifies the SCD file and its version, and specifies options for the mapping of names to
signals.
The Substation node describes the substation parameters:
Substation
PowerSystemResource
EquipmentContainer
Power Transformer
GeneralEquipment
EquipmentContainer
VoltageLevel
Bay
Voltage
PowerSystemResource
Function
SubFunction
GeneralEquipment
842792A1.CDR
Figure 07: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, SUBSTATION NODE
C-18
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
The Communication node describes the direct communication connection possibilities between logical nodes by means of
logical buses (sub-networks) and IED access ports. The communication section is structured as follows.
Communication
SubNetwork (name)
ConnectedAP (IED 1)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements

Address
P (type)
Text
Other GSE elements

Other P elements
ConnectedAP (IED 2)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements
Address
P (type)
Text
Other GSE elements
Other P elements
Other ConnectedAP elements

842793A1.CDR
Figure 08: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, COMMUNICATIONS NODE

The SubNetwork node contains all access points which can (logically) communicate with the sub-network protocol and
without the intervening router. The ConnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub-network. The
Address node contains the address parameters of the access point. The GSE node provides the address element for stating the control block related address parameters, where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the
IED on which the control block is located, and cbName is the name of the control block.
GE Multilin
C-19
APPENDIX C
The IED Section node describes the configuration of an IED.

IED Section (IED 1)
AccessPoint (name)
Server
Authentication (none)
LDevice (inst)
LN0 (InType, InClass, inst)
DataSet elements
ReportControl elements
DOI elements
Inputs
ExtRef (iedName, ldInst, prefix, lnClass, lnInst, doName, daName, intAddr)
Other ExtRef elements
GSEControl elements
842794A1.CDR
Figure 09: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, IED NODE

C.5.6 IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
The following procedure describes how to update the L90 with the new configuration from an SCD file with the EnerVista
UR Setup software.
1.
Right-click anywhere in the files panel and select the Import Contents From SCD File item.
2.
Select the saved SCD file and click Open.
C-20
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
3.
The software will open the SCD file and then prompt the user to save a UR-series settings file. Select a location and
name for the URS (UR-series relay settings) file.
If there is more than one GE Multilin IED defined in the SCD file, the software prompt the user to save a UR-series settings file for each IED.
4.
After the URS file is created, modify any settings (if required).
5.
To update the relay with the new settings, right-click on the settings file in the settings tree and select the Write Settings File to Device item.
6.
The software will prompt for the target device. Select the target device from the list provided and click Send. The new
settings will be updated to the selected device.
GE Multilin
C-21
APPENDIX C
C.6ACSI CONFORMANCE
C.6.1 ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT
SERVICES
SERVER/
PUBLISHER
UR-FAMILY
Yes
CLIENT-SERVER ROLES
B11
Server side (of Two-party Application-Association)
c1
B12
Client side (of Two-party Application-Association)
---
SCSMS SUPPORTED
B21
SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used
B22
B23
B24
SCSM: other
Yes
GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL (GSE)

B31
Publisher side
Yes
B32
Subscriber side
---
Yes
TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL (SVC)

B41
Publisher side
B42
Subscriber side
---
NOTE
c1: shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
C.6.2 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT
SERVICES
SERVER/
PUBLISHER
UR-FAMILY
IF SERVER SIDE (B11) SUPPORTED

M1
Logical device
c2
Yes
M2
Logical node
c3
Yes
M3
Data
c4
Yes
M4
Data set
c5
Yes
M5
Substitution
M6
Setting group control
REPORTING
M7
Buffered report control
M7-1
sequence-number
M7-2
report-time-stamp
M7-3
reason-for-inclusion
M7-4
data-set-name
M7-5
data-reference
M7-6
buffer-overflow
M7-7
entryID
M7-8
BufTm
M7-9
IntgPd
M7-10
GI
M8
Unbuffered report control
M8-1
sequence-number
M8-2
report-time-stamp
M8-3
reason-for-inclusion
C-22
Yes
Yes
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
SERVICES
SERVER/
PUBLISHER
M8-4
UR-FAMILY
data-set-name
M8-5
data-reference
M8-6
BufTm
M8-7
IntgPd
M8-8
GI
Logging
M9
Log control
M9-1
IntgPd
M10
Log
M11
Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
IF GSE (B31/32) IS SUPPORTED

GOOSE
M12-1
entryID
M12-2
DataReflnc
M13
GSSE
IF SVC (B41/B42) IS SUPPORTED

M14
Multicast SVC
M15
Unicast SVC
M16
Time
Yes
M17
File transfer
Yes
NOTE
c2: shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
c3: shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
c4: shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has been declared
c5: shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
C.6.3 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT
In the table below, the acronym AA refers to Application Associations (TP: Two Party / MC: Multicast). The c6 to c10 entries
are defined in the notes following the table.
SERVICES
AA: TP/MC
SERVER/
PUBLISHER
UR FAMILY
TP
Yes
SERVER (CLAUSE 6)
S1
ServerDirectory
APPLICATION ASSOCIATION (CLAUSE 7)

S2
Associate
Yes
S3
Abort
Yes
S4
Release
Yes
TP
Yes
LOGICAL DEVICE (CLAUSE 8)

S5
LogicalDeviceDirectory
LOGICAL NODE (CLAUSE 9)

S6
LogicalNodeDirectory
TP
Yes
S7
GetAllDataValues
TP
Yes
GetDataValues
TP
Yes
Yes
DATA (CLAUSE 10)

S8
S9
SetDataValues
TP
S10
GetDataDirectory
TP
Yes
S11
GetDataDefinition
TP
Yes
GE Multilin
C-23

SERVICES
APPENDIX C
AA: TP/MC
SERVER/
PUBLISHER
UR FAMILY
Yes
DATA SET (CLAUSE 11)

S12
GetDataSetValues
TP
S13
SetDataSetValues
TP
S14
CreateDataSet
TP
S15
DeleteDataSet
TP
S16
GetDataSetDirectory
TP
TP
Yes
SUBSTITUTION (CLAUSE 12)

S17
SetDataValues
SETTING GROUP CONTROL (CLAUSE 13)
S18
SelectActiveSG
TP
S19
SelectEditSG
TP
S20
SetSGValues
TP
S21
ConfirmEditSGValues
TP
S22
GetSGValues
TP
S23
GetSGCBValues
TP
REPORTING (CLAUSE 14)

BUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK (BRCB)
S24
Report
S24-1
data-change (dchg)
S24-2
qchg-change (qchg)
S24-3
TP
c6
Yes
Yes
data-update (dupd)
S25
GetBRCBValues
TP
c6
Yes
S26
SetBRCBValues
TP
c6
Yes
S27
Report
c6
Yes
UNBUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK (URCB)

S27-1
data-change (dchg)
S27-2
qchg-change (qchg)
S27-3
TP
Yes
data-update (dupd)
S28
GetURCBValues
TP
c6
Yes
S29
SetURCBValues
TP
c6
Yes
LOGGING (CLAUSE 14)

LOG CONTROL BLOCK
S30
GetLCBValues
TP
S31
SetLCBValues
TP
M
M
LOG
S32
QueryLogByTime
TP
S33
QueryLogByEntry
TP
S34
GetLogStatusValues
TP
GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL (GSE) (CLAUSE 14.3.5.3.4)

GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35
SendGOOSEMessage
MC
c8
S36
GetReference
TP
c9
Yes
S37
GetGOOSEElementNumber
TP
c9
S38
GetGoCBValues
TP
Yes
S39
SetGoCBValues
TP
Yes
Yes
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40
SendGSSEMessage
MC
c8
S41
GetReference
TP
c9
C-24
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
SERVICES
AA: TP/MC
SERVER/
PUBLISHER
UR FAMILY
S42
GetGSSEElementNumber
TP
c9
S43
GetGsCBValues
TP
Yes
S44
SetGsCBValues
TP
Yes
TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLE VALUE MODEL (SVC) (CLAUSE 16)

MULTICAST SVC
S45
SendMSVMessage
MC
c10
S46
GetMSVCBValues
TP
S47
SetMSVCBValues
TP
UNICAST SVC
S48
SendUSVMessage
MC
c10
S49
GetUSVCBValues
TP
S50
SetUSVCBValues
TP
CONTROL (CLAUSE 16.4.8)

S51
Select
S52
SelectWithValue
TP
Yes
S53
Cancel
TP
Yes
S54
Operate
TP
Yes
S55
Command-Termination
TP
S56
TimeActivated-Operate
TP
FILE TRANSFER (CLAUSE 20)

S57
GetFile
TP
S58
SetFile
TP
S59
DeleteFile
TP
S60
GetFileAttributeValues
TP
Yes
Yes
TIME (CLAUSE 5.5)

T1
Time resolution of internal clock

(nearest negative power of 2 in
seconds)
T2
Time accuracy of internal clock
T3
supported TimeStamp resolution

(nearest value of 2n in seconds,
accoridng to 5.5.3.7.3.3)
NOTE
20
20
c6: shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)

c7: shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter)
c8: shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9: shall declare support if TP association is available
c10: shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage)
GE Multilin
C-25
C.7 LOGICAL NODES
APPENDIX C
C.7LOGICAL NODES
C.7.1 LOGICAL NODES TABLE
The UR-series of relays supports IEC 61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code. For example. the logical node PDIS (distance protection) is available only in the D60 Line Distance Relay.
Table C1: IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODES (Sheet 1 of 3)
NODES
UR-FAMILY
L: SYSTEM LOGICAL NODES
LPHD: Physical device information
Yes
LLN0: Logical node zero
Yes
P: LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

PDIF: Differential
Yes
PDIR: Direction comparison
---
PDIS: Distance
Yes
PDOP: Directional overpower
---
PDUP: Directional underpower
---
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency
---
PHAR: Harmonic restraint
---
PHIZ: Ground detector
---
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent
Yes
PMRI Motor restart inhibition
---
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision
---
POPF: Over power factor
---
PPAM: Phase angle measuring
---
PSCH: Protection scheme
---
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault
---
PTEF: Transient earth fault
---
PTOC: Time overcurrent
Yes
PTOF: Overfrequency
---
PTOV: Overvoltage
Yes
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning
Yes
PTTR: Thermal overload
Yes
PTUC: Undercurrent
---
PTUV: Undervoltage
Yes
PUPF: Underpower factor
---
PTUF: Underfrequency
---
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent
---
PVPH: Volts per Hz
---
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed
---
R: LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION RELATED FUNCTIONS

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function
---
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue
---
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary
---
RDRS: Disturbance record handling
---
RBRF: Breaker failure

RDIR: Directional element
Yes
---
RFLO: Fault locator
Yes
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking
Yes
RREC: Autoreclosing
Yes
C-26
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.7 LOGICAL NODES

NODES
UR-FAMILY
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing
---
C: LOGICAL NODES FOR CONTROL

CALH: Alarm handling
---
CCGR: Cooling group control
---
CILO: Interlocking
---
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching
---
CSWI: Switch controller
Yes
G: LOGICAL NODES FOR GENERIC REFERENCES

GAPC: Generic automatic process control
---
GGIO: Generic process I/O
Yes
GSAL: Generic security application
---
I: LOGICAL NODES FOR INTERFACING AND ARCHIVING

IARC: Archiving
---
IHMI: Human machine interface
---
ITCI: Telecontrol interface
---
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface
---
A: LOGICAL NODES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL

ANCR: Neutral current regulator
---
ARCO: Reactive power control
---
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller
---
AVCO: Voltage control
---
M: LOGICAL NODES FOR METERING AND MEASUREMENT

MDIF: Differential measurements
---
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics
---
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic
---
MMTR: Metering
---
MMXN: Non phase related measurement
Yes
MMXU: Measurement
Yes
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance
---
MSTA: Metering statistics
---
S: LOGICAL NODES FOR SENSORS AND MONITORING

SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs
---
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas)
---
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid)
---
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges
---
X: LOGICAL NODES FOR SWITCHGEAR

XCBR: Circuit breaker
Yes
XSWI: Circuit switch
Yes
T: LOGICAL NODES FOR INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

TCTR: Current transformer
---
TVTR: Voltage transformer
---
Y: LOGICAL NODES FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS

YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil)
---
YLTC: Tap changer
---
YPSH: Power shunt
---
YPTR: Power transformer
---
GE Multilin
C-27
C.7 LOGICAL NODES
APPENDIX C

NODES
UR-FAMILY
Z: LOGICAL NODES FOR FURTHER POWER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

ZAXN: Auxiliary network
---
ZBAT: Battery
---
ZBSH: Bushing
---
ZCAB: Power cable
---
ZCAP: Capacitor bank
---
ZCON: Converter
---
ZGEN: Generator
---
ZGIL: Gas insulated line
---
ZLIN: Power overhead line
---
ZMOT: Motor
---
ZREA: Reactor
---
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component
---
ZSAR: Surge arrestor
---
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter
---
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component
---
C-28
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
APPENDIX D IEC 60870-5-104 COMMUNICATIONSD.1IEC 60870-5-104
D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT
This document is adapted from the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. For ths section the boxes indicate the following: used in
standard direction; not used; cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
1.
SYSTEM OR DEVICE:
System Definition
Controlling Station Definition (Master)
Controlled Station Definition (Slave)
2.
3.
NETWORK CONFIGURATION:
Point-to-Point
Multipoint
Multiple Point-to-Point
Multipoint Star
PHYSICAL LAYER
Transmission Speed (control direction):
Unbalanced Interchange
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard:
Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended
if >1200 bits/s:
Balanced Interchange Circuit

X.24/X.27:
100 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
200 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
300 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
600 bits/sec.
19200 bits/sec.
1200 bits/sec.
38400 bits/sec.
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
Transmission Speed (monitor direction):
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard:
Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended
if >1200 bits/s:
Balanced Interchange Circuit

X.24/X.27:
100 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
200 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
300 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
600 bits/sec.
19200 bits/sec.
1200 bits/sec.
38400 bits/sec.
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
4.
LINK LAYER
Link Transmission Procedure:
Address Field of the Link:
Balanced Transmision
Not Present (Balanced Transmission Only)
Unbalanced Transmission
One Octet
Two Octets
Structured
Unstructured
Frame Length (maximum length, number of octets): Not selectable in companion IEC 60870-5-104 standard
GE Multilin
D-1
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
APPENDIX D
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ADSU types are returned in class 2 messages (low priority) with the
indicated causes of transmission:
The standard assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
A special assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
5.
APPLICATION LAYER
Transmission Mode for Application Data:
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in Clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
stanadard.
Common Address of ADSU:
One Octet
Two Octets
Information Object Address:
One Octet
Structured
Two Octets
Unstructured
Three Octets
Cause of Transmission:
One Octet
Two Octets (with originator address). Originator address is set to zero if not used.
Maximum Length of APDU: 253 (the maximum length may be reduced by the system.
Selection of standard ASDUs:
For the following lists, the boxes indicate the following: used in standard direction; not used; cannot be
selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
Process information in monitor direction
D-2
<1> := Single-point information
M_SP_NA_1
<2> := Single-point information with time tag
M_SP_TA_1
<3> := Double-point information
M_DP_NA_1
<4> := Double-point information with time tag
M_DP_TA_1
<5> := Step position information
M_ST_NA_1
<6> := Step position information with time tag
M_ST_TA_1
<7> := Bitstring of 32 bits
M_BO_NA_1
<8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag
M_BO_TA_1
<9> := Measured value, normalized value
M_ME_NA_1
<10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag
M_NE_TA_1
<11> := Measured value, scaled value
M_ME_NB_1
<12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag
M_NE_TB_1
<13> := Measured value, short floating point value
M_ME_NC_1
<14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag
M_NE_TC_1
<15> := Integrated totals
M_IT_NA_1
<16> := Integrated totals with time tag
M_IT_TA_1
<17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TA_1
<18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TB_1
<19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TC_1
<20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection
M_SP_NA_1
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
<21> := Measured value, normalized value without quantity descriptor
M_ME_ND_1
<30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a
M_SP_TB_1
<31> := Double-point information wiht time tag CP56Time2a
M_DP_TB_1
<32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ST_TB_1
<33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a
M_BO_TB_1
<34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ME_TD_1
<35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ME_TE_1
<36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ME_TF_1
<37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a
M_IT_TB_1
<38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a
M_EP_TD_1
<39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a
M_EP_TE_1
<40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a
M_EP_TF_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <2>, <4>, <6>, <8>, <10>, <12>, <14>, <16>, <17>, <18>, and <19> or of the set
<30> to <40> are used.
Process information in control direction
<45> := Single command
C_SC_NA_1
<46> := Double command
C_DC_NA_1
<47> := Regulating step command
C_RC_NA_1
<48> := Set point command, normalized value
C_SE_NA_1
<49> := Set point command, scaled value
C_SE_NB_1
<50> := Set point command, short floating point value
C_SE_NC_1
<51> := Bitstring of 32 bits
C_BO_NA_1
<58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SC_TA_1
<59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a
C_DC_TA_1
<60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a
C_RC_TA_1
<61> := Set point command, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SE_TA_1
<62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SE_TB_1
<63> := Set point command, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SE_TC_1
<64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a
C_BO_TA_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <45> to <51> or of the set <58> to <64> are used.
System information in monitor direction
<70> := End of initialization
M_EI_NA_1
System information in control direction

<100> := Interrogation command
C_IC_NA_1
<101> := Counter interrogation command
C_CI_NA_1
<102> := Read command
C_RD_NA_1
<103> := Clock synchronization command (see Clause 7.6 in standard)
C_CS_NA_1
<104> := Test command
C_TS_NA_1
<105> := Reset process command
C_RP_NA_1
<106> := Delay acquisition command
C_CD_NA_1
<107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a
C_TS_TA_1
GE Multilin
D-3
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
APPENDIX D
Parameter in control direction

<110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value
PE_ME_NA_1
<111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value
PE_ME_NB_1
<112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating point value
PE_ME_NC_1
<113> := Parameter activation
PE_AC_NA_1
File transfer
<120> := File Ready
F_FR_NA_1
<121> := Section Ready
F_SR_NA_1
<122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section
F_SC_NA_1
<123> := Last section, last segment
F_LS_NA_1
<124> := Ack file, ack section
F_AF_NA_1
<125> := Segment
F_SG_NA_1
<126> := Directory (blank or X, available only in monitor [standard] direction)
C_CD_NA_1
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments

(station-specific parameters)
In the following table:

Shaded boxes are not required.
Black boxes are not permitted in this companion standard.
Blank boxes indicate functions or ASDU not used.
X if only used in the standard direction
D-4
M_DP_TA_1
<5>
M_ST_NA_1
<6>
M_ST_TA_1
<7>
M_BO_NA_1
<8>
M_BO_TA_1
<9>
M_ME_NA_1
FILE TRANSFER
INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER>
REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ
UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
10
11
12
13
20
to
36
37
to
41
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR
RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
ACTIVATION TERMINATION
UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU
DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
DEACTIVATION
M_DP_NA_1
<4>
ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
<3>
ACTIVATION
M_SP_TA_1
REQUEST OR REQUESTED
M_SP_NA_1
<2>
INITIALIZED
<1>
SPONTANEOUS
MNEMONIC
BACKGROUND SCAN
NO.
CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
TYPE IDENTIFICATION
44
45
46
47
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
<10>
M_ME_TA_1
<11>
M_ME_NB_1
<12>
M_ME_TB_1
<13>
M_ME_NC_1
<14>
M_ME_TC_1
<15>
M_IT_NA_1
<16>
M_IT_TA_1
<17>
M_EP_TA_1
<18>
M_EP_TB_1
<19>
M_EP_TC_1
<20>
M_PS_NA_1
<21>
M_ME_ND_1
<30>
M_SP_TB_1
<31>
M_DP_TB_1
<32>
M_ST_TB_1
<33>
M_BO_TB_1
<34>
M_ME_TD_1
<35>
M_ME_TE_1
<36>
M_ME_TF_1
<37>
M_IT_TB_1
<38>
M_EP_TD_1
<39>
M_EP_TE_1
<40>
M_EP_TF_1
<45>
C_SC_NA_1
<46>
C_DC_NA_1
<47>
C_RC_NA_1
<48>
C_SE_NA_1
<49>
C_SE_NB_1
<50>
C_SE_NC_1
<51>
C_BO_NA_1
<58>
C_SC_TA_1
<59>
C_DC_TA_1
<60>
C_RC_TA_1
GE Multilin
DEACTIVATION
FILE TRANSFER
10
11
12
13
20
to
36
37
to
41
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
SPONTANEOUS
MNEMONIC
BACKGROUND SCAN
NO.
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
TYPE IDENTIFICATION
44
45
46
47
D-5
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
APPENDIX D
6.
<61>
C_SE_TA_1
<62>
C_SE_TB_1
<63>
C_SE_TC_1
DEACTIVATION
FILE TRANSFER
10
11
12
13
20
to
36
37
to
41
<64>
C_BO_TA_1
<70>
M_EI_NA_1*)
<100>
C_IC_NA_1
<101>
C_CI_NA_1
<102>
C_RD_NA_1
<103>
C_CS_NA_1
<104>
C_TS_NA_1
<105>
C_RP_NA_1
<106>
C_CD_NA_1
<107>
C_TS_TA_1
<110>
P_ME_NA_1
<111>
P_ME_NB_1
<112>
P_ME_NC_1
<113>
P_AC_NA_1
<120>
F_FR_NA_1
<121>
F_SR_NA_1
<122>
F_SC_NA_1
<123>
F_LS_NA_1
<124>
F_AF_NA_1
<125>
F_SG_NA_1
<126>
F_DR_TA_1*)
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
SPONTANEOUS
MNEMONIC
BACKGROUND SCAN
NO.
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
TYPE IDENTIFICATION
44
45
46
47
X
X
X
X
X
X
BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

Station Initialization:
Remote initialization
Cyclic Data Transmission:
Cyclic data transmission
Read Procedure:
Read procedure
D-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
Spontaneous Transmission:
Spontaneous transmission
Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous:
The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information
object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a projectspecific list.
Single point information: M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1, and M_PS_NA_1
Double point information: M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1, and M_DP_TB_1
Step position information: M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1, and M_ST_TB_1
Bitstring of 32 bits: M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, and M_BO_TB_1 (if defined for a specific project)
Measured value, normalized value: M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1, and M_ME_TD_1
Measured value, scaled value: M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1, and M_ME_TE_1
Measured value, short floating point number: M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1, and M_ME_TF_1
Station interrogation:
Global
Group 1
Group 5
Group 9
Group 13
Group 2
Group 6
Group 10
Group 14
Group 3
Group 7
Group 11
Group 15
Group 4
Group 8
Group 12
Group 16
Clock synchronization:
Clock synchronization (optional, see Clause 7.6)
Command transmission:
Direct command transmission
Direct setpoint command transmission
Select and execute command
Select and execute setpoint command
C_SE ACTTERM used
No additional definition
Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Persistent output
Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands
Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands: 10 s
Transmission of integrated totals:
Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission
Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation
Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands
Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported simultaneously
Counter read
Counter freeze without reset
GE Multilin
D-7
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
APPENDIX D
Counter freeze with reset

Counter reset
General request counter
Request counter group 1
Parameter loading:
Threshold value
Smoothing factor
Low limit for transmission of measured values
High limit for transmission of measured values
Parameter activation:
Activation/deactivation of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object

Test procedure:
Test procedure
File transfer:
File transfer in monitor direction:
Transparent file
Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
Transmission of sequences of events
Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values
File transfer in control direction:
Transparent file
Background scan:
Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay:
Acquisition of transmission delay
Definition of time outs:

PARAMETER
DEFAULT
VALUE
REMARKS
SELECTED
VALUE
t0
30 s
Timeout of connection establishment
120 s
t1
15 s
Timeout of send or test APDUs
15 s
t2
10 s
Timeout for acknowlegements in case of no data messages t2 < t1
10 s
t3
20 s
Timeout for sending test frames in case of a long idle state
20 s
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s

Maximum number of outstanding I-format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w):
D-8
PARAMETER
DEFAULT
VALUE
REMARKS
12 APDUs
Maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable
12 APDUs
8 APDUs
Latest acknowledge after receiving w I-format APDUs
8 APDUs
SELECTED
VALUE
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
Maximum range of values k:
1 to 32767 (215 1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU
Maximum range of values w:
1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU

Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k.
Portnumber:
PARAMETER
VALUE
REMARKS
Portnumber
2404
In all cases
RFC 2200 suite:

RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet
as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Internet. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen
by the user of this standard.
Ethernet 802.3
Serial X.21 interface
Other selection(s) from RFC 2200 (list below if selected)
D.1.2 POINT LIST
The IEC 60870-5-104 data points are configured through the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP /
menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details.
IEC104 POINT LISTS
GE Multilin
D-9
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
APPENDIX D
D-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
APPENDIX E DNP COMMUNICATIONSE.1DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE
The following table provides a Device Profile Document in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document.
Table E1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 1 of 3)
(Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section)
Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin
Device Name: UR Series Relay
Highest DNP Level Supported:
Device Function:
For Requests:
Level 2
For Responses: Level 2
Master
Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete
list is described in the attached table):
Binary Inputs (Object 1)
Binary Input Changes (Object 2)
Binary Outputs (Object 10)
Control Relay Output Block (Object 12)
Binary Counters (Object 20)

Frozen Counters (Object 21)
Counter Change Event (Object 22)
Frozen Counter Event (Object 23)
Analog Inputs (Object 30)
Analog Input Changes (Object 32)
Analog Deadbands (Object 34)
Time and Date (Object 50)
File Transfer (Object 70)
Internal Indications (Object 80)
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292
Received:
292
Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):

Transmitted: configurable up to 2048
Received:
2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
None
Fixed at 3
Configurable
None
Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable
GE Multilin
E-1
APPENDIX E

Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always
When reporting Event Data
When sending multi-fragment responses
Sometimes
Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm:
Complete Appl. Fragment:
Application Confirm:
Complete Appl. Response:
None
None
None
None
Fixed at ____
Fixed at ____
Fixed at 10 s
Fixed at ____
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Others:
Transmission Delay:
Need Time Interval:
Select/Operate Arm Timeout:
Binary input change scanning period:
Analog input change scanning period:
Counter change scanning period:
Frozen counter event scanning period:
Unsolicited response notification delay:
Unsolicited response retry delay
No intentional delay
Configurable (default = 24 hrs.)
10 s
8 times per power system cycle
500 ms
500 ms
500 ms
100 ms
configurable 0 to 60 sec.
Sends/Executes Control Operations:

WRITE Binary Outputs
SELECT/OPERATE
DIRECT OPERATE
DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK
Count > 1
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Queue
Clear Queue
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Explanation of Sometimes: Object 12 points are mapped to UR Virtual Inputs. The persistence of Virtual Inputs is
determined by the VIRTUAL INPUT X TYPE settings. Both Pulse On and Latch On operations perform the same function in the UR; that is, the appropriate Virtual Input is put into the On state. If the Virtual Input is set to Self-Reset,
it will reset after one pass of FlexLogic. The On/Off times and Count value are ignored. Pulse Off and Latch Off
operations put the appropriate Virtual Input into the Off state. Trip and Close operations both put the appropriate
Virtual Input into the On state.
E-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E

Reports Binary Input Change Events when no
specific variation requested:
Never
Only time-tagged
Only non-time-tagged
Configurable
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
No Counters Reported
Configurable (attach explanation)
Default Object:
20
Default Variation: 1
Point-by-point list attached
Never
Binary Input Change With Time
Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Never
Configurable
Only certain objects
Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function
codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation:
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no

specific variation requested:
Never
When Device Restarts
When Status Flags Change
No other options are permitted.
Counters Roll Over at:
No Counters Reported
16 Bits (Counter 8)
32 Bits (Counters 0 to 7, 9)
Other Value: _____
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:

Yes
No
GE Multilin
E-3
APPENDIX E
E.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the L90 in both request messages
and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or
28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 of 4)
OBJECT
OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION
NO.
NO.
1
0
Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request
default variation)
E
10
12
20
Note 1:
REQUEST
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
Binary Input
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
Binary Input with Status
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
0
1
Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read)

request default variation)
Binary Input Change without Time
1 (read)
Binary Input Change with Time
1 (read)
Binary Input Change with Relative Time
1 (read)
Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read)

request default variation)
Binary Output Status
1 (read)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01(start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
RESPONSE
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
129 (response
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
129 (response)
echo of request
3 (select)
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, noack)
0
Binary Counter
1 (read)
00, 01(start-stop)
7 (freeze)
06(no range, or all)
(Variation 0 is used to request default
8 (freeze noack)
07, 08(limited quantity)
variation)
9 (freeze clear)
17, 28(index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1
32-Bit Binary Counter
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze)
17, 28 (index)
8 (freeze noack)
(see Note 2)
9 (freeze clear)
17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. The default variations for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32 are selected via relay settings. Refer to the Communications section in Chapter 5
for details. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
1
Control Relay Output Block
Note 2:
For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3:
Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the L90 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
E-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E

OBJECT
NO.
NO.
20
2
16-Bit Binary Counter
contd
21
22
23
Note 1:
32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
Frozen Counter
variation)
REQUEST
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
RESPONSE
QUALIFIER
FUNCTION
CODES (HEX)
CODES (DEC)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
1
32-Bit Frozen Counter
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
2
16-Bit Frozen Counter
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
9
32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
10
16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
0
Counter Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read)
to request default variation)
1
32-Bit Counter Change Event
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
2
16-Bit Counter Change Event
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
5
32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
6
16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
0
Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read)
1
32-Bit Frozen Counter Event
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
2
16-Bit Frozen Counter Event
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
Note 2:
Note 3:
GE Multilin
E-5
APPENDIX E

OBJECT
NO.
NO.
23
5
32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
contd
6
16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
30
E
32
34
Note 1:
REQUEST
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
1 (read)
RESPONSE
QUALIFIER
FUNCTION
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
0
Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
default variation)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
1
32-Bit Analog Input
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
2
16-Bit Analog Input
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
3
32-Bit Analog Input without Flag
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
4
16-Bit Analog Input without Flag
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
5
short floating point
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
06(no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08(limited quantity)
(see Note 2)
17, 28(index)
0
Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read)
1
32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
2
16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
3
32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
4
16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
5
short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
without Time
7
short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
with Time
0
Analog Input Reporting Deadband
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
variation)
17, 28 (index)
1
16-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(default see Note 1)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
Note 2:
Note 3:
E-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E

OBJECT
NO.
NO.
34
2
32-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband
REQUEST
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
1 (read)
contd
2 (write)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
07 (limited qty=1)
08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
Short floating point Analog Input Reporting 1 (read)

Deadband
50
Time and Date

(default see Note 1)
52
Time Delay Fine
60
Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data
Class 0 Data
2
3
4
Class 1 Data
Class 2 Data
Class 3 Data
File event - any variation
2
3
File authentication
File command
File command status
File transfer
File transfer status
File descriptor
28 (get file info.)
5b (free format)
Internal Indications
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
1 (read)
2 (write)
RESPONSE
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
129 (response)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
07 (limited quantity)
(quantity = 1)
70
80
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
29 (authenticate)
25 (open)
27 (delete)
26 (close)
30 (abort)
1 (read)
2 (write)


5b (free format)
129 (response)
5b (free format)
5b (free format)
5b (free format)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
5b (free format)
5b (free format)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
5b (free format)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
129 (response)
5b (free format)
5b (free format)
00, 01 (start-stop)
(index =7)
------Note 1:
2 (write)
(see Note 3)
13 (cold restart)
00 (start-stop)
(index =7)
No Object (function code only)

see Note 3
14 (warm restart)
23 (delay meas.)
Note 2:
Note 3:
GE Multilin
E-7
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E
E.2DNP POINT LISTS
E.2.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS
The DNP binary input data points are configured through the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT
LISTS BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details. When a
freeze function is performed on a binary counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding frozen counter
point.
BINARY INPUT POINTS
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status), Configurable
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time), Configurable
Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle
Change Event Buffer Size: 500
Default Class for All Points: 1
E-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS

E.2.2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off, Paired Trip, Paired Close.
BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS
Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when Variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported:
3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
Table E3: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS

POINT
NAME/DESCRIPTION
Table E3: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS

POINT
NAME/DESCRIPTION
Virtual Input 1
32
Virtual Input 33
Virtual Input 2
33
Virtual Input 34
Virtual Input 3
34
Virtual Input 35
Virtual Input 4
35
Virtual Input 36
Virtual Input 5
36
Virtual Input 37
Virtual Input 6
37
Virtual Input 38
Virtual Input 7
38
Virtual Input 39
Virtual Input 8
39
Virtual Input 40
Virtual Input 9
40
Virtual Input 41
Virtual Input 10
41
Virtual Input 42
10
Virtual Input 11
42
Virtual Input 43
11
Virtual Input 12
43
Virtual Input 44
12
Virtual Input 13
44
Virtual Input 45
13
Virtual Input 14
45
Virtual Input 46
14
Virtual Input 15
46
Virtual Input 47
15
Virtual Input 16
47
Virtual Input 48
16
Virtual Input 17
48
Virtual Input 49
17
Virtual Input 18
49
Virtual Input 50
18
Virtual Input 19
50
Virtual Input 51
19
Virtual Input 20
51
Virtual Input 52
20
Virtual Input 21
52
Virtual Input 53
21
Virtual Input 22
53
Virtual Input 54
22
Virtual Input 23
54
Virtual Input 55
23
Virtual Input 24
55
Virtual Input 56
24
Virtual Input 25
56
Virtual Input 57
25
Virtual Input 26
57
Virtual Input 58
26
Virtual Input 27
58
Virtual Input 59
27
Virtual Input 28
59
Virtual Input 60
28
Virtual Input 29
60
Virtual Input 61
29
Virtual Input 30
61
Virtual Input 62
30
Virtual Input 31
62
Virtual Input 63
31
Virtual Input 32
63
Virtual Input 64
GE Multilin
E-9
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E
E.2.3 COUNTERS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported:
1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear),

10 (freeze and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 3
FROZEN COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 3
Table E4: BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS
POINT
INDEX
NAME/DESCRIPTION
Digital Counter 1
Digital Counter 2
Digital Counter 3
Digital Counter 4
Digital Counter 5
Digital Counter 6
Digital Counter 7
Digital Counter 8
Oscillography Trigger Count
Events Since Last Clear
A counter freeze command has no meaning for counters 8 and 9. L90 Digital Counter values are represented as 32-bit integers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative
counter values.
E-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS

E.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS
The DNP analog input data points are configured through the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT
menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details.
LISTS ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS
It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of analog inputs are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers.
Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767 for 16-bit
values and 2147483647 for 32-bit values. This is a DNP requirement.
The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input
quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bulletin 9809-001: Analog Input Reporting Deadband. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to
data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change Event without Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500 ms
Default Class for all Points: 2
GE Multilin
E-11
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E
E-12
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F MISCELLANEOUSF.1CHANGE NOTES
F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
Table F1: REVISION HISTORY (Sheet 1 of 2)

MANUAL P/N
L90 REVISION
RELEASE DATE
1601-0081-A1
1.0x
04 November 1998
ECO
N/A
1601-0081-A2
1.0x
09 December 1998
URL-039
1601-0081-A3
1.5x
25 June 1999
URL-051
1601-0081-A4
1.5x
10 August 1999
URL-055
1601-0081-A5
1.5x
02 September 1999
URL-057
1601-0081-A6
2.0x
17 December 1999
URL-063
1601-0081-A7
2.0x
26 January 2000
URL-064
1601-0081-A7-2
2.0x
07 April 2000
URL-068
1601-0081-A8
2.2x
12 May 2000
URL-067
1601-0081-A9
2.2x
14 June 2000
URL-070
1601-0081-A9-2
2.2x
21 June 2000
URL-071
1601-0081-A9-2a
2.2x
28 June 2000
URL-071a
1601-0081-B1
2.4x
08 September 2000
URL-075
1601-0081-B2
2.4x
03 November 2000
URL-077
1601-0081-B3
2.6x
08 March 2001
URL-079
1601-0081-B4
2.8x
24 September 2001
URL-088
1601-0081-B5
2.9x
03 December 2001
URL-090
1601-0081-B6
2.6x
27 February 2004
URX-120
1601-0081-C1
3.0x
02 July 2002
URL-092
1601-0081-C2
3.1x
30 August 2002
URL-098
1601-0081-C3
3.0x
18 November 2002
URL-101
1601-0081-C4
3.1x
18 November 2002
URL-102
1601-0081-C5
3.0x
11 February 2003
URL-105
1601-0081-C6
3.1x
11 February 2003
URL-106
1601-0081-D1
3.2x
11 February 2003
URL-108
1601-0081-D2
3.2x
02 June 2003
URX-084
1601-0081-E1
3.3x
01 May 2003
URX-080
URX-083
1601-0081-E2
3.3x
29 May 2003
1601-0081-F1
3.4x
10 December 2003
URX-111
1601-0081-F2
3.4x
09 February 2004
URX-115
1601-0081-G1
4.0x
23 March 2004
URX-123
1601-0081-G2
4.0x
17 May 2004
URX-136
1601-0081-H1
4.2x
30 June 2004
URX-145
1601-0081-H2
4.2x
16 July 2004
URX-151
1601-0081-J1
4.4x
15 September 2004
URX-156
URX-176
1601-0081-K1
4.6x
15 February 2005
1601-0081-L1
4.8x
05 August 2005
URX-202
1601-0081-M1
4.9x
15 December 2005
URX-208
1601-0081-M2
4.9x
27 February 2006
URX-214
1601-0081-N1
5.0x
31 March 2006
URX-217
1601-0081-N2
5.0x
26 May 2006
URX-220
1601-0081-P1
5.2x
23 October 2006
URX-230
1601-0081-P2
5.2x
24 January 2007
URX-232
1601-0081-R1
5.4x
26 June 2007
URX-242
1601-0081-R2
5.4x
31 August 2007
URX-246
GE Multilin
F-1
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F
Table F1: REVISION HISTORY (Sheet 2 of 2)

MANUAL P/N
L90 REVISION
RELEASE DATE
ECO
1601-0081-R3
5.4x
17 October 2007
URX-251
1601-0081-S1
5.5x
7 December 2007
URX-253
1601-0081-S2
5.5x
22 February 2008
URX-258
1601-0081-S3
5.5x
12 March 2008
URX-260
1601-0081-T1
5.6x
27 June 2008
08-0390
1601-0081-U1
5.7x
29 May 2009
09-0938
1601-0081-U2
5.7x
30 September 2009
09-1165
1601-0081-U3
5.7x
15 October 2010
10-2044
1601-0081-U4
5.7x
31 August 2015
15-2218
F.1.2 CHANGES TO THE L90 MANUAL
Table F2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR L90 MANUAL REVISION U4

PAGE
(U3)
PAGE
(U4)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
---
---
Update
Maintenance release. Updated branding, website links, safety symbols, logos, warranty. No
editing or checking of technical content.
iii
iii
Update
Updated Addendum to include information that firmware behavior for Autoreclose does not match
logic diagram up to v5.72
3-18
3-18
Update
Updated Figure 3-17 Contact Input and Output Module Wiring to include surge on module 67
Table F3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR L90 MANUAL REVISION U3
PAGE
(U2)
PAGE
(U3)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0081-U3
2-27
2-27
Update
Updated ENVIRONMENTAL specifications section
5-21
5-21
Update
Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL section
5-127
5-127
Update
Updated LINE PICKUP section
5-172
5-172
Update
Updated NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section
Table F4: MAJOR UPDATES FOR L90 MANUAL REVISION U2 (Sheet 1 of 2)

PAGE
(U1)
PAGE
(U2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
1-1
1-1
Update
Updated INSPECTION CHECKLIST section
2-1
2-1
Update
Updated OVERVIEW section
2-7
2-7
Update
Updated ORDER CODES WITH PROCESS BUS MODULES section
2-21
2-21
Update
Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS specifications section
2-27
2-27
Update
2-28
2-28
Update
Updated TYPE TESTS specifications section
2-28
2-29
Update
Updated APPROVALS specifications section
---
3-35
Add
Added TWO-CHANNEL TWO-CLOCK RS422 INTERFACE section
4-14
4-14
Update
Updated LED INDICATORS section
5-21
5-21
Update
F-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
F.1 CHANGE NOTES

PAGE
(U1)
PAGE
(U2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
5-73
5-73
Update
Updated DISCONNECT SWITCHES section
5-139
5-139
Update
Updated GROUND DISTANCE section
5-172
5-172
Update
5-182
5-182
Update
Updated NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section
5-241
5-241
Update
Updated VT FUSE FAILURE section
5-245
5-246
Update
Updated PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (POTT) section
9-15
9-15
Update
Updated RELAY SYNCHRONIZATION section
C-7
C-7
Update
Updated CONFIGURABLE GOOSE section

PAGE
(T1)
PAGE
(U1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
2-17
2-17
Update
Updated PROTECTION ELEMENTS section for changes to line current differential specifications
2-22
2-22
Update
Updated MONITORING specifications section
2-23
2-23
Update
Updated INPUTS specifications section
2-27
2-27
Update
2-27
2-28
Update
Updated TYPE TESTS specifications section
3-2
3-2
Update
Updated VERTICAL UNITS sub-section
3-13
3-14
Update
Updated CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS section
4-1
4-1
Update
Updated USING SETTINGS FILES section
5-8
5-8
Update
Updated SECURITY section
5-21
5-21
Update
Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL sub-section
5-37
5-38
Update
Updated OSCILLOGRAPHY section
5-68
5-69
Update
Updated BREAKERS section
5-72
5-73
Update
Updated DISCONNECT SWITCHES section
---
5-88
Add
Added USER TRIGGERING sub-section
5-100
5-101
Update
Updated FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table
5-121
5-122
Update
Updated CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL section
5-129
5-130
Update
Updated PHASE DISTANCE sub-section
5-137
5-139
Update
Updated GROUND DISTANCE sub-section
5-163
5-165
Update
Updated PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT section
5-169
5-172
Update
5-179
5-182
Update
Updated NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section
5-195
5-198
Update
Updated PHASE OVERVOLTAGE section
5-213
5-216
Update
Updated TRIP OUTPUT section
5-218
5-222
Update
Updated SYNCHROCHECK section
5-222
5-226
Update
Updated DIGITAL ELEMENTS section
5-230
5-234
Update
Updated BREAKER FLASHOVER section
5-237
5-241
Update
Updated VT FUSE FAILURE section
5-238
5-242
Update
Updated OPEN POLE DETECTOR section
5-243
5-248
Update
Updated AUTORECLOSE section
5-258
5-263
Update
Updated CONTACT OUTPUTS section
---
5-272
Add
Added IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS section
GE Multilin
F-3
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F

PAGE
(T1)
PAGE
(U1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
---
5-273
Add
Added IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS section
---
6-8
Add
Added IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS section
6-12
6-13
Update
Updated DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT section
6-22
6-23
Update
Updated PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS section
7-2
7-3
Update
Updated RELAY MAINTENANCE section
7-7
7-8
Update
Updated MINOR SELF-TEST ERRORS section
---
8-1
Add
Added SECURITY chapter
---
9-4
Add
Added GROUND DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT section
8-22
9-23
Update
Updated PHASE SELECTION section
---
A-11
Add
Added FLEXINTEGER ITEMS section
B-9
B-9
Update
Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP section
B-64
B-66
Update
Updated DATA FORMATS section
Table F6: MAJOR UPDATES FOR L90 MANUAL REVISION T1
PAGE
(S3)
PAGE
(T1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0081-T1
2-4
2-4
Update
Updated ORDERING section
---
3-13
Add
Added PROCESS BUS MODULES section
---
5-11
Add
Added DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS section
5-20
5-21
Update
---
5-57
Add
Added REMOTE RESOURCES section
5-96
5-100
Update
---
5-263
Add
Added REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS section
5-269
5-274
Update
Updated TEST MODE section
---
6-4
Add
Added REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS section
B-9
B-9
Update
Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP section
Table F7: MAJOR UPDATES FOR L90 MANUAL REVISION S3

PAGE
(S2)
PAGE
(S3)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0081-S3
2-22
2-22
Update
Updated COMMUNICATIONS specifications section
2-23
2-23
Update
Updated INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS specifications section
3-7
3-7
Update
Updated REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT section
---
3-45
Add
Added ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS section
5-198
5-198
Update
Update 87L TRIP sub-section
7-6
7-7
Update
Updated MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES section
B-9
B-9
Update
Update MODBUS MEMORY MAP section
F-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
F.1 CHANGE NOTES

PAGE
(S1)
PAGE
(S2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
3-39
3-39
Update
Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH OVERVIEW section
3-39
3-39
Update
Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE section
---
3-42
Add
Added UPLOADING L90 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE sub-section
---
3-42
Add
Added SELECTING THE PROPER SWITCH FIRMWARE VERSION sub-section

PAGE
(R3)
PAGE
(S1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
2-4
2-4
Update
Updated ORDERING section
2-6
2-6
Update
Updated REPLACEMENT MODULES section
2-21
2-21
Update
Updated OUTPUTS specifications section
2-22
2-22
Update
Updated COMMUNICATIONS specifications section
3-34
3-35
Update
Updated IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE section
---
3-39
Add
Added MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES section
5-8
5-8
Update
Updated PASSWORD SECURITY section (now titled SECURITY)
---
5-31
Add
Added ETHERNET SWITCH sub-section
5-44
5-45
Update
Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS section
5-62
5-64
Update
Updated BREAKERS section
---
5-68
Add
Added DISCONNECT SWITCHES section
5-90
5-96
Update
---
6-8
Add
Added ETHERNET SWITCH section
---
6-22
Add
Added PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS section
B-9
B-9
Update
Update MODBUS MEMORY MAP section for revision 5.5x
Table F10: MAJOR UPDATES FOR L90 MANUAL REVISION R3

PAGE
(R2)
PAGE
(R3)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0081-R3
---
4-4
Add
Added EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES section
6-24
6-24
Update
Updated MODEL INFORMATION section
Table F11: MAJOR UPDATES FOR L90 MANUAL REVISION R2 (Sheet 1 of 2)

PAGE
(R1)
PAGE
(R2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0081-R2
2-18
2-18
Update
Updated MONITORING specifications section
5-33
5-33
Update
Updated FAULT REPORTS section
6-21
6-21
Update
Updated FAULT REPORTS section
GE Multilin
F-5
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F
Table F11: MAJOR UPDATES FOR L90 MANUAL REVISION R2 (Sheet 2 of 2)

PAGE
(R1)
PAGE
(R2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
---
8-23
Add
Added MULTI-ENDED FAULT LOCATOR section
F-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
F.2ABBREVIATIONS
F.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS
A..................... Ampere
AC .................. Alternating Current
A/D ................. Analog to Digital
AE .................. Accidental Energization, Application Entity
AMP ............... Ampere
ANG ............... Angle
ANSI............... American National Standards Institute
AR .................. Automatic Reclosure
ASDU ............. Application-layer Service Data Unit
ASYM ............. Asymmetry
AUTO ............. Automatic
AUX................ Auxiliary
AVG................ Average
BER................ Bit Error Rate
BF................... Breaker Fail
BFI.................. Breaker Failure Initiate
BKR................ Breaker
BLK ................ Block
BLKG.............. Blocking
BPNT.............. Breakpoint of a characteristic
BRKR ............. Breaker
CAP................ Capacitor
CC .................. Coupling Capacitor
CCVT ............. Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer
CFG................ Configure / Configurable
.CFG............... Filename extension for oscillography files
CHK................ Check
CHNL ............. Channel
CLS ................ Close
CLSD.............. Closed
CMND ............ Command
CMPRSN........ Comparison
CO.................. Contact Output
COM............... Communication
COMM............ Communications
COMP ............ Compensated, Comparison
CONN............. Connection
CONT ............. Continuous, Contact
CO-ORD......... Coordination
CPU................ Central Processing Unit
CRC ............... Cyclic Redundancy Code
CRT, CRNT .... Current
CSA................ Canadian Standards Association
CT .................. Current Transformer
CVT ................ Capacitive Voltage Transformer
D/A ................. Digital to Analog
DC (dc)........... Direct Current
DD .................. Disturbance Detector
DFLT .............. Default
DGNST........... Diagnostics
DI.................... Digital Input
DIFF ............... Differential
DIR ................. Directional
DISCREP ....... Discrepancy
DIST ............... Distance
DMD ............... Demand
DNP................ Distributed Network Protocol
DPO ............... Dropout
DSP................ Digital Signal Processor
dt .................... Rate of Change
DTT ................ Direct Transfer Trip
DUTT.............. Direct Under-reaching Transfer Trip
ENCRMNT ..... Encroachment
EPRI............... Electric Power Research Institute
.EVT ............... Filename extension for event recorder files
EXT ................ Extension, External
F ..................... Field
FAIL................ Failure
FD .................. Fault Detector
FDH................ Fault Detector high-set
FDL ................ Fault Detector low-set
FLA................. Full Load Current
FO .................. Fiber Optic
GE Multilin
FREQ..............Frequency
FSK.................Frequency-Shift Keying
FTP .................File Transfer Protocol
FxE .................FlexElement
FWD................Forward
G .....................Generator
GE...................General Electric
GND................Ground
GNTR..............Generator
GOOSE...........General Object Oriented Substation Event
GPS ................Global Positioning System
HARM .............Harmonic / Harmonics
HCT ................High Current Time
HGF ................High-Impedance Ground Fault (CT)
HIZ ..................High-Impedance and Arcing Ground
HMI .................Human-Machine Interface
HTTP ..............Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
HYB ................Hybrid
I.......................Instantaneous
I_0...................Zero Sequence current
I_1...................Positive Sequence current
I_2...................Negative Sequence current
IA ....................Phase A current
IAB ..................Phase A minus B current
IB ....................Phase B current
IBC..................Phase B minus C current
IC ....................Phase C current
ICA..................Phase C minus A current
ID ....................Identification
IED..................Intelligent Electronic Device
IEC..................International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE................Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IG ....................Ground (not residual) current
Igd...................Differential Ground current
IN ....................CT Residual Current (3Io) or Input
INC SEQ .........Incomplete Sequence
INIT .................Initiate
INST................Instantaneous
INV..................Inverse
I/O ...................Input/Output
IOC .................Instantaneous Overcurrent
IOV..................Instantaneous Overvoltage
IRIG ................Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
ISO..................International Standards Organization
IUV..................Instantaneous Undervoltage
K0 ...................Zero Sequence Current Compensation

kA....................kiloAmpere
kV....................kiloVolt
LED.................Light Emitting Diode
LEO.................Line End Open
LFT BLD .........Left Blinder
LOOP..............Loopback
LPU.................Line Pickup
LRA.................Locked-Rotor Current
LTC .................Load Tap-Changer
M.....................Machine
mA ..................MilliAmpere
MAG................Magnitude
MAN................Manual / Manually
MAX ................Maximum
MIC .................Model Implementation Conformance
MIN .................Minimum, Minutes
MMI.................Man Machine Interface
MMS ...............Manufacturing Message Specification
MRT ................Minimum Response Time
MSG................Message
MTA ................Maximum Torque Angle
MTR ................Motor
MVA ................MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase)
MVA_A............MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A)
MVA_B............MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B)
MVA_C............MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)
F-7
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
APPENDIX F
MVAR ............. MegaVar (total 3-phase)

MVAR_A......... MegaVar (phase A)
MVAR_B......... MegaVar (phase B)
MVAR_C ........ MegaVar (phase C)
MVARH .......... MegaVar-Hour
MW................. MegaWatt (total 3-phase)
MW_A ............ MegaWatt (phase A)
MW_B ............ MegaWatt (phase B)
MW_C ............ MegaWatt (phase C)
MWH .............. MegaWatt-Hour
N..................... Neutral
N/A, n/a .......... Not Applicable
NEG ............... Negative
NMPLT ........... Nameplate
NOM............... Nominal
NSAP ............. Network Service Access Protocol
NTR................ Neutral
O .................... Over
OC, O/C ......... Overcurrent
O/P, Op........... Output
OP .................. Operate
OPER ............. Operate
OPERATG ...... Operating
O/S ................. Operating System
OSI ................. Open Systems Interconnect
OSB................ Out-of-Step Blocking
OUT................ Output
OV .................. Overvoltage
OVERFREQ ... Overfrequency
OVLD ............. Overload
P..................... Phase
PC .................. Phase Comparison, Personal Computer
PCNT ............. Percent
PF................... Power Factor (total 3-phase)
PF_A .............. Power Factor (phase A)
PF_B .............. Power Factor (phase B)
PF_C .............. Power Factor (phase C)
PFLL............... Phase and Frequency Lock Loop
PHS................ Phase
PICS............... Protocol Implementation & Conformance
Statement
PKP ................ Pickup
PLC ................ Power Line Carrier
POS................ Positive
POTT.............. Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip
PRESS ........... Pressure
PRI ................. Primary
PROT ............. Protection
PSEL .............. Presentation Selector
pu ................... Per Unit
PUIB............... Pickup Current Block
PUIT ............... Pickup Current Trip
PUSHBTN ...... Pushbutton
PUTT.............. Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip
PWM .............. Pulse Width Modulated
PWR............... Power
QUAD............. Quadrilateral
R..................... Rate, Reverse
RCA................ Reach Characteristic Angle
REF ................ Reference
REM ............... Remote
REV................ Reverse
RI.................... Reclose Initiate
RIP ................. Reclose In Progress
RGT BLD........ Right Blinder
ROD ............... Remote Open Detector
RST ................ Reset
RSTR ............. Restrained
RTD ................ Resistance Temperature Detector
RTU ................ Remote Terminal Unit
RX (Rx) .......... Receive, Receiver
s ..................... second
S..................... Sensitive
F-8
SAT ................ CT Saturation

SBO ............... Select Before Operate
SCADA .......... Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SEC ............... Secondary
SEL ................ Select / Selector / Selection
SENS ............. Sensitive
SEQ ............... Sequence
SIR................. Source Impedance Ratio
SNTP ............. Simple Network Time Protocol
SRC ............... Source
SSB................ Single Side Band
SSEL.............. Session Selector
STATS............ Statistics
SUPN............. Supervision
SUPV ............. Supervise / Supervision
SV .................. Supervision, Service
SYNC............. Synchrocheck
SYNCHCHK... Synchrocheck
T..................... Time, transformer
TC .................. Thermal Capacity
TCP................ Transmission Control Protocol
TCU ............... Thermal Capacity Used
TD MULT........ Time Dial Multiplier
TEMP............. Temperature
TFTP .............. Trivial File Transfer Protocol
THD ............... Total Harmonic Distortion
TMR ............... Timer
TOC ............... Time Overcurrent
TOV................ Time Overvoltage
TRANS........... Transient
TRANSF ........ Transfer
TSEL.............. Transport Selector
TUC ............... Time Undercurrent
TUV................ Time Undervoltage
TX (Tx)........... Transmit, Transmitter
U .................... Under
UC.................. Undercurrent
UCA ............... Utility Communications Architecture
UDP ............... User Datagram Protocol
UL .................. Underwriters Laboratories
UNBAL........... Unbalance
UR.................. Universal Relay
URC ............... Universal Recloser Control
.URS .............. Filename extension for settings files
UV .................. Undervoltage
V/Hz ............... Volts per Hertz
V_0 ................ Zero Sequence voltage
V_1 ................ Positive Sequence voltage
V_2 ................ Negative Sequence voltage
VA .................. Phase A voltage
VAB ................ Phase A to B voltage
VAG................ Phase A to Ground voltage
VARH ............. Var-hour voltage
VB .................. Phase B voltage
VBA................ Phase B to A voltage
VBG ............... Phase B to Ground voltage
VC.................. Phase C voltage
VCA ............... Phase C to A voltage
VCG ............... Phase C to Ground voltage
VF .................. Variable Frequency
VIBR .............. Vibration
VT .................. Voltage Transformer
VTFF.............. Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
VTLOS ........... Voltage Transformer Loss Of Signal
WDG .............. Winding
WH................. Watt-hour
w/ opt ............. With Option
WRT............... With Respect To
X .................... Reactance
XDUCER........ Transducer
XFMR............. Transformer
Z..................... Impedance, Zone
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
F.3 WARRANTY
F.3WARRANTY
F.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY
For products shipped as of 1 October 2013, GE Digital Energy warrants most of its GE manufactured products for 10 years.
For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers, see the GE Digital Energy Terms and Conditions at
https://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/warranty.htm
For products shipped before 1 October 2013, the standard 24-month warranty applies.
GE Multilin
F-9
F.3 WARRANTY
APPENDIX F
F-10
GE Multilin
INDEX
Index
Numerics
10BASE-F
communications options ................................................. 3-23
description .................................................................... 3-26
interface ........................................................................ 3-35
redundant option ........................................................... 3-23
settings ......................................................................... 5-16
2 TERMINAL MODE ......................................................... 2-12
3 TERMINAL MODE ......................................................... 2-12
87L
see index entry for CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL
87L DIFFERENTIAL
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-32
87L TRIP
FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-101
settings ............................................................. 5-205, 5-206
A
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................... F-7
AC CURRENT INPUTS ................................... 2-23, 3-12, 5-59
AC VOLTAGE INPUTS .............................................2-23, 3-13
ACTIVATING THE RELAY ........................................1-17, 4-27
ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ............................................. 5-121
ACTUAL VALUES
description .................................................................... 2-14
main menu ...................................................................... 6-1
maintenance ................................................................. 6-24
metering ........................................................................ 6-10
product information ........................................................ 6-25
records ......................................................................... 6-22
status .............................................................................. 6-3
ALARM LEDs ................................................................... 5-45
ALARMS .......................................................................... 2-15
ANSI DEVICES .................................................................. 2-1
APPARENT POWER ................................................2-22, 6-16
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
breaker trip circuit integrity .......................................... 5-228
contact inputs .............................................................. 5-263
HV line configuration ................................................... 10-13
LV fault ....................................................................... 10-13
APPROVALS ................................................................... 2-29
ARCHITECTURE ............................................................. 5-99
ARCING CURRENT ....................................................... 5-233
AUTORECLOSE
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
description .................................................................. 5-251
logic ....................................................... 5-258, 5-259, 5-260
Modbus registers .................................................. B-16, B-35
sequence .................................................................... 5-261
settings ............................. 5-250, 5-253, 5-254, 5-256, 5-257
specifications ................................................................ 2-20
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
logic ............................................................................ 5-202
settings ....................................................................... 5-201
specifications ................................................................ 2-20
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE
logic ............................................................................ 5-201
GE Multilin
settings ....................................................................... 5-200

specifications ................................................................. 2-19
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL ..................................... 3-13
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING ................................... 6-16
B
BANKS ............................................................ 5-6, 5-59, 5-60
BATTERY FAILURE ........................................................... 7-8
BINARY INPUT POINTS .................................................... E-8
BINARY OUTPUT POINTS ................................................. E-9
BLOCK DIAGRAM ..................................................... 1-3, 2-15
BLOCK SETTING ............................................................... 5-5
BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
actual values ................................................................. 6-24
clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2
FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-102
logic ............................................................................ 5-234
measurement ............................................................... 5-234
Modbus registers ................................................. B-15, B-38
settings ....................................................................... 5-233
specifications ................................................................. 2-20
BREAKER CONTROL
control of 2 breakers ...................................................... 4-24
description ..................................................................... 4-23
dual breaker logic ................................................. 5-71, 5-72
Modbus registers .......................................................... B-25
settings ......................................................................... 5-69
BREAKER FAILURE
description ................................................................... 5-188
determination ............................................................... 5-189
logic ............................................ 5-192, 5-193, 5-194, 5-195
main path sequence ..................................................... 5-189
settings ............................................................ 5-187, 5-190
specifications ................................................................. 2-20
BREAKER FLASHOVER
logic ............................................................................ 5-238
settings ....................................................................... 5-235
specifications ................................................................. 2-20
BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME ...................................... 5-5
BRIGHTNESS .................................................................. 5-12
C
C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ........................... 3-36, 3-38, 3-41
C37.94SM COMMUNICATIONS ........................................ 3-39
CAUTIONS ......................................................................... 1-1
CE APPROVALS .............................................................. 2-29
CHANGES TO L90 MANUAL ...............................................F-2
CHANGES TO MANUAL ............................................. F-4, F-5
CHANNEL ASYMMETRY
settings ......................................................................... 5-66
CHANNEL COMMUNICATION .......................................... 3-28
CHANNEL MONITOR ....................................................... 2-12
CHANNEL STATUS
CHANNEL TESTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-6
INDEX
commands .............................................................. 5-14, 7-2
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-58
procedures .................................................................... 11-1
settings ....................................................................... 5-285
CHANNELS
banks ................................................................... 5-59, 5-60
number of ...................................................................... 5-64
CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION ................ 5-64, 9-13
CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS ......................... 5-227
CLEANING ....................................................................... 2-29
CLEAR RECORDS .................................................... 5-14, 7-2
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
settings ......................................................................... 5-14
CLOCK
setting date and time ....................................................... 7-2
settings ......................................................................... 5-35
synchronization tests ..................................................... 11-2
COMMANDS MENU ........................................................... 7-1
COMMUNICATIONS
10BASE-F ....................................................3-23, 3-26, 5-16
channel ................................................................ 2-12, 3-28
connecting to the UR .............................................. 1-8, 1-15
CRC-16 error checking .................................................... B-2
direct transfer trip .......................................................... 2-13
dnp ........................................................................ 5-17, E-1
G.703 ............................................................................ 3-31
half duplex ...................................................................... B-1
HTTP ............................................................................ 5-32
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol .............................................. 5-32
IEC 61850 ................................................................... 5-268
inter-relay communications .................................... 2-11, 2-27
loopback test ...................................................... 2-13, 5-285
Modbus .................................................. 5-16, 5-34, B-1, B-3
network ......................................................................... 5-16
overview ............................................................... 1-16, 2-11
path diagram ................................................................. 2-12
RS232 ........................................................................... 3-23
RS485 ..........................................................3-23, 3-25, 5-15
settings ...................................... 5-16, 5-17, 5-22, 5-32, 5-34
specifications........................................................ 2-26, 2-27
UCA/MMS ................................................................... 5-270
web server..................................................................... 5-32
COMTRADE ............................................................... B-6, B-7
CONDUCTED RFI ............................................................ 2-28
CONTACT INFORMATION .................................................. 1-1
CONTACT INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
dry connections ............................................................. 3-20
Modbus registers ............................... B-11, B-18, B-51, B-53
settings ....................................................................... 5-262
specifications ................................................................. 2-23
thresholds ................................................................... 5-262
wet connections ............................................................. 3-20
CONTACT OUTPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
Modbus registers .........................................B-11, B-18, B-56
settings ....................................................................... 5-265
CONTINUOUS MONITOR
logic ............................................................................ 5-239
settings ....................................................................... 5-238
CONTROL ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-207
CONTROL POWER
ii
description .....................................................................3-12
specifications .................................................................2-25
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
settings ..........................................................................5-47
specifications .................................................................2-21
COUNTERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-7
settings ........................................................................ 5-229
CRC-16 ALGORITHM ........................................................ B-2
CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY ..................................... 2-24, 3-11
CSA APPROVAL ..............................................................2-29
CT BANKS
settings ..........................................................................5-59
CT FAILURE
logic ............................................................................ 5-241
settings ........................................................................ 5-240
CT INPUTS ...................................................... 3-13, 5-6, 5-59
CT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................10-1
CT WIRING ......................................................................3-13
CURRENT BANK ..............................................................5-59
CURRENT DEMAND .........................................................5-42
CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL
applications ...................................................................10-3
description .....................................................................2-14
logic ............................................................................ 5-124
metering ........................................................................6-13
settings ........................................................................ 5-122
specifications .................................................................2-18
testing ...........................................................................11-3
trip ............................................................................... 5-205
CURRENT METERING
actual values ..................................................................6-14
specifications .................................................................2-22
CURVES
definite time ...................................................... 5-162, 5-196
FlexCurves ...................................................... 5-76, 5-162
I2T ............................................................................... 5-162
IAC .............................................................................. 5-161
IEC .............................................................................. 5-160
IEEE ............................................................................ 5-159
inverse time undervoltage ............................................. 5-196
types ........................................................................... 5-158
D
DATA FORMATS, MODBUS ............................................. B-66
DATA LOGGER
clearing ...................................................................5-14, 7-2
Modbus ........................................................................... B-7
settings ..........................................................................5-40
specifications .................................................................2-22
via COMTRADE .............................................................. B-6
DATE ................................................................................ 7-2
DCMA INPUTS .................................................................6-21
settings ........................................................................ 5-276
specifications .................................................................2-23
DCMA OUTPUTS
GE Multilin
INDEX
description .................................................................... 3-22
settings ....................................................................... 5-279
specifications ................................................................ 2-25
DD
see entry for DISTURBANCE DETECTOR
DEFINITE TIME CURVE ....................................... 5-162, 5-196
DEMAND
DEMAND METERING
actual values ................................................................. 6-17
settings ......................................................................... 5-42
specifications ................................................................ 2-23
DEMAND RECORDS
clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2
DESIGN ............................................................................ 1-3
DEVICE ID .................................................................... 5-269
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT .......................................... E-1
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ................................................ 3-11
DIFFERENTIAL
applications ................................................................... 10-3
current ....................................................... 2-14, 2-18, 5-122
current metering ............................................................ 6-13
element characteristics .................................................. 9-14
line elements ............................................................... 5-122
stub bus ...................................................................... 5-125
theory ............................................................................. 9-1
trip .............................................................................. 5-205
DIGITAL COUNTERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-7
logic ............................................................................ 5-231
settings ....................................................................... 5-229
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
application example ..................................................... 5-228
logic ............................................................................ 5-227
settings ....................................................................... 5-226
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
see entry for CONTACT OUTPUTS
DIMENSIONS ............................................................. 3-1, 3-2
DIRECT INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
description .................................................................. 5-271
logic ............................................................................ 5-273
settings ....................................................................... 5-272
DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
error messages ............................................................... 7-8
DIRECT MESSAGES ..................................................... 5-268
DIRECT OUTPUTS
description .................................................................. 5-271
logic ............................................................................ 5-273
settings ....................................................................... 5-272
DIRECT TRANSFER TRIP ........................................2-13, 11-4
DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL entries
DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION ...................................... 5-168
DISCONNECT SWITCH
logic .............................................................................. 5-75
settings ......................................................................... 5-73
DISPLAY ........................................................ 1-16, 4-23, 5-12
DISTANCE
GE Multilin
application example ..................................................... 10-13

ground ................................................................ 2-17, 5-139
mho characteristic ............................................. 5-132, 5-134
phase ................................................................. 2-17, 5-130
quad characteristic .................................. 5-133, 5-134, 5-141
settings ....................................................................... 5-129
DISTURBANCE DETECTOR
FlexLogic operands ........................................ 5-101, 5-106
internal .......................................................................... 5-62
logic ............................................................................ 5-204
settings ....................................................................... 5-203
theory ..............................................................................9-3
DNA-1 BIT PAIR ............................................................. 5-271
DNP COMMUNICATIONS
binary counters ............................................................. E-10
binary input points .......................................................... E-8
binary output points ........................................................ E-9
control relay output blocks ............................................... E-9
device profile document .................................................. E-1
frozen counters ............................................................. E-10
implementation table ....................................................... E-4
settings ......................................................................... 5-17
DTT ........................................................................ 2-13, 11-4
DUPLEX, HALF ................................................................. B-1
E
EGD PROTOCOL
actual values ................................................................. 6-24
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ........................................ 2-28
ELEMENTS ........................................................................ 5-4
ENERGY METERING
actual values ................................................................. 6-17
specifications ................................................................. 2-22
ENERGY METERING, CLEARING .............................. 5-14, 7-2
ENERVISTA UR SETUP
creating a site list ............................................................ 4-1
event recorder ................................................................. 4-2
firmware upgrades ........................................................... 4-2
installation ....................................................................... 1-5
introduction ..................................................................... 4-1
oscillography ................................................................... 4-2
overview .......................................................................... 4-1
requirements ................................................................... 1-5
EQUATIONS
definite time curve ............................................ 5-162, 5-196
FlexCurve ................................................................. 5-162
It curves ..................................................................... 5-162
IAC curves ................................................................... 5-161
IEC curves ................................................................... 5-160
IEEE curves ................................................................. 5-159
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH ERROR ....................................... 7-7
ETHERNET
actual values ................................................................... 6-8
configuration .................................................................... 1-8
error messages ................................................................ 7-9
quick connect ................................................................ 1-10
settings ......................................................................... 5-16
ETHERNET SWITCH
actual values ................................................................... 6-9
configuration ......................................................... 3-43, 3-44
iii
INDEX
hardware ....................................................................... 3-42
overview ........................................................................ 3-42
saving setting files ......................................................... 3-44
settings ......................................................................... 5-34
uploading setting files .................................................... 3-45
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS .................................. 4-15, 4-16
EVENT RECORDER
actual values ................................................................. 6-22
clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2
description..................................................................... 2-14
Modbus .......................................................................... B-7
specifications ................................................................. 2-22
via EnerVista software ..................................................... 4-2
EVENTS SETTING ............................................................. 5-5
EXCEPTION RESPONSES ................................................ B-5
F
F485 ................................................................................ 1-16
FACEPLATE ............................................................... 3-1, 3-2
FACEPLATE PANELS ............................................. 4-13, 4-23
FAST FORM-C RELAY ..................................................... 2-24
FAST TRANSIENT TESTING ............................................ 2-28
FAULT DETECTION ........................................................... 9-3
FAULT LOCATOR
logic .............................................................................. 9-33
operation ....................................................................... 9-31
specifications ................................................................. 2-22
FAULT REPORT
actual values ................................................................. 6-22
clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2
Modbus .......................................................................... B-7
Modbus registers ..................................................B-18, B-23
settings ......................................................................... 5-37
FAULT REPORTS
FAULT TYPE ................................................................... 9-31
FAX NUMBERS .................................................................. 1-1
FEATURES ................................................................. 2-1, 2-3
Fiber ................................................................................ 3-29
FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS ....................................... 3-29
FIRMWARE REVISION ..................................................... 6-25
FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 4-2
FLASH MESSAGES ......................................................... 5-12
FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-8
settings ......................................................................... 5-54
specifications ................................................................. 2-21
FLEXCURVES
equation ...................................................................... 5-162
settings ......................................................................... 5-76
specifications ................................................................. 2-21
table .............................................................................. 5-76
FLEXELEMENTS
actual values ................................................................. 6-19
direction ...................................................................... 5-118
hysteresis .................................................................... 5-118
pickup ......................................................................... 5-118
scheme logic ............................................................... 5-117
iv
settings ...................................................5-116, 5-117, 5-119

specifications .................................................................2-21
FLEXLOGIC
locking to a serial number ........................................4-9, 8-11
FLEXLOGIC
editing with EnerVista UR Setup ...................................... 4-2
equation editor ............................................................. 5-115
error messages ............................................................... 7-7
evaluation .................................................................... 5-110
example .............................................................. 5-99, 5-111
example equation ......................................................... 5-209
gate characteristics ...................................................... 5-109
locking equation entries ...........................................4-8, 8-10
operands .......................................................... 5-100, 5-101
operators ..................................................................... 5-110
rules ............................................................................ 5-110
security ...................................................................4-8, 8-10
specifications .................................................................2-21
timers .......................................................................... 5-115
worksheet .................................................................... 5-112
FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR ................................. 5-115
FLEXLOGIC TIMERS
settings ........................................................................ 5-116
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ............................................. 5-283
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ......................................... 5-284
FORCE TRIGGER ............................................................6-23
FORM-A RELAY
high impedance circuits ..................................................3-15
outputs ........................................................ 3-14, 3-15, 3-20
specifications .................................................................2-24
FORM-C RELAY
outputs ................................................................. 3-14, 3-20
specifications .................................................................2-24
FREQUENCY
detection ......................................................................... 9-7
tracking ........................................................................... 9-6
FREQUENCY METERING
actual values ..................................................................6-18
settings ..........................................................................5-61
specifications .................................................................2-23
FREQUENCY TRACKING ........................................ 5-61, 6-19
FREQUENCY, NOMINAL ..................................................5-60
FUNCTION SETTING ......................................................... 5-4
FUNCTIONALITY ............................................................... 2-2
FUSE ...............................................................................2-24
FUSE FAILURE
see VT FUSE FAILURE
G
G.703 .................................................... 3-30, 3-31, 3-32, 3-36
GE TYPE IAC CURVES .................................................. 5-161
GROUND CURRENT METERING ......................................6-15
GROUND DIRECTIONAL SUPERVISION ......................... 5-146
GROUND DISTANCE
op scheme ...................................................................5-144
scheme logic ..................................................... 5-145, 5-146
settings ........................................................................ 5-139
specifications .................................................................2-17
GROUND IOC
logic ............................................................................ 5-181
GE Multilin
INDEX
settings ....................................................................... 5-181
GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT
see entry for GROUND TOC
GROUND TOC
logic ............................................................................ 5-180
settings ....................................................................... 5-180
specifications ................................................................ 2-18
GROUPED ELEMENTS .................................................. 5-121
GSSE ................................................ 5-269, 5-270, 5-271, 6-6
GUARANTEE ..................................................................... F-9
H
HALF-DUPLEX .................................................................. B-1
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ......................................... 9-11
HTTP PROTOCOL ........................................................... 5-32
HV LINE CONFIGURATION ............................................ 10-13
CT inputs .............................................................. 3-12, 3-13

RS485 ........................................................................... 3-25
settings ......................................................................... 5-57
INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries
INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE ................................. 1-2
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ......................... 2-11, 2-27
INTRODUCTION ................................................................ 1-2
INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE .................................. 5-197
IOC
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries
IP ADDRESS .................................................................... 5-16
IRIG-B
connection ..................................................................... 3-26
error messages ................................................................ 7-8
settings ......................................................................... 5-35
specifications ........................................................ 2-23, 2-25
ISO-9000 REGISTRATION ................................................ 2-29
K
KEYPAD ................................................................. 1-17, 4-23
I
I2T CURVES .................................................................. 5-162
IAC CURVES ................................................................. 5-161
IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
interoperability document .................................................D-1
points list ........................................................................D-9
settings ......................................................................... 5-32
IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS
settings ....................................................................... 5-274
IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS
settings ....................................................................... 5-275
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
device ID ..................................................................... 5-269
DNA2 assignments ...................................................... 5-271
error messages ............................................................... 7-9
Modbus registers .............. B-47, B-48, B-49, B-50, B-51, B-61
remote device settings ................................................. 5-268
remote inputs .............................................................. 5-269
settings ......................................................................... 5-21
UserSt-1 bit pair .......................................................... 5-271
IEC CURVES ................................................................. 5-160
IED .................................................................................... 1-2
IED SETUP ........................................................................ 1-5
IEEE C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ................... 3-36, 3-38, 3-41
IEEE CURVES ............................................................... 5-159
IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................... 1-4
IN SERVICE INDICATOR .......................................... 1-17, 7-6
INCOMPATIBLE HARDWARE ERROR ................................ 7-7
INPUTS
AC current .............................................................2-23, 5-59
AC voltage ............................................................2-23, 5-60
contact inputs ........................................... 2-23, 5-262, 5-283
dcmA inputs ..........................................................2-23, 3-22
direct inputs ................................................................ 5-272
IRIG-B ..................................................................2-23, 3-26
remote inputs .................................2-23, 5-268, 5-269, 5-270
RTD inputs ............................................................2-23, 3-22
virtual ......................................................................... 5-264
INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................. 1-1
INSTALLATION
communications ............................................................ 3-24
GE Multilin
L
L90 POWER SYSTEM
L90 TRIP
LAMPTEST ........................................................................ 7-3
LANGUAGE ..................................................................... 5-12
LASER MODULE .............................................................. 3-29
LATCHING OUTPUTS
application example .......................................... 5-266, 5-267
error messages ................................................................ 7-9
settings ....................................................................... 5-265
specifications ................................................................. 2-24
LED INDICATORS ......................... 4-14, 4-15, 4-16, 4-22, 5-45
LED TEST
FlexLogic operand .................................................... 5-108
settings ......................................................................... 5-43
specifications ................................................................. 2-21
LINE
pickup ......................................................................... 5-127
LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS ................................... 5-122
LINE PICKUP
logic ............................................................................ 5-128
settings ....................................................................... 5-127
specifications ................................................................. 2-17
LINK POWER BUDGET .................................................... 2-27
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
settings ............................................................ 5-156, 5-157
specifications ................................................................. 2-20
LOCAL LOOPBACK ........................................................ 5-285
LOGIC GATES ............................................................... 5-110
LOOP FILTER BLOCK DIAGRAM ...................................... 9-10
LOOPBACK ........................................................... 2-13, 5-285
LOST PASSWORD ...................................... 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3
LV FAULT ...................................................................... 10-13
INDEX
M
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS ............................................. 7-3
MANUFACTURING DATE ................................................. 6-25
MATCHING PHASELETS .................................................. 9-11
MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ......................................B-66
MEMORY VOLTAGE LOGIC ........................................... 5-130
MENU HEIRARCHY ................................................ 1-17, 4-25
MENU NAVIGATION .......................................1-17, 4-24, 4-25
METERING
conventions .......................................................... 6-10, 6-11
current .......................................................................... 2-22
demand ......................................................................... 2-23
description..................................................................... 2-14
frequency ...................................................................... 2-23
power ............................................................................ 2-22
voltage .......................................................................... 2-22
METERING CONVENTIONS ............................................. 6-11
MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC .............................. 5-132
MODBUS
data logger .............................................................. B-6, B-7
event recorder ................................................................ B-7
exception responses ....................................................... B-5
execute operation ........................................................... B-4
fault report ...................................................................... B-7
flex state parameters ..................................................... 5-55
function code 03/04h ....................................................... B-3
function code 05h ........................................................... B-4
function code 06h ........................................................... B-4
function code 10h ........................................................... B-5
introduction .................................................................... B-1
memory map data formats ..............................................B-66
obtaining files ................................................................. B-6
oscillography .................................................................. B-6
passwords ...................................................................... B-7
read/write settings/actual values ...................................... B-3
settings ................................................................ 5-16, 5-34
store multiple settings ..................................................... B-5
store single setting ......................................................... B-4
supported function codes ................................................ B-3
user map ..................................................... 5-34, B-11, B-26
MODEL INFORMATION .................................................... 6-25
MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER ........................................ 6-25
MODULE FAILURE ERROR ................................................ 7-7
MODULES
communications ............................................................. 3-24
CT ................................................................................. 3-13
CT/VT .................................................................... 3-12, 5-6
direct inputs/outputs ...................................................... 3-29
insertion ................................................................... 3-6, 3-7
order codes ..................................................................... 2-8
power supply ................................................................. 3-11
transducer I/O ............................................................... 3-22
VT ................................................................................. 3-13
withdrawal ................................................................ 3-6, 3-7
MONITORING ELEMENTS ............................................. 5-232
MOTOR
settings .............................................................5-158, 5-169
MOUNTING ................................................................. 3-1, 3-2
N
NAMEPLATE ...................................................................... 1-1
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC
vi
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

characteristics .............................................................. 5-185
logic ............................................................................ 5-186
settings ............................................................. 5-184, 5-186
specifications .................................................................2-19
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC
logic ............................................................................ 5-183
settings ........................................................................ 5-183
specifications .................................................................2-18
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC
logic ............................................................................ 5-182
settings ........................................................................ 5-182
specifications .................................................................2-18
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
logic ............................................................................ 5-176
polarization .................................................................. 5-174
settings ........................................................................ 5-172
specifications .................................................................2-19
NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
see entry for NEUTRAL IOC
NEUTRAL IOC
logic ............................................................................ 5-171
settings ........................................................................ 5-171
specifications .................................................................2-18
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
logic ............................................................................ 5-200
settings ........................................................................ 5-199
specifications .................................................................2-19
NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT
see entry for NEUTRAL TOC
NEUTRAL TOC
logic ............................................................................ 5-170
settings ........................................................................ 5-170
specifications .................................................................2-18
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
settings ........................................................................ 5-120
specifications .................................................................2-21
NSAP ADDRESS ..............................................................5-16
O
ONE SHOTS ...................................................................5-110
OPEN POLE DETECTOR
logic ................................................................. 5-245, 5-246
settings ........................................................................ 5-243
specifications .................................................................2-20
OPERATING CONDITION CALCULATIONS .......................9-16
OPERATING TEMPERATURE ...........................................2-27
GE Multilin
INDEX
OPERATING TIMES ......................................................... 2-17
ORDER CODES ............................. 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, 6-25, 7-3
ORDER CODES, UPDATING .............................................. 7-3
ORDERING ............................................ 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8
OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING ............................. 2-28
OSCILLOGRAPHY
actual values ................................................................. 6-23
clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2
description .................................................................... 2-14
Modbus ........................................................................... B-6
settings ......................................................................... 5-38
specifications ................................................................ 2-22
via COMTRADE ............................................................... B-6
via EnerVista software ..................................................... 4-2
OSI NETWORK ADDRESS ............................................... 5-16
OST ...................................................................... 2-20, 5-149
OUT-OF-STEP TRIPPING ...................................... 2-20, 5-149
OUTPUTS
contact outputs ............................................................ 5-265
control power ................................................................ 2-25
critical failure relay ........................................................ 2-24
direct outputs .............................................................. 5-272
Fast Form-C relay ......................................................... 2-24
Form-A relay ....................................... 2-24, 3-14, 3-15, 3-20
Form-C relay ................................................ 2-24, 3-14, 3-20
IRIG-B .......................................................................... 2-25
latching outputs ................................................... 2-24, 5-265
remote outputs ............................................................ 5-271
virtual outputs ............................................................. 5-267
OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES .................................... 5-158
OVERCURRENT CURVES
definite time ................................................................ 5-162
FlexCurves .............................................................. 5-162
I2T .............................................................................. 5-162
IAC ............................................................................. 5-161
IEC ............................................................................. 5-160
IEEE ........................................................................... 5-159
OVERVIEW ....................................................................... 2-3
OVERVOLTAGE
auxiliary .............................................................. 2-20, 5-201
neutral ................................................................ 2-19, 5-199
phase .................................................................. 2-19, 5-198
P
PANEL CUTOUT ......................................................... 3-1, 3-2
PARITY ........................................................................... 5-15
PASSWORD SECURITY .............................. 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3
FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-108
PASSWORDS
changing ....................................................................... 4-28
for settings templates ............................................... 4-5, 8-7
lost password ................................... 4-28, 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3
Modbus ........................................................................... B-7
overview ....................................................................... 1-18
security .................................................................... 5-8, 8-1
settings .................................................................... 5-8, 8-1
PC SOFTWARE
see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP
PERMISSIVE FUNCTIONS ............................................. 5-196
PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP
see entry for POTT
PER-UNIT QUANTITY ........................................................ 5-4
PFLL STATUS ................................................................... 6-7
GE Multilin
PHASE ANGLE METERING .............................................. 6-11

PHASE CURRENT METERING ......................................... 6-14
PHASE DETECTION .......................................................... 9-7
PHASE DIRECTIONAL OC
PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
logic ............................................................................ 5-169
phase A polarization .................................................... 5-167
settings ............................................................ 5-167, 5-168
specifications ................................................................. 2-19
PHASE DISTANCE
logic ............................................................................ 5-138
op scheme ................................................................... 5-137
settings ....................................................................... 5-130
specifications ................................................................. 2-17
PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
see entry for PHASE IOC
PHASE IOC
logic ............................................................................ 5-166
specifications ................................................................. 2-18
PHASE LOCKING ...................................................... 9-6, 9-10
PHASE MEASUREMENT UNIT
see entry for SYNCHROPHASOR
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
logic ............................................................................ 5-199
settings ....................................................................... 5-198
specifications ................................................................. 2-19
PHASE ROTATION .......................................................... 5-61
PHASE SELECT
PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT
see entry for PHASE TOC
PHASE TOC
logic ............................................................................ 5-164
settings ....................................................................... 5-163
specifications ................................................................. 2-18
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
logic ............................................................................ 5-198
settings ....................................................................... 5-197
specifications ................................................................. 2-19
PHASELETS ............................................................... 9-1, 9-2
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
actual values ................................................................. 6-23
PHASORS ................................................................... 9-1, 9-2
PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING ............................................ 2-11
PILOT SCHEMES
POTT .......................................................................... 5-247
specifications ................................................................. 2-20
PMU
see entry for SYNCHROPHASOR
POTT
application of settings .................................................. 10-16
logic ............................................................................ 5-249
settings ............................................................ 5-247, 5-248
POWER METERING
vii
INDEX
specifications ................................................................. 2-22
values ........................................................................... 6-16
POWER SUPPLY
description..................................................................... 3-11
low range ...................................................................... 2-24
specifications ................................................................. 2-24
POWER SWING BLOCKING .................................. 2-20, 5-149
POWER SWING DETECT
logic ..................................................................5-154, 5-155
settings .............................................................5-147, 5-151
specifications ................................................................. 2-20
POWER SYSTEM
settings for L90 .............................................................. 5-64
PREFERENCES
PROCESS BUS
overview ........................................................................ 3-14
PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................ 6-25, B-9
PRODUCT SETUP ...................................................... 5-8, 8-2
PRODUCTION TESTS ...................................................... 2-28
PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 5-4
PROTECTION FEATURES ................................................. 2-1
PU QUANTITY ................................................................... 5-4
PUSHBUTTONS, USER-PROGRAMMABLE
see USER-PROGRAMMBLE PUSHBUTTONS
Q
QUAD DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC ....... 5-133, 5-134, 5-141
R
REACTIVE POWER ................................................. 2-22, 6-16
REAL POWER ......................................................... 2-22, 6-16
REAL TIME CLOCK
settings ......................................................................... 5-35
REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ...................................... 3-8
RECLOSER CURVES ............................................ 5-79, 5-162
RECLOSING
description................................................................... 5-251
logic ....................................................... 5-258, 5-259, 5-260
sequence .................................................................... 5-261
settings ............................. 5-250, 5-253, 5-254, 5-256, 5-257
REDUNDANT 10BASE-F .................................................. 3-23
RELAY ACTIVATION ........................................................ 4-27
RELAY ARCHITECTURE .................................................. 5-99
RELAY MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 7-3
RELAY NAME .................................................................. 5-57
RELAY NOT PROGRAMMED ............................................ 1-17
RELAY SYNCHRONIZATION ............................................ 9-15
REMOTE DEVICES
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
device ID ..................................................................... 5-269
error messages ................................................................ 7-9
Modbus registers ............................... B-11, B-18, B-58, B-62
settings ....................................................................... 5-268
statistics .......................................................................... 6-6
REMOTE DPS INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
viii
settings ........................................................................ 5-270

REMOTE INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
Modbus registers ......................................... B-11, B-18, B-59
settings ........................................................................ 5-269
specifications .................................................................2-23
REMOTE LOOPBACK ..................................................... 5-285
REMOTE OUTPUTS
DNA-1 bit pair .............................................................. 5-271
UserSt-1 bit pair ........................................................... 5-271
REPAIR ............................................................................. F-9
REPLACEMENT MODULES ................................ 2-8, 2-9, 2-10
REQUIREMENTS, HARDWARE ........................................9-11
RESETTING ........................................................ 5-108, 5-274
RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTICS .....................................9-17
REVISION HISTORY ......................................................... F-1
RF IMMUNITY ..................................................................2-28
RFI, CONDUCTED ............................................................2-28
RMS CURRENT ................................................................2-22
RMS VOLTAGE ................................................................2-22
ROLLING DEMAND ..........................................................5-43
RS232
configuration ................................................................... 1-9
specifications .................................................................2-26
wiring .............................................................................3-23
RS422
configuration ..................................................................3-33
timing ............................................................................3-34
two-channel application ..................................................3-34
with fiber interface ..........................................................3-35
RS485
communications .............................................................3-23
configuration ................................................................... 1-7
description .....................................................................3-25
specifications .................................................................2-26
RTD INPUTS
actual values ..................................................................6-21
settings ........................................................................ 5-277
specifications .................................................................2-23
S
SALES OFFICE ................................................................. 1-1
SCAN OPERATION ........................................................... 1-4
SELECTOR SWITCH
actual values ................................................................... 6-7
application example ...................................................... 5-214
logic ............................................................................ 5-215
settings ........................................................................ 5-210
specifications .................................................................2-21
timing ............................................................... 5-213, 5-214
SELF-TESTS
description ..............................................................2-15, 7-6
error messages ............................................................... 7-8
Modbus registers ............................................................. B-9
SERIAL NUMBER .............................................................6-25
SERIAL PORTS
settings ..........................................................................5-15
SETTING GROUPS ................ 5-106, 5-121, 5-209, B-31, B-32
GE Multilin
INDEX
SETTINGS TEMPLATES
description ............................................................... 4-4, 8-6
editing ...................................................................... 4-4, 8-6
enabling ................................................................... 4-4, 8-6
password protection ................................................. 4-5, 8-7
removing .................................................................. 4-7, 8-9
viewing .................................................................... 4-6, 8-8
SETTINGS, CHANGING ................................................... 4-26
SIGNAL SOURCES
metering ........................................................................ 6-14
settings ......................................................................... 5-62
SIGNAL TYPES ................................................................. 1-3
SINGLE-LINE DIAGRAM .................................................... 2-2
SITE LIST, CREATING ....................................................... 4-1
SNTP PROTOCOL
error messages ............................................................... 7-9
settings ......................................................................... 5-33
SOFTWARE
installation ...................................................................... 1-5
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................ 1-4
SOFTWARE MODULES ................................................... 2-16
SOFTWARE, PC
see entry for EnerVista UR Setup
SOURCE FREQUENCY .................................................... 6-18
SOURCE TRANSFER SCHEMES ................................... 5-196
SOURCES
example use of .............................................................. 5-63
metering ........................................................................ 6-14
settings .................................................................5-61, 5-62
ST TYPE CONNECTORS ................................................. 3-26
STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ............................................ F-7
START-UP ....................................................................... 9-11
STATUS INDICATORS .............................................4-14, 4-16
STORAGE TEMPERATURE ............................................. 2-27
STUB BUS
logic ............................................................................ 5-126
settings ....................................................................... 5-125
SUPERVISING ELEMENTS ............................................ 5-203
SURGE IMMUNITY .......................................................... 2-28
SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS METERING ..................... 6-11
SYNCHROCHECK
actual values .................................................. 6-8, 6-19, 6-20
logic ............................................................................ 5-225
settings ............................................................. 5-222, 5-223
specifications ................................................................ 2-20
SYNCHRONIZATION RELAY ............................................ 9-15
SYNCHROPHASORS
actual values ................................................................. 6-20
clearing PMU records ...................................................... 7-2
commands ...................................................................... 7-3
FlexLogic operands ........................................ 5-104, 5-105
network connection ........................................................ 5-98
phase measurement unit triggering ................................ 5-88
phasor measurement configuration ................................. 5-84
phasor measurement unit ............................................... 5-83
phasor measurement unit calibration .............................. 5-85
phasor measurement unit communications ..................... 5-86
phasor measurement unit recording ............................... 5-95
test values .................................................................. 5-285
SYSTEM FREQUENCY .................................................... 5-60
GE Multilin
SYSTEM SETUP .............................................................. 5-59
T
TARGET MESSAGES ......................................................... 7-6
TARGET SETTING ............................................................. 5-5
TARGETS MENU ............................................................... 7-6
TCP PORT NUMBER ........................................................ 5-32
TEMPERATURE MONITOR ................................... 5-109, 7-10
TERMINALS .............................................................. 3-8, 5-64
TESTING
channel tests ............................................................... 5-285
clock synchronization ..................................................... 11-2
final tests ....................................................................... 11-4
force contact inputs ...................................................... 5-283
force contact outputs .................................................... 5-284
lamp test ......................................................................... 7-3
local-remote relay tests .................................................. 11-4
self-test error messages ...................................................7-6
synchrophasors ........................................................... 5-285
THEORY OF OPERATION .................................................. 9-1
THERMAL DEMAND CHARACTERISTIC ........................... 5-42
TIME .................................................................................. 7-2
TIME OVERCURRENT
see PHASE, NEUTRAL, and GROUND TOC entries
TIMERS ......................................................................... 5-115
TOC
ground ......................................................................... 5-180
neutral ......................................................................... 5-170
phase .......................................................................... 5-163
specifications ................................................................. 2-18
TRACEABILITY
data ..................................................... 4-11, 4-12, 8-13, 8-14
overview ............................................................... 4-10, 8-12
rules ..................................................................... 4-12, 8-14
TRACKING FREQUENCY ........................................ 6-19, B-41
TRANSDUCER I/O
actual values ................................................................. 6-21
settings ............................................................ 5-276, 5-277
specifications ................................................................. 2-23
wiring ............................................................................ 3-22
TRIP BUS
settings ....................................................................... 5-207
TRIP DECISION EXAMPLE ............................................... 9-18
TRIP LEDs ....................................................................... 5-45
TRIP OUTPUT
logic ............................................................................ 5-220
settings ....................................................................... 5-216
specifications ................................................................. 2-20
TROUBLE INDICATOR .............................................. 1-17, 7-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
breaker not working ..................................................... 5-226
setting not working ....................................................... 5-226
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................ 3-10
U
UL APPROVAL ................................................................. 2-29
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
commands ..................................................................... 5-14
resetting .......................................................................... 7-2
ix
INDEX
UNDERVOLTAGE
auxiliary ........................................................................ 2-19
phase ................................................................. 2-19, 5-197
UNDERVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS .......................... 5-196
UNEXPECTED RESTART ERROR .................................... 7-10
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED ........................................ 5-57, 7-7
UNPACKING THE RELAY ................................................... 1-1
UPDATING ORDER CODE ................................................. 7-3
URPC
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
example ........................................................................ 5-57
invoking and scrolling .................................................... 5-55
settings ................................................................ 5-55, 5-57
specifications ................................................................. 2-21
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
custom labeling ............................................................. 4-22
defaults ......................................................................... 4-16
description............................................................ 4-15, 4-16
settings ......................................................................... 5-45
specifications ................................................................. 2-21
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
settings ......................................................................... 5-49
specifications ................................................................. 2-21
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
settings ......................................................................... 5-46
USERST-1 BIT PAIR ...................................................... 5-271
V
VAR-HOURS ........................................................... 2-22, 6-17
VIBRATION TESTING ...................................................... 2-28
VIRTUAL INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
commands ....................................................................... 7-1
logic ............................................................................ 5-264
Modbus registers ................................................... B-9, B-53
settings ....................................................................... 5-264
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
settings ........................................................................ 5-267
VOLTAGE BANKS ............................................................5-60
VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS ...................................................2-28
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................... 5-196
VOLTAGE METERING
specifications .................................................................2-22
values ............................................................................6-15
VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC ..................... 5-163
VT FUSE FAILURE
logic ............................................................................ 5-242
settings ........................................................................ 5-242
VT INPUTS ....................................................... 3-13, 5-6, 5-60
VT WIRING ......................................................................3-13
VTFF
see VT FUSE FAILURE
W
WARNINGS ....................................................................... 1-1
WARRANTY ...................................................................... F-9
WATT-HOURS ......................................................... 2-22, 6-17
WATTMETRIC ZERO-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL
actual values ..................................................................6-20
settings ........................................................................ 5-177
specifications .................................................................2-19
WEB SERVER PROTOCOL ...............................................5-32
WEBSITE .......................................................................... 1-1
WIRING DIAGRAM ...........................................................3-10
Z
ZERO SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE .................................3-13
ZERO-SEQUENCE CURRENT REMOVAL .........................5-66
GE Multilin

GE Multilin L90

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Multilin L90

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Multilin L90

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Title Page

L90 Line Current Differential System

650 Markland Street

GE Multilin's Quality Management

Copyright 2015 GE Multilin Inc. All rights reserved.

RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP)

RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)

RS485 and redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)

RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX

RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX

RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX

RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX

RS485 and 10/100Base-T

RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX

RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX

RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch

Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics

Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics

from autoreclose logic sheet 3

Blk Time Upon Man Cls

BKR MANUAL CLOSE

1-P Dead Time 1

3-P Dead Time 1

from autoreclose logic sheet 2

3-P Dead Time 2

BKR ONE POLE OPEN

from autoreclose logic sheet 3

BKR 3 POLE OPEN

3-P Dead Time 4

from autoreclose logic sheet 2

BKR FAIL TO RECLS

SHOT COUNT = MAX

Inc Seq Time

from autoreclose logic sheet 3

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1

INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-2

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5

MOUNTING AND WIRING............................................................................... 1-16

1.5 USING THE RELAY

FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-17

2.2 PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING

INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-11

PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS ................................................ 2-14

PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................. 2-17

L90 Line Current Differential System

PANEL CUTOUT ................................................................................................3-1

TYPICAL WIRING ............................................................................................3-10

3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS

3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

SETTINGS TEMPLATES ...................................................................................4-4

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1

L90 Line Current Differential System

SECURITY ......................................................................................................... 5-8

5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES

REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION ................................................... 5-58